Catalogo 2015

Catalog
SeCtionS
Valves, Actuators
An Company and Accessories
Calibration
Equipment
Bulk Instrumentation
2015
and Accessories
Pressure and
Temperature
Measurement
Energy Optimization
ProduCt Catalog Specialty Equipment
Flow
Filters and Regulators
Level
Safety and
Environmental
Controllers and
Recorders
For sales and technical support, call Analytical

Instrumentation
(800) 688-8126
www.rawsonlp.com Online Version
An Company
Dear Valued Customer,
I am pleased to introduce the first Rawson catalog. Inside you’ll find a broad selection of products in diverse areas
such as Industrial Instrumentation, Process Controls, Energy Optimization, and Industrial Valves from the industry’s
leading and most respected manufacturers. We organized our catalog to make it easy to find the products you need.
There are 12 color-coded sections that group products by common categories. Each of these sections are packed with
comprehensive descriptions, features, sizing and selection charts, as well as pictures to help identify the right product.
We recognize that we need to earn your business every day and that customer satisfaction is everything. Give us a
chance to prove that we can make a difference for you. We thank you for the opportunity to serve you.
Best Regards,
Tom Comstock
President/CEO
Your One Stop Supplier
1892 1941 1998 2010

Econosto ERIKS ERIKS acquires ERIKS acquires
founded founded Econosto Rawson
1954 2009 2012

1896 SHV acquires Rawson acquires
Rawson
SHV formed Regal Brown
founded ERIKS
Added Value Industries Rawson Serves
Training, Customer Education &

Installation Assistance
Oil & Gas Power Generation

Full Service Shops
Valve Maintenance & Repair
Logistic Solutions
Bag & Tag Program
Semiconductor Pharmaceutical Pulp & Paper

Performance & Inventory Audits
17 Stocking & Distribution Locations
Technical Assistance & Guidance

Water & Wastewater Food & Beverage OEM
Processing
Online Version
Valves, Actuators
5
60 Years of Service and Accessories
Rawson, Inc., founded 1954
in Houston, TX, has grown to
be the premier instrumentation, Calibration
207
valve, and controls distributor Equipment
in the Gulf Coast of the
United States. Rawson has
branches throughout Texas, Bulk Instrumentation
293
Louisiana, Oklahoma and and Accessories
Mexico and recently expanded
its geographic coverage to Pressure and
include the Southeastern United States by virtue of its acquisition of Temperature 445
Regal-Brown Incorporated, a well respected supplier of industrial Measurement
controls and filtration products.
Premier Products Energy Optimization 569

Rawson’s strength comes from the diversity of products it has come to
represent over the years. Primary to its growth has been its ability to
attract highly regarded and top rated manufacturers into its product
portfolio, thereby establishing Rawson as the “one stop source” for Specialty Equipment 601
instrumentation and valve related products. Customers throughout the
territory recognize that Rawson is a valuable partner in their quest to
get maximum value from their supplier network.
Flow 653
Outstanding Service Capabilities

With 17 stocking locations in Texas, Louisiana, Oklahoma, and
Mexico, Rawson believes in putting inventory and technical support
Filters and Regulators 713
close to our customer base. Every Rawson location has a highly
trained sales staff ready to answer questions and provide technical
support to customers located in their region. The inventory maintained
Level 737
at each Rawson location is specific to the needs of the customers
served by the branch, which further enhances Rawson’s dedication to
outstanding customer service.
Safety and
779
Environmental
Controllers and
807
Recorders
Analytical
845
Instrumentation
Valve Expertise
Over the years Rawson has built strong relationships with many of the flow control
suppliers in our area. This allows us to marry products we represent with those that we
don’t and as a result provide you with a complete package that meets your requirements.
Whatever your automation requirements are, Rawson, Inc. is ready to help.
Main Index
Valves, Actuators And Accessories

Valves
Ball Valves
C&C Industries...................................................................................................................... 7
Econ.................................................................................................................................... 10
Jamesbury........................................................................................................................... 28
KF Valve.............................................................................................................................. 39
Neles................................................................................................................................... 41
PBM..................................................................................................................................... 49
Skycera................................................................................................................................ 54
Butterfly Valves
Bray..................................................................................................................................... 56
C&C Industries.................................................................................................................... 59
Jamesbury........................................................................................................................... 60
KF Valve.............................................................................................................................. 63
Neles................................................................................................................................... 64
Skycera................................................................................................................................ 70
Check Valves
C&C Industries.................................................................................................................... 71
Smith Valve.......................................................................................................................... 72
Control Valves
Cashco................................................................................................................................ 73
Cyclonic Valve..................................................................................................................... 75
Dyna-Flo.............................................................................................................................. 76
M & J Valves........................................................................................................................ 78
Mallard................................................................................................................................. 80
Neles................................................................................................................................... 89
Robertshaw......................................................................................................................... 94
SPX Copes-Vulcan.............................................................................................................. 96
Gate Valves
ITT....................................................................................................................................... 99
Orbinox.............................................................................................................................. 105
Skycera...............................................................................................................................113
Smith Valve.........................................................................................................................115
Globe Valves
Smith Valve.........................................................................................................................116
Relief Valves
Hydroseal...........................................................................................................................117
Solenoid Valves
ASCO................................................................................................................................ 125
Specialty Valves
Chromatic Industries......................................................................................................... 137
Specialty Valves................................................................................................................ 138
VCI..................................................................................................................................... 140
VE...................................................................................................................................... 141
Actuators
Pneumatic Actuators
Neles................................................................................................................................. 143
Jamesbury......................................................................................................................... 146
Air Torque.......................................................................................................................... 149
Robertshaw....................................................................................................................... 151
ABB................................................................................................................................... 152
Continued on next page
5
Main Index
Valves, Actuators And Accessories

Mechanical/Manual Actuators
Jamesbury......................................................................................................................... 153
Electric Actuators
Jamesbury......................................................................................................................... 154
ABB................................................................................................................................... 156
Auma................................................................................................................................. 158
Accessories
Positioners
Neles................................................................................................................................. 160
ABB................................................................................................................................... 164
BLX.................................................................................................................................... 174
Position Monitors & Position Transmitters
StoneL............................................................................................................................... 176
Westlock............................................................................................................................ 190
Wireless Valve Monitoring
Eltav................................................................................................................................... 200
Transducers
ABB................................................................................................................................... 203
Marsh Bellofram................................................................................................................ 204
6
Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Ball Valves
C&C Industries
Valves
Section Table of Contents
Ball Valves A
Brass Ball 3000# Oilfield Bolted Body Force BU

Valve Ball Valve Ball Valve Series
Sizes: ¼″ – 4″ 600 PSI Size: 2″ Full or Reduced Port Floating
Sizes: 1″, 2″, 3″, Full Port
NSCWP Full Port Threaded Pressures: 2,000 & 3,000
2″, Reduced Port 3,000 PSI Ball Valve
Ends PSI NSCWP Threaded Ends
NSCWP Threaded Ends
Unibody Design Sizes 2″ –
Locking Handle *available in Available in Standard or
NACE Service 10″ Reduced Port ANSI 150
Standard or NACE Service
– 300 Carbon and Stainless
2-Piece WCB NACE MR-0175 (2009), API
Heavy Duty 6D, API 607
Ball Valve EUE Ball
Brass Ball
Sizes: ¼″ – 2″ 2,000 PSI Valve Force BF
NSCWP Full Port Threaded Valve Sizes: 2-⅜″ and 2-⅞″ Full
Ends Locking Handle NACE Sizes: 1″ – 4″ 600 PSI Port 3,000 PSI NSCWP Series
NSCWP Full Port Threaded 8 Round Threaded Ends
Compliant
Ends Locking Handle
Floating
NACE Compliant
Ball Valve
2-Piece Body Sizes: ½″ – 8″
3-Piece Stainless Barstock Full and Reduced Port
Threaded Ball Steel Ball ANSI 150 – 2500 Carbon or
Ball Valve Stainless NACE MR-0175
Valve Valve 1-piece design Sizes: ¼″ (2009), API 6D, API 607
Sizes: ¼″ – 2″, Full or Seal Welded – 2-pc Design – 2″ 2,000 PSI NSCWP
Reduced Port 3,000 PSI Sizes: ¼″ – 2″ @ 2,000 PSI Reduced Port Threaded
NSCWP Threaded Ends NSCWP – Full Port 2-1/2″ – Ends NACE Compliant
Locking Handle NACE 4″ @ 1,500 PSI NSCWP
Force BTP and
Compliant Full Port Threaded Ends BTN Trunnion Ball
Locking Handle NACE High Valve
Compliant
Pressure
1500# Oilfield Threaded
Grooved Ball Valve
Ball Valve
Ball Valve Sizes: ¼″ – 2″ 6,000 PSI
Sizes: 2″ 1,500 PSI NSCWP
Sizes: 2″, 3″ Reduced Port NSCWP Full Port Locking
Threaded Ends *available in
1,000 PSI NSCWP Grooved Handle NACE Compliant
Standard or NACE Service
Ends Fire safe
ANSI 150 – 2500 Sizes 2″ –
48″ Full and Reduced Port
NACE MR-0175 (2009), API
5000# Oilfield 2000# Oilfield 6D, API 6FA
Tank Valve
Ball Valve Ball Valve
Sizes: 1″, Full Port 2″, Sizes: ¾″, 1″, 1-½″, 2″, 2-½″,
Reduced Port 5,000 PSI 3″, 4″, Full Port 1″, 2″, 4″, Sizes: 2″, 3″, Full Port 2″,
NSCWP Threaded Ends Reduced Port 2,000 PSI 3″, 4″, Reduced Port 2″, 3″,
Locking Handle NACE NSCWP Threaded Ends * 4″, Vented Ball 1,000 PSI
Compliant available in Standard or NSCWP Locking Handle
NACE Service *available in Standard or
NACE Service
RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 7

A Ball Valves
FORCE® Floating Ball Valve
DESCRIPTION
FORCE® Valve quality is guaranteed by the strictest
adherence to the ISO 9000 and API Q1 audited quality
standards. FORCE® Valves are manufactured in strict
accordance with all applicable ANSI, API and other
standards.
FEATURES
FORCE® floating ball valves are designed in accordance
with API 608 or ISO17292(BS5351) for ANSI Class
ratings 150 to 2500, Nominal sizes from ½″ to 12″. Valves
have been designed for use with various combinations
of materials such as: Carbon Steel, Low Carbon Steel, Washers are protected by a weatherproof cap to keep
Special Alloy, Stainless Steel, Monel, Inconel. them free from environmental contamination, resulting in a
long stable life.
• Body Joint Construction: The one piece unibody
end entry design, graphite ring or o-ring, Viton® (upon • Top Works: Stem head design provides mounting of
request) seals ensure absolute seal integrity. The two the lever handle always in parallel to the flow passage.
piece bolted body designs include a tight toleranced Facility for mounting a locking device for prevention of
overlapping metal fit between the body and the adapter accidental valve operation is provided.
to minimize any possibility of movement due to pipeline
stress. A special high temperature spiral wound stainless • Fire Safety: All fire-safe valves conform to API 607
steel/grafoil filled gasket is utilized for absolute seal. and API 6FA standards. FORCE®’s metal to metal backup
Gasket is encapsulated by the body and adapted on all feature will control both interal and external leakage.
four sides. Body and adaptors are dimensioned for metal
contact to ensure correct gasket crush.
• Longevity of Life: Valve designs combined with the
selection of advanced materials are such that long periods
• Blow-Out Proof Stem: Stem is made separately from of inactivity should not affect the operations of effiiciency.
the ball, blow-out proof design with suitable PTFE and
graphite rings and antistatic device. The lower end of the SPECIFICATIONS
stem is designed with an integral collar to be blowout- • Full Bore & Reduced Bore
proof. It also functions as the backseat for assured stem • Floating Ball Design
sealing. • Locking Device
• Blow-Out Proof Stem
• Anti-Static Device: All floating flanged ball valves
• Flexible Cavity Relief Seats
include dual grounding systems from stem to ball and
• Anti-Static Grounding Device
stem to body. Valve testing to ISO17292(BS5351) is
• ISO Mounting Pad
performed for all sizes, and witnessed by a third party
inspection company. An antistatic feature is provided to • Metal to Metal Construction
ensure electrical continuity for assured stem sealing. • Lip Seal or Plate Seal
• NACE Standard
• Live Loaded Gland Flange: Live loading is designed • Fire Safe Design / Non Fire Safe Design
to provide gland load retention, compensating for • Two Radius of Ball Edge for Long Life Cycle
expected in-service consolidation of the packing. A set of • Double “D” Stem
Belleville-Spring Washers is used on each gland follower
flange and therefore reduces fugitive emissions from
the stem packing. FORCE® standard Belleville-Spring
8 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Ball Valves - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8
XXX X X X X X X X
Table 1 Valve Type Table 5 Trim Material

BU 1 PIECE BALL VALVE A CS+ENP
BF 2 PIECE BALL VALVE B 304
BN 3-WAY BALL VALVE (90°) C 316
BY 3-WAY BALL VALVE (120°) D 304L
B6A F6A BALL VALVE E 316L
BFM METAL SEAT BALL VALVE F ALLOY 20
BFC CRYOGENIC BALL VALVE G 410
BP POCKETLESS BALL VALVE Q DUPLEX
BJ STEAM JACKET R MONEL
Table 2 Bore S HASTELLOY
1 FULL T TITANIUM
2 REDUCED X OTHER
Table 3 Pressure Class Table 6 Seat Material
1 CLASS 150 A PTFE
2 CLASS 300 B RTFE (GLASS)
3 CLASS 600 C RTFE (CARBON)
4 CLASS 900 D SUPER TEFLON®
5 CLASS 1500 E PFA
Table 4 Body Material F PEEK
A A216-WCB(A105) G NYLON
B A351-CF8(F304) H METAL
C A351-CF8M(F316) I PCTFE
D A351-CF3(F316L) J DEVLON®
E A351-CF3M(F316L) K GRAPHITE
F A351-CN7M X OTHER
G A217-WC1 Table 7 End Connection
H A217-WC6(F11) 1 RF
J A217-WC9(F22) 2 RTJ
K A352-LCC Table 8 Operator
L A352-LC2 E ELECTRIC ACTUATOR
M A352-LC3 P PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
N A352-LCB(LF2) G GEAR OPERATOR
P A217-C5 B BARE STEM
Q DUPLEX L LEVER
R MONEL®
S HASTELLOY®
T TITANIUM
U INCONEL®
X OTHER

Econ
A
Flanged, Full Port Ball Valves
Series E10
FEATURES
• 2 Piece, Direct Mount Ball Valve
• ASME Class 150/300
• Fire Safe Design Approved
• Sizes ½”- 8”
• Cv Values: 18 – 4200 depending on Ball Valve Size
• Built-in ISO 5211 Mounting Pad for Easy Automation
• Anti-Static Devices for Ball-Stem-Body
• Blow-out Proof Stem
• Pressure Balance Hole in Ball Slot
• TA Luft Design Approved
• Casting Boss on Body for Draining
• Optional Gear operation for sizes 5”- 8”
• Automation Options: 1. Actuator 2. Limit Switch 3. Positioner
SPECIFICATIONS
• Design: ASME B16.34, API 608
• Fire Safe: API 607, ISO 10497
• Face to Face: ASME B16.10
• Wall Thickness: ASME B16.34
• End Flange: ASME B16.5
• Inspection & Testing: API 598, API 6D
Materials of Construction
Body & End Cap A351-CF8M A351-CF8 A216-WCB
Ball A351-CF8M A351-CF8 A351-CF8M
Ball Seat TFM1600/PTFE/RTFE TFM1600/PTFE/RTFE TFM1600/PTFE/RTFE
Body Gasket PTFE/316 SPIRAL WOUND + GRAFOIL* PTFE/316 SPIRAL WOUND + GRAFOIL* PTFE/316 SPIRAL WOUND + GRAFOIL*
Bolting A193 B8M A193 B8M A193 B7M
Stem & Anti-Static Device 316SS 304SS 304SS
Thrust Washer PTFE PTFE PTFE
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Packing PTFE/GRAFOIL* PTFE/GRAFOIL* PTFE/GRAFOIL*
Bushing 50%SS + 50%PTFE/304SS* 50%SS + 50%PTFE/304SS* 50%SS + 50%PTFE/304SS*
Gland 316SS 316SS 316SS
Bellville Washer 301SS 301SS 301SS
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Stop Lock Cap 304SS 304SS 304SS
*Materials for Fire Safe Models

Flanged, Full Port Ball Valves A

Series E12, Class 150/300
FEATURES
• 2 Piece, Bracket Mount Ball Valves
• ASME Class 150/300
• Sizes ½”- 4”
• Other Alloys are available
• Casting per NACE MR0175 for Sour Gas Service
Option
• Optional Casting Approved by TÜV AD 2000 -
Merkblatt W0/EN10204 3.2 Form
SPECIFICATIONS
• Quality Assurance: ISO 9001, QS9000, AD 2000 - Merkblatt W0, PED 97/23/EC, CE0036 & API 6D
Body & End Cap A351-CF8M A351-CF8 A216-WCB
Ball A351-CF8M A351-CF8 A351-CF8M
Bolt Nut A194 8M A194 8M A194 2HM
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8

A
Flanged, Full Port Ball Valves
Series E12, Class 600
FEATURES
• 2 Piece, Bracket Mount Ball Valves
• ASME Class 600
• Sizes ½”- 4”
SPECIFICATIONS
Body & End Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Ball Seat TFM4215 TFM4215 TFM4215
Bolting A193 B8M/A193 B7M A193 B8M/A193 B7M A193 B8M/A193 B7M
Bolt Nut A194 8M/A194 2HM A194 8M/A194 2HM A194 8M/A194 2HM
Yoke 304SS 304SS 304SS
Stem Jacket PTFE PTFE PTFE
Packing Washer 316SS 316SS 316SS

Flanged, Reduced Port Ball Valves A

Series E15
FEATURES
• 1 Piece, Bracket Mount Flanged Ball Valves
• ASME Class 150
• Sizes ½”- 6”
SPECIFICATIONS
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Thrust Washer TFM1600/PTFE/RTFE TFM1600/PTFE/RTFE TFM1600/PTFE/RTFE
Gland 316LSS 316LSS 316LSS

A
2 Piece Full Port NPT Ball Valves
Series E30, 1500-2000WOG
FEATURES
• High Performance, Direct Mount Ball Valves
• Threaded Ends
• Sizes ¼”- 3”
• Built-in ISO 5211 Direct Mounting Pad and Square
Stem for Easy Automation
• Anti-Static Devices for Ball-stem-body
• Pre-load Belleville Washers to Self-adjust Packing
• Automation Options: 1. Actuator 2. Limit Switch 3.
Positioner
SPECIFICATIONS
• Design: ASME B16.34, MSS SP-110
• 2000 WOG for ¼”- 1”
• 1500 WOG for 1 ¼”-3”
• Pipe Thread: ASME B1.20.1
• Inspection & Testing: MSS SP-110, EN 12266
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Ball Seat TFM4215/TFM 1600 + 15% Carbon TFM4215/TFM 1600 + 15% Carbon TFM4215/TFM 1600 + 15% Carbon
Body Gasket PTFE/GRAFOIL* PTFE/GRAFOIL* PTFE/GRAFOIL*
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Hex Bolting A193-B8 A193-B8 A193-B8

2 Piece Full Port NPT Ball Valves A

Series E30, 1000WOG
FEATURES
• High Performance, Direct Mount 1000WOG Ball Valves
• Threaded Ends
• Sizes ¼”- 3”
• Built-in ISO 5211 Direct Mounting Pad and Square Stem for Easy
Automation
SPECIFICATIONS
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Body Gasket PTFE PTFE PTFE
Stem & Anti-Static Device 316SS/304SS 316SS/304SS 316SS/304SS
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Packing PTFE PTFE PTFE
Bushing 50%SS + 50%PTFE 50%SS + 50%PTFE 50%SS + 50%PTFE
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8

A
2 Piece Full Port NPT Ball Valves
Series E52
FEATURES
• Economical, 1000WOG Ball Valves
• Sizes ¼”- 3”
• Full Port
• Various Thread Standards Available
• Casting Approved by TÜV AD 2000 - Merkblatt W0
SPECIFICATIONS
Body & Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Ball Seat PTFE PTFE PTFE
Stem 316SS 304SS 304SS
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Stem Washer 304SS 304SS 304SS
V-Ring Packing PTFE PTFE PTFE
Gland Nut 304SS 304SS 304SS

3 Piece Full Port Ball Valves A

Series E20
FEATURES
• High Performance, Direct Mount Ball Valve
• 2000-1500WOG Pressure Class
• Unexposed Bolting Design
• Threaded, Socket Weld & Butt Weld Ends
• Sizes ¼”- 2”
• Pre-Load 2 Belleville Washers to Self-adjust Packing
SPECIFICATIONS
• 2000 WOG for ¼”- 1”
• 1500 WOG for 1 ¼”- 2”
• Wall Thickness: ASME B16.34 Class 800
• Butt Weld: ASME B16.25 (ø B2 Sch 80)
• Socket Weld ASME B16.11
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Cap (Threaded) CF8M CF8 WCB
Cap (Welded) CF3M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Body Gasket PTFE/GRAFOIL* PTFE/GRAFOIL* PTFE/GRAFOIL*
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Packing GRAFOIL* GRAFOIL* GRAFOIL*

A
3 Piece Full Port Ball Valves
Series E22
FEATURES
• High Performance, Bracket Mount Ball Valve
• 2000-1500WOG Pressure Class
• Threaded, Socket Weld & Butt Weld Ends
• Sizes ¼”- 2”
• Unexposed Bolting Design
• Pre-load 2 Belleville Washers to Self-adjust Packing
SPECIFICATIONS
• 2000 WOG for ¼”- 1”
• 1500 WOG for 1 ¼”- 2”
• Butt Weld: ASME B16.25 (ø B2 Sch 80)
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Packing GRAFOIL* GRAFOIL* GRAFOIL*
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Bolt Washer 304SS 304SS 304SS


Series E40
FEATURES
• Flanged, Threaded, Socket Weld and Butt Weld Ends
• Exposed Bolting Design
• Sizes ¼”- 4”
• Built-in ISO 5211 Direct Mounting Pad and Square Stem for Easy
Automation
SPECIFICATIONS
• Butt Weld: ASME B16.25 (øB2 Sch 40) øB2
• Available in Sch 10,20
• Flanged End: ASME B16.5, Class 150/300
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Stem & Anti-Static Device 316SS/304SS 316SS/304SS 316SS/304SS
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8

A
3 Piece Full Port Ball Valves
Series E42
FEATURES
• High Performance, Bracket Mount 1000WOG Ball Valves
• Flanged, Threaded, Socket Weld and Butt Weld Ends
• Sizes ¼”- 3”
• Built-in ISO 5211 Direct Mounting Pad and Square Stem for
Easy Automation
SPECIFICATIONS
• Wall Thickness: EN 12616-3
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8


Series E50
FEATURES
• Threaded, Socket Weld and Butt Weld Ends
• Sizes ¼”- 3”
• Locking Device is Available Upon Request
SPECIFICATIONS
• Butt Weld: ASME B16.25 (øB2 Sch 40) øB2 Available in Sch 10,20
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Bolt A193 B8M A193 B8M A193 B7M
V-Ring Packing PTFE PTFE PTFE

A
1 Piece Reduced Port NPT Ball Valves
Series E55
FEATURES
• Sizes ¼”- 2”
• Double Reduced Port
• Locking Device is Available Upon Request
SPECIFICATIONS
Body & Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
End Plug CF8M CF8 WCB

3 Way Flanged Full Port Ball Valves A

Series E60
FEATURES
• Direct Mount, ASME Class 150/300 Ball Valves
• Sizes ½”- 4”
• Positive Position Location at 90° Increments
• E60-LR: L-Port, E60-TR: T-Port
SPECIFICATIONS
• Flanged Ends: ASME B16.5
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
End Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Bottom Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Gland 316SS/304SS 316SS/304SS 316SS/304SS
Belleville Washer 301SS 301SS 301SS
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Hex Bolting A193 B8M A193 B8M A193 B7M

A
4 Way Full Port Flanged Ball Valves
Series E62
FEATURES
• Direct Mount, ASME Class 150/300 Ball Valves
• Sizes ½”- 4”
• E62-XR: LL-Port
• Automation Options: 1. Actuator 2. Limit Switch 3.
Positioner
SPECIFICATIONS
• Flanged Ends: ASME B16.34
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Bottom Cap CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Hex Bolting A193 B8M A193 B8M A193 B7M

3 Way Full Port NPT Ball Valves A

Series E70
FEATURES
• Investment Castings for Body and End Caps
• Sizes ½”- 1 ½”
• Locking in Every 90° Increments
• 1WE70-LO: L-Port, 1WE70-TO: T-Port
SPECIFICATIONS
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Hex Bolting A193 B8 A193 B8 A193 B8

A
3 Way Reduced Port NPT Ball Valves
Series E73
FEATURES
• Sizes ¼”- 2”
• Investment Castings for Body and End Caps
• Locking in Every 90° Increments
• 1WE73-LO: L-Port, 1WE73-TO: T-Port
SPECIFICATIONS
Body CF8M CF8 WCB
Ball CF8M CF8 CF8M
O-Ring FKM FKM FKM
Stem Nut A194-8 A194-8 A194-8
Hex Bolting A193 B8 A193 B8 A193 B8

Stem Extension A
FEATURES
• 4” Extension
• Suited for Manual or Automated Valves
• 316 SS Material
• Live Loaded Packing Arrangement
• Bolts Directly to ISO 5211 Mounting Pad
• Optional Leak Sensing Port
• Allows Direct Actuator Mounting

Jamesbury
A Standard Bore and Full Bore Ball Valve

4000 Series
DESCRIPTION
The Jamesbury® Series 4000 ball valves offer the three most desirable attributes
of high quality valves: exceptional performance, great versatility, and economical
cost. This valve line includes both standard bore valves (to 2-½") and full bore
valves (to 2") with three available end connections: threaded end, socket weld,
and butt weld.
FEATURES
• Xtreme® seat provides longer life, expanded performance boundaries, and
greater value.
• Polymeric flexible lip seat design offers tight shut off in either direction and
extended cycle life with minimum maintenance.
• Available to meet ANSI Class 600 standards per B16.34, B31.1, B31.3, and
B31.4.
• 3 piece construction facilitates servicing
• Fire-Tite® version with non-metallic seats meets API 607 Edition 5, and
BS6755-Part 2 requirements
• NACE MR0103 compliance available
• New patented stem seal system is live loaded and engineered to assure long
sealing life.
• ISO 5211 bonnet for global conformity.
• CE marking option.
• For most seat materials, weld end valves do not require disassembly before
welding in line.

Standard Bore and Full Bore Ball Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9
XX XX X XXXX XX XX XX X X
Table 1 Size (inches) Table 6 Ball and Stem Material

Standard Port (½, ¾, 1, 1-¼, 1-½, 2, 2-½) 00 Same as body (Carbon Steel not available)
Full Port (½, ¾, 1, 1-¼, 1-½, 2) 36 316 Stainless Steel
Table 2 Body Style HB 316 Stainless Steel ball, 17-4 PH stem (required for RT & LG
seats & seals)
4A Standard port NPT
71 Monel®
4B Full port NPT
73 Hastelloy C (non NACE MR0103 valves)
4C Standard Port socket weld
Table 7 Seat Material Seal Material
4D Full port socket weld
Standard Fire-Tite® Options
4F Standard port butt weld Schedule-5
XT Xtreme® TFM & Graphite
4G Standard port butt weld Schedule-10
TT PTFE PTFE & Graphite
4H Standard port butt weld Schedule-40
DH 17-4 PH Stainless Steel Graphite
4J Full port butt weld Schedule-5
UU UHMW Polyethylene* UHMW PE & Graphite
4K Full port butt weld Schedule-10
RT²,4 Delrin* PTFE & Graphite
4L Full port butt weld Schedule-40
BT PFA PTFE & Graphite
4M Standard port NPT x soc. weld ends
Non Fire-Tite® Options
4N Full port NPT x soc. weld ends
TT PTFE PTFE
4P Full port butt weld Schedule 80
UB UHMW Polyethylene UHMW Polyethylene & EPT
4Q Standard port butt weld Schedule 80
LG²,4 Peek* Peek & Graphite
Table 3 Configuration
LT²,4 Peek** PTFE & Graphite
– (no entry if Fire-Tite®)
X Non Fire-Tite® Table 8 Valve Model
B ANSI B16.34, B31.1, B31.3, and 31.4 B Series 4000, Model B
M³* ANSI B16.34 & BS5351 Class 600 with metric nameplate Table 9 Bolts or Tie Rods Nuts
Table 4 Special Service 1 ASTM A193 Grade B7 ASTM A194 Grade 2H
– (no entry if standard) 2 ASTM A193 Grade B8 ASTM A194 Grade 8, 8C, 8F,
or B8M2 8M,8MN, 8N, 8P, or 8T
N NACE MR0103 w/exposed body fasteners
5¹ ASTM A193 Grade B7M ASTM A194 Grade 2HM
O Oxygen (specify w/ANSI configuration B)
7¹ ASTM A320 Grade L7M ASTM A194 Grade 7M
Q Cavity Filler (Xtreme w/ XT, PTFE w/ TT)
8¹ ASTM A453 Grade 660 ASTM A453 Grade 660
V High Vacuum (Specify w/ANSI configuration B)
VC High Vacuum certified (Specify w/ANSI configuration B) * For ½" – 2" (DN 15 – 50) standard port and ½" – 1-½" (DN 15 – 40) full bore
valves
C Chlorine (Specify w/ANSI configuration B) ** For 2" (DN 50) full bore and 2-½" (DN 65) standard port only.
TG Top Ground ¹ Exposed bolting options for NACE MR0103 service.
² Requires high strength stem.
STGR Top and Bottom Ground ³ Valves larger than 1" (DN 25) are CE marked.
4
LA Standard Emission Pak w/o Leakoff Connection Not a self-relieving seat design.
LL Standard Emission Pak with Leakoff Connection

Table 5 Body Material
22 Carbon Steel
36 316 Stainless Steel

A Flanged Standard Bore Ball Valve

7000 Series
DESCRIPTION
The Jamesbury® polymeric-seated flanged ball valves offer a patented flexible
lip seat design that provides positive bi directional shut off for a variety of
applications in industries ranging from chemical and petrochemical to refining,
pulp and paper, and power.
Polymeric-seated flanged ball valves are available in sizes ½" – 20" in standard
bore designs that fully conform to ASME B16.34 requirements.
FEATURES
• Xtreme seat provides longer life, industry leading expanded performance
boundaries,and greater value.
• Polymeric flexible lip seat design offers tight shut off in either direction and
• Patented stem seal system is live loaded and engineered to assure long
sealing life.
• Fire-Tite® version with non-metallic seats meets API 607, and BS6755-Part 2
requirements.
• Superior control characteristics, coupled with tight shut off capabilities, make
these valves ideal for a variety of on/off and control applications.
• API 608 compliance available to serve refineries and related chemical and
petrochemical industries. Consult Rawson for materials of construction.
• NACE MR0103 compliance available.
• ISO 5211 bonnet for global conformity
VALVE BODY RATINGS

Maximum Working Pressure, psi
Class 150 Class 300
Temp °F Carbon 316 Stainless Carbon 316 Stainless
Alloy 20* Monel®
Steel* Steel* Steel* Steel*
-20 to 100 285 275 230 230 740 720
200 260 235 200 200 675 620
300 230 215 190 190 655 560
400 200 195 190 185 635 515
500 170 170 170 170 600 480
Test Pressure 450 425 350 350 1125 1100
* In accordance with ASME B16.34

Flanged Standard Bore Ball Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER

XX XXXX XXX XX XX XX XXX X
Table 1 Size (inches) Table 6 Ball & Stem Materials* Size Range
½",¾",1",1-½",2",3",4",6",8",10",12",14",16",18",20" ½" - 20" 35 Alloy 20 ½ "– 10" Standard Bore,
Table 2 Valve Series & Style Size Range 36 316 Stainless Steel All
7150 Standard Bore Class 150 ½" – 20" 71 Monel ½ "– 8" Standard Bore, optional in
all others
7300** Standard Bore Class 300 ½ "– 20"
73 Hastelloy Optional in all sizes
** 18" Only available as 7300.
***The special short pattern for the 730S uses class 150 face to face HB 316 SS, 17-4 PH Req’d for seat & seal code LGG
00 Same as body All (Carbon Steel not available)
Table 3 Special Construction
* Other materials available on application
— Standard (no entry)
C Chlorine Seat / Body Seal / Stem
Table 7 Size Range
Seal Material
N NACE MR0103
XTZ Xtreme®/PTFE²/TFM All
O Oxygen
TTT PTFE/PTFE²/PTFE² All
TG Top Grounded (½" – 2" 7000)
BTT PFA/PTFE²/PTFE² ½" – 8" Std Bore
STG Grounded 7000 Series
LGG†¹³ PEEK/Graphite/Graphite ½" – 6" Std Bore
V High Vacuum
UUU¹ UHMW/UHMW/UHMW ½ "– 10" Std Bore
VC High Vacuum Certified
MBT¹ Barrier-filled PTFE 4 "– 12" Std Bore
DT 125 RMS Flange Finish
ZTT TFM/PTFE²/PTFE² ½" – 10" Std Bore
DBB Double Block and Bleed (See Bulletin B151-1)
Table 4 End Connection Construction Size Range
† Requires 17-4PH Stem
11 Raised Face Non Fire-Tite® ½" – 10" Standard Bore ¹ Non-Fire-Tite only
Non Trunnion ² TFM on sizes 1-1/2" (DN 40) and smaller
³ Not a self relieving seat design
31 Raised Face Fire-Tite Non® ½" – 10" Standard Bore
Trunnion
Table 8 Bolts Nuts Application
71 Raised Face Fire-Tite® Trunnion 10 – 20" Class 150 Standard
1* ASTM A193 Grade ASTM A194 Grade Carbon Steel Monel
Bore, 8 – 20" Class 300
B7 2H
Standard Bore
2 ASTM A193 Grade ASTM A194 Grade 316 Stainless Steel
Table 5 Body Material* Size Range
B8, B8C, B8M or 8B, 8CB, 8MB, Alloy 20
22 Carbon Steel (WCB) All B8T (Class 2) 8TB, or 8FB
35 Alloy 20 (CN7M) ½" – 10" Standard Bore 5**⁴ ASTM A193 Grade ASTM A194 Gr All NACE
Class 150 B7M 2HM
36 Stainless Steel (CF8M) All 4** Monel Monel All NACE All Cl₂
Clean
71 Monel Optional in all sizes
Bolts and nuts for 2" and smaller valves apply to bonnet hardware only.
28 Carbon Steel (LCC) Optional in all sizes
For 3" and larger, bolts and nuts pertain to bonnet hardware and body and cap
* Other materials available on application fasteners.
* Not available on 2" Standard Bore and smaller
** Required for compliance to NACE MR0103 3" and larger.
⁴ 2" (DN 50) and smaller use Monel bonnet hardware for NACE MR0103
compatibility.

A Flanged Full Bore Ball Valve

9000 Series
DESCRIPTION
The Jamesbury® polymeric-seated flanged ball valves offer a patented flexible lip
seat design that provides positive bi directional shut off for a variety of applications in
industries ranging from chemical and petrochemical to refining, pulp and paper, and
power.
Polymeric-seated flanged ball valves are available in sizes ½" – 24" in both full-bore
and standard-bore designs that fully conform to ASME B16.34 requirements.
FEATURES
• Xtreme® seat provides longer life, expanded perform ance boundaries, and greater value.
• Polymeric flexible lip seat design offers tight shut off in either direction and extended cycle
life with minimum maintenance.
• Fire-Tite version with non metallic seats meets API 607, and BS6755-Part 2 requirements.
• Superior control characteristics, coupled with tight shut off capabilities, make these valves
ideal for a variety of on/off and control applications.
• API 608 compliance available to serve refineries and related chemical and petrochemical
industries.
• NACE MR0103 compliance available.
• Available to meet over 30 standard and optional industry standards and specifications.
• New patented stem seal system is live loaded and engineered to assure long sealing life.
• ISO 5211 bonnet for global conformity
VALVE BODY RATINGS

Maximum Working Pressure, psi
Class 150 Class 300
Temp °F Carbon 316 Stainless Carbon 316 Stainless
Alloy 20* Monel®
Steel* Steel* Steel* Steel*
-20 to 100 285 275 230 230 740 720
200 260 235 200 200 675 620
300 230 215 190 190 655 560
400 200 195 190 185 635 515
500 170 170 170 170 600 480
Test Pressure 450 425 350 350 1125 1100
* In accordance with ASME B16.34

Flanged Full Bore Ball Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
XX XXXX XXX XX XX XX XXX X
Table 1 Size (inches) Table 6 Ball & Stem Materials* Size Range
½",¾",1",1-½",2",3",4",6",8",10",12",14",16",18",20",24" ½" - 24" 35 Alloy 20 ¾" – 8" Full Bore
Table 2 Valve Series & Style Size Range 36 316 Stainless Steel All
9150 Full Bore Class 150 ½" – 24" 71 Monel Optional
9300 Full Bore Class 300 ½" – 24" 73 Hastelloy Optional in all sizes
930L Full Bore Class 300 B16.10 8" HB 316 SS, 17-4 PH Required for seat & seal code LGG
long F-F
00 Same as body All (Carbon Steel not available)
* Metric units on nameplate. Valves larger than 1" (DN 25) are CE marked.
Includes static grounding. * Other materials available on application
Table 3 Special Construction Seat / Body Seal / Stem

Table 7 Size Range
Seal Material
— Standard (no entry)
XTZ Xtreme®/PTFE²/TFM All
C Chlorine
TTT PTFE/PTFE²/PTFE² All
N NACE MR0103
BTT PFA/PTFE²/PTFE² ½" – 6" Full Bore
O Oxygen
LGG†¹³ PEEK/Graphite/Graphite ½ "– 4" Full Bore
DT 125 RMS Flange Finish
UUU¹ UHMW/UHMW/UHMW ½"'– 8" Full Bore
Q PTFE Cavity Filler
MBT¹ Barrier-filled PTFE 3"– 10" Full Bore
STG Grounded 9000 Series
ZTT TFM/PTFE²/PTFE² ½" – 10" Full Bore
V High Vacuum
† Requires 17-4PH Stem
¹ Non- Fire-Tite only
DBB Double Block and Bleed (See Bulletin B151-1) ² TFM on sizes 1-½" (DN 40) and smaller
³ Not a self relieving seat design
Table 4 End Connection Construction Size Range
Table 8 Bolts Nuts Application
11 Raised Face Non Fire-Tite® ½ "– 8" Full Bore
Non-Trunnion 1* ASTM A193 ASTM A194 Carbon Steel Monel
Grade B7 Grade 2H
31 Raised Face Fire-Tite® Non- ½" – 8" Full Bore
Trunnion 2 ASTM A193 ASTM A194 316 Stainless Steel
Grade B8, B8C, Grade 8B, 8CB, Alloy 20
71 Raised Face Fire-Tite® Trunnion 8 – 24" Class 150 Full Bore,
B8M or B8T 8MB, 8TB, or 8FB
6 – 24" Class 300 Full Bore
(Class 2)
Table 5 Body Material* Size Range
5**⁴ ASTM A193 ASTM A194 NACE
22 Carbon Steel (WCB) All Grade B7M Grade 2HM
35 Alloy 20 (CN7M) Optional in all sizes 4** Monel Monel NACE All Cl₂ Clean
36 Stainless Steel (CF8M) All Bolts and nuts for 1"-½" (DN40) and smaller valves apply to bonnet hardware only.
For 2" (DN50) and larger bolts and nuts pertain to bonnet hardware and body and
71 Monel Optional in all sizes
cap fasteners.
* Other materials available on application * Stainless bolting standard for 1"-½" and smaller
** Required for compliance to NACE MR0103 2" and larger.
⁴ 1-½" (DN 40) and smaller use Monel bonnet hardware for NACE MR0103
compatibility

A Threaded End Standard Bore Ball Valve

A Style Model D
DESCRIPTION
The A-Style ball valve brings you the performance and design features
you've been looking for – all in a single, low-cost valve.
This ball valve's unique design offers fire-test specifications, rugged

actuator mounting and flexible lip seats for application versatility that
surpasses other ball valves.
FEATURES
• Patented Xtreme® seat provides longer life, expanded performance
boundaries and greater value.
• Flexible lip seat design offers tight shut off in either direction and
• Fire-Tite® valves meet API 607 requirements.
• Patented stem seal system is live loaded and engineered to assure long sealing life.
• ISO 5211 Bonnet for global conformity.
VALVE BODY RATINGS VALVE SEAT RATINGS

These are maximum working pressure ratings of the These ratings are based on differential pressure with
valve body only. Valves in Carbon Steel are suitable for valve in the fully closed position and refer to seats
service to -20°F (-29°C), valves in 316 Stainless Steel only. Refer to valve body ratings to be sure that all
to -60°F (51°C) (to -40°F with Delrin® seats). The seat components are satisfactory for the application.
ratings determine the practical pressure limitation in
actual working pressure. Ratings are at -20°F to 100°F
(-29°C to 38°C).
Carbon Steel
Valve Size Stainless Steel Working
Working Pressure Rating
(inches) Pressure Rating (psi)
(psi)
¼” – 2” 2000 2000

Threaded End Standard Bore Ball Valve - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER
XX X X XXXX XX XX XX X
Table 1 Valve Size (Inches) Table 6 Ball & Stem Material

¼" ¼" 00 Same as Body (Carbon Steel not available)
⅜" ⅜" 36 316 Stainless Steel (CF8M)
½" ½" HB 316 SS Ball, 17-4PH Stem
¾" ¾" 71 Monel®
1" 1" Table 7 Seat Material Seal Stem & Body Material
1-¼" 1-¼" ®
Standard Fire-Tite Options
1-½" 1-½" TT PTFE PTFE & Graphite & TFM
2" 2" XT Xtreme® TFM & Graphite & TFM
Table 2 Body Style Non Fire-Tite® Only
A ¼ – 2" RT** Delrin PTFE & TFM
Table 3 Conformance Table 8 Model Code
- Non Fire-Tite® D A-Style Model D (Not Required for Ordering)
Z Fire-Tite® to API 607
** Exclusively for Standard Construction.17-4 PH stem required.
Table 4 Special Application/Construction or Service Not a self-relieving seat design.
- Standard
O Oxygen
C Chlorine
V High Vacuum
TG Top Ground
STGR Top & Bottom Ground
W Seal Welded
22 Carbon Steel (WCB)
36 316 Stainless Steel (CF8M)


ELIMINATOR™
DESCRIPTION
The Eliminator ball valve brings you the performance and design features you've
been looking for – all in a single, low cost valve.This ball valve's unique design
meets fire test specifications.Flexible lip seats and rugged actuator mounting
provide application versatility that surpasses other low cost ball valves.
FEATURES
• 2 versions available, 2000 CWP and ANSI Class 600
• Reliable bi-directional shut off
• Patented Xtreme® seat provides longer life, expanded performance boundaries
and greater value.
• Flexible lip seat design offers tight shut off in either direction and extended cycle
life with minimum maintenance.
• Fire-Tite® valves meet API 607, Edition 5 requirements.
• patented stem seal system is live loaded and engineered to assure long sealing
life.
• ISO 5211 Bonnet for global conformity.
• ANSI Class valves meet API 598 requirements.
• Available to meet ANSI Class 600 standards per B16.34, B31.1, B31.3, B31.4
and API 608.
• CE Marking option.
VALVE BODY RATINGS
Valve Size Carbon Steel Carbon Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
inches ANSI Rated CWP Rated ANSI Rated CWP Rated
¼” – 2” 1480 psi 2000 psi 1440 psi 2000 psi

Threaded End Standard Bore Ball Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
XX XX X XXXX XX XX XX X
Table 1 Valve Size(in) Table 5 Body Material

¼ ¼ 22 Carbon Steel (WCB)
⅜ ⅜ 36 316 Stainless Steel (CF8M)
½ ½ Table 6 Ball & Stem Material
¾ ¾ 36 316 Stainless Steel
1 1 71 Monel
1-¼ 1-¼ 73 Hastelloy C
1-½ 1-½ HB 316 SS Ball/17-4PH Stem
2 2 Table 7 Seat Material Seal (Stem & Body) Material
Table 2 Valve Size & Configuration Standard Fire-Tite® Options
9F* Fire-Tite® Standard TT PTFE PTFE & TFM²
9N Non Fire-Tite® XT Xtreme® TFM²
Table 3 Pressure Class Conformance Non Fire-Tite® Options
A* ANSI Class UU UHMW Polyethylene UHMW PE
B Non ANSI Class RT¹ Delrin (Not for ANSI or PTFE & TFM
NACE, 17-4 PH stem
M** ANSI Class with Metric Nameplate
required)
Table 4 Special Application/Construction or Service
Table 8 Valve Model
– Standard
B Eliminator Model B
O Oxygen
* For seal welded valves specify ANSI Class (A) in box 3.
N NACE MR0103
** Valves larger than 1” (DN 25) are CE marked.
C Chlorine ¹ Not a self-relieving seat design.
² Seal Welded ANSI rated valves use graphite material body seal.
V High Vacuum
TG Top Ground
STGR Top & Bottom Ground


3000 Series
DESCRIPTION
Series 3000 ball valves are perfect for applications where positive, long-lasting
shut off is required. Ideal for vent, by-pass, sampling, and gauge locations,
these valves provide cost-effective shut off in a wide range of process industry,
manufacturing, commercial, and OEM services. Seating options permit the
handling of mild abrasives, steam, and applications with wide temperature
swings.
FEATURES
• Polymer seats provide tight shut off in either direction.
• Flexible lip seats automatically compensate for wear and changes in pressure
and temperature.
• Standard valves with PTFE and filled PTFE seats are Fire-Tite® in
accordance with API607 Edition 4.
• Standard valves with Delrin seats are Fire-Tite® to ISO-10497.
• Valves are inherently stem-to-body grounded.
• Standard valves are equipped with a lockable handle that may be padlocked
in either the open or closed position.
• Single piece Carbon Steel or Stainless Steel body minimizes potential leak
paths.
• Anti-blow out design provides inherent stem retention.
SPECIFICATIONS
• Maximum working pressure of the valve body is 2000 psi. The maximum recommended test pressure
for the valve body is 3000 psi. This applies to ¼"-2" valves with 316 Stainless Steel and Carbon Steel
bodies
• To determine the practical working pressure limitation of the valve, consult the seat rating chart in the
spec sheet. Working pressure rating is at -20°F to 100°F (-29°C to 38°C).
• Recommended test pressure is for hydrostatic test with ball half open.
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4
XX XX XXXX XX
Table 1 Size (inches) Table 4 Seat and Seal Material Options

¼”, ⅜”,½”, ¾”, 1”, 1-¼”, 1-½”, 2” TL PTFE seats with graphite seal
Table 2 Series ML Filled PTFE seats with graphite seal
33 Series 3000 RL Delrin seats with graphite seal
Table 3 Body, Ball and Stem Material
2236 Carbon Steel body with 316 Stainless Steel ball and stem
3600 316 Stainless Steel body, ball and stem

KF Valve

KF Valves
Trunnion Mounted Ball Valve A

P3/M3 Series
DESCRIPTION
A large trunnion design ensures central positioning under the highest working pressure. Independent floating spring
loaded seats provide a tight seal even at low differential pressures. Service and maintenance is simplified with a bolted
body design incorporating double O-rings or a combination of O-rings and gaskets, suitable for buried or above ground
installation.
FEATURES
• Three-piece body design
• Double block and bleed
• Trunnion supported design reduces operating torque
• Antistatic device for grounding of the ball, stem and
body
• Two sets of O-rings plus firesafe stem packing
prevents leakage
• Corrosion resistant low friction bearings
• Inconel seat springs
• Sealant injection fittings for emergency stem or seal
sealing
• Direct mount topworks pad for actuator or gear
operator
• API Spec Q1, 6D, 6FA and 607
• ASME Section III Div. 1-NCA 4000
• BS 5351, 5750 and 6755
• ISO 9001/9002
• CSA- Z245.15-01
• 6" & larger valves are equipped with lifting lugs
• Locking device (lock not included)
• NACE MR0175/ISO15156
• Anti-blowout trunnion stem design


KF Valves
A Two-Piece Trunnion Mounted Ball Valves

FA/FAE Series
DESCRIPTION
This high quality two-piece split body trunnion mounted ball valve conforms to API 6D, ASME B16.34 and ASTM
specifications. Devlon® seats are standard. All seats are retained in metal holders which are spring-loaded against the
ball for low pressure, firesafe sealing. Series FA/FAE valves are offered in 2" thru 12" Class 150 & 300.
FEATURES
• Double block and bleed
• Self relieving seat
• Anti-blowout stem design
• O-rings plus firesafe packing prevents leakage
• Corrosion resistant low friction bearings
• Inconel® wave springs to provide upstream and
downstream sealing
• Stainless steel sealant injection fittings for emergency
stem or seat sealing
• Minimized torque required to open and close valve
• Antistatic device for grounding of the ball, stem/trunnion
and body
• Integral topworks direct mounting pad
• 8" & larger valves are equipped with lifting lugs
• Firesafe Function: In case of fire and seat construction
damage, firesafe requirements are accomplished with
automatic metal-to-metal positive sealing.

Neles
Quiet Metal-Seated Control Ball Valve A

Q-BALL®
DESCRIPTION
The Q-Ball® control valve offers a unique concept of
noise abatement, cavitation control, and excellent control
properties combined with very large flow capacity. The
Q-Ball® provides noise reduction of up to 18 dB (A) when
compared to normal valves. The design is simple and
effective. Parallel perforated plates in the flow opening, stage
the pressure drop as the flow passes through. This flow
treatment reduces velocities, noise generation and cavitation.
The Neles Q-Ball® has the advantages to make this control
valve so successfull: rugged metal-to-metal seating with
advanced friction reduction, wide temperature range and
self-cleaning trim, very high Cv and very wide rangeability.
FEATURES
• Low noise, minimum cavitation, velocity & vibration control
• High capacity and rangeability
• Self-cleaning, non-clogging
• Unique size range 1” to 36”
APPLICATIONS
• Hydrocarbon Processing, Petrochemical, Power Generation
and Pulp & Paper industries
• Gases, Liquids and Steam, pure or impure
• Flow and Pressure control in general & demanding services
• Blow down
• Flare control
• Pressure equalization
• High temperature service
• Tight shut-off requirements

A Flanged, Full Bore Ball Valves

M1/M2 Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso has extended the scope of the flanged ball valve Series MBV.
The latest addition, M1, is designed particularly for the metric PN
pressure ratings. The valve design follows ISO-standards and all
threadings are metric. The proven special shaft/ball joint enables
M1 to be used in the most demanding applications and also assures
tight shutoff even with the lowest pressure differentials. The material
and seat selection of M1 makes it possible to choose the most
suitable M1 combination according to customer specification.
FEATURES
• Separate ball and shaft assure good tightness, even with metal
seats, at low shut-off pressure
• Bubble tight shut-off with soft seats
• V-ring gland packing ensures long maintenance-free operation
• Spiral wound body joint gasket for leak free operation
• Live loaded packing as standard option for trunnion mounted
valves
• Q-trim option for reduced noise and cavitation
• Straight ball opening offers low flow resistance
• True full bore ball (cylindrical flow path)
SPECIFICATIONS
Product Type Flanged, full bore, ball valve
Split body design
Seat supported design
Trunnion design
Pressure Ratings ASME 150 & 300
Size Range 1" - 16"
Temperature Range -60 °F … +480 °F
Body CF8M
Ball CF8M + hard chrome
Bearings PTFE + graphite
Seats Stainless steel + cobalt based alloy, Xtreme®

Trunnion Mounted Ball Valve A

D Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles D Series ball valve uses the famous and unique
quarter turn Stemball design. The valve offers features and
benefits allowing the end user to improve the safety of the
plant, and improve reliability and productivity in the process.
D series ball valves are in compliance with the latest industry
product standards and emission proofing. D series valves have
live loaded low emission packing as standard. The D series
ball valves have been certified to be used in safety systems
up to and including SIL 3 in accordance to IEC 61508. These
valves offer superior cycle life and valve tightness under severe
operating conditions based on material and coating selection
for closing members, allowing maintenance free operation
for extended process maintenance intervals, and avoiding
unscheduled shutdowns. The valve offers high rangeability in
control service, and seat designs allow successful use of the
valve in services where impurities and solids are present.
FEATURES
• Full bore and reduced bore
• Ball and stem of one piece
• No-dead band, no hysteresis in throttling service
• Reliable operation and excellent response even with high differential pressure
• Spring loaded seats for continuous contact with ball
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Ratings ASME Class 150, 300 and 600
Size Range, Full bore DN 300 … 900 / 12" - 36" in ASME Class 150
DN 100 … 900 / 4" - 36" in ASME Class 300
DN 50 … 600 / 2" - 24" in ASME Class 600
Size Range, Reduced Bore DN 250 ... 600 / 10" - 24" in ASME Class 150
DN 200 ... 600 / 8" - 24" in ASME Class 300
DN 80 ... 600 / 3" - 24" in ASME Class 600
Larger sizes on request
Temperature Range -200 °C … +450 °C (+600 °C)
-330 °F … +840 °F (+1100 °F)
Valve body ASME B16.34
Valve body joint ASME VIII. DIV. 1 APPX 2
Valve flanges ASME B16.5
Face-to-face ASME B16.10
Body ASTM A351 gr. CF8M
ASTM A216 gr. WCB
Ball ASTM A351 gr. CF8M + hard chrome or other special coating with metal seats
Bearings SS 316 + PTFE net or Cobalt based alloy
Seats AISI 316 + Cobalt based alloy
AISI 316 + PTFE insert
Seals/gaskets PTFE, graphite

A Metal Seated, Full Bore Ball Valves

XU Series
DESCRIPTION
XU Series is designed to meet a wide range of international and national
valve standards, and also fulfill various requirements set by end-users.
The special shaft/ball joint enables XU to be used in the most demanding
high cycling applications, and also assures tight shut-off even with the
lowest pressure differentials. The wide material and seat selection of XU
make it possible to choose the most suitable XU combination according to
customers' specifications.
FEATURES
• V-ring gland packing ensures long maintenance free operation and low
emission level
• Spiral wound body joint gasket
• Live-loated construction
• Fire tested BS 6755/API 607
• High Cv per nominal size
• Straight ball opening offers low flow resistance
SPECIFICATIONS
Product Type Full bore, seat supported ball valve
Separate ball and shaft
Split body design
Flanged
Pressure Ratings ASME Class 600
PN 63 & PN 100
Size Range DN 25, 40, 50, 80, 100 / 1", 1 1/2", 2", 3", 4"
Temperature Range -50 °C...+450 °C (+600 °C) / -58...+840 °F (+1110 °F)
Valve Testing Each valve is tested for body integrity and seat tightness. The body test pressure is 1.5 x PN. The seat test pressure for metal seated
valves is 1.1 x PN. The test medium is inhibited water. Air test upon request.
Metal seats ISO 5208 Rate C, standard
ANSI FCI Class V
Other tightness rates upon request

Top Entry Rotary Control Valve A

Top 5 Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso’s Neles Series Top 5 is a heavy duty rotary control valve designed
for demanding applications such as crude oil, hot residual oil, LPG and
other hydrocarbon, gases (natural gas, ethylene, synthesis gas), and
hydrocarbon vapors under medium and high pressures. Along with being
suitable for steam applications, the Top 5 is easy to maintain and can
increase flow capacity without piping modifications.
FEATURES
• Turndown ratio up to 150:1
• ASME globe valve face-to-face
• Self cleaning trim design – scraping seat
• Fire-tested API 607, 4th edition, BS 6755
• Stemball construction – anti-blow out design
• Rugged one-piece body resists pipe stresses
• Optional weld ends allow a 100% emission-free pipeline connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Product type Top entry, trunnion mounted, single seated rotary control valve.
Type T5 Flanged, reduced bore 2" - 16", full bore 1" & 11/2", face-to-face acc. to ANSI/ISA-S75.03- 1985 = IEC 534-3 part 3,
(globe valve length).
Type T4 Weld ends, reduced bore 2" - 16", full bore 1" & 11/2", face-to-face acc. to API 6D class 600.
Temperature range Seat A -50 °C…+450 °C / -58°…+840 °F
Seat E1-50 °C…+450 °C / -58°…+840 °F
Seat F -200 °C…+400 °C / -320°…+750 °F
Seat R -30 °C…+100 °C / -22°…+150 °F
Graphite packing must be used above
230 °C / +450 °F or in fire safe duty
Rangeability 150:1
Valve ball rotation Clockwise to close
Fire safe BS 6755, part 2: 1987 API 607, 4th edition, May 1993
Shut-off classification Standard tightness Metal seated; ASME/FCI 70.2 Class V. Soft seated; ASME/FCI 70.2 Class VI

A Top Entry Rotary Control Valve - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11
XXX XX X X XX X X X XX X XX
Table 1 Trim options Table 6 Body Studs

Q Low noise trim. A CF8M B8M
QA Low noise trim + attenuator plate. D WCB L7M
QX Multichannel low noise trim. Table 7 Ball
Q2G- Q2-trim for gas applications A CF8M + hard chrome with metal seats.
QXA Multichannel low noise trim + attenuator plate. D CF8M + NiBo.
QXR Reduced capacity multichannel low noise trim. Table 8 Seat
QRA Reduced multichannel low noise trim + attenuator plate. A Metal seat General service and fire safe applications.
V_ _ V-port (only for T5/T4 1", 1 ½", 2"/DN 25, 40, 50). E Metal seat for control service. Ejector style seat, lower torque in
modulating control.
Table 2 Series
F Bellows seat Shut-off applications at low and high temperatures.
T5 Reduced bore 2" - 16", full bore 1" & 1½", flanged.
R Soft seat Control and shut-off applications for high pressure gas.
T4 Reduced bore 2" - 16", full bore 1" & 1½", weld-ends.
Bonnet Gland
Table 3 Pressure rating Table 9 Seat seal Seat Construction Bearing
gasket packing
D ASME Class 300. 02 Graphite Graphite Graphite A, E1 E, C PTFE
F ASME Class 600. 03 Graphite Graphite Graphite A, F, E1 B, C metal
M PN 40. 63 Viton® GF Graphite Graphite R E, B PTFE
N PN 63. or metal
P PN 100. Table 10 Gland packing options
Table 4 Construction G Live loaded graphite packing. TA-Luft certified.
E PTFE bearings. Temperature range -50 °C ... +230 °C. Table 11 Flange facing
B Metal bearings. Temperature range -50 °C... +450 °C. - *) Ra 3.2 - 6.3 / RMS 125 - 250
C Cryogenic, metal or PTFE bearings F-seat only. Temperature 05 Ring joint.

below -50 °C.
Raised face, ASME B16.5.
Table 5 Size (in inch)
*) No sign
01, 1.5, 02, 03, 04, 06, 08, 10, 12, 14, 16.

Ceramic Ball Control Valves A

E2/E6 Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso’s Neles Series E ceramic ball valve is one of the most erosion
resistant control valves available today. It is used in abrasive
applications such as lime mud, metal slurries, titanium dioxide and
cement production where even stellited surfaces do not last. A new
generation ceramic material, magnesia partially stabilized zirconia
(Mg-PSZ), completely lines the Series E flow path. The properties of
Mg-PSZ are superior to the more common ceramics found in other
valves, and make it suitable for a wide range of severe service industrial
applications.
Designed with a wafer style body rated for ASME Class 150 or 300
applications, the E2 is available in sizes1” - 4”. The flanged E6 is
available in sizes 1”-8” with ASME Class 150 or 300 rating. Valves made
of special alloys are available on request.
FEATURES
• High strength and exceptional fracture toughness, extremely resistant to
mechanical shock.
• Superior thermal shock resistance capabilities; no need for careful warming
and cooling of the piping system
• Shock resistence maintains ceramic integrity and prevents cracking.
• A completely ceramic flow path without metal parts provides maximum erosion resistance.
• A rigid stainless steel body withstands pressure loads and pipeline forces to protect the ceramic material.
• The ball to stem connection is a strong and backlash free, blade joint design.
• The blade joint design eliminates lost angular motion between the ball and stem and provides better control.
SPECIFICATIONS
Type Reduced bore wafer or lug type ceramic ball valve
Body One-piece, end entry design. Suitable to be fitted between flanges acc. to:
ASME 150, 300
PN 10, 16, 25, 40
JIS 10K, 16K, 20K, 30K
Sizes DN 25, 40, 50, 80, 100, 150, 200 / NPS
1", 1 1/2", 2", 3", 4", 6", 8"
Face-to-Face Dimensions IEC 534-3-2 / ISA S75.04
Temperature Range Standard Design -50 °C…+200 °C / -40 °F…+390 °F
High Temperature Version Graphite packing design with a gland is available for temperatures up to …+450 °C / +840 °F. This is recommended not only for
increased temperatures but also for applications where temperature variations and thermal shocks occur.
ATEX Compatibility The ceramic valve is not ATEX compatible as a mechanical component for potentially hazardous explosive environment due to
the nature of ceramic material used in valve internals.

A Ceramic Ball Control Valves - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7
XXX XX X X X X X
Table 1 Cv-value of the valve DN 25 / 01" Table 4 Construction

– Standard without sign A Standard, V-ring packing, PTFE + C25%, max temperature
+200 °C / +390 °F
C05 Maximum Cv 5
H High temperature, graphite gland packing, max temperature
C15 Maximum Cv 15
+450 °C / +842 °F
Table 2 Series/ Characteristics
Table 5 Nominal size
E2 End entry, wafer type, reduced bore, seat supported ball DN
025 DN 25
25-100 / 01" - 04"
040 DN 40
E6 End entry, lug type, reduced bore, seat supported ball DN 25-
200 / 01" - 08" 050 DN 50
Table 3 Pressure rating 080 DN 80
C ASME Class 150 100 DN 100
D ASME Class 300 150 DN 150 (E6 Only)
J PN 10 200 DN 200 (E6 Only)
K PN 16 01 1”
L PN 25 1H 1-1/2”
M PN 40 02 2”
R JIS 10 K 03 3”
S JIS 16 K 04 4”
T JIS 20 K 06 6” (E6 Only)
U JIS 30 K 08 8” (E6 Only)
Table 6 Metal parts
X Body: CF8M
Shaft: XM-19
Screws: A2-70
Others: 316SS
Table 7 Ceramic materials (ball+bushings)
Z Zirconiumoxide, Mg-PSZ

PBM
Two-Way, Full Port Ball Valve A

SP Series
DESCRIPTION
PBM’s SP Series of two way, three piece ball valves used for general purpose and non-sanitary process
applications. Design includes Adjust-O-Seal®, full port and interchangeable seats standard.
FEATURES
• Sizes ¼”- 6”
• Three-piece “swing-out” body design
• Adjust-O-Seal design allows valve seat to be restored to a leak-tight condition
without removal from the processing line. Adjustments can be repeated
several times to compensate for normal seat wear.
• Body, ball, stem, and end fitting material options include 316/316L Stainless
Steel, Hastelloy® C-276, Carbon Steel, Bronze Alloy 922 and others
• TFM™ – PTFE seats and seals
• Bubble tight, bidirectional shutoff
• Live loaded TFM™ – PTFE stem packing
• From vacuum to 900 psig maximum working pressure
• Disassembly not required for butt welding
• API 607 Fire Rated valves available
• Fire rated valves will not include Adjust-O-Seal design. Body bolts will be fully
encapsulated and body seals made of graphite material.
• Options include locking lever device, end connections, cavity fillers, steam
seats, special pads, self-flushing ball, CIP/SIP and polishing.
Angle Stem Flush Tank Bottom Ball Valve

AF Series
FEATURES
• Two-piece design
• Sizes 1”- 6”
• Body, ball, stem and end fitting material options include 316/316L Stainless
Steel, Hastelloy® C-276, Carbon Steel, Bronze Alloy 922 and others
• Adjust-O-Seal design allows valve seat to be restored to a leak-tight condition
without removal from the processing line. Adjustments can be repeated several
times to compensate for normal seat wear.
• Weld pad available in 316L Stainless Steel and other materials
• RTFE seats and seals
• Live loaded RTFE stem packing
• Fire rated valves will not include Adjust-O-Seal design. Body bolts will be fully
encapsulated and body seals made of graphite material.
• Options include locking lever device, end connections, cavity fillers, steam
seats, special pads, self-flushing ball, CIP/SIP and polishing.

A
ANSI Flanged Full Port Ball Valve
AN Series
FEATURES
• Two-piece “split body” design
• Sizes 1”- 6”
• Body, ball, stem, and end fittings available in 316/316L Stainless Steel or
Carbon Steel
• Seats and seals are TFM™ - PTFE material with Viton® or EPR O-Ring
body seal
• Adjust-O-Seal design allows valve seat to be restored to a leak-tight
condition without removal from the processing line. Adjustments can be
repeated several times to compensate for normal seat wear.
• Live loaded TFM™ - PTFE stem packing
• End fittings are ANSI 150# flanged per ANSI B16.5 and face to face
dimension conform to ASME B16.10 Long Pattern
• 100% tested per ASME/ANSI B16.34
• API 607 fire rated valves available
• Fire rated valves will not include Adjust-O-Seal design. Body bolts will be
fully encapsulated and body seals made of graphite material.
• Options include locking lever device, cavity fillers, steam seats, special
pads, CIP/SIP, ABS approval, USCG Category A and polishing.
Two-Way, Three-Piece Full Port Cryogenic Ball Valve

CP Series
DESCRIPTION
PBM’s CP Series of full port, Class 300# ball valves are specifically designed for cryogenic applications. PBM
cryogenic valves have a unique design that provides superior performance through cooling and heating cycles.
Valves meet or exceed leakage performance per MSS SP-134. Optimally oriented with the stem 90° from the
horizontal plane, but are capable of operating with the stem oriented as low as 20° above the plane if necessary.
FEATURES
• Uni-directional flow and vented ball
• Sizes ½” - 3”
• Temperatures from ambient down to -320° F
• 300# pressure class
• Maximum working pressure 720 psig CWP
• Live-loaded upstream seat and packing
• Quarter turn operation
• Variety of end connections
• Extended ends do not require valve to be disassembled for welding
• Cleaned for oxygen service
• Meets or exceeds leakage performance per MSS SP-134

Two-Way, Split Body ANSI Flanged Cryogenic Ball A

Valve
CN Series
DESCRIPTION
PBM’s CN Series of full port ANSI flanged ball valves are specifically designed for cryogenic applications. PBM
cryogenic valves have a unique design that provides superior performance through cooling and heating cycles. Valves
meet or exceed leakage performance per MSS SP-134. Optimally oriented with the stem 90° from the horizontal plane,
but are capable of operating with the stem oriented as low as 20° above the plane if necessary.
FEATURES
• Uni-directional flow and vented ball
• Sizes ½” - 3”
• Temperatures from ambient down to -320° F
• 150# & 300# pressure class
• Maximum working pressure 720 psig CWP (300# flanges) and 275
psig CWP (150# flanges)
• Live-loaded upstream seat and packing
• Cleaned for oxygen service
• Meets or exceeds leakage performance per MSS SP-134
• Variety of end connections
• Extended ends do not require valve to be disassembled for welding
Flush Tank Bottom Ball Valve

FT Series
DESCRIPTION
PBM’s FT Series of two-way tank valve are typically used for general purpose tank, vessel and reactor applications.
Standard features include swing out/lift out design, adjustable seats, full port and interchangeable seats.
FEATURES
• Three-piece “swing-out” body design
• Sizes ½” – 6”
• Body, ball, stem, and end fitting available in 316/316L Stainless Steel,
Hastelloy® C-276, Carbon Steel, Bronze Alloy 922 and others
• TFM ™ - PTFE seats and seals
• 316L Stainless Steel weld pads standard
condition without removal from the processing line. Adjustment can be
• Live loaded TFM ™ - PTFE stem packing
• Fire rated valves will not include Adjust-O-Seal design. Body bolts will
be fully encapsulated and body seals made of graphite material. For
general purpose, non-sanitary process applications
• Options include locking lever device, end connections, cavity fillers,
steam seats, special pads, self-flushing ball, CIP/SIP and polishing

A
Instrument Root Valves
IM Series
DESCRIPTION
PBM’s IM Series is used for isolation of pressure gauges, orifice plates, flush rings and various measurement
instruments. The instrument valve usually lives in the open position and is closed only to isolate the instrument for
service or repair.
FEATURES
• ¼”- 10” Full Port; ¼”- 12” Standard Port, size availability dependent
valve style
• Optional extended handle with lock out
• API 607 Fire Rated available
• Styles include two-way, diverter port and double block and bleed
• Bleed or gauge ports available ( up to ¾” size)
• Locking handle standard
• Welded or bolted body
• Rodable in ¼” - ¾”
• API-622 Low-E Stem
• SIL-3 Capable per IEC 61508
• ANSI Pressure Class 300 – 2500
• Variety of seat/stem packings, materials and end connection options
Multi-Port Ball Valves

MP Series
DESCRIPTION
PBM’s MP Series of multi-port ball valves are offered as a 150# class (when 300# is not required) and allow
the use of smaller actuator due to design enhancements and lower torque requirements. Available as either a
3, 4, or 5 way valve with 11 end fitting options. The Adjust-O-Seal® and full port design are standard.
FEATURES
• Sizes ½” – 6”
• Seated at every port
• Body, ball, stem and end fitting available in 316/316L Stainless Steel,
Carbon Steel, Hastelloy® C-276 or other
condition without removal from the processing line. Adjustment can be
• 4 or 5 TFM ™ - PTFE seats and seals and provide bubble tight seal
• Stem packing is live loaded TFM ™ – PTFE
• Optional lever locking device
• T-Port, TT-Port, Angle Port (L) and Double Angle Port (LL) balls with both
side and bottom port entry create many flow patterns options for a single
multi-port valve.
• Flow pattern for 3, 4, or 5-way valve design needs to be specified. Contact
your Rawson representative for flow pattern diagrams.

Transmitter Isolation Ball Valve A

TI Series
DESCRIPTION
The TI Series of valves are designed to isolate media from a pressure/level transmitter and are only closed when
the transmitter needs to be isolated for service. These transmitter isolation valves feature minimal dead space and
positive shut-off. Available in 150#, 300# and 600# RF flange. Calibration port, CIP port and locking handle are
standard.
FEATURES
• Body, ball, stem, and end fitting available in 316/316L Stainless Steel,
Hastelloy®, Titanium and other with 1” or 2-½” port diameter.
• Tank side flange to accommodate both standard ANSI 3”, 150#
• Flange drilling and a 25 to 27 degree offset flange pattern
• Instrument side flange is drilled to accommodate a standard ANSI 3”,
150# flange drilling
• ¼ turn manual 300 series stainless steel handle with lever locking
device.
• Four (4) ¼” FNPT Purge Ports, each with a ¼” MNPT plug made from
the same material as the valve body.
• Seats and seals are TFM™ – PTFE material with VTFE O-ring.

Skycera
A
Ceramic Ball Valve
CBA Style
DESCRIPTION
The Skycera CBA Style Ceramic Ball Valve is able to operate in the
harshest environments to control slurry flow. Ceramics offer as much as
30X more protection against abrasion than alloy materials. These advanced
ceramic materials fully line the valve body to ensure process media and
aggressive materials do not harm the valve. The extreme hardness, high
temperature capabilities and overall resistance to corrosion, abrasion and
erosion of these ceramic ball valves allow for exceptional resistance to
cavitation, prolonged service life and increased production efficiency.
FEATURES
• Full control options, including 4-20 mA positioner and actuator.
• Multiple ANSI and DIN flange standards available.
including ANSI 150 300 and 600 classes.
• Ceramic seat materials are selected on an application basis. Options
include Alumina, Zirconia, Silicon Carbide and others.
• Seat and ball are lapped together in matched sets to insure positive
sealing.
• Materials are selected on an application basis.Options include Super
Duplex Stainless Steel, Hastelloy, Stainless Steel, Cast Steel and others.
• Temperature rating of 400°F (204°C) and pressure capabilities up to 400
psi
• Sizes up to 8"
APPLICATIONS
• Flue Gas Desulfurization (FGD)
• Slurry Control Applications
• Pneumatic Transportation of Powders
• Chemical Production

A
Ceramic Segmented Ball Valve
CSB Style
DESCRIPTION
The CSB Style is a ceramic segmented ball valve that was
designed to operate in harsh environments to control slurry flow.
Advanced ceramic materials are utilized on the seats to insure
the most aggressive materials do not harm the valve. These
specialized ceramic materials allow the valves to withstand
pressure capabilities up to 500 psi. Valves can be designed to
operate up to Class 300 and with 3-way port capabilities.
FEATURES
• Segmented ball design allows higher pressure capability.
• Designed with ceramic-on-ceramic seating surfaces to resist
abrasive attack and maintain seat integrity.
• Many alloys available including Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel
and Hastellloy
• Ideal for hopper applications due to its self-cleaning
characteristic.
• The CSB valve can be designed to meet any valve specifications
including ANSI, DIN and JIS.
• Reduction in extensive use of body ceramics yields a value-
oriented ceramic valve.
• Temperature ratings of 300°F (149°C)
• Sizes up to 12"
APPLICATIONS
• High Pressure Service
• Hopper Applications
• Less corrosive, but highly abrasive applications

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Butterfly Valves
Bray
A
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valve
Series 30/31
DESCRIPTION
The Series 30 and 31 butterfly valve's high strength through-stem design
allows easy disassembly and reduced disc to stem failure. Bray® Controls is
proud to offer a high quality line of butterfly valves to meet the requirements
of today’s market. Combining years of field application experience, research
and development, Bray has designed many unique features in the Series
30/31 not previously available. The results are longer service life, greater
reliability, ease of parts replacement and interchangeability of components.
FEATURES
• International compatibility
• Designed to comply with ISO 5752 face-to-face and ISO 5211 actuator
mounting flanges.
• Modular design allows for all Bray® handles, manual gear operators and
pneumatic and electric actuators mount directly to Bray valves. No brackets
or adapters are required.
• Bray interchangeability and compatibility offers uniformity of product line and
low-cost performance.
• Tested to 110% of full pressure rating before shipment.
APPROVALS & CERTIFICATIONS

• CE/PED Certification
• NSF/ANSI 61-2008 Certification (Potable Water)
• SIL Certification
• ABS Certification
• Bureau Veritas Certification
• DNV
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Range: 2" - 20" (50mm - 500mm)
Body Style: Wafer, Lug
Temperature Range: -20°F to 400°F (-29°C to 204°C)
Pressure Ratings: Bidirectional Bubble-tight Shut-Off: to 175 psi (12 Bar)
Body (CWP): 250 psi (17.2 Bar)
Body Materials: Cast Iron, Ductile Iron, Carbon Steel, Aluminum
Disc Materials: Nylon 11 Coated Ductile Iron, Aluminum Bronze,
Stainless Steel, Hastelloy®, Halar® Coated Ductile
Iron
Stem Materials: Stainless Steel, Monel K500
Seat Materials: BUNA-N, EPDM, FKM*, Polyurethane
Applications: Potable Water, Wastewater, Seawater, HVAC

High Performance, Zero Leakage Butterfly Valve A

McCannalok Series 40/41
DESCRIPTION
The simple, innovative design offers rugged reliability and extremely easy
maintenance in the field. The Bray/McCannalok valves can be automated
inexpensively with Bray’s pneumatic and electric actuators. After a test of over
100,000 cycles at 720 psi, the seat remained in excellent condition, continuing
to provide a bi-directional zero-leakage seal. Even after more than 878,000
cycles at 2 psi, the Bray/McCannalok High Performance Valve still sealed
zero-leakage in both directions.
FEATURES
• Two-part PTFE and UHMWPE seats with resilient energizer
• Double Offset Stem and Disc Design
• Fluorosilicone inner O-rings for methylene chloride service
• Fire Safe graphite/carbon fiber or similar packing for fire safe or high temperature
service
• Hastelloy C bodies for hydrogencyanide service
• Nickel Aluminum Bronze bodies for marine environments
• Longer stem lengths to accommodate differing control devices
• Alloy 20 trim for sulfuric acid service
• Monel discs for Chlorine service
• Duplex, Super Duplex and Super Austenitic Stainless trims for salt water services
APPROVALS & CERTIFICATIONS

• CE/PED Certification
• Fire-Test Standard API 607 5th Edition Certified
• NSF/ANSI 61-2008 Certification (Potable Water)
• SIL Certification
• ABS Type Approval
• Bureau Veritas Type Approval
• DNV
• China Classification Society (CCS) Type Approval
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Range: 2 ½" - 60" (65mm - 1500mm)
Body Style: Wafer, Lug and Double Flanged
Pressure Ratings: ASME Class 150, 300 and 600
Shut-Off Rating: Zero Leakage
Body Materials: Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel, Nickel Aluminum Bronze
Disc Materials: Stainless Steel, Nickel Aluminum Bronze
Stem Materials: Stainless Steel, Monel K500
Seat Materials: Standard - RTFE with Resilient Energizer, PTFE with
Resilient Energizer
Fire Safe - RTFE and Inconel with Resilient Energizer
Applications: High Pressure, High Temperature, Critical Service

A
Triple Offset Quarter Turn Valve
Tri Lok®
DESCRIPTION
Compared to gate, globe or ball valves of the same size and pressure
class, Tri Lok® provides space and weight savings while minimizing
installation and maintenance costs. Tri Lok® is a premier isolation
valve, well suited for operation in vacuum to high pressure as well as
cryogenic to high temperature applications. The standard, nonrubbing,
metal-to-metal sealing system is inherently firesafe. Applications
requiring absolute zero leakage are ideally suited for triple offset
technology.
FEATURES
• Independent field replacement of both the seat and the seal ring.
• Seat and seal ring substitution eliminates the need to replace the
entire valve-reducing downtime and costs and extending valve service
life.
• Solid metal seal ring for high temperature and severe service
applications to ensure bi-directional shut-off throughout the full
pressure/temperature range.
• Splined disc/stem connection allows axial movement of the disc
independent of the stem and maximum strength.
• Seal ring and seat remain in position, unaffected by temperature
fluctuations and pressure effects on the stem.
• Design prevents the typical misalignment problems of rigidly attached
discs and stems.
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Range: 3” – 48” (80mm – 1200mm)
Body Style: Wafer, Lug, Double Flanged, Gate, & Butt Weld
Pressure Ratings: ASME Class 150, 300, 600, 900
Shut-Off Rating: Zero Leakage
Body Materials: Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel & Other Materials
Disc Materials: Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel & Other Materials
Stem Materials: 410 SS, 17-4Ph, & XM-19
Seat Materials: 321 SS, 316 SS Hardened, 316 SS Stellite 21 HVOF

C&C Industries
Butterfly Valves Butterfly Valve Accessories

A
C200 Series – C200 Series Lever
Wafer Butterfly – Lug Style Operators
Valve Butterfly Valve Sizes: 2″ – 12″
Sizes: 2″ – 24″ Sizes: 2″ – 24″ 10 position Handle
Features 4 Alignment Pinless Disc Available for
Holes, Pinless Disc Lever or Gear Double D or
Lever or Gear Operated Operated Square Stem
*larger sizes available *larger sizes available
upon request upon request
LR Series – LG200 Series Gear

Wafer Butterfly Lug Style Operators
Valve Butterfly Valve Direct Mount
Sizes: 2″ – 12″ Sizes: 2″ – 12″ Sizes: 2″ – 24″
Features long neck and Pinless Disc *larger sizes
smooth body, Lever or Gear available upon
Pinless Disc Operated request
Lever or Gear Operated *larger sizes available
upon request
LN200 Series LN200 6BT Locking

Wafer Butterfly Series Wafer Handle
Valve Butterfly Valve Sizes: 2″ – 12″
Sizes: 2″ – 12″ 6-Bolt Pattern, 10-position Handle
Features short neck Square Stem *featured handle
and notches for Sizes: 4″ and 5″ with locking plate
alignment Features short neck
Pinless Disc and notches for
Available with Double D alignment
Stem or Square Stem Pinless Disc, Square
Lever or Gear Operated Stem
Lever or Gear Operated
Split Body Split Body Lug Stem

Wafer Style Style Butterfly Extension
Butterfly Valve Valve Sizes: 2″ – 18″
Sizes: 2″ – 12″ Sizes: 2″ – 12″ Lengths: 24″ – 72″
Features Teflon Coated Features Teflon *other lengths
Disc and Seat Coated Disc and Seat available upon
Pinless Disc Pinless Disc request
Lever or Gear Operated Lever or Gear
Operated
T200 Series G200 Series

Butterfly Valve Butterfly Valve
Threaded Body Style Grooved End Butterfly
Butterfly Valve Valve
Sizes: 2″– 6″ Sizes: 2″ – 8″
Lever Operated Lever or Gear Operated

Jamesbury
A High Performance Butterfly Valve

815 Series
DESCRIPTION
Jamesbury®'s Wafer-Sphere high performance butterfly valves provide long lasting
tight shutoff capability, excellent flow characteristics, and long service life.
The Wafer-Sphere high performance butterfly valve is available in a range of

materials and seat combinations suitable for service in a wide variety of applications
including NACE MR0103 and abrasive services. Also available are valves specifically
prepared for chlorine, oxygen, and high vacuum applications.
FEATURES
• Xtreme® seat provides longer life, expanded performance boundaries, and greater
value.
• One piece seat design compensates for temperature and pressure changes.
• Tight shut off in either direction
• Longer service life with less maintenance
• No seat/disc contact in the open or intermediate positions
• Offset shaft design eliminates wear points at top and bottom of seats for higher
cycle life and lower torque requirements.
• Fire-Tite® Wafer-Sphere valves have been tested to API 607 and ISO-10497-5:2004
• Superior control Capability with modified equal percentage flow characteristics.
• Tight shut off even in control applications
• Lugged style valves are suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at the full
pressure temperature rating of the valve.
• Standard body materials include ductile iron, Carbon Steel, Stainless Steel, Alloy
20, and Monel®. Other materials, such as Avesta® 254SMO are available on
application.
VALVE BODY RATINGS

The tables below are maximum working pressure ratings of the valve body only. The seat ratings determine the practical
pressure limitations according to actual service conditions.Test pressures are for hydostatic test with disc open.
Series 815, Class 150 Valve Body Ratings – psi Series 830, Class 300 Valve Body Ratings – psi
316 316
Temp Carbon Ductile Temp Carbon
Stainless Alloy 20* Monel Stainless Alloy 20* Monel
°F Steel* Iron* °F Steel*
Steel* Steel*
-20 to 100 285 250 275 230 230 -20 to 100 740 720 600 600
200 680 620 520 530
200 260 235 235 200 200
300 655 560 465 495
300 230 215 215 180 190
400 635 515 420 480
400 200 200 195 160 185
500 605 480 390 475
500 170 170 170 150 170
Test Pressure 1125 1100 900 900
Test Pressure 450 400 425 350 350
* Ratings correspond to ASME/ANSI B16.34–2004 for material grades shown in

bills of material herein. Ductile iron ratings conform to ASME/ANSI B16.42

High Performance Butterfly Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER

XX XXXX X XXX XX XX XX XX XX
Table 1 Size Table 7 Disc & Shaft Material

2-½" – 60"(DN 65 - 1500) See specsheet for specific availability 00², ⁴ Same as body material
Table 2 Pressure Class HB¹ 316 Stainless Steel disc, 17-4 PH shaft
815 Standard ANSI Class 150 35 Alloy 20 disc and shaft
F815 Fire-Tite® ANSI Class 150 36 316 Stainless Steel disc and shaft
818 Standard ANSI Class 150 w/CE Marking and Documentation 37 317 Stainless Steel
F818 Fire-Tite® ANSI Class 150 w/CE Marking and Documentation 71¹ Monel disc and shaft
830 Standard ANSI Class 300 73 Hastelloy C disc and shaft
F830 Fire-Tite ANSI Class 300
® Table 8 Seat & Seal Material
838 Standard ANSI Class 300 w/CE Marking and Documentation Standard
F838 Fire-Tite® ANSI Class 300 w/CE Marking and Documentation TT PTFE seat and seal
Table 3 Body Style MT Filled PTFE seat, PTFE seals
W Wafer UU UHMW polyethylene seat and seal
L Single flange lugged XZ Xtreme seat & carbon-filled enhanced PTFE seal
Table 4 Special Service Fire-Tite®
C Chlorine AE PTFE/Stainless Steel seat, graphite seal
O Oxygen AF PTFE/Alloy 20 seat, graphite seal
H Hard coated Disc AH PTFE/Monel seat, graphite seal
HV High Vacuum XE Xtreme/Stainless Steel seat, graphite seal
HVC High Vacuum Certified XF Xtreme/Alloy 20 seat, graphite seal
D Double Packing XH Xtreme/Monel seat, graphite seal
DL Double Packing with Monitoring Port Table 9 Modifier Code
N NACE MR0103 — Standard
Table 5 Seat Type QY Live-loaded packing (Emission-Pak)
11 Standard (non Fire-Tite®) MM³ Composite shaft bearings, Filled PEEK thrust bearings and
excluder rings
31 Standard (Fire-Tite®)
¹ Material meets NACE MR0103 requirements for sour environments. For valves
22¹ Carbon Steel to be in full compliance with NACE MR0103, both the body and trim must meet
35 Alloy 20 the NACE MR0103 requirement.
² Valves with the Disc & Shaft Material Code “00” meet the NACE MR0103
36¹ 316 Stainless Steel requirement for sour environments if the body code is 71.
3
Modifier code MM requires seat & seal material XZ.
37¹ 317 Stainless Steel
⁴ Not available with 22 body material.
71¹ Monel ⁵ Non-standard seat offering replaced by Xtreme Seat (XZ) offering.
Call Rawson regarding other materials of construction that are not listed.
73 Hastelloy C

A Cryogenic High Performance Butterfly Valve

K8 Series
DESCRIPTION
Series K815 ANSI Class 150, K830 ANSI Class 300, and K860 ANSI Class 600 Wafer-Sphere
high performance butterfly valves are designed to meet the severe conditions of cryogenic
services such as air separation and LNG. They have been proven to provide superior
performance and reliability in a wide range of applications and offer a low cost of ownership.
FEATURES
• Tight shut off in either direction. Contact Rawson for shut-off performance details.
• Composite seat in 3” – 12”, K815, K830 and all K860 valves with metal carrier and PTFE or
PCTFE insert assures tight sealing over a wide range of pressures and temperatures.
• Single piece PCTFE seat in 14” and larger K815 and K830 valves is designed with a unique
flexible lip for positive, long lasting shutoff.
• Bonnet extensions available in varied lengths to suit specific service requirements.
• No seat/disc contact in the open or intermediate position.
• Offset shaft design Eliminates wear points at top and bottom of seats for higher cycle life and
lower torque requirements.
• CE marked versions available
VALUE BODY RATINGS

Temperature 316 Stainless Steel Maximum Working Pressure, psi
°F K815 K830 K860
-320 to 100 275 720 1440
Test Pressure 425 1100 2200
Ratings above correspond to those of ASME B16.34 2004 for material grade of valve body.
HOW TO ORDER
XX XXXX X XXX XX XX XX XX XX
Table 1 Size (inches) Table 6 Body Material

3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 24, 30 36 316 Stainless Steel
Table 2 Pressure Class 71 Monel
K815 ANSI Class 150 (3” – 30”) Table 7 Disc & Shaft Material
K830 ANSI Class 300 (3” – 24”) HB 316 Stainless disc, 17-4PH Stainless shaft
K860 ANSI Class 600 (3” – 12”) 71** Monel disc with K-Monel shaft
Table 3 Body Style ** Use code 00 when body material is Monel
W Wafer
Table 8 Seat & Seal Material
L Single Flange Lugged
AS PTFE/316 Stainless Steel PTFE***
Table 4 Special Services
KT PCTFE(standard for 14” [DN PTFE
— Standard (no entry) 350] and larger K815 & K830)
O Oxygen Cleaned AP PTFE/Monel PTFE***
Table 5 Bonnet Extension Lengths AJ PCTFE/316 Stainless Steel PTFE***
8–72 Bonnet extension lengths are available in 2" increments within
ranges shown in dimensional tables. (See Bulletin W130) *** Body Seal of 3” – 12” (DN 80 – 300) is graphite.


KF Valves
KF Valve
Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves A

BG Series
DESCRIPTION
The KF Series BG resilient seated butterfly valve is available in sizes 2" thru 36", wafer or lug style body design. These
Butterfly Valves were designed to meet the stringent requirements for Oil & Gas and Industrial applications, or wherever
positive shut-off is required for liquids, gases and slurries.
The KF Series BG butterfly valves are designed and manufactured for use with ANSI 125 or 150 Class flanges and
to comply with API 609 (except for the 16"-20" face-toface dimension). All valves are seat-tested at 110% of rated
pressure.
FEATURES
• Nameplate is permanently attached providing disc, seat, and shaft
material specifications for quick reference.
• Disc is attached to shaft by precision taper pins minimizing flow
turbulence, resulting in higher Cv ratings.
• All BG Lug Style Valves are suitable for Bi-Directional Dead End
Service at full rated pressure.
• Disc edge is machined and polished 360° to assure leak-proof
positive shut-off while minimizing torque.
• Phenolic Backed Seat provides additional support making it non-
collapsible. No flange gaskets needed. 360° sealing protects
components from media and provides primary shaft seal. Available
in Buna N and Viton®.
• ISO 5211 Mounting Pad designed for easy adaptation of pneumatic
or electric actuators, gear operators and handles. (2"-10" direct
mountable)
• Available in Lug and Wafer styles. For use between ANSI 125 and
150 flanges. Face-to-Face dimensions of 2"-14" and 24" valves
comply with API 609 and MSS SP67. Valves are designed to
accommodate 2" of insulation. Standard body material is A536 65-
45-12 Ductile Iron.
• The bi-directional shaft seal prevents external contamination of
stem area while providing back-up for the primary shaft seal formed
by the disc/seat interface.

Neles
A NELDISC® Metal Seated High Performance Triple

Eccentric Disc Valves
LW/LG Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles Neldisc® is a metal seated high performance triple eccentric disc
valve. It provides a long lasting tight shut- off with excellent flow characteristics
and high capacity. The LW and LG Series fulfill the requirements of both ASME
and EN standard.
FEATURES
• TA-Luft, chapter 3.1.8.4 (PTFE V-ring and graphite packing)
• Fire tested to BS 6755 and API 607
• Double packing with or without connection for leakage detection if required
• Unique all-metal seat design assures superior tightness in difficult applications
over long time periods
• Low cost control valve for low differential pressures
• Special S-disc option for difficult high noise and cavitation applications
• Fully metal seated construction. No resilient parts exposed to the medium

NELDISC® Metal Seated High Performance Triple A

L1/L2 Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles Neldisc® Series L1 is a wafer type, and Series L2 a
lug type, metal seated high performance triple eccentric disc valve.
With close to equal percentage characteristics and superior tightness,
Neldisc® triple eccentric disc valves operate both in control and shut-off
applications.
Due to a number of special constructions developed from the versatile

Neldisc design, these valves offer a powerful tool for standardization
and are true high performance valves.
FEATURES
• Fully metal seated construction with no resilient parts exposed to medium
• Bi-directional long term tightness
• Low friction
• Lower operational torque
• Abrasion resistant
• Differential pressure/temperature ratings in accordance with ASME B16.34.
• Appropriate constructions perform equally well from -330 °F to +1110 °F.
• Extremely high cycle life minimizes need for maintenance
• Totally interchangeable seats can be replaced without disassembly of the disc and shaft.
• Offset shaft and eccentric disc eliminates wear points at top and bottom of disc.


Eccentric Disc Valves - Continued
HOW TO ORDER
X XX X X X XXXX X X X X X
Table 1 S-DISC Table 7 Body Material

S- Flow balancing trim on downstream side A ASTM A351 gr CF8M
Table 2 Valve Type C ASTM A351 gr CG8M
L1 Wafer type P ASTM A216 gr WCB
L2 Lug type F ASTM A352 gr LCC
Table 3 Pressure Rating Table 8 Disc Material
C ASME Class 150 A ASTM A351 gr CF8M
D ASME Class 300 C ASTM A351 gr CG8M
Table 4 Seat Type P ASTM A216 gr WCB
M Metal seat Table 9 Shaft and Pin Material
Table 5 Construction Type C 17-4PH
A Standard J SIS 2324
C Cryogenic H Nimonic 80A
H High-temp N XM-19 (Nitronic 50)
Table 6 Valve Size (inches) Table 10 Seat Material
18-48 18”- 48” for L1C: Wafer Type ASME Class 150 A Incoloy 825
16” - 36” for L1D: Wafer Type ASME Class 300 B SS Avesta 248 SV
18” - 30” for L2C: Lug Type ASME Class 150 C Incoloy 825, polymer impregnated hard chrome plated
H Nimonic 80H HCr plated (only upto 24")
K Ultimet (2.4681) (only upto 24")
Table 11 Packing Construction
T Live loaded PTFE
G Live loaded graphite


L6 Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles Series L6 is a double flanged metal seated Neldisc® triple
eccentric disc valve with one piece body design, for both control and tight
shut-off applications. It is particularly well suited for the refining, power,
petrochemical and chemical industries.
FEATURES
• Uniquely functioning full metal seat design assures tightness over long
time periods.
• Contact between disc and seat is mechanically induced and does not rely
on assistance from differential pressure.
• Low friction and excellent wear resistance.
• Good controllability via smoothly rising installed characteristic curve at both
very small openings and nearly full Cv positions. L6 provides very wide
rangeability in fairly low pressure drop services.
• Good dynamic stability in both flow directions.
• Extremely high cycle life minimizes the need for maintenance, and increases Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF).
• Interchangeable seat can be replaced without disassembling the disc and shaft. Seat replacement does not require
any adjustment or special tools. Seat design is exactly the same in ASME class 150 and 300 regardless of pressure
rating.
SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Ratings Classes 150, 300 and 600 in accordance with ASME B16.34 and BS 5351, Class 900 available on request.
Sizes and End Connection Types ASME cl. 150 valves are available in sizes 4"-80" (DN 100-2000).
ASME cl. 300 valves are available in sizes 4"-56" (DN 100-1400).
ASME cl. 600 valves are available in sizes 6"-40" (DN 150-1000).
Flanges are Designed as per ASME B16.5 for 4"-24" (DN 100-600) valves
ASME B16.47 series A for 28" (DN 700) and bigger sizes.
ASME B16.47 series B flanges are available upon request.
ASME cl. 150 & 300 face-to-face dimensions are acc. to ISO 5752 series 13.
ASME cl. 600 face-to-face dimensions are acc. to ISO 5752 series 14.
Standard Equal percentage
S-disc Modified equal percentage
Standard Shut-off Classifications API 598 (air)
ANSI Class VI (air)
ISO 5208, rate B (air)
Standard Seat API 598 (metal seated), water
ANSI Class V
ISO 5208, rate D (water)
ISO 5208 rate A
Safety Features Fire-tested per API 607, 4th edition and BS 6755 part 2.
Fugitive emission control with live loaded stem sealing as standard, ISO 15848, TA-Luft/VDI 2440 and Shell 77/312
Rugged single piece double flanged body eliminates potential leak paths associated with jointed bodies.
Positive shaft blow-out prevention.


Eccentric Disc Valves - Continued
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13
X XX XX X X X X X X X X
Table 1 S-Disc Construction Table 8 Disc Material

S- Flow balancing trim on downstream side of the body flow port A ASTM A 351 gr. CF8M / F 316. Standard.
Table 2 Product Series/Design Table 9 Shaft and Pin Material
L6 Flanged, face-to-face ISO 5752 series 13. EN 558 part 1, basic C Gr. 630 (17-4PH). Standard.
series13. API 609 category B, double flanged, short pattern.
N XM-19 (Nitronic 50) (sign 5: "H"-construction) t = -200 to +600°C
L6F and L6F/D: face-to-face EN 558 part 1, basic series 14, ISO
5752 series 14 H Nimonic 80A (high temp. above +425°C / +800°F)
Table 3 Pressure Rating Table 10 Seat Material
C Body ASME Class 150 Standard
D Body ASME Class 300 A Incoloy 825, hard chrome plated
F Body ASME Class 600 B W.no. 1.4418, hard chrome plated (AVESTA 248 SV)
F/D Body ASME Class 600, trim ASME Class 300 D F6NM, hard chrome plated (Nace) t= -75° to +425°C / -100° to
+800°F
Table 4 Seat Design
H Nimonic 80A, hard chrome plated, (high temp. above +425°C /
M Metal seat
+800°F)
B Metal seats, sizes 4" - 24" (only L6C & L6D), L6F 6"- 40"
Table 11 Packing material option
Table 5 Construction
G TA-Luft Graphite packing, Fire-safe.
N or 1N Standard in size range 4"-16" (L6C #150, L6D #300); T-max =
T TA-Luft PTFE packing, gland packing PTFE,tmax = +230°C /
(NACE) +425°C / +800°F. Bearings cobalt based alloy. Body and blind
+446°F
flange gaskets graphite. Bare shaft valve ATEX II 2 G c. Not
used in L6F/D or L6F E.g. L6CBN16PACAG/01 Table 12 Flange facing
U or 1U Metal bearings Nitronic 60. Body and blind flange gaskets - Ra 3,2 - 6,3. Covering: ASME B16.5 smooth finish, RMS 125-
(NACE) graphite. Gland packing PTFE or graphite. Drive shaft with key 250. EN 1092-1 Type B-1
way. Shafts hard chrome plated
Table 13 Flange drilling
C Cryogenic, T-min = -200°C / -330°F. Extended bonnet. All other
parts as construction U or N - According to ASME B16.5, no sign (4" - 24"). According to ASME
B16.47 series A (28" and up).
H High temperature, tmax = +600°C / +1112°F. Bearing surfaces
of shafts cobalt based alloy. Bearings cobalt based alloy. All soft B Acc. to ASME B16.47 Series B CLASS 150 & CLASS 300
seals graphite. Drive shaft with key way.
Table 6 Size (inches)
L6: ASME Class 150.
04, 05, 06, 08, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, 28, 30, 32, 36,
40,44,48, 52, 54, 56, 64, 72, 80
L6: ASME Class 300.
04, 05, 06, 08, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, 28, 30, 32, 36, 42,
48,56, 64
L6F/D: 04/03, 06/05, 08/06, 10/08, 12/10, 14/10, 16/12, 18/14,
20/16, 30/24
L6F: 06, 08, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24, 28, 30, 32, 36, 40
Table 7 Body Materials
A ASTM A 351 gr. CF8M Standard
P ASTM A 216 gr. WCB Standard
F ASTM A 352 gr. LCC


L12 Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles Neldisc® Series L12 is a wafer type metal seated high
performance triple eccentric disc valve. With close to equal percentage
characteristics and superior tightness Neldisc triple eccentric disc valves
operate both in control and shut-off applications.
FEATURES
• Third-generation, metal to metal seated Neldisc triple
eccentric disc valve.
• Designed especially for paper and pulp applications.
• Light weight & easy to install. Reliable Operation
• Compact overall design with minimal space demand. Reliability, uninterrupted operation and freedom from
• Can be mounted between all common pipe flanges. routine maintenance are some of the cost–saving
• Two-shaft construction and seat located in the body groove features this valve offers. The Neldisc L12 valve has
give high flow capacity and minimum flow resistance. a rugged body. Neither the forces in the pipeline nor
• Excellent tightness by using the renowned Neldisc seating thermal fluctuation have any effect on the operation or
principle. tightness of the valve. The rigid floating type stainless
• Bidirectionally tight construction where seating is steel metal seat with triple–offset elliptical disc, offers a
mechanically induced and does not rely on differential seating free of mechanical wear.The valve can handle
pressure. pulp stocks up to 2.5% in control service and up to
• Size range DN 80 - 1400, 3" - 56". 4% in on–off service. This covers almost 100% of the
• Pressure ratings PN 10, 16, 25 and ANSI 150. conditions under which butterfly valves operate in the
pulp and paper industry mill pipelines.
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6
XXX X X X X
Table 1 Product Series/Design Table 4 Body, Disc and Shaft Material

L12 Face-to-face length according to EN 558 Series 20, API 609, BS A Body and disc: stainless steel ASTMA 351 CF8M
5155 and SSG 1036 Shaft: SIS 2324
Table 2 Pressure Ratings Table 5 Seat Material
A Body rating A Stainless steel ASTM B 424 (Incoloy 825 + Hcr) DN 80-600
PN 50/ASME 300 DN 80-125
PN 25/ASME 150 DN 150-600 B W.no. 1.4418 + hard chrome DN 700-1400
DN 80–125 Δpmax = 25 bar / 363 psi, welded clamp ring Table 6 Gland Packing
DN150 Δpmax = 25 bar / 363 psi, welded clamp ring
DN 200 Δpmax = 20 bar / 290 psi, welded clamp ring - DN 80-600 PTFE standard packing (DN 700-1400 always with
DN 250–600 Δpmax = 10 bar / 145 psi, welded clamp ring the sign "T")
B Body rating T Live loaded PTFE V-ring packing with disc springs sets; TA-luft
DN 700-1400 PN25/ASME 150 tested and certified by TÜV
DN 700-1000 Δpmax = 10 bar / 145 psi, bolted clamp ring
G Live loaded graphite packing with disc springs sets; TA-luft
DN 1200-1400Δpmax = 6 bar / 87 psi, bolted clamp ring
tested and certified by TÜV
Table 3 Nominal Diameter
080-1400 080(3”), 100(4”), 125(5”), 150(6”), 200(8”), 250(10”), 300(12”),
350(14”), 400(16”), 500(20”), 600(24”), 700(28”), 800(32”),
900(36”), 1000(40”), 1200(48”), 1400(56”)

Skycera
A Ceramic Butterfly Valve

CBF Style
DESCRIPTION
The CBF Style is a ceramic butterfly valve. It is meant to operate
in the harshest control environments where abrasive slurries will
wear away standard materials over short time periods, leading
to unplanned outages and downtime. The ceramic materials are
applied to the most common problem areas within a butterfly
valve-the disc! These ceramic materials are 6-8 times harder
than stainless steels and the result is a control valve that
functions properly in a harsh, abrasive service environment.
FEATURES
• Excellent, cost effective control valve for aggressive media.
• Ceramics are nearly universally chemical resistant.
• Full control options, including 4-20 mA positioner and actuator.
• ANSI 150# and 300# Class angles are also available.
• Ceramic seat materials are selected on an application basis.
Options include alumina, zirconia, silicon carbide and others.
• Body materials are selected on an application basis.Options
include Super Duplex stainless steel, Hastelloy, stainless steel,
cast steel and others.
• Temparature rating up to 390°F (199°C)
• Sizes up to 12”
APPLICATIONS
• FGD media control valve
• Catalyst control
• Pneumatic transport

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Check Valves
C&C Industries
Check Valves A
Check Valves Check Valves
API 6D Check Ductile Iron
Valve Check Valve
Sizes: 2″ – 10″ Sizes: 1″ – 4″
Full Open – Piggable Pressure: 300 –
CS x SS x HNBR 2,000 PSI NSCWP
NACE MR-0175, API 6D, NACE Compliant
Fire Safe
Cast Steel WCB Check

Check Valve Valve
Sizes: 2″ – 12″ Sizes: 1″– 3″ @
ANSI 150 - 600 2,160 PSI NSCWP
*larger sizes and other 2″@ 3,000 PSI
ANSI classes available NSCWP
upon request NACE Compliant
200# Brass
Swing Check
Valve
Metal Seated
Sizes: ⅜″ – 4″
200 PSI NSCWP
300# Brass
Swing Check
Valve
O-Ring Style
Sizes: 1″ – 4″
300 PSI NSCWP

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Check Valves
Smith Valve
A Check Valves
DESCRIPTION
Smith check valves are manufactured in piston, ball and swing
configurations. All types of end connections and pressure
classes from 150 through 2500 are available. Smith’s offering
includes many material types: A105, LF2, F11, F5, F22,
F9, 316/316L, 304/304L, 316H, 304H, 317/317L, 321, 347,
347H, F51, F44, F20, I825, I600, and M400. All valves are
manufactured in accordance with all applicable API 602 and
ASME B16.34 standards.
Class Size Style

800 1/4" - 2" Ball, Threaded, Socket Weld
800 1/4" - 2" Piston, Threaded, Socket Weld
800 1/4" - 2" Swing, Threaded, Socket Weld
800 1/4" - 2" Y-Pattern Piston, Threaded, Socket Weld
800 1/4" - 2" Y-Ball Piston, Threaded, Socket Weld
1500 1/4" - 2" Ball, Threaded, Socket Weld
1500 1/4" - 2" Piston, Threaded, Socket Weld
150 1/2" - 2" Piston, Flanged
150 1/2" - 2" Ball, Flanged
For more in formation contact Rawson.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Control Valves
Cashco
Total TFE Globe Control Valve A

Model 521
DESCRIPTION
The Model 521 Globe-Style Control Valve sliding stem,
bellows sealed, pneumatically actuated valves are
designed to provide unequaled performance in long term
corrosive chemical service. The exclusive unibody forged-
TFE construction is unique in the industry and can handle
even absolute vacuum applications. The one-piece body
is machined from a solid block of isostatically compacted
virgin TFE and encased in a cast 304 SST body shell to
prevent distortion. Construction includes a 100,000-cycle
TFE bellows, quick change trim, replaceable plug and
dual stem seal design to minimize emissions. This valve
can handle strong acids and bases, most organics and
industrial reagents.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ½”, 1”, 1-½”, 2”
Maximum Cv From 0.10 to 40
Materials Isostatically compacted TFE in SST body shell
End connections 150# and 300# flanged
Temperature range 0°F to +310°F
Pressure drop From 10 to 275 psid
Seat leakage Class VI

A Rotary Globe Control Valve

Ranger QCT
DESCRIPTION
Ranger QCT is the most versatile, adaptable, and easily
maintainable valve ever produced. No other valve is more
user friendly.
The Ranger offers over 6 different trim combinations that

can easily be changed without disturbing the packing,
actuator, or positioner calibration. No other valve on the
market can handle cavitation or noise reduction as easily
or as economically!
A selection of 3 body materials with a broad temperature

range from -325°F to +750°F makes the Ranger adaptable
for use in steam, heat transfer fluids, slurries, gases,
liquids, and cryogenic applications. Ranger’s unique dual
seating design provides both Class VI and backup Class
IV seat leakage. And the standard patented live-loaded
packing system lets you check and adjust packing without
the need for specialized tools or complicated procedures.
The Ranger has a square shaft stem connection instead

of a spline shaft, so that it can be quickly and economically
adapted to other types of actuators including Cashco’s
Rotary Spring Diaphragm.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes 1”, 1-½”, 2”, 3”, 4”, 6”, 8”
Maximum Cν From 2.8 to 710
Materials - Body: DI, CS, SST
- Trim: Inconel X--750/625 metal seals TFE or Stellite
#6 plug
- Remaining parts: SST
- 6 trim combinations to select from
End connections Flanged in CS and SST and available in flangeless
Temperature range -325°F to +750°F
Pressure drop From 150 to 1400 psid
Seat leakage ANSI/FCI 70-2, Class VI with TFE
Class IV above 500°F or without TFE
Options: -Multiple low noise reduction trim and seal retainers
0.2, 0.4, 0.6 reduced trims, Anti-cavitation trim, abrasion
sleeve, smart positioners, packing designs
-NACE service
-Cryogenic service
-Pneumatic, electric, or manual actuators
Face to face: ISA-S75.04

Cyclonic Valve
Side-Entry Flanged Control & Choke Valves A

SFDAL Series
DESCRIPTION
Like all Cyclonic valves, the SFDAL Series is built with the Cyclonic Design Difference. When you need to control a wide
range of pressures and flow rates of gases or liquids, Cyclonic’s superior design gives you accurate control and a long
safe valve life.
FEATURES
• Machined from solid bar stock; no porosity, limitless possible lengths
• Pressure ratings up to 5000 psi MOP
• Xylan™ coated 17-4 stainless steel stem and disc driver
• Standard materials of API 4130 (75K) and 316SS, or customer-specified materials
• ANSI B16.34 and/or API 6A wall thickness and bolt loading
• Manual, electric, hydraulic or pneumatic actuation
• Open/close or modulating service
• Automated valves have selectable failure position
Call Rawson for sizing assistance.

Dyna-Flo
A Control Valves
Model 360
DESCRIPTION
The Model 360 control valve is a heavy-duty globe style control valve. These valves
are used in all kinds of demanding applications, including oil and gas production and
chemical process industries. Model 360 control valves are cage guided, single port
valves that can be used for either throttling or on-off control of either liquids or gasses.
The standard actuator for the Model 360 valve is a Dyna-Flo model DFC or DFO linear
actuator. These heavy-duty actuators are spring return diaphragm style, and can be
used for throttling or on-off service, with or without a valve positioner.
FEATURES
• Sour Service Capability - Available in standard configurations that comply with NACE
MR0175-2002
• Low Temperature Construction - LCC body material is standard on all Model 360
valves. Low temperature trim is a common option
• Versatility - A wide range of trim options including Low Noise and Anti-Cavitation make
the 360 our most versatile control valve
• Field Service Friendly - No special tools are required to change or inspect trim. Top
access makes in-line service easy.
• Pressure Drop Capabilities - Model 360 control valves can shut off against inlet
pressures equal to the ASME B16.34 rating.
• Industrial High Quality External Coatings - Our standard industrial high quality external
coatings provide long lasting resistance to the harshest environments.
SPECIFICATIONS
Configurations The Model 360 control valve is a high capacity single port, globe style valves, with a bolted type bonnet. The
standard valve plug action is push down to close. PTFE Seat and Metal Seat Available.
Size 1”, 1-½”, 2”, 3”, 4”, 6”, 8”
Rating ASME 150 / 300 / 600
Connections RF / RTJ - All Sizes
NPT - 1”, 1-½” and 2”
Maximum Inlet Temperature and Pressures Flanged valves consistent with ASME Class rating as per ASME B16.34, unless limited by either material
pressure and temperature limitations.
Maximum Pressure Drops Maximum pressure drop is the same as maximum inlet pressure unless otherwise rated by a specific trim
construction.
Standard Shut-off Classifications
In accordance with ASME / FCI 70.2 Metal Seated Standard Class IV
Class V-VI options available, consult Rawson.
Anti-Cavitation 1 Stage Trim Standard Class IV
Optional Class V
Anti-Cavitation 2 Stage Trim: Standard Class V
PTFE Seated Standard Air Test
(maximum leakage 0.05 ML/min/psid/inch port diameter)
NOTE: Standard Air Test is a special non-ASME/FCL leakage class.
Flow Direction Flow Down (Low Noise Trim - Flow Up)
Materials The standard body material is LCC. The standard bonnet material is LCC.CF8M and WCC are options.
For more information and other options contact Rawson.

Control Valves - Continued A

Model 570, 571, 573
DESCRIPTION
The Model 570 series segmented ball style control valve is used
in all kinds of demanding applications, in oil and gas production
and chemical process industries. It is also suited to high flow,
low pressure drop services. The 570 series is used in both
throttling and on/off control of liquids or gases.
The straight through unrestricted flow path provides higher
capacity than globe style valves. A splined shaft provides
accurate control in throttling operations and flexibility in
actuation options. The 570 series, when combined with a
Model DFR spring and diaphragm actuator, is a rugged control
valve assembly, to which a wide variety of positioners and
accessories can be mounted.
FEATURES
• Valve Sizes and Connections - The 2”, 3”, 4”, 6”, and 8” flangeless valves will mate ASME Class 150, 300, and 600
raised face flanges. The 2”, 3”, 4”, 6”, 8”, 10”, and 12” RF flanged 571 and 573 will mate with ASME Class 150 (571)
and 300 (573) raised face flanges.
• Maximum Temperatures - 800°F (427°C) Maximum with WCC body
• NACE Service - Trim and bolting materials are available for applications handling sour fluids and gases. These
construction materials comply with the recommendations of (NACE) National Association of Corrosion Engineers
MR0175.
• Easy Maintenance - A unique ball to shaft connection makes for easy disassembly, and reduces packing replacement
time as well. Replacing the ball seal is easily done by removing two screws.
• Lightweight Installation - The 570 series is a rugged, yet light weight flangeless ball valve that is designed to easily fit
in between ASME flanges.
• Adjustable Shaft Packing - The shaft to body interface is sealed to atmosphere by externally adjustable PTFE or
optional graphite packing rings. Live Loaded packing is available for reduced emissions.
• Field Reversible - The action of all valve and actuator combinations is easily changed between fail closed and fail
open without additional hardware.
SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum Pressure / Temperature Ratings Consistent with applicable pressure / temperature ratings per ASME B16.34
Maximum Allowable Shutoff Pressure Drop 750 psig (51.71 Bar) @ 100°F (38°C) (Standard Construction)
Material Temperature Capabilities Standard: -50°F to 450°F (-46°C to 232°C) LCC
Optional: High Temp -20°F to 800°F (-29°C to 427°C) WCC
Flow Direction Forward (through seal into ball)
Actuator Mounting Right-hand, or Left-hand (as viewed from seal end of valve). In one of 4 positions (12 (Std.), 3, 6, and 9 o’clock) with
respect to the valve body in a horizontal pipe
Maximum Ball Rotation 90 degrees
Shutoff Classification Composition Ball Seal: Class VI
Metal Ball Seal: Class IV
Classes and testing per ASME/FCI 70-2
Tested at the service pressure drop, or 50 psig (3.45 Bar), whichever is lower
For more information and other options contact Rawson.

M & J Valves
A Rotary Control Valve

Ball-Trol™
DESCRIPTION
The Ball-Trol rotary control valve is an unique ball valve design that exhibits full open¹, no pressure drop and excellent
control through tapered slots at the low end. This control valve operates with 90 degrees rotation and has up to a 350:1
control range. Low noise and anti-cavitation trims are available.This valve offers the highest Cv’s of any competitive
valve in the open position, yet gives modulating control over the full range of travel. This bi-directional valve is ideal for
controlling varying flow rates of gas, liquids and slurries.
FEATURES
• Oversized Ball – Enables the full open through port to be designed with a V-Slot
taper, which offers good control while rotating 90 degrees.
• Unobstructed Line Size¹ – High flow capacity (Cv) with minimum pressure drop
across the valve.
• Multi-Stage, Multi-Port Deflector Plates² – Designed to absorb pressure drop
across the valve in as opposed to a large, single drop. Plates make use of
resonant dampening to limit velocities and reduce both noise and cavitation.
These plates are located in the bore of the ball and will affect the full open Cv.
• Stem Sealing – Positively retained stem to allow removal of topworks with valve
under pressure. The design utilizes three seals to insure the integrity of the stem
seal. The primary seal is a backseated design using reinforced TFE, combined
with a secondary inner seal and an externally replaceable outer seal. Between
the inner and outer seal, a port with a check fitting is provided for integrity testing
and venting prior to outer seal removal.
• Double-Seated Trunnion Mounted Ball Valve – The pressure-energized upstream
seat is used as the sealing seat, and the downstream seat is used to guide the
flow.
• Bi-Directional Flow
• Body – Three piece, bolted body, trunnion mounted design providing ease of operation, low torque, and extended seat
seal life. The bolted body allows access for field service and maintenance. All major components are normally made
from forgings, allowing the use of widely accepted materials.
• Standard temperature – -20°F to 400°F
Maximum Cv Valves
Valve Sizes Inches (mm) Full-Bore (No V-Slots) V-Slot & V-Slot with Trim Parallel Plate
2” (50) 305 299 N/A
3” (80) 695 672 N/A
4” (100) 1,201 1195 N/A
6” (150) 2,700 2,689 971
8” (200) 5,120 3,903 1,409
10” (250) 8,010 6,098 2,201
12” (300) 11,550 8,781 2,750
16” (400) 20,500 15,811 4,566
20” (500) 31,900 24,392 7,014
24” (600) 44,100 35,124 10,143
1 The V-Slot without trim, the V-Slot with trim (in slot), and the full bore ball (no V-Slots) allows unobstructed flow in the full open position. The Parallel plate trim does
obstruct the flow in the full open position.
2 Patented

Rotary Control Valve - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10
X X X X X X X X X XX
Table 1 Model Table 6 Seat Face Seal

7 Ball-Trol Control Valve 1 Teflon (Std. ANSI 150-900)
Table 2 ANSI Pressure Class 2 Ryton (ANSI 1500 & up)
1 150 ANSI 4 NONE (Fixed seat design)
3 300 ANSI X Other
5 600 ANSI Table 7 Seals
6 900 ANSI V Viton (Std)
7 1500 ANSI N Buna-N
8 2500 ANSI E EPDM
X Other G VITON-GFLT
Table 3 End Connection H Low Temp Buna-N
4 RF X Other
5 RTJ Table 8 Fire Safe
X OTHER N No
Table 4 Body Materials of Construction Table 9 Ball Type
A CS (Standard) L Low Noise Trim & Anti-Cavitation Trim (V-Slot with Trim)
B 316 SS P Dirty Service Anti-Cav Trim (Parallell Plate)
C CS NACE S Standard (V-Slot)
D WCS-ENP T Full Bore (No V-Slot)
E CS Low Temp LF2 Table 10 Actuator / Signal
G CS Low Temp NACE P1 Pneumatic/3-15 psi
X Other P2 Pneumatic /4-20 MA
Table 5 Trim H2 Hydraulic/4-20 MA
A CS (Standard) E2 Electric/4-20 MA
B 316 SS w/17-4 stem XX Other
C CS-NACE
X Other

A Dump Control Valve

Model 5100
DESCRIPTION
The model 5100 “freezeless” dump valve is perfectly suited for fluid
control in oil and gas separators and other process vessels.
The valve body design allows the plug and seat to be constantly
submerged in the process media, thus giving the valve its “freezeless”
characteristic.
Mallard
FEATURES
• Compact valve size
• Stainless steel trim
• Threaded process connections
• NACE MR0175 compliance option
SPECIFICATIONS
Process connections 1" MNPT x 1/2" FNPT
1" MNPT x 1" FNPT
2" MNPT x 1" FNPT
Body Style “Freezeless” angle
Maximum operating pressure 2220 psig at 100 ˚F (38˚C)
Operating temperature range -40˚ to 200˚F (-40˚ to 93˚C)
Actuator
Air supply connection 1/4" FNPT
Action Reverse (fail close)
Effective area 35 sq. in.
Maximum supply pressure 50 psig
Trim characteristic Quick opening (on/off)
Port diameter / Flow coefficient (Cv) 0.38"/4.8 Cv 0.50"/ 8.3 Cv

Dump Control Valve A

Models 5126/5127
FEATURES
• Simple maintenance: Valve trim or the complete actuator assembly can be
quickly changed by simply removing the hammer nut and lifting the actuator
assembly off the valve body. Disassembly of the actuator or removal of the
valve from the line is not required. No special tools are required.
• Simple installation: Compact, lightweight design enables quick, easy
installation with minimal labor requirements.
• Variety of valve trims: Available in stainless steel (standard) or tungsten
carbide (optional) trim material, size ¼", ⅜" or ½".
• Bonnet safety pressure relief: Special design of hammer nut provides
warning indication if an attempt is made to remove the actuator while the
valve body is still under pressure.
• Variety of actuators: The spring-opposed diaphragm actuator is available in
adjustable and non-adjustable configurations for either reverse (fail close) or
direct (fail open) acting applications.
• Marine option: Makes this dump valve ideally suited for harsh marine
environments where corrosion and salt build-up are a problem. A
combination of stainless steel parts and special actuator preparation makes
the “marine option” a valuable feature.
• Materials of construction that comply with NACE MR0175 specifications are
available upon request.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body style Angle
Process connections 2" MNPT x 1" FNPT
Pressure rating 1500 psig at 100 ˚F (38˚C)
Maximum differential pressure 1500 psig
Assembled valve temperature range - 40 to 200˚F (-40˚ to 93˚C)
ANSI leakage rating Class IV

A 3-way Control Valve

Model 5300
FEATURES
• Variety of end connections: Available with female NPT threaded
connections, or flanged connections from ANSI 150 to ANSI 1500. ANSI
ratings above class 600 are available in either raised face (RF) or ring joint
(RTJ) style flange facing.
• Simple maintenance: Valve trim or the complete actuator assembly can be
quickly changed by simply removing the hammer nut and lifting the actuator
assembly off the valve body. Disassembly of the actuator or removing the
valve from the line is not required. No special tools are required.
• Valve trim is available in solid 316 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel with
TFE plug inserts for positive shut-off.
• Comes complete with a spring opposed diaphragm actuator which can be
set up to fail to the lower or upper port.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body style 1"
End connections FNPT
Available trim sizes 1" full port ¾" x ⅜" blow case
Flow characteristic Quick opening (on/off)
Pressure rating 4000 psig at 100˚F (38˚C)
Assembled valve temperature range -20 to 200˚F (-29 to 93˚C)
Valve Body Carbon Steel
Bonnet Carbon Steel
Hammer Nut Carbon Steel
Seat /Cage 316 Stainless Steel
Plug Solid 316 Stainless Steel
Valve Stem 303 Stainless Steel
Packing PTFE V-Ring
Seals Buna-N, Viton® (Optional)
Actuator Housing Steel
Diaphragm Nylon-Reinforced Nitrile
Actuator Spring Steel

3-way Control Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
5300 X X X X X XX X X X X X
Table 1 Body Size Table 6 Actuator Selection

1 1" 35 Size 35
Table 2 End Connections 70 Size 70
S Female NPT Table 7 Actuator Type
F Raised Face (RF) Flange D Direct Acting (Fails to Lower Port)
J Ring Type Joint (RTJ) Flange R Reverse Acting (Fails to Upper Port)
Table 3 ANSI Class (Pressure Rating) Table 8 Seal Material
1 ANSI 150 B Buna-N
3 ANSI 300 V Viton®
5 ANSI 1500 FNPT Ends (4000 psi @ 200°F) Table 9 Trim Material
6 ANSI 600 3 Solid 316 Stainless Steel
9 ANSI 900 Table10 Trim Size
Table 4 Materials of Construction A Full Port
– WCC Steel, Standard Service C 3/4" x 3/8" Blow Case Trim
N WCC Steel, NACE MR0175 Table11 Trim Characteristic
Table 5 Body Style Q Quick Opening (On/Off)
W 3-Way

A Open Yoke Control Valve

Model 5400
DESCRIPTION
Models 5400 open yoke control (dump) valve is designed to meet the high pressure and
erosive applications common to the oil and gas industry. This valve is ideally suited for
pressure, level, temperature, and flow control applications on separators, scrubbers,
wellheads and other oilfield equipment. The ease of maintenance, rugged steel
construction, flexibility to meet a wide variety of applications, and safety features make the
Model 5400/5450 control valve the preferred choice of production operators worldwide.
FEATURES
• Simple maintenance
• Compact, lightweight design enables quick, easy installation with minimum labor
requirements.
• Special design of hammer nut provides warning indication if an attempt is made to
remove the actuator while the valve body is still under pressure.
• Control valve trim is available in stainless steel or tungsten carbide to handle the most
difficult applications.
• Valve can be installed for either “flow up” or “flow down” operation, whichever best suits
the application.
• Ideal for offshore or coastal production facilities. For sour gas applications, materials
are available that comply with NACE MR0175 specifications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Available configurations Open yoke (Model 5400) Fail-open or fail-close
Flow characteristic Modified percent (throttling)
Quick opening (on/off)
Body styles Globe (1" & 2"), angle (2" only) & tee (1" only)
End connections FNPT, flanged, socket weld & butt weld
Pressure ratings 4000 psig from -40 to 200˚F (-40 to 93˚C)
3540 psig at 500˚F (260˚C)
Assembled valve temperature range Model 5400: -40 to 500˚F (-40 to 260˚C)
Available trim sizes ¼", ⅜", ½", ¾" & 1"
Shutoff classification ANSI class IV (Stainless steel or tungsten carbide trim)
Flow direction Either direction, to suit the application
Flow up (under the seat) recommended for throttling applications
Air pressure to actuator 3-15 spring 0 to 20 psig control signal recommended
6-30 spring 0 to 35 psig control signal recommended

Open Yoke Control Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12
54 XX X X X X X XX X X X X X
Table 1 Style Table 8 Actuator Type

00 Open Yoke R Reverse Acting (Spring Closes / Air Opens)
Table 2 Body Size D Direct Acting (Spring Opens / Air Closes)
1 1" Table 9 Seal Material
2 2" A Aflas®
Table 3 End Connections B Buna-N
S Female NPT E EPDM
F Raised Face (RF) Flange K Kalrez®
J Ring Type Joint (RTJ) Flange L Low-Temp Nitrile
W Socket Weld R HNBR
B Butt Weld V Viton®
Table 4 ANSI Class (Pressure Rating) Y Viton® GLT (Low-Temp)
1 ANSI 150 Table 10 Trim Material
3 ANSI 300 1 17-4PH SST
6 ANSI 600 2 Tungsten Carbide
9 ANSI 900 Table 11 Trim Size
5 ANSI 1500 FNPT, SW, BW Ends, 4000 psig at 200°F (93°C) 2 1/4"
Table 5 Materials of Construction 3 3/8"
– Carbon Steel, Standard Service 4 1/2"
M Carbon Steel, Marine Service 6 3/4"
N Carbon Steel, NACE MR0175 8 1"
P Carbon Steel, Marine Service and NACE MR0175 Table 12 Trim Characteristic
H Hi-Temp M Modified Percent (Throttling)
T Hi-Temp NACE Q Quick Opening (On/Off)
L Low-Temp
C Low-Temp NACE
Table 6 Body Style
G Globe
P Globe w/Tapped Pressure Ports
T Tee (1") or Angle (2")
Table 7 Actuator Selection
33 No. 35 Act. w/3-15 Spring

A Close Coupled Control Valve

Model 5450
DESCRIPTION
Model 5450 close-coupled control (dump) valve is designed to meet the high pressure
and erosive applications common to the oil and gas industry. This valve is ideally suited
for pressure, level, temperature, and flow control applications on separators, scrubbers,
wellheads and other oilfield equipment. The ease of maintenance, rugged steel
construction, flexibility to meet a wide variety of applications, and safety features make
Model 5450 control valve the preferred choice of production operators worldwide.
FEATURES
• Simple maintenance
• Compact, lightweight design enables quick, easy installation with minimum labor
requirements.
• Special design of hammer nut provides warning indication if an attempt is made to
remove the actuator while the valve body is still under pressure.
• Valve can be installed for either “flow up” or “flow down” operation, whichever best suits
the application.
• Ideal for offshore or coastal production.
SPECIFICATIONS
Available configurations Close-coupled (model 5450) Fail-open or fail-close
Flow characteristic Modified percent (throttling)
Quick opening (on/off)
Body styles Globe (1" & 2"), angle (2" only) & tee (1" only)
End connections FNPT, flanged, socket weld & butt weld
Pressure ratings 4000 psig from -40 to 200˚F (-40 to 93˚C)
3540 psig at 500˚F (260˚C)
Assembled valve temperature range Model 5450: -40 to 200˚F (-40 to 93˚C)
Available trim sizes ¼", ⅜", ½", ¾" & 1"
Shutoff classification ANSI class IV (Stainless steel or tungsten carbide trim)
Flow direction Either direction, to suit the application
Flow up (under the seat) recommended for throttling applications
Air pressure to actuator 3-15 spring 0 to 20 psig control signal recommended
6-30 spring 0 to 35 psig control signal recommended

Close Coupled Control Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
54 XX X X X X X XX X X X X X
Table 1 Style Table 7 Actuator Selection

50 Close-Coupled 33 No. 35 Act. w/3-15 Spring
Table 2 Body Size 36 No. 35 Act. w/6-30 Spring
1 1" 73 No. 70 Act. w/3-15 Spring
2 2" 76 No. 70 Act. w/6-30 Spring
Table 3 End Connections Table 8 Actuator Type
S Female NPT R Reverse Acting (Spring Closes / Air Opens)
F Raised Face (RF) Flange D Direct Acting (Spring Opens / Air Closes)
J Ring Type Joint (RTJ) Flange Table 9 Seal Material
W Socket Weld A Aflas®
B Butt Weld B Buna-N
Table 4 ANSI Class (Pressure Rating) E EPDM
1 ANSI 150 K Kalrez®
3 ANSI 300 L Low-Temp Nitrile
6 ANSI 600 R HNBR
9 ANSI 900 V Viton®
5 ANSI 1500 FNPT, SW, BW Ends, 4000 psig at 200°F (93°C) Y Viton® GLT (Low-Temp)
Table 5 Materials of Construction Table 10 Trim Material
– Carbon Steel, Standard Service 1 17-4PH SST
M Carbon Steel, Marine Service 2 Tungsten Carbide
N Carbon Steel, NACE MR0175 Table 11 Trim Size
P Carbon Steel, Marine Service and NACE MR0175 2 1/4"
H Hi-Temp 3 3/8"
T Hi-Temp NACE 4 1/2"
L Low-Temp 6 3/4"
C Low-Temp NACE 8 1"
Table 6 Body Style Table 12 Trim Characteristic
G Globe M Modified Percent (Throttling)
P Globe w/Tapped Pressure Ports Q Quick Opening (On/Off)
T Tee (1") or Angle (2")

A D-Series Control Valve

D Series
DESCRIPTION
The D-Series from Circor is the next generation of the reliable and proven control
valve. The D-Series is an all purpose cage-guided, balanced control valve. This new
product offers simplicity of design in a valve platform that is well suited for the needs
of power, process and general industry. A wider selection of valve sizes, materials
and noise /cavitation trims allows application across a broader range of flow rates,
pressures and temperatures.
FEATURES
• Standard valve trim consists of heat-treated, hardened 400 series SS, providing
max. hardness with excellent wear properties. In addition, 316SS is offered for
superior corrosion resistance. Seating surfaces can be additionally armored with
nickel/cobalt overlay (Stellite®) on 316SS trims.
• The balanced plug design equalizes line pressure under the plug with pressure
above the plug, effectively cancelling any unbalanced stem force due to pressure
drop.
• D-Series heavy cupwasher style PTFE plug seal has 3x the cross-sectional area/
wear surface of competing designs with minimal friction for tightest resolution.
• Clamped in place with a simple and reliable yoke lock nut, D-Series actuator
mounting guarantees ease of disassembly no matter how corrosive the
environment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body style Single seated top entry threaded/bolted bonnet, globe style body, cage guided
balanced plug
Size, ratings and end connections 2" thru 8": Class 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 RF, RTJ, BWE and SWE & NPT (in
2" only)
10" thru 16": Class 150, 300, 600 RF, BWE, RTJ
Body/bonnet materials Carbon steel (A216 Gr. WCC): -20 to 800˚F (-29˚C to 427˚C)
Low temp. carbon steel (A352 Gr. LCC): -50 to 800˚F (-46˚ C to 427˚C)
316 stainless steel (A351 Gr. CF8M): -50 to 1000˚F (-46˚C to 538˚C)
Chrome-Moly steel (A217 Gr. WC9): -20 to 1000˚F (-29˚C to 538˚C)
Stem packing Braided PTFE with Kevlar® filaments: -20.2˚F (-29˚C to 230˚C)
Graphite-2 anti-extrusion ring Grafoil®: -20.2˚F to 1050.8˚F (-29˚C to 566˚C)
Gaskets (Body/bonnet and seat ring/ Spiral wound 316L /graphite: 500˚F (260˚C) maximum
body) Flexible graphite: 1000˚F (538˚C) maximum
Trim Sizes Full port, 80%, 60% and 40% reduced port
Plug (piston) seal materials C300 spring loaded seal with Inconel® spring -up to 572˚F (300˚C) Class IV or V
Double carbon-graphite seal rings up to 1000˚F (538˚C) Class IV
Flow characteristics Equal percentage, linear with 1 and 2 stage noise and cavitation control
Shutoff class (FCI/ 70-2) Standard trim: -20˚ to 572˚F (-18 to 300˚C) = Class V to 800˚F (427˚C) = Class
IV
High temp. trim: to 1000˚F (538˚C) = Class IV
Actuators Standard: Multi-Spring and Diaphragm
Optional: Piston-Double Acting/Spring Return, Hydraulic, Electric, Electro-
Hydraulic

Neles
V-Port Segment Valve A

R Series
DESCRIPTION
In many pulp applications, 8-19% medium consistency is used to achieve cost
savings or technical benefits in the process. The medium consistency pump,
is basically a centrifugal pump with an open impeller. It acts as a turbulence
generator fluidizing the pulp at the inlet. A normal head is up to 492 feet and pulp
flow is controlled by means of a valve mounted directly on the pump discharge
flange.
There are two basic ways to run the pumps, as variable speed pumps or static
head pumps. There is clear difference in how to use the medium consistency
valves with these two pump styles. With a variable speed pump, it is important to
run the pump with a fully 90 degree open valve. The Valve will be throttled only
when the pressure differential over the valve goes below the critical point that
creates the danger of blocking the valve. This can happen only at very low pump
speeds. The other case is the conventional method, whereby the static head of
the pump is controlled by means of a medium consistency valve. In these cases
the valve opening is typically limited to 70 degrees, to ensure that the pressure
differential over the valve stays above critical level.
Metso has created a specially designed V-port segment valve for this highly visible application. This specially designed
V-port segment valve provides an optimized flow path for medium consistency pulp. The flow path in the valve is
continuously increased to eliminate restrictions where material may build up. The outlet flange is one size bigger than
the inlet to ensure this. Additionally, the body is equipped with a flushing connection. The flow path is V-contoured to be
able to control small capacities without risk of dewatering.
FEATURES
• One piece body construction with no flange rings, inserts, Maximum Valve Body Rating (bar/psi)
or end caps that create potential leak paths. Temperature
DIN PN 25 ASME Class 150
°C / °F
• Energized pressure seal design ensures correct contact Stainless Steel Titanium
between the seat and segment at all times. Seating -30 to 27°C/
19.0 / 275 36.5 / 530
capabilities are totally unaffected by pipeline forces, -20 to 100°F
which assures more reliable valve operation. 93°C / 200°F 16.6 / 240 30 / 435*
• Both trunnion bearings are located inside the valve body. 149°C / 300°F 14.8 / 215 —
Having the lower shaft bearing inside the body provides 204°C / 400°F 13.4 / 195 —
a larger bearing area, lower bearing loads, and longer 250°C / 482°F 12.0 / 174 —
bearing life.
* Rating at 100°C / 212°F
• Low seat torque requirements combined with compact
actuator designs result in a lower cost total package.

A V-Port Segment Valve - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
XX X X X X X X
Table 1 Product Series Table 5 Body Screws

R2 Flanged, reduced bore C CG8M (AISI 317) A4-80 / B8M
Table 2 Pressure Rating T Titanium Titanium
J PN 10 U CK3MCuN CK3MCuN
K PN 16 Table 6 Segment
L PN 25 J SIS 2324 (AISI 329) + hard chrome plating
M PN 40 C CG8M (AISI 317) + hard chrome plating
C AMSE 150 T Titanium + ceramic coating
D ASME 300 U CK3MCuN + ceramic coating
R JIS 10 K Table 7 Shafts, Pins / Bearings
S JIS 16 K J SIS 2324 (AISI 329) / PTFE
T JIS 20 K T Titanium / PVDF
Table 3 Construction U 254SMo / PTFE
S High-consistency version, drive shaft with keyway Table 8 Seat
Table 4 Size K 316 + Cobalt based hard facing, back seal PTFE lip seal
DN: 050/080, 080/100, 100/150, 150/200, 200/250, 250/300, U Titanium, back seal virgin PTFE lip seal
300/350, 350/400, 400/450
Inch: 02/03, 03/04, 04/06, 06/08, 08/10, 10/12, 12/14, 14/16, 16/18

Rotary Globe Control Valve A

ZX Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles Rotary Globe control valve is designed to control a wide range of
process liquids, gases and vapors. Its reliable and rugged construction with variety
of different trim choices makes the Neles Rotary Globe an ideal choice for general,
difficult and even severe service control valve applications in a wide range of
industries.
The optimized design results in reliability and control stability and also reduces
lifetime costs and maintenance needs. The latest technology intelligent valve
controller ensures that the control performance is in the highest class and the
user-friendly software with online diagnostics enables true predictive maintenance
capabilities.
FEATURES
• The construction combines all the benefits of a linear globe valve and a rotary control valve
• Modular design with variety of interchangeable trims selections
• Balanced and low noise trims for higher pressure drop application
• Wide material selection for severe service applications
• Meets all the requirements of both ASME and EN standards
• Fire safe tested and certified according to API 607 5th edition
• Stem anti-blowout construction ensures safety in operation and during maintenance
• Rugged one piece body construction minimizes potential leak paths and makes the valve insensitive to pipe stress
• Fulfills NACE requirements as option
• Suitable for liquid, gas and vapor applications in all industry areas
• Top entry design enables inline service
SPECIFICATIONS
Product Type Flanged, Rotary Globe Control Valve
Pressure Ratings ASME Class 150 - 1500
PN10-PN100
Size Range ½" - 4" / DN15 - 100
Temperature Range -80°C to +425°C / -110°F to +800°F
Face-to-Face ANSI/ISA 75.08.01 - 2002, ASME Class 150 - 600
ANSI/ISA 75.08.06 - 2002 (long dimension), ASME Class 900 - 1500
Tightness Classification IEC 60534-4 Class III - IV (water)
Standard Materials CF8M and WCC
Optional Materials Hastelloy C, Alloy 20, WC6, CF8

A Rotary Plug Control Valve

Finetrol Series FC and FG
DESCRIPTION
Finetrol® eccentric rotary plug valves are economical high performance control valves
designed to provide the best possible control accuracy and wide rangeability with the
all inherent benefits of rotary control valves. Standard units are equipped with spring-
diaphragm actuators and ND9000® intelligent valve controllers for precise flow control,
extended operational life and performance monitoring online.
FEATURES
• Choice of body lengths to directly replace both globe style and rotary style valves with
a one piece body construction
• Full conformity to both ASME and EN standard requirements
• The plug shape of the Finetrol valve is engineered to offer a constant gain expanded
to a full 90° rotation
• Fire tested and certified
• Anti-blowout feature is achieved by enlarged stem diameter
• Rugged one-piece-body construction minimizes potential leak paths and makes the
valve insensitive to pipe stress
• Seat can be removed without valve disassembly
• Fulfills NACE MR0103-2003 requirements
• Plug shape provides balanced dynamic torque
• High rangeability minimizes need for reduced Cv-trim and trim changes
PRESSURE RATINGS & FLANGE COMPATIBILITY

Size ASME Flanged
inch Class 150* Class 300 Class 600****
1 x x x
1½ x x x
2 x x x
3 x x x
4 x x x
6 x x x
8 x** x x
10 x** x x
x = Available
* In ASME 150 valve, the flange drilling is according to Class 150, while flange
thickness according to ASME 300
** In 8 and 10 inch sizes the flange drilling is according to Class 150, while flange
flange thickness and face-to-face is according to ASME 300
*** The flange drillings are acc. to EN, while the body is acc. to ASME (in DN 200
- 250 and PN 63 - 100).
**** In size 2” - 10”, there are 1-2 threaded flange drillings in the valve neck area.
TEMPERATURE RANGES
WCC/1.0619 Body CF8M/1.4408 Body CF8M Low Temperature/Cryo
-20 to +800 °F* -110 to +800 °F* -328 °F**
Graphite (PTFE lubricated) packing is recommended above 250 °C / 480 °F and for
firesafe applications.
* Standard construction, no extension pipe needed.
** Extension pipe needed.

Rotary Plug Control Valve - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
XX XX X X XX XX XX XXX X
Table 1 Valve Series Stem Material/

Table 7 Plug Coating Bearing
Type
FC Finetrol rotary control valve, flanged face-to-face acc. to ASME/
ISA S75.04 KB CF8M Cobalt based 17-4PH, Nitrated 17-4PH,
hard facing Keyway Nitrated
FG Finetrol rotary control valve, flanged, face-to-face acc. to ASME/
ISA S75.03 (globe valve face-to-face) Back Bonnet
Table 8 Seat Type Seat Material Packings
Seal Seal
Table 2 Connection Size
SGT S, Cv 100% 1"-4": XM-19, Graphite V-ring Graphite
01 1"
6"-10": 316 + PTFE
1H 1 ½" cobalt based
hard facing
02 2"
SGG S, Cv 100% 1"-4": XM-19, Graphite Graphite Graphite
03 3" 6"-10": 316 +
04 4" cobalt based
hard facing
06 6"
RGT R, Cv 50% 1"-4": XM-19, Graphite V-ring Graphite
08 8" 6"-10": 316 + PTFE
10 10" cobalt based
hard facing
Table 3 Pressure Ratings
RGG R, Cv 50% 1"-4": XM-19, Graphite Graphite Graphite
C ASME Class 150* 6"-10": 316 +
cobalt based
D ASME Class 300
hard facing
F ASME Class 600 (1"-6" Full Rated)
Table 9 Studs Nuts
* For 8" and 10" flange drillings with threads
D* B8M 8M
Table 4 End Connection Style
F ** L7M 2HM
W ASME B16.5, 0.06" Raised face, Smooth finish (Ra 3.2-6.3 / AARH
125-250) * Bolting material for stainless steel body.
** Bolting material for carbon steel body.
Table 5 Application and/or Construction
TA General and Fire Safe, Live loaded single packing, FTO, TA-Luft
tested and certified by TÜV.
TB General and Fire Safe, Live loaded single packing, FTC, TA-Luft
tested and certified by TÜV.
QT Q-trim FTO, Live loaded single packing
Table 6 Body Insert Bonnet Gland
S6 CF8M 316 SS CF8M 316 SS
J1 WCC 316 SS WCC 316 SS

Robertshaw
A Diaphragm Control Valves

VC-210B Series
DESCRIPTION
Model VC-210B diaphragm control valves are compact, ruggedly constructed and
especially designed for the control of water, steam, gas, vacuum, etc. Valves are
single seated, bellows sealed to prevent stem leakage, and may be selected to
have the valve action, seating materials and flow characteristics needed for most
control applications.
FEATURES
• Full Ported or Low Flow Designs
• Direct- and Reverse-Acting Valve Styles
• Molded Diaphragms
• "Packless" Stem Seal
• Two-Way and Three-Way Valves
SPECIFICATIONS
Actuator Assembly
Nominal Size 10 sq. in.
Action Direct acting. Increasing air pressure moves stem downward
Nominal Travel 3/8" (9.6 mm)
Maximum Air Pressure 30 psi (2.0 bar)
Maximum Ambient Temperature 180°F (82°C)
Air Connection 1/8" NPT, female
Materials of Construction: Diaphragm: Molded EPDM
Housing & Frame: Die cast aluminum, irridite finished for corrosion resistance, painted bronzeless gold
Spring: Zinc plated alloy steel
Valve Assembly
Action Direct (Provides air-to-close action with actuator)
Reverse (Provides air-to-open action with actuator)
3-way (Top port normally closed)
Valve Body Assembly Ratings 100 psi at 350°F (6.9 bar at 177° C)
End Connections Female NPT inlet and outlet.
Seal Ring 316 Stainless Steel, replaceable in 2-way body. Integral brass seats in 3-way body
Materials of Construction Body: Brass
Trim: 316 Stainless Steel in 2-way valves. Brass in 3-way valves.
Primary Packing: Nickel plated beryllium copper bellows
Secondary Packing: Buna-N “O” ring

Diaphragm Control Valves A

Model VC-210 Mini Max
DESCRIPTION
Model VC-210 Mini-Max control valves are built with stainless steel
investment castings and especially designed for the control of water,
steam, gas, vacuum etc. Valves are single seated, bellows sealed to
prevent stem leakage, and may be selected to have the valve action,
seating materials and flow characteristics needed for most control
applications.
FEATURES
• Full ported or low flow designs
• Direct and reverse-acting valve styles 1/2”, 3/4” and 1”.
• Molded reinforced diaphragms
• "Packless" bellows stem seal
• Two-way and three-way valves
• Stainless steel investment castings and trim
• Available with 1/4 in. internal trim
SPECIFICATIONS
Actuator Assembly
Nominal Size 10 sq. in.
Action Direct acting. Increasing air pressure moves stem downward
Nominal Travel 3/8" (9.6 mm)
Maximum Air Pressure 30 psi (2.0 bar)
Maximum Ambient Temperature 180°F (82°C)
Air Connection 1/8" NPT, female
Materials of Construction: Diaphragm: Molded Buna-N 2 ply reinforced
Housing & Frame: Die cast aluminum, irridite finished for corrosion resistance, painted bronzeless
gold
Spring: Zinc plated alloy steel
Valve Assembly
Action Direct (Provides air-to-close action with actuator)
Reverse (Provides air-to-open action with actuator)
3-way (Top port normally closed)
Valve Body Assembly Ratings 200 psig for stainless steel bodies at 350°F (13.8 bar at 177°C)
End Connections Female NPT inlet and outlet
Seat Ring 316 Stainless Steel, replaceable
Materials of Construction: Body & Trim: 316 Stainless Steel
Primary Packing: 316 Stainless Steel bellows
Secondary Packing: Spring loaded Teflon chevrons

SPX Copes-Vulcan
A Severe Duty (SD) Control Valve

DESCRIPTION
SD-Severe Duty control valve assemblies feature a straight through globe and
angle style body design with single web internal construction. The valve body
is designed with high structural integrity, large interior flow passageways and a
large capacity bowl to accommodate an extensive variety of trim designs while
allowing maximum recovery within the valve. The massive amount of body and
bonnet material utilized and the thick cross sectional areas allow the SD valve
to withstand the most severe operational conditions.
The valve is available in sizes .75–20” (20–500mm) and ASME pressure
Classes 150 through 4500 standard. Larger sizes are available as required.
Typically of cast construction, all standard castable materials are available.
When necessary, due to customer preference or technical requirements,
forgings are utilized for both body and bonnet. Depending upon size and
pressure class, ends are available as threaded, flanged or welded.
FEATURES
• Quick disconnect between valve stem and actuator yoke on most models that
greatly simplifies service and inspection.
• An extensive array of standard trims is available including many previously offered
only as custom designs.
• Shorter lead times/quicker delivery of both entire valve assemblies and
replacement parts.
• A wide variety of trims is available for SD-Severe Duty Control Valves. They
are designed to match virtually any severe duty/ critical service operational
requirement. All SD trims feature a quick-change design to reduce downtime for
inspection, maintenance or change out, and most are cage guided, further ensuring
smooth, accurate operation. The majority of the trim line is interchangeable
between like sizes, and many reduced trims are also available as standard.

Severe Duty (SD) Control Valve - Continued A
TRIM TYPES RAVEN HUSH™ TRIM ONE STAGE HUSH CASCADE
Description/ Raven is Copes- HUSH Trim One Stage Hush trim This trim style is a
Application Vulcan’s top-of-the- (multiple is a specialty trim cage guided plug
line high performance stage) is a high designed to reduce throttling trim designed
specialty trim that performance noise associated with primarily for high
offers a proven specialty trim compressible fluids as pressure drop water
solution for those that is cage well as to reduce the applications where
severe service guided and undesirable effects of cavitation, vibration and
applications where a provides excellent flashing and cavitation excessive wear occur
true velocity control control for both that would occur with with conventional trims.
trim is the best or compressible and most single pressure The tapered plug fits
possibly the only noncompressible drop trims.The Hush into a cage and seat
answer. By limiting the fluid applications. cage consists of a with a matching taper,
fluid velocities inside By directing the single cylinder with a thus small changes in
the valve, Raven’s flow through a large number of radially flow area occur with
stacked disc design series of staged drilled orifices. The respect to plug travel
precludes problems pressure drops, fluid exits the orifices resulting in extremely
typically associated this unique as low energy jets high rangeability. The
with high velocity trim eliminates resulting in significant labyrinth grooves
such as erosion, cavitation in liquid reductions in noise machined into the plug’s
noise, vibration and flow and provides or erosion. Although taper create a series of
poor control. Every multiple pressure numerous standard orifices which reduces
Raven trim is custom breakdown for designs are available, the total pressure drop
designed to meet the noise attenuation One Stage Hush is often in a series of stages.
needs of the toughest in critical pressure custom engineered It is especially suited
liquid, steam and drop compressible to provide various to applications where
gas services in the fluid application. It flow characteristics or small flow rates must be
power and process is designed for all optimal performance controlled accurately.
industries. valve sizes. under specific operating
conditions.
Standard FCI 70-2/ Class lV standard Class lV standard Class IV standard Class IV standard
ANSI Rated Seat Class V optional Class V optional Class V optional Class V optional
Leakage *Class VI optional *Class VI optional *Class VI optional
Standard Trim Linear standard, Linear standard, Linear standard Specials Special
Characteristic Specials optional Specials optional optional
Typical Flow Under the seat Under the seat Under the seat Under the seat
Direction Over the seat Over the seat
Maximum 200:1, Or greater as 35-50:1 35-100:1 200:1
Rangability required

A Steam Turbine Bypass Valve

Model DSCV-SA
DESCRIPTION
The DSCV-SA (Direct Steam Converting Valve - Steam Atomization) is a leading,
world class product that embraces the demands of operational excellence, very tight
shut off, eliminates thermal shocks, high rangeability, size and installation flexibility
combined with low maintenance.
The Copes-Vulcan Pressure Reducing and Desuperheating Valve known as the
DSCV-SA, is of angle style construction with the steam inlet through the branch
connection and the steam outlet through the in-line connection. The connections
can be either flanged or butt welded depending upon the customer preference. The
units are manufactured in two parts to allow for greater customer flexibility. The high
pressure side of the unit is of cast or forged construction with the lower pressure
outlet section being of fabricated construction.
FEATURES
• Repeatable Class V tight shutoff
• High pressure balanced
• Full plug guiding with anti-rotation
• Steam atomisation of the cooling water
• Low coolant pressure required
• High water capacity for large cooling duties
• High turndown ratio for both steam and water
• Noise attenuating trim options
• Extremely flexible
• Low maintenance
• ‘Quick-Change’ trim design no special tools

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Gate Valves
ITT
Transmitter Isolation Valve A

C132 Fabri-Valve®
DESCRIPTION
The Fabri-Valve C132 transmitter isolation valve is designed specifically
to isolate an instrument transmitter from a tank. This allows transmitter
replacement or maintenance of the transmitter without disrupting the process
or draining the vessel. A special tank side flange permits blind boltup from
the tank exterior. This is accomplished by moving the upper flange holes
outboard. They remain on the ANSI 125/150 bolt circle but are now located
closer to the horizontal centerline. Fabri-Valve transmitter isolation valves are
designed to fit installations where the upper tank flange bolts are located 25°
to 27° above the horizontal centerline. The transmitter side flange bolting is
a standard ANSI 125/150 configuration. The Fabri-Valve transmitter isolation
valve is available in two configurations; the C132R features the Fabri-Valve
solid cast stainless steel body with heavy duty cast ductile iron yoke and
packing follower. The C132S features a solid cast stainless steel body with
heavy duty cast stainless steel yoke, and packing follower, and all stainless
steel bolting. Standard body materials are 316 and 317L stainless steel.
Special materials such as 254 SMO® are also available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Range 3”
Pressure Rating 150 psi (10.3 bar) CWP (cold working pressure)
Temperature Rating 450°F (232°C) with standard packing. Consult Rawson for higher temperatures.
Flanges Drilling Outlet ANSI 125/150 drilling, Inlet special
Model C132R Model C132S
Body and Chest Cast stainless steel type 316 or 317L Cast stainless steel type 316 or 317L
Seat Integrally cast (optional “O” ring) Integrally cast (optional “O” ring)
Gate Stainless steel of same grade used in body, finished to 63 RMS Stainless steel of same grade used in body, finished to63 RMS
Yoke Ductile iron Cast 304 stainless steel
Yoke Bolting Plated steel Stainless steel
Packing Acrylic/PTFE Acrylic/PTFE
Packing Follower Ductile iron w/plated steel bolting 304 stainless steel w/stainless steel bolting
Stem Nut Acid resistant bronze Acid resistant bronze
Lubrication Fitting Plated steel Plated steel
Ratchet Operator Cast iron/carbon steel Cast iron/carbon steel
Operator Retaining Nut Malleable iron Malleable iron

A Heavy Duty Knife Gate Valve

C37/F37 Fabri-Valve®
DESCRIPTION
Fabri-Valve C37 and F37 are some of the most popular knife gate
valve configurations. C37 knife gate valves through 24”, feature a
heavy duty, rugged one-piece cast body, chest and flanges (except
5”, which is fabricated – F37). Sizes larger than 24” are fabricated
from heavy plate. The C/F37 is available in all stainless steel
(designated “S”) or with alloy steel wetted parts and carbon steel
external parts (designated “R”). In sizes 1.5” through 24”, the “S” and
the “R” share the same solid cast body. Sizes larger than 24” feature
fabricated bodies configured to the service conditions. The C/F37
is available with the widest range of seats in the industry including:
integral metal, replaceable hardfaced metal, rubber “D” ring,
replaceable rubber, polyurethane, UHMW-P, and PTFE. Standard
body materials include 304, 316, and 317L stainless steel. Special
alloys such as 254 SMO® are also available. Special flange drillings
are also available.
C37R & F37R C37S & F37S
Body and Chest 1.5” – 24”(except 5”) solid one piece. 1.5” - 24” (except 5”) solid one piece.
C37R-304: Cast 304 stainless steel C37S-304: Cast 304 stainless steel
C37R-316: Cast 316 stainless steel C37S-316: Cast 316 stainless steel
C37R-317L: Cast 317L stainless steel C37S-317L: Cast 317L stainless steel
Larger than 24” and the 5” are fabricated with Larger than 24” and the 5” are fabricated of all
stainless steel wetted parts and carbon steel stainless steel
exterior parts.
Seat Integral seat to 1500°F (816°C) with appropriate packing
RH: Replaceable hardfaced seat to 750°F (399°C) standard
Up to 1600°F(871°C) with proper packing and gaskets
RT: Replaceable PTFE seat to 400°F (204°C)
RW: Replaceable UHMWP seat to 140°F (60°C)
RP: Replaceable polyurethane seat to 180°F (82°C)
Gate Stainless steel of same grade used in body, finished to 32 RMS
Yoke 1.5” - 4”, Cast ductile iron 1.5” - 4”, cast 304 stainless steel
6” and above fabricated carbon steel 6” and above fabricated 304 stainless steel
Yoke Fasteners Plated steel Stainless steel
Stem 304 stainless steel 304 stainless steel
Stem Nut Acid resistant bronze Acid resistant bronze
Lubrication Fitting Plated steel Plated steel
Packing Acrylic/PTFE/silicone 1 Acrylic/PTFE/silicone 1
Packing Follower Ductile iron/carbon steel with plated steel bolts 304 stainless steel with stainless steel bolts
Handwheel Cast iron Cast iron
Handwheel Retaining Nut Malleable iron Stainless steel
Tab Washer Stainless steel Stainless steel
1
Energized cored packing is standard with 6” (DN150) and larger C37 valves and all F37 valves.

Heavy Duty Knife Gate Valve - Continued A

SPECIFICATIONS
Size Range 1.5” – 96”
Pressure Rating 1.5” – 24”: 150 psi (10.3 bar) CWP (cold working pressure)
25” – 48”: Designs available in 50 psi (3.5 bar), 100 psi (6.9 bar) or 150 psi (10.3 bar) CWP
Larger than 48”: Manufactured to customer specification
Temperature Rating 1.5” – 48” 450°F (232°C). Service temperatures above 400°F (204°C) require high temperature fasteners.
Specify service temperature on paperwork.
Consult Rawson for sizes larger than 48”(DN 1200) and for service temperatures up to 1500°F (816°C).
Flange Drilling ANSI 125/150
Model C37 Model F37
Maximum Pressure/Temperature Ratings Pressure/Temperature Rating
Temp Cast Temp A516

Cast Cast Cast Cast Cast Cast 304 304L 316 316L 317L A 36
304 304L 316 316L 317L
WCB
DI Gr70
A-216 (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
°F °C (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi) °F °C (psi)
(psi)
150 66 150 133 150 133 150 150 150
150 66 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
200 93 133 114 141 113 135 137 150
200 93 142 142 150 150 135 150 150
250 121 126 108 133 107 128 135 150
250 121 135 135 142 142 128 150 147
300 149 120 102 124 101 121 133 150
300 149 129 129 134 134 121 150 143
350 177 115 98 119 97 116 131 150
350 177 123 123 128 128 116 150 139
400 204 110 93 114 93 112 128 150
400 204 118 118 123 123 112 150 135
450 232 107 90 110 90 108 125 150
450 232 114 114 118 118 108 150 131
500 260 103 87 106 87 105 121 150
500 260 111 111 114 114 105 150 127
600 316 97 82 101 83 100 111 150
600 316 104 104 108 108 100 150 119
700 371 94 80 97 80 96 108 142
700 371 101 101 104 104 96 142
800* 427* 89 77 93 77 92 103
800 427 96 96 100 100 92 103
900* 482* 87 92 57
900 482 93 99 57
1000* 538* 83 90 21
1000 538 89 97 21
1100* 593* 78 88
1100 593 64 76
1200* 649* 49 59
1200 649 41 46
1300* 704* 30 33
1300 704 28 29
1400* 760* 18 18
1400 760 20 20
1500* 816* 11 10
1500 816 15 14
Note:The tables above are the Maximum Pressure/Temperature Ratings for the metallic components only. When checking pressure/temperature ratings, check the tem-
perature rating and chemical compatibility of the packing material and, if applicable, the resilient seat material. In a majority of knife gate valve designs, the temperature
limit or the chemical compatibility of the seat and/or packing material determines the practical pressure/temperature limitations.
* “R” Series valves have external, non-wetted, carbon steel components.
Standard “R” Series valves are limited to 700°F (371°C); however alternate “R” Series constructions are available to 1000°F (538°C)

A Ductile Iron Knife Gate Valve

C45 Fabri-Valve®
DESCRIPTION
The basic Fabri-Valve® C45 features a solid ductile iron or carbon steel body
with an integral cast metal seat. However, this valve is most often used with
the patented, pop-in style replaceable seats, which are available in a variety of
rubbers, polyurethane, UHMW-P, TFE, and hard-faced metal. The pop-in seats
feature a much larger cross section and seating area than conventional knife gate
valve seats thus providing a seating surface far removed from the flow stream.
Replaceable seats offer a unique advantage; abrasion resistance, long seat life,
and the convenience of easy seat replacement.
SPECIFICATIONS
Size Range 2” – 24”
Pressure Rating 150 psi (10.3 bar) CWP (cold working pressure)
Temperature Rating Maximum temperature 250°F (121°C). See Materials of Construction. Service temperatures
above 400°F (204°C) require high temperature fasteners.
Flange Drilling Flat faced ANSI 125/150
Maximum Pressure/Temperature Ratings

Temp Cast Steel Cast Ductile Iron
°F °C (psi) (psi)
150 66 150 150

200 93 150 150
250 121 150 147
300 149 150 143
350 177 150 139
400 204 150 135
450 232 150 131
500 260 150 127
600 316 150 119
700 371 142
800 427 103
900 482 57
1000 538 21
Note: The table above is the Maximum Pressure /Temperature Ratings for the
metallic components only. When checking pressure/temperature ratings, check
the temperature rating and chemical compatibility of the packing material and, if
applicable, the resilient seat material. In a majority of knife gate valve designs,the
temperature limit or the chemical compatibility of the seat and/or packing material
determines the practical pressure/temperature limitations.

Ductile Iron Knife Gate Valve - Continued A

Body and Chest Ductile Iron (A536 GR 65-45-12)
Flanges Ductile Iron (A536 GR 65-45-12)
Seat Rating Integral metal, D-ring, or replaceable
With integral seat 500°F (260°C)
With RW seat 140°F (60°C)
With RP seat 180°F (82°C)
With RH seat 550°F (288°C) standard, 650°F
(343°C) with special packing.
With RT seat 400°F (204°C)
Gate 304 Stainless Steel finished to 63 RMS
Yoke Carbon Steel
Yoke Bolting Plated Steel
Packing Acrylic/PTFE/Silicone1
Packing Follower Ductile Iron w/plated steel bolting
Stem 304 Stainless Steel
Stem Nut Acid Resistant Bronze
Lubrication Fitting Plated Steel
Handwheel Cast Iron
Handwheel Retaining Nut Malleable Iron
Tab Washer Stainless Steel
1
Energized cored packing is standard with 6” (DN150) and larger C45 valves

A Drilling Fluid Valve

C45-DFV Fabri-Valve®
DESCRIPTION
The C45-DFV Fabri-Valve is a pneumatically actuation control valve that is able to
withstand harsh drilling fluid system requirements. The PTFE Graphite braided packing
keeps its sealing surface memory. The DFV also utilizes a first row of Kevlar packing
to act as a wiper – protecting the packing from abrasive drilling fluid. Replaceable
seats extend the life of the drilling fluid system valves and an unobstructed flow
design reduces the potential for pump damage caused by back pressure and volume
restrictions. Full port design offers 40% greater flow than a butterfly valve and replaces
a butterfly valve with no dimensional changes. As a result these valves can extend the
life of centrifugal pumps by increasing flow and eliminating damage that can occur from
back pressure. Fabri-Valve DFV is available in a variety of materials of construction
as well as handwheel, gear operator, double acting air cylinder, spring return cylinder,
hydraulic cylinder or electric operator configurations.
FEATURES
• Maximum temperature 250°F (121°C)
• Long lasting replaceable seats
• Reduces pump damage caused by back pressure and volume restrictions
• Flow capacity - 40% greater than conventional butterfly valves
• Zero leakage of fluid at 0-150 psi (10.3 bar)
• Positive shut-off at 0-150 psi (10.3 bar) in both directions with dual seats
• Replaces butterfly valve with no dimensional changes
• Seat flush ports are standard
• Ease of automation
• Safe remote operation away from hard-to-access areas

Orbinox
Transmitter Isolation Valve A

KP Model
DESCRIPTION
Orbinox KP valve provides isolation of an instrument level transmitter
from a storage tank. Installation of this valve allows for transmitter
replacement or maintenance without disruption of the process or
draining of the vessel.
FEATURES
• Body: Wafer style cast stainless steel monoblock with raised face.
Internal cast-in gate wedges and guides allow for tighter shut-off.
Full bore design for greater flow capacity and minimal pressure drop.
Internal design avoids any build-up of solids that would prevent valve
from closing.
• Gate: Stainless steel gate as standard. Gate is polished on both sides
to avoid jamming and seat damage. The bottom of the gate edge is
machined to a bevel to cut through solids for a tighter seal in the closed
position.
• Seat: Unique design that mechanically locks the seat in the inner side
of the valve body with a cast, easy to replace, stainless steel seat ring.
Standard EPDM also available in different materials such as PTFE,
etc.
• Packing: Long-life packing with several graphite impregnated PTFE
and Aramid yarn combination with an elastomeric core, plus an EPDM
O-ring with an easy access packing gland ensuring a tight seal. Long-
life braided packing is available in a wide range of materials.
• Stem: The standard stainless steel stem offers a long corrosion
resistant life.
• Actuators: All valves supplied with wrench.
• Yoke or Actuator Support: Made of stainless steel (Epoxy coated steel
available on request). Compact design makes it extremely robust even
under the most severe conditions.
• Epoxy Coating: The epoxy coating on all ORBINOX cast iron and
carbon steel components is electrostatically applied, making the valves
corrosion resistant with a high quality finished surface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes: DN 80
Standard flange connection: PN10 / ANSI 150
Working pressure: DN80: 10 bar
Directives: DIR 98/37/CE (MACHINES)
DIR 97/23/CE (PED) Fluid: Group 1(b),2 (Cat. I, mod. A)
DIR 94/9/CE (ATEX)
Please contact Rawson for information and availability of categories and
zones.

A Transmitter Isolation Valve - Continued

1 Body CF8M (1.4408)
2 Gate AISI 316 (1.4404)
3 Seat EPDM
4 “K” Ring AISI 316 (1.4404)
5 Packing Dynapack (Graphite impregnated PTFE and Aramid yarn combination with an
elastomeric core)+ (EPDM O-ring)
6 Gland CF8M (1.4408)
7 Stem nut Brass
8 Stem AISI 430 (1.4016)
9 Yoke AISI 304 (1.4301)
10 Bushing Brass
11 Bushing & Washer Nylon
12 Spring Pin DIN1481
13 Ratchet wrench Carbon steel
14 Bolts & Nuts A2
Seat/Seals Material Max.Temp.(°C) Applications

EPDM (E) 120 Acids and non mineral oils
Nitrile (N) 120 Resistance to petroleum products
Viton (V) 200 General chemical service
High temperature
Silicone (S) 250 Food service/High temperature
PTFE (T) 250 Corrosion resistance
Polyurethane 90 Abrasion resistance
More details and other materials upon request.
Packing Material Max. Temp. (°C) pH

Dynapack (DP) 270 2 - 14
Braided PTFE (TH) 260 0 - 14
Graphited (GR) 600 0 - 14
Ceramic fiber (FC) 1200 ––
NOTE: all types include an elastomere O-ring (same material as seal).

Wafer Style Knife Gate Valve A

EX Model 10 Series
DESCRIPTION
The EX Model 10 Series knife gate is an uni-directional wafer valve designed for
general industrial service applications.The design of the body and seat assures non-
clogging shut off on suspended solids in industries such as:
• Pulp and Paper • Power plants
• Wastewater treatment plants • Chemical plants
• Food and Beverage • Bulk handling
• Mining
FEATURES
• Body: Wafer style cast monoblock with raised face and with reinforced ribs in larger
diameters for extra body strength. Internal cast-in gate wedges and guides allows for
tighter shut-off. Full bore design for greater flow capacity and minimal pressure drop.
Internal design avoids any build up of solids that would prevent valve from closing.
• Gate: Stainless steel gate as standard. Gate is polished on both sides to avoid
jamming and seat damage. Bottom of the gate edge is machined to a bevel to cut
through solids for a tighter seal in the closed position. On request: thickness and/or
material of the gate can be changed for higher pressure requirement.
• Seat: (resilient) Unique design that mechanically locks the seat in the internal of
the valve body with a stainless steel retainer ring. Standard EPDM also available in
different materials such as Viton, PTFE, etc.
• Packing: Long-life packing with several layers of braided fiber plus an EPDM o-ring,
with an easy access packing gland ensuring a tight seal. Long-life braided packing is
available in a wide range of materials.
• Stem: The standard stainless steel stem offers a long corrosion resistant life. For
rising stem handwheel actuators only, a stem protector is provided for additional
protection against dust while the valve is in the open position.
• Actuators: All actuators supplied by ORBINOX are interchangeable, and supplied with
a standard mounting kit to allow for installation on site.
• Yoke or Actuator Support: Made of Epoxy coated steel (stainless steel available on
request). Compact design makes it extremely robust even under the most severe
conditions.
• Epoxy Coating: The epoxy coating on all ORBINOX cast iron and carbon steel valve
bodies and components is electrostatically applied making the valves to be corrosion
resistant with a high quality finished surface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes DN 2”/50mm to DN 48”/1200mm (larger diameters on request)
Working Pressure DN 2”/50mm to DN 10”/250mm: 150 psi / (10 kg/cm²)
DN 12”/300mm to DN 16”/400mm: 90 psi / (6 kg/cm²)
DN 18”/450mm: 75 psi / (5 kg/cm²)
Standard Flange Connection DIN PN 10 and ANSI B16.5 (Class 150)
Other flange connections available on request
Directives DIR 2006/42/CE (MACHINES)
DIR 97/23/CE (PED) Fluid: Group 1(b), 2 (Cat. I, mod. A)
DIR 94/9/CE (ATEX)

A Wafer Style Knife Gate Valve - Continued

Cast Iron Stainless Steel
1 Body GJL250 (GG25) CF8M
2 Gate AISI 304 AISI 316
3 Seat Metal/Metal or EPDM Metal/Metal or EPDM
4 Packing PTFE Impreg. Synth. Fiber CF8M
(With a EPDM o-ring)
5 Gland Aluminum (DN 2”/50mm to DN CF8M
Follower 12”/300mm) or Ductile Iron (DN
14”/350mm to DN 40”/1000mm)
6 Stem AISI 430 AISI 430
7 Stem nut Brass Brass
8 Yoke Epoxy-coated Carbon Steel Epoxy-coated Carbon Steel
9 “A” ring AISI 304 AISI 316
10 Handwheel Ø ≤12,20”/310mm: Ductile Iron / Ø ≥14”/410mm: GJL 250 (GG25)
11 Cap Plastic Plastic
12 Stem Protector Epoxy-coated Carbon Steel Epoxy-coated Carbon Steel
13 Friction washer Brass Brass
14 Nut Zinc Plated Carbon Steel Zinc Plated Carbon Steel
Max.Temp. Max.
Seat/Seals Material Applications
(F°) Temp. (°C)
Metal/Metal >482 >250 High temp. Low tightness.
EPDM (E) 248 120 Acids and non mineral oils
Nitrile (N) 248 120 Resistance to petroleum products
Viton (V) 392 200 General chemical service
High temperature
Silicone (S) 482 250 Food service / High temperature
PTFE (T) 482 250 Corrosion resistance
More details and other materials under request.
Max.Temp. Max.Temp.
Packing Material pH
(F°) (°C)
Dry cotton (AS) 122 50 6-8
PTFE impregn. synth. 464 240 2 - 13
fiber (ST)
Braided PTFE (TH) 500 260 0 - 14
Graphited (GR) 1112 600 0 - 14
Ceramic fiber (FC) 2192 1200
NOTE: all types include an elastomere O-ring (same material as seal),
excluding TH, GR and FC.

Heavy Duty Knife Gate Valve A

ET Model 20 Series
DESCRIPTION
The ET Model 20 Series knife gate is an uni-directional lug type valve designed according to
MSS-SP-81 and TAPPI TIS 405-8 for industrial service applications. The design of the body and
seat assures non-clogging shut off on suspended solids in industries such as:
• Pulp and Paper • Power plants • Mining
• Chemical plants • Wastewater • Food and Beverage
FEATURES
• Body: One piece integrally cast stainless steel body with reinforced ribs in larger
diameters for extra body strength. Internal cast gate wedges and guides allows for
tighter shutoff. Bore design according to MSS-SP-81 and Tappi TIS 405-8. Internal
design avoids any build up of solids that would prevent valve from closing.
• Gate: Standard AISI 316 stainless steel gate. Gates polished and lapped for a
greater seal between the gate with both packing and seat. Bottom of the gate edge
is machined to a bevel to cut through solids for a tighter seal in the closed position.
• Seat: (resilient) Unique design that mechanically locks the seat in the internal of
the valve body with a stainless steel retainer ring. Standard EPDM; also available
in different materials such as Viton, PTFE, etc.
• Packing: Standard braided PTFE impregnated fiber with EPDM o-ring for better
shut off, with an easy access packing gland ensuring a tight seal Long-life braided
packing is available in a wide range of materials.
• Stem: The standard stainless steel stem offers a long corrosion resistant life. For
rising stem handwheel actuators only, a stem protector is provided for additional
protection against dust while the valve is in the open position.
• Actuators: All actuators supplied by ORBINOX are interchangeable, and supplied
with a standard mounting kit to allow for installation on site.
• Yoke or Actuator Support: Made of Epoxy coated steel (stainless steel available
on request). Compact design makes it extremely robust even under the most
severe conditions.
• Epoxy Coating: The epoxy coating on all ORBINOX cast iron and carbon steel
valve bodies and components is electrostatically applied making the valves to be
corrosion resistant with a high quality finished surface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes DN 2”/50mm to DN 36”/900mm (larger diameters on request)
Working Pressure DN 2”/50mm to DN 24”/600mm: 150 psi / (10 kg/cm²)
DN 30”/750mm: 100 psi / ( 7 kg/cm²)
DN 36”/900mm: 100 psi / ( 7 kg/cm²)
Standard Flange Connection DIN PN 10 and ANSI B16.5 (class 150)
Others on request
Directives DIR 2006/42/EC (MACHINES)
DIR 97/23/EC (PED) Fluid: Group 1(b), 2 (Cat. I, mod. A)
DIR 94/9/EC (ATEX)

A Heavy Duty Knife Gate Valve - Continued

Materials of Construction Stainless Steel
1 Body CF8M
2 Gate AISI 316
3 Seat Metal or EPDM
4 Packing PTFE Impreg. Synth. Fiber
5 Gland Follower CF8M
6 Stem AISI 430
7 Stem Nut Brass
8 Yoke Carbon Steel - Epoxy Coated
9 Seat Retainer Ring AISI 316
10 Handwheel Ø≤ 12,20”/310mm: ductile iron / Ø≥14”/410mm: GG25
11 Cap Plastic
12 Stem Protector Carbon Steel - Epoxy Coated
13 Thrust Washer Brass
14 Nut Zinc Plated Carbon Steel
Max.
Seat/Seals Max.Temp.
Temp. Applications
Material (F°)
(°C)
Metal/Metal >482 >250 High temp. Low tightness.
EPDM (E) 248 120 Acids and non mineral oils.
Nitrile (N) 248 120 Resistance to petroleum products.
General chemical service.
Viton (V) 392 200
High temperature.
Silicone (S) 482 250 Food service. / High temperature.
PTFE (T) 482 250 Corrosion resistance.
Max.
Packing Material Max.Temp. (F°) Temp. pH
(°C)
Dry cotton (AS) 122 50 6-8
PTFE impregn. synth. 464 240 2 - 13
fiber (ST)
Braided PTFE (TH) 500 260 0 - 14
Graphited (GR) 1112 600 0 - 14
Ceramic fiber (FC) 2192 1200 ––
NOTE: all types include an elastomere O-ring (same material as seal), excluding
TH, GR and FC.

Heavy Duty Knife Gate Valve A

BT Model 21 Series
DESCRIPTION
The BT Model 21 Series knife gate is a bi-directional lug type valve designed according
to MSS-SP-81 and TAPPI TIS 405-8 for industrial service applications. The design of the
body and seat assures non-clogging shut off on suspended solids in industries such as:
• Pulp and Paper • Power plants • Mining
• Chemical plants • Wastewater • Food and Beverage
FEATURES
• Body: One piece integrally cast stainless steel body with reinforced ribs in larger
diameters for extra body strength. Internal cast guides allows for tighter shutoff. Bore
design according to MSS-SP-81 and Tappi TIS 405-8. Internal design avoids any build up
of solids that could prevent valve from closing.
• Gate: Standard AISI 316 stainless steel gate. Gates polished and lapped for a greater
seal between the gate and both the packing and seat.
• Seat: (resilient) Retained in the valve body internal groove by its trapezoidal shape.
Standard EPDM; also available in different materials such as Viton, nitrile, etc.
• Packing: Standard braided PTFE impregnated fiber with EPDM o-ring for better shut
off, with an easy access packing gland ensuring a tight seal Long-life braided packing is
available in a wide range of materials.
• Stem: The standard stainless steel stem offers a long corrosion resistant life. For rising
stem handwheel actuators only, a shaft collar is provided for protection and regulation of
the stroke.
• Actuators: All actuators supplied by ORBINOX are interchangeable, and supplied with
an standard mounting kit to allow for installation on site.
• Yoke or Actuator Support: Made of Epoxy coated steel (stainless steel available on
request). Compact design makes it extremely robust even under the most severe
conditions.
• Epoxy Coating: The epoxy coating on all ORBINOX cast iron and carbon steel valve
bodies and components is electrostatically applied making them corrosion resistant with a
high quality finished surface.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes DN 2"/50 to DN 24”/600 (larger diameters on request)
Working pressure DN 2"/50 to DN 24”/600: 150psi / 10kg/cm²
Standard flange connection ANSI B16.5 (class 150)
Others on request
Directives DIR 98/37/CE (MACHINES)
DIR 97/23/CE (PED) Fluid: Group 1(b), 2 (Cat. I, mod. A)
DIR 94/9/CE (ATEX) Please contact Rawson for information and availability of categories and
zones.

A Heavy Duty Knife Gate Valve - Continued

Materials of Construction Stainless Steel
1 Body CF8M
2 Gate AISI 316
3 Seal EPDM
4 Packing PTFE Impreg. Synth. Fiber + EPDM O-Ring
5 Gland Follower CF8M
6 Stem AISI 430
7 Stem Nut Brass
8 Yoke Carbon Steel - Epoxy Coated
9 Collar Nylon
10 Handwheel Ductile iron A536 (60-40-18)
11 Shaft collar Stainless steel
12 Nut Stainless steel
13 Thrust Washer Brass
14 Nut Zinc Plated Carbon Steel
Seat/Seals
Max.Temp.(°C) Applications
Material
EPDM (E) 120 Acids and non mineral oils

Nitrile (N) 120 Resistance to petroleum products
Viton (V) 200 General chemical service--
High temperature
More details and other materials under request.
Packing Material Max. Temp. (°C) pH

Dry cotton (AS) 50 6-8
PTFE impregn. synth. fiber (ST) 240 2 - 13
Braided PTFE (TH) 260 0 - 14
Graphited (GR) 600 0 -14
Ceramic fiber (FC) 1200 ––
NOTE: all types include an elastomere O-ring (same material as seal), excluding
TH, GR and FC.


Skycera
Ceramic Gate Valve A

CPV Style
DESCRIPTION
The CPV Style is a ceramic gate valve designed for use with high abrasion ultra-
fine powder and fly ash media, including dust, catalysts, and other small particles.
The gate seat is spring loaded to enhance sealing effect for ultra-fine powders. An
expansive gate cavity allows product to “flow” into open areas, allowing the gate to
close. The dual ceramic-on-ceramic seats create bi-directional sealing.
FEATURES
• Multiple connections available including ANSI and DIN standard flanged and pipe
stub ends for seamless integration into existing systems.
• Materials are selected on an application basis. Options include Super Duplex
stainless steel, Hastelloy, stainless steel, cast steel and others.
• Ceramic seat materials are also selected on an application basis. Options include
High alumina ceramics, silicon carbide and others.
• Temperature ratings of 400°F (204°C)
• Sizes up to 12"
APPLICATIONS
• Power Plant Pneumatic Fly Ash Handling
• Pneumatic Aluminum Oxide Transport
• Transport of Ultra-Fine Particulate

A Ceramic Knife Gate Slurry Valve

CSV Style
DESCRIPTION
The CSV is a ceramic-on-ceramic seated valve designed for use in slurry
services. It was designed to replace standard knife gate valves in service
without piping modifications and can be operated in a bi-directional fashion. A
bonnet with small, round packing is included to eliminate problematic conditions
created by large rectangular style packings. Structural ceramics are used
on the valve gate and seat to resist wear, corrosion, high temperature and
thermal shock. This valve is typically used for on/off service and is suitable
for conveying wearing media, including dust and particles in vacuum systems.
Specially designed variants of this valve have been created to operate at 6100
psi and 1650°F.
FEATURES
• Dual seats create bi-directional sealing.
• Required operating power is low; manual, electric and pneumatic actuators
may be used.
• Materials are selected on an application basis. Options include Super Duplex
stainless steel, Hastelloy, stainless steel, cast steel and others.
• Multiple ANSI and DIN flange standards.
• Ceramic seat materials are also selected on an application basis. Options
include High alumina ceramics, silicon carbide and others.
• Temperature rating of 400°F (204°C)
• Sizes up to 36"
APPLICATIONS
• Power Plant Bottom Ash
• Bottom Ash Pyrite Systems
• FGD Slurry Systems
• Conveying Systems for dust, powder and slurry in
mining and aluminum production

Smith Valve
Gate Valves A
DESCRIPTION
Smith Gate Valves are manufactured in a variety of designs: bolted or welded
bonnet, conventional or full port, threaded, socket-weld, flanged, weld end,
extended body and reinforced extended body types. Pressure classes include
150 through 2500. From Smith’s Houston, Texas manufacturing facility they
offer valves in the following materials: A105, LF2, F11, F5, F22, F9, 316/316L,
304/304L,316H, 304H, 317/317L, 321, 347, 347H, F51, F44, F20, I825, I600 AND
M400. All valves are manufactured in accordance with all applicable API 602 and
ASME B16.34 standards.
Class Size Style

150 1/2" - 3" Conventional Bore, Flanged
150 3/4" - 1.5" Full Bore, Flanged
300 3/4" - 1.5" Full Bore, Flanged
800 1/4" - 2" Conventional Bore, Threaded, Socket Weld
800 1/4" - 2" Full Bore, Threaded, Socket Weld
800 1/4" - 2" Conventional Bore, Inside Screw
800 1/2" - 2" Conventional Bore, Butt Weld
800 1/2" - 2" Integrally Reinforced Extended Body
800 1/2" - 2" Extended Body
1500 1/4" - 2" Conventional Bore, Threaded, Socket Weld
1500 1/4" - 2" Conventional Bore, Butt Weld
1500 1/4" - 1.5" Full Bore, Threaded, Socket Weld
1500 1/2" - 2" Full Bore, Flanged, Butt Weld
2500 1/2" - 2" Full Bore, Threaded, Socket Weld
For more information contact Rawson.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Globe Valves
Smith Valve
A Globe Valves
DESCRIPTION
Smith globe valves are manufactured in a variety of designs: bolted
or welded bonnets and threaded, socketweld, flanged, and weld
end configurations. Pressure classes include 150 through 2500.
Smith’s offering includes many material types: A105, LF2, F11,
F5, F22, F9, 316/316L, 304/304L, 316H, 304H, 317/317L, 321,
347, 347H, F51, F44, F20, I825, I 600 and M400. All valves are
manufactured in accordance with all applicable API 602 and ASME
B16.34 standards.
Class Size Style

800 1/4" - 2" Threaded, Socket Weld
150 1/2 - 2" Conventional Bore, Flanged
300 1/2 - 2" Conventional Bore, Flanged
600 1/2 - 2" Full Bore, Flanged
1500 1/2 - 2" Full Bore, Flanged
1690 1/2 - 2" Y-Pattern, Rotating Stem, Threaded, Socket Weld
2690 1/2 - 2" Y-Pattern, Rotating Stem, Threaded, Socket Weld
1690 1/2 - 2" Y-Pattern, Non-Rotating Stem, Threaded, Socket Weld
2690 1/2 - 2" Y-Pattern, Non-Rotating Stem, Threaded, Socket Weld
For more information contact Rawson.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Relief Valves
Hydroseal
Oilpatch Safety Relief Valves A

Series 1200/1400
DESCRIPTION
The Hydroseal Series 1200 and 1400 are economical safety relief
valves that are ideal for gas compressors, separators, heater treaters,
scrubbers, dehydrators, gas production units, pipelines and similar
OEM applications. The Series 1200 and 1400 are high performance
valves manufactured to Hydroseal's rigorous quality standards. They are
designed for high flow air, gas and liquid service at an economical price.
FEATURES
• Inlet Sizes ½" to 2" NPT
• Orifice Areas of 0.243 and 0.490 Square Inches
• NBBI Capacity Certified for Air/Gas and Liquids, ASME “UV” Code
Stamped
• Temperature Range from -15°F to 400°F
• Meets or Exceeds Competitor's Flow Rates
Brass Safety Relief Valve

Brass Series
FEATURES
• For Air, Gas and Liquids
• Pressures up to 300 psi
• Temperatures to 350°F
• 1/2" - 3" Inlet Sizes

A Flanged Safety Relief Valve

Series 1500
FEATURES
• Suitable for Air, Gas, Steam & Liquid Service Applications
• Both Flat Lapped Metal-To-Metal Seat & Bubble Tight Soft Seat
Designs Available
• Manufactured in Accordance with ASME Code Section VIII, NBBI
Capacity Certified
• Pressure Ranges from 5 PSI to 6173 PSI
• Temperature Ranges from -320°F to +800°F
• Threaded model available
Series 1500, Flanged

Inlet x Flange Max Set Dimension (in.) Wt.
Orifice
Outlet Inlet x Outlet (psig) A B C (lbs.)
150 x 150 285 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 11
300 x 150 740 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 12
¹⁄₂ x
600 x 150 1480 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 12
³⁄₄
600 x 300 1480 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 13
1500 x 300 3400 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 16 ⁵⁄₁₆ 16
150 x 150 285 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 11
300 x 150 740 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 12
¹⁄₂ x 1 600 x 150 1480 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 12
600 x 300 1480 6 4 14 ¹³⁄₁₆ 13
1500 x 300 3400 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 16 ⁵⁄₁₆ 16
C 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 13
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 14
Actual ³⁄₄ x
600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 14
Area ³⁄₄ 600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 15
.058 1500 x 300 3705 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 18
in. ² 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 13
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 14
³⁄₄ x 1 600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 14
600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 15
1500 x 300 3705 6 3/16 5 15 ¹⁄₁₆ 18
150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 4 ¹⁄₄ 15 ⁵⁄₁₆ 14
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₂ 4 ¹⁄₄ 15 ⁵⁄₁₆ 15
600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 4 ¹⁄₄ 15 ⁵⁄₁₆ 15
1x1
600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 16 ¹⁄₄ 16
1500 x 300 3705 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 16 ¹⁄₄ 21
2500 x 300 6170 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 16 ¹⁄₄ 24

Flanged Safety Relief Valve - Continued A

Inlet x Flange Max Set Dimension (in.) Wt. Inlet x Flange Max Set Dimension (in.) Wt.
Orifice Orifice
Outlet Inlet x Outlet (psig) A B C (lbs.) Outlet Inlet x Outlet (psig) A B C (lbs.)
150 x 150 285 6 4 13 ³⁄₄ 12 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 29
¹⁄₂ x 1
300 x 150 740 6 4 13 ³⁄₄ 13 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 31
150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 14 13 1x2
600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 31
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 14 14 600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 33
³⁄₄ x 1 600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 4 14 14 E 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 23
600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 14 15 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 26
1500 x 300 1750 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 14 18 600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 26
API Area 1¹⁄₂ x 2
150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 4 ¹⁄₄ 14 ¹⁄₄ 14 600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 27
.196 in²
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₂ 4 ¹⁄₄ 14 ¹⁄₄ 15 1500 x 300 3500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 19 ⁷⁄₈ 37
600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 4 ¹⁄₄ 14 ¹⁄₄ 15 2500 x 300 3500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 19 ⁷⁄₈ 47
1x1 Actual
600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 15 ³⁄₈ 16 150 x 150 285 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 47
Area
D 1500 x 300 2000 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 15 ³⁄₈ 20 300 x 150 740 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 26
.230 in.²
2500 x 300 2000 7 ¹⁄₂ 5 15 ³⁄₈ 25 600 x 150 1480 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 28
API Area 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ³⁄₈ 14 2x2
600 x 300 1480 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 30
.110 in.² 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ³⁄₈ 15
³⁄₄ x 1500 x 300 3500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 19 ⁷⁄₈ 44
600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ³⁄₈ 16 2500 x 300 3500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 19 ⁷⁄₈ 60
1¹⁄₂
Actual 600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 19 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 18 38
Area 1500 x 300 1750 6 ¹⁄₂ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ³⁄₈ 22 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 18 39
.129 in.² 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 15 1 x 1¹⁄₂
600 x 150 740 5 ¹⁄₈ 5 17 37
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 16 600 x 300 740 5 ¹⁄₈ 5 ³⁄₄ 17 40
600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 17 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 5 18 ¹⁄₈ 39
1 x 1¹⁄₂
600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 20 300 x 150 740 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 18 ³⁄₄ 43
1 ¹⁄₂ x
1500 x 300 3500 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 24 1 ¹⁄₂ 600 x 150 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 18 ³⁄₄ 43
2500 x 300 3500 7 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 ¹⁄₈ 29 F
600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 ³⁄₄ 18 ³⁄₄ 46
150 x 150 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 16 17 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 30
300 x 150 740 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 16 20 API Area
.307 in.² 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 32
1 ¹⁄₂ x 600 x 150 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 16 20 1x2
600 x 150 1200 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 32
1 ¹⁄₂ 600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 23 600 x 300 1200 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹³⁄₁₆ 34
1500 x 300 3500 7 ¹⁄₈ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 32 Actual
150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 42
2500 x 300 3500 7 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 ¹⁄₈ 42 Area
300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 45
150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 18 .366 in.² 1 ¹⁄₂ x 2 600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 45
300 x 150 640 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 19 600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₂ 6 18 ¹⁄₈ 46
³⁄₄ x 600 x 150 640 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 20
1¹⁄₂ 1500 x 300 1500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 19 ⁷⁄₈ 55
600 x 300 640 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 23 150 x 150 285 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 44
E 1500 x 300 640 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 26 300 x 150 740 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 46
150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 19 2x2 600 x 150 1480 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 47
API Area 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 20 600 x 300 1480 6 ³⁄₄ 6 18 ³⁄₈ 49
.196 in.² 1 x 1¹⁄₂ 600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 20 1500 x 300 1500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 19 ⁷⁄₈ 63
600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 24 150 x 150 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 45
Actual 1500 x 300 1750 7 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 ¹⁄₈ 28 300 x 150 740 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 48
Area 150 x 150 285 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 24 1 ¹⁄₂ x 2
600 x 150 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 50
.230 in.² 300 x 150 740 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 24 600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 51
1 ¹⁄₂ x 600 x 150 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 15 ¹⁄₈ 24 150 x 150 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 48
1 ¹⁄₂ 600 x 300 1480 6 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 15 ¹⁄₈ 23 300 x 150 740 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 51
1500 x 300 2000 7 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 ¹⁄₈ 36 G 2x2
600 x 150 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 51
2500 x 300 2000 7 ¹⁄₄ 5 ³⁄₄ 16 ¹⁄₈ 46 Actual 600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 54
Area 150 x 150 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 50
.590 in.2
300 x 150 740 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 55
1 ¹⁄₂ x
600 x 150 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 53
API Area 2 ¹⁄₂
.503 in.² 600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 56
1500 x 300 1500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 ¹⁄₂ 22 ¹⁄₄ 63
150 x 150 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 54
300 x 150 740 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 55
2 x 2¹⁄₂ 600 x 150 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 56
600 x 300 1480 7 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 21 58
1500 x 300 1500 8 ¹⁄₄ 6 ¹⁄₂ 22 72
Notes: Weights are approximate.
Overall height with lever: Add 1" to outlet C, D & E valves. Add 1 1/2" to outlet F &
G valves.

A Flanged Safety Relief Valve - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
15 X X X X X X X
Table 1 Orifice Area (in.²) Table 4 Facing

C 0.058 0 NPT
D 0.129 1 RF x RF (Raised Face Flange x Raised Face Flange)
E 0.230 2 RTJ x RF (Ring Type Joint Flange x Raised Face Flange)
F 0.366 3 RF x FNPT (Raised Face Flange x Female NPT)
G 0.590 4 MNPT x RF (Male NPT x Raised Faced Flange)
Table 2 Inlet x Outlet* 5 Sanitary Flange
D ⅜" x ¾" (C Orifice Only) 6 Socket/Nipple x Socket/Nipple
E ½" x ¾" (C Orifice Only) 7 Socket/Nipple x NPT
F ¾" x ¾" (C, D Orifice Only) 8 NPT x Socket/Nipple
H ⅜" x 1" (C Orifice Only) X Special
J 1" x 2" (E, F Orifice Only) Table 5 Seat Type
0 2" x 2½" (G Orifice Only) C Neoprene
1 ½" x 1" (C, D Orifice Only) E EPDM
2 ¾" x 1" (C, D Orifice Only) K Kalrez®
3 1" x 1" (C, D Orifice Only) M Metal
4 ¾" x 1½" (D, E Orifice Only) N Nitrile
5 1" x 1½" (D, E, F Orifice Only) S Silicone
6 1½" x 1½" (D, E, F Orifice Only) T Teflon®
7 1½" x 2" (E, F, G Orifice Only) V Fluorocarbon
8 2" x 2" (E, F, G Orifice Only) W Steam (Metal Seals)
9 1½" x 2½" (G Orifice Only) X Special
Table 3 Connection 1 Y Steam (Soft Seat) w/Viton® Seals
M MxF Z Kalrez® Seat w/Viton® Seals
J MxM Table 6 Body/Spring Trim Material
F FxF 0 WCB/CS/316SS
K FxM 1 WCB/316SS/316SS
A 150 x 150 2 WCB (NACE)/Inconel®/ 316SS
B 300 x 150 3 CF8M/316SS/316SS
C 600 x 150 4 CF8M (NACE)/Inconel®/316SS
D 600 x 300 X Special
E 1500 x 300 Table 7 Cap Type
G 2500 x 300 O Closed
Flange x Thread G Closed w/Gag
X Special L Open Lever

M Lever w/Gag
*Flange options may not be available in all sizes.
1 M,J,F and K are for Threaded Model. Threaded model dimensional data in
P Packed Lever
Hydroseal Series 1500/2500 Safety Relief Valve spec sheet. S Packed w/Gag
Max. set pressure for steam is 600 psig.
Table 8 Spring Code
C Orifice is available in soft seat only.
Lift lever required for ASME code service for steam, air or water over 140°F Consult Rawson for Spring Chart.
3/8” NPT inlet valves are non ASME Code for liquid.
Call for market price on Kalrex seat material.
Flange option not available in sizes 1/4” and 3/8”.

Flanged High Capacity Safety Relief Valves A

Series 2500
FEATURES
• Available with NACE & Bellows Options
• Self Aligning Disc&Guided One-Piece Disc Holder Assembly
• Interchangeable Discs for Metal-To-Metal&Soft Seat Seals
• Same Internals for Air,Gas, Liquid &SteamServiceApplications
• Meets API 526&527with Available Orifices “D” through “T”
• Manufactured in Accordance with ASME Code Section VIII, NBBI Capacity
Certified
InIet X FIange Max Set Dimension (in.) Wt.

Type*
OutIet Ratings (psig) A B C F (Ibs.)
150 x 150 10DR20A 285 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₄ 49
300 x 150 10DR20B 285 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ³⁄₈ 50
1x2
300 x 150 10DR20C 740 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ³⁄₈ 50
600 x 150 10DR20D 1480 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ³⁄₈ 50
150 x 150 10ER20A 285 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₄ 49
300 x 150 10ER20B 285 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ³⁄₈ 50
1x2
300 x 150 10ER20C 740 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ³⁄₈ 50
600 x 150 10ER20D 1480 4 ¹⁄₈ 4 ¹⁄₂ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ³⁄₈ 50
150 x 150 15F20A 285 4 ⁷⁄₈ 4 ³⁄₄ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 54
300 x 150 15F20B 285 4 ⁷⁄₈ 4 ³⁄₄ 21¹⁄₂ 1₆ 56
1½ x 2
300 x 150 15F20C 740 4 ⁷⁄₈ 6 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷∕₆ 64
600 x 150 15F20D 1480 4 ⁷⁄₈ 6 21¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 64
150 x 150 15G25A 285 4 ⁷⁄₈ 4 ³⁄₄ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 55
300 x 150 15G25B 285 4 ⁷⁄₈ 4 ³⁄₄ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷∕₆ 58
1½ x 2½
300 x 150 15G25C 740 4 ⁷⁄₈ 6 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷∕₆ 66
600 x 150 15G25D 1480 4 ⁷⁄₈ 6 21¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 69
150 x 150 15G30A 285 4 ⁷⁄₈ 4 ³⁄₄ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 60
300 x 150 15G30B 285 4 ⁷⁄₈ 4 ³⁄₄ 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷∕₆ 63
1½ x 3
300 x 150 15G30C 740 4 ⁷⁄₈ 6 21¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷∕₆ 70
600 x 150 15G30D 1480 4 ⁷⁄₈ 6 21¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 73
150 x 150 15H30A 285 5 ¹⁄₈ 4 ⁷⁄₈ 24 ¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 60
1½ x 3
300 x 150 15H30B 285 5 ¹⁄₈ 4 ⁷⁄₈ 24 ¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 60
300 x 150 20H30C 740 5 ¹⁄₈ 4 ⁷⁄₈ 24 ¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 65
2x3
600 x 150 20H30D 1480 6 ¹⁄₁₆ 6 ³⁄₈ 29 1 ¹⁄₂ 85
150 x 150 20J30A 285 5 ³⁄₈ 4 ⁷⁄₈ 25 ¹⁄₈ 1 ¹⁄₂ 75
2x3
300 x 150 20J30B 285 5 ³⁄₈ 4 ⁷⁄₈ 25 ¹⁄₈ 1 ¹⁄₂ 80
300 x 150 25J40C 740 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ³⁄₄ 29 ¹⁄₂ 2 100
2½ x 4
600 x 150 25J40D 1480 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ³⁄₄ 29 ¹⁄₂ 2 105
300 x 150 30J40C 740 7 ¹⁄₄ 7 ¹⁄₈ 30 ³⁄₈ 11⁵⁄₁₆ 110 Dimension (in.)
3x4 InIet X FIange Max Set Wt.
600 x 150 30J40D 1480 7 ¹⁄₄ 7 ¹⁄₈ 25 ⁷⁄₈ 1 ¹⁄₂ 112 Type*
OutIet Ratings (psig) A B C F (Ibs.)
150 x 150 30K40A 285 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ³⁄₈ 26 ³⁄₈ 1 ³⁄₄ 126
300 x 150 30K40B 285 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ³⁄₈ 30 ³⁄₈ 1 ³⁄₄ 125 150 x 150 40P60A 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 9 34 ³⁄₈ 1 ¹⁄₂ 260
3x4
300 x 150 30K40C 740 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ³⁄₈ 30 ³⁄₈ 11⁵⁄₁₆ 136 300 x 150 40P60B 285 7 ¹⁄₈ 9 34 ³⁄₈ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 270
4x6
600 x 150 30K40D 1480 7 ¹⁄₄ 7 ¹⁄₈ 29 ³⁄₄ 1 ¹⁄₂ 138 300 x 150 40P60C 740 8 ⁷⁄₈ 10 40 ¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 350
150 x 150 30L40A 285 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 29 ³⁄₄ 1 ³⁄₄ 140 600 x 150 40P60D 1000 8 ⁷⁄₈ 10 41 ⁷⁄₈ 2 ³∕₁₆ 530
3x4
300 x 150 30L40B 285 6 ¹⁄₈ 6 ¹⁄₂ 29 ³⁄₄ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 190 150 x 150 60Q80A 165 9 7/16 9 ¹⁄₂ 40 ¹⁄₂ 1¹³⁄₁₆ 430
300 x 150 40L60C 740 7¹⁄₁₆ 7 ¹⁄₈ 32 ³⁄₄ 2 ³∕₁₆ 220 300 x 150 60Q80B 165 9 7/16 9 ¹⁄₂ 40 ¹⁄₂ 2 ³∕₁₆ 445
4x6 6x8
600 x 150 40L60D 1000 7¹⁄₁₆ 8 32 ³⁄₄ 1 ¹⁄₂ 230 300 x 150 60Q80C 300 9 7/16 9 ¹⁄₂ 43 ³⁄₈ 2 ³∕₁₆ 530
150 x 150 40M60A 285 7 7 ¹⁄₄ 29 ³⁄₄ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 185 600 x 150 60Q80D 600 9 7/16 9 ¹⁄₂ 45 ⁷⁄₈ 2 ¹⁄₂ 645
300 x 150 40M60B 285 7 7 ¹⁄₄ 29 ³⁄₄ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 190 150 x 150 60R80A 100 9 7/16 9 ¹⁄₂ 42 1¹³⁄₁₆ 495
4x6
300 x 150 40M60C 740 7 7 ¹⁄₄ 32 ³⁄₄ 2 ³∕₁₆ 230 300 x 150 60R80B 100 9 7/16 9 ¹⁄₂ 42 2 ³∕₁₆ 510
6x8
600 x 150 40M60D 1000 7 8 33 ³⁄₄ 2 300 300 x 150 60R80C 230 9 7/16 10 ¹⁄₂ 44 ⁷⁄₈ 2 ³∕₁₆ 550
150 x 150 40N60A 285 7 ³⁄₄ 8 ¹⁄₄ 33 ¹⁄₂ 1 ¹⁄₂ 220 600 x 150 60R80D 300 9 7/16 10 ¹⁄₂ 46 ³⁄₄ 2 ¹⁄₂ 675
300 x 150 40N60B 285 7 ³⁄₄ 8 ¹⁄₄ 33 ¹⁄₂ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 225 150 x 150 80T10A 65 10 ⁷⁄₈ 11 45 ³⁄₄ 2 ¹⁄₁₆ 620
4x6
300 x 150 40N60C 740 7 ³⁄₄ 8 ¹⁄₄ 34 ³⁄₈ 1 ⁷⁄₈ 260 8 x 10 300 x 150 80T10B 65 10 ⁷⁄₈ 11 45 ³⁄₄ 2 ¹⁄₂ 640
600 x 150 40N60D 1000 7 ³⁄₄ 8 ³⁄₄ 37 ⁷⁄₈ 2 ³∕₁₆ 300 300 x 150 80T10C 120 10 ⁷⁄₈ 11 48 ¹⁄₂ 3 840
Note: Weights are approximate.
*Not a full model number. All 300 x 150 flanges, type "B" are light pattern.

A Flanged High Capacity Safety Relief Valves - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
XXX X XX XX XX X X XX X X
Table 1 Series Table 6 Inlet Flange Class (ANSI B16.5)

25 Non-Bellows A 150
B25 With Bellows B 300 L.P.*
Table 2 Seat Type C 300
C Neoprene D 600
E EPDM Table 7 Flange Facing (Inlet x Outlet)
K Kalrez® 1 RF x RF
M Metal 2 RTJ x RF
N Nitrile X Special
S Silicone Table 8 Body/Spring Trim Material
V Fluorocarbon C1 WCB/CS or AS/316SS
Table 3 Inlet Flange Size C2 WCB/316SS/316SS

10 1" C4 WCB NACE/Inconel®/316SS
15 1½" S1 CF8M/SS/316SS
20 2" S3 CF8M NACE/Inconel®/316SS
25 2½" X1 Special
30 3" Table 9 Service Code
40 4" A ASME Sec. VIII Air/Gas
60 6" B ASME Sec. VIII Steam
80 8" C ASME Sec. VIII Liquid
Table 4 Orifice Area (in.²) F Non-Code Air/Gas

DR 0.120 G Non-Code Steam
ER 0.227 H Non-Code Liquid
F 0.317 X Special
G 0.568 Table 10 Cap Type
H 0.911 G Closed w/Gag
J 1.457 L Open Lever
K 2.125 M Lever w/Gag
L 3.281 O Closed Lever
M 4.047 P Packed Lever
N 4.988 S Packed w/Gag
P 7.330 Table 11 Spring Code

Consult Rawson for Spring Chart.
Q 12.699
R 18.383 *Max. set pressure for steam is 600 psig.
Lift lever is required for ASME code service for steam, air or water over 140°F
T 28.274
Table 5 Outlet Flange Size
20 2"
25 2½"
30 3"
40 4"
60 6"
80 8"
10 10"

Air/Liquid Flanged Safety Relief Valves A

HC (Air) & HD (Liquid) Series
FEATURES
• Disc & O-Ring Soft Seat Design Provide High Flow
• ASME Semi-Nozzle Fixed Blowdown Valve
• Bubble Tight Seal Suitable for Various Relief Applications
up to 80% of Set Pressure
• ASME Section VIII UV Code Stamped
Sizing Information
Gas Liquid Liq. Flow
Orifice Area Slope
KD KD Factor
HC/HD 0.785 0.88 0.60 12.63 17.6
Contact Rawson in order to receive sizing program and/or capacity charts.
Air & Liquid Threaded Safety Relief Valves

FT, HC (Air) & HD (Liquid) Series
FEATURES
• Disc & O-Ring Soft Seat Design Provides High Flow
• ASME Semi-Nozzle Fixed Blowdown Valve
• Bubble Tight Seal Suitable for Various Relief Applications
up to 80% of Set Pressure
• Inlets from 3/4"- 2" with Set Pressures to 3500 psi
• ASME Section VIII UV Code Stamped
Sizing Information
Orifice Area Slope
KD KD Factor
FT 0.306 0.87 — 4.88 —
HC/HD 0.785 0.88 0.60 12.63 17.6

FT is Air/Gas service only.
Series FT Series HC

A Ball & Seat Threaded Safety Relief Valve

Series 1-4
FEATURES
• Incorporates Hydroseal’s “Self-Seeking Soft Seat”
Design
• Ideal Where Economical Low Flow Overpressure
Protection is Required
• ASME Section VIII UV Code Stamped for Air & Gas
• Available for Non-Code Liquid Applications
• Operating Temperatures to 800°F
• 1/4"-1" NPT Inlet Sizes
Sizing Information
Orifice Area Slope
KD KD Factor
AV/DV 0.049 — 0.11 — 0.20
BV/EV 0.110 0.34 0.07 0.68 0.30
CRV/FRV 0.196 0.31 0.13 1.11 0.95
CXV/FXV 0.248 0.25 0.15 1.15 1.40
Leak tested in accordance with factory standard.

Water capacities determined at 25% over set pressure.
Ball & Seat Threaded Safety Relief Valve

Series 5-8
FEATURES
• 1"- 2" Inlet Sizes
• Incorporates Hydroseal’s “Self-Seeking Soft Seat” Design
• Operating Temperatures to 600°F
• Soft Seat Option Provides Primary Seal with a Metal-To-
Metal SecondarySeal
• ASME Section VIII UV Code Stamped for Air & Gas
• Available for Non-Code Liquid Applications
Sizing Information
Orifice Area Slope
KD KD Factor
ARV 0.196 0.31 0.13 1.11 1.0
AXV 0.248 0.25 0.16 1.15 1.5
BV 0.441 0.40 0.14 3.22 2.4
CRV 0.785 0.22 0.16 3.09 4.9
CV 0.785 0.22 0.16 3.13 4.9
Leak tested in accordance with factory standard.
Contact Factory in order to receive sizing program and/or capacity charts.
Water capacities determined at 25% over set pressure.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Solenoid Valves
ASCO
2-Way General Service Solenoid Valves A

8210 Series
FEATURES
• Wide range of pressure ratings, sizes, and resilient
materials provide long service life and low internal
leakage
• High Flow Valves for liquid, corrosive, and air/inert gas
service
• Brass or Stainless Steel Bodies ⅜" to 2 ½" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Standard: RedHat II - Watertight, Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4,
and 4X; RedHat - Type I.
• Optional: RedHat II - Explosion proof and Watertight,
Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, and 9; Red-Hat - Explosion
proof and Watertight, Types 3, 4, 4X, 7, and 9.

Watt Rating/
A Pipe Orifice
Cv Flow
Operating Pressure Differential (psi)
Operating Pressure Differential
(psi)
Max. Fluid
Temp. °F
Class of Coil
Insulation Brass
Stainless
Stainless
Steel
Size Size Max. Max. Max. Brass Body Item Body, UL
Factor Max. Steel Item Body,UL
(in) (in) Max. AC, AC, Lt. DC, Max. DC, DC, Listing
Min. AC,Air-Inert AC DC AC DC Listing
Water⑪ Oil @ Air-Inert Water⑪ Lt.Oil @
Gas
300 SSU Gas 300 SSU
NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized), NBR or PTFE  Seating
⅜ ⅜ 1.5  150 125 - 40 40 - 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G073   8210G036  
⅜ ⅝ 3 0 150 150 - 40 40 - 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G093  - -
⅜ ⅝ 3 5 200 150 135 125 100 100 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G001  - -
⅜ ⅝ 3 5 300 300 300 - - - 175 - 17.1/F - 8210G006  - -
½ ⁷⁄₁₆ 2.2  150 125 - 40 40 - 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G015   8210G037  
½ ⅝ 4 0 150 150 - 40 40 - 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G094  - -
½ ⅝ 4 0 150 150 125 40 40 - 175 150 17.1/F 11.6/F - - 8210G087 
½ ⅝ 4 5 200 150 135 125 100 100 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G002  - -
½ ⅝ 4 5 300 300 300 - - - 175 - 17.1/F - 8210G007  - -
½ ¾ 4 5 - 300 - - 300 - 130 90 17.1/F 40.6/H 8210G227 † - -
¾ ⅝ 4.5 0 150 150 125 40 40 - 175 150 17.1/F 11.6/F - - 8210G088 
¾ ¾ 5 5 125 125 125 100 90 75 180 150 - 11.6/F 8210G009  - -
¾ ¾ 5 0 150 150 - 40 40 - 180 150 - 11.6/F 8210G095  - -
¾ ¾ 6.5 5 250 150 100 125 125 125 180 150 - 11.6/F 8210G003  - -
¾ ¾ 6 0 - - - 200 180 180 - 77 - 30.6/H 8210B026  ‡ - - -
¾ ¾ 6 0 350 300 200 - - - 200 - 16.1F - 8210G026  ‡  - -
1 1 13 0 - - - 100 100 80 - 77 - 30.6/H 8210B054 ‡ - 8210D089 -
1 1 13 0 150 125 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G054  8210G089 
1 1 13 5 150 150 100 125 125 125 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G004  - -
1 1 13.5 0 300 225 115 - - - 200 - 20.1/F - 8210G078   - -
1 1 13.5 10 300 300 300 - - - 175 - 17.1/F - 8210B055 ‡ - - -
1¼ 1⅛ 15 0 - - - 100 100 80 - 77 - 30.6/H 8210B055 ‡ - - -
1¼ 1⅛ 15 0 150 125 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G055  - -
¼ 1⅛ 15 5 150 150 100 125 125 125 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G008  - -
1½ 1¼ 22.5 0 - - - 100 100 80 - 77 - 30.6/H 8210B056 ‡ - - -

1½ 1¼ 22.5 0 150 125 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G056  - -
1½ 1¼ 22.5 5 150 150 100 125 125 125 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G022  - -
2 1¾ 43 5 150 125 90 50 50 50 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G100  - -
2½ 1¾ 45 5 150 125 90 50 50 50 180 150 6.1/F 11.6/F 8210G101  - -
NORMALLY OPEN (Open when de-energized), NBR Seating (PA Disc-Holder, except as noted)
⅜ ⅝ 3 0 150 150 125 125 125 80 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G033  - -
⅜ ⅝ 3 5 250 200 200 250 200 200 180 180 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G011   - -
½ ⅝ 4 0 150 150 125 125 125 80 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G034  - -
½ ⅝ 3 0 150 150 100 125 125 80 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F - - 8210G030 
½ ⅝ 4 5 250 200 200 250 200 200 180 180 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G012   - -
¾ ¾ 5.5 0 150 150 125 125 125 80 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8210G035  - -
¾ ⅝ 3 0 150 150 100 125 125 80 180 150 10.1/F 11.6/F - - 8210G038 
¾ ¾ 6.5 5 - - - 250 200 200 - 180 - 16.8/F 8210C013  - -
¾ ¾ 6.5 5 250 200 200 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G013  - -

1 1 13 0 125 125 125 - - - 180 - 20/F - 8210B057    - -
1 1 13 5 - - - 125 125 125 - 180 - 16.8/F 8210D014  - -

1 1 13 5 150 150 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G014  - -
1¼ 1⅛ 15 0 125 125 125 - - - 180 - 20/F - 8210B058    - -
1¼ 1⅛ 15 5 - - - 125 125 125 - 180 - 16.8/F 8210D018  - -
1¼ 1⅛ 15 5 150 150 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G018  - -
1½ 1¼ 22.5 0 125 125 125 - - - 180 - 20/F - 8210B059    - -
1½ 1¼ 22.5 5 - - - 125 125 125 - 180 - 16.8/F 8210D032  - -
1½ 1¼ 22.5 5 150 150 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G032  - -
2 1¾ 43 5 - - - 125 125 125 - 150 - 16.8/F 8210 103  - -
2 1¾ 43 5 125 125 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F 8210G103  - -
2½ 1¾ 45 5 - - - 125 125 125 - 150 - 16.8/F 8210 104  - -
2½ 1¾ 45 5 125 125 125 - - - 180 - 16.1/F - 8210G104  -
 5 psi on Air; 1 psi on Water.  Valves not available with Explosionproof enclosures. † UL listed for fire
 Valve provided with PTFE main disc.  On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for the 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts. protection systems per
 Valve includes UItem (G.E. trademark) piston.  AC construction also has PA seating. UL429A.
 Letter “D” denotes diaphragm construction; “P” denotes piston construction.  No disc-holder.
 Safety Shutoff Valve;  General Purpose Valve.  Stainless steel disc-holder.
‡ Must have solenoid mounted vertical and upright.

Quick Exhaust 3-Way Solenoid Valves A

8317/8321 Series
FEATURES
• Designed for quick venting to 0 psi through the exhaust
orifice
• Resilient seated poppets for tight shutoff
• Air is exhausted to quickly shift control valves
• Multi-industry applications
• Mountable in any position
• Brass or Stainless Steel Bodies ¼" to ⅜" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Standard: Watertight, Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X.
• Optional: Explosion proof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S, 4,
4X, 6, 6P, 7, and 9. (To order, and prefix "EF" to the item
number.)
Body Brass 304 Stainless Steel
Seals and Discs NBR (PA upper disc for 8317 Series)
Diaphragm CR (8317 Series only)
Core Tube 305 Stainless Steel
Core and Plugnut 430F Stainless Steel
Core Springs 302 Stainless Steel and 17-7 PH Stainless Steel
Shading Coil Copper Silver
Pilot Seat Cartridge and CA (8321 Series only)
Disc-Holder
Piston Brass and 303 Stainless Steel (8321 only)
Pipe Orifice Cv Max. Watt Rating/

Size Size Flow Operating Pressure Differential
Operating Pressure Differential (psi) Fluid Class of Coil Item
(in) (in) Factor (psi)
Temp. °F Insulation
Max.
Max. AC, Max.
Max. AC, Max. Max DC, Lt.
Press. Exh. Press. Exh. Lt. Oil DC, Brass Stainless Steel
Min. Air-Inert AC, DC,Air-Inert Oil AC DC AC DC
@ 45 Wa- Body Body
Gas Water Gas @ 45
SSU ter
SSU
NORMALLY CLOSED (Pressure at Port 2) / NORMALLY OPEN (Pressure at Port 3)
¼ ³⁄₃₂ ¼ .20 .73 5 80 50 50 40 30 15 180 104 10.1/F 8317G007 8317G008
NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized)

¼ ³⁄₃₂ ¼ .20 .73 5 150 150 95 75 55 30 180 104 10.1/F 11.6/F 8317G035 8317G036
¼ ⁹⁄₃₂ ¹¹⁄₃₂ .80 1.2 10 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 120 6.1/F 10.6/F 8321G001 -
⅜ ⁹∕₃₂ ¹¹⁄₃₂ .80 1.2 10 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 120 6.1/F 10.6/F 8321G002 -
NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized), Air Only - Vents to Atmosphere
¼ ³∕₃₂ ¼ .20 .73 5 150 - - - - - 180 - 10.1/F - 8317G023 8317G024
NORMALLY OPEN (Open when de-energized)
¼ ³∕₃₂ ¼ .15 .73 5 160 160 95 75 45 25 180 104 10.1/F 11.6/F 8317G053 8317G054
¼ ⁹∕₃₂ ¹¹⁄₃₂ .80 1.2 10 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 120 6.1/F 10.6/F 8321G003 -
⅜ ⁹⁄₃₂ ¹¹⁄₃₂ .80 1.2 10 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 120 6.1/F 10.6/F 8321G004 -
 Rating for 8321 valves established with 300 SSU light oil.  Minimum Operating Pressure Differential on light oil is 10 psi.
 On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for the 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts.

A
3-Way General Service Solenoid Valves
8320 Series
FEATURES
• All NPT connections are in the value body to allow in-line piping
• No minimum operating pressure differential required
• Broadest range of applications
• Brass or Stainless Steel Bodies ⅛" to ¼" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Optional: Explosion proof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P,
7, and 9. (To order, add prefix "EF" to the item number.)
Seals and Discs NBR or Cast UR, as Listed
Core Springs 302 Stainless Steel
Shading Coil Copper Silver
Disc-Holder CA
Core Guide CA (10.1 and 17.1 Watt only)

3-Way General Service Solenoid Valves - Continued A

Watt Rating/
Class of Coil Item
Operating Pressure Differential Operating Pressure Differential Max. Fluid Insulation
(psi) (psi) Temp. °F
Pipe Orifice Cv
Size Size Flow
(in) (in) Factor Max. Max. Stainless Steel
Max. AC, Max. AC, Lt. Max. DC Max. DC, Lt. AC DC Brass Body
Body
Air-Inert AC, Oil Air-Inert DC, Oil AC DC
Gas Water @ 300 Gas Water @ 300
SSU SSU
UNIVERSAL OPERATION (Pressure at any port)
⅛ ³⁄₆₄ 0.06 175 175 175 125 125 125 140 120 9.1F 10.6F 8320G130  8320G140 
⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 100 100 100 65 65 65 180 120 9.1F 10.6F 8320G001 8320G041 
⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 175 175 175 125 125 125 200 150 17.1/F 22.6/F 8320G212 8320G221 
⅛ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 50 50 50 50 50 50 180 120 6.1/F 10.6/F 8320G083 8320G087 
⅛ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 100 100 100 60 60 60 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G213 8320G222 
⅛ ⅛ 0.21 30 30 30 20 20 20 180 120 9.1/F 10.6/F 8320G003 8320G043 
⅛ ⅛ 0.21 50 50 50 25 25 25 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G214 8320G223 
¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 125 130 130 75 75 75 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G172 -
¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 175 175 175 125 125 125 200 150 17.1/F 22.6/F - 8320G230 
¼ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 100 100 100 60 60 60 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G174 8320G200 
¼ ⅛ 0.25 50 50 50 25 25 25 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G176 8320G201 
¼ ¹¹⁄₆₄ 0.35 20 20 20 12 12 12 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G178 -
NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-energized) – PFDAVG = 6.81 x 10 ⁻ ⁴
⅛ ³⁄₆₄ 0.06 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G132 8320G142 
⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8230G013 8320G045 
⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 210 225 225 160 160 160 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G215 8320G224 
⅛ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 100 100 100 100 100 100 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G015 8320G047 
⅛ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 150 150 150 115 115 115 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G216 8320G225 
⅛ ⅛ 0.21 40 40 40 40 40 40 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G017 8320G049 
⅛ ⅛ 0.21 85 85 85 60 60 60 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G217 8320G226 
¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 210 225 225 160 160 160 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G182 8320G231 
¼ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 150 150 150 115 115 115 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G184 8320G202 
¼ ⅛ 0.25 85 85 85 60 60 60 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G186 8320G203 
¼ ¹¹⁄₆₄ 0.35 45 45 45 25 25 25 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G188 -
NORMALLY OPEN (Open when de-energized)
⅛ ³⁄₆₄ 0.06 200 200 200 200 200 200 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G136 8320G146 
⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 150 125 125 125 125 125 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G027 8320G051 
⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 235 250 250 160 160 160 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G218 8320G227 
⅛ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 100 100 100 100 100 100 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G029 8320G053 
⅛ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 150 140 140 100 100 100 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G219 8320G228 
⅛ ⅛ 0.21 40 40 40 40 40 40 180 120 6.1F 10.6/F 8320G031 8320G055 
⅛ ⅛ 0.21 70 70 70 55 55 55 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G220 8320G229 
¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.09 235 250 250 160 160 160 200 150 17.1/F 11.6/F 8320G192 8320G232 
¼ ³⁄₃₂ 0.12 150 140 140 100 100 100 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G194 8320G204 
¼ ⅛ 0.25 70 70 70 55 55 55 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G196 8320G205 
¼ ¹¹⁄₆₄ 0.35 40 40 40 30 30 30 200 150 10.1/F 11.6/F 8320G198 -
 Supplied with cast UR disc.

 On 50 hertz service, the watt rating for the 6.1/F solenoid is 8.1 watts; the watt rating for the 9.1/F solenoid is 11.1 watts.
 Can be used for dry natural gas service with the EF prefix.
 Constructions standard rated -40°F (-40°C) ambient temperature. EFX prefix and TPL # not required.

A
4-Way General Service Solenoid Valves
8342 Series
FEATURES
• Direct acting operation and high flow construction
• Direct acting, high flow slide-style valve
• Optional flow control regulates cylinder speed
independently, in either direction
• Mechanical detent on dual solenoids holds last
position,even after loss of electric power, pneumatics or
pressure
• No minimum operating pressure differential required to
shift valve
• Dual solenoid operation: solenoid may be energized
momentarily (1/10 second) or continuously
• Brass or Stainless Steel Bodies ¼" to ⅜" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Optional: Explosion proof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S,
4, 4X, 6, 6P, 7, and 9. (To order, add prefix “EF” to item
number.)
Seals and Discs NBR and FKM
Springs 302 Stainless Steel / 17-7 PH Stainless Steel
Shading Coil Copper
Sleeve PA
Seats Graphite-filled PTFE
Max. Watt Rating/

Operating Pressure
Fluid Class of Coil Item
Differential (psi)
Pipe Orifice Cv Temp.°F Insulation
Size Size Flow
(in) (in) Factor Max. AC, Max. Max. AC,Lt.
Stainless Steel
Air-Inert AC, Oil AC AC Brass Body
Body
Gas Water @ 300 SSU
SINGLE SOLENOID CONSTRUCTION
¼ ³⁄₁₆ .70 125 100 100 160 20.1/F 8342G001 8342G701
⅜ ³⁄₁₆ .70 125 100 100 160 20.1/F 8342G003 8342G703
DUAL SOLENOID CONSTRUCTION
¼ ³⁄₁₆ .70 125 125 125 160 16.1/F 8342G020 8342G720
⅜ ³⁄₁₆ .70 125 125 125 160 16.1/F 8342G022 8342G722
 With built-in flow control (Suffix “M”), the Cv is 0.44 and an 0.5 psi minimum operating pressure is required.

Low Power Solenoid Valves A

.55 W Low Power Series
FEATURES
• Molded one-piece solenoid with highly efficient solenoid
cartridge and 0.55 W low wattage coil
• Standard ambient temperature of 149˚F (65˚C)
• Optional 176˚F (80˚C) high ambient temperature version
• Designed for use in automation of plant control systems to
provide:
- PLC and DCS compatibility for BUS network and traditional
wiring
- Reduced temperature rise
- Increase battery life
- Reduce wiring cost
- Energy savings
• Wide selection includes ³⁄₂ normally closed (including Quick
Exhaust), ³⁄₂ universal, ⁴⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂, & ⁵⁄₃
• Aluminum, Brass, or Stainless Steel
• Bodies ¼" to 1" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Optional: Explosion proof and Watertight, Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X,
6, 6P, 7, and 9. (To order, add prefix “EF” to item number. For
explosion proof with 316 Stainless Steel hub and trim, specify
prefix "EV".)
• Surge suppression coils also available “MF” prefix.
Body Aluminum Brass Stainless Steel
Seals and Discs PUR, NBR, FKM as listed
Shading Coil 304L Stainless Steel
Seals 430F Stainless Steel
Core and Core Tube 302 Stainless Steel
End Covers and POM
Plate
Spool PTFE
Internal Parts POM

A
Low Power Solenoid Valves - Continued
Cv Flow Operating Pressure
Max. Item
Pipe Orifice Factor Differential (psi)
Fluid and
Size Size
Pressure Cylinder Min. Max. Ambient
(in) (in)
to to Air-Inert Air-Inert Temp. °F Brass Body Stainless Steel Body Single Solenoid Dual Solenoid
Cylinder Exhaust Gas Gas
2/2 VALVES, NORMALLY CLOSED, with NBR Disc
¼ ¹⁄₉ 0.06 .0.06 0 130 149 8262H320 †† 8262H386 †† - -
⅜ ¹⁄₃ 1.5 1.5 10 130 149 8223H323 - - -
½ ⅜ 3.2 3.2 25 130 149 8223H303 8223H310  - -
³⁄₂ VALVES, UNIVERSAL OPERATION (Normally Closed or Normally Open) with NBR Disc – SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida³⁄₂ VALVES, UNIVERSAL OPERATION (Normally Closed or Normally Open) with NBR Disc
– SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida
130/105 8314H300 †† 8314H301 ††

¼ ¹⁄₂₀ 0.06 0.06 5
130/105
149 - -
³⁄₂VALVES, NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-engergized) with NBR Disc or FPM< as Listed - SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida³⁄₂VALVES, NORMALLY CLOSED (Closed when de-engergized) with NBR Disc or
FPM< as Listed - SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida
¼ ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.5 1.5  130 149 8316H301 EV8316H381V -
⅜ ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.8 1.8  130 149 8316H302 EV8316H382V -
⅜ ⁵⁄₈ 4 4  130 149 8316H303 - -
½ ⁵⁄₈ 4 4  130 149 8316H304 EV8316H384V -
¾ ¹¹⁄₁₆ 5.5 5.5 10 130 149 8316J374 - -
1 1 13 13 10 130 149 8316H334 - -
3/2 VALVES, UNIVERSAL (Normally Close or Normally Open) “Quick Exhaust” with NBR Diaphram and NBR Disc
¼  0.06 0.73 5 130 149 8317H307 8317H308 - -
⁴⁄₂ VALVES, Brass Body with NBR Disc
¼ ¼ 0.8 1 10 130 149 - - 8344H370 8344H344†
⅜ ⅜ 1.5 2.2 10 130 149 - - 8344H372 8344H380†
½ ⅜ 1.5 2.2 10 130 149 - - 8344H374 8344H382†
¾ ¾ 5.2 5.6 10 130 149 - - 8344H376 8344H354†
1 ¾ 5.2 5.6 10 130 149 - - 8344H378 8344H356†
Note: Pilot core discs are low-temperature NBR. Adding Suffix V (FKM) does NOT change the pilot core discs material. Suffix V (FKM) is not available on Series 8551 and 8553.
 There are two exhaust flows in the exhaust mode (pilot and main). The pilot exhaust must be connected to the main exhaust when the air or inert gas cannot be exhausted to atmosphere.
 For “Quick Exhaust” valves, pressure port is ¹⁄₁₆”, exhaust port is ¼”.
 IMPORTANT: A Minimum Operating Pressure Differential must be maintained between the pressure and exhaust ports. Supply and exhaust piping must be full area, unrestricted. ASCO flow controls and other similar
components must be installed in the cylinder lines only.
 Diaphragm and main disc FKM only (pilot is low-temperature NBR); Ambient temperature range is 32°F to 149°F.
 Zero minimum when valve selection gasket is in external position and proper auxiliary air pressure is applied. Minimum 15 psi Operating Pressure Differential when selection gasket is in the internal position.
 Can be used for dry natural gas service (no agency approvals) with the EF or EV prefix without manual operator.
 Normally closed = 130 psi. Normally open = 105 psi.
 Solenoid only approvals with EF or EV prefix, no approvals with general purpose coil (no prefix).
 Safety manual and FMEDA (Failure Modes Effects and Diagnostic Analysis) report available.
 SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida, only valid when used as Normally Closed.
† Dual solenoid 8344 requires minimum pressure of 20 psi. Single solenoid version has 10 psi minimum pressure requirement.
†† UL/CSA approved for use with dry natural gas or propane gas with EF or EV prefix without manual operator.

Low Power Solenoid Valves - Continued A

Single Solenoid – SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida Dual Solenoid
Operating Operating Operating Operating
Pipe Orifice Cv
Body Pressure Pressure Max. Pressure Pressure Max.
Size Size Flow
Materials Differential Differential Fluid Item Differential Differential Fluid Item
(in) (in) Factor
(psi), Min. (psi), Max. Temp.°F (psi), Min. (psi), Max. Temp.°F
Air-Inert Gas Air-Inert Gas Air-Inert Gas Air-Inert Gas
³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂, ⁵⁄₃ VALVES, with NBR and PUR Seals
8551H305 8551H306
Aluminum ³⁄₂
8551H317 8551H318
Aluminum ⁵⁄₂
8551H367
Aluminum ⁵⁄₃ Center Closed -
8551H368
Aluminum ⁵⁄₃ Center Open ¼ ¼ 0.86 -
EF8551H307 EF8551H308
Brass ³⁄₂
EF8551H320
Brass ⁵⁄₂ EF8551H319
35 130 149 30 130 149
EV8551H313 EV8551H314
316L Stainless Steel ³⁄₂
316L Stainless Steel ⁵⁄₂ EV8551H321

 EV8551H322
8553H305 8553H306
Aluminum ³⁄₂
8553H317 8553H318
Aluminum ⁵⁄₂
½ ½ 3.7
EV8553H313 EV8553H314

316L Stainless Steel ³⁄₂
EV8553H321 EV8553H322

316L Stainless Steel ⁵⁄₂
 Brass construction supplied standard with EF solenoid.
 Stainless steel construction supplied standard with EV solenoid.
 Can be used for dry natural gas service (no agency approvals) with the EF or EV prefix without manual operator.
 Solenoid only approvals with EF or EV prefix, no approvals with (no prefix) general purpose coil.
 Safety manual and FMEDA (Failure Modes Effects and Diagnostic Analysis) report available.
Single Solenoid – SIL 3 Capable, Certified by Exida Dual Solenoid

Operating Operating Operating Operating
Pipe Orifice Cv Flow Pressure Pressure Max. Pressure Pressure
Body Material Max. Fluid
Size (in) Size (in) Factor Differential Differential Fluid Item Differential Differential Item
Temp.°F
(psi), Min. (psi), Max. Temp.°F (psi), Min. (psi), Max.
Air-Inert Gas Air-Inert Gas Air-Inert Gas Air-Inert Gas
³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂, ⁵⁄₃ VALVES, with NBR and PUR Seals, NAMUR Mount
Aluminum ³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂
8551H301 8551H302
Aluminum ⁵⁄₃ Center Closed

- 8551H365
Aluminum ⁵⁄₃ Center Open ¼ ¼ 0.86

- 8551H366
Brass ³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂

35 130 149 EF8551H303 30 130 149 EF8551H304
316L Stainless Steel ³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂

EV8551H309 EV8551H310
Aluminum ³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂

8553H301 8553H302
½ ½ 3.7
316L Stainless Steel ³⁄₂, ⁵⁄₂
EV8553H309 EV8553H310

Brass construction supplied standard with EF solenoid.
Stainless steel construction supplied standard with EV solenoid.
Can be used for dry natural gas service (no agency approvals) with the EF or EV prefix without manual operator.
Solenoid only approvals with EF or EV prefix, no approvals with (no prefix) general purpose coil.
Safety manual and FMEDA (Failure Modes Effects and Diagnostic Analysis) report available.

A
Manual Reset 3-Way Solenoid Valves
8037 / 8308 / 8310 Series
FEATURES
• High flow/high-pressure bodies with manual reset to
prevent inadvertent valve start-up
• Once tripped, can only be manually reset
• Electrically tripped (trips when energized), no voltage
release (trips when de-energized), or free handle
constructions
• Available for latched open or latched closed operation
• Ideal for controlling critical processes
• Some constructions can control aggressive fluids,
including steam
• Intrinsically safe constructions are available
• Brass or stainless steel bodies
• ¼" to 1" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Standard: RedHat metal solenoid enclosure. Type 1
General Purpose Junction Box.
• Optional: Explosion proof and Watertight, Types 3, 7 (C
and D), and 9. (To order, add prefix "EF" to item number.)
Body Aluminum Brass
Stem 303 Stainless Steel
Springs 302 Stainless Steel
Pilot Seat Cartridge CA (when listed)
Disc, Diaphragm, Seat NBR, PA, PTFE, or Stainless Steel, as listed

Manual Reset 3-Way Solenoid Valves - Continued A

Orifice Cv Flow Watt Rating/Class of
Pipe Size (in) Operating Pressure Differential (psi) Max. Fluid Temp. °F
Size (in) Factor Coil Insulation Item
Item
Min. Max. AC Max.DC AC DC AC DC
UNIVERSAL OPERATION (Except as Noted  ), Brass Body with NBR Disc/Diaphragm (CA Pilot Cartridge) for
Air-Inert Gas and Water. This group of valves meets shock and vibration ISA S71.03C2.
¼ ¹¹⁄₆₄ .38 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308B040 8310B040
⅜ ⅝ 3 10 250 250 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308C041   8310C041  
½ ⅝ 4 10 250 250 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308C042   8310C042  
¾ ¹¹⁄₁₆ 5.5 10 250 250 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308C043   8310C043  
1 1 13 10 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308A050   8310A050  

UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Brass Body with Stainless Steel Seats and Discs for Air-Inert Gas, Water and Light Oil
¼ ¼ .45 0 125 125 200 200 20/F 36.2/H 8308044 8310044
⅜ ¼ .45 0 125 125 200 200 20/F 36.2/H 8308045 8310045
½ ⁵⁄₁₆ .75 0 125 125 200 200 20/F 36.2/H 8308046 8310046
UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Brass Body with NBR Seats and PA Discs for Air-Inert Gas, Water and Light Oil
¼ ¼ .39 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308044R 8310044R
⅜ ¼ .39 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308045R 8310045R
½ ⁵⁄₁₆ .53 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308046R 8310046R
UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Stainless Steel Body with FKM Discs for Air-Inert Gas and Water
¼ ⅛ .21 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8308A011 8310A011
UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Stainless Steel Body with Stainless Steel Seats and Discs for Corrosive Service
½ ⁵⁄₁₆ .75 0 125 125 200 200 20/F 36.2/H 8308047 8310047
Free Handle Construction

UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Brass Body with NBR Discs for Air-Inert Gas and Water
¼ ¹¹⁄₆₄ .38 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8037014
UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Brass Body with PTFE Seats and FKM Discs for Air-Inert Gas, Water and Light Oil
¼ ³⁄₁₆ .70 0 125 125 160 160 20/F 36.2/H 8037A008 
⅜ ³⁄₁₆ .70 0 125 125 160 160 20/F 36.2/H 8037A010 

UNIVERSAL OPERATION, Stainless Steel Body with FKM Discs for Air-Inert Gas and Water
¼ ⅛ .21 0 125 125 180 180 20/F 36.2/H 8037012
 When ordering, specify suffix “F” for Normally Closed construction or Suffix “G” for Normally Open construction.
 Supplied with CA pilot cartridge.

A
NAMUR Mount Solenoid Valves
8551 / 8553 Series
FEATURES
• Compact spool valve convertible from ³∕₂ to ⁵∕₂
• Standard manual operator
• DIN, watertight and explosionproof solenoids available
• Single and dual solenoid constructions
• Vents air from spring side of actuator to prevent
corrosion of actuator
• Anodized aluminum bodies
• Direct NAMUR mount ¼" and ½" NPT
SOLENOID ENCLOSURES
• Standard: - Prefix
• SC = IP65 type DIN (open frame) per 46244
• WT = Combination General Purpose and Watertight Types 1, 2, 3, 3S, 4, and 4X
• EF = Combination Explosion proof and Watertight Types 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 5P, 7, 9
Class I, Div. 1 (Groups A - D) and Class II, Div. 1 Type 9 (Groups E-G)
Body Black Anodized Aluminum
Spring Phosphate treated black steel
Shading Coil Copper
Seals NBR + PUR
Core and Core Tube Stainless Steel / Brass
End Covers and Plate 6/6 glass filled PA/FV
Spool Aluminum
Internal Parts Zamak, Steel, CA
Operating Pressure Watt Rating/Class of Coil

Fluid Temperature °F (for single and dual solenoid) Item
Orifice Cv Flow Differential (psi) Insulation
Pipe Size (in)
Size (in) Factor
Single Solenoid
Min. Max. Min. Max.AC Max.DC AC DC Dual Solenoid
PFDAVG = 3.3 x 10⁻³
OPEN FRAME DIN COIL
¼ ¼ .86 30 150 5 140 140 2.5 3 SC8551A001MS SC8551A002MS
½ ½ 3.7 30 150 -15 140 140 5 6.9 SC8553A001MS SC8553A002MS
WATERTIGHT ENCLOSURE
¼ ¼ .86 30 150 5 140 77 6.3 6.9 WT8551A001MS WT8551A002MS
½ ½ 3.7 30 150 -15 140 77 6.3 6.9 WT8553A001MS WT8553A002MS

EXPLOSIONPROOF ENCLOSURE
¼ ¼ .86 30 150 5 140 77 6.3 6.9 EF8551A001MS EF8551A002MS
½ ½ 3.7 30 150 -15 140 77 6.3 6.9 EF8553A001MS EF8553A002MS

 ⅛ inch NPT exhausts.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Specialty Valves
Chromatic Industries
A
Cartridge Valve
HCV Valve
DESCRIPTION
The HCV Valve is an innovative design that incorporates
the positive features of ball, gate, plug and high
performance valves resulting in a mechanically sealing,
tight shutoff valve with a simple operation for a broad
range of applications with virtually no maintenance.
CARTRIDGE DESIGN
• Top entry
• Ease of repair
• Reduced downtime
• Serialized cartridges
• Interchangeability
MECHANICALLY SEATED
• HEMI - Mechanical wedge
• Bubble tight sealing / Bi-directional
• Sealing at low or high pressure
• Reduced load during operation
STATIONARY CORE
• Seats protected from product flow
• Linear flow characteristic
• Reduced turbulence
• Eliminates pressure cuts on seats
• Comparative flow to ball valves
QUARTER TURN OPERATION MATERIAL AVAILABILITY

• Easily automated Carbon steel (A216 Grade WCC), impact-tested carbon
• Quick / reliable operation steel (A352 Grade LCC), stainless steel (A351 Grade
• Low dimensional profile CF8M) are the most typical alloys offered, but other alloys
are available for body/ bonnet or internals depending on
CARTRIDGE DESIGN service conditions. Trim materials are available in a variety
The HCV’s defining feature is its cartridge design of alloys to meet NACE requirements and other corrosive
whereby all the valve’s internal sealing parts are affixed environments.
to the bonnet allowing quick and easy serviceability and
reducing expensive downtime during maintenance. PRODUCT AVAILABILITY
HCV valves are available in either Full or Reduced Port
This cartridge design provides the ability to repair the configurations with most common end connections
valve with relative ease in a minimum amount of time including; raised face, ring type joint, butt-weld, threaded.
without any special training or special tools. Special sizes and design modifications can be discussed
for special applications.
When the valve is isolated (de-pressured), simply re-
move the bonnet fasteners, slide the cartridge out of the
body, insert the new cartridge into the body, and retight-
en the bonnet fasteners.

A Tailor-Made, Special Alloy Valves

DESCRIPTION
Red Point manufacturers ball, check, gate, globe, butterfly and tailor-made valves in size ranges from 1/2” up to 12”
including pressure classes 125-6000 (PN6-PN400) in special alloys such as Nickel alloys (Hastelloy, Incoloy, Inconel,
Monel, Alloy 20 and etc.), Titanium, Duplex and Super Duplex and corrosion resistant alloys.
TESTING & CERTIFICATIONS
• ISO 9001
• CE/PED certified
• Authorized by Stoomwezen to remark materials
• 100% tested in-house - Hydro test on body and seat followed by a low pressure air test.
• Additional testing on valves and materials such as performance tests, high or low temperature, fire safe or cycle tests
can be arranged by Red Point using local laboratories or testing houses.
• All valves are marked and certified
APPLICATIONS
• Petro/Chemical
• Pharmaceutical
• Oil production
• On/Offshore
• Refineries
• Gas storage
• Power generation

Ball Valves Globe Valves A

FEATURES FEATURES
• Floating ball / Trunnion mounted • Regulating disc
• Soft / metal seated • Bellow sealed option
• Handwheel, lever, gearbox, actuator or • Straight / Y-Type
ROV operated • Bolted / Pressure sealed bonnet
• Sizes ½" up to 24" • Handwheel, gearbox, actuator or ROV
• Pressure ratings up to 4500 lbs operated
• Flanged, BW, SW, THR, HUB ends • Sizes ½" up to 16"
• Pressure ratings up to 4500 lbs
• Flanged, BW, SW, THR, HUB ends
Double Block & Bleed Valves Check Valves

FEATURES FEATURES
• Sizes ½" up to 8" • Piston check, Swing check, Dual check
• Compact cartridge style suitable for • Soft - Metal seated
API6D • Sizes ½" up to 24"
• Pressure ratings up to 4500 lbs • Pressure ratings up to 4500 lbs
• Flanged, SW, THR, HUB ends • Flanged, BW, SW, THR, Wafer, HUB end
Gate Valves Specialty/Tailor-made Valves

FEATURES FEATURES
• Flexible / Solid wedge • On customers specification
• Bellow sealed option • Design
• Bolted / Pressure sealed bonnet • Calculation
• Handwheel, gearbox, actuator or ROV • CFD / FEMAP
operated • Customer approval
• Sizes ½" up to 16" • Detailed engineering
• Pressure ratings up to 4500 lbs • Produced in wide range off materials
• Flanged, BW, SW, THR, HUB ends

VCI
A
Vacu-Gard® Tank Blanketing Valves
Models 1078 & 1079
DESCRIPTION
The Model 1078 and 1088 are pilot-operated valves specifically
designed to reduce blanketing gas losses on low pressure storage
tanks. They open and close automatically as required, to maintain a
closely controlled blanket pressure and allow for complete access to the
valve internals without being removed from the tank.
Used on many low-pressure storage tanks, the Model 1078 or 1088

makes tank blanketing much easier. By design, set point definition for
both the 1078 and 1088 is where the blanketing valve closes bubble
tight. This ensures the largest dead band between the blanketing valve
set point and the set point of the relieving device, which will reduce
losses. These tank blanketing valves have a wide range of available
settings, from vacuum to 14 psig, that make proper selection easier.
FEATURES
• Wide variety of configurations to meet every blanketing application
• Self-cleaning flow design
• Complete access to the valve internals without being removed from the
tank Model 1078
• Pressure balanced pilot
• Valve set point can be verified 100% on the tank, without removal and
without flowing supply gas into the tank
• Bubble tight at set point, prevents waste of blanketing gases
• Uses standard o-rings for seat and seals
• Sensing options: Remote sensing, Integral dip tube sensing (Vertical
Outlet Only) and Internal sensing (Model 1088 only)
SPECIFICATIONS Model 1078 Model 1088

Body Size 1” and 2” Top Entry Designs ½” Bottom Entry Design
Materials CS Body/Pilot SST Body/Pilot
SST Body/Pilot
Max. Pressure Settings 14 psig 14 psig
Model 1088

VE
Dual Expanding Plug Valve A
DESCRIPTION
The VE® Dual Expanding Plug Valve has been developed to offer an alternative
to the principle of two separate in line valves with an intermediate drain and/
or bleed valve. The VE® Dual Expanding Plug Valve provides upstream and
downstream sealing without causing any abrasion or wear to the elastomeric
sealing surfaces. This ensures “zero leakage” in both directions in addition to
securing long life of the seals and low opening and closing torque. Several relief
or bleed options are available to maximize the performance of the VE® Dual
Expanding Plug Valve.
The VE® Dual Expanding Plug Valve exists in different executions:

• Figure no. 2300 Reduced Bore – Standard Version
• Figure no. 2301 Full Bore Piggable
• Figure no. 2302 Full Bore Pig-launcher
• Figure no. 2304 Four-Way Diverter Valve
FEATURES
• Permanent integral thermal relief and bleed function
• In-line maintenance in case of seal replacement
• Very short installation space required
• Double Isolation function, according API-6D/ISO14313
• Only 1 actuator required to operate the valve
Design, Dimensions and Markings
• Design as per API 599 & API 6D
• Face to face as per ANSI b16.10& API 6D
• Flanged ends as per ANSI B16.5 / EN-1092-1
Characteristics
• Friction free
• Dual expanding
• Double block & bleed and double isolation & bleed (according to API-6D/ISO14313)
Construction
• 3 Parts construction: body, lower plate, upper plate
• Trunnion mounted
• Antistatic design
• Seating slips (slips are replaceable through the lower or upper plate)
• Reduce bore or full bore
• Low emission packing & gaskets according to ISO 15848-1
• Electrolytic nickel plating - ENP
• Corrosion resistant studs and nuts
Applicable Standards
• ISO 9001:08
• PED 97/23/EC
• ATEX 94/9/EC (CAT II 3 G/D T1 to T4)
• Fugitive emission certificate according to ISO 15848-1
• Fire safe according to API 607

A Dual Expanding Plug Valve - Continued

Flanged Connection Design
• ANSI B16.5: Raised face smooth finish, stock finish or ring type joint
• ASME B16.47 Series A (MSS-SP-44) or Series B: Raised face smooth finish, stock finish or ring type joint
(applicable for valves = 30”)
• Top of flange as per ISO 5210 (f10 / f14 / f25...)
Marking
• European directive PED 97/23/EC
• API 6D
• MSS-SP-25
Casting Material
• According to API 6D / ASME B16.34 / EN 1092-1 / PED 97/23/EC
Elastomer Materials
• Viton A / B / GF
• HNBR
• Multi Seal ERT
Testing
• API 6D
• API 598
• EN-12266-1 / EN-12266-2
• BS 6755 part 1
Operation Devices
• Handwheel
• Gear box
• Actuator linear / multi turn
• Pneumatic actuator
Bleed Systems
• Manual body bleed
• Thermal relief upstream
• Manual body bleed with thermal relief upstream
• Automatic body bleed
• Remote leak detection system
• Bi-directional body bleed with thermal relief
Bottom Drain Plug
• Standard included
Optional
• Limits switches
• Locking device
• Cable gland
• Extensions

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Pneumatic Actuators
Neles Actuators
Pneumatic Cylinder Actuator A

B Series
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles double acting and spring return B-Series
piston type actuators are designed for use in both
modulating control and on-off service. The Series B1C
(Double Acting) and B1J (Spring Return) are designed
to ISO 5211/1 when Metso linkages are utilized. These
actuators offer an extremely long cycle life and are well
suited to operate almost any type of rotary valve.
When "stay put" is the requirement, the double acting B1C

Series is the choice. This series is available in several
sizes with torque outputs from 29.5 to 73,756 ft lbs for
maximum supply pressure of 145 psi.
If a failure mode is required, the spring return B1J Series

should be selected. The spring return actuators are
available with a mid-range spring for a 58 psi supply
range, a lighter spring for lower supply pressure of 44 psi
range and a stronger spring for a 80 psi range. These
actuators offer torque outputs from 18.5 to 8851 ft lbs for
maximum supply pressure of 124 psi.
FEATURES
• Adjustable Travel Stops for both the open and closed • High Cycle option for applications where very fast and
positions. End of stroke turning angle range is 85° to high sequency operation is required.
95°. Optional travel stops 0° to 90° available. • ATEX Compatibility
• Wear Resistant Bearings reduce friction and expand the • Oversized Cylinder options (B1C 60, 75, 602, 752) are
life of both the lever arm and the housing. used whenever the supply pressure is limited, thus the
• Epoxy painted actuators have housings of cast iron, with actuators can achieve the required torques with a lower
light-weight aluminum cylinders anodized for corrosion supply pressure level.
resistance. Travel stops are stainless steel. • Override Device options include a manual centerpiece
• Springs in the B1J actuator are contained in a cartridge handle, a manual handwheel override, and a manual
for added reliability and easy maintenance. hydraulic override for high torque applications.
• Spring to Open or Close capability by changing the • Emergency Shut-Down (ESD) valves utilizing B1J
mounting position by 90°. On a high performance actuators are offered to assure operation in the event of
butterfly valve, the standard unit offers spring-to-close afire or plant malfunction.
operation. An optional B1JA model is available for
spring-to-open requirements.
• Temperature ranges for standard unit are from -20°C to
70°C (-4°F to 158°F). High temperature construction is
available for temperatures up to 120°C (248°F). A low
temperature design is available for -40°C to 70°C (-40°F
to 158°F).

A Pneumatic Cylinder Actuator - Continued

HOW TO ORDER - SERIES B1C and BC
XX X X X XX X XX X X X
Table 1 Product Group Table 7 Actuator Size*

B1 Cylinder actuator with attachment dimensions acc. to ISO 5211 E.g. 50/120 = actuator size / shaft bore diameter.
Note special sizes (BC 50 and 502 with oversized cylinder):
B Cylinder actuator with attachment dimensions acc. to internal
60 - max. supply pressure 8.5 bar (cylinder Ø 600 mm/24"),
standard (D 301691)
75 - max. supply pressure 5 bar (cylinder Ø 750 mm/30"),
Table 2 Series 602 - max. supply pressure 8.5 bar (cylinder Ø 600 mm/24"),
752 - max. supply pressure 5 bar (cylinder Ø 750 mm/30")
C Double acting, pneumatic
Please see technical data in Bulletin 6B20 for size options.
Table 3 Construction
Seal and Bearing Material
- Standard construction without sign Table 8
(all versions ATEX II 2 G c and ATEX II 3 G c)
H Manual hydraulic override
– Standard construction without sign (-20° to +70 °C) O-rings:
Table 4 Cylinder and Housing Materials Nitrile rubber. Bearings and piston seals: PE-HD DU-bearings in
sizes 6 to 25 Stainless steel net + PTFE bearings with antistatic
- Aluminum cylinder and GG-20 housing, standard materials, ring in sizes 32 to 752
without sign
HL For temperatures -20... +120 ºC and long-run option L - dynamic
S Steel cylinder and GG-20 housing and piston O-rings: Fluorocarbon rubber (Viton) - bearings and piston seals:
B Alumium cylinder and GGG-40 housing and piston PTFE + C25 - leverage bearings: Fiberglide with anti-static ring -
special piston rod seal: Double Delta (PTFE+VITON O-ring)
X Steel cylinder and GGG-40 housing and piston
CL For temperatures -40... +70 ºC, and long-run option L- dynamic
Table 5 Special Construction O-rings: Epiclohydrin rubber (ECO) - piston seals: PTFE + C25
- Standard construction without sign - bearings: PE-HD - leverage bearings: Fiberglide with anti-static
ring - special piston rod seal: Double Delta (PTFE+ECO O-ring)
Q Mechanical locking device for piston movement limit on housing
end. Locking with long screw to close position. F* Oversized NPT connections: fast operation (See doc. F13331)
W Mechanical locking device for piston movement limit on cylinder F1* Large oversized NPT connections: faster operation (See doc.
end. Locking with long screw to open position. F13331)
QW Mechanical locking device for piston movement limit on housing F2* Largest oversize NPT connections: fastest operation (See doc.
and cylinder ends. Locking with long screws to close as well as F13331)
to open position. L* Long-run option - O-rings: Nitrile (NBR) - bearings and piston
DD Built-in manual locking device of actuator housing. Locking seals: PE-HD - leverage bearings: Fiberglide with anti-static ring
to close position. Maintenance locking device which keeps - special piston rod seal: Double Delta (PTFE+NBR O-ring)
tightness of butterfly valves. Sizes 6, 502, 602 and 752 are D* DU-bearings - for sizes 32...502 Note: Not applicable with L, CL
excluded. and HL options
Z Actuator equipped with shock absorber on cylinder end *)The possible combinations are: ..FL, ..F1L, ..F2L, ..FD, ..F1D, ..F2D, ..HFL,
N Actuator equipped with shock absorber on housing end ..HF1L, ..HF2L, ..CFL, ..CF1L, ..CF2L.
P Actuator equipped with automatic latching device for closed Table 9 Screw Material
position. Design is made mainly for actuator locking device of
– Stainless steel (standard) without sign for sizes 6 through 32
capping valve. No free motion.
Steel, zinc coated and passivated (standard) without sign for
T Actuator equipped with manual latching device. Actuator can be sizes 40 and bigger.
locked to open position allowing about 20 degrees' motion.
E Stainless steel for sizes 40 and bigger.
K Handwheel on cylinder end (sizes 9 to 25)
Non Standard Range
L Handwheel on housing end (sizes 9 to 25) Table 10 e.g. 30° - 70° (standard operation range e.g. for ball valves 0° -
90°, without sign)
R Handwheel both on cylinder end and housing end (sizes 9 to 25)
X Valve closed position is limited. When closed position is limited to
RK Handwheel on cylinder end with wormgear (sizes 32 - 75). Not 30°, X = 30 (never fully closed).
used in 502, 602 and 752.
Z Valve open position is limited. When open position is limited to
RL Handwheel on housing end with wormgear (sizes 32 - 75). Not 70°, Z = 70 (never fully open).
used in 502, 602 and 752.
Table 11 Special Construction
RR Handwheel both on cylinder end and housing end with wormgear
(sizes 32 - 75). Not used in 502, 602 and 752. M K-mass fire protection
Y Special, to be specified, e.g. special material or stop screw
Table 6 Interface for Additional Devices (positioner, limit switch)
U Interface engineered to VDI/VDE with the use of Metso linkages

Pneumatic Cylinder Actuator - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER - SERIES B1J, BJ, B1JA and BJA
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13
XX X X X XX X XX X XX X X X
Table 1 Product Group Table 9 Actuator Size

B1 Cylinder actuator with attachment dimensions acc. to ISO 5211 – E.g. 20/55 = actuator size / shaft bore diameter
B Cylinder actuator with attachment dimensions acc. to internal
Please see technical data in Bulletin 6B20 for size options.
standard (D 301691)
Seal and Bearing Material
Table 2 Series Table 10
(all versions ATEX II 2 G c and ATEX II 3 G c)
J Pneumatic, spring-return
- Standard construction without sign (-20° to +70 °C) O-rings:
Table 3 Spring Options Nitrile rubber Bearings and piston seals: PE-HD DU-bearings in
sizes 8 to 25 Stainless steel net + PTFE bearings with antistatic
- Standard construction without sign ring in sizes 32 to 322
K Light spring HL For temperatures -20... +120 ºC and long-run option L - dynamic
V Strong spring O-rings: Fluorocarbon rubber (Viton) - bearings and piston seals:
PTFE + C25 - leverage bearings: Fiberglide with anti-static ring -
Table 4 Function Code special piston rod seal: Double Delta (PTFE+VITON O-ring)
– Spring-to-close operation, without sign CL For temperatures -40... +70 ºC, and long-run option L- dynamic
A Spring-to-open operation (L for old type) O-rings: Epiclohydrin rubber (ECO) - piston seals: PTFE + C25
- bearings: PE-HD - leverage bearings: Fiberglide with anti-static
Table 5 Construction ring - special piston rod seal: Double Delta (PTFE+ECO O-ring)
- Standard construction without sign F* Oversized NPT connections: fast operation (See doc. F13331)
R Secondary handwheel operation (sizes 8 - 16) F1* Large oversized NPT connections: faster operation (See doc.
F13331)
RR Secondary handwheel with wormgear (sizes 20 - 32)
F2* Largest oversize NPT connections: fastest operation (See doc.
H Manual hydraulic override
F13331)
Table 6 Cylinder and Housing Materials
L* Long-run option - O-rings: Nitrile (NBR) - bearings and piston
- Aluminum cylinder and GG-20 housing, standard materials, seals: PE-HD - leverage bearings: Fiberglide with anti-static ring
without sign - special piston rod seal: Double Delta (PTFE+NBR O-ring)
S Steel cylinder and GG-20 housing and piston D* DU-bearings - for sizes 32...322 Note: Not applicable with L, CL
and HL options
B Aluminum cylinder and GGG-40 housing and piston
Table 11 Screw Material
X Steel cylinder and GGG-40 housing and piston)
- Stainless steel (standard) with out sign for sizes 8 through 20
Table 7 Special Construction Steel zinc coated and passivated (standard) without sign for
- Standard construction without sign sizes 25 and bigger
Q Mechanical locking device for piston movement limit on housing E Stainless steel for sizes 25 and bigger
end. Locking with long screw to close position. *)The possible combinations are: ..FL, ..F1L, ..F2L, ..FD, ..F1D, ..F2D, ..HFL,
W Mechanical locking device for piston movement limit on cylinder ..HF1L, ..HF2L, ..CFL, ..CF1L, ..CF2L.
end. Locking with long screw to open position. Non-Standard Operating Range
Z Actuator equipped with shock absorber on cylinder end Table 12 e.g. 30° - 70° standard operation range e.g. for ball valves 0° -
90°, without sig
N Actuator equipped with shock absorber on housing end
X Valve closed position is limited. When closed position is limited to
QW Mechanical locking device for piston movement limit on housing 30°, X = 30 (never fully closed).
and cylinder ends. Locking with long screws to close as well as
to open position. Z Valve open position is limited. When open position is limited to
70°, Z = 70 (never fully open).
PP Actuator equipped with automatic latching device for open posi-
tion in series B1J and for closed position in series B1JA allowing Table 13 Special Construction
about 20 degrees' motion. M K-mass fire protection
T Actuator equipped with manual latching device. The actuator can
be locked in series B1J for open position and in series B1JA for
closed position allowing about 20 degrees' motion.
Y Special, to be specified e.g. special material or stop screw
Table 8 Interface for Additional Devices (positioner, limit switch)
U Interface engineered to VDI/VDE with the use of Metso linkages

Jamesbury
A Spring-Diaphragm Actuator
Quadra-Powr
DESCRIPTION
Exclusively developed for quarter-turn valve service, spring-
diaphragm actuators provide safe reliable operation even when
minimal supply pressures are available. Maximum air supply
pressurce is 100 psi.
These units can be operated by air, gas, water, oil, or other supply
media compatible with the ductile iron/Carbon Steel casing of the
actuator and the Buna-N diaphragm reinforced with polyamide fabric.
FEATURES
• Torque output range from 11 to 587 ft lbs
• Rotation adjustment -5° to 5° and 85° to 95°
• Temperature rating -20°F to 150°F
• Adjustable travel stops for both open and closed positions allow the
actuator to be adjusted both fully open as well as fully closed.
• Also available is an option for a 100% adjustable stop in the
pressure stroke direction.
• Rolling diaphragm design, along with new one piece diaphragm
retainer and UHMW Polyethlene bearing, assures extremely long Air Volume Requirements
cycle life. Total Swept Approx. Operating Effective
• Low friction operation provides exceptionally smooth actuation. Actuator Volume Volume
3
Speed sec* Diaphragm
in in3 Area - in3
• Unlike most spring-diaphragm actuators, the Quadra-Powr can be Series Air Spring
Stroke Stroke
operated at 100 psi. QPX1 63 38 2 2 17
• Fail open or fail close operation can be quickly changed in the field QPX2 96 66 3 3 24
by simply rotating the actuator. Top and bottom mounting pads are QPX3 191 133 5 1-1/2 38
identical. QPX4 368 265 10 4 60
• Springs are pre loaded in a self-contained cartridge for safe QPX5 715 531 3 2 96
handling and easier maintenance. * Note: Actual times may vary with the application. Larger size
• Lubricated at the factory. No further lubrication is required. solenoid pilot valves are available for faster opening speeds.
Output Torques in ft.lbs. for QPX Spring-Diaphragm Actuators at Specific Supply Pressures in psi
20 psi 30 psi 40 psi 50 psi 60 psi 70 psi 80 psi 90 psi
Actuator End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of End of
Air Spring Air Spring Air Spring Air Spring Air Spring Air Spring Air Spring Air Spring
QPX1C 25 25 38 25
QPX2A 23* 11
QPX2B 11 38 32 38 56 38
QPX2C 50 57 72 57
QPX2D 47 74 70 74 93 74
QPX3A 54* 26
QPX3B 19 76 65 76 110 76
QPX3C 100 114 143 114
QPX3D 93 146 138 146 184 146
QPX4B 40 153 130 153 223 153
QPX4C 200 229 288 229
QPX4D 189 294 281 294 372 294
QPX5B 79 305 260 305 445 305
QPX5C 400 458 576 458
QPX5D 376 587 560 587 743 587
* Can be used for direct control with 12 – 20 psi signal on valves with 8 and 18 ft.lbs. maximum torque requirements, respectively.

Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Actuator A

VPVL, Model D
DESCRIPTION
VALV-POWR VPVL double-opposed piston actuators combine the
benefits of high cycle life, a rugged construction, and an extremely
compact and symmetrical design with a unique range of features and
options. They are specifically designed for fast efficient operation of ball,
butterfly, and other rotary type valves.
FEATURES
• Modular designs with same body and end caps for double acting and
spring-return models. Springs can be added in the field to convert
Double-Acting to spring-return or for changes in supply pressure.
• Failure direction can be easily reversed from spring-open or spring-close
orientation simply by inverting the pistons.
• Actuator to valve attachments comply with ISO 5211.
• Solenoid valve and accessory attachments comply with NAMUR VDI/
VDE 3845.
• Hard anodized PTFE coated extruded aluminum body with honed
internal surface for strength and lower coefficient of friction.
• Mechanically multi guided aluminum pistons for precise movement, low
friction, and high cycle life.
• Safety contained multi spring design with preloaded and heavy-duty
coated springs for simpler range versatility, greater safety, and corrosion
resistance.
• External adjustable stops in both directions assure flexibility and
accuracy when setting the valve in the open and closed positions.
DOUBLE ACTING
Torque Output in ft lbs - VPVL XXDA Double Acting Actuator at Specified psi Supply Pressures
Actuator Model
40 psi 50 psi 60 psi 70 psi 80 psi 90 psi 100 psi
VPVL 051 6.8 8.5 10.1 11.8 13.5 15.2 16.9
VPVL 100 12 14.9 17.9 20.9 23.9 26.8 29.8
VPVL 200 23.7 29.6 35 41 47 53 59
VPVL 250 37.2 46.6 55 65 74 83 93
VPVL 300 54 67.6 81 94 108 122 135
VPVL 350 87.5 109 131 153 175 197 219
VPVL 400 113 141 169 197 225 254 282
VPVL 450 177 221 265 310 354 398 442
VPVL 500 231 289 346 404 462 519 577
VPVL 550 312 390 467 545 623 701 779
VPVL 600 433 541 649 757 866 974 1082
VPVL 650 727 909 1091 1272 1454 1636 1818
VPVL 700 1055 1319 1583 1847 2111 2375 2638
VPVL 800 1833 2291 2749 3207 3665 4123 4581

A Pneumatic Rack & Pinion Actuator - Continued

SPRING RETURN
Spring-Return Torque Output Air Torque Output at Specified Supply Pressure
Actuator Model
ft.lbs. ft.lbs. @ 60 psi ft.lbs. @ 80 psi
051 SR4/5 4.4 3.1
051 SR6 5.9 4.1
100 SR4/5 7.4 6.7
100 SR6 9.8 8.9
200 SR4/5 14.7 13
200 SR6 19.6 17
250 SR4/5 24.3 18
250 SR6 32.5 23
300 SR4/5 33.6 29
300 SR6 44.9 38
350 SR4/5 54.4 44
350 SR6 72.6 59
400 SR4/5 69.7 60
400 SR6 93 80
450 SR4/5 109 94
450 SR6 146 126
500 SR4/5 149 126
500 SR6 199 168
550 SR4/5 210 153
550 SR6 280 204
600 SR4/5 282 231
600 SR6 376 308
650 SR4/5 479 399
650 SR6 638 532
700 SR4/5 724 520
700 SR6 966 693
800 SR4/5 1221 1105
800 SR6 1628 1474

Air Torque
Pneumatic Actuator A
4th Generation Upgrade Series
DESCRIPTION
This is the result of the Air Torque SpA mission to offer
always innovative products by combining the long field
experience as market leader, the innovational spirit, the
well-known reliability in actuators design and the high
quality manufacturing level.
FEATURES
• 17 different model sizes both in double acting and spring
return
• 6 different protection levels
• 3 different working temperature executions (from -55°C
up to +150°C)
• Multiple choice of ISO flange and drive shaft connection
for each actuator size.
Pneumatic Actuator
PTB Series
DESCRIPTION
The Power Technology "B" line offers the widest and most
complete actuator range with huge options availability. The
new technical features incorporated in the PT "B" series
pneumatic actuators grant many benefit and versatility for
an easier valve automation.
FEATURES
return
up to +150°C)

A Pneumatic Actuator
PTN Series
DESCRIPTION
The Power Technology "N" line offers the widest and most
complete actuator range with huge options availability.
This product line is developed on a specific request of a
big End-User in terms of combination of materials and
coating to get proper performance against specific and
aggressive environments.
FEATURES
return
up to +150°C)
Pneumatic Actuator
Forged Stainless Steel Series
DESCRIPTION
The Air Torque "S" Series stainless steel actuators is a
corrosion resistant actuators line specifically engineered
for high corrosive environments and for sanitary
applications. This line is manufactured by using high
quality forged stainless steel housings material in A182
F316/EN 10088/3 1.4401. The Air Torque "S" series
stainless steel actuators is well suited for the automation
of butterfly, ball and plug valves in harsh, corrosive
environments.

Robertshaw
Multi-Spring Diaphragm Actuators A

Models VC-230A, VC-231A
DESCRIPTION
The VC-230A direct-acting model and the VC-231A reverse-acting model
are spring opposed diaphragm actuators. They are designed to provide
dependable On-Off or throttling operation of control valves. They may be
actuated by pneumatic signals from any suitable temperature or pressure
controller.
Model VC-230A - Air pressure from the controller is applied to the top of the
diaphragm. As this pressure increases within the range of the load spring,
the actuator stem moves down.
Model VC-231A - Air pressure form the controller is applied underneath the
diaphragm. Increasing pressure causes the actuator stem to move upward.
FEATURES
• Molded Buna-N diaphragms, nylon reinforced
• Steel Diaphragm Cases
• Multiple Steel Springs
• Sturdy cast iron lower frame
• Quick disconnect valve stem construction
• Valve position indicator
SPECIFICATIONS
Diaphragm Area 29 sq. inches (0.02m²) nominal
Service Connection 1/4" - 18 NPT
Pattern Enclosed Spring Type
Spring Ranges 3-15 psi (0.2-1.0 bar) standard. Other ranges available.
Max. Test Diaphragm Pressure 100 psi (6.9 bar)
Max. Working Diaphragm Pressure 40 psi (4.8 bar)
Maximum Stroke 1" (25.4 mm)
Ambient Temperature 200°F (93°C)
Actuator Action
VC-230A Air-to-push-down
VC-231 A Air-to-push-up
Materials
Diaphragm Housing Steel, Painted with Polyurethane Enamel
Diaphragm Buna-N, Nylon Reinforced
Diaphragm Plate Aluminum casting
Springs Tempered MB Wire, Zinc Plated
Actuator Stem Stainless Steel
Actuator Stem Guide Bronze, Self Lubricating
Frame Cast iron
Stem Connector Stainless Steel
Stroke Indicator Aluminum

ABB
A Pneumatic Actuators/Damper Drives

UP Series
DESCRIPTION
The Type UP Pneumatic Universal Rotary Actuators
regulate dampers, fan inlet vanes, lever-operated valves,
turbine governors, fluid drives and other final control
elements. These actuators accept electric or pneumatic
control signals. This provides modulating or on/off control
power to position devices through mechanical linkage or
by direct coupling.
Types UP1 and UP2 actuators include a double-acting
rotary vane power unit. Types UP3, UP4, UP5, UP6
and UP7 actuators include a double-acting piston with a
motion conversion mechanism to convert linear to rotary
motion. Order the actuator with a positioner, or a single or
double acting on/off solenoid valve.
FEATURES
• Seven actuator sizes available in ratings from 122 to
7320 Nm (90 to 5400 ft-lb).
• 12745 Nm (9400 ft-lb) with Master-slave solution.
• Place in convenient locations and connect to driven
device by standard linkage components.
• Options available for fail-safe or fail-in-place on loss of
control input and air supply.
• Use in ambient temperatures up to 85 ºC (185 ºF),
depending on control input.
• Adjustable relationship between control signal and output
shaft position
• Complete range of control signal options including
EDP300 and TZIDC Positioner with HART© digital communications.
• Quick and smooth transfer shifts easily from automatic to manual control.
• Factory installed IP66 (NEMA 4X) enclosure, pneumatic or electric position transmitter, alarm/travel switches, air
failure lock and heated enclosures available.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model UP1 UP2 UP3 UP4 UP5 UP6 UP6 M/S
Rated Torque ft.lb/Nm 90/122 450/610 800/1085 1450/1966 2800/3796 4700/6372 9400/12744
Supply Pressure psi/Kpa 100/690 100/690 100/690 100/690 100/690 100/690 100/690

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Mechanical/Manual Actuators
Jamesbury
Manual Gear Actuator A

M Series
DESCRIPTION
Type M Series actuators are fully enclosed and weather proof. They are factory
lubricated for their lifetime and each unit includes a pointer to indicate valve position.
Standard M units are temperature rated from -40°F to +176°F (-40°C to +80°C). Units
with lower or higher temperature ratings are available on application.
Type M Series actuators are available factory mounted on valves or separately for field
installation.
Max. Input Max. Output

Approx. Handwheel Turns to Rim Pull
Actuator Torque Torque
Weight (lbs) (inches) Open (lbs)1
(ft*lbs)1 (ft*lbs)1
M5/Q 8 6 10 40 10 92
M7/Q 8 6 10 68 17 184
M10/Q 12 12 10 68 34 369
M12/Q 25 18 11 76 57 644
M14/Q 41 24 15 80 80 1296
M15/Q 71 30 17 80 100 2050
M16/Q 103 36 22 80 120 3180
M20/K85 110 36 46 69 104 5925
M30/K105 197 36 77 65 97 9625
M40/K135 412 36 154 63 94 17770
1 Torque values per API-608 & API-609 compliance for handwheel rim pull
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2
XXXXXXX XX
Table 1 Size Configuration Table 2 Options

M5/Q F05/14 mm (.55") Female Square PF Padlock flange on input
M7/Q F07/19 mm (.75") Female Square HT High temperature +77°F to 392°F (+25°C to 200°C)
M10/Q F10/22 mm (.87") Female Square MA Marinized / buried service
M12/Q F14/36 mm (1.42") Female Square
M20/K85 F25/85 mm (3.35") Female Key
M30/K105 F30/105 mm (4.13") Female Key
M40/K135 F40/135 mm (5.31") Female Key

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Electric Actuators
Jamesbury
A Valvcon Electric Actuator

ADC Series
FEATURES
• Field-settable for “fail clockwise” or “fail counter clockwise”
• CSA (C US) Certification
• Dual conduit openings make wiring easier and keep power and control wiring
separate.
• Patented technology provides back-up capabilities within the standard size
actuator enclosures.
• Optional internal battery packs allow for continued modulation during power
outages, provided the control signal remains.
• Two year warranty
12VDC 24VDC 24VAC 115VAC 230VAC

Torque Duty Cycle Time Current Cycle Time Current Cycle Time Current Cycle Time Current Cycle Time Current
(in-lbs) Cycle (sec/90°) Draw (sec/90°) Draw (sec/90°) Draw (sec/90°) Draw (sec/90°) Draw
(Amps) (Amps) (Amps) (Amps) (Amps)
150 100% 11 2.2 13 1.2 8 1.8 9 0.4 9 0.4
300 100% 17 2.5 13 1.4 12 2.1 13 0.5 13 0.4
600 100% 17 2.8 13 1.7 13 2.5 14 0.6 14 0.5
1000 100% 21 4 14 2.4 15 3.5 15 0.9 15 0.6
1500 100% 40 4 24 2.4 27 3.5 29 0.9 29 0.6
2000 100% 40 4.3 33 2.4 28 3.5 29 0.9 29 0.6
2500 100% 55 3.3 40 2 38 3.1 39 0.8 39 0.6
3000 100% 60 3.7 42 2.2 40 3.5 42 0.8 43 0.6

Valvcon Electric Actuator A

V Series 115VAC and 230VAC
FEATURES
• Electronics are simple to use with a clearly labeled terminal strip and easy
access to user wiring.
• Plug-in electronics for simple upgrades and modifications, with coded
connectors to make internal miswiring impossible.
• Standard extended 75% duty cycle at ambient temperatures up to 104°F
• Visual position indicator is part of the cover (no removal necessary) and
clearly shows valve position.
• Dual conduit openings make wiring easier and keep power and control
wiring separate.
• “Captive” cover bolts are permanently attached to the cover and simplify
installation in awkward locations (small enclosure only).
• Stall protection stops the motor if excessive torque or stop is encountered,
providing protection from stall conditions (modulating applications only).
• Thermal overload cutout protects the motor from damage caused by over
duty cycle applications.
• Split phase, capacitor run motors provide long life and high duty cycles with
very low power consumption.
Max Running Max Effective Peak

Torque Output Speed VA Rating Current at Full Inrush Current
Duty Cycle Load (True RMS) (= .66 x peak inrush)
(breakaway) (seconds per 90º rotation)
115VAC 230VAC 115VAC 230VAC 115VAC 230VAC
150 in lb 8 75% 70VA 115VA .6 amps .5 amps 1.25 amps .924 amps
1000 in lb 25 75% 92VA 161VA .8 amps .7 amps 1.66 amps 1.29 amps
Notes:
1. The Maximum Current stated above includes all options. If the brake and/or heater & thermostat are not installed, the actual current draws will be less.

ABB
A Electric Actuator/Damper Drive

Contrac PME/RHD
DESCRIPTION
Contrac intelligent electric rotary actuators from ABB suit continuous duty, modulating, or
pulse input control applications. The Contrac actuator incorporates microprocessor- based
power electronics that provide remarkable positioning accuracy of the final control element.
The remote mounted power electronics includes a Local Control Panel with pushbuttons,
which can be conveniently located for easy access permits engineers to set up actuator
travel action and performance parameters, reducing commissioning time by 50 %. The
operating angles range from 30 to 270 degrees without need of additional modification.
Rotary actuators are available for rated torques of between 100 Nm to 16000 Nm (80 ft-lb to PME
12000 ft-lb) and all share a similar design.
FEATURES
• Rated torque 100 Nm to 1600 Nm
• Power electronics control actuator and act as interface between unit and control system
• Choice of integrated field or rack mounting options for power electronic units
• Maintenance free for ten years
• Breakaway torque at end positions twice the rated torque
• Adjustable mechanical stops to prevent manual over travel
• Anti-coast spur wheel gear train with ball bearings
• Robust, oil lubricated gearing with high mechanical efficiency.
RHD
• Using ABB's Asset Vision diagnostic and engineering software tool, the actuator’s performance can be monitored
online.
SPECIFICATIONS
PME120-AI RHD250 RHD500/RHD800 RHD1250/ RHD4000 RHD8000 RHD16000
PME120-AN RHD2500
Rated Torque* 100 Nm (74 ft lb) 250 Nm (185 ft lb) 500 Nm/800 Nm 1250 Nm/2500 4000 Nm (2950 8000 Nm (5900 16000 Nm (11800
(369 ft lb/590 ft lb) Nm (922 ft lb/1844 ft lb) ft lb) ft lb)
ft lb)
Rated Speed* 20 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 12 - 900 s/90° 30 - 900 s/90°
Operating angle min 35°/max. 270° min 35°/max. 270° min 35°/max. 270° min 35°/max. 270° min 35°/max. min 35°/max. min 35°/max. 270°
270° 270°
Operating mode S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN
IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1
Protection class IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66
Communication (via electronics)
- PROFIBUS • • • • • • •
- HART • • • • • • •
* Adjustable in various steps via graphical user interface; see data sheet for details

Explosion Proof Electric Actuator/Damper Drive A

Contrac RHDE
DESCRIPTION
Contrac intelligent electric rotary actuators suit continuous duty, modulating, or pulse
input control applications in hazardous locations. The Contrac actuator incorporates
microprocessor- based power electronics that provide remarkable positioning
accuracy of the final control element. The remote mounted power electronics
includes a Local Control Panel with pushbuttons, which can be conveniently located
for easy access permits engineers to set up actuator travel action and performance
parameters, reducing commissioning time by 50 %. The operating angles range
from 30 to 270 degrees without need of additional modification. Rotary actuators are
available for rated torques of between 250 Nm to 16000 Nm (80 ft-lb to 12000 ft-lb)
and all share a similar design.
FEATURES
• Rated torque 250Nm to 1600 Nm
• Power electronics control actuator and act as interface between unit and control system
• Choice of integrated field or rack mounting options for power electronic units
• Maintenance free for ten years
• Breakaway torque at end positions twice the rated torque
• Adjustable mechanical stops to prevent manual over travel
• Anti-coast spur wheel gear train with ball bearings
• Robust, oil lubricated gearing with high mechanical efficiency.
• Using ABB's Asset Vision diagnostic and engineering software tool, the actuator’s performance can be monitored
online.
SPECIFICATIONS
RHDE250 RHDE500/RHDE800 RHDE2500 RHDE4000 RHDE8000 RHDE16000
Rated Torque* 250 Nm (185 ft lb) 500 Nm /800 Nm 1250 Nm / 2500 NM 4000 Nm (2950 ft lb) 8000 Nm (5900 ft lb) 16000 Nm (11800 ft lb)
(369 ft lb 590 ft lb) (922 ft lb / 1844 ft lb)
Rated Speed* 10 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 10 - 900 s/90° 15 - 900 s/90° 30 - 900 s/90°
Operating angle min 35° / max. 140° min 35° / max. 140° min 35° / max. 140° min 35° / max. 140° min 35° / max. 140° min 35° / max. 140°
Operating mode S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN S9 -Stall proof EN IEC
IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 IEC 60034-1 60034-1
Protection class IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66
Explosion protection II 2 GD ck EEx de [ib] ib II B T4 bzw. IP6x T=130°C ZELM 04 ATEX II 2 GD ck EEx de [ib] ib II B T4 bzw. IP6x T=130°C ZELM 04 ATEX
0209 X 0209 X
Control Via standard electronic unit and motor temperature monitoring unit in Via standard electronic unit and motor temperature monitoring unit in
the non-hazardous area. the non-hazardous area.
Communication (via electronics)
- PROFIBUS • • • • • •
- HART • • • • • •
* Adjustable in various steps via graphical user interface; see data sheet for details

Auma
A
Electric Multi-turn Actuators
Type SA
DESCRIPTION
The Type SA (SA NORM) is the base actuator from which a variety of
multi-turn actuators are designed. SA actuators are typically used in the
automation of rising stem valves. Due to the modular design principle it
can be combined with various controls, from simple open-close control
to the explosion proof version or micro controlled version. The controls
are connected to the actuator via a simple plug/socket connection.
The basic NORM actuator consists of a motor, worming gear, control

unit, hand wheel for emergency operation, electrical connection and
valve attachment. Torque values can be increase with the addition of
A gearboxes in order to automate valves of various sizes and pressures
within any plant.
Design Features
• Torque range from 10 Nm to 32,000 Nm
• Output speeds from 4 to 180 rpm
• Limit and torque sensing
• Available with 3-ph AC, 1-ph AC and DC motors
• Hand wheel for manual operation
Ambient Conditions
• High enclosure protection
• High quality corrosion protection
• Wide ambient temperature ranges
Options
• Intermediate position switches
• Switches in tandem version
• Remote position transmitter
• Magnetic limit and torque transmitter
• Mechanical position indicator
Interfaces
• Electrical connection via AUMA plug/socket connector (optionally terminals)
• Cable entries in different versions
• Output drive types according to ISO and DIN standards

Electric Part-turn Actuators A

Type SG
DESCRIPTION
The Type SG (SG NORM) is the base actuator from which a variety of
part-turn actuators are designed. SG actuators are typically used in the
automation of quarter turn valves. Due to the modular design principle it
can be combined with various controls, from simple open-close control
to explosion proof version or micro controlled version. The controls are
connected to the actuator via a simple plug/socket connection.
The basic NORM actuator consists of a motor, worming gear, control unit,
hand wheel for emergency operation, electrical connection and valve
attachment. Torque values can be increase with the addition of gearboxes
in order to automate valves of various sizes and pressures within any
plant.
Design Features
• Torque range from 100 Nm to 1,200 Nm
• Swing angles from 80° to 110°
• Operating times for 90 ° from 4 s to 70 s
• Limit and torque seating
• 3-ph AC, 1-ph AC and DC motors
• Hand wheel for manual operation
Ambient Conditions
• High enclosure protection
• High quality corrosion protection
• Wide ambient temperature ranges
Options
• Deviating swing angle
• Intermediate position switches
• Switch in tandem version
• Remote position transmitter
• Magnetic limit and torque transmitter
Interfaces
• Electrical connection via AUMA plug/ socket connector
• Cable glands in different versions
• Output drive types according to ISO standard

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Positioners
Neles
Accessories
A Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
NE700/NP700 Models
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles NE700 and NP700 are proportional positioners for
control valves. The NP is a fully pneumatic unit while the NE is an
electro-pneumatic unit that provides pneumatic output proportional
to a standard milliampere DC input. Both units can be used with
either cylinder or diaphragm type actuators for rotary or linear valves
to provide excellent repeatability and accuracy in a wide range of
throttling applications.
FEATURES
• Excellent vibration resistance: Rugged construction, few parts, small
moving mass, compact design and rigid mounting provide outstanding
vibration resistance.
• Field reversible: Positioner can be set for direct or reverse acting modes
by simply turning around the changeover piece and feedback cam without
touching or changing tubings between actuator and positioner. Split range
and reverse actions are standard on the feedback cam.
• Easy and fast to calibrate: Calibrations can be easily made with the
positioner cover removed. You can fine tune zero and range adjustments with minimal effect on set points.
• Fast response times: Multiple pilot valve sizes are used to match positioner capacity compatibility with actuator stroke
volume, minimizing response time.
• Stable operation: Changes in supply pressure and valve load have minimal effect on positioner operation.
SPECIFICATIONS NE700 NP700

Standard Input Signal 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA (direct current) -
Split Ranges 4 - 12 mA, 12 - 20 mA 20 - 60 kPa, 60 - 100 kPa
3 - 9 psig, 9 - 15 psig
Standard Signal Pressure Ranges - 20 - 100 kPa
0.2 - 1.0 barg / 3 -15 psig
Input Resistance Max. 190 Ω
Turning Angle of Feedback Shaft Max. 95° Max. 95°
Relation Between Turning Angle and Signal Linear Linear
Supply Pressure Ps 0.14 - 0.8 MPa 0.14 - 1 MPa
1.4 - 8 barg / 20 - 115 psig 1.4 - 10 barg / 20 - 140 psig
Effect of supply pressure Ps <0.2 % / 10 kPa / 0.14 %/psi <0.2 %/10 kPa / 0.14 %/psi
Ambient Temperature -25 to 85 °C / -15 to 185 °F -40 to 90 °C / -40 to 200 °F
Effect of Temperature <0.05 %/°C / <0.025 %/°F <0.07 %/°C / <0.025 %/°F <0.15%/°C / <0.05 %/°F
Performance with moderate constant load actuators
Deadband < 0.3 % < 0.3 %
Hysteresis < 0.7 % < 1.2 %
Linearity <2% < 2%
Effect on Vibration (1.5 g, 5-100 Hz) <1% <1%
Construction Materials
Case Anodized Aluminum Alloy, epoxy coated Anodized Aluminum Alloy, epoxy coated
Cover Polycarbonate or Aluminum Alloy Polycarbonate or Aluminum Alloy
Internal Parts Stainless Steel and Aluminum Alloy Stainless Steel and Aluminum Alloy
Diaphragms and Seals Nitrile Rubber (standard model) Nitrile Rubber (standard model)
Weight 2.3 kg / 4.8 lbs 1.6 kg / 3.3 lbs

Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioner - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER NE700 POSITIONERS

XX X X X XXX XXXX
Table 1 Product Group Table 7 Accessories

NE Electro-pneumatic positioner K Filter regulator for supply air.
Pressure gauge, scale bar/psi/kPa, basic material brass, nickel
Table 2 Series Code
plated, housing stainless steel, glycerine filled.
7 700 Series Temperature range -40 ºC... +82 ºC / -40 °F... +180 °F.
Filter size 5 μm. Not available with HC-pilot (Table 4, designator
Table 3 Input Signal Range 7). Will be specified in the option sticker.
2 4-20 mA; 0-20 mA.
In connection with the Ø6 HC-pilot valve (Table 4, designator 7)
Table 4 Pilot Valve - Connections (S, C1, C2) must be used large capacity filter regulator (not K) for actuator
4 Ø 4 mm - /1/4 NPT bigger than B1CU40 and B1JU 32. Installation with mounting
bracket.
6 Ø 6 mm - 1/4 NPT
CE01 PG11 / 1/2 NPT conduit entry nipple. Will be specified in the
7 Ø 6 mm HC - 3/8 NPT option sticker.
Table 5 Actions CE02 PG11 / M20x1.5 conduit entry nipple. Will be specified in the
option sticker.
– Double action, without sign.
CE03 PG11 / R1/2 (PF1/2) conduit entry nipple. Will be specified in the
A Single action, linear motion. Applicable ONLY to D/R series
option sticker
spring diaphragm linear actuators, max. stroke size 57 mm
(2-1/4 in).
Table 6 Options*
- Standard, IP 54 enclosure. PG 11 conduit entry. S1 always to be
defined. Temperature range -25 ºC... +85 ºC / -13 °F...+185 °F.
R Water and dustproof enclosure. IP65 / NEMA 4 and 4X.
W Better vibration resistance. Special flexure pivot and diamond
coated pilot.
H High temperature construction. Viton diaphragms and seals.
Temperature range -10 ºC... +120 ºC / +14 °F... +248 °F.
Not available with options A and accessory K.
S1 Positioner attachment face according to stadard VDI/VDE
3845, equipped with an H-clip. When positioners are separate
deliveries, VDI/VDE ear is supplied.
Not applicable to globe valve actuators (Table 5, designator A).
A Pressure gauges, scale bar/psi/kPa, basic material brass,
nickel plated, housing stainless steel, glycerine filled. Table 5
designator always to be defined. Temperature range -25 ºC...
+70 ºC / -13 °F... +158 °F
J30 Square shaft and special mounting kit. Available in US only.
Y Special construction, to be specified.
*If several options above are needed to the same positioner, the codes shall be
marked in presented order from top.Temperature range for various options shall be
considered carefully.

A Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioner - Continued

HOW TO ORDER NP700 POSITIONERS

XX X X X X XXX XXXX
Table 1 Product Group Table 7 Accessories

NP Pneumatic positioner K Filter regulator for supply air. Pressure gauge, scale bar/psi/
kPa, basic material brass, nickel plated, housing stainless steel,
Table 2 Series Code
glycerine filled. Temperature range -40 ºC... +82 ºC / -40 °F...
7 700 Series +180 °F. Filter size 5 μm. Not available with HC-pilot (Table 4,
designator 7). Will be specified in the option sticker.
Table 3 Input Signal Range
0 4-20 mA, only with options B and B1 (Table 6) In connection with the Ø6 HC-pilot valve (Table 4, designator 7)
must be used large capacity filter regulator (not K) for actuator
2 20-100 kPag, 0.2-1.0 barg/3-15 psig. bigger than BC 40 and BJ 32. Installation with mounting bracket.
Table 4 Pilot Valve - Connections (S, C1, C2) CE01 PG11 / 1/2 NPT conduit entry nipple. Will be specified in the
3 Ø 4 mm LC - 1/4 NPT option sticker.
4 Ø 4 mm - 1/4 NPT CE02 PG11 / M20x1.5 conduit entry nipple. Will be specified in the
option sticker.
6 Ø 6 mm - 1/4 NPT
CE03 PG11 / R1/2 (PF1/2) conduit entry nipple. Will be specified in the
7 Ø 6 mm HC - 3/8 NPT option sticker.
Table 5 Action
– Double action, without designator.
A Single action, linear motion. Applicable ONLY to D/R series
spring diaphragm Linear actuators, max. stroke size 57 mm
(2-1/4 in).
Table 6 Options*
- Standard, (IP 54 enclosure). 6. sign S1 always to be defined.
Temperature range -40 ºC... +90 ºC/ -40 °F...+194 °F.
B Flameroof enclosure I/P-converter (IP65), ATEX EEx d IIC T6.
Input signal range 4-20 mA. M20x1,5 conduit entry.
3. sign always 0. Temperature range -40 ºC... +55 ºC / -40
°F...+131 °F.
B1 Explosion proof enclosure I/P-converter (IP65), FM/CSA-approv-
al. Class 1, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D. Input signal range 4-20mA.
1/2 NPT conduit entry. Table 3 designator always 0. Temperature
range -40 ºC... +55 ºC/-40 °F...+131 °F.
GN For natural gas. Exhaust adapter, 3/4 NPT-thread. Not usable
inside with options B and B1 !
R Water and dustproof enclosure. IP65 / NEMA 4 and 4X. Not
available with option GN.
H High temperature construction. Viton diaphragm and seals. Not
available with options B, B1, A, A1 and accessory K. Tempera-
ture range -10 ºC... +120 ºC / +14 °F... +248 °F.
S1 Positioner attachment face according to standard VDI/VDE
3845, equipped with an H-clip. When positioners are separate
deliveries, VDI/VDE ear is supplied. Not applicable to globe
valve actuators (Table 5, designator A).
A Pressure gauges, scale bar/psi/kPa, basic material brass, nickel
plated, housing stainless steel, glycerine filled. Table 5 designa-
tor always to be defined. Temperature range -40 ºC... +70 ºC /
-40 °F... +158 °F.
Y2 Brass bearing of small lever arm.
J30 Square shaft and special mounting kit. Available in US only.
Y Special construction, to be specified.
*If several options above are needed to the same positioner, the codes shall be
marked in presented order from top.Temperature range for various options shall be
considered carefully.

Intelligent Valve Positioner A

ND9000 Model
DESCRIPTION
Metso's Neles ND9000 is a top class intelligent valve controller
designed to operate on all control valve actuators and in all industry
areas. It guarantees end product quality in all operating conditions
with unique diagnostics and incomparable performance features.
ND9000 is a reliable and future-proof investment with Metso
FieldCare™ life-time support.
FEATURES
• Benchmark control performance on rotary and linear valves
• Reliable and robust design
• Easy commissioning and operation
• Local / remote operation
• Expandable architecture
• Advanced device diagnostics
BENEFITS
• Low energy and air consumption
• Future proof design allows further options at a reduced cost
• Optimized spares program minimizes spare part inventory
• Retro-fit to existing installations (Neles or 3rd party valves)

ABB
A Pneumatic Positioner
Type AV1
DESCRIPTION
The Type AV1 positioner is a control device that satisfies a wide range of
applications. It provides fast, sensitive and accurate positioning of pneumatic
single or double acting actuators. The AV1 receives an external pneumatic signal
and converts it to a pneumatic output. This output produces the motive force that
positions the power actuator. If a loss of signal occurs, the positioner goes to
the 3 psi position. Type AV1 positioners can be equipped with either an optional
potentiometric or a 4-20 mA position transmitter.
FEATURES
• Withstands vibration and shock at frequencies to 120 Hz and accelerations to 2G
• Low air consumption
• Can control both single and double-acting, linear and rotary type actuators
• Split range capability allows sequencing of multiple actuators using a single control signal
• Simplified reverse operation
• Continuously adjustable span and zero for each stroke level
• Adjustable speed control of actuator without additional hardware
• Standard model has high delivery capacity and Performance Series increases speed of response even more
• Vent design allows natural gas operation
• NEMA 4X version available
• Optional manifold assembly
• Large array of accessories available to customize for specific applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Input range¹
AV11 and AV15 20.7 to 103.4 kPa (3.0 to 15.0 psig)
AV12 and AV16 20.7 to 186.2 kPa (3.0 to 27.0 psig)
Accuracy² 0.80% of span maximum
Resolution 0.09% of span maximum
Hysteresis² 0.45% of span maximum
Repeatability² 0.12% of span maximum
Deadband² 0.12% of span maximum
Linearity² 0.70% of span maximum
Weight 1.84 kg (4.06 lb)
Operating temperature limits
AV11/AV12 -40ºC to 82ºC (-40ºF to 180ºF)³
AV15/AV16 -20ºC to 127ºC (-4º to 250ºF)³
Storage temperature limits
AV11 and AV12 -40ºC to 93ºC (-40ºF to 200ºF)
AV15 and AV16 -20ºC to 127ºC (-4ºF to 250ºF)²
Humidity limits Operating and storage: 0% to 95% noncondensing
1. Units have 50% range suppression and/or zero elevation capability.

2. Tested according to ISA-S75. 13-1989.
3. For operation below 4.4ºC (40ºF), dew point of supply air must be 10ºC (18ºF)
lower than lowest expected operating temperature.

Pneumatic Positioner - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X X X X X
Table 1 Positioner Type

AV1 Pneumatic positioner type AV1
Table 2 Input Signal
1 3 ... 15 psi (0.2 ... 1 bar), Standard Temperature Range -40
... 180 °F (-40 ... 82 °C)
2 3 ... 27 psi (0.2 ... 1.86 bar), Standard Temperature Range
-40 ... 180 °F (-40 ... 82 °C)
5 3 ... 15 psi (0.2 ... 1 bar), Extended Temperature Range -4 ...
250 °F (-20 ... 121 °C)
6 3 ... 27 psi (0.2 ... 1.86 bar), Extended Temperature Range -4
... 250 °F (-20 ... 121 °C)
Table 3 Stroke or Rotary Motion
1 0.5 ... 2.0 in. (12.7 ... 50.8 mm) or 45° Rotation
2 1.0 ... 4.0 in. (25.4 ... 101.6 mm) or 90° Rotation
Table 4 Manifold / Gage Block
0 No Manifold
1 Manifold with Equalizing Valve, Filters & Gauge Ports (See
Note A) (Notes: 1)
3 Gauge Block, Gauge Ports only
Table 5 Position Transmitter
0 No Position Transmitter
1 Potentiometric Resistive Transmitter (Note: 1)
2 4 ... 20 mA Output (Note: 1)
Table 6 Drive Shaft
0 Standard with Drive Arm (for Linear Actuators) and UP3/4/5/6
1 0.500 in. Square End (12.7mm²) (Most Common for 90°
Actuators)
2 0.342 in. Square End (8.69mm²) (Older DeZurik / K&M
Actuators)
3 0.250 in. (6.35mm²) Flats (UP1 / UP2 after 8/95)
4 0.375 in.Square End (9.52 5mm²) (for DeZurik PowerRac
Actuators)
5 0.157 in. (4 mm) Flats (for NAMUR Rotary Mounting)
Table 7 Options
0 No Options
N NEMA 4X Enclosure Rating (Must be installed acc. To
Drawing 258567)
P Performance Series, High Pneumatic Gain
Note 1: Not available with Input Signal code 5, 6

Note 2: This optional Manifold is recommended on all AC and UP Drives. Not
available for AV15_ _ _ _ _ and AV16_ _ _ _ _
Note A: Required for Double acting Actuators with Manual override such as UP or
AC actuators

A Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Type AV2
DESCRIPTION
The Type AV2 Electro-pneumatic positioner receives a 4-20 mA input from a
controller and converts the signal via an I/P Converter to a pneumatic output that
positions a power actuator. The AV2 can be adjusted by the user to automatically
default to a full open or closed position in case of input signal loss. Type AV2
positioner can be equipped with either an optional potentiometric or a 4-20 mA
position transmitter.
FEATURES
• The Type AV27 positioner available with explosion proof I/P converter
SPECIFICATIONS
Input range¹ 4 to 20 mA
Input impedance
Nominal 215O at 22ºC (72ºF)
Maximum 245 O at 60ºC (140ºF)
Weight 2.32 kg (5.11 lb) standard, 2.95 kg (6.51 lb) explosionproof
Temperature limits Operating and storage:-20ºC to 82ºC (-4ºF to 180ºF)³

2. Tested according to ISA-S75. 13-1989.
3. For operation below 4.4ºC (40ºF), dew point of supply air must be 10ºC (18ºF)
lower than lowest expected operating temperature.

Electro-Pneumatic Positioner - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X X X X X

AV2 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner & I/P Converter AV2
Table 2 Intrinsically Safe / Explosion-proof Design
3 Intrinsically Safe Design FM/CSA
7 Explosion-Proof Design FM/CSA
1 4 ... 20 mA Input, 0.5 ... 2.0 in. (12.7 ... 50.8 mm) or 45°
Rotation
2 4 ... 20 mA Input, 1.0 ... 4.0 in. (25.4 ... 101.6 mm) or 90°
Rotation
0 No Manifold
1 Manifold with Equalizing Valve, Filters & Gauge Ports (See Note
A) (Note:1)
3 Gauge Block, Gauge Ports only (Note: 1)
1 Potentiometric Resistive Transmitter (Note: AV3 Electro-
Pneumatic Positioner AV3
2 4 ... 20 mA Output (Note: 1)
Table 6 Drive Shaft
0 Standard with Drive Arm (for Linear Actuators) and UP3/4/5/6
1 0.500 in. Square End (12.7 mm²) (Most Common for 90°
Actuators)
2 0.342 in. Square End (8.69 mm²) (Older DeZurik / K&M
Actuators)
3 0.250 in. Flats (6.35 mm²) (UP1/UP2 after 8/95)
4 0.375 in. Square End (9.525 mm²) (for DeZurik PowerRac
Actuators)
Table 7 Options
0 No Options
N NEMA 4X Enclosure Rating (Must be Installed acc. to Drawing
258567)
Note 1: Not available with Intrinsically Safe / Explosion-proof Design code 7

AC actuators

A Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Type AV3
DESCRIPTION
The Type AV3 positioner is an electro-pneumatic control device that satisfies a
wide range of applications. It provides fast, sensitive and accurate positioning of
pneumatic single or double acting actuators. The Type AV3 positioner accepts a
4-20 mA current that is applied to an I/P converter to generate an internal signal
pressure. If a loss of signal occurs the positioners retain their position just prior
to the signal loss. This strategy is ideal for process applications such as with fuel,
cooling water and fan dampers where interruptions are unacceptable. The Type
AV3 positioner can be equipped with either an optional potentiometric or a 4-20 mA
position transmitter.
FEATURES
SPECIFICATIONS
Input range¹ 4 to 20 mA (30 VDC maximum)
Input impedance <1.66 O at 4 mA <0.57 O at 12 mA <0.35 O at 20 mA
Weight 2.27 kg (5.00lb)
Operating temperature limits³ -20ºC to 60ºC (-4ºF to 140ºF)4
Storage temperature limits³ -20ºC to 80ºC (-4ºF to 176ºF)
Temperature effect² <0.18% per ºC (<0.09% per ºF)
RFI effect² ±1.5% maximum at 10 V/m field strength, 20 to 540 MHz
Notes:
2. Tested according to ISA-S75. 13-1989
3. Operation below specification will increase stroke time.
4. For operation below 4.4ºC (40ºF), dew point of supply air must be 10ºC (18ºC) lower than
lowest expected operating temperature.

Electro-Pneumatic Positioner - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X X X X X

AV3 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner AV3
3 4 ... 20 mA
1 0.5 ... 2.0 in. 12.7... 50.8 mm or 45° Rotation
2 1.0 ... 4.0 in. (25.4 ... 101.6 mm) or 90° Rotation
0 No Manifold
1 Manifold with Equalizing Valve, Filters & Gauge Ports (See
Note A)
3 Gauge Block, Gauge Ports only
1 Potentiometric Resistive Transmitter
2 4 ... 20 mA Output
Table 6 Drive Shaft
0 Standard with Drive Arm (for Linear Actuators)
1 0.500 in. Square End (12.7 mm²) (Most Common for 90°
Actuators)
2 0.342 in. Square End (8.69 mm²) (Older DeZurik / K&M
Actuators)
3 0.250 in. Flats (6.35 mm²) (UP1 / UP2 after 8/95)
4 0.375 in. Square End (9.525 mm²) (for DeZurik PowerRac
Actuators)
Table 7 Options
0 No Options
N NEMA 4X Enclosure Rating (Must be Installed acc. to Drawing
258567)
Note A: Required for Double acting Actuators with manual override such as UP or
AC actuators

A Solid State/Pulse Input Positioner

Type AV4
DESCRIPTION
The Type AV4 positioner provides fast, sensitive and accurate positioning of pneumatic
single or double acting actuators. It responds to a solid state (DDC) or contact closure
input (pulse) from a control device and converts the signal to a pneumatic signal. This
pneumatic signal is converted to a pneumatic output, producing a motive force that
positions the actuator. If a loss of signal occurs the positioners retain their position
just prior to the signal loss. Designed to meet the special requirements of interfacing
with state-of-the-art computer and microprocessor-based control systems, the AV4
utilizes an advanced pneumatic motor-to-pneumatic signal converter. In one compact
package, it replaces three separate components: a motor-to-motor pneumatic
converter, a pneumatic positioner, and a position transmitter.
FEATURES
• Type AV44 positioner available with pulse input
SPECIFICATIONS
Input range¹ Computer DDC (direct digital control), solid state or contact closure input
Minimum pulse width Data taken at 20°C (68°F) and factory preset fine speed adjustment. Operation at other fine speed adjustments
requires different minimum pulse widths. Operation at colder temperatures may require longer minimum pulse widths.
Course speed position 4 Minimum pulse width = 40.0 msecs
Voltage supply²
Minimum 16 VDC
Nominal 24 VDC
Maximum 34 VDC
Weight 2.35 kg (5.17lb)
Operating temperature limits4 -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)5
Storage temperature limits4 -20°C to 80°C (-4°F to 176°F)
Temperature effect³ <0.18% per ºC (<0.09% per ºF)
RFI effect³ ±1.5% maximum at 10 V/m field strength, 20 to 540 MHz
2. Tested according to ISA-S75. 13-1989
3. Operation below specification will increase stroke time.
4. For operation below 4.4°C (40°F), dew point of supply air must be 10°C (18°C) lower than lowest expected operating temperature.

Solid State/Pulse Input Positioner - Continued A
HOW TO ORDER

XXX X X X X X X

AV4 Solid State/Pulse Input Positioner AV4
4 24 Vdc pulse
1 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) to 2.0 inch (50.8 mm) or 45 Degrees
Rotation
2 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) to 4.0 inch (101.6 mm) or 90 Degrees
Rotation
0 No Manifold
1 Manifold with Equalizing Valve, Filters & Gage Ports (See Note
A)
3 Gage Block (gage ports only)
0 4-20 mA (Standard) (See Note B)
Table 6 Drive Shaft
0 Standard with Drive Arm (for Linear Actuators and UP3/4/5/6)
1 0.500 inch Square End (most common for 90° Actuators)
2 0.342 inch Square End (older DeZurik/K&M Actuators)
3 0.250 inch Flats (UP1/UP2 after 8/95)
4 0.375 inch Square End (for DeZurik PowerRac Actuators)
5 0.156 inch (4 mm) Flats (for Namur Rotary Mounting)
Table 7 Options
0 No Options
N NEMA 4X Enclosure Rating (must be installed per dwg 258567)
P Performance Series (High Pneumatic Gain)
AC actuators
Note B: The 4 to 20 ma output position transmitter is a standard feature of Type
AV44 positioner. The positioner transmitter options are only

A Smart Positioners
TZIDC Series
DESCRIPTION
The TZIDC is a series of smart and compact electro-pneumatic positioners.
TZIDC digital positioners offers remote communication via 4-20 mA HART,
PROFIBUS PA or Foundation Fieldbus and are designed for mounting to
pneumatic linear or rotary actuators. Their in-built intelligence enables it to
adapt itself to any control valve at the push of a button, while a host of service,
diagnostic and safety functions, including fail-freeze and fail-safe, help to
provide a high level of operational performance. TZIDCs are protected to IP65/
NEMA 4X with unmatched shock and vibration immunity of 10g up to 80 Hz
guarantying reliable operation in almost all areas under harshest environmental
conditions.
FEATURES
• Digital communication via HART, PROFIBUS or Foundation Fieldbus
• Easy commissioning and operation on site due to local operation and auto adjustment
• Intrinsically safe (IS) or Ex (IS + Flameproof/Explosion Proof) protection
• Compact design includes mechanical position indicator with 4 push button operator panel and 2 line digital display
• Wide operating temperature range: -40 to 185°F
• Microprocessor-based position control over operating, adjustment, monitoring, diagnostic and maintenance
parameters
• FDT/DTM-technology serves for central configuration, documentation, diagnosis as well as Asset Management
• Control parameters can be set automatically (in adaptive control mode) or manually to optimally adapt them to the
process requirements
• Four different pneumatics versions are available
Configuration Options TZIDC/TZIDC-100 TZIDC-200
Explosion Protection
Without •
Intrinsically Safe • •
Flameproof/Explosion-Proof •
Input/Communication
4 - 20 mA LCI • •
4 - 20 mA HART • •
Profibus PA • •
FOUNDATION Fieldbus • •
Basic Diagnostics • •
Aluminum Housing • •
Supply Pressure: Up to 60bar (90psi) • •
Air Capacity: Up to 10 Nm³/h (6 scfm) • •
Position Sensor: Potentiometer • •
Remote Version: HART Communication •
Model Item Description

TZIDC V18345 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner communicating via 4-20 mA or 4-20 mA with HART module
TZIDC-110 V18346 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner communicating via Profibus PA
TZIDC-120 V18347 Electro-Pneumatic Positioner communicating via Foundation Fieldbus
TZIDC-200 V18348 Flameproof/Explosion Proof, Electro-Pneumatic Positioner communicating via 4-20mA HART protocol
TZIDC-210 V18349 Flameproof/Explosion Proof, Electro-Pneumatic Positioner communicating via Profibus PA
TZIDC-220 V18350 Flameproof/Explosion Proof, Electro-Pneumatic Positioner communicating via Foundation Fieldbus
Additional configuration/options will need to be specified at time of order

Smart Positioners A
PositionMaster EDP300
DESCRIPTION
The PositionMaster EDP300 is an electronically configurable positioner
with communication capabilities designed for mounting on pneumatic linear
or part-turn actuators. It features an integral mount design, a modular
construction, and an excellent cost-performance ratio. Fully automatic
determination of the control parameters and adaptation to the positioner
allow for considerable time savings as well as optimum control behavior.
Because of its properties, the positioner is suited for even the most
challenging operating conditions.
FEATURES
• For the use of pneumatic actuators with integrated contactless position sensor or control unit remote sensor
• Four different pneumatics versions are available
• Increased temperature resistance of up to 100°C (212°F)
• Intrinsically safe
• Enhanced vibration immunity up to 2 g at 300 Hz for higher frequency applications
• Advanced IP67 protection class for challenging applications
• Aluminum or stainless steel housing for offshore applications
• Supports HART5 and HART7 communication
• Access to extended monitoring parameters is possible via HART communication, in particular the DTM (reduced
functions only with the EDD)
• Microprocessor-based position control over operating, adjustment, monitoring, maintenance and diagnostic
parameters
• Three optional pressure sensors which can be used for reliable diagnostics of the valve, the pneumatic drive and the
positioner
• Base model can be enhanced at any time by retrofitting optional equipment modules
Configuration Options
Explosion Protection Without,
Intrinsically Safe
Input/Communication 4 - 20 mA HART
Diagnostics Basic diagnostics,
Advanced diagnostics,
Valve signature,
Partial stroke
Housing Aluminum,
Stainless Steel
Supply Pressure Up to 6 bar (90 psi),
Up to 10 bar (145 psi)
Air Capacity Up to 10 Nm³/h (6 scfm),
Up to 40 Nm³/h (23 scfm)
Position Sensor Potentiometer,
Contactless Sensor
Remote Version HART Communication

BLX
A
Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
V100
DESCRIPTION
The V100 positioner can be ordered as a base model pneumatic
positioner, converted to standard NEMA 4X electropneumatic, EX
model, or FF (fail freeze) model in a matter of minutes, without
removing the unit from the mounted valve package. You can add
gauges, a feedback module, or a raised indicator, at any time....in just
a matter of minutes. Of course, you can also order them configured
in any of these models and then change or remove components in
the field as needed. Maximum modularity equals maximum flexibility.
And with a simple design and quality components, the performance is
maximum as well.
FEATURES
• One housing for pneumatic or electropneumatic.
• Standard F05 mounting with interchangeable spindle drives.
• Multiple mounting capability
• Standard indicator allows for air to open or air to close operation—
raised indicator available
• Unique electrical compartment, fitted with an o-ring, is pressure
sealed by the cover
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX XX XXX XXX XX XX XXX XXXX
Table 1 Positioner Type Table 6 Spool Valve

V100P Pneumatic SG Standard Spool Valve
V100E Electro-pneumatic LG Low Gain
V100EX Explosion Proof HG High Gain
V100IS Intrinsically Safe Table 7 Feedback
V100FF Fail Freeze M 2 SPDT Mechanical Switches
Table 2 Spindle (Drive) R 2 SPDT Reed Switches
D1 NAMUR (std.) mA 4-20 mA Transmitter
For additional spindle options, please contact Rawson. MmA Mech Switches w/transmitter
Table 3 Front Cover RmA Reed Switches w/transmitter
00 Blank scale 1K 1 K potentiometer
90 90 degree rotation 10K 10 K potentiometer
60 60 degree rotation Table 8 Options
45 45 degree rotation 0/10V 0/10 Volt I/P (V100E only)
30 30 degree rotation GA Gas Approved Positioner
90R 90 ° Reverse Cover ATEX ATEX Approved Positiner
Table 4 Indicator TUF Tufram Coating (V100 P and E only)
A Arrow (std.) NIC Nickel Coating (V100 P and E only)
B Beacon/Raised (Black/Yellow) 6-30 24 PSI Spring
BRG Beacon/Raised (Red/Green)
Table 5 Cam
C1 90° (std.)
For additional cam options, please contact Rawson.

Pneumatic/Electro-Pneumatic Positioner A
V200
DESCRIPTION
This compact NEMA 4X positioner allows for an internal I/P, switches,
4/20 mA transmitter, all in one compact, rugged die cast aluminum
housing. The flexibility to add, remove, replace, and calibrate this unit is
very user friendly.
With a rugged Nema 4X, IP 66 die cast aluminum housing, versatile
polyester coating, optional Tufram or Nickel coatings, low -58F or high
+325F temp options, and standard features like external zero and span
adjustment, this unit expands the VAC offering to cover this “all in one”
market for positioners. Add to this the excellent performance yet simple
design, and the combination equals a real value.
FEATURES
• Quality components = rugged and accurate performance
• External zero and span (complete calibration) adjustment without
removing cover
• Easily maintain all key components
• Clear, visible indicator with arrow indicator standard-beacon optional
• Field changeable to any I/p option
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX XX XX XXX XXXXX XXX XXXX XXXX
Table 1 Positioner Type Table 6 Spool Valve

V200 P Pneumatic SG/LB Low Bleed (std.)
V200 E Electropneumatic HG High Gain
V200 EX Explosion Proof SHGHF Super High Gain/Flow
V200 IS Intrinsically Safe Table 7 Options
V200 FF Fail Freeze M 2 SPDT Mechanical Switches
Table 2 Spindle (Drive) R 2 SPDT Reed Switches
D1 NAMUR (std.) mA 4-20 mA Transmitter
For additional spindle options, please contact Rawson. MmA Mech Switches w/transmitter
Table 3 Front Cover RmA Reed Switches w/transmitter
45 45 degree rotation Table 8 Options
30 30 degree rotation EHT Extra High Temp (Pneumatic only) (-40 to 325 F)
00 Blank scale LT Low Temp (Pneumatic only) (-58 to 185 F)
Table 4 Indicator 0/10V 0/10 Volt I/P (V200E only)
A Arrow (std.) GA Gas Approved
B Beacon/Raised (Black/Yellow) ATEX ATEX
BRG Beacon/Raised(Red/Green) TUF Tufram Coating (V200 P and E)
Table 5 Cam NIC Nickel Coating (V200 P and E)
C1 90° (std.) 6-30 24 Psi Spring (6-30)
For additional cam options, please contact Rawson.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Position Monitors &
Position Transmitters
StoneL
A
Explosion Proof Position Monitor with
Solenoid Valve
Axiom AX Series
DESCRIPTION
The Axiom explosionproof platform, available in epoxy-coated anodized
aluminum or stainless steel, will withstand your most challenging plant
environments. Its advanced position monitoring and integral pneumatic
control offer the ultimate in reliability, convenience, and value.
The Axiom’s pneumatic valve system consists of a low power pilot

that drives the main high flow spool valve. Pilots may be selected for
conventional or bus networking applications. Both stages of the pneumatic
valve system have been designed for long life, high tolerance to air line
contaminants, and ease of maintenance should components become
fouled.
FEATURES
• Pilot and main spool design offer long life, exceptional tolerance to dirty air, and tight shut-off.
• Removable stainless steel sintered metal prefilter reduces potential for fouling pilot valve.
• Spool and pilot valve may be conveniently removed and cleaned if large contaminants become lodged in the valve.
• Universal voltage solenoid system may be used for standard AC or DC applications.
• 5-way, 2-position spring return configuration may be used for either single- or double-acting actuators. Dual coil shuttle
piston versions are also available for fail-in-last position.
• Low power consumption of solenoid reduces current flow on bus networks enabling more units and longer distances
on a single segment.
• Rebreather channels exhausted air from pressurized side of actuator into spring side, preventing ingestion of
contaminated air from the environment that may corrode springs or actuator internals.
• Standard internal manual override enables convenient setup.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pneumatic Valves
Valve design Pilot operated spool valve
Pilot operator options Solenoid coil or piezo
Configuration Single pilot: 5-way, 2-position spring return Dual pilot: shuttle piston, 5-way, 2-position
Flow rating 0.70 Cv (Kv=0.60 based on flow unit m3/hr)
Porting 1/4” NPT
Operating pressure 40 to 120 psi (2.7 to 7.5 bar)
Filtration requirements 40 micron (Piezo, 30 micron)
Operating temperature See pilot specifications below
Operating life 1 million cycles
Manual override Internal momentary standard External momentary available External latching available.
Aluminum enclosure Spool: nickel-plated aluminum, Body: epoxy-coated anodized aluminum, Seal Spacers: Polysulfone, End Caps and Fasteners: 316
stainless steel ,Spool Seals: nitrile compound, O-Rings: Buna-N compound
Stainless steel enclosure Spool: nickel-plated Teflon-coated stainless steel, Body: 316 stainless steel, Seal Spacers: Polysulfone, End Caps and Fasteners: 316
stainless steel, Spool Seals: nitrile compound, O-Rings: Buna-N compound
Piezo Pilot (Bus powered Foundation Fieldbus)
Filtration requirements Dried/30 micron
Operating temperature -10° to 60° C (14° to 140° F)
Electrical ratings _A option: 2 mA @ 6.5 VDC
Solenoid Pilot
Filtration requirements 40 micron
Electrical ratings _H option: 0.6 watt @ 22 VDC to 130 VAC; _B option: 1.8 watt @ 24 VDC; _D option: 0.5 watt @ 24 VDC; _E option: 0.5 watt @ 12 VDC
(intrinsically safe); _J option: 4.5 watts @ 240 VAC
AC current consumption 18 mA (1H or 2H)
Operating Temperature
Standard (S) 0.7 Cv: -18° to 50° C (0° to 122° F); 1.2Cv: -10° to 50° C (14° to 122° F)
Extended (T) 0.7 Cv: -40° to 80° C (-40° to 176° F); 1.2Cv: Consult Rawson

Explosion Proof Position Monitor with Solenoid A

Valve - Continued
HOW TO ORDER
XX XXX XX X X X XX XX
Table 1 Series Table 4 Overdrive

AX Axiom AX - Explosion Proof N Internal momentary override only
Table 2 Function M External momentary and internal override
Sensor/Switching Modules L External latching and internal override
33S SST N.O. sensor (select pneumatic valve option 1H, 1J, 2H, or Table 5 Pneumatic Temperature
2J)
S Standard
44S NAMUR module (EN 60947-5-6; I.S.) (select pneumatic valve
T Extended (select pneumatic valve option _H, _J, _B, or _E)
option 1E or 2E)
Valve Communication Terminals (VCTs) Table 6 Enclosure
92S DeviceNet (select pneumatic valve option 1B, 1D, 2B, or 2D) A Epoxy-coated aluminum - North America
93S Foundation Fieldbus (bus powered; I.S.) (select pneumatic valve V Epoxy-coated aluminum - International
option 1A or 2A) S Stainless Steel - North America
94S Foundation Fieldbus (externally powered) (select pneumatic T Stainless Steel - International
valve option 1B, 1D, 2B, or 2D)
Table 7 Conduit/Connectors
95S Modbus (select pneumatic valve option 1B, 1D, 2B, or 2D)
02 2 – 3/4" NPT
96S AS-Interface (select pneumatic valve option 1B, 1D, 2B, or 2D)
05 2 – M25
97S AS-Interface with extended addressing (select pneumatic valve
option 1D or 2D) Table 8 Visual Indicators**
Table 3 Pneumatic Valves (Select single or dual) RM Red closed/green open
Single Solenoid GM Green closed/red open
1H Universal 24 VDC/120 VAC 1M Three-way flow path 1
1J 240 VAC solenoid 2M Three-way flow path 2
1D 0.5 W 24 VDC solenoid XM Special
1B 1.8 W 24 VDC solenoid **See visual indication designation chart in spec sheet for more information.
1E 12 VDC IS solenoid
1A Piezo
Dual Solenoid
2H Universal 24 VDC/120 VAC
2J 240 VAC solenoid
2D 0.5 W 24 VDC solenoid
2B 1.8 W 24 VDC solenoid
2E 12 VDC IS solenoid
2A Piezo

A
Non-incendive Position Monitor with Solenoid
Valve
Axiom AMI Series
DESCRIPTION
The Axiom AMI integrates solid state continuous sensing
and pneumatic control to give long life and reliable
performance in process applications. The AMI also
features the capability for intermediate valve control and
diagnostics to offer more cost saving benefits.
The Axiom’s pneumatic valve system consists of a low
power pilot that drives the main high flow spool valve.
Pilots may be selected for conventional or bus networking
applications.Both stages of the pneumatic valve system
have been designed for long life, high tolerance to air line contaminants and ease of maintenance should components
become fouled.
Open and closed settings: Switches correspond to a particular valve position and are set using the push button panel on
the module’s sealed membrane pad. Simply operate the actuator to the open position (using standard internal manual
override) and push the “Set Open” button. Operate the actuator to the closed position and push the “Set Closed” button.
Position settings remain locked in when power is removed and reapplied.
FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS
• Pilot and main spool design offer long life (1 million+ Materials of Construction
cycles), exceptional tolerance to dirty air and tight shut- Housing & Mounting Epoxy-coated anodized aluminum
off. Manifold
• Spool and pilot valve may be conveniently removed and Visual Indicator Lexan® polycarbonate
cleaned if large contaminants become lodged in the Fasteners & 316 stainless steel
valve. Mounting Adaptors
• Universal voltage solenoid system may be used for Pneumatic Valve Spool: nickel-plated aluminum, Body: epoxy-coated
standard AC or DC applications. anodized aluminum, Seal Spacers: Polysulfone, End-
Caps and Fasteners: stainless steel, Spool Seals:
• 5-way, 2-position spring return configuration may be nitrile compound, O-Rings: Buna-N compound
used for either single- or double-acting actuators. Dual Temperature Ratings (Pneumatic Valve Dependent)
coil shuttle piston versions are also available for fail in Piezo Pilots (_A) -10° to 60°C (14° to 140°F)
last position.
Solenoid Pilots (_B, -18° to 50°C (0° to 122°F) Extended temperature when -T
• Low power consumption of solenoid reduces current _D, _E, _H and _J) suffix specified -40° to 80° C (-40° to 176°F)
flow on bus networks enabling more units and longer Postition Sensor System
distances on a single segment. Accuracy Within 1°
• Rebreather channels exhausted air from pressurized
Repeatability Within 1°
side of actuator into spring side, preventing ingestion of
Setting Buffer 4° from set point Rotational distance from original set point
contaminated air from the environment that may corrode where switch will energize on return stroke.
springs or actuator internals. Dead band 6° from set point Rotational distance from original set point
• Standard internal manual override enables convenient where switch will de-energize.
setup Max. Rotational 120°

Range
Ratings
Non-incendive Non-incendive: AMI models (Ex n, Zone 2 or Class I and
II, Div. 2)
Intrinsically Safe Functions 44 and 93* (Ex ia, Zone 0 or Class I and II, Div.
1)
Enclosure Protection All Models: NEMA 4, 4X and 6; Ingress Protection 67
* Only models listed on StoneL’s official website are approved per spec rating.
(StoneL.com/approvals)

Non-incendive Position Monitor with Solenoid A

Valve - Continued
HOW TO ORDER
XXX XX XX X XX X XX
Table 1 Series Table 4 Enclosure

AMI Axiom AMI - Non-incendive & intrinsically safe A North America
Table 2 Function V International
Sensor Modules L Brazilian
33 SST NO sensor (select pneumatic valve option _H, _J) Table 5 Conduit/Connectors
35 SST 240 V NO sensor (select pneumatic valve option _H) Standard
44 NAMUR sensors intrinsically safe (I.S.; EN 60947-5-6) (select 02 (2) 1/2" NPT
pneumatic valve option _E)
05 (2) M20
80 Expeditor (select pneumatic valve option 2D, 4D, 2E or 4E)
Mini-connectors
Valve Communication Terminals (VCTs)
10 (1) 4-pin
71 4-20mA with Hart diagnostics (select pneumatic valve option 1D, 3D
or 5D) (select capabilities option D) 11 (1) 5-pin
92 DeviceNet (select pneumatic valve option _B or _D) 19 1) 6-pin
93 Foundation Fieldbus (bus powered; I.S.) (select pneumatic valve 20 (1) 7-pin
Piezo option _A) 21 (1) 8-pin
94 Foundation Fieldbus (externally powered) (select pneumatic valve Micro-connectors
option _B or _D)
13 (1) 4-pin
95 Modbus (select pneumatic valve option _B or _D)
15 (1) 5-pin
96 AS-Interface (select pneumatic valve option _B or _D) select standard
"S" or diagnostic "D" capabilities 17 (1) 6-pin
97 AS-Interface with extended addressing (select pneumatic valve option 18 1) 8-pin

1D, 3D or 5D) Table 6 Capabilities
Table 3 Pneumatic Valve S Standard
No External Latching Description D Diagnostics (available with Function 96 or 71; single solenoid only)
external override external
override override Table 7 Visual Indicator
1H 3H 5H Single solenoid, 24 VDC or 120 VAC universal RM Red closed/green open
1J 3J 5J Single solenoid, 240 VAC (4.5 watts) GM Green closed/red open
1D 3D 5D Single solenoid, 24 VDC (0.5 watt 1M Three-way flow path 1
1E 3E 5E Single solenoid, 12 VDC intrinsically safe 2M Three-way flow path 2
1B 3B 5B Single solenoid, 1.8 W 24 VDC XM Special
2H 4H - Dual solenoid, 24 VDC or 120 VAC universal **See visual indication designation chart in spec sheet for more information.
2J 4J - Dual solenoid, 240 VAC (4.5 watts)
2D 4D - Dual solenoid, 24 VDC (0.5 watt)
2E 4E - Dual solenoid, 12 VDC intrinsically safe
2B 4B - Dual solenoid, 1.8 W 24 VDC
1A 3A 5A Single piezo, intrinsically safe or standard
2A 4A - Dual piezo, intrinsically safe or standard

A
Non-incendive Position Monitor
Eclipse EN Model
DESCRIPTION
StoneL’s Eclipse EN is a non-incendive and intrinsically
safe position monitor which features dual solid state
sensors with optional communications neatly integrated
into a sealed module. The function module and trigger/
indicator attach quickly and conveniently to standard VDI/
VDE 3845 (NAMUR) actuator accessory mounting pads.
Communications, position sensing, power outputs, and

auxiliary inputs are sealed in the Eclipse function module.
Select from NAMUR sensors, SST switching, or AS-
Interface, DeviceNet, or Modbus communication terminals.
All are fully solid state and sealed.
FEATURES HOW TO ORDER
• Non-incendive with integral wire termination area
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5
• Suitable for all hazardous areas
• Rated for NEMA 4, 4X, 6 (intrinsically safe and XX XX X XX XX
nonincendive rated: IP67) Table 1 Series

• Additional termination points and dual conduit entries
EN Eclipse EN - Non-incendive and intrinsically safe version
eliminate junction boxes for solenoid valve termination.
Table 2 Function
• Convenient wiring compartment and pre-labeled terminal
Sensor/Switching Dual Modules
strip enables rapid installation.
• Direct attachment to ISO/NAMUR mounting pads with 33 (2) SST N.O. sensors
simple mounting kit 34 (2) SST N.C. sensors
• Sensor triggers are adjustable in 3.5° increments through Intrinsically Safe Dual Module
360° for precision and flexibility 44 (2) NAMUR sensors (EN 60947-5-6; I.S.)(available with conduit/
connector option 02)
• Submersible and capable of high pressure washdown,
Eclipse sensors and electronics are fully sealed to Valve Communication Terminals (VCT)
eliminate hazard threat and corrosion problems. 92 DeviceNet

• Compact, rugged enclosure integrates position sensors, 95 Modbus
communication, electronics and power output for 96 AS-Interface
solenoids. 97 AS-Interface with extended addressing
SPECIFICATIONS Table 3 Enclosure
Materials of Construction P North American

Housing Lexan polycarbonate
®
A International
Drum components Lexan® polycarbonate I Brazilian
Fasteners Stainless steel Table 4 Conduit/Connectors
Triggers and coupling Stainless steel
02 (2) 1/2" NPT conduit entry
Quick connectors Stainless steel
05 (2) M20 conduit entry
Operating life Unlimited
11 (1) 5-pin mini-connector
Temperature range -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
Warranty 12 (1) 5-pin mini- and (1) 3-pin mini-connector * Consult factory for
additional quick connector options
Dual modules Five years
Table 5 Visual Indicator**
Mechanical components Two years
DM Red closed/green open
LM Flow line
SM T-1 three-way (90° rotation)
TM T-2 three-way (90° rotation)
XM Special
**See visual indication designation chart in spec sheet for more information.

General Purpose Position Monitor A

Eclipse EG Model
DESCRIPTION
StoneL’s Eclipse Series EG is the general purpose
model with a completely sealed micro connector. The
Eclipse EG features dual solid state sensors with optional
communications neatly integrated into a sealed module.
The function module and trigger/indicator attach quickly
and conveniently to standard VDI/ VDE 3845 (NAMUR)
actuator accessory mounting pads.
Communications, position sensing, power outputs, and

auxiliary inputs are sealed in the Eclipse function module.
Select from NAMUR sensors, SST switching, or AS-
Interface, DeviceNet, or Modbus communication terminals.
All are fully solid state and sealed.

• General purpose with convenient micro-connector wiring Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5
• Available with additional built-in connector for solenoid XX XX X XX XX
termination.
• Micro-connectors with potted and sealed enclosure Table 1 Series
eliminate any threat of moisture contamination in wiring. EG Eclipse EG - General purpose
• Electronic module integrated permanently into enclosure. Table 2 Function
• Direct attachment to ISO/NAMUR mounting pads with Sensor/Switching Dual Modules
simple mounting kit 33 (2) SST N.O. sensors (available with connector options 23 or 26)
• Sensor triggers are adjustable in 3.5° increments through
34 (2) SST N.C. sensors (available with connector options 23 or 26)
360° for precision and flexibility
Intrinsically Safe Dual Module
• Submersible and capable of high pressure washdown,
(2) NAMUR sensors (EN 60947-5-6) (available with connector
Eclipse sensors and electronics are fully sealed to 44
option 23)
eliminate hazard threat and corrosion problems.
Valve Communication Terminals (VCT)
• Compact, rugged enclosure integrates position sensors,
92 DeviceNet (available with connector options 25 or 26)
communication, electronics and power output for
95 Modbus (available with connector options 25 or 26)
solenoids.
96 AS-Interface (available with connector options 23 or 24)
SPECIFICATIONS 97 AS-Interface with extended addressing (available with connector
Materials of Construction options 23 or 24)
Housing Lexan® polycarbonate Table 3 Enclosure

Drum components Lexan polycarbonate
®
P General purpose, universal
Fasteners Stainless steel Table 4 Connectors
Triggers and coupling Stainless steel 23 (1) 4-pin micro-connector
Quick connectors Stainless steel
24 (2) 4-pin micro-connectors
Operating life Unlimited
25 (1) 5-pin micro-connector
Temperature range -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
26 (1) 5-pin and (1) 4-pin micro-connector
Warranty
Dual modules Five years Table 5 VIisual Indicator**
Mechanical components Two years DM Red closed/green open

LM Flow line
SM T-1 three-way (90° rotation)
TM T-2 three-way (90° rotation)
XM Special

A
Non-incendive Position Sensor
Hawkeye HK Series
DESCRIPTION
The solid state Hawkeye sensor is ideal for point sensing
in corrosive and hazardous process environments. The
standard Red/Green LEDs also speed your setup and
installation by confirming power up and switch status.
The Hawkeye is FM and CSA approved for nonincendive
applications and intrinsically safe circuits in hazardous
areas.
FEATURES
• Sensing head triggers on any metal.
• Stainless steel body is rugged and corrosion proof.
• Stainless steel washers and fasteners secure.
• Circuit is conformally coated and potted.
• High intensity LED brightly displays switch status.
• 1/2” conduit entry or mini-connector available.
SPECIFICATIONS
HOW TO ORDER
Housing and Fasteners 316 stainless steel
Sensing Head Cover Lexan® polycarbonate Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5
LED Lens Polycarbonate XX XX X X XX
Conduit Connection 1/2" NPT

Table 1 Series
Wiring 36" (0.9 meter) length, 18 gauge multi-strand
HK Hawkeye HK Position Sensor
Sensing Distance 4-6 mm (sensing distance will vary depending on
target material) Table 2 Function*
Temperature Range -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F) 30 SST sensor normally open
Warranty Five years 31 SST sensor normally closed
Ratings 40 NAMUR (EN 60947-5-6; I.S.)
Non-incendive (Class I and Functions 30 and 31* 50 3-wiire sensor (PNP)* Please consult Rawson
II, Div. 2)
Table 3 Housing
Intrinsically Safe Ex ia, Zone 0 Function 40*
or Class I and II, Div. 1) 7 Stainless steel
Enclosure Protection All models: NEMA 4, 4X and 6, Ingress Table 4 Conduit/Connectors
Protection 67
7 1/2" NPT
Approvals See StoneL.com/approvals
8 3-pin mini-connector in stainless steel
* Only models listed on StoneL’s official website are approved per specific rating.
Table 5 Features
SR Red LED
SG Green LED

Linear Valve Position Monitor A

Prism PM Series
DESCRIPTION
The Prism series, designed for corrosive process environments, attaches directly
to sanitary diaphragm and angle valves. This rugged, feature-rich platform offers
a full array of communication and switching options, as well as discrete integral
pneumatic control for single-acting valve actuator operation.
Select the SST sensors for conventional switching, NAMUR sensors for
intrinsically safe applications or communication options including AS-Interface,
DeviceNet, Foundation Fieldbus and Modbus. All switching sensor and
communication modules are fully solid state and sealed for high reliability.
FEATURES
• Ideally suited for process environment.
• Rated for nonincendive or intrinsically safe applications.
• Integral pneumatic control is completely isolated within the enclosure on a stainless steel reinforced polysulfone
manifold so standard tube fittings may be reliably attached.
• Self-adjusting triggering system and manual override.
• Readily adaptable to linear valves such as sanitary and industrial diaphragm and angle valves. Stroke lengths from as
low as 1/4” to as long as 2” may be readily accommodated.
• Wide variety of switching and communication options. All switching sensor and communication modules are fully solid
state and sealed for high reliability.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pneumatic Valve (Solenoid & Piezo)
Configuration 3-way, 2-position, spring return
Porting 1/8" NPT all pressurized ports
Rebreather Port 4-40 size
Flow Ratings Cv - 0.1 (Kv - 1.4)
Rebreather Standard on all models; diverts air from exhausting cylinder into
actuator spring side. Excess air exhausted into atmosphere.
Operating Life 1 million cycles
Operating Pressure 40 psi to 120 psi (2.6 to 8 bar)
Housing and Cover Polycarbonate
Fasteners Stainless steel
Triggering Cams Stainless steel banded polycarbonate
Shaft Stainless steel
Valve Manifold Polysulfone with stainless steel reinforced NPT
Temperature Range -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
with Solenoid Maximum ambient 50° C (120° F)
Warranty Dual Module: Five years
Other mechanicals: Two years
Ratings
Non-incendive (Ex n, Zone 2 or Class I and II, Div. 2) PM models*
Intrinsically Safe Ex ia, Zone 0 or Class I and II, Functions 44 and 93*
Div. 1)
Enclosure Protection All models: NEMA 4, 4X and 6, Ingress Protection 67
Approvals See StoneL.com/approvals
* Only models listed on StoneL’s official website are approved per specific rating.

A
Explosion Proof Position Monitor/Transmitter
Quartz QX Model
DESCRIPTION
The StoneL Quartz Series is durable, corrosion resistant,
and versatile, making it ideal for most of your process
valve monitoring requirements.
The Quartz QX features an explosion proof, water tight

and corrosion-resistant enclosure that is approved for
use in Div. 1/Zone 1 hazardous areas. The robust epoxy-
coated anodized aluminum construction makes this
platform extremely durable and well-suited for use in
corrosive, heavy washdown environments. A broad range
of switching, position transmitter and communication
options may be selected to accommodate most
applications.
This versatile platform adapts to a wide variety of valve SPECIFICATIONS

systems. Attach the Quartz to quarter-turn actuators,
Temperature Range -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
manual operators, linear operators and positioners using
Seal Hermetically-sealed
readily available stainless steel mounting systems.
Warranty Two years
HOW TO ORDER
QX MODEL
DUAL MODULES AND VCTs
XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Series Table 4 Conduit Entries

QX Quartz QX - Explosion Proof 02 (1) 3/4" NPT & (1) 1/2" NPT
Table 2 Function 03 (1) (1) 3/4" NPT & (2) 1/2" NPT
Sensor/Switching Modules (Proximity Type) 05 (2) M20
33 SST N.O. switching sensor dual module 06 (3) M20
44 NAMUR (EN 60947-5-6; I.S.) Table 5 Visual Indicator**
Valve Communication Terminals (VCTs) SDM Red closed/green open
92 DeviceNet HDM Red closed/green open ("H" clip mounting)
93 Foundation Fieldbus (bus powered; I.S.) SNM Green closed/red open
94 Foundation Fieldbus (externally powered) SSM T-1 three-way flow path
95 Modbus STM T-2 three-way flow path
96 AS-Interface SUM T-3 three-way flow path
97 AS-Interface (with extended addressing) SVM T-4 three-way flow path
Expeditors SWM T-5 three-way flow path
82 DeviceNet S0M No indication
86 AS-Interface SXM Special
Table 3 Enclosure SAM Continuous
B Aluminum - North America (NEC/CEC)
* Available with 03 or 06 conduit entry only
K Aluminum - International (IEC) **See visual indication designation chart in spec sheet for more information.
J* Stainless steel - North America (NEC/CEC)

N* Stainless steel - International (IEC)

Explosion Proof Position Monitor/ A

Transmitter - Continued
HOW TO ORDER HOW TO ORDER
QX MODEL QX MODEL
PROXIMITY SWITCH MECHANICAL SWITCHES AND TRANSMITTERS
XX XX X XX XXX XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Series Table 1 Series

QX Quartz QX - Explosion Proof QX Quartz QX - Explosion Proof
Table 2 Function Table 2 Function
Sensors Mechanical Switches
2G (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current) 2V (2) SPDT switches
2H (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (3 amp) 2W (2) SPDT switches, gold contact
2P (2) SPST Maxx-Guard 4V (4) SPDT switches
2S (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (LED) 4W (4) SPDT switches, gold contact
4G (4) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current) 14 (2) DPDT switches
4H (4) SPDT Maxx-Guard (3 amp) Position Transmitters
4P (4) SPST Maxx-Guard 5O Standard with no switches
4S (4) SPDT Maxx-Guard (LED) 5G Standard with (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current)
4X (4) SST sensor (LED) 5V Standard with (2) SPDT mechanical switches
Expeditors 5W Standard with (2) SPDT mechanical switches, gold contact
8H Expeditor with (3) SPDT Maxx-Guard (3 amp) 5X Standard with (2) SST sensor (LED)
8Y Expeditor with (3) switches 7O High performance with no switches
Table 3 Enclosure 7G High performance with (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current)
B Aluminum - North America (NEC/CEC) 7X High performance with (2) SST sensors (LED)
K Aluminum - International (IEC) Table 3 Enclosure
J* Stainless steel - North America (NEC/CEC) B Aluminum - North America (NEC/CEC)
N* Stainless steel - International (IEC) K Aluminum - International (NEC/CEC)
Table 4 Conduit Entries J* Stainless steel - North America (NEC/CEC)
02 (1) 3/4" NPT & (1) 1/2" NPT N* Stainless steel - International (IEC)
03 (1) (1) 3/4" NPT & (2) 1/2" NPT Table 4 Conduit Entries
05 (2) M20 02 (1) 3/4" NPT & (1) 1/2" NPT
06 (3) M20 03 (1) (1) 3/4" NPT & (2) 1/2" NPT
Table 5 Visual Indication** 05 (2) M20
SDM Red closed/green open 06 (3) M20
HDM Red closed/green open ("H" clip mounting) Table 5 Visual Indication*
SNM Green closed/red open SDM Red closed/green open
SSM T-1 three-way flow path HDM Red closed/green open ("H" clip mounting)
STM T-2 three-way flow path SNM Green closed/red open
SUM T-3 three-way flow path SSM T-1 three-way flow path
SVM T-4 three-way flow path STM T-2 three-way flow path
SWM T-5 three-way flow path SUM T-3 three-way flow path
S0M No indication SVM T-4 three-way flow path
SXM Special SWM T-5 three-way flow path
SAM Continuous S0M No indication
* Available with 03 or 06 conduit entry only SXM Special

**See visual indication designation chart in spec sheet for more information. SAM Continuous
* Available with 03 or 06 conduit entry only
** See visual indication designations chart in spec sheet

A
Non-incendive Position Monitor/Transmitter
Quartz QN Model
DESCRIPTION
The StoneL Quartz Series is durable, corrosion resistant,
and versatile, making it ideal for most of your process
valve monitoring requirements.
The Quartz QN is a non-incendive approved for Div. 2/

Zone 2 hazardous environments with proximity sensors
using a clear cover. Intrinsically safe NAMUR sensors
or passive switches are available for Div.1/Zone 0
applications. The robust epoxy-coated anodized aluminum
construction makes this platform extremely durable
and well-suited for use in corrosive, heavy washdown
environments. A broad range of switching, position
transmitter and communication options may be selected to
accommodate most applications.
HOW TO ORDER
QN MODEL - DUAL MODULES AND VCTs
XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Model Table 4 Conduit Entries

QN Quartz QN - Non-incendive and intrinsically safe 02 (1) 3/4" NPT & (1) 1/2" NPT
Table 2 Functoin 03 (1) (1) 3/4" NPT & (2) 1/2" NPT
Sensor/Switching Modules (Proximity Type) 05 (2) M20
33 SST N.O. switching sensor 06 (3) M20
44 NAMUR (EN 60947-5-6; I.S.) Table 5 Visual Indication**
Valve Communication Terminals (VCTs) SDM Red closed/green open
92 DeviceNet HDM Red closed/green open ("H" clip mounting)
93 Foundation Fieldbus (bus powered; I.S.) SNM Green closed/red open
94 Foundation Fieldbus (externally powered) SSM T-1 three-way flow path
95 Modbus STM T-2 three-way flow path
96 AS-Interface SUM T-3 three-way flow path
97 AS-Interface (with extended addressing) SVM T-4 three-way flow path
Expeditors SWM T-5 three-way flow path
82 DeviceNet S0M No indication
86 AS-Interface SXM Special
Table 3 Enclosure SAM Continuous
P Clear Cover - North America
A Clear Cover - International
B Aluminum Cover (not explosionproof) - North America
K Aluminum Cover (not explosionproof) - International

Non-incendive Position Monitor/Transmitter - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
QN MODEL-PROXIMITY SWITCHES AND TRANSMITTERS
XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Series Table 3 Enclosure

QN Quartz QN - Non-incendive and intrinsically safe P Clear Cover - North America
Table 2 Function A Clear Cover - International
Sensors B Aluminum Cover (not explosion proof) - North American
2G (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current) K Aluminum Cover (not explosion proof) - International
2H (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (3 amp) Table 4 Conduit Entries
2P (2) SPST Maxx-Guard 02 (1) 3/4" NPT & (1) 1/2" NPT
2S (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (LED) 03 (1) (1) 3/4" NPT & (2) 1/2" NPT
4G (4) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current) 05 (2) M20
4H (4) SPDT Maxx-Guard (3 amp) 06 (3) M20
4P (4) SPST Maxx-Guard Table 5 Visual Indication**
4S (4) SPDT Maxx-Guard (LED) SDM Red closed/green open
4X (4) SST sensor (LED) HDM Red closed/green open ("H" clip mounting)
Intrinsically Safe SNM Green closed/red open
2J (2) SPST (passive) SSM T-1 three-way flow path
2M (2) SPDT (passive) STM T-2 three-way flow path
2N (2) P+F NAMUR sensors SUM T-3 three-way flow path
4N (4) P+F NAMUR sensors SVM T-4 three-way flow path
4J (4) SPST (passive) SWM T-5 three-way flow path
4M (4) SPDT (passive) S0M No indication
Position Transmitters SXM Special
5O Standard with no switches SAM Continuous
5G Standard with (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current)
** See visual indication designations chart in spec sheet
5X Standard with (2) SST sensor (LED)
7O High performance with no switches
7G High performance with (2) SPDT Maxx-Guard (low current)
7X High performance with (2) SST sensors (LED)
Expeditors
8H Expeditor with (3) SPDT Maxx-Guard (3 amp)
8Y Expeditor with (3) switches

A
General Purpose Position Monitor
Quartz QG Model
DESCRIPTION
The StoneL Quartz series is durable, corrosion resistant, and versatile, making it ideal
for most of your process valve monitoring requirements.
The Quartz QG is general purpose position monitor that features a clear Lexan cover
with mechanical switches. All enclosures are rated NEMA 4, 4x, and 6. The robust
epoxy-coated anodized aluminum construction makes this platform extremely durable
and well-suited for use in corrosive, heavy washdown environments. A broad range
of switching, position transmitter and communication options may be selected to
accommodate most applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing & Aluminum Cover Epoxy-coated anodized marine grade aluminum
Clear Cover &Indicator Lexan® polycarbonate
Elastomer Seals Buna-N; optional EPDM
Drive Shaft Stainless steel
Drive Bushing Bronze, oil impregnated
Fasteners Stainless steel
Temperature Ratings
Mechanical Components -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
Dual Modules -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
Maxx-Guard & SST -40° C to 80° C (-40° F to 176° F)
Warranty
Mechanical Components Two years
SST & Dual Modules Five years

General Purpose Position Monitor - Continued A

HOW TO ORDER
XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Model Table 5 Visual Indication**

QG Quartz QG - General purpose (clear cover) SDM Red closed/green open
Table 2 Function - Mechanical Switches HDM Red closed/green open ("H" clip mounting)
2V (2) SPDT switches SNM Green closed/red open
2W (2) SPDT switches, gold contact SSM T-1 three-way flow path
4V (4) SPDT switches STM T-2 three-way flow path
4W (4) SPDT switches, gold contact SUM T-3 three-way flow path
14 (2) DPDT switches SVM T-4 three-way flow path
Table 3 Enclosure SWM T-5 three-way flow path
P General purpose, universal S0M No indication
All QG models have clear Lexan® cover and anodized aluminum
SXM Special
housing.
SAM Continuous
Table 4 Conduit Entries
02 (1) 3/4" NPT & (1) 1/2" NPT ** See visual indication designations chart in spec sheet
03 (1) (1) 3/4" NPT & (2) 1/2" NPT
05 (2) M20
06 (3) M20

Westlock
A
Weatherproof Position Monitor
Accutrak™ Models 1040/9358/2004/9044 & 1145
DESCRIPTION
The Accutrak™ family of products offers an integrated solution for the
monitoring of process valves by combining switches/sensors, wiring
terminals, enclosures and local visual indication in one compact unit.
Designed around a unique self-locking spring-loaded TouchSet cam
mechanism attached to a stainless steel shaft, no tools are necessary
to adjust the cam allowing both sensors to be set by hand.
FEATURES
Models 1040/9358/2004/9044
• Touch set cams are hand adjustable, spring loaded and self-locking
providing quick calibration of position sensors.
• Terminal strips are pre-wired and numbered with generous working space for ease of use.
• Strong durable Beacon™ offers 360° visual indication available in a choice of styles and colors.
• Additional conduit for easy field wiring and mounting accessories as standard.
• Standardized mounting pattern for easy adaptation to common bracketry.
• NAMUR shaft output compliant to VDI/ VDE 3845 available.
• Analog position transmitter option.
• Engineered resin enclosure is robust yet lightweight; allows broad operating temperatures and provides exceptional
chemical, UV and impact resistance.
• Aluminum enclosures with ultra-low copper content (0.2% maximum) ensure robust performance in corrosive
environments.
Model 1145
• Dome shaped visual indicator provides clear feedback.
• Centralization plate allows accurate switch setting, improves repeatability and minimizes hysteresis.
• Quality mechanical switches roller arm; soldered and sheathed wires.
• Quick release terminal strip aids wiring.
• IP66 ABS enclosure provides high strength and corrosion resistance. .
• IP rated plugs prevent ingress during site storage and transportation.
• Extra conduit and terminal strip points entrance allows electrical integration of solenoid valves.
• Namur VDI/VDE standard mounting arrangement with centralization ring for easy mounting (via an optional bracket)
onto Namur actuators.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure Standards (ANSI/NEMA 250 & IEC)
Models 1040, 9358, 2004, 9044 Type 4, 4X
Enclosure Standards (IEC)
Model 1145 IP66 enclosure
Switches
Models 1040, 1145 V3 mechanical, SPDT
Model 2004 V3 mechanical, SPDT
DPDT (Form CC) mechanical
Model 9358 Magnum (hermetically sealed proximity type) switches
Model 9044 Magnum (hermetically sealed proximity type) switches
MagPAC bifurcated switch pack.
Enclosures
Models 1040, 9358 Engineered resin
Models 2004, 9044 Aluminum
Model 1145 ABS resin

Explosion Proof Position Monitor A

Accutrak™ Models 2007/9479/5050 & 360/366
DESCRIPTION
Fully integrated and encapsulated rotary valve position monitors that are
certified for use in explosive atmospheres.
FEATURES
providing quick calibration of position switches and sensors.
• Terminal strips are pre-wired and numbered with generous working
space for ease of use.
• Strong durable Beacon™ offers 360° visual indication available in a
choice of styles and colors.
• Additional conduit for easy field wiring and mounting accessories as
standard.
• Standardized mounting pattern for easy adaptation to common
bracketry.
• Eliminator option for easy integration of external solenoid valve.
environments.
• Rugged 316 stainless steel enclosures.
SPECIFICATIONS
Area Classification (NEC 500)
Models 2007; 5050; 9479 Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D/ T6 Ta = 60°C
Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G/ T6 Ta = 60°C
Model 9479 Class I, Division 2, Groups A,B,C & D/T4 Ta = 60°C
Model 5050 Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F & G/T6
Model 360/366 Without eliminator conduit option
Class I, Groups B, C & D
Class II, Groups E, F & G
With eliminator conduit option
Class I, Groups C & D
Class II, Groups F & G
Enclosure Standards (ANSI/NEMA 250)
All enclosures Type 4, 4X
Switches
Model 2007 V3 mechanical switches, SPDT
DPDT mechanical switches
GO® switches
Model 5050 Pepperl + Fuchs model NJ2-V3-N
Model 9479 Magnum (hermetically sealed proximity type)
MagPAC bifurcated switch pack
Models 360/366 V3 mechanical switches, SPDT
DPDT mechanical switches
Magnum (hermetically sealed proximity type)
Enclosure Materials
Models 2007; 5050; 9479; 360 Aluminum
Models 2007; 9479; 366 Stainless steel

A
Non-incendive Position Monitor
Accutrak™ Model 9468
DESCRIPTION
Accutrak 9468 series are fully integrated and encapsulated rotary valve
position monitors that are agency certified as non-incendive.
FEATURES
• Magnum switches with rhodium contacts for use with low power I/O’s
for longer contact life.
• MagPAC bifurcated switch pack provides reliable action for low power
and non- resistive loads.
• MagPAC LEDs provide clear status indication of limit switch and
solenoid, where applicable.
• Strong, durable Beacon offers 360° visual indication available in a
choice of styles and colors.
• Terminal strips are pre-wired and numbered with generous working
space for ease of use.
• Robust stainless steel conduit entry inserts provide protection from excessive torque and reliable grounding.
• Engineered resin enclosure is robust yet lightweight; allows broad operating temperatures and provides exceptional
chemical, UV and impact resistance.
SPECIFICATIONS
Area Classification (NEC 500) Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D
Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G
Enclosure Standards (ANSI/NEMA 250) Type 4, 4X
Switches Magnum SPDT (hermetically sealed proximity type) switches
Enclosures Engineered resin
Stainless steel

Explosion Proof Position Sensor A

Accutrak™ Silver Bullet
DESCRIPTION
A Magnum hermetically-sealed proximity switch in a 316 stainless steel enclosure
which is certified explosionproof. Double encapsulated in an epoxy resin and shock
absorbent polymer.
FEATURES
• Available with SPDT or DPDT switches.
• Standard 6 m lead allows remote mounting if required.
• Cable marked as appliance wiring material UL758.
• Rhodium contact option for use with low power I/O’s for longer contact life.
• Highly resistant to shock and vibration stresses, chemical and environmental
exposure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Area Classification (ATEX/IEC) Ex II 2 GD Ex IIC T* Gb
EX tb IIIC T* D6 IP6X
Enclosure Standards (IEC) IP66/67 (with suitable glanding)
IPx8 (with suitable glanding)
Switches Magnum, SPDT hermetically sealed switches
Magnum, DPDT hermetically sealed switches
Enclosure Stainless steel

A
Explosion Proof Position Transmitter
Digital EPIC D410/D420
DESCRIPTION
Position Transmitters that provide discrete position control and precision, non-
contact position feedback with digital communication via HART® protocol for
linear or rotary control valves in a simple, integrated package.
The Digital EPIC digital control transmitters provide continuous feedback

of a valve position integrated with valve position and control monitors in a
stand-alone unit. The stand alone digital position and control transmitters are
available compatible with both HART and FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocols
and for all area classifications. Designed to combine continuous monitoring of
valve travel with other valve control functions, position transmitters are ideal
for use on applications requiring PST (partial stroke testing) or providing ESD
(emergency shut down).
FEATURES
• Microprocessor based technology allows digital communication via HART® protocol.
• EPIC D410 features remote and local partial stroke test (PST) and emergency shut down (ESD) initiated remotely via
HART® signal or locally at the device for safety system applications.
• ‘Non-intrusive’ magnetic calibration input sensors on outside of the EPIC D410 enclosure allow calibration without
removing the cover, maintaining safety in a potentially explosive environment.
• Valve position measurement via a non- contact magnetic pick-up eliminates mechanical drive arms or linkages
increasing reliability in high cycle applications or where vibration is present.
• Highly visible position indicator.
• Additional sight glass on EPIC D410 gives view to the product’s LCD display.
• Extra conduit entries and internal terminal points are provided for mounting and backwiring of a solenoid valve.
• Low copper content aluminum enclosure with polyurethane enamel coating assures both strength and corrosion
resistance
SPECIFICATIONS ATEX/IEC Version NEC Version
Description Explosion Proof/Flame Proof Explosion Proof
Area Classification ATEX/IEC NEC 500
All Models Ex d IIB+H2 Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D
AEx d IIB+H2 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D
EX nA IIC Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G
AEx nA IIC Class III
Enclosure Standards IEC ANSI/NEMA 250
All Models IP67 Type 4X
Enclosure Aluminum Aluminum

Non-incendive Position Transmitter A

DESCRIPTION
Discrete position control and precision, non-contact position feedback with
digital communication via HART® protocol in a simple, integrated package.
With options for linear or rotary control valves and remote PST/ ESD initiation.
FEATURES
• Microprocessor based technology allows digital communication via HART®
protocol.
• Remote and local partial stroke test (PST) and emergency shut down (ESD)
initiated remotely via HART® signal for safety system applications.
• Optional external button to initiate partial stroke test.
• Valve position measurement via a non-contact magnetic pick-up eliminates mechanical drive arms or linkages
increasing reliability in high cycle applications or where vibration is present.
• Highly visible position indicator
• Available with low power Falcon solenoid valve Solenoid coils integrated within enclosure
• Choice of factory pre-wired 3 and 4 way Falcon solenoid valves Solenoid valves with a choice of Cv ratings and coil
voltage
• Models D430 and D431 feature corrosion-resistant resin enclosure.
• Models D450 and D451 feature heavy duty stainless steel enclosure.
SPECIFICATIONS ATEX/IEC Version NEC Version
Description Weatherproof/Intrinsically Safe Non-Incendive
Area classification ATEX/IEC NEC 500
All Models Ex II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ta = -20°C to +60°C Class I, Division 2; Groups A, B, C & D
Ex II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Ta = -20°C to +60°C Class II & III, Division 2; Groups F & G
IP55
Enclosure standards IEC ANSI/NEMA 250
D430 IP55
D450/D451 IP67 Type 4, 4X, 6P
D431 Approvals pending
Enclosure Materials
D430/D431 Engineered resin Engineered resin
D450/D451 Stainless steel Stainless steel
Falcon Solenoid Valves
Cv N/A Choice of 0.5, 1.2, 3.5
Materials N/A Brass, aluminium and stainless steel

A
Explosion Proof Position Transmitter
DESCRIPTION
Discrete position control and precision, non-contact position feedback with digital
communication via HART® protocol in an explosionproof, integrated package.
With options for linear or rotary control valves and remote PST/ESD initiation.
FEATURES
• Microprocessor based technology allows digital communication via HART®
protocol.
• Remote and local partial stroke test (PST) and emergency shut down (ESD)
initiated remotely via HART® signal for safety system applications.
• Valve position measurement via a non-contact magnetic pick-up eliminates
mechanical drive arms or linkages increasing reliability in high cycle applications
or where vibration is present.
• Highly visible position indicator.
• Available with low power Falcon solenoid valve
• Solenoid coils integrated within enclosure
• Choice of factory pre-wired 3 and 4 way Falcon solenoid valves.
• Solenoid valves with a choice of Cv ratings and coil voltage
• Model D460 features a low copper aluminium enclosure with powder coat finish
• Model D470 features a heavy duty stainless steel enclosure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Area classification (NEC 500)
All models Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C & D
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D
Class II & III, Division 1, Groups E, F & G
Enclosure standards (ANSI/NEMA 250)
All models Type 4, 4X, 6P
Enclosure
D460 Aluminum
D470 Stainless steel
Falcon Solenoid Valves (single coil only)
Cv Choice of 0.5, 1.2, 3.5
Materials Brass, aluminium and stainless steel
Area classification (ATEX/IEC)
All models Ex II 2 G Ex d IIC T* Gb Tamb -*°C to +*°C
Ex II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T* Db IP6X Tamb -*°C to +*°C
Enclosure standards (IEC)
All models (without solenoid valve) IP67 & IP68 (20 m for 24 hours)
Enclosure
D460 Aluminum
D470 Stainless steel

Intrinsically Safe Positioner A

ICoT 5000 Series
DESCRIPTION
Smart positioners with a single design to suit both spring-return and double-acting
actuators for rotary and linear valves. Available with HART® communication
protocol, FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ and Profibus PA™ network capability.
Providing modulating valve position control the ICoT range of smart digital
positioners deliver reliable and effective control for both rotary and linear action
valves. The ICoT digital positioner has enhanced functionality with the ability to
provide diagnostics on the valve and actuator, accurate measurement of all the
operating parameters and is compatible with both HART and FOUNDATION
Fieldbus protocols.
FEATURES
• 3-button interface and LCD for easy calibration and information display.
• Easy configuration of split range and reverse acting operation.
• Easy access to wiring terminal.
• Non-contact valve position measurement via Hall Effect sensor. Eliminates the need for drive arms, linkages and
increases overall resolution, accuracy and reliability.
• Advanced auto-calibration.
• Valve speed adjustable via microprocessor control.
• Available with optional dry contact limit switches.
• Optional 4-20 mA position feedback transmitter - HART version only.
• High-flow spool valve option for larger actuator/valves. Eliminates the need for volume boosters in some
applications.
• Highly visible position indicator for rotary applications.
• Easily accommodates large stroke valves, such as knife gates.
• Fully compatible with AMS™ software and DTM.
• Engineered resin enclosure is robust yet lightweight with exceptional chemical, UV and impact resistance.
SPECIFICATIONS ATEX/IEC/INMETRO Version NEC Version
Description Intrinsically Safe Non Incendive Intrinsically Safe
Area Classification ATEX/IEC/INMETRO NEC 500 NEC 500
5200/5300 Series Ex ia IIC T4 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class I, II & III, Division 1, Groups A, B,
Class II & III, Division 2, Groups F & G/ C, D, E, F & G/ T4 Ta=85°C
T4 Ta=85°C
5400/5500 Series Ex ia IIC T4 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D Class I, II & III, Division 1, Groups A, B,
Class II & III, Division 2, Groups F & G/ C, D, E, F & G/ T4 Ta=80°C
T4 Ta=85°C
Enclosure Standards IEC ANSI/NEMA 250 ANSI/NEMA 250
5200/5300 Series IP66 NEMA 4 Type 4 with approved IS barrier
5400/5500 Series IP66 NEMA 4, 4X Type 4, 4X with approved IS barrier
Enclosures Engineered resin Engineered resin Engineered resin
Communication Protocol
5200 Series None None None
5300 Series HART HART HART
5400 Series FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
5500 Series Profibus PA™ Profibus PA™ Profibus PA™

A
Non-incendive Position Monitor with Solenoid
Valve
Quantum 765/789/865
DESCRIPTION
Low power single or dual-coil rotary position control monitors certified for use in
Division 2, non-incendive hazardous areas.
The Quantum range of valve control monitors combines the capability of valve
monitoring and control of automation process valves with integrated position
sensors and low power energy solenoid valves in a single unit. The specially
designed Falcon solenoid valves are mounted directly to the unit housing
and are available with single or dual coils. Quantum valve control monitors
are engineered and certified to meet both weatherproof and hazardous
location requirements with housings available in aluminum, stainless steel and
engineered resin providing a compact integration of sensors and controls.
FEATURES
• Quantum enclosures integrate position sensors and low power solenoid valves into a single unit.
• Solenoid coils integrated within Quantum housing.
• Solenoid valves with a choice of Cv ratings and coil voltage.
• Strong durable Beacon™ offers 360° visual indication, available in a choice of styles and colors.
• Touch set cams are hand adjustable, spring loaded and self-locking providing quick calibration of position
sensors.
• Robust stainless steel conduit entry inserts provide protection from excessive torque and reliable grounding.
• Engineered resin enclosure is robust yet lightweight; allows broad operating temperatures and provides
exceptional chemical, UV and impact resistance.
• Aluminium enclosures with ultra-low copper content (0.2% maximum) ensure robust performance in corrosive
environments.
• Rugged stainless steel enclosure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Area Classification NEC 500
Models 765; 789; 865 Non-incendive Class I, Division 2; Groups A, B, C & D
Class II and III Division 2 Groups E, F, G, T6, Ta=40°C
Enclosure standards ANSI/NEMA 250
All enclosures Type 4, 4X
Switches
Models 765; 789; 865 Magnum SPDT (hermetically sealed proximity type) switches
Enclosures
Models 765; 865 Engineered resin
Model 789 Aluminum
Models 789; 865 Stainless steel
Cv Choice of 0.5, 1.2, 3.5
Materials Brass, aluminum and stainless steel

Explosion Proof Position Monitor with Solenoid A

Valve
Quantum 777/877/360/366
DESCRIPTION
Low power single or dual-coil rotary control monitors certified Explosionproof
for use in hazardous areas. They are available with a broad range of
integrated switching and Falcon solenoid valve options.
FEATURES
• Quantum enclosures integrate position sensors and low power solenoid
valves into a single unit.
• Solenoid coils integrated within Quantum housing.
• Solenoid valves with a choice of Cv ratings and coil voltage.
• Strong durable Beacon™ offers 360° visual indication, available in a choice
of styles and colors.
environments.
• Rugged stainless steel enclosure.
SPECIFICATIONS
Area Classification NEC 500
Models 777, 877 Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D, T6, Ta = 60°C
Non-incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, T6, Ta = 60°C
Class II & III, Division 1, Groups E,F & G
Models 360, 366 Class I, Division 1, Groups *A, *B, C, D, T5, Ta=-50°C to 60°C
Class II & III Division 1, Groups E, F & G, T5, Ta=-50°C to 60°C
Non-incendive Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, T5, Ta=-50°C to
60°C
* De-rated to Group C and D when used with a Solenoid valve
Enclosure Standards ANSI/NEMA 250
All enclosures Type 4, 4X, 6P
Switches
All Models Mechanical switches, SPDT
Mechanical switches, DPDT
Magnum SPDT (hermetically sealed proximity type) switches
MagPAC bifurcated switch pack
Enclosures
Models 777, 877 Aluminum
Model 360 Aluminum
Model 366 Stainless steel
Cv Choice of 0.5, 1.2, 3.5
Materials Brass, aluminum and stainless steel

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Wireless Valve Monitoring
Eltav
A
Industrial Wireless Monitoring System
DESCRIPTION
Eltav’s Wireless Valve Monitoring System brings breakthrough wireless technology that provides real-time information
about a valve’s status directly into the control process reducing failure and risk while increasing safety and yield –
all for a fraction of the cost of traditional wired systems. Based on 2.4GHz radio frequency and 802.15.4 family of
protocols, the system delivers unmatched response time, has the lowest power consumption and the smallest physical
size compared with other sensors. All wireless units have batteries with very long life of more than 5 years in a typical
installation.
The field devices are configured in a mesh network topology that ensures full redundancy and self-healing. There is no
single point of failure. The system is easily integrated into the plant control systems.
An Eltav Wireless Valve Monitoring System requires the following components for system operation:
• VD - Valve Device
• DIB - Discrete Input Box
• OD - Operator Device
• VDR - Wireless Router
• TVDR - Tunneling Router

Industrial Wireless Monitoring System - Continued A

VD - Valve Device
DESCRIPTION
The Valve Device (VD) is installed on top of the monitored valve or actuator. A mechanical stem attaches the VD to the
shaft of the valve or actuator. The VD sensor measures the angle that corresponds to the opening of the valve which is
then transmitted by an embedded bi-directional transceiver that is inside the VD to the VDR.
DIB - Discrete Input Box

DESCRIPTION
The Discrete Input Box (DIB) wirelessly transmits signals from up-to 4 connected Dry Contact inputs, to the control
system. Typical input connections to the DIB are: flow switch, rapture disk, limit switch or any other dry contact switch.
OD - Operator Device
DESCRIPTION
The Operator Device (OD) is a hand-held operational panel enables operators to perform a variety of operational
tasks around the valve on site location. Such operations are: calibration, maintenance and local monitoring of any
Eltav component (VD, VDR and TVDR). The most basic functions of the OD are: turning the wireless device ON/OFF,
supporting installation and commissioning, and receiving real-time measurements from a particular valve device (VD).

A
Industrial Wireless Monitoring System - Continued
VDR - Wireless Router
DESCRIPTION
Also referred to as a Valve Device Router or VDR, this wireless router extends the range and distance of the network. It
buffers data from a group of up to 32 associated wireless devices (VDs) and allows local monitoring from a single point.
Each router connects with other routers within a radius of 100 meters around it and transfers information using a self-
healing mesh topology that provides alternate routes in the event of a failure of a unit.
TVDR - Tunneling Router

DESCRIPTION
The Tunneling Router (TVDR) is the gateway between the wireless network of devices (VD and DIB) and the main wired
network of the control system. The TVDR transfers the collected data from the wireless network via Ethernet TCP/IP.
Two or more TVDRs ensure redundancy.

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Transducers
ABB
I/P Transducer A
TEIP11, TEIP11-PS
DESCRIPTION
ABB Electro-pneumatic signal converters are the link between the control
rooms and pneumatic actuators. The type TEIP 11 I/P Converter with
various housings is available for cabinet installation, field installation, rail
installation and as slide-in type. The signal conversion is based on standard
signals. Current signals of 0/4-20 mA are converted to pressure signals 0.2
to 1 bar or 3 to 15 psi. For potentially explosive conditions, units that offer
intrinsically safe operation or pressure-resistant encapsulation are available
with international approval certificates for use worldwide. Various ranges
can be supplied on the input side and the output side for signal conversion.
FEATURES
• Available with or without booster stage
• Small dimensions and variable mounting designs
• Variety of signal ranges: 0-20 mA or 4-20mA
• Wide temperature range: -40°F to185°F; optional -67°F to 185°F
• High immunity to shocks and vibrations with an effect < 1% for loads up to 10 g and frequencies between 20 and 80
Hz
• ATEX, FM/CSA for intrinsically safe and Explosion proof operation
• Minimum power supply of only 20 psi compressed air required
Model Item Description
TEIP11 V18312H I/P Converter, signal converter for standard signals, without power stage
TEIP11-PS V18311H I/P Converter, signal converter for standard signals, with power stage
Additional configuration/options will need to be specified at time of order

Valves, Actuators and Accessories • Transducers
Marsh Bellofram
A
I/P Transducers
Type 1000
DESCRIPTION
The Type 1000 Transducer is an electro-pneumatic device that reduces a supply pressure to a regulated output
pressure directly proportional to an electrical input signal. The Type 1000 accepts a wide range of supply pressures,
ranging from a minimum of 3 psig (0.2 BAR) above the maximum output up to 100 PSIG (6.9 BAR). An integral
pneumatic volume booster is included in the design to provide high flow capacity (up to 12 SCFM/339 SLPM). Model
selections include general purpose, NEMA 4X Type, extended range, high relief, intrinsically safe, and explosion proof.
Type 1000 for Extended Range

The Bellofram Extended Range I/P and E/P Transducers are based on Bellofram’s proven Type 1000 transducer line -
the best selling transducers in the business.
The large span adjustment range of this line allows recalibration to fit applications with output ranges from
approximately 3-35 PSIG (0.2-2.4 BAR) to 3-145 PSIG (0.2-10 BAR).
The units accept supply pressures up to 150 PSIG (10.5 BAR) and provide flow capacity to 24 SCFM (677 SLPM).
The Type 1000 I/P and E/P Transducers are more cost effective and more accurate than typical high output systems
using transducers coupled to boosting or multiplying relays.
Type 1000 with High Relief

Expanding upon the proven accuracy, reliability, and rugged construction of the Type 1000 General Purpose, these
transducers provide extra fast “blowdown” for a very rapid release of downstream pressure. The extra relief feature
makes these units suitable for cylinder return stroke actuation, air hoists, and similar applications requiring fast exhaust.
These units accept supply pressures to 100 PSIG (6.9 BAR), with output ranges from 1-17 PSIG (0.07-1.2 BAR) to 6-30
PSIG (0.4-2.1 BAR), and provide exhaust capacities of 7 SCFM (336 SLPM).
FEATURES APPLICATIONS
• Low Cost The Type 1000 Transducer converts an electrical signal
• Built-in Volume Booster to a pneumatic output which can be used to operate the
• Small Size following:
• Field Reversible • Valve actuators
• Low Air Consumption • Damper and louver actuators
• Mounts at Any Angle • Valve positioners
• Convenient External Span & Zero Adjusts (Except for • Controllers
Explosion Proof Models) • Relays
• Light Weight • Air cylinders
• Wide Supply Pressure Range • Clutches and brakes
• Low Supply Pressure Sensitivity Used in:
• Liquid, gas and slurry processing instrumentation
• HVAC systems
• Paper handling controls
• Textile processing systems
• Energy management systems
• Petrochemical processing systems

Section
SectionCover
Coverpage
page
Calibration Solutions
The manufacturers we represent offer calibration equipment that is HART compatible,
including the communication software to automatically document daily maintenance
progress.
Calibration Equipment
Main Index
Calibration Services
JM Test Systems............................................................................................................... 208
Multifunction Calibrators
Jofra.................................................................................................................................. 209
Fluke................................................................................................................................. 216
Crystal Engineering........................................................................................................... 217
PIE.................................................................................................................................... 219
Voltage & Current Calibrators
Jofra.................................................................................................................................. 220
Fluke................................................................................................................................. 222
PIE.................................................................................................................................... 223
Temperature Calibration
Handheld Calibrators
PIE.................................................................................................................................... 226
Dry Block/Liquid Baths Calibrators
Jofra.................................................................................................................................. 229
Pressure/Vacuum Calibration
Calibrators & Digital Test Gauges
Jofra.................................................................................................................................. 242
Hand Pumps, Deadweight Testers & Pressure Systems
Ametek Test & Calibration Instruments............................................................................. 256
Mansfield & Green............................................................................................................ 262
Ralston Instruments.......................................................................................................... 272
Hoses, Fittings & Adapters
Ralston Instruments.......................................................................................................... 284
Software
Jofra ................................................................................................................................. 288
207
Calibration Equipment • Calibration Services
JM Test Systems
On Site Calibration Services

DESCRIPTION
JM Test Systems provides onsite calibration services at your location. We offer calibration of the following test
equipment, including:
• Pressure / Vacuum Test Equipment
B • Temperature Test Equipment
• Electrical Test Equipment
• Electrical Safety Test Equipment
• Electronic Test Equipment
• RF and Microwave Communication Equipment
• RF Communications Test Equipment
• Optical / Fiber Optic Test Equipment
• Mechanical / Dimensional Tools/Test Equipment
FEATURES
• Fast Turnaround - Your instruments are returned in hours / No Downtime without equipment / Reduce your need for
spares
• Reduce Paperwork - No Shipping cost, receiving, and gate passes / We ID all necessary equipment
• No Damaged Equipment due to Shipping
• NIST Traceable Certificates and before and after data sheets are supplied immediately
• Minor Instrument Repairs Done on the Spot
• Replacement batteries, test leads and cases are available
For more information call Rawson.

Calibration Equipment • Multifunction Calibrators
Jofra
Multipurpose Calibrator
AMC 910
DESCRIPTION
The AMC910 multi-purpose calibrator is the right solution for high
precision signal, temperature, and pressure calibrations, as it
B
combines the power and features of a laboratory calibrator with the
addition of an isolated measurement channel.
The AMC910 combines sourcing of current and voltage,

measurement of millivolts and resistance with a second completely
isolated measurement channel for a single laboratory calibration.
This flexibility means that only one unit is needed for calibration or
verification giving the confidence needed for test instruments as
well as for field calibrations.
FEATURES
• Accuracy to ±0.003% of reading ±0.001% F.S.
• Source/Read 13 thermocouples, 9 RTD’s, Voltage, Current, Pressure (read only)
• Output: 0-100 mA, 0-100 VDC, -10-100 mV, TCs, RTDs, 5-4000Ω
• Input: -10-75 mV, TCs, RTDs, 5-4000Ω
• Isolated input: 0-100 VDC, 0-50 mA
• Use with APM pressure modules or dry block calibrator
• RS232, IEEE-488 or optional USB interface
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX XXX X X
Table 1 Base model number Table 4 Certificate

AMC910 AMC910 Advanced Multi-purpose Calibrator G NIST traceable certificate (standard)
Table 2 Power supply H Accredited certificate
115 115 VAC, ⁵⁰⁄₆₀ Hz
220 230 VAC, ⁵⁰⁄₆₀ Hz
Table 3 Mains power cable type
A EUROPEAN, 230 V
B USA/CANADA, 115 V
C UK, 240 V
D SOUTH AFRICA, 220 V
E ITALY, 220
F AUSTRALIA, 240 V
G DENMARK, 230 V
H SWITZERLAND, 220 V
I ISRAEL, 230 V

Multifunction Signal Calibrator

ASC 301
DESCRIPTION
B The ASC301 is more than a signal calibrator. Combined with APM pressure
modules or a dry block calibrator, it will calibrate pressure and temperature
and used together with JOFRACAL even document it as well. The ASC301
offers simultaneous input and output; this means that you can calibrate
and adjust a temperature transmitter on the table with no other necessary
instruments. With a full numerical keypad with function and cursor keys
it provides users with a simple and quick user interface. The units’
ClearBrite™ graphical display offers the best visibility.
FEATURES
• Calibrate pressure or temperature
• Operating temperature: 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C)
• High accuracy
• Simultaneous input and output; RTD: 14 different types, TC: 13 different
types, Current 0-24 mA DC, Voltage 0-20 VDC, Frequency 0 to 10 KHz,
Pulse train output, Resistance 5 to 4000 Ohm
• Fuse less protection up to 250 VAC
• Use with APM Pressure Modules
• Fast RTD Simulation
• Simultaneous read back
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3
XXXXXX X X
Table 1 Base model number Table 3 Accessories (Optional)

ASC301 Multi-function Signal Calibrator A External Power Supply
Table 2 Certificate B Rechargeable Battery Pack
G NIST traceable certificate (standard) C Softcase with shoulder strap
H Accredited certificate (optional) T Temperature Sensor Pt100 incl. traceable certificate

Documenting Signal Calibrator

ASC 321
DESCRIPTION
The ASC321 is a full documenting calibrator, using predefined work orders
from JOFRACAL. This ensures easy documentation and reduces the
B
possibilities for errors when calibrating in the field. It is easy to calibrate
RTDs, thermocouples, transmitters, signal converters, temperature
switches, pressure transmitters, pressure gauges and pressure switches.
Combined with the APM external pressure module or a JOFRA dry
block calibrator, the ASC 321 will calibrate and document pressure
and temperature. The ASC321 has full numerical keypad with function
and cursor keys, which provide a simple and quick user interface and
ClearBrite™ graphical display.
FEATURES
• Operating temperature: 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C)
• Accuracy designed to meet high demands from modern sensors and
transmitters
• Simultaneous input and output; RTD: 14 different types, TC: 13 different
types, Current 0-24 mA DC, Voltage 0-20 VDC, Frequency 0 to 10 Khz, Pulse
train output, Resistance 5 to 4000 Ohm
• Fuse less protection up to 250 VAC
• Use with APM Pressure Modules
• Fast RTD Simulation
• Simultaneous read back
• Pulse train output
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX X X
Table 1 Base model number Table 3 Accessories (Optional)

ASC321 Documenting calibrator A External Power Supply / Charger
Table 2 Certificate B Rechargeable Battery Pack
G NIST traceable certificate (standard) C Softcase with shoulder strap
H Accredited certificate (optional) T Temperature Sensor Pt100 incl. traceable certificate

Signal Multi-scanner
ASM
DESCRIPTION
The ASM adds flexibility and time-saving features to your
B calibration routine. It can handle signals from 2-, 3- and 4 wire
RTD's, TC's, transmitters, thermistors, temperature switches and
voltage. Connecting three ASMs together makes it possible to
perform automatic calibrations of up to 24 sensors at the same
time using JOFRACAL. Furthermore the JOFRALOG software
allows the user to use the ASM as a data-logging device.
Versions
The ASM-series is available in 3 versions depending on the kind
of sensors to be measured. ASM-801 has 8 universal plugs. This
is a fixed screw terminal solution used to measure RTD’s, TC’s,
mA, voltage, ohm, and transmitters. ASM-801 measures the cold
junction (CJ) temperature for each channel and is able to supply
very accurate cold junction (CJ) temperature compensation.
ASM-802 has 8 small TC plugs for measurement of TC sensors. The ASM-802 modeI also measures the cold junction
(CJ) temperature for each channel and is able to supply very accurate cold junction (CJ) temperature compensation.
ASM-803 has 8 LEMO plugs, which are primarily for measurement of RTD sensors. This solution makes it possible to
measure current, voltage and ohm. ASM-803 has built-in loop power supply for each channel.
Models
The ASM multi-scanner is made in an A and a B model. The ASM B model is the complete solution with integrated
scanner and high accuracy multi signal measuring circuits. The ASM A model is less expensive and is designed to add 8
channel scanning capabilities to an existing instrument. The A model therefore needs the measuring capabilities from a
JOFRA dry-block ATC B model, JOFRA ASC300 signal calibrator, DTI-1000 reference thermometer or an ASM B model.
FEATURES
• Accuracy to 0.026°C
• Input: TCs, RTDs, 0-12 VDC, 0-24 mA, 0-4000Ω
• 24 V supply for transmitters
• 100% automatic calibration of up to 24 sensors
• RS232 interface and JOFRACAL

Signal Multi-scanner - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 B

XXXXXX X X X
Table 1 Base model number Table 3 Calibration certificate

ASM801 ASM-801 series (with 8 universal screw plugs) F Traceable certificale
ASM802 ASM-802 series (wth 8 TC plugs) H Accredited certificate
ASM803 ASM-803 series (with 8 LEMO plugs) Table 4 Options
Table 2 Model version C Carrying case
A Basic model no built-in measuring circuit
B Including built-in measuring circuit
When ordering an A model or you want to connect several ASM scanners please remember to order connection cables (see below).
Accessories
Item Description
122823 Connection cable with banana / LEMO connection (ASM-A to ATC / ASC300 - RTD / Volt / mA)
125534 Connection cable (1150 mm) with male LEMO / LEMO connection (ASM-A to AMC910 / DTI-1000 - RTD)
125587 Connection cable with minicompensation / LEMO connection (ASM-A to ATC / ASC300 / AMC910 - TC)
125618 Kit with RS232 connection cable and connection cable (650 mm) with male LEMO / LEMO connection (ASM to ASM)

Temperature/Signal Calibrator
CSC 201
DESCRIPTION
B The CSC201 is a compact temperature signal calibrator. The CSC201 is designed to meet
the high-accuracy demands of modern sensors and transmitters. Easy-to-use, intuitive user
interface, with comprehensive ramp and step functions. A large number of predefined sensors
types are available.
FEATURES
• TC types: J, K, T, E, R, S, B, C, XK, BP, L, U, N
• Wide range of RTD's
• Cold junction compensation ON/OFF control
• RTD response time less than 5 mSec
• 2, 3, and 4-wire connections
• 4 x AA batteries with approx. 20 hours of life
• Operating temp: 14 to 122°F (-10 to 50°C)
• RS232 connector; LEMO connector
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX X X
Table 1 Base model Table 3 Accessories

CSC201 Handheld Temperature Signal Calibrator B Rechargeable battery pack
Table 2 Certification C Large padded softcase with shoulder strap
G NIST traceable temperature certificate (standard) T Temperature sensor Pt100
H Accredited calibration certificate

External Pressure Module

APM Mk. II
DESCRIPTION
The JOFRA APM Mk.II second generation of pressure modules extend the usage B
of the pressure and signal calibrator. The APM series is compatible with current
AMC 910, ASC 300, ASC 301 or HPC calibrators, and the former AMC 900 and
APC calibrators. The modules are available in a series of accuracies, ranges,
units and pressure units from vacuum to absolute.
FEATURES
• Accuracies to 0.025% RDG + 0.01 FS
• Pressure range from 25 mbar to 700 bar (0.4 to 10,000 psi).
• Differential, absolute, compound and gauge pressure modules.
• Supplied with fittings for NPT and BSP.
• Temperature compensated from 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F).
• Calibration data are stored and processed inside the APM.
Accuracy¹
Item Range (psi) Sensor Type Pressure Module
65 to 82°F (18 to 28°C) 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
APM 025MD 0.36 psi non-isolated differential ±0.10% F.S. ±0.15% F.S.
APM 070MD 1 psi non-isolated differential ±0.05% F.S. ±0.10% F.S.
APM 350MD 5 psi non-isolated differential ±0.05% F.S. ±0.10% F.S.
APM 001C -14 to 15 psi non-isolated compound ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
APM 002C -14 to 30 psi non-isolated compound ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
APM 007C -12 to 100 psi isolated compound ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
APM 001A 0.35 to 16 psi non-isolated absolute ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
APM 002A 0.35 to 30 psi non-isolated absolute ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
APM 003A 1 to 50 psi isolated absolute ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
APM 001G 15 psi isolated gauge ±0.025%RDG +0.01%F.S. ±0.04%RDG +0.01%F.S.
¹F.S. (full scale) is the numerical value of the positive pressure range. Temperature effect -10 to 0°C / 14 to 32°F ±0.005% F.S./°C. Accuracy includes hysteresis, non-
linearity, repeatability and reference standard uncertainty, 1 Year typical long-term stability, operated inside the rated temperature span and pressure range. For optimal
performance “zero” the unit for gauge/differential measurements or enter the reference pressure for absolute measurements.
Accessories
Item Description
SPK-HPC-008 Fitting to connect APM Mk.II module to T-960/T-970 pump (System A) or T-965/T-975 pump (System B)
SPK-HPC-004 Fitting to connect APM Mk.II module to P016 & P017 pump (System D) or P014 pump (System E)
SPK-APM-003 APM Mk. PC Communication Kit: USB to female 5 pin Lemo will supply power for APM Mk. II as well
Note: Fittings for T-620/T-620H pump (System C) & T-1 pump (System F) already included

Fluke
Insulation Multimeter
Fluke 1577/1587
DESCRIPTION
The Fluke 1587 and 1577 Insulation Multimeters combine a digital insulation tester
B with a full-featured, true RMS digital multimeter in a single, compact, handheld
unit, which provides maximum versatility for both troubleshooting and preventative
maintenance.
Whether you work on motors, generators, cables, or switch gear, the Fluke
1587/1577 Insulation Multimeters are ideally suited to help you with your tasks and
at a cost that is far less than buying the two products.

Crystal Engineering
Reference Pressure Recorder

nVision
DESCRIPTION
The nVision Reference Pressure Recorder is accurate enough to B
replace a deadweight tester, rugged enough to sit in 3 feet of water,
portable enough to complete calibrations anywhere. nVision lets you
visualize measurements graphically, with or without a PC, in real
time as it is being recorded, allowing you to easily identify trends or
anomalies. Two identical bays allow for configuration of the reference
recorder to one’s requirements. All modules are field replicable
allowing flexibility to react to changing needs. The nVision can be used
as differential pressure gauge and recorder, calibration and test tool
and chart recorder replacement.
FEATURES
• Log and display 500,000 points at up to 10 readings per second on
up to two modules simultaneously
• Pressure Modules (PM & BARO) measure, calibrate, and record
up to 15000 psi with up to 0.025% of reading accuracy in the field.
Pressure modules come in a myriad of pressure ranges and
pressure units.
• Temperature Module (RTD100) works with 2-,3-, and 4-wire Pt100
RTDs. Includes and IP67 rated, M8 connector terminal block.
• Current, Voltage & Switch Test Modules (MA20) measure 4-20 mA
and 10-50 mA loops, DC voltage and switch state. Each MA20
module comes with a super flexible, silicone 2mm test lead kit.
• Interactive real time graphing of measurements, with or without a PC
to identify trends and anomalies
• ATEX/IECEx Scheme intrinsically safe
• Compensates accuracy for temperature effects from -4°F to 122°F
• Uses new CPF fittings and hose system which are leak free and
finger tight up to 10,000 psi
• Customizable: Disable, enable or modify features and remotely
record with Crystal Control software
• Connects to a PC to view live readings or export to tamper proof
digital records
• May be ordered as part of a Pump System for testing and calibration
APPLICATIONS
Pressure + Pressure Modules – Record two pressure inputs for up to 8 weeks, and low wet-wet differentials up to 15000
psi static pressure.
• Well Optimization
• Hydraulic Fracturing
• Artificial Lift
• Christmas Tree
• Pump Testing
Pressure + Temperature Modules – Monitor and record pressure and temperature over the course of a test
• Hydrostatic
• Pressure Vessel Testing
Pressure + Current Modules – Show current and pressure on the same graph
• Documented Switch Testing
• Pressure Transmitter Calibration

Reference Pressure Recorder - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
B NV 4AA XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX X
Table 1 Model Table 4 Lower Module

NV NV 30PSI 30 psi Pressure Module
Table 2 Power 100PSI 100 psi Pressure Module
4AA 4AA 300PSI 300 psi Pressure Module
Table 3 Upper Module 1KPSI 1000 psi Pressure Module
30PSI 30 psi Pressure Module 3KPSI 3000 psi Pressure Module
1KPSI 1000 psi Pressure Module MA20 Current, Voltage and Switch Module
3KPSI 3000 psi Pressure Module RTD100 Temperature Module
10KPSI 10000 psi Pressure Module BNKPLT Blank Plate*
15KPSI 15000 psi Pressure Module Table 5 BARO Module
MA20 Current, Voltage and Switch Module BARO Yes
RTD100 Temperature Module Table 6 CPF* Fitting Kits
BNKPLT Blank Plate* N NPT Kit(4013)
B BSP KIt(4015)
All Pressure Modules indicate vacuum but vacuum specification (typically) applies to 30, 100 and 300 modules only. Not recommended for continuous use at high vacuum.
*If ordering nVision with only one module installed, enter BNKPLT in the empty module slot.
Any nVision reference recorder may be ordered with or without a pump system, carrying case and connection fittings. Please see spec sheet or contact your Rawson
representative for more information.

PIE
Multifunction Process Calibrator

PIECAL 820
FEATURES
• Technician friendly operation B
The unique and intuitive EZ-DIAL Double Click Menu makes it easier to setup
than other multifunction calibrators. Uses the same menus as the single function
PIECAL Evolution Calibrators.
• Use it as a milliamp and voltage calibrator
Source 0 to 24.00 mA, 0 to 10.25 V dc and -10.00 to 80.00 mV
Read to 24.00 mA, ±60.00 V dc and and -10.00 to 80.00 mV
Simulate 2-Wire Transmitters
Power up transmitters & loops with the built-in 24 V power supply
Simplify HART hookups with built-in 250 Ohm resistor
• Calibrate directly in temperature with 0.1°C/°F resolution
The PIECAL 820 works with the instruments you use.
Types J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N, G, C, D, L (J DIN), U (T DIN) and P (Platinel II) Pt
100 Ohm (3850, 3902, 3916, 3926) & 1000 Ohm (3850) Copper 10 & 50 Ohm,
Nickel 100 and 120 Ohm
• Checkout flow and vibration systems
Source & read frequency from 0 to 2000 CPM (Counts-Per-Minute), 0.00 to
999.99 Hz, 0.0 to 9999.9 Hz and 0.000 to 20.000 kHz
• Checkout resistance instruments
Source and read resistance from 0.0 to 410.0 and 0 to 4001 ohms
• Troubleshoot loop & wiring problems
‘Beep’ out connections with the built-in continuity checker.
• Repeatability you can count on
Accurate to ±0.008 mA, ±0.003 V, ±0.006 kHz, ±0.3°C/0.5°F
• Guaranteed Compatible with all Instrumentation
Works with Rosemount & Honeywell Smart Transmitters, PLCs, DCSs, Multi
Channel Recorders and other pulsed excitation devices
• Easy to read
Turn on the backlight & easily see the display in dark areas of the plant.
• Quickly set any three outputs plus automatic stepping & ramping
Easily set any value quickly with the adjustable “DIAL” plus store any three output
settings for instant recall with the EZ-CHECK™ switch. Choose between 2, 3, 5
& 11 steps to automatically increment the output in 100%, 50%, 25% or 10% of
span. Select RAMP to smoothly increase and decrease the output between Zero
and Span. Set step/ramp time to match your system from 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 15, 20,
25, 30 and 60 seconds.
• Measure temperature sensors, frequency pickups, loop currents and voltage
levels
Check the values of your process sensors. Instantly recall MAX and MIN values
to see process variability.
• Ready to go right out of the box
The PIECAL 820 comes with a rubber boot with tilt stand, deluxe carrying case,
four test leads with spade lugs for RTD and ohms, two test leads with alligator
clips for milliamp, volt, frequency & continuity and a free NIST Certificate of
Calibration.
• Optional Accessories
Wire & Mini T/C Plug: J, T, E, K (020-0202); B, R/S, K (020-0203), Calibration
report with test data

Calibration Equipment • Voltage & Current Calibrators
Jofra
Loop Calibrator
CSC 101
DESCRIPTION
B The JOFRA CSC101 is a compact mA loop signal calibrator with step
and ramp functions. You can use it to calibrate or measure mA as well as
loop voltage. The compact CSC101 fits easily into a technician’s hand
and is designed to meet the high-accuracy demands of modern sensors
and transmitters, offering 1μA resolution. The unit is easy to use, with an
intuitive user interface and comprehensive ramp and step functions. All
functions are displayed on a high resolution display.
FEATURES
• Current
- 0 to 24 mA current range
- ±0.01% RDG +2 μA accuracy
- Resolution 1 μA
• Voltage
- 0 to 30 VDC voltage range
- ±0.01% RDG + 2 mV accuracy
- 1 mV resolution
• Over current protection 28mA
• Over voltage protection 240 VAC
• Humidity range, non-condensing 10 to 95%RH
• Operating temp: 14 to 131°F (-10 to 55°C)
• Small and handy
• 6 AAA batteries (40 hour battery life)
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX X X
Table 1 Base model Table 3 Accessories

CSC101 Handheld loop signal calibrator B Rechargeable battery pack
Table 2 Certification
G NIST traceable temperature certificate (standard)

Milliamp Loop Calibrator

mACal
DESCRIPTION
The mAcal is the economical answer to easy and accurate loop calibration. Test all 4-20 B
mA loops in the process with this handy calibrator that sources, reads, steps through test
points, converts readings to percentages, etc. The instrument is designed specifically
for 2-wire transmitter loops with 4 to 20 mA signals and it is delivered with traceable
certification.
FEATURES
• Accuracy to ±0.05% F.S.
• Auto-stepping and ramping
• 24 VDC loop power
• Measure 0 to 45 volt
• Flow reading function
• Reading in mA, %, VDC or sec
• High resolution up
Item Description
75-MACAL Milliamp loop calibrator with standard

Fluke
Process Calibrator/Digital Multimeter

Fluke 789
FEATURES
B • 24 V Loop power supply
• Very large dual display
• Enhanced backlight with 2 brightness settings
• 1200 Ohm drive capability on mA source
• HART mode setting with loop power and a built-in 250 ohm resistor
• 0% and 100 % buttons to toggle between 4 and 20 mA sourcing for a quick span check
• Externally accessible fuses for easy replacement
• Infrared-port to process data in FlukeView Forms (V2.1) software
• Precision 1000 V, 440 mA True-RMS digital Multimeter
• 0.1% dc voltage accuracy
• 0.05% dc current accuracy
• Frequency measurement to 20 kHz
• Min/Max/Average/Hold/Relative modes
• Diode Test and Continuity Beeper
• Simultaneous mA and % of scale readout
• 20 mA DC current source / loop calibrator / simulator
• Manual Step (100%, 25%, Coarse, Fine) plus Auto Step and Auto Ramp
• Externally accessible battery for easy battery changes
True RMS AC/DC Clamp Meter

Fluke 381
FEATURES
• Wireless technology allows the display to be carried up to 30 ft. away from the point of
measurement for added flexibility without interference with measurement accuracy
• The removable magnetic display can be conveniently mounted where it is easily seen
• iFlex flexible current probe expands the measurement range to 2500 A ac
• CAT IV 600 V, CAT III 1000 V
• Integrated low pass filter and state of the art signal processing allows for use in noisy electrical
environments while providing stable readings
• Proprietary inrush measurement technology to filter out noise and capture motor starting
current exactly as the circuit protection sees it
• Ergonomic design fits in your hand and can be used while wearing protective equipment
• Radio transmitter automatically sets the correct measurement range so you do not need to
change the switch positions while taking a measurement
• Three-year warranty
• Soft carrying case

PIE

PIECAL 334
FEATURES
• Calibrate Milliamp Instruments
Source 0.00 to 24.00 mA & -25.0 to 125.0% of 4-20 mA; Read 0.00 to 52.00 mA, -99.99
B
to 99.99 V Simulate 2-Wire Transmitters; Power & Read 2-Wire Transmitters
• Calibrate with Confidence - Accurate to ±0.025% of Span at 4.000 & 20.000 EZ-CHECK
outputs
• Easy-to Read Backlit Display - Use in the Plant, Field or Shop
Includes Rubber Boot, Attached Test Leads & free NIST Certificate of Calibration Low
profile switches resist accidental damage
• Simple Battery Changes
Separate compartment for no-tool battery changes with four inexpensive “AA” batteries
AC Adaptor 120 V (020-0101); 240 V (020-0100); NiMh Batteries & Charger 120
VAC/12V DC (020-0103) Carrying Case (020-0205); Calibration report with test data
Improvements over 334s from other manufacturers include backlit display, better long
term stability, accuracy, reliability & ruggedness plus improved battery life.
PIECAL 334 is the perfect replacement for your worn out mA calibrators!

PIECAL 535
FEATURES
• Calibrate Milliamp & Voltage Instruments
Source & Read 0.000 to 52.000 mA & -25.00 to 125.00% of 10-50 and 4-20 mA with five digit
display
Source 0.000 to 20.000 V & Read -99.99 to 99.99 V, Simulate 2-Wire Transmitters, Power & Read
Transmitters
Menu selectable 250 Ohm resistor for HART compatibility
• Stroke 10-50 mA valves and power transmitters
Built-in 45 Volt power supply delivers the power to operate your I/Ps where other calibrators fail
• Calibrate with Lab Accuracy -
Accurate to ±(0.025% of Reading + 4 lsd) - within 0.01 mA
• Includes everything you need
AC Adaptor 120 V (020-0101) or 240 V (020-0100); Carrying Case with Shoulder Strap (020-
0204), Test Leads (020-0207) and Certified Test Data
NiMh Batteries & Charger 120 VAC/12V DC (020-0103)


PIECAL 134
FEATURES
B • Calibrate Milliamp Instruments
Source & Read 0.00 to 24.00 mA & -25.00 to 125.0% of 4-20 mA; Simulate 2-Wire
Transmitters
Power & Read 2-Wire Transmitters; Selectable 250 Ohm resistor for HART
compatibility
• Calibrate with Confidence
Accurate to ±(0.05% of Reading + 0.01 mA) - Includes free NIST Certificate of
Calibration
• Compact & Affordable
Pocket sized with built-in belt clip & attached test leads. Includes two “AA” batteries.
• Faster Calibrations
Instantly select three outputs with EZ-CHECK switch & two speed EZ-DIAL knob
Carrying case with belt clip (020-0200); Calibration report with test data
Milliamp Loop Diagnostic Calibrator

PIECAL 334Plus
FEATURES
• Calibrate Milliamp Instruments
Source & Read 0.000 to 24.000 mA & -25.00 to 125.00% of 4-20 mA with five digit
display
Read -99.99 to 99.99 V; Simulate 2-Wire Transmitters, Power & Read Transmitters
Menu selectable 250 Ohm resistor for HART compatibility
• Calibrate with Lab Accuracy -
PIECAL 334Plus accurate to ±(0.05% of Span) - within 0.01 mA
PIECAL 434 accurate to ±(0.01% of Reading + 0.002 mA)
PIECAL 434 is more accurate than similar calibrators - within ±0.004 mA at 20 mA
output!
• Locate Loop Current Leakages - Automatic indication of Loop Current and
Leakage
Current (US Patent #7,248,058). Measure ground current leakage from faulty
wiring, flooded conduit and corrosion bridges to help you decide if there is a wiring
problem (diagrams below).
• Faster Calibrations - Three output EZ-CHECK switch. 2 speed EZ-DIAL;
Stepping & Ramping
• Easy-to-Read Backlit Display - Includes Boot, Leads & free NIST Certificate of
Calibration
• Optional Accessories - AC Adaptor 120 V (020-0101); 240 V (020-0100)
NiMh Batteries & Charger 120 VAC/12V DC (020-0103); Calibration report with test data
Carrying case (020-0205) is included with PIECAL 434 and optional with PIECAL 334Plus

Milliamp Loop Diagnostic Calibrator

Model 532
FEATURES
• Calibrate Milliamp & Voltage Instruments B
Source to 24.000 mA & 24.000 Volts DC; Read 0.000 to 24.000 mA, 0.000 to 24.000 V, 24.01 to
30.00 V
Simulate 2-Wire Transmitters, Power & Read 2-Wire Transmitters; 250 Ohm resistor - HART
compatibility
Current: Accurate to ±(0.012% of Reading + 0.002 mA); Voltage: Accurate to ±(0.012% of Reading +
0.004 V)
• Troubleshoot Loops & Find Ground Faults
Loop diagnostics take dynamic loop readings under operating conditions (US Patent #7,248,058).
Automatic indication of Loop Current, DC Voltage, Resistance and Leakage Current. displays AC
Volts & presence of HART.
• Locate Loop Current Leakages - Find ground current leakage - faulty wiring, flooded conduits &
corrosion bridges.
• Faster Calibrations - Select 3 outputs with EZ-CHECK switch. 2 speed EZ-DIAL plus Stepping &
Ramping
Includes Attached Test Leads, Carrying Case (020-0204) & free NIST Certificate of Calibration
• Optional Accessories - AC Adaptor for 120 VAC (020-0101); AC Adaptor for 240 VAC (020-0100);
Calibration report with test data
Frequency Calibrator
Model 541
FEATURES
• Calibrate Flow Meters and Frequency Instruments
Generate Sine Waves, Zero based & Zero crossing Square Waves; Adjust amplitude from
100 mV to 12V p-to-p
• Read with Built-in Frequency counter - Measures waveforms from 0.1V-120V peak-to-peak
• Calibrate with confidence - Accurate to ±0.005% of Range
• Compatible with Process Signal Ranges
0.001 kHz to 20.000 kHz; 0.1 Hz to 2000.0 Hz; 0.01 Hz to 200.00 Hz
0.1 CPM (Counts-per-minute) to 2000.0 CPM; 1 CPH (Counts-per-hour) to 20000 CPH
• Calibrate Totalizers - Totalize Inputs/Outputs from 1 to 99999 counts in 0.1 to 100.0 minutes
• Includes: Attached Leads, Carrying Case & free NIST Certificate of Calibration
• Optional Accessories - AC Adaptor for 120 VAC (020-0101); AC Adaptor for 240 VAC (020-
0100); Calibration report with test data

Calibration Equipment • Temperature Calibration
PIE
Handheld Calibrators
Thermocouple Calibrator
PIECAL 322-I & 422
FEATURES
B • PIECAL 422 - Source and Read Fourteen T/C Types plus mV
J, K, T, E, R, S, B, N, G, C, D, L (J DIN), U (T DIN) & P (Platinel); -13.000
to 80.000 mV
• PIECAL 322-1 - Source and Read Four T/C Types plus mV
J, K, T, & E; -13.000 to 80.000 mV
• Calibrate with Confidence - Resolution of 0.1° F & C; Accurate to 0.2°
• Faster Calibrations - Instantly select three outputs with EZ-CHECK
switch
Easily find trip points with two speed EZ-DIAL & Automatic Stepping.
• Easily Change T/C Types & Scale - Double click to select T/C type & °F
&C
• Easy-to-Read Display - Turn on the backlight to read in dark areas of the
plant
• Use in the Plant, Field or Shop - Low profile switches resist accidental
damage. Includes Rubber Boot, Carrying case (020-0205), mV Test Leads
& free NIST Certificate of Calibration.
• Simple “No Tool” Battery Changes - four inexpensive “AA” batteries
• Verify Cold Junction Temperature & Output (422 Only)
Secondary display of compensated millivolt setting and cold junction
temperature
Wire & Mini T/C Plug: J, T, E, K (020-0202); B, R/S, K (020-0203); NiMh
Batteries & Charger 120 VAC/12V DC (020-0103); Calibration report with
test data
Thermocouple Simulator
PIECAL 521B
FEATURES
• Source Multiple Thermocouple Types plus mV
J, K, T, E, R, S, N, B, G, C, D, L, U and P; -13.000 to 80.000 mV
Resolution of 0.1° F & C; Accurate to 0.4°; Backlit display
Included with PIECAL 520B & 521B: mV Test Leads & free NIST Certificate of
Calibration.
Instantly select three outputs with EZ-CHECK switch
Easily find trip points with two speed EZ-DIAL
• Optional Accessories for 520B & 521B
Rubber Boot (020-0209), Carrying case (020-0205)
Wire & Mini T/C Plug - J,T,E,K (020-0202), Types B,R/S,K (020-0203),
NiMh Batteries & Charger 120 VAC/12V DC (020-0103), Calibration report with test data
Individual Wire & Mini T/C Plug - Choose J,K,T,E,R/S,N or B (020-0210-*)

RTD Calibrators
PIECAL 211 & 311
FEATURES
• Calibrate with Ease - Resolution to 0.1° F & C; Accurate to 0.2° B
• Source and Read Multiple RTD Curves plus Ohms
Platinum 100 W: a=1.3850, 1.3902, 1.3926; Platinum 1000 W: a=1.3850,
1.3750
Copper 10 & 50 W; Nickel 110 & 120 W; 0.00 to 4001.0 W (PIECAL 211
limited to 2001.0 W)
Custom ranges available - consult factory
• Automatically Detect 2, 3 & 4 Wire Connections
Troubleshoot sensor connections & find broken wires with patented
technology
Works with Rosemount & Honeywell Smart Transmitters, PLCs, DCSs,
Multi-Channel
Recorders and other pulsed excitation devices
• Faster Calibrations - Instantly select three outputs with EZ-CHECK
switch
Easily find trip points with two speed EZ-DIAL knob & Automatic
Stepping
• Easily Change RTD Types & Scale - Double click to select RTD Type &
°F & °C
• Verify RTD Temperature & Output (311 Only) - Secondary display of
Ohms
• Easy-to-Read Display - Turn on the backlight to read in dark areas of
the plant
• Simple “No Tool” Battery Changes - four inexpensive “AA” batteries
• Use in the Plant, Field or Shop - Includes Rubber Boot, RTD Wire
Kit (020-0208), Carrying Case (020-0205) & free NIST Certificate of
Calibration. Optional: NiMh Batteries & Charger 120 VAC/12V DC (020-
RTD Simulator
PIECAL 511B
FEATURES
• Simulate Multiple RTD Curves plus Ohms
Pt 100 W: a=1.385,1.3902,1.3926,1.3916; 1000 W: a=1.385, 1.375 Copper 10 & 50 W; Nickel
110 & 120 W; 0.000 to 400.000 Ohms
Resolution of 0.1° F & C; Accurate to 0.3°; Backlit display Included with PIECAL 510B &
511B: RTD Wire Kit (020-0208) & free NIST Certificate of Calibration.
• Optional Accessories: Rubber Boot (020-0209); Carrying case (020-0205); NiMh Batteries
& Charger 120 VAC/12V DC (020-0103); Calibration report with test data
Instantly select three outputs with EZ-CHECK switch
Easily find trip points with two speed EZ-DIAL knob

RTD/Thermocouple Calibrator
Model 525
FEATURES
B • Calibrate with Precision - High resolution to 0.1° and 0.01° F & °C; Accurate to 0.2°
• Source and Read Multiple Thermocouple Types plus mV
J, K, T, E, R, S, N and B; -13.000 to 80.000 mV
• Source and Read Multiple RTD Curves plus Ohms
Platinum 100W: a=1.3850, 1.3902, 1.3926; Copper 10 & 50W; Nickel 110 & 120W; 0.000
to 400.000 Ohms
• Automatically Detect 2, 3 & 4 Wire Connections
Troubleshoot sensor connections & find broken wires with patented technology
Works with Rosemount & Honeywell Smart Transmitters, PLCs, DCSs, Multi-Channel
Recorders and other pulsed excitation devices
• Faster Calibrations - Instantly select 3 outputs with EZ-CHECK switch; 2 speed EZ-
DIAL; Auto Stepping. Includes Carrying Case (020-0205); RTD Wire Kit (020-0206) & free
NIST Certificate of Calibration
• Optional Accessories - Wire & Mini T/C Plug: J, T, E, K (020-0202); B, R/S, K (020-

Jofra
Dry Block/Liquid Baths Calibrators
Dry Block Temperature Calibrators

RTC-156 & RTC-157
DESCRIPTION
The RTC-156 and RTC-157 feature active dual-zone temperature B
control which provides excellent temperature homogeneity in the
well by adjusting the temperature in the top of the well to the same
temperature as in the bottom. These models include the patent
pending Dynamic Load Compensation (DLC) system that provides
perfect temperature uniformity in the insert no matter the number
or size of the sensors immersed. All calibrators offer unique fail
safe plug & play connectivity for sensors, an easy-to-read full-
color 5.7-inch VGA display and a USB connection for improved
communications and software downloads. All calibrators have a
built-in reference sensor that offers high accuracy. However, users
can obtain even better accuracies and realize the calibrator’s full
potential by utilizing the STS (Superior Temperature Standard)
reference sensor. A variety of accessories and insert kit options are
also available for all RTC calibrators.
FEATURES
• Down to ±0.04°C accuracy using the external reference sensor.
• Excellent stability 0.005˚C
• RTC-156 from -30 to 155°C (-22 to 311°F)
• RTC-157 from -45 to 155°C (-49 to 311°F)
• DLC, Dynamic Load Compensation system, for perfect temperature uniformity in the insert
• Unique intelligent sensors for plug’n’play connection
• USB connector for communication
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX X XXX X XXX XXX XX XXXX XX
Table 1 Base model number Table 4 Mains power cable

RTC156 RTC-156 Series, -30°C to 155°C (-22°F to 311°F) A European, 230V
RTC157 RTC-157 series, -45°C to 155°C (-49°F to 311°F) B USA/Canada, 115V
Table 2 Model version C UK, 240V
A Basic model, without input D South Africa, 220V
B Full model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input, Sensor- E Italy, 220V
under-test input
F Australia, 240V
C Middle model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input,
G Denmark, 230V
Table 3 Power supply (US deliveries 60 Hz only)
H Switzerland, 220V
115 115VAC
I Israel, 230V
230 230VAC

Dry Block Temperature Calibrators - Continued

Table 5 Insert type and size Table 8 Calibration Certificate
NON No insert selected (standard) F Traceable Calibration Certificate. (standard)
UNX 1 x Undrilled Insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for H Accredited Calibration Certificate
B code)
EA Full EURAMET Calibration Certificate
XXX 1 x Single hole insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for
FS Traceable System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only)
code)
HS Accredited System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only)
MXX 1 x Multi hole insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for
code) EAS Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only)
SIX Set of 3 Imperial multi hole inserts. Covering holes from 1/8” to 1/2” EASD Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate with DLC (B & C model
only)
SMX Set of 4 Metric multi hole inserts. Covering holes from 3mm to 13mm
SIM Set of 9 Imperial inserts. Covering holes from 1/8” to 5/8” Table 9 Accessories
SMM Set of 14 Metric inserts. Covering holes from 3mm to 16mm CT Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley
SR Support rod set
Table 6 Dynamic Load Compensation (B & C models only, optional)
TR Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley & Support rod set
DLC DLC sensor
Table 7 STS Reference sensor (B & C models only, optional)
R1 STS-102 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 30mm (STS102A030EH)
R3 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 1/4”. Length 161mm (STS200B915EH)

Dry Block & Liquid Bath Temperature Calibrators

RTC-158 & RTC-250
DESCRIPTION
The RTC-158 and RTC-250 offer combined dry block and liquid bath. These
models include the patent pending Dynamic Load Compensation (DLC) system B
that provides perfect temperature uniformity in the insert no matter the number
or size of the sensors immersed. All calibrators offer unique fail safe plug & play
connectivity for sensors, an easy-to-read full-color 5.7-inch VGA display and a USB
connection for improved communications and software downloads. A variety of
accessories and insert kit options are also available for all RTC calibrators.
FEATURES
• Down to ±0.04°C accuracy using the external reference sensor
• Excellent stability 0.01˚C
• RTC-158 from -22 to 155°C (-8 to 311°F)
• RTC-250 from 28 to 250°C (82 to 482°F)
• Automatic calibration of as many as 24 sensors at a time
• For customers, who only want to use liquid baths
• For calibration of odd sizes and shapes of sensors including sanitary sensors
WET = no need for inserts, that fit the sensors
DRY = more space for calibration of special sensors
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Base model number Table 6 Dynamic Load Compensation (B & C models only, optional)
RTC158 RTC-158 Series, -22 to 155°C (-8 to 311°F) DLC DLC sensor
RTC250 RTC-250 Series, 28 to 250°C (82 to 482°F) Table 7 STS Reference sensor (B & C models only, optional)
Table 2 Model version R1 STS-102 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 30mm (STS102A030EH) For
A Basic model, without input RTC-158
B Full model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input, Sensor- R6 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 183mm (STS200A916) For
under-test input RTC-158
C Middle model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input R7 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 1/4”. Length 183mm (STS200B916) For
RTC-158
R8 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 183mm (STS200A925) For
115 115VAC RTC-250
230 230VAC R9 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 1/4”. Length 183mm (STS200B925) For
Table 4 Mains power cable RTC-250
A European, 230V Table 8 Calibration Certificate
B USA/Canada, 115V F Traceable Calibration Certificate (standard)
C UK, 240V H Accredited Calibration Certificate
D South Africa, 220V EA Full EURAMET Calibration Certificate
E Italy, 220V FS Traceable System Calibration Certificate (B & C models only)
F Australia, 240V HS Accredited System Calibration Certificate (B & C models only)
G Denmark, 230V EAS Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate (B & C models only)
H Switzerland, 220V EASD Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate with DLC (B & C
models only)
I Israel, 230V
Table 9 Accessories
Table 5 Insert type and size
CT Solid Protective Carrying case with integrated trolley
NON No insert selected (standard)
SR Support rod set
UNX 1 x Undrilled Insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for
code) TR Solid Protective Carrying case with integrated trolley & Support rod
set
code)
BAT Liquid bath kit

Ultra Cooler Dry Block Temperature Calibrator

RTC-159
DESCRIPTION
B The top model dry-block temperature calibrator – the JOFRA RTC-159, is unsurpassed
in the market. It is the most versatile temperature calibrator available with a temperature
range that makes it especially ideal for use in the health care, medical, pharmaceutical,
biotechnology and food industries. The RTC-159 Ultra Cooler has the widest available
temperature range from -100 to +155°C and incorporates a highly efficient, free-piston
Stirling cooler. It features improved heating and cooling speeds, and its patented cooling
technology allows the calibrator to fast cool to -80°C in only 65 minutes. The RTC-
159 is also equipped with a large informative, easy-to-read color display. A variety of
accessories and insert kit options are also available for all RTC calibrators.
FEATURES
• From -100 to 155°C (-148 to 311°F)
• Down to ±0.06°C (±0.11°F) accuracy using the external reference sensor.
• Most stable ultra cooler calibration on the market ±0.03˚C (±0.05°F)
• The efficient free piston stirling cooler (FPSC) technology is used to secure fast cooling and heating temperature
changes
• JOFRA reference sensors are supplied with intelligent plugs, holding the calibration data (coefficients) of the reference
sensor. This is a truly plug & play calibration system
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX X XXX X XXX XXX XXX XXXX XX
Table 1 Base model number Table 5 Insert type and size

RTC159 RTC-159 series, -100°C to 155°C (-148°F to 311°F) NON No insert selected (standard)
Table 2 Model version UNX 1 x Undrilled Insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for
code)
A Basic model, without input
B Full model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input, Sensor-
code)
under-test input
C Middle model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input,
code)
SIX Set of 3 Imperial multi hole inserts. Covering holes from 1/8” to 7/16”
115 115VAC
230 230VAC
SIM Set of 9 Imperial inserts. Covering holes from 1/8” to 5/8”
Table 4 Mains power cable
SMM Set of 14 Metric inserts. Covering holes from 3mm to 16mm
A European, 230V
Table 6 Dynamic Load Compensation (B & C models only, optional)
B USA/Canada, 115V
DLC DLC sensor (DLC159)
C UK, 240V
D South Africa, 220V
E Italy, 220V
F Australia, 240V
G Denmark, 230V
H Switzerland, 220V
I Israel, 230V

Ultra Cooler Dry Block Temperature

Calibrator - Continued
Table 7 STS Reference sensor (B & C models only, optional) Table 9 Accessories B
R14 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 192mm (STS200A917EH) CT Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley (Carrying case included in
standard delivery)
R15 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 1/4”. Length 192mm (STS200B917EH)
Table 8 Calibration Certificate
F Traceable Calibration Certificate. (standard)
H Accredited Calibration Certificate - ISO17025
EA Full EURAMET Calibration Certificate - ISO17025
HS Accredited System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only) -
ISO17025
EAS Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only) -
ISO17025
EASD Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate with DLC (B & C model
only) - ISO17025

High Temp Dry Block Calibrator

RTC-700
DESCRIPTION
The RTC-700 can perform calibration over a very wide temperature range starting from 33°C
B and up to 700°C (91 to 1292°F). This makes it possible to perform calibration jobs over a range
of 667°C (1232°F) with only one calibrator. It is also able to display up to five temperature
readings simultaneously. The RTC-700 features the active triple-zone temperature control
which improves the homogeneity in the well by adjusting the temperature in the top of the well
to the same temperature as in the bottom. The triple-zone keeps this difference at a minimum.
A variety of accessories and insert kit options are also available for all RTC calibrators.
FEATURES
Accuracy
• Down to ±0.11°C accuracy using the external reference sensor
• Excellent stability to 0.008˚C
• RTC-700 from 33 to 700ºC (91 to 1292ºF)
• DLC, Dynamic Load Compensation system, for perfect temperature uniformity in the insert
• Unique intelligent sensors for plug’n’play connection
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Base model number Table 6 Dynamic Load Compensation (B & C models only, optional)
RTC700 RTC-700 Series, 33°C to 700°C (91°F to 1292°F) DLC DLC sensor
Table 2 Model version
Table 7 STS Reference sensor (B & C models only, optional)
B Full model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input, Sensor-
under-test input R5 STS-200 Ref. sensor. Dia. 1/4”. Length 227mm (STS200B970EH)
C Middle model, incl. DLC sensor input, Reference sensor input Table 8 Calibration Certificate
Table 3 Power supply (US deliveries 60 Hz only) F Traceable Calibration Certificate (standard)
115 115VAC H Accredited Calibration Certificate
230 230VAC
EA Full EURAMET Calibration Certificate
A European, 230V
B USA/Canada, 115V
EAS Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only)
C UK, 240V
D South Africa, 220V EASD Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate with DLC (B & C model
only)
E Italy, 220V
Table 9 Accessories
F Australia, 240V
G Denmark, 230V CT Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley
H Switzerland, 220V SR Support rod set

I Israel, 230V TR Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley & Support rod set
UNX 1 x Undrilled Insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for
code)
code)
code)


PTC-155, PTC-350 & PTC-660
DESCRIPTION
The PTC Series is rugged, light weight and offers a wide range of B
innovative features like an intuitive interface and easy-to-read color
VGA display. Along with a wide temperature range, PTC calibrators
have increased heating and cooling speeds, making them even
more versatile and cost effective. A variety of accessories and
insert kit options are also available for all PTC calibrators. The
newly designed STS-150 reference sensor that is angled at 90°
and customized so the top of the sensor is only slightly higher
than the top of the calibrator makes it easy for the PTC Series to
calibrate threaded sensors and sensors with connection heads.
FEATURES
• High accuracy: ±0.06°C using the external reference sensor
• Temperature range: -90 to 660°C
• Excellent stability: 0.01˚C
• Input for external reference sensor and sensor-under-test
• Unique intelligent sensors for plug & play connection
• Auto-stepping and thermo switch test functions
• Multi-hole insert kits
• Active dual-zone or innovative triple zone
• MVI stability circuitry
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX X XXX X XXX XX XXX XXX XX
Table 1 Base model number Table 4 Mains power cable

PTC155 PTC-155 Series, -25 to 155°C (-22 to 311°F) A European, 230V
PTC350 PTC-350 Series, 33 to 350°C (91 to 662°F) B USA/Canada, 115V
PTC660 PTC-660 Series, 33 to 660°C (91 to 1220°F) C UK, 240V
Table 2 Model version D South Africa, 220V
A Basic model, without input E Italy, 220V
B Full model, incl. Reference sensor input, Sensor-under-test input F Australia, 240V
C Middle model, incl. Reference sensor input G Denmark, 230V
Table 3 Power supply (US deliveries 60 Hz only) H Switzerland, 220V
115 115VAC I Israel, 230V
230 230VAC


Table 5 Insert type and size Table 7 STS Reference sensor (B & C models only, optional)
NON No insert selected (standard) R1 STS-102 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 30mm (STS102A030EH)
B UNX 1 x Undrilled Insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for R11 STS-150 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 180mm. For PTC-155 only
code) (STS150A915EH)
XXX 1 x Single hole insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for R12 STS-150 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 165mm. For PTC-350 only
MXX 1 x Multi hole insert (Please see Insert selection in spec sheet for R13 STS-150 Ref. sensor. Dia. 4mm. Length 203mm. For PTC-660 only
SIX Set of 3 Imperial multi hole inserts. Covering holes from 1/8” to 1/2” Table 8 Calibration Certificate
SMX Set of 4 Metric multi hole inserts. Covering holes from 3mm to 12mm F Traceable Calibration Certificate. (standard)
SIM Set of 9 Imperial inserts. Covering holes from 1/8” to 5/8” / for PTC- H Accredited Calibration Certificate
660 set of 8 inserts only up to 9/16”
EA Full EURAMET Accredited Calibration Certificate
Table 6 User Interface Functionality (optional)
U1 Workorders, Complete Sensor-under-Test types, ect.
EAS Full EURAMET Accredited System Calibration Certificate (B & C
model only)
Table 9 Accessories
CX Protective Carrying case
CT Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley
SR Support rod set
CR Protective Carrying case with Support rod set

Dry Block Temperature Calibrator

PTC-125
DESCRIPTION
The PTC-125 is the newest member of the well-known JOFRA PTC family that can B
meet any type of industrial temperature calibration need within the -90 to +660°C
(-130 to 1220°F) temperature range. Intuitive to use and easy to run, the PTC-125 is
equipped with a large informative, easy-to-read color display, which makes reading
error a thing of the past. The newly designed STS-150 reference sensor that is
angled at 90° and customized so the top of the sensor is only slightly higher than the
top of the calibrator makes it easy for the PTC Series to calibrate threaded sensors
and sensors with connection heads.
FEATURES
• Efficient free piston Stirling cooler (FPSC) technology
• Unique intelligent sensors for plug & play connection
• High Accuracy: ±0.07°C (±0.013°F) using the external reference sensor
• Temperature range: -90 to 125°C (-130 to 257°F)
• Excellent Stability: ±0.03˚C (±0.054°F)
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX X XXX X XXX XX XXX XXX XX
Table 1 Base model number Table 6 User Interface Functionality

PTC125 PTC-125 series, -90°C to 125°C (-130°F to 257°F) U1 Complete functionality package - workorders, Full Sensor-Under-Test
types, Engineering units (B model only)
Table 2 Model version
Table 7 External Reference sensor (B & C models only, optional)
B Full model, incl. Reference sensor input, Sensor-under-test input
Table 8 Calibration Certificate
C Middle model, incl. Reference sensor input
F Traceable Calibration Certificate. (standard)
H Accredited Calibration Certificate - ISO17025
115 115VAC
EA Full EURAMET Calibration Certificate - ISO17025
230 230VAC
HS Accredited System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only) -
A European, 230V
ISO17025
B USA/Canada, 115V
EAS Full EURAMET System Calibration Certificate (B & C model only) -
C UK, 240V ISO17025
D South Africa, 220V Table 9 Accessories
E Italy, 220V CT Solid Protective Carrying case with trolley * Carrying case included in
standard delivery
F Australia, 240V
G Denmark, 230V
H Switzerland, 220V
I Israel, 230V
UNX 1 x Undrilled Insert (Please see Spec Sheet)
XXX 1 x Single hole insert (Please see Spec Sheet)
MXX 1 x Multi hole insert (Please see Spec Sheet)


ITC-155, ITC-320 & ITC-650
DESCRIPTION
B The ITC Series combine the demand for small physical dimensions
with high accuracy and stability. These units contain a dual-zone
heating block and offer one key- one-function operation. The ITC-
320 and ITC-650 also offer a deep immersion depth and a wide
enough diameter to allow for simultaneous insertion of a reference
sensor and the sensor-under-test or for multiple sensor tests. RS232
communication and JOFRACAL calibration software are included in
the standard delivery. A variety of accessories and insert kit options are
also available for all ITC calibrators.
FEATURES
• ITC-155: -23 to 155°C / -9 to 311°F
• ITC-320: 33 to 320°C / 91 to 608°F
• ITC-650: 33 to 650°C / 91 to 1202°F
• 12-month accuracy to ±0.18°C
• Stability to ±0.01°C
• MVI stability circuitry
• Stability indicator
• Count down timer
• Central dual-zone
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXXX XXX X XXX X X

ITC155A ITC-155 series, -23 to 155°C (-9 to 311°F) XXX 1 x Insert for dry-block configuration (please see the Spec Sheet)
ITC320A ITC-320 series, 50 to 320°C (122 to 608°F) Table 5 Calibration certificate
ITC650A ITC-650 series, 50 to 650°C (122 to 1202°F) F Traceable calibration certificate (standard for Europe, Asia, Australia
and Africa)
G NIST traceable calibration certificate (standard for Western
115 115VAC
Hemisphere)
230 230VAC
Table 6 Options
A European, 230V
C Carrying case
B USA/CANADA, 115V
X No option used
C UK, 240V
D South Africa, 220V
E Italy, 220V
F Australia, 240V
G Denmark, 230V
H Switzerland, 220V
I Israel, 230V

Compact Dry Block Calibrators

CTC Series
DESCRIPTION
The CTC Series is the economical, timesaving and reliable solution for on-site B
true temperature calibration. The CTC Series consists of six different models
that differ in temperature ranges and two of the models have especially deep
immersion depths. This series offers interchangeable inserts and MVI stability
circuitry packed in rugged, slim-line aluminum outer casing with die-cast
top and bottom. RS232 serial communication and JOFRACAL calibration
software for easy documentation and automation come standard. A variety of
accessories and insert kit options are also available for all CTC calibrators.
FEATURES
• Stability to ±0.05°C
• Deep immersion depth versions
SPECIFICATIONS CTC-140 A CTC-320 A CTC-320 B CTC-650 A CTC-650 B CTC-1200 A
Temperature range @ -17 to 140°C (-1 to 33 to 320°C (91 to 33 to 320°C (91 to 33 to 650°C (91 to 33 to 650°C (91 to 300 to 1200°C (572 to
ambient 23°C / 73°F 284°F) 608°F) 608°F) 1202°F) 1202°F) 2200°F)
Heating time 15 min. 4 min. 10 min. 20 min. 39 min. 45 min.
Accuracy 0.4°C (0.7°F) 0.5°C (0.9°F) 0.5°C (0.9°F) 0.9°C (1.6°F) 0.6°C (1.1°F) 2.0°C (3.6°F)
Stability 0.05°C (0.09°F) 0.1°C (0.18°F) 0.1°C (0.18°F) 0.1°C (0.18°F) 0.05°C (0.09°F) 0.1°C (0.18°F)
Immersion depth 115 mm (4.5 in.) 110 mm (4.3 in.) 190 mm (7.5 in.) 110 mm (4.3 in.) 190 mm (7.5 in.) 110 mm (4.3 in.)
Insert diameter 19 mm (3/4 in.) 26 mm (1 in.) 26 mm (1 in). 26 mm (1 in.) 26 mm (1 in.) 27 mm (1 in.)
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXXX XXX X XXX X X

CTC140A CTC-140 A, -17 to 140°C / -1 to 284°F XXX 1 x Insert for dry-block configuration (please see spec sheet for code)
CTC320A CTC320A CTC-320 A, 33 to 320°C / 91 to 608°F Table 5 Calibration certificate
CTC650A CTC-650 A, 33 to 650°C / 91 to 1202°F F NLP Traceable temperature certificate (standard for Europe, Asia,
Australia and Africa)
CTC320B CTC-320 B, 33 to 320°C / 91 to 608°F
G NIST traceable temperature certificate (standard for Western
CTC650B CTC-650 B, 33 to 650°C / 91 to 1202°F
Hemisphere)
CTC1200A CTC-1200 A, 300 to 1205°C / 572 to 2200°F
H Accredited certificate with 5 std. points (except CTC-1200 A)
H Accredited certificate with 4 std. points (for CTC-1200 A)
115 115VAC
Table 6 Options
230 230VAC
C Carrying case
X No option used
A European, 230 V,
B USA/CANADA, 115 V
C UK, 240 V
D South Africa, 220 V
E Italy, 220 V
F Australia, 240 V
G Denmark, 230 V
H Switzerland, 220 V
I Israel, 230 V


ETC Series
DESCRIPTION
B The ETC Series is one of the fastest calibrators as it completes a
dual-point test in less than 10 minutes. The small handheld size
makes the ETC easy to fit into a toolbox. Heats up by up to 100°C/
212°F per minute and completes a full dual point test in less than
10 minutes, including stability time. The ETC-400R is designed
for calibration of infrared thermometers, where the 36 mm (1.4 in)
target provides the optimum size for reliable calibration. JOFRA IR-
LAB software enabling the user to calibrate IR thermometers with
a fixed emission factor setting comes standard on the ETC-400R.
A variety of accessories and insert kit options are also available for
all ETC calibrators.
FEATURES
• ETC-125A: -10 to 125°C / 14 to 257°F
• ETC-400A: 28 to 400°C / 82 to 752°F
• ETC-400R: 28 to 400°C / 82 to 752°F
• Automatic switch test
• Multi-information display
• One-key-one-function access to set the temperature and the auto-stepping function
• RS232 and JOFRACAL calibration software
• Multi-hole insertion tubes
• Reference sensor STS-103B available for ETC-400R.
• ETC-400R also with IR-LAB software and carrying case as standard
SPECIFICATIONS ETC-125A ETC -400A ETC-400R

Temperature range @ ambient -10 to 125°C (14°F to 257°F) 28 to 400°C (82°F to 752°F) 28 to 400°C (82°F to 752°F)
23°C / 73°F
Heating time ambient to 100°C / 212°F: 11 minutes ambient to maximum: 5 minutes ambient to maximum: 5 minutes
Stability ±0.05°C / ±0.09°F ±0.15°C / ±0.27°F ±0.3°C / ±0.54°F
Accuracy ±0.5°C / ±0.9°F ±0.5°C / ±0.9°F ±0.5°C / ±0.9°F
Immersion depth 110 mm / 4.3 in. 105 mm / 4.1 in. -
Holes for device-under-test - - 3 mm hole for external reference probe
ETC125A Type 01 12.5 - 8 - 6 - 4 mm - -
ETC125A Type 02 1/2 - 3/8 - 1/4 - 5/32 in. - -
ETC400A Type 11 - 1/16 - 1/8 - 5/32 - 1/4 - 3/16 in. -
ETC400A Type 12 - 1/16 - 3/16 - 3/8 - 1/4 - 1/8 in. -
ETC400A Type 21 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 4 - 6 mm -
ETC400R Type 51 36 mm (1.4 in) target


HOW TO ORDER

B
XXXXXXX XXX X XX X X
Table 1 Base model number Table 4 Holes for sensor-under-test

ETC125A ETC-125 A, -10 to 125°C / 14 to 257°F 01 ETC125 A - Metric (12.5 mm, 6 mm, 4 mm, 8 mm)
ETC400A ETC-400 A, 28 to 400°C / 82 to 752°F 02 ETC125 A - Imperial (1/2 in, 3/8 in, 1/4 in, 5/32 in)
ETC400R ETC-400 R, 28 to 400°C / 82 to 752°C 11 ETC400 A - Imperial (1/16 in, 1/8 in, 5/32 in, 3/16 in, 1/4 in)
Table 2 Power supply 12 ETC400 A - Imperial (1/16, 1/8 in, 3/16 in, 1/4 in, 3/8 in)
115 ETC-400 A/R only: 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz 21 ETC400 A - Metric (2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm)
230 ETC-400 A/R only: 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz 51 ETC400 R
MUL ETC-125 A only: Multi voltage 115 and 230 VAC Table 5 Calibration certificate
Table 3 Mains power cable type E NPL and NIST traceable calibration certificate (standard delivery)
A European, 230 V, H Accredited calibration certificate (on quotation basis)
B USA/Canada, 115 V Table 6 Options
C UK, 240 V C Carrying case (standard for ETC-400 R)
D South Africa, 220 V
E Italy, 220 V
F Australia, 240 V
G Denmark, 230 V
H Switzerland, 220 V
I Israel, 230 V

Calibration Equipment • Pressure/Vacuum Calibration
Jofra Calibrators & Digital Test Gauges
Pressure Calibrator
HPC 400
DESCRIPTION
B The HPC 400 series is a true calibrator, a field instrument designed for easy and
reliable check and calibration of pressure. Use the HPC 400 series in process
control applications such as verification or calibration of pressure gauges,
transducers, transmitters, pressure switches, and safety valves. The HPC can be
delivered as an individual calibrator or as a complete calibration system ready for
use in a carrying case, including pump, hose, connectors, battery, test leads, user
manual, and traceable calibration certificate.
FEATURES
• 3 pressure ranges from -14 to 300 psi.
• Transmitter loop measurement, 24 volt DC loop supply and HART resistor.
• Opening and closing pressures are automatically recorded and deadband is
calculated.
HOW TO ORDER

XXX XXX XXXX X X XXX
Table 1 Type Table 5 Accessories (Optional)

HPC Handheld Pressure Calibrator B Rechargeable battery pack
Table 2 Model C Soft case
400 HPC 400 Table 6 Pressure System
Table 3 Pressure Range IND Calibrator Only
002C -14 psi to 30 psi (-0.96 bar to 2 bar) gauge/compound AXX System A,T-960 pump - Ranges up to 30 psi
007C -14 psi to 100 psi (-0.96 bar to 7 bar) gauge/compound AHX System A,T-970 pump - Ranges up to 500 psi
020C -14 psi to 200 psi (-0.96 bar to 20 bar) gauge/compound BXX System B,T-965 pump - Ranges up to 30 psi
Table 4 Calibration certificate BHX System B,T-975 pump - Ranges up to 500 psi
G NIST traceable calibration certificate

Single Port Pressure Calibrator

HPC 500
DESCRIPTION
The HPC 500 is designed to meet high accuracy pressure calibration B
applications and facilitate tasks. Features such as user configurable
information display, 15 different pressure units, transmitter supply, mA
input, % error calculation, voltage measurement, serial communication, and
external pressure module capability are included. Accuracy is specified in %
of reading to ensure better accuracy and wider applicable pressure range.
The HPC is temperature compensated from 0 to 50ºC / 32 to 122ºF for onsite
operation.
FEATURES
• A single sensor high accuracy pressure calibrator.
• 16 pressure ranges ranging from 0.35 psi to 10,000 psi F.S.
• Absolute, differential and gauge pressure modules.
• Combine with external pressure modules (APM Mk. II) and extend accuracy
up to 0.01% F.S.
• Available as independent calibrator or in one of 6 ready for test systems.
HOW TO ORDER

XXX XXX XXXXX X X XXX
Table 1 Type Type 4 Calibration certificate

HPC Handheld Pressure Calibrator G NIST traceable calibration certificate
Type 2 Model Type 5 Accessories (Optional)
500 HPC 500 B Rechargeable battery pack
Table 3 Pressure Range C Soft case
25MD ±.35 psi (±25 mbar) differential I Interface Kit LEMO to RS232
70MD ±1 psi (±70 mbar) differential T Temperature sensor Pt100
350MD ±5 psi (±350 mbar) differential Table 6 Pressure System
001A 0.35 to 16 psi (0.025 to 1.1 bar) absolute IND Calibrator Only
001C -14 to 15 psi (-0.96 to 1 bar) gauge/compound AXX System A,T-960 pump - Ranges up to 30 psi
002A 0.35 to 30 psi (0.025 to 2 bar) absolute AHX System A,T-970 pump - Ranges up to 500 psi
002C -14 to 30 psi (-0.96 to 2 bar) gauge/compound BXX System B,T-965 pump - Ranges up to 30 psi
007A 1 to 100 psi (0.070 to 7 bar) absolute BHX System B,T-975 pump - Ranges up to 500 psi
007C -12 to 100 psi (-0.82 to 7 bar) gauge/compound CXX System C,T-620 pump - Ranges up to 2,900 psi Oil
020A 1 to 290 psi (0.070 to 20 bar) absolute CHX System C,T-620H pump - Ranges up to 5,000 psi Oil
020C -12 to 290 psi (-0.82 to 20 bar) gauge/compound DOX System D, 65-P016 pump - Ranges up to 5,000 psi Oil
035C -12 to 500 psi (-0.82 to 35 bar) gauge/compound DWX System D, 65-P017 pump - Ranges up to 5,000 psi Water
070G 0 to 1000 psi (70 bar) gauge EXX System E, 65-P014 pump- Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil
200G 0 to 1000 psi (200 bar) gauge FWB System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Water/Buna-N
350G 0 to 5000 psi (350 bar) gauge FWV System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Water/Viton
700G 0 to 10,000 psi (700 bar) gauge FWE System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Water/EPT
FOB System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil
FOV System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil/Viton
FOE System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil/EPT

Dual Port Pressure Calibrator

HPC 502
DESCRIPTION
B The HPC 502 may be used in broad range of applications from simple tool
type jobs to complex calibration jobs in custody transfer systems. Features
such as user configurable information display, 15 different pressure units,
transmitter supply, mA input, % error calculation, voltage measurement,
serial communication, and external pressure module capability are
included. Accuracy is specified in % of reading to better accuracy and
wider applicable pressure range. The HPC is temperature compensated
from 0 to 50ºC / 32 to 122ºF for onsite operation.
FEATURES
• Dual port/dual range calibrator eliminates the need for 2 separate
calibrators.
• 16 pressure ranges, ranging from 0.35 psi to 10,000 psi F.S.
• Absolute, gauge & gauge/compound pressure modules.
• Combine with external pressure modules (APM Mk. II) and extend
accuracy up to 0.01% F.S.
• Available as independent calibrator or in one of 6 ready for test systems.
HOW TO ORDER

XXX XXX XXXX XXXX X XXX XXX
Table 1 Type Table 4 Port 2 Pressure Range (Port 2 - Highest Pressure)

HPC Handheld Pressure Calibrator 001A 0.35 to 16 psi (0.025 to 1.1 bar) absolute
Table 2 Model 001C -14 to 15 psi (-0.96 to 1 bar) gauge/compound
502 HPC 502 002A 0.35 to 30 psi (0.025 to 2 bar) absolute
Table 3 Port 1 Pressure Range (Port 1 - Lowest Pressure) 002C -14 to 30 psi (-0.96 to 2 bar) gauge/compound
001A 0.35 to 16 psi (0.025 to 1.1 bar) absolute 007A 1 to 100 psi (0.070 to 7 bar) absolute
001C -14 to 15 psi (-0.96 to 1 bar) gauge/compound 007C -12 to 100 psi (-0.82 to 7 bar) gauge/compound
002A 0.35 to 30 psi (0.025 to 2 bar) absolute 020A 1 to 290 psi (0.070 to 20 bar) absolute
007A 1 to 100 psi (0.070 to 7 bar) absolute 035C -12 to 500 psi (-0.82 to 35 bar) gauge/compound
007C -12 to 100 psi (-0.82 to 7 bar) gauge/compound 070G 0 to 1000 psi (70 bar) gauge
020A 1 to 290 psi (0.070 to 20 bar) absolute 200G 0 to 1000 psi (200 bar) gauge
035C -12 to 500 psi (-0.82 to 35 bar) gauge/compound 700G 0 to 10,000 psi (700 bar) gauge
070G 0 to 1000 psi (70 bar) gauge
700G 0 to 10,000 psi (700 bar) gauge

Single Port Pressure Calibrator for Hazardous

Locations
HPC 550Ex B
DESCRIPTION
The HPC 550Ex, a single sensor calibrator, offers features such as user
configurable information display, 15 different pressure units, transmitter
supply, mA input, % error calculation, voltage measurement, serial
communication, and external pressure module capability. The accuracy
of the HPC 550Ex calibrators is specified in % of reading to ensure an
even better accuracy and wider applicable pressure range. The HPC is
temperature compensated from 0 to 45ºC/32 to 113ºF for onsite operation.
FEATURES
• Pressure ranges from 0.35 to 10,000 psi
• Single sensor calibrator intended for use in explosively hazardous areas.
• Designed to prevent ignition by electrical, sparking or heating effects.
• ATEX Safety Certification: II 2 G Ex ia IIB T3 Gb (Ta=-10°C to + 45°C) &
KEMA 10 ATEX 1068 X
• IECEx Safety Certification: Ex ia IIB T3 Gb (Ta=-10°C to +45°C) & IECEx
CSA 10.0013
APPLICATIONS
• Automotive refueling stations or petrol stations
• Oil refineries, rigs and processing plants
• Chemical processing plants
• Printing industries, paper and textiles
• Hospital operating theatres
• Aircraft refueling and hangars
• Surface coating industries
• Sewerage treatment plants
• Gas pipelines and distribution centers
• Woodworking areas
• Sugar refineries

Single Port Pressure Calibrator for Hazardous

Locations - Continued
B HOW TO ORDER

XXX XXX XXXXX X X XXX
Table 1 Type Table 4 Calibration certificate

Table 2 Model Table 5 Accessories (Optional)
550 HPC 550Ex C Soft case (Not to be used in hazardous areas)
Table 3 Pressure Range T Temperature sensor Pt100
25MD ±.35 psi (±25 mbar) differential Table 6 Pressure system
70MD ±1 psi (±70 mbar) differential IND Calibrator only
350MD ±5 psi (±350 mbar) differential
001A 0.35 to 16 psi (0.025 to 1.1 bar) absolute
001C -14 to 15 psi (-0.96 to 1 bar) gauge/compound
002A 0.35 to 30 psi (0.025 to 2 bar) absolute
007A 1 to 100 psi (0.070 to 7 bar) absolute
700G 0 to 10,000 psi (700 bar) gauge

Dual Port Pressure Calibrator for Hazardous

Locations
HPC 552Ex B
DESCRIPTION
HPC 552Ex, a dual sensor calibrator, offers features such as user
configurable information display, 15 different pressure units, transmitter
supply, mA input, % error calculation, voltage measurement, serial
communication, and external pressure module capability. The accuracy
of the HPC 552Ex calibrators is specified in % of reading to ensure an
even better accuracy and wider applicable pressure range. The HPC
is temperature compensated from 0 to 45ºC/32 to 113ºF for on-site
operation. It is a truly superior pressure calibrator for laboratory and
field use, bringing laboratory accuracy into the field.
FEATURES
• Pressure ranges from 0.35 to 10,000 psi.
• Dual sensor calibrator; a cost effective alternative to owning two
calibrators.
• Intrinsically safe and intended for use in explosively hazardous areas.
• Designed to prevent ignition by electrical, sparking or heating effects.
• ATEX Safety Certification: II 2 G Ex ia IIB T3 Gb (Ta=-10°C to + 45°C)
& KEMA 10 ATEX 1068 X
• IECEx Safety Certification: Ex ia IIB T3 Gb (Ta=-10°C to +45°C) &
IECEx CSA 10.0013
APPLICATIONS
• Automotive refueling stations or petrol stations
• Oil refineries, rigs and processing plants
• Chemical processing plants
• Printing industries, paper and textiles
• Hospital operating theatres
• Aircraft refueling and hangars
• Surface coating industries
• Sewerage treatment plants
• Gas pipelines and distribution centers
• Woodworking areas
• Sugar refineries

Dual Port Pressure Calibrator for Hazardous

Locations - Continued
B
HOW TO ORDER
XXX XXX XXXX XXXX X XXX
Table 1 Type Table 4 Port 2 Pressure Range (Port 2 - Highest Pressure)

HPC Handheld Pressure Calibrator 001A 0.35 to 16 psi (0.025 to 1.1 bar) absolute
Table 2 Model 001C -14 to 15 psi (-0.96 to 1 bar) gauge/compound
552 HPC 552Ex 002A 0.35 to 30 psi (0.025 to 2 bar) absolute
Table 3 Port 1 Pressure Range (Port 1 - Lowest Pressure) 002C -14 to 30 psi (-0.96 to 2 bar) gauge/compound
001A 0.35 to 16 psi (0.025 to 1.1 bar) absolute 007A 1 to 100 psi (0.070 to 7 bar) absolute
002A 0.35 to 30 psi (0.025 to 2 bar) absolute 020A 1 to 290 psi (0.070 to 20 bar) absolute
007A 1 to 100 psi (0.070 to 7 bar) absolute 035C -12 to 500 psi (-0.82 to 35 bar) gauge/compound
020A 1 to 290 psi (0.070 to 20 bar) absolute 200G 0 to 1000 psi (200 bar) gauge
035C -12 to 500 psi (-0.82 to 35 bar) gauge/compound 700G 0 to 10,000 psi (700 bar) gauge
070G 0 to 1000 psi (70 bar) gauge Table 5 Accessories (Optional)
200G 0 to 1000 psi (200 bar) gauge C Soft case (Not to be used in hazardous areas)
350G 0 to 5000 psi (350 bar) gauge T Temperature sensor Pt100
700G 0 to 10,000 psi (700 bar) gauge Table 6 Pressure system
IND Calibrator only

Pressure Calibrator with Built-in Pump

HPC 600
DESCRIPTION
The HPC 600 is a pressure indicator, a pressure calibrator, a B
complete mA loop calibrator, including 24 volt supply, a voltmeter,
a thermometer and a pressure/vacuum generator. All of this is
contained in rugged housing with an easy intuitive operating system.
The HPC 600 is delivered as a ready-to-test system, complete with
hose, fittings, and padded soft case, equipped to meet any need for
pressure calibration. International traceable calibration certificate,
including vacuum and electrical parameters are a part of the
standard delivery.
FEATURES
• Built-in automatic pressure system, based on an electrical pressure
and vacuum pump.
• A complete mA loop calibrator, measure, source, sing and 24 volt
loop supply.
• Combine with external pressure modules (APM Mk. II) and extend
accuracy up to 0.01% F.S.
• Temperature compensated from -10 to 50°C/14 to 122°F for onsite
operation
• Pressure venier adjuster (volume adjuster) to fine tune pressure or
vacuum output
HOW TO ORDER

XXX XXX XXXX X X
Table 1 Type Table 4 Calibration certificate

Table 2 Model Table 5 Accessories (Optional)
600 HPC 600 B Rechargeable battery pack
Table 3 Pressure Range I Interface kit LEMO to RS232
002A 3 to 30 psi (0.2 to 2 bar) absolute T Temperature sensor Pt100
Accessories
Item Product Name Description
Recommended if particles or liquids are expected in the system to be calibrated. Built in O-rings ensure
127887 Cleaning filter
a tight system and the filter’s see-through design, makes it easy to tell when cleaning is needed.

Pressure Indicator
IPI Mk. II
DESCRIPTION
B The IPI Mk. II indicator combines the ease of an analog gauge with the
accuracy and easy to read display of a digital calibrator. The IPI offers a
long battery life, high accuracy and serial communication. The accuracy
rivals a pressure calibrator and the unit is temperature compensated for
shop or machine room applications. IPI Mk. II is ATEX and CSA certified for
use in potentially explosive environments such as oil refineries, chemical
plants and offshore platforms, where flammable gases are used or stored.
FEATURES
• Accuracy up to ±0.05% F.S.
• Available as indicator or as part of a test ready system.
• Pressure range vacuum to 10,000 psi.
• 17 pressure units and one user specified.
• Minimum and maximum readings.
• RS232 interface and JOFRACAL software.
• ATEX and CSA certified.
• Available as an indicator or in one of six test-ready systems.
• Combine with IPILOG Data Logging Software (Order Number 128494).
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X XXXX X X XXX
Table 1 Type Table 5 Accessories (Optional)

IPI Pressure Indicator B Battery pack, 3 x rechargeable AA batteries and multi voltage
charger
Table 2 Model
Table 6 Pressure System
Mk. II IPI Mk. II
IND Calibrator Only
Table 3 Pressure Range
AXX System A,T-960 pump - Ranges up to 30 psi
AHX System A,T-970 pump - Ranges up to 500 psi
030C Vacuum to 30 psi (2 bar)
BXX System B,T-965 pump - Ranges up to 30 psi
100A 0 to 100 psi (7 bar) absolute
BHX System B,T-975 pump - Ranges up to 500 psi
100C Vacuum to 100 psi (7 bar) compound
CXX System C,T-620 pump - Ranges up to 2,900 psi Oil
CHX System C,T-620H pump - Ranges up to 5,000 psi Oil
DOX System D, 65-P016 pump - Ranges up to 5,000 psi Oil
01KG 0 to 1000 psi (0 to 70 bar) gauge
DWX System D, 65-P017 pump - Ranges up to 5,000 psi Water
EXX System E, 65-P014 pump- Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil
FWB System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Water/Buna-N
FWV System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Water/Viton
FWE System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Water/EPT
Table 4 Calibration certificate
FOB System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil
G NIST traceable calibration certificate
FOV System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil/Viton
FOE System F, T-1 pump - Ranges up to 10,000 psi Oil/EPT

Crystal Engineering
Digital Pressure Gauge

XP2i
DESCRIPTION
The XP2i is an ultra-rugged, intrinsically safe, digital test gauge with 0.1% B
reading accuracy. The XP2i can typically replace several gauges and is fully
temperature compensated so there is no change in accuracy throughout
the entire operating temperature range. The sensor has an all welded 316
stainless steel sensor, circuitry is mounded in shock absorbing elastomer and
uses 3 AA batteries.
FEATURES
• Accuracy not effected from 14°F to 122°F
• Up to 1,500 hours of continuous use
• CSA, IECEx and ATEX certified intrinsically safe and certified for marine use
• Records 32,000 data points with Datalogger XP upgrade
• Continuous recording for 1 year in Ultra-Low power mode
• Easy to use programmable interface, define custom pressure units
• Disable, enable or modify features with free ConfigXP software
• LCD screen with UV Resistant Polyester Keypads and Labels
• Captures open and reseat values for Pressure Safety Valve (PSV) testing
• May be ordered with or without pump system, connection fittings and
carrying case
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy ± (0.1% of reading) from 20% – 100% of Full Scale
± (0.02% of Full Scale) from 0 – 20% of Full Scale
Vacuum (300 PSI ranges and lower) ± (0.25% of Full Scale) where FS = -14.5 PSI
Temperature
Operating & Compensated -10° C to 50° C (14° F to 122° F)
Storage -40° C to 75° C (-40° F to 167° F)
Display Five Full (seven segment) digits, 0.65" high characters, backlit Update - Three readings per second
Dual Display 0.55" high characters
Pressure Connection CPF Female with a ¼" Male NPT Adapter
Size 5.8 x 4.4 x 1.3"
Power Three size AA batteries with typical 1,500 hours life Low battery indicator, Auto shut-off after 20 minutes to
save battery life

Digital Pressure Gauge - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
B Table 1
XXXXXX
Table 2
XXXX
Table 3
XXXX
Table 4
XXXX
Table 5
XXXX
Table 6
XXX
Table 1 P/N Table 5 Connection Location

Range (psi) Over Presure (omit) Bottom Connection
15PSI 15 6.5 x -RP Back Connection
30PSI 30 3.0 x -F4 Panel Mount Connection
100PSI 100 2.0 x Table 6 Data-Logging
300PSI 300 2.0 x -DL Yes, Data-Logging
500PSI 500 2.0 x
1KPSI 1000 2.0 x
2KPSI 2000 2.0 x
3KPSI 3000 1.5 x
5KPSI 5000 1.5 x
10KPSI 10000 1.5 x
15KPSI 15000 1.3 x
Table 2 Model
XP2i XP2I
Table 3 Dual Display
(omit) No Dual Display
-DD Yes, Dual Display
Table 4 Adapter Type
(omit) NPT
-BSP G¼B
-M20 M20x1.5
*Absolute pressure XP2i 's are designated by a " B " infront of " XP2i " in the part
number. an absolute pressure version is only available on XP2i 's and XP2i - DDS
with ranges of 2000 psi and higher.
The 15KPSI gauge is available only with the CPF fitting

Digital Differential Pressure Gauge

XP2i-DP
DESCRIPTION
The XP2i-DP is an ultra-rugged, intrinsically safe, digital test gauge with B
0.1% reading accuracy wet/wet differential transducer. The XP2i-DP may
be used to determine accurate differential pressure measurements across a
range of applications or installations such as filters, orifice plates, valves, etc.
The unique design of the integrated differential pressure sensor allows for
long term vacuum use without fear of permanent damage to the sensing chip
or package. The gauge has an wetted materials are all welded 300 series
stainless steel, circuitry is mounded in shock absorbing elastomer and uses
3 AA batteries.
FEATURES
• High accuracy, long term vacuum measurement
• 0.1% of reading wet/wet differential transducer
• Accuracy not effected from 14°F to 122°F
• CSA, IECEx and ATEX certified intrinsically safe and certified for marine
use
• Easy to use programmable interface, define custom pressure units
• LCD screen with UV Resistant polyester keypads and labels
• Disable, enable or modify features with free ConfigXP software
• Up to 1500 hours of continuous use; Continuous recording for 1 year in
Ultra-Low power mode
• Records 32,000 data points with Datalogger XP upgrade
• Panel mount flange option
SPECIFICATIONS
Differential Pressure Accuracy ± (0.1% of reading) from 20% – 100% of Full Scale + Static Line Effect*
± (0.02% of Full Scale) from 0 – 20% of Full Scale + Static Line Effect*
Temperature
Operating & Compensated -10° C to 50° C (14° F to 122° F)
Storage -40° C to 75° C (-40° F to 167° F)
Display Five Full (seven segment) digits, 0.65" high characters, backlit Update - 3 readings per second
Pressure Connection ⅛” Female NPT
Size 5.8 x 4.4 x 1.3"
Power Three size AA batteries with typical 1,500 hours life Low battery indicator, Auto shut-off after 20
minutes to save battery life
*Static Line Effect: 0.0003 psi/psi lowest static pressure

Digital Differential Pressure Gauge - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
B Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5
XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
Table 1 P/N - Over Pressure (+/-Ports) - Display Resolution

15PSI 6.5x/3.0x - 0.001 psi
100PSI 2.0x/2.0x - 0.01 psi
Table 2 Model
XP2i-DP XP2I - DP
Table 3 Connection Location
(omit) Bottom Connection ("omit" for -F4 Panel mount)
-RP Rear Port (Back) Connection
Table 4 Panel Mount
(omit) No Panel Mount
-F4 Yes, Panel Mount (Includes -RP option)
Table 5 Data-logging
(omit) No, Data-logging
-DL Yes, Data-logging
1.Standard Model has bottom port connection, without panel mount or data logging
capabilities.
2.The Panel Mount option (-F4) includes the rear pressure fitting option (-RP) so
there is no need to combine the -F4 and -RP options.
3.Panel mounting (-F4) includes a 4.5 inch gauge panel mount kit with near
pressure port. To replace a 6 inch, a 8.5 panel mount gauge and part number 2955
(6") or 2956 (8") for proper flange adapter.

Digital Test Gauge

M1
DESCRIPTION
The M1 digital pressure gauge maintains 0.2% of reading accuracy from 14°F B
to 122°F (-10°C to 50°C.) Accuracy is not affected by dropping, over-pressure,
vibration, temperature, or rapid pressure change. Available as a 30 psi digital
pressure manometer. One wide range M1 Digital Pressure Gauge replaces up
to five 0.25% mechanical gauges with 0.2% of reading accuracy.
FEATURES
• Up to 30,000 hours of service, runs on just two AA alkaline batteries
• Fully temperature compensated, no change in accuracy from 14°F to 122°F
• Bright backlit display, easy to read extra-large numbers and simple to use
• Very rugged with protective thermoplastic boot. Housing and boot are compatible
with many industrial fluids.
• Shifts every day wear to replaceable CPF adapter
• May be ordered with or without pump system, connection fittings and carrying case
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy ± (0.2% of reading) from 20% - 100% of Full Scale
± (0.04% of Full Scale) from 0% to 20% of Full Scale
(300 PSI ranges and lower) ± (0.25% of Full Scale) where FS = -14.5 PSI
Temperature
Operating & Compensated -10° C (14° F) to 50° C (122° F)
Storage -40° C (-40° F) to 75° C (167° F)
Display Five digit display (resolution depends on range and unit of measurement), 0.66” high characters, backlit Update – four readings per
second
Pressure Connection CPF Female with a ¼" Male NPT or G ¼ B Adapter
Size 4.4 x 4.4 x 1.75 "
Power Two size AA batteries with typical 900 hours at four readings/second
HOW TO ORDER

XX XXXXXX XXXX
Table 1 Model Table 3 Adapter Type

M1 M1 -(omit) NPT
Table 2 P/N -BSP G¼B
Range (psi) Over Pressure -M20 M20x1.5
30PSI 30 3.0 x Standard model includes ¼" NPT male pressure connection
100PSI 100 2.0 x
300PSI 300 2.0 x
1KPSI 1000 2.0 x
2KPSI 3000 1.5 x
10KPSI 10000 1.5 x

Ametek Test & Calibration Instruments
Hand Pumps, Deadweight Testers & Pressure Systems
Pneumatic Pressure Pumps

T-960/970
DESCRIPTION
The T-960 (system AXX) and T-970 (system AHX) pneumatic pressure
B pumps feature an extended range vernier adjustment for precisely controlling
pump pressure and comfortable pistol grip handle. The T-960 has a pressure
range of 0 to 30 psi and the T-970 has a pressure range of 0 to 580 psi.
Each pump can be ordered alone or as a complete pressure system ready
to use in a carrying case, including pump, hose, set of fittings, batteries, test
leads, user manual, traceable calibration certificate, and Jofra calibrator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range, T-960 0 to 2 bar / 0 to 30 psi
Pressure range, T-970 0 to 40 bar / 0 to 580 psi
Type Pheumatic
Test medium Air
Operation Scissor
“O”-rings Buna-N
Wetted parts Aluminium, brass, stainless,steel, nylon, Nylatron GS
Connection to test object Hose 0.6 m / 24 in with 1/4” BSP and NPT female terminations
Size 21.6 x 12.1 x 6.2 cm / 8.5 x 4.8 x 2.4 in
Weight 1.4 kg / 3.0 lb

Pneumatic Pressure/Vacuum Hand Pumps

T-965/975
DESCRIPTION
The T-965 (system BXX) and T-975 (system BHX) pneumatic pressure pumps
feature both vacuum and pressure generation. A quick switch (valve) makes it
B
easy to switch from vacuum to pressure measurements. A built-in release valve,
vernier valve for fine adjustment and dual pressure output enable safe and simple
operation. The unit offers both metric and imperial threads on the reference
connection and the hose. Each pump can be ordered alone or as part of a
pressure system complete with compatible calibrator, fittings, hose and carrying
case.
SPECIFICATIONS
Press. range, T-965 -0.65 bar (-9.4 psi) to 2 bar (30 psi)
Press. range, T-975 -0.91 bar (-13 psi) to 40 bar (580 psi)
Type Pneumatic
Test medium Air
Operation Jack pump
“O”-rings Buna-N (standard) or EPT / Viton (optional)
Wetted parts Aluminum, brass, stainless steel, nylon, Nylatron GS
Connection to test object Hose 0.6 m/24 in with 1/4” BSP and NPT female terminations
Size 21.6x12.1x6.2 cm / 8.5x4.8x2.4 in
Total system weight 5.5 kg / 12.2 lb
Hydraulic Hand Pumps

T-620/620H
DESCRIPTION
The T-620 (system CXX) and T-620H (system CHX) pressure pumps are small,
lightweight and portable. The pump has a build in transparent reservoir for easy
view of the test fluid, a vent valve for quick, positive shut-off and pressure release
as well as a vernier valve for fine pressure adjustments. The pump has dual
pressure output – one for the test object and one for the calibrator. Each pump
can be ordered alone or as a complete pressure system ready to use in a carrying
case, including pump, hose, set of fittings, batteries, test leads, user manual,
traceable calibration certificate, and Jofra calibrator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range, T-620 0 to 200 bar / 3,000 psi
Pressure range, T-620H 0 to 350 bar / 5,000 psi
Type Hydraulic
Test medium Oil
Reservoir capacity 200 ml / 0.42 pint
Operation Pistol-grip
Wetted parts Aluminum, brass, stainless steel, Lexan
Connection to test object Hose 0.6 m / 24 in with 1/4” BSP and NPT female terminations
Size 21.6 x 12.1 x 6.2 cm / 8.5 x 4.8 x 2.4 in

Hydraulic Screw Pumps

P016/P017
DESCRIPTION
B The 65-P016 (system DOX) and 65-P017 (system DWX) screw pumps are
designed for easy and controlled generation of high pressure. The screw pump
has a 4-connection manifold. Fine adjustment vernier valve, liquid reservoir, and
fittings are optional. The screw pump may be delivered for hydraulic oil or water.
Each pump can be ordered alone or as a complete pressure system ready to
use in a carrying case, including pump, hose, set of fittings, batteries, test leads,
user manual, traceable calibration certificate, and Jofra calibrator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range 350 bar / 0 to 5,000 psi
Type Hydraulic
Test media Hydraulic oil, water
Reservoir capability 250 ml / 0.53 pint
Operation Screw pump
Wetted parts Aluminum, brass, stainless steel
Connections to test objects 4 x 1/4” BSP female
Size 36.6 x 19.5 x 10.5 cm / 14.4 x 7.7 x 4.1 in
High Pressure, Hydraulic Oil Pump

P014
DESCRIPTION
Model 65-P014 (system EXX) hydraulic pump is designed for high pressure oil
applications. The small size and light weight make it a sensible, rugged, and
portable solution. The pump has a 4 pressure output manifold similar to the
Jofra screw pump. Fine adjustment vernier valve and fittings are optional. The
pump can be ordered alone or as a complete pressure system ready to use in
a carrying case, including pump, hose, set of fittings, batteries, test leads, user
manual, traceable calibration certificate, and Jofra calibrator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range 0 to 700 bar / 10,000 psi
Type Hydraulic
Test media Oil
Reservoir capability 500 ml / 1 pint
Operation Jack pump
Wetted parts Aluminum, brass, stainless steel
Connections to test objects 4 x 1/4” BSP female
Size 36.5 x 20.0 x 14.2 cm / 14.4 x 7.9 x 5,6 in
Weight 5.3 kg / 11.6 lbs

Hydraulic Oil/Water Pumps

Type T
DESCRIPTION
The Type T Hydraulic Pressure Pump may be ordered with either oil B
or a water/alcohol mixture as the pressure medium. There are three
available seal packages for the system: Buna-N, Viton, and EPT.
Customer must verify compatibility of seals and pump materials with
pressure medium. The Type T pump features a dual pressure output
manifold, fine adjustment vernier valve, relief valve and dual volume
control for rapid pressure increase at lower pressures and easier
pumping at higher pressures.
1) Customer must verify compatibility of seals and pump materials
with pressure medium.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range 0 to 1,000 bar / 14,500 psi
Type Hydraulic
Test media Hydraulic oil, water
Reservoir capacity 1.23 l / 75 in3
Operation Jack pump
“O”-rings Buna-N (standard) or EPT / Viton (optional)
Wetted part Stainless steel, Monel
Connections to test objects 1/4” and 1/2” BSP
terminations; 1/4” and 1/2” PT female terminations
Size 79.4 x 22.9 x 50.8 cm / 31.3 x 9 x 20 in
Weight 9.1 kg / 20 lbs

Crystal Engineering
Pressure Comparator
GaugeCalHP
DESCRIPTION
B The GaugeCalHP is a portable, self-contained, hydraulic pressure generator
for calibrating pressure gauges, transmitters, sensors, and safety valves rated
up to 15,000 psi. It is much faster than deadweight testers and most automated
pressure controllers. Gauges can be calibrated in less than two minutes with
5 to 10 test points, increasing and decreasing pressure. The comparator can
be filled with water or oil allowing for clean and safe calibration of most gauge
types. Use without fluid to generate up to 400 inches H2O (995 mbar) to within
0.01 inches (0.025 mbar).
FEATURES
• Pressure to 15,000 psi
• Vacuum to -12.5 psi
• Easily test large size gauges with the unique pivoting manifold
• Quickly bleed air and capture fluid with the no mess drip tray
• Gauge-Safe integral venting system prevents damage to mechanical gauges
• Ideal for calibrating low cost gauges that are often overlooked for ISO9000
compliance
• Continuous vacuum to pressure generation is great for compound range
devices
• Comes complete with two CPF male fittings (installed) and one ¼” FNPT
adapter
• May be ordered as part of a pump system
SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Maximum Hydraulic Pressure: 15 000 psi / 1000 bar / 100 MPa
Vacuum: -12.5 psi / -0.86 bar / -86.2 kPa
Maximum Pneumatic Pressure: 400 inH2O / 995 mbar / 29 inHg
Sensitivity (fine adjust): 0.01 inH2O / 0.025 mbar
Burst Pressure: > 25 000 psi / 1700 bar / 170MPa
Materials
Wetted Materials: Stainless Steel plus Seals and Acrylic Reservoir
Enclosure: A nodized Aluminum
Seals: Buna N (Nitrile), Viton, and Urethane
Test Media: Water, Oil, or Air
General
Dimensions (LxWxH): 20.5" X 8.3" X 55.5"
Dimensions (with handles): 20.5" X 8.3" X 11"
Weight: 20 lbs
Piston Stroke Volume: 0.8 in³
Reservoir Volume: 10.8 in³
Connections
CPF Male (installed): MA WP 15 000 psi / 1000 bar / 100MPa
MPF15K-1/4FPT: MA WP 15 000 psi / 1000 bar / 100MPa

Pressure Gauge Calibration System

CrystalCalHP
DESCRIPTION
This portable gauge and transmitter calibration system is 7 to 10 times faster than B
a dead weight tester. It allows you to do a 10 point up and down calibration in less
than 3 minutes including printing out a calibration certificate.
FEATURES
• Gauge / chart recorder / transmitter calibration system
• Reduces transcription / calculation errors
• 0.1% of reading accuracy up to 15,000 psi when using the XP2i Digital Test
Gauge as the reference or 0.05% of reading accuracy up to 5,000 psi when using
the 30 Series as the reference
• Easy to use and install, wizards guide you through setup
• Includes one GaugeCalHP pressure comparator, one copy of FastCalXP
calibration software with switchfoot, three XP2i gauges with 0.1% of reading
accuracy, one weatherproof rolling carrying case that doubles as a portable
bench, and all the CPF fitting adapters you need.

Mansfield & Green
Pneumatic Deadweight Tester

Model PK II
DESCRIPTION
B The PK II tester is a floating ball type, pneumatic deadweight
tester. This model is engineered to offer user-friendly features, safe
operation, and an optimal performance in the field or in the lab. The
PK II is a primary standard that produces a pressure by applying
force (weight set) over area (the ceramic ball and nozzle). It is self-
regulating with accuracy independent of the operator. The unit may
be mounted on an optional tripod for more convenient setup. The
tester may be operated with the cover opened or closed.
FEATURES
• Available in psi, g/cm², mbar, bar, kPa, inH2O, cmH2O
• Pressure range from 0.145 to 30 psi
• Standard or local gravity calibration
• Free floating ball and interchangeable weights
• Built in flow regulator provides easy up and down scale calibration
• Designed for lab and field use with closed cover operation
• Overhung weight carriers reduce side thrust and friction lengthening ball/nozzle and carrier life and
improve accuracy
• Multi-position ball valves for inlet and outlet valve connections ensure fast, efficient and trouble
free operation
• Small incremental weight sets available for fractional output pressures for psi and inH2O testers
SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Pneumatic, ball type
Pressure range: 200 kPa / 30 psi (model dependent)
Accuracy (12 months): to ±0.015% rdg*
Repeatability: .±0.005% rdg
Temperatue coefficient: ±0.00167% of rdg/°C (@23°C)
Minimum measurements: 1 psi, 10 g/cm², 10 mbar, 1 kPa, 4 inH2O, 10 cmH2O, 10 mmHg
Increments (small): Small incremental weight sets available
Gravity: 9.80665 m/s² (international standard) or Local gravity (specify when ordering)
Water column temp ref: 20°C (ISA) (standard) or 60°F (AGA) (optional)
Weight sets: Single (model dependent) Extra weight sets may be ordered
Pressure source: Nitrogen or instrument/shop air (ISA quality standard 7.3)
Supply pressure (max): 6.9 bar / 100 psi
Supply pressure (min): 2.1 bar / 30 psi or 150% of desired output pressure
Flow rate: 28 slh at 1 kPa/1 scfh at 0,15 psi output
310 slh at 200 kPa/1 scfh at 20 psi output
Test connections: ¼” NPT
Weight material: Stainless steel and aluminum (small incremental weights)
Ball material: Ceramic
Engineering units: psi, g/cm², mbar, bar, kPa, inH2O, cmH2O, mmHg

Pneumatic Deadweight Tester - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
B
Table 1 Table 2
XXXXXXXXX XXXX
Table 1
Model Certified Range Increment W/C and Ball Output
PK2-20-SS 1 to 20 psi 1 psi 1 psi
PK2-30-SS 1 to 30 psi 1 psi 1 psi
PK2-2000GM-SS 25 to 2,000 g/cm² 25 g/cm² 25 g/cm²
PK2-2010GMSS 10 to 2,000 g/cm² 5 g/cm² 10 and 25 g/cm²
PK2-700MB-SS 10 to 700 mbar 20 mbar 20 mbar
PK2-2B-SS 0.02 to 2 bar 0.02 bar 0.02 bar
PK2-2B.01-SS 0.01 to 2 bar 0.005 bar 0.01 and 0.02 bar
PK2-200N-SS 2 to 200 kPa 2 kPa 2 kPa
PK2-201N-SS 1 to 200 kPa 0.5 kPa 1 and 2 kPa
PK2-250WC-SS 10 to 250 inH2O 10 inH2O 10 inH2
PK2-304WC-SS 4 to 304 inH2O 1 inH2O 4 inH2O
PK2-654WC-SS 4 to 654 inH2O 1 inH2O 4 and 10 inH2O
PK2-854WC-SS 4 to 854 inH2O 1 inH2O 4 and 10 inH2O
PK2-500CM-SS 10 to 500 cmH2O 10 cmH2O 10 cmH2O
PK2-1000CM-SS 10 to 1,000 cmH2O 10 cmH2O 10 cmH2O
PK2-1500CM-SS 10 to 1,500 cmH2O 10 cmH2O 10 and 25 cmH2O
PK2-2000CM-SS 10 to 2,000 cmH2O 10 cmH2O 10 and 25 cmH2O
Table 2
Calibration Options Accuracy Gravity Data
NONE ±0.050% rdg (standard) Standard or local gravity (specify) None
-1B ±0.025% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) None
-1A ±0.015% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) None
/C ±0.050% rdg (standard) Standard or local gravity (specify) Yes
-1B/C ±0.025% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) Yes
-1A/C ±0.015% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) Yes


Model HK
DESCRIPTION
B The AMETEK HK Pneumatic Deadweight Tester is a primary
standard used to calibrate pressure and differential pressure
gauges, transmitters, transducers, recorders and controllers,
which can provide a reference pressure in process control
applications. The HK is a primary standard that produces
a pressure by applying force (weight set) over area (the
ceramic ball and nozzle). It is self-regulating with accuracy
independent of the operator. The unit may be mounted on an
optional tripod for more convenient setup.
FEATURES
• Available in psi, kg/cm², bar, kPa
• Pressure range from 10 to 1500 psi
• Ball and weights float freely eliminates the need to rotate the weights during testing
• Built in flow regulator eliminate the necessity of having to continually adjust the supply during the test and provides for
an easy up and down scale calibration
• Overhung weight carriers reduce side thrust and friction lengthening the life of the ball/nozzle and carrier and
improving measurement accuracy
• Multi-position ball valves for both the inlet and outlet valve connections ensure fast, efficient and trouble free operation
• Designed for lab and field use
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range: to 10,000 kPa / 1,500 psi (model dependent)
Accuracy (12 months): to ±0.025% rdg
Repeatability: ±0.005% rdg
Temperatue coefficient: ±0.00167% of rdg/°C (@ 23°C)
Increments (low - min): 1 psi, 0.1 kg/cm²,0.1 bar, 5 kPa, 2 inHg
Weight sets: Single (as ordered)
Supply pressure (max):
Models to 70 bar (1,000 psi): 100 bar / 1,500 psi
Models to 100 bar (1,500 psi): 150 bar / 2,250 psi
Flow rate: 85 slh at 100 kPa/3 scfh at 10 psi output
2800 slh at 10,000 kPa/100 scfh at 1500 psi output
Test connections: 7/16-20 37° conical ¼” OD
Weight material: Stainless steel
Engineering units: psi, kg/cm², bar, kPa, inHg
Connections: 0.25 in OD tubing, 7/16-20, 37° AN angle
Configuration: Pneumatic deadweight


HOW TO ORDER
B
Table 1 Table 2
XXXXXXXXX XXXX
Table 1
HK-500 10 to 500 psi 1 psi 10 psi
HK-700 10 to 700 psi 1 psi 10 psi
HK-1000 10 to 1,000 psi 1 psi 10 psi
HK-1500 10 to 1,500 psi 1 psi 10 psi
HK-40M 0.5 to 40 kg/cm² 0.1 kg/cm² 0.5 kg/cm²
HK-40B 0.5 to 40 bar 0.1 bar 0.5 bar
HK-50B 0.5 to 50 bar 0.1 bar 0.5 bar
HK-70B 0.5 to 70 bar 0.1 bar 0.5 bar
HK-100B.1 0.5 to 100 bar 0.1 bar 0.5 bar
HK-4000N 50 to 4,000 kPa 10 kPa 50 kPa
HK-5000N 50 to 5,000 kPa 10 kPa 50 kPa
HK-7000N 50 to 7,000 kPa 10 kPa 50 kPa
HK-10000N 50 to 10,000 kPa 10 kPa 50 kPa
Table 2
Notes: For ±0.025% testers, ±0.025% accuracy below 30” H2O, 1 psi, 7 kPa, 100 cm H2O or 0.07 Bar. Gravity 9.80665 m/s2 or user’s local gravity when specified. H2O
(water column) models are calibrated to water at 20°C (68°F) but can be calibrated to water at 60°F.


Model RK
DESCRIPTION
B The RK tester is a floating ball type, pneumatic deadweight
tester. This model is engineered to offer user-friendly
features, safe operation, and an optimal performance in
the field or in the lab. The RK is a primary standard that
produces a pressure by applying force (weight set) over
area (the ceramic ball and nozzle). It is self-regulating with
accuracy independent of the operator. The unit may be
mounted on an optional tripod for more convenient setup.
The tester may be operated with the cover opened or closed.
FEATURES
• Available in psi, kg/cm², bar, kPa, inH2O, cmH2O, inHg
• Pressure range from 6.145 to 300 psi
• Free floating ball and interchangeable weights
• Built in flow regulator provides for an easy up and down scale calibration
• Designed for lab and field use with closed cover operation
• Overhung weight carriers reduce side thrust and friction lengthening ball/nozzle and carrier life
and improve accuracy
• Multi-position ball valves for both the inlet and outlet connections ensure fast, trouble free
operation
• Small incremental weight sets available for fractional output pressure for all testers except inHg
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure range: to 2,000 kPa / 300 psi (model dependent)
Repeatability: ±0.005% rdg
Temperatue coefficient: ±0.00167% of rdg/°C (@ on 23 °C)
Increments (low - min): 1 psi, 0.01 kg/cm², 0.01 bar,1 kPa, 4 inH₂O, 10 cmH₂O, 1 inHg
Water column temp ref: 20°C (ISA) (standard) or 60°F (AGA) (optional) (specify when ordering)
Weight sets: Single (as ordered)
Supply pressure (max): 31 bar / 450 psi
Flow rate: 28 slh at 1 kPa/1 scfh at 0,15 psi output
1700 slh at 2000 kPa/60 scfh at 300 psi output
Test connections: ⅛” NPT
Weight material: Stainless steel and aluminum (small incremental weights)
Engineering units: psi, kg/cm², bar, kPa, inH₂O, cmH₂O, inHg
Cases: 1 or 2 (model dependent)
Connections: ¼ in NPT female
Configuration: Pneumatic deadweight


HOW TO ORDER
B
Table 1 Table 2
XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX
Table 1
RK-50 1 to 51 psi 1 psi 1 psi
RK-4M 0.01 to 4 kg/cm² 0.01 kg/cm² 0.01 kg/cm²
RK-8M 0.01 to 8 kg/cm² 0.01 kg/cm² 0.01 and 0.02 kg/cm²
RK-20M 0.01 to 20 kg/cm² 0.01 kg/cm² 0.01 and 0.02 kg/cm²
RK-2B 0.01 to 2 bar 0.01 bar 0.01 bar
RK-4B 0.01 to 4 bar 0.01 bar 0.01 bar
RK-8B 0.01 to 8 bar 0.01 bar 0.01 and 0.02 bar
RK-200N 1 to 211 kPa 1 kPa 1 kPa
RK-400N 1 to 411 kPa 1 kPa 1 kPa
RK-800N 1 to 811 kPa 1 kPa 1 and 2 kPa
RK-1200N 1 to 1,211 kPa 1 kPa 1 and 2 kPa
RK-2000N 1 to 2,011 kPa 1 inH2O 1 and 2 kPa
RK-100WC 4 to 104 inH2O 1 inH2O 4 inH2O
RK-1100WC 4 to 1,114 inH2O 1 inH2O 4 inH2O
RK-1600WC 4 to 1,614 inH2O 10 cmH2O 4 inH2O
RK-500CM 10 to 510 cmH2O 10 cmH2O 10 cmH2O
RK-1000CM 10 to 1,010 cmH2O 10 cmH2O 10 cmH2O
RK-100H 1 to 112 inHg 0.1 inHg 1 inHg
Table 2
-1B ±0.025% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) None
-1A ±0.015% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) None
-1B/C ±0.025% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) Yes
-1A/C ±0.015% rdg (optional) Standard or local gravity (specify) Yes
Notes: For ±0.015% testers, ±0.025% accuracy below 30” H2O, 1 psi, 7kPa, 100 cm H2O or 0.07 bar. Gravity 9.80665 m/s2 or user’s local gravity when specified. H2O
(water column) models are calibrated to water at 20°C (68°F) but can be calibrated to water at 60°F.

Hydraulic Deadweight Tester

Model Type T
DESCRIPTION
The Type T Hydraulic Deadweight Tester offers laboratory
B accuracy in an instrument that is designed to withstand an
industrial environment. These testers are designed to be
primary pressure standards and are available in several
ranges and engineering units. The Type T is available in
ranges to 1,000 bar (15,000 psi). It is constructed of 300
series stainless steel and Monel and is supplied with Buna
N O-rings as a standard unit. Viton and EPT O-rings are
optional. The Type T can use a water/alcohol mix or hydraulic
oils for the pressure medium.
FEATURES
• Available in psi, bar, kPa and kg/cm²
• Single column design for field use or dual column design for lab use
• Test fluid applied to the outside and inside of the cylinder reduces the rate of fluid leakage and
increases float time which allows for more testing time
• Positive over-pressure protection restricts vertical movement
• Dual volume pump allows for large volume of fluid to be added at low pressures
• Output volume can be reduced to ease pumping and for finer control
• Ability to refill the tester during calibration run
• Small incremental weight sets are available to provide fractional output pressures
SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Hydraulic, piston gauge
Pressure range: to 100,000 kPa / 15,000 psi (model dependent)
Increments (low - min): 5 psi, 0.5 kg/cm², 0.5 bar, 50 kPa
Increments (high - min): 50 psi, 5 kg/cm², 5 bar, 500 kPa
Gravity: 9.80665 m/s² (international standard)
Local gravity available (specify when ordering)
Piston/cylinders: Single or dual (as ordered)
Columns: Single or dual (as ordered)
Weight sets: Single or dual (as ordered)
Pressure source: Lever action, hand-actuated, dual volume hydraulic pump
Medium: Distilled water/alcohol mix (standard) or AAA oil (optional) (specify when ordering)
Reservoir capacity: 1.23 l / 75 in³
Displacement (high range): 2.8 to 3.2 cm2 / 0.17 to 0.20 in³ per stroke
Displacement (low range): 0.30 to 0.40 cm2 / 0.018 to 0.024 in³ per stroke
Wetted surfaces: 300 series stainless steel, monel
O-rings: Buna N (standard), EPT (optional), Viton (optional) (specify when ordering)
Test connections: ¼” NPT, ½” NPT, 7/16 UNF- ¼” BSP and ½” BSP (with metric models)
Weight material: Hard, non-magnetic alloy (imperial units), stainless steel ( ±0.015% imperial and metric models), aluminum (small incremental weight sets)
Engineering units: psi, kg/cm², bar, kPa
Configuration: Single or dual piston/cylinder single or dual column hydraulic deadweight
Delivery: Pump, piston(s), weight set(s), tools, manifold, adapters, column base, tubing (dual-column models), manual, and NIST traceable
certification

Hydraulic Deadweight Tester - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
B
Table 1 Table 2
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX
Table 1
Model Configuration Engineering Units Range Area Increments Piston
T-5 Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 500 5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
T-20 Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units psi 20 to 2000 10 0.2 in20.2 in²)
T-30 Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 3000 10 0.2 in20.2 in²)
T-110/TESTER Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units psi 100 to 10000 50 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
TSQ-40M-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm(2kg/cm²) 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
TSQ-200M-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm(2kg/cm²) 2 to 200 1 0.2 in(20.2 in²)
TSQ-700M-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm² 10 to 700 5 0.01 in²
TSQ-40B-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units bar 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in²
TSQ-200B-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units bar 2 to 200 1 0.2 in²
TSQ-1000B-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units bar 10 to 1,000 5 0.01 in²
TSQ-4000N-1/C Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units kPa 100 to 4000 50 0.1 in²
T-50 Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 500 5 0.1 in²
100 to 5000 50 0.01 in²
T-100 Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 1000 5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
100 to 10000 50 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
T-150/TESTER Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 1500 5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
100 to 15000 50 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
T-150 Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 1500 5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
100 to 15000 50 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
TQD-400M Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm(2kg/cm²) 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 400 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
10 to 700 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
10 to 1000 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
TQD-400B Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units bar 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 400 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
TQD-700B Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units bar 1 to 70 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 700 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
TQD-1000B Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units bar 1 to 100 0.5 0.1 in²
10 to 1000 5 0.01 in²


Table 1
Model Configuration Engineering Units Range Area Increments Piston
B TQD-40000N Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kPa 100 to 4000
1000 to 40000
50
500
0.1 in²
0.01 in²
TQD-70000N Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kPa 100 to 7000 50 0.1 in²
1000 to 70000 500 0.01 in²
TQD-100000N Single Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kPa 100 to 10000 50 0.1 in²
1000 to 100000 500 0.01 in²
DM-T-50 Dual Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units psi 10 to 500 5 0.1 in²
100 to 5000 50 0.01 in²
100 to 10000 50 0.01 in²
100 to 15000 50 0.01 in²
DM-TQ-400M Dual Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm² 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in²
10 to 400 5 0.01 in²
DM-TQ-700M Dual Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm(2kg/cm2kg/cm²) 1 to 70 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in20.1 in²)
DM-TQ-1000M Dual Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kg/cm(2kg/cm2kg/cm²) 1 to 100 5 0.1 in(20.1 in20.1 in²)
10 to 1000 5 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
DM-TQ-400B Dual Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units bar 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in20.1 in²)
10 to 400 5 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
10 to 700 5 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
10 to 1000 5 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
DM-TQ-40000N Dual Column/Dual Piston/Cylinder Units kPa 100 to 4000 50 0.1 in(20.1 in20.1 in²)
1000 to 40000 500 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
1000 to 70000 500 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
1000 to 100000 500 0.01 in(20.01 in20.01 in²)
DM-T-150-1AL/C Special 0.015% Accuracy units psi 10 to 1500 5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
100 to 15000 50 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
DM-TQ-400M Special 0.015% Accuracy units kg/cm(2kg/cm²) 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 400 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
700M Special 0.015% Accuracy units kg/cm(2kg/cm²) 1 to 70 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 70 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
1000M Special 0.015% Accuracy units kg/cm(2kg/cm²) 1 to 100 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 1000 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
400B Special 0.015% Accuracy units bar 1 to 40 0.5 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
10 to 400 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
10 to 700 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
10 to 1000 5 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
40000N Special 0.015% Accuracy units kPa 100 to 4000 50 0.1 in(20.1 in²)
1000 to 40000 500 0.01 in(20.01 in²)
70000N Special 0.015% Accuracy units kPa 100 to 7000 50 0.1 in²
1000 to 70000 500 0.01 in²
100000N Special 0.015% Accuracy units kPa 100 to 10000 50 0.1 in²
1000 to 100000 500 0.01 in²


Table 2 Options
(omit) No Options
-1/C For 0.025% Accuracy with Complete Data Certifications B
-1AL/C For 0.015% Accuracy with Complete Data Certifications¹
L Local Gravity²
/C Traceable Certification with Data
For Single Column/Single Piston/Cylinder Units: Metric units are supplied with Complete Data Certifications as indicated by “/C". Metric units are supplied with 0.025% of
Reading Accuracy as indicated by “-1".
For Special 0.015% Accuracy units: Configurations are at Local Gravity (supplied on the Order). Units have one independent weight set for each piston/cylinder
combination. Other configurations are considered upon request.
¹0.015% units are not considered standard and are subject to quotation of user specifications. These units are all supplied with Data, Local gravity, and Special Weight
Sets.
²Local Gravity Gravity must be specified on order in gals.

Ralston Instruments
Hydraulic Hand Pumps

HPGV-0000
DESCRIPTION
3000 psi (210 bar) HPGV pump, ¼" female NPT gauge
B swivel, 3ft hose, ¼" MNPT process connection. Pressure
source and gauge in one hand. Directly connect to a
process connection and calibrate using your precision
gauge.
FEATURES
• Fine adjustment piston provides an easy way to fine tune
exact pressure
• Vent valve is both durable and precise
• Liquid reservoir holds enough fluid for multiple
calibrations
• Marine brass construction resists corrosion and abuse
• Quick-disconnect gauge adapter allows changing gauges
without using a wrench
• Low volume Quick-test hose, gauge adapter and process
connection can be attached to pump without thread
sealant or a wrench
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Range 0 to 3000 psi (0 to 207 bar)
Media Ralston Calibration Oil, mineral based oil, water
Outlet Port Male Quick-test outlet port with check valve, brass
Temperature Range 0 to 130 °F (-18 to 54 °C)
Construction Anodized Aluminum, Brass, Plated Steel
Seal Materials Buna-N, Delrin, Synthetic Cork, Teflon
Fine Adjust Resolution ±1.00 psi
Liquid Reservoir Polycarbonate Liquid reservoir and (2) gaskets
Weight 2.39 lb (1.1 kg)
Dimensions H: 9.82 in (24.9428 cm) x W: 4.75 in (12.065 cm) x D: 4.75 in (12.065 cm)

Pneumatic Scissor Hand Pumps

APGV-0000
DESCRIPTION
APGV (300 psi / 20 bar) pump, ¼" female NPT gauge swivel,
3ft hose, ¼" MNPT process conn. Quick and efficient pneumatic B
field testing of pressure transmitters, gauges or switches.
FEATURES
• Portable, hand operated pump easily generates 300 psi (20
bar) without electricity or compressed air
• Light, compact pump can be easily transported to remote
locations
• Fine adjustment piston allows the user to achieve an exact
pressure for cardinal point pressure calibrations
• Precisely vent pressure with soft seated bleed valve
• Quick-disconnect gauge adapter allows changing test gauges
without using a wrench
connection can be attached to pump without thread sealant or
a wrench
• Rugged, all metal construction improves temperature and
pressure stability
• Made in U.S.A.
SPECIFICATIONS
Media Air
Outlet Port1 Male Quick-test outlet port for APGV pumps
Temperature Range e 0 to 130 °F (-18 to 54 °C)
Construction Aluminum, Brass, Plated Steel, Stainless Steel
Seal Materials Buna-N, Delrin, Teflon

Pneumatic Cylinder Hand Pumps

DP0V-0000
DESCRIPTION
B DP0V (100 psi / 7 bar) pump, no gauge adapter, 3ft hose, ¼"
MNPT process connection. The ideal solution for very precise
low pressure calibration or differential pressure testing using
an external pressure calibrator as the reference
FEATURES
• Light weight, compact pump generates up to 125 psi (8.6
bar) with ease
• Large volume fine adjustment piston provides precise control,
even at very low pressures
• Modular design makes field maintenance quick and easy
• Precisely vent pressure with soft seated bleed valve
• Two outlet ports provide connections for both pressure
reference and for device under test thus eliminating a tee
connection can be attached to pump without thread sealant
or a wrench
• Rugged, all metal construction reduces pressure changes
due to temperature fluctuations
• Made in U.S.A.
SPECIFICATIONS
Media Air
Outlet Port1 Male Quick-test outlet port, no check-valve, brass
Outlet Port2 Male Quick-test outlet port with cap and chain, brass
Temperature Range 0 to 130 °F (-18 to 54 °C)
Construction Anodized Aluminum, Brass, Stainless Steel
Seal Materials Buna-N, Delrin, Teflon

Crystal Engineering
Hoses, Fittings & Adapters
CPF Fittings
DESCRIPTION
CPF is an improved cone type fitting system that adds a unique o-ring sealing system which permits leak free
connections without tools. CPF fittings can be directly connected to ¼” medium pressure cone type fittings from other B
manufacturers, provided that wrenches are used to complete the connection. The fittings of the CPF system have been
designed and tested to comply with ASME B31.3-2008, Chapter IX: High Pressure Piping.
FEATURES
• Leak-Free up to 10,000 psi
• Purpose-designed for testing & calibration
• Self-venting weep hole assures a safe disconnection from a pressurized system
• 2 seals: Use fingers for an O-ring seal or use a wrench for a metal to metal cone seal (good to -104°F)
• Laser marked: Thread type, size, and MAWP
• Directly compatible with HiP, Autoclave Engineers and others
• Order fittings individually, as a complete NPT Hose and Fitting Kit, BSP Fitting Kit, Quick Test NPT Kit or create your
own custom kit.
SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Maximum Allowable Working 10 000 psi / 700 bar / 70 MPa
Pressure (MAWP):
Finger-tight: -20 to 50°C
Wrench-tight: -40 to 150°C
Minimum Hose Bend Radius: 1.0" (25mm)
Construction
Thread Type: 7/16-20 UNF 2B
Cone Angle: 60°, nominal
Fittings: High Strength 316 Stainless Steel
Hose: Polyamide core with urethane jacket
External Hose Diameter: 0.235" (6 mm)
Internal Hose Diameter: 0.08" (2 mm)
Hose Weight: 0.0179 lbs/ft (26.6 g/m)
CPF Female O-rings: AS568A-012, Viton® 90
O-ring Lubricant: Molykote® 55
Recommendations
Thread Lubricant: Use a process compatible fluid
Wrench Torque: 100–140 in-lbs (11.3–15.8 Nm)
Most fittingst meet the MAWP specificaton of 10000 psi / 700 bar / 70 MPa.
Exceptions are labeled.
Hose is not compatible with dioctyl sebacate fluid.
CAUTION: To achieve CPF maximum allowable working pressures no o-ring
substitutions are allowed.
If a torque wrench isn’t practical to use, hand tighten then tighten an additional
20 degrees using a wrench.
Due to the wide variety of operating conditions it may be subject to, Crystal
Engineering, as well as Distributors and Representatives of Crystal products,
do not warrant that this hose is suitable for any specific use. This hose is not for
use with compressed natural gas (CNG). When used with gases, fuels (liquid
or gas) and refrigerants, permeation (i.e., seepage) will occur from inside the
hose. In enclosed or unventilated spaces this permeation may result in high
concentrations of vapors which are potentially flammable, explosive or toxic.
Care must be taken to protect hoses from snagging, kinking, bending smaller
than the minimum bend radius, and cutting. Any hose that has been damaged in
any way should be removed from service and discarded immediately.

CPF Fittings - Continued

CPF Hoses (10000 PSI; FOS–4:1)
(A) (B) (C) Length Item

0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 1m MPH-1
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 1.5m MPH-1.5
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 3m MPH-3
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 5m MPH-5
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 10m MPH-10
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 10m MPH-10-HR*
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 25m MPH-25
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 25m MPH-25-HR*
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 50m MPH-50
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 50m MPH-50-HR*
0.63" 1.29" 0.72" 100m MPH-100
*Includes hose reel option. Integral CPF hose Reels are portable,with
an internal friction brake and a locking mechanism to prevent
unspooling. CPF Hose Reels are available for hose lengths from 10
to 50 meters. Hoses must be permanently factory-installed to the Reel
using a double-bulkhead fitting. The reel connection is CPF female.


CPF Male Connector
B
(A) (B) (C) Item
0.63" (16 mm) 2.33" (59 mm) 0.72" (18 mm) MPM-MPM
CPF Union
(A) (B) Item

0.75" (19 mm) 1.50" (38 mm) MPF-MPF
CPF Union Tee
(A) (B) Item

0.75" (19 mm) 1.90" (48 mm) MPF-MPFTU


CPF Bulkhead Mount
B
(A) (B) (C) Item

0.938" (24 mm) 1.00" (26 mm) 1.50" (38 mm) MPF-MPFBULK
Includes bulkhead retainer (Part # 4417).
CPF Cap
(A) (B) Item

0.63" (16 mm) 0.90" (23 mm) MPF-CAP
CPF Plug
(A) (B) Item

0.63" (16 mm) 1.19" (30 mm) MPM-PLUG

NPT Fittings
CPF Male to NPT Male
B
(A) (B) Item

0.63" (16 mm) 2.50" (64 mm) MPM-1/8MPT
0.63" (16 mm) 1.80" (46 mm) MPM-1/4MPT
NPT Male
(A) (B) Item

0.63" (16 mm) 1.12" (28 mm) MPF-1/8MPT
0.63" (16 mm) 1.36" (35 mm) MPF-1/4MPT
NPT Female
(A) (B) Item

0.75" (19 mm) 1.40" (36 mm) MPF-1/4FPT

NPT Fittings - Continued

NPT Quick Test Male
B
(A) (B) (C) Item
0.63" (16 mm) 1.48" (38 mm) 1.00" (25 mm) MPF-1/8QTM
Neoprene 70 Replacement O-ring for MPF-1/8QTM AS568A-109
0.75" (19 mm) 1.60" (41 mm) 0.82" (21 mm) MPF-1/4QTM
Neoprene 70 Replacement O-ring for MPF-1/4QTM AS568A-111
NPT Quick Test Female
(A) (B) (C) Item

0.63" (16 mm) 1.68" (38 mm) 0.85" (22 mm) MPF-1/8QTF
Neoprene 70 Replacement O-ring for MPF-1/8QTF AS568A-105
0.63" (16 mm) 1.78" (45 mm) 1.00" (25 mm) MPF-1/4QTF
0.63" (16 mm) 1.81" (46 mm) 1.37" (35 mm) MPF-1/2QTF*
*Fitting rated to 5000 psi
90° NPT Male
(A) (B) (C) Item

Fitting rated to 5000 psi
0.75" (19 mm) 1.20" (31 mm) 1.15" (29 mm) MPF-1/8MPT90
Intended for use with Combo Pump

NPT Fittings - Continued

NPT Male to NPT Quick Test Female
(A) (B) (C) Item

B
0.63" (16 mm) 1.90" (48 mm) 1.00" (25 mm) 1/8MPT-1/4QTF¹
Neoprene 70 Replacement O-ring for 1/8MPT-1/4QTF AS568A-108
0.63" (16 mm) 2.06" (52 mm) 1.00" (25 mm) 1/4MPT-1/4QTF²
Neoprene 70 Replacement O-ring for 1/8MPT-1/4QTF AS568A-108
¹ ⅛ MNPT fittings intended for use with Combo Pump

² ¼ MNPT fittings intended for use with Hydraulic Pump
NPT Fittings Kits
Kit Name Description Item

Includes: ⅛ NPT [Male (2), Male 90°, Male Quick Test, and
Female Quick Test], ¼ NPT [Male (2)], Female, Male Quick
Complete NPT Hose and Test, and Female Quick Test], ½ NPT [Female Quick Test], Tube
4016
Fitting Kit [¼ Male, ⅜ Male, and ½ Male], AN4 Male, Transmitter [¼
Male and 5/16 Male], CPF Connectors [Male-Male, T-Union,
Plug, and Cap (2)], Hose [1 meter], and Custom Carrying Case.
Quick Test NPT Kit Includes: MPF-⅛QTF, MPF-¼QTF, and MPF-½QTF 4013

BSP Fittings
CPF Male to BSP Male
B
(A) (B) Item
0.63" (16 mm) 1.68" (43 mm) MPM-1/4BSPM
BSP Female
(A) (B) Item

0.79" (20 mm) 1.50" (38 mm) MPF-1/8BSPF
0.79" (20 mm) 1.50" (38 mm) MPF-1/4BSPF
0.98" (25 mm) 1.75" (45 mm) MPF-3/8BSPF
1.18 (30 mm) 2.05" (52 mm) MPF-1/2BSPF
BSP Fittings Kits
Kit Description Item

Includes: BSP Female [⅛, ¼ (2), ⅜, and ½], 4017
NPT [¼ Quick Test Female and ⅛ Male (2)],
Transmitter [¼ Male and 5/16 Male], CPF
Complete BSP Hose and Fitting Kit
Connectors [Male-Male, T-Union, Plug, and
Cap (2)], Hose [1 meter], Custom Carrying
Case.
Includes: MPF-⅛BSPF, MPF-¼BSPF, MPF- 4015
BSP Test Kit
⅜BSPF, and MPF-½BSPF

Transmitter Fittings
Foxboro, Rosemount & Yokogawa Transmitter Fitting
B
(A) (B) Item
0.63" (16 mm) 2.13" (54 mm) MPF-5/16TRM
Fitting rated to 5000 PSI
Honeywell Transmitter Fitting
(A) (B) Item

1.18" (30 mm) 1.65" (42 mm) MPF-1/4TRM
Pump Adapter
Quick Connect Nut
* Fitting
(A) rated to 5000
(B)PSI Item
0.63" (16 mm) 1.47" (37 mm) MPF-QCN-S

Ralston Instruments
Quick-test™ Hoses
DESCRIPTION
Microbore hoses that provide a very quick, low volume, high
pressure way of connecting to any pressure instrumentation,
hand pump, calibration source or device under test
B FEATURES
• Low volume reduces the pumping effort or compressed gas
usage in pressure calibration
• No thread sealant required - connect to adapters without
wrenches, thread sealant or thread tape
• Bubble tight connections to 6900 psi (475 bar) with no
moving parts reduces maintenance to almost zero
• Hose is hard to break and very flexible
• Adapt from hose to virtually any device under test with only
one connection
• Silver color dramatically reduces the effect that changing
temperature has on pressure stability
• A corrosion resistant strain-relief on each hose end reduces
wear and dramatically increases hose life
• Hose is pin-pricked for use in Natural Gas applications
• Made in U.S.A.
Item End 1 End 2 Length
QTQT-HOS-2ft Female Quick-test, brass Female Quick-test, brass 2 ft
QTQT-HOS-1m Female Quick-test, brass Female Quick-test, brass 1m
QTQT-HOS-1.5m Female Quick-test, brass Female Quick-test, brass 1.5 m
QTQT-HOS-10m Female Quick-test, brass Female Quick-test, brass 10 m
QSQS-HOS-2ft Female Quick-test, stainless steel Female Quick-test, stainless steel 2 ft
QSQS-HOS-1m Female Quick-test, stainless steel Female Quick-test, stainless steel 1m
QSQS-HOS-1.5m Female Quick-test, stainless steel Female Quick-test, stainless steel 1.5 m
QSQS-HOS-10m Female Quick-test, stainless steel Female Quick-test, stainless steel 10 m
Contact Rawson for custom hoses and adapters.

Quick-test™ XT Hoses
DESCRIPTION
10,000 psi (689 bar) working pressure Microbore hoses
that provide a very quick, low volume, high pressure way
of connecting to any pressure instrumentation, hand
pump, calibration source or device under test B
FEATURES
• Low volume reduces the pumping effort or compressed
gas usage in pressure calibration
• No thread sealant required - connect to adapters without
wrenches, thread sealant or thread tape
• Bubble tight connections to 10000 psi (689 bar) with no
moving parts reduces maintenance to almost zero
• Hose is hard to break and very flexible
• Adapt from hose to virtually any device under test with
only one connection
• A corrosion resistant strain-relief on each hose end
reduces wear and dramatically increases hose life
• Note that these hoses are NOT compatible with QTHA
adapters. Please use XTHA adapters
• Made in USA
Item End 1 End 2 Length
XTXT-HOS-2ft Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel 2 ft
XTXT-HOS-1m Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel 1m
XTXT-HOS-1.5m Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel 1.5 m
XTXT-HOS-10m Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel Female Quick-test XT, stainless steel 10 m
Contact Rawson for custom hoses and adapters.

Fittings & Adapters

DESCRIPTION
Quick-test hose and adapters seal via an O-ring and probe. The probe slides into the O-ring and provides the seal while
the threads keep the probe in place. This simple and reliable method allows for leak-free connections in any calibration.
B
NPT Male NPT Male NPT Male NPT Male

Quick-test Quick-connect Quick-test XT Quick-test
Adapters Adapters Adapters Fittings
Connects Female NPT Make a bubble-tight seal Connects Female A removable cap
to Quick-test hoses on any Female NPT NPT to Quick-test XT provides easy
with brass or stainless pressure device without 10,000 psi hoses access to connect
steel hose ends. using thread sealant or a a Quick-test hose
wrench. to the process for
calibration purposes
and is easily sealed
bubble-tight again
when calibration is
complete
NPT Male NPT Male NPT Male NPT Male

Quick-connect Quick-test XT Quick-test Quick-test
Fittings Fittings Pressure XT Pressure
Make calibrating Connects Female Calibrator Calibrator
pressure transmitters NPT to Quick-test
a snap by eliminating XT 10,000 psi hoses
Adapters Adapters
the need for thread for permanent Quickly connect a Quickly connect a
sealant or wrenches installation pressure calibrator pressure calibrator or
when connecting to any or other pressure other pressure device
female NPT connection device with Female with Female NPT
NPT connections connections a to Ralston
to Ralston hand hand pump or nitrogen
pumps or nitrogen calibration equipment to
calibration 10,000 psi
equipment

Fittings & Adapters - Continued
NPT Female NPT Female NPT Female NPT Female

Quick-test Quick-test XT Quick-test Quick-test
Adapters Adapters Gauge XT Gauge
Connect a Quick-test Connect a Quick-test XT Adapters Adapters
hose to a pressure hose to an NPT pressure Connect to a Connect Male NPT
gauge or any device gauge or any Male NPT pressure gauge pressure gauge or
with a male NPT device using thread or other device other Male NPT
connection using sealant and a wrench with Male NPT device to a Ralston
thread sealant and a connections to hand pump or
wrench a Ralston hand nitrogen calibration
pump or nitrogen device to create
calibration device one side of a quick-
disconnect to 10,000
psi
NPT Female SAE/MS Male Quick-test Unions Quick-test XT

Quick-connect Quick-test Connect two Quick-test Unions
Adapters Adapters hoses or two Quick- Connect 2 Quick-test XT
test adapters together, 10,000 psi hoses together
Connect Quick-test Connect to SAE/MS depending on the union quickly and easily
hoses to a male NPT ports on pressure
pressure gauge. It calibrators, pipelines
allows one to connect and other processes
a hose to a pressure
gauge, calibrate it
and remove it without
a wrench or thread
sealant.
Call Rawson for additional models, materials, and pressure ranges.

Calibration Equipment • Software
Calibration Software
JOFRACAL
DESCRIPTION
B JOFRACAL is a complete process calibration solution,
enabling paperless calibration. JOFRACAL offers
configuration and unlimited storage of calibration procedures,
calibration setups and calibration results. The software
handles comparisons between the process readout value and
the reference value; a measurement typically required by ISO
9000, GMP, or HACCP systems. Offering a scheduling and
documenting calibration system on your PC. All calibration
data are stored for each sensor to monitor drift and optimize
recalibration intervals. A scheduler feature allows planning
of future calibrations. Calibrate thermocouples, RTD´s,
transmitters, thermo-switches, pressure gauges, sensors,
transmitters, pressure switches, signal converters, amplifiers,
indicators, insulation amplifiers, etc.
Instrument Combinations
JOFRACAL calibration software combines Jofra temperature, pressure and signal calibrators into larger
and more capable calibration systems. JOFRACAL can also be used for manual calibrations. It can be set
up to accept manual entry of calibration data together with other liquid baths, ice points or dry-block heat
sources. JOFRACAL can be used with Jofra HPC, DPC-500, APC, CPC and IPI pressure calibrators, all Jofra
temperature calibrators, as well as Jofra ASC multi signal calibrators and the ASM signal multi scanner.
FEATURES
• Easy overview and straightforward navigation via Tabs
• Set up calibration procedures and download them to your calibration instrument
• Print calibration certificates to comply with ISO standards, local norms and standards. Built-in PDF generator for easy
generation of documents
• Calibration procedures and results are stored in a user-friendly database with search and sorting functionality
• Access to sensor-under-test (SUT) calibration history for preventive maintenance
• Transfer data to spreadsheets or other systems
• Schedule calibrations; list the tag, location and calibration due dates for your instruments
• For use with laptops, order Edgeport converter with 4 RS232 ports (Part no. 125002). Converter is connected and
powered by the USB connection to the PC. Tested with all Jofra calibrators.

Jofra
Indicator Data Logging Software

IPILOG
DESCRIPTION
Combined with IPILOG, you get a high-performance solution for pressure data logging applications. Whether you
need to log data on one IPI or many, IPILOG is easy to use and is a low-cost application that can handle all of your
B
requirements. IPILOG configures the gauge to operate in ad-hoc mode (field configuration) or download mode
(computer configuration) for complete flexibility in configuring your data logging applications.
FEATURES
• Multiple interval selection options from 1 sec to 1 hour
• Data logging runs can range from a few seconds to several weeks
• Ambient temperature can be logged along with pressure for leak testing applications
• Four types of data capture mode allow you to log either all data or only the points you’re interested in
• Number of data points to record (maximum of 8500)
• Type of data .Interval end .Average .Minimum .Maximum .Median Average/Minimum/Maximum
• When set to demand mode, you can easily set up and start data logging in the field using the keypad
• Connection between IPILog and IPI Mk.II is done via a RS232 / USB converter and allows IPILOG to retrieve the data
and store it on your computer in a variety of formats
APPLICATIONS
• Hydrostatic pressure testing
• Leak detection
• Transient pressure spike detection
• Well head pressure monitoring
• District heating systems
• Gas distribution
• Fresh water supply
• Wastewater treatment
• And many others…
Item Description
128494 CD with IPILOG program Spreadsheet templates, Drivers and manual, RS232 cable, and USB to RS232 converter

Crystal Engineering
Calibration Software for Gauges/Transmitters

FastCalXP
DESCRIPTION
B FastCalXP software allows you to do a 10 point up and down
calibration in less than 3 minutes and print out a calibration
certificate. FastCalXP frees you from manually recording and interpolating
gauge readings, which helps reduce data errors.
FEATURES
• Use as a gauge, transmitter or chart recorder calibration system
• Convenient storage of all pressure calibration related data in a single
database
• Automatic detection of Crystal Engineering digital reference gauges and
automatic reading and storage of pressure data
• Easy generation and storage or pressure test profiles
• Flexible templates for certificate generation
• Intuitive user interface for all calibration operations and data
management
• Compatible with Windows XP, Vista, Windows 7 and 8
• Creates any style of calibration report using Excel spreadsheet software
and reminds you when next calibrations are due
Digital Pressure Gauge Software

DataLoggerXP
DESCRIPTION
The DataLoggerXP software, in tandem with the XP2i digital pressure
gauge with a purchased DataLoggerXP firmware upgrade, forms an
integrated data logging solution by collecting, saving and transferring
data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. With the XP2i's long battery
life, you can record up to 32,000 pressure measurements over an
entire year, without the need for external power supplies or battery
replacements. Since the XP2i can measure vacuum, you can even
capture pressure to vacuum transitions and much more.
FEATURES
• Change data collection parameters, with or without a computer
• Start and stop multiple collection runs from the keypad
• Record pressure readings at intervals as quick as once per second or
as slow as once every 18 hours
• Record the averages, averages and peaks, or just the pressure
indication
• Store an indicated pressure by pushing one button
• Save the data files directly into Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, or as
comma separated text files
• Supports Microsoft Excel 2003 through 2013
• Free Gauge firmware updates

Section Cover page
Parker’s Largest North American Distributor
Rawson is proud to be named a Parker Instrumentation Solution Center. This
distinction is only afforded to Parker’s most qualified and dedicated distributors.
We provide the fastest order fulfillment from stock, the most knowledgeable sales
team, and the best customer service.
Main Index
Bulk Instrumentation & Accessories

High Pressure Valves, Fittings and Tubing
Parker Autoclave Engineers...................................................................................................... 294
High Purity Manifolds, Fittings and Tubing
VNE Egmo................................................................................................................................ 307
Installation Support
Channel-Track........................................................................................................................... 311
Instrument Fittings, Conversions, and Unions
Pipe Fittings.............................................................................................................................. 323
Tube Fittings.............................................................................................................................. 332
Weld Fittings.............................................................................................................................. 346
Port Connectors........................................................................................................................ 349
Tube to Tube Unions................................................................................................................. 354
Conversion Fittings................................................................................................................... 360
Connectors................................................................................................................................ 364
Components.............................................................................................................................. 367
Hose Fittings............................................................................................................................. 370
Filters......................................................................................................................................... 374
Instrument Valves & Manifolds
Ball Valves................................................................................................................................. 376
Bleed & Purge Valves................................................................................................................ 383
Check Valves............................................................................................................................. 386
Two-Valve Block & Bleed Manifold............................................................................................ 391
Three-Valve Manifolds............................................................................................................... 398
Hand Valves.............................................................................................................................. 399
Metering Valves......................................................................................................................... 408
Needle Valves........................................................................................................................... 413
Relief Valves.............................................................................................................................. 421
Rotary Plug Valves.................................................................................................................... 423
Toggle Valves............................................................................................................................ 424
Instrument Tubing & Hose
Metal Tube Products................................................................................................................. 429
Plastic Tube Products............................................................................................................... 429
Steam & Electric Trace Products.............................................................................................. 430
Flexible Braided Hose............................................................................................................... 431
Tube Fabricating Equipment
Cutting & Deburring Tools......................................................................................................... 440
Manual Coning and Threading Tools......................................................................................... 442
293
Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • High Pressure Valves,
Fittings and Tubing
Parker Autoclave Engineers
Manual Needle Valves

DESCRIPTION
All Parker Autoclave Engineers Needle Valves incorporate
a rising stem/block design while the non-rotating feature
of the stem prevents galling. In addition, the valves are
designed with metal to metal seating for bubble tight shut-
off, long stem/seat life even in abrasive flow conditions,
and excellent overall corrosion resistance. A Vee stem is
C chosen when the application calls for direct on-off, metal
to metal shut-off with fast opening capabilities. For tighter
flow control a non-rotating regulating stem is available.
For the most precise flow control, a MicroMetering™ stem
design is recommended.
10V and SW series needle valves are designed for

operation to 15,000 psi (1,034 bar). SM series medium
pressure valves are built to operate safely and reliably to
20,000 psi (1379 bar). They high pressure series offer a
diverse line of needle valves from 30,000 psi, 40,000 psi,
60,000 psi, to 150,000 psi (10345 bar).
FEATURES
• Variety of materials, stem types, handles styles and
mounting options
• Metal to metal seating provides bubble tight sealing
• Great durability for repeated on/off cycles
• 5 different body patterns
• Excellent corrosion resistance
• PTFE encapsulated packing
• Abrasive Service and Extreme temperature models

Fittings and Tubing
Manual Needle Valves - Continued

Item
Valve
Duty O.D. Tube Size Pressure Rating *Rated Cv 2 Way Angle 3 Way
Stem 3 Way 3 Way
Type In (mm) psi (bar) (full open) 2 Way Straight 2 Way Angle Replaceable 2 Stem
Type 2 on Pressure 1 on Pressure
Seat Manifold
MP 1/4 (6.35) 20,000 (1380) 0.31 Vee 20SM4071 20SM4072 20SM4073 20SM4074 20SM4872 20SM4075
MP 1/4 (6.35) 20,000 (1380) 0.31 Reg 20SM4081 20SM4082 20SM4083 20SM4084 20SM4882 20SM4085
MP 3/8 (9.53) 20,000 (1380) 0.75 Vee 20SM6071 20SM6072 20SM6073 20SM6074 20SM6872 20SV6075
C
MP 1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) 4.4 Vee 20SM16071 20SM16072 20SM16073 20SM16074 20SM16872 20SM16075
MP 1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) 4.4 Reg 20SM16081 20SM16082 20SM16083 20SM16084 20SM16882 20SM16085
MP 1 (25.4) 10,000 (690) 5.2 Vee 10SM16071 10SM16072 10SM16073 10SM16074 10SM16872 10SM16075
MP 1 (25.4) 10,000 (690) 5.2 Reg 10SM16081 10SM16082 10SM16083 10SM16084 10SM16882 10SM16085
HP 1 (25.4) 30,000 (2070) 2.6 Vee 30SC16071 30SC16072 30SC16073 30SC16074 30SC16872 30SC16075
HP 1 (25.4) 30,000 (2070) 2.6 Reg 30SC16081 30SC16082 30SC16083 30SC16084 30SC16882 30SC16085
HP 1/4 (6.35) 30,000 (2070) 0.12 Vee 30VM4071 30VM4072 30VM4073 30VM4074 30VM4872 30VM4075
HP 1/4 (6.35) 30,000 (2070) 0.12 Reg 30VM4081 30VM4082 30VM4083 30VM4084 30VM4882 30VM4085
MP=Medium Pressure, HP=High Pressure

CV Valves shown are for 2-way straight pattern. For 2-way angle, increase CV Valve 50%.
SM Series replaces 20SC Series
For additional Autoclave products not listed, please call a Rawson associate.

Fittings and Tubing
Air Actuators
DESCRIPTION
Three sizes of air operators (medium, heavy duty or extra heavy) are
offered for remote on-off operation or
automatic operation of Parker Autoclave Engineers medium or high
pressure needle valves. The actuators are available in air-to-open
(normally closed) and air-to-close (normally open) designs.
These actuators are available in two different operator styles. The

C piston type air-operated valves offer a unique, reliable design providing
for a long and dependable life. These valves are more compact than
diaphragm valves and are appropriate for applications such as high-flow
gas and liquid delivery systems to reactors and mixer/vaporizers.
The diaphragm type air-operated valves are an efficient and economical

means for “remote on-off” control of a wide range of process
requirements. Diaphragm type actuators are designed to provide a Air To Close Piston
dependable alternative to piston type actuators.
HOW TO ORDER
To order a valve with an air operator, select the duty rating and type of
the air operator from the chart below. Add the air operator identify suffix
to the item number of the Parker Autoclave Engineers valve (see Parker
Autoclave Engineers Manual Needle Valves on preceding pages) Ex.
To order a 2-way straight, 30VM vee stem, 9/16” (14.3 mm) valve with
a medium duty air-to-close air operator, specify: ex: 30VM9071-C1S for
a yoke style piston air actuated valve or 30VM9071-CM for an integral
style diaphragm air operated valve.
Duty Rating Operator Type Order Suffix
Medium Diaphragm Air-to-Open OM

Medium Diaphragm Air-to-Close CM
Medium Piston Air-to-Open O1S
Medium Piston Air-to-Close C1S
Air To Open Piston
Heavy Diaphragm Air-to-Open OH
Heavy Diaphragm Air-to-Close CH
Heavy Piston Air-to-Open O2S
Heavy Piston Air-to-Close C2S
Extra Heavy Single Stage Piston Air-to-Open HO1S
Extra Heavy Single Stage Piston Air-to-Close HC1S
Extra Heavy Two Stage Piston Air-to-Open HO2S
Extra Heavy Two Stage Piston Air-to-Close HC2S
Air To Open Diaphragm

Fittings and Tubing
Air Actuators - Continued

Medium Duty Heavy Extra Heavy Single Stage Extra Heavy Two Stage
Valve O.D. Tube in.
Type System Press. Air Press. Psi System Press. Air Press. Psi System Press. Air Press. Psi System Press. Air Press. Psi
Series (mm)
Psi (bar) (bar) Psi (bar) (bar) Psi (bar) (bar) Psi (bar) (bar)
Air-to-close 10SM 9/16 (14.3) 8,600 (593) 100 (6.9) 10,000 (690) 55 (3.8) 10,000 (690) 45 (3.1) 10,000 (690) 20 (1.4)
Air-to-open 10SM 9/16 (14.3) 7,900 (545) 95 (6.6) 10,000 (690) 75 (5.1) 10,000 (690) 60 (4.13) 10,000 (690) 40 (2.8)
Air-to-close 10SM 3/4 (19.1) 4,800 (331) 100 (6.9) 10,000 (690) 100 (6.9) 10,000 (690) 70 (4.83) 10,000 (690) 35 (2.4)
Air-to-open 10SM 3/4 (19.1) - - - - 10,000 (690) 95 (6.55) 10,000 (690) 60 (4.1)
Air-to-close 10SM 1 (25.4) 2,800 (193) 100 (6.9) 6,300 (434) 100 (6.9) 8,500 (586) 95 (6.55) 10,000 (690) 55 (3.79) C
Air-to-open 10SM 1 (25.4) - - - - 10,000 (448) 100 (6.90) 10,000 (690) 85 (5.9)
Air-to-close 20SM 1/4 (6.35) 20,000 (1380) 95 (6.5) 20,000 (1380) 50 (3.5) - - - -
Air-to-open 20SM 1/4 (6.35) 20,000 (1380) 95 (6.6) 20,000 (1380) 50 (3.4) - - - -
Air-to-close 20SM 3/8 (9.53) 19,000 (1310) 100 (6.9) 20,000 (1380) 55 (3.8) - - - -
Air-to-open 20SM 3/8 (9.53) 18,250 (1258) 95 (6.6) 18,250 (1258) 50 (3.4) - - - -
Air-to-close 20SM 9/16 (14.3) 10,700 (734) 100 (6.9) 20,000 (1380) 85 (5.9) 20,000 (1380) 65 (4.48) 20,000 (1380) 30 (2.1)
Air-to-open 20SM 9/16 (14.3) 9,800 (676) 95 (6.6) 15,700 (1082) 75 (5.1) 20,000 (1379) 85 (5.86) 20,000 (1380) 55 (3.8)
Air-to-close 20SM 3/4 (19.1) 6,100 (421) 100 (6.9) 13,600 (938) 100 (6.9) 19,000 (1310) 100 (6.9 ) 20,000 (1380) 50 (3.4)
Air-to-open 20SM 3/4 (19.1) - - 6,000 (414) 75 (5.1) 15,000 (1034) 100 (6.90) 20,000 (1380) 80 (5.5)
Air-to-close 20SM 1 (25.4) 3,900 (269) 100 (6.9) 8,800 (607) 100 (6.9) 19,000 (1310) 95 (6.55) 20,000 (1380) 75 (5.1)
Air-to-open 20SM 1 (25.4) - - 4,000 (276) 75 (5.1) 10,000 (690) 100 (6.90) 20,000 (1380) 100 (6.9)
Air-to-close 30SC 1 (25.4) - - - - - - 30,000 (2068) 80 (5.5)
Air-to-open 30SC 1 (25.4) - - - - - - 30,000 (2068) 100 (6.9)
Air-to-close 30VM 1/4 (6.35) 30,000 (2068) 55 (3.8) 30,000 (2068) 30 (2.0) - - - -
Air-to-open 30VM 1/4 (6.35) 30,000 (2068) 75 (5.2) 30,000 (2068) 40 (2.8) - - - -
Air-to-close 30VM 3/8 (9.53) 30,000 (2068) 75 (5.2) 30,000 (2068) 40 (2.8) - - - -
Air-to-open 30VM 3/8 (9.53) 30,000 (2068) 95 (6.5) 30,000 (2068) 50 (3.5) - - - -
Air-to-close 30VM 9/16 (14.3) 30,000 (2068) 75 (5.2) 30,000 (2068) 40 (2.8) - - - -
Air-to-open 30VM 9/16 (14.3) 30,000 (2068) 95 (6.5) 30,000 (2068) 50 (3.5) - - - -
Air-to-close 40VM 9/16 (14.3) - - 40,000 (2758) 45 (3.1) - - - -
Air-to-open 40VM 9/16 (14.3) - 40,000 (2758) 55 (3.8) - - - -
Air-to-close 60VM 1/4 (6.35) 60,000 (4137) 75 (5.2) 60,000 (4137) 40 (2.8) - - - -
Air-to-open 60VM 1/4 (6.35) 60,000 (4137) 95 (6.5) 60,000 (4137) 50 (3.5) - - - -
Air-to-close 60VM 3/8 (9.53) 60,000 (4137) 75 (5.2) 60,000 (4137) 40 (2.8) - - - -
Air-to-open 60VM 3/8 (9.53) 60,000 (4137) 95 (6.5) 60,000 (4137) 50 (3.5) - - - -
Air-to-close 60VM 9/16 (14.3) 60,000 (4137) 90 (6.2) 60,000 (4137) 45 (3.1) - - - -
Air-to-open 60VM 9/16 (14.3) 60,000 (4137) 95 (6.5) 60,000 (4137) 50 (3.5) - - - -
This table is designed to allow quick selection of an appropriate air actuator based on valve style and size, maximum system operating pressure and maximum available
air pressure. For example, if the system operating pressure is 25,000 psi (1723 bar) and the available air pressure is 60 psi (4.1 bar) and an air-to-open (spring fail closed)
valve is required, a 30VM or 60VM valve with a heavy duty air operator can be used.

Fittings and Tubing
Medium and High Pressure Fittings

DESCRIPTION FEATURES
These fittings and components are designed to work in • Medium pressure sizes are 1/4", 3/8", 9/16", 3/4", and
operating temperatures from -423°F to 1200°F and are 1-1/2" tube size and pressures to 20,000 psi
manufactured from cold worked 316 stainless steel, but • High pressure sizes sizes 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 9/16", and
are available in other special materials. Their coned-and- 1" tube size and pressures to 150,000 psi
threaded connection features orifice sizes designed to • Manufactured from cold worked 316 stainless steel
match characteristics of respective series of valves and • Operating temperatures from -423°F to 1200°F
C tubing. • Anti-vibration collet gland available in line collar and
gland to minimize block thickness
Medium Pressure • Available in special materials
Parker Autoclave Engineers medium pressure fittings, • Supplied complete with appropriate glands and collars.
Series SF, are designed for use with Series 20SM medium Connection components may be ordered separately.
pressure valves and Parker Autoclave Engineers' medium When using plug, collar is not required.
pressure tubing. They incorporate medium pressure
coned-and-threaded connections with orifices sized to
match the high-flow Series 20SC valves. Capable of
operating to 20,000 psi and range in size from 1/4" to
1-1/2" tube size.
High Pressure
Parker Autoclave's high-pressure fittings Series F
and SF are capable of operating to 150,000 psi and
range in size from 1/4" to 1" tube size. Utilizing Parker
Autoclave Engineers high pressure coned-and-threaded
connections, these fittings are correlated with Series
30SC, 43SC, 30VM, 40VM, 60VM, 100VM, and 150V
valves and Parker Autoclave Engineers’
high pressure tubing.
Connection Sizes Pressure Rating

Duty Type Connection Type
in. (mm) psi (bar)
Coned-and-threaded type for high strength and

Medium ¼ to 1-½ to 20,000 repeated make-up. Anti-Vibration collet gland
Pressure (6.35 to 25.4) (1380) available in line collar and gland to minimize block
thickness

High 1 to 43,000
repeated make-up. Anti-vibration collet gland
Pressure (25.4) (2964)
available.

High ¼ to ⁹∕₁₆ to 60,000 repeated make-up. Anti-vibration collet gland
Pressure (6.35 to 14.3) (4140) available. Nested collar and gland to minimize
block width.

Fittings and Tubing
Medium and High Pressure Fittings - Continued

Fittings
Item
O.D.
Pressure Rating
Duty Type Tube Size
psi (bar)
in. (mm)
Elbow Tee Cross

Straight Union Bulking C
Coupling Coupling Coupling
Medium Pressure ¼ (6.35) 20,000 (1380) CLX4400 CTX4440 CXX4444 20FX4466 20UFX4466 20BFX4466
Medium Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 20,000 (1380) CLX6600 CTX6660 CXX6666 20FX6666 20UFX6666 20BFX6666
Medium Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 20,000 (1380) CLX9900 CTX9990 CXX9999 20FX9966 20UFX9966 20BFX9966
Medium Pressure ¾ (19.1) 20,000 (1380) CLX12 CTX12 CXX12 20FX12 20UFX12 20BFX12
Medium Pressure 1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) CLX16 CTX16 CXX16 20FX16 20UFX16 20BFX16
Medium Pressure 1-½ (38.1) 15,000 (1034) CLX24 CTX24 CXX24 15FX24 15UFX24 15BFX24
High Pressure 1 (25.4) 43,000 (2964) 43CL16 43CT16 43CX16 43F16 43UF16 43BF16
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 40,000 (2760) 40CL9900 40CT9990 40CX9999 40F9933 40UF9933 40BF9933
High Pressure ¼ (6.35) 60,000 (4140) CL4400 CT4440 CX4444 60F4433 60UF4433 60BF4433
High Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 60,000 (4140) CL6600 CT6660 CX6666 60F6633 60UF6633 60BF6633
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 60,000 (4140) CL9900 CT9990 CX9999 60F9933 60UF9933 60BF9933
Connection Components
Item
O.D. Pressure
Duty Type Tube Size Rating
in. (mm) psi (bar)
Gland Collar Plug
Medium Pressure ¼ (6.35) 20,000 (1380) CGLX40 CCLX40 CPX40
Medium Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 20,000 (1380) CGLX60 CCLX60 CPX60
Medium Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 20,000 (1380) CGLX90 CCLX90 CPX90
Medium Pressure ¾ (19.1) 20,000 (1380) CGLX120 CCLX120 CPX120
Medium Pressure 1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) CGLX160 CCLX160 CPX160
Medium Pressure 1-½ (38.1) 15,000 (1034) CGLX240 CCLX240 CPX240
High Pressure 1 (25.4) 43,000 (2964) CGLX160 CCLX160 43CP160
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 40,000 (2760) AGL90 ACL90 AP90
High Pressure ¼ (6.35) 60,000 (4140) AGL40 ACL40 AP40
High Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 60,000 (4140) AGL60 ACL60 AP60
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 60,000 (4140) AGL90 ACL90 AP90

Fittings and Tubing
Medium and High Pressure Check Valves

DESCRIPTION FEATURES
O-Ring Check Valves provide unidirectional flow and • O-ring, ball and ball type excess flow designs
tight shut-off for liquids and gas with high reliability. When • Medium pressure check valves for use with pressures
differential drops below cracking pressure (20 psi ±30%), up to 20,000 psi
valve shuts off. • High pressure check valves for use with pressures up to
60,000 psi
Ball Check Valve prevents reverse flow where leak- • Operating temperatures from -423°F to 1200°F
C tight shut-off is not mandatory. When differential drops • Coned-and-threaded connection
below cracking pressure, valve closes. With all-metal • Medium pressure sizes: 1/4", 3/8", 9/16", 3/4", 1” and
components, valve can be used up to 1200°F (649°C). 1-1/2" tube size
The ball and poppet are an integral design to assure • High pressure sizes: 1/4", 3/8", 9/16", and 1" tube size
positive, in-line seating without “chatter”. Poppet is
designed essentially for axial flow with minimum pressure
drop.
Ball Type Excess Flow Valve are non-spring loaded,

vertically installed valves, which protect pressure gauges
and pressure instrumentation from surges in flow or
sudden venting in the event of line failure. The Excess
Flow valve is a resetting valve in that it will equalize the
pressure across the ball. The ball will drop and reset
automatically.
O-Ring and Ball check are not intended for use as relief
valves.
Item
O.D. Pressure
Duty Type Tube Size Rating
in. (mm) psi (bar)
Excess
O-Ring Ball
Flow
Medium Pressure ¼ (6.35) 20,000 (1380) CXO4400 CXB4400 CXK4402
Medium Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 20,000 (1380) CXO6600 CXB6602 CXK6602
Medium Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 20,000 (1380) CXO9900 CXB9900 CXK9902
Medium Pressure ¾ (19.1) 20,000 (1380) CXO12 CXB12 CXK1202
Medium Pressure 1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) CXO16 CXB16 CXK1602
Medium Pressure 1-½ (38.1) 15,000 (1034) CXO240 CXB240 -
High Pressure 1 (25.4) 43,000 (2964) 43CO16 43CB16 -
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 40,000 (2760) - - -
High Pressure ¼ (6.35) 60,000 (4140) CKO4400 CB4401 CK4402
High Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 60,000 (4140) CKO6600 CB6601 CK6602
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 60,000 (4140) CKO9900 CB9901 CK9902

Fittings and Tubing
Medium and High Pressure Line Filters

DESCRIPTION Item
With the dual-disc design, large contaminant particles
O.D. Pressure
are trapped by the upstream filter element before they Duty Type Tube Size Rating
can reach and clog the smaller micron-size downstream in. (mm) psi (bar)
Dual Cup
element. Filter elements can be easily replaced. Disc Type
Downstream/upstream micron size 35/65 is standard. 5/10
Medium
or 10/35 also available when specified. Pressure
¼ (6.35) 20,000 (1380) - CXF4
Medium
⅜ (9.53) CXF6 C
High Flow Cup-Type Line Filters are recommended in Pressure
20,000 (1380) -
high pressure systems requiring both high flow rates and Medium
⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 20,000 (1380) CLFX9900 CXF9
maximum filter surface area. Widely used in the industrial Pressure
and chemical processing fields, the cup design offers as Medium

¾ (19.1) 20,000 (1380) - CXF12
Pressure
much as six times the effective filter area as compared
Medium
to disc-type units. In addition, the filter elements can Pressure
1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) - CXF16
be quickly and easily replaced. Sintered cup elements
High
available in choice of 5, 35 or 65 micron sizes. 1 (25.4) 43,000 (2964) - -
Pressure
FEATURES High
⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 40,000 (2760) - -
Pressure
• Disc and cup filters design
High
• Operating temperatures from -423°F to 1200°F Pressure
¼ (6.35) 60,000 (4140) CLF4400 CF4
• Coned-and-threaded connection High
⅜ (9.53) CLF6600
• Medium pressure sizes: 1/4", 3/8", 9/16", 3/4", and 1" Pressure
60,000 (4140) CF6
tube size High

⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 60,000 (4140) CLF9900 CF9
• High pressure sizes: 1/4", 3/8" and 9/16" tube size Pressure
• Various filter micron sizes available *See main catalog for complete model number and micron sizes
Safety Heads
DESCRIPTION Item
Safety Heads offer an economical and dependable relief
O.D. Pressure
port to guard against system over-pressure. Medium Duty Type Tube Size Rating
Pressure Series CSX features coned-and-threaded tube in. (mm) psi (bar)
connection with maximum rupture pressures to 20,000 psi. Safety
Heads
High Pressure Series CS features coned-and-threaded
Medium Pressure ¼ (6.35) 20,000 (1380) CSX4600*
tube connection and maximum rupture pressure to
Medium Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 20,000 (1380) CSX6600*
110,000 psi.
Medium Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 20,000 (1380) CSX9600*
FEATURES Medium Pressure ¾ (19.1) 20,000 (1380) -
• Non-rotating double-cone plug design avoids galling and Medium Pressure 1 (25.4) 20,000 (1380) -
scoring of safety head or connection during installation High Pressure 1 (25.4) 43,000 (2964) -
• Reduces likelihood of leakage. High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 40,000 (2760) -
• Accommodates discs with rupture pressures as low as High Pressure ¼ (6.35) 60,000 (4140) CS4600*
90 psi to 60,000 psi and above
High Pressure ⅜ (9.53) 60,000 (4140) CS6600*
• Interchangeable hold-down rings permit use of several
High Pressure ⁹∕₁₆ (14.3) 60,000 (4140) CS9600*
different sizes and types of rupture discs in a single safety
head *See main catalog for complete model number.
• Installs in any standard Parker Autoclave Engineers
coupling, elbow, cross or tee
• Cold-worked Type 316 SS body hold down gland and
plug
• Hold down rings are corrosion resistant stainless steel

Fittings and Tubing
Medium and High Pressure Tubing

DESCRIPTION
Parker Autoclave’s medium pressure tubing is capable of operating to 20,000 psi and range in sizes from 1/4” to 1-1/2”
tube size. High-pressure tubing is capable of operating to 150,000 psi and range in sizes from 1/4” to 1” tube size.
Manufactured from dual rated 316/316L and 304/304L cold worked stainless steel.
FEATURES
• Coned-and-threaded connection
• Medium pressure sizes: 1/4”, 3/8”, 9/16”, 3/4”, 1” and 1-1/2”
C • High pressure sizes: 1/4”, 5/16”, 3/8”, 9/16”, and 1”
• Operating temperatures from -423°F to 1200°F
• Stock tubing lengths from 20 to 26.5 foot
• Special material and special length tubing available
• Inspected and tested for quality assurance
Tube Size in.
Wall Flow Working Pressure psi (bar)
Fits (mm)
Tube Thickness Area
Duty Type Item Connection
Material O.D. I.D. Nom. in. in.2 -325 to 100°F
200°F 400°F 600°F 800°F
Type in. in. (-198 to
(mm) (mm2) (93°C) (204°C) (316°C) (427°C)
(mm) (mm) 38°C)
Medium ¼ .109 .07 .009 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-092 316SS SF250CX
Pressure (6.35) (2.77) (1.78) (5.81) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium ¼ .109 .07 .009 20,000 18,950 17,200 17,000 16,150
MS15-192 304SS SF250CX
Pressure (6.35) (2.77) (1.78) (5.81) (1380) (1310) (1190) (1170) (1110)
Medium ⅜ .203 .086 .032 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-093 316SS SF375CX
Pressure (9.53) (5.16) (2.18) (20.65) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium ⅜ .203 .086 .032 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-193 304SS SF375CX
Pressure (9.53) (5.16) (2.18) (20.65) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium 9
∕16 .312 .125 .076 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-085 316SS SF562CX
Pressure (14.3) (7.92) (3.18) (49.03) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium 9
∕16 .312 .125 .076 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-187 304SS SF562CX
Pressure (14.3) (7.92) (3.18) (49.03) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium 9
∕16 .359 .101 .101 15,000 15,000 14,400 13,650 12,670
MS15-097 316SS SF562CX
Pressure (14.3) (9.12) (2.57) (65.16) (1034) (1034) (992) (941) (874)
Medium 9
∕16 .359 .101 .101 15,000 14,170 12,900 12,750 12,670
MS15-194 304SS SF562CX
Pressure (14.3) (9.12) (2.57) (65.16) (1034) (977) (890) (880) (874)
Medium ¾ .438 .156 .151 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-095 316SS SF750CX
Pressure (19.1) (11.13) (3.96) (97.42) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium ¾ .516 .117 .209 15,000 15,000 14,400 13,650 12,670
MS15-098 316SS SF750CX
Pressure (19.1) (13.11) (2.97) (134.84) (1034) (1034) (992) (941) (874)
Medium 1 .562 .219 .248 20,000 20,000 19,250 18,050 16,800
MS15-096 316SS SF1000CX
Pressure (25.4) (14.27) (5.56) (160) (1380) (1380) (1330) (1250) (1160)
Medium 1 .688 .156 .371 15,000 15,000 14,400 13,650 12,670
MS15-099 316SS SF1000CX
Pressure (25.4) (17.48) (3.96) (239.35) (1034) (1034) (992) (941) (874)
Medium 1-½ .937 .281 .589 15,000 15,000 14,430 13,530 12,600
13041 316SS SF1500CX
Pressure (38.1) (23.8 ) (7.15) (444.8 ) (1034) (1034) (995) (932) (868)
High ¼ .083 .083 .005 60,000 60,000 57,750 54,250 50,700
MS15-081 316SS F250C
Pressure (6.35) (2.11) (2.11) (3.22) (4140) (4140) (3980) (3740) (3500)
High ¼ .083 .083 .005 60,000 56,800 51,650 50,700 48,450
MS15-182 304SS F250C
Pressure (6.35) (2.11) (2.11) (3.22) (4140) (3910) (3560) (3500) (3340)
High ⅜ .125 .125 .012 60,000 60,000 57,750 54,250 50,700
MS15-087 316SS F375C
Pressure (9.53) (3.18) (3.18) (7.74) (4140) (4140) (3980) (3740) (3500)
High ⅜ .125 .125 .012 60,000 56,800 51,650 50,700 48,450
MS15-183 304SS F375C
Pressure (9.53) (3.18) (3.18) (7.74) (4140) (3910) (3560) (3500) (3340)
High 9
∕16 .25 .156 .048 40,000 40,000 38,500 36,100 33,800
MS15-090 316SS F562C40
Pressure (14.3) (6.35) (4.02) (31) (2760) (2760) (2655) (2489) (2330)
High 9
∕16 .187 .187 .028 60,000 60,000 57,750 54,250 50,700
MS15-083 316SS F562C
Pressure (14.3) (4.78) (4.78) (18) (4140) (4140) (3980) (3740) (3500)
High 9
∕16 .187 .187 .028 60,000 56,800 51,650 50,700 48,450
MS15-185 304SS F562C
Pressure (14.3) (4.78) (4.78) (18) (4140) (3910) (3560) (3500) (3340)
High 1 .438 .281 .151 43,000 43,000 43,000 41,380 36,330
MS15-211 316SS -
Pressure (25.4) (11.1) (7.14) (97.4) (2964) (2964) (2964) (2853) (2504)

Fittings and Tubing
Medium and High Pressure Nipples

DESCRIPTION
Parker Autoclave’s medium pressure nipples are capable
of operating to 20,000 psi and range in size from 1/4” to
1-1/2” tube size. High-pressure nipples are capable of
operating to 150,000 psi and range in size from 1/4” to 1”
tube size. Standard nipples are available in 316 and 304
stainless steel.
FEATURES C
• Pre-machined nipples available from stock
• Coned-and-threaded connection
• Medium pressure sizes: 1/4”, 3/8”, 9/16”, 3/4”, 1” and
1-1/2” tube size
• High pressure sizes: 1/4”, 5/16”, 3/8”, 9/16”, and 1” tube
size
• Manufactured from cold worked stainless steel
• Operating temperatures from -423°F to 1200°F
• Stock nipple lengths from 3.0” to 12.0”
• Special material and special length nipples available
Tube Size in
Item
Working Fits (mm) Pressure at
Duty
Connection O.D. I.D. 100ºF (38ºC)
Type 2.75” 3” 4” 6” 8” 10” 12”
Type in. In. psi (bar)
Length Length Length Length Length Length Length
(mm) (mm)
Medium ¼ .109 20,000
SF250CX CNX4402 CNX4403 CNX4404 CNX4406 CNX4408 CNX44010 CNX44012
Pressure (6.35) (2.77) (1380)
Medium ⅜ .203 20,000
SF375CX CNX6603 CNX6604 CNX6606 CNX6608 CNX66010 CNX66012
Pressure (9.53) (5.16) (1380)
Medium ⁹∕₁₆ .312 20,000
SF562CX CNX9904 CNX9906 CNX9908 CNX99010 CNX99012
Pressure (14.3) (7.92) (1380)
Medium ⁹∕₁₆ .359 15,000
SF562CX CNLX9904 CNLX9906 CNLX9908 CNLX99010 CNLX99012
Pressure (14.3) (9.12) (1034)
Medium ¾ .438 20,000
SF750CX CNX1204 CNX1206 CNX1208 CNX12010 CNX12012
Pressure (19.1) (11.1) (1380)
Medium ¾ .515 15,000
SF750CX CNLX1204 CNLX1206 CNLX1208 CNLX12010 CNLX12012
Pressure (19.1) (13.1) (1034)
Medium 1 .562 20,000
SF1000CX CNX1606 CNX1608 CNX16010 CNX16012
Pressure (25.4) (14.3) (1380)
Medium 1 .688 15,000
SF1000CX CNLX1606 CNLX1608 CNLX16010 CNLX16012
Pressure (25.4) (17.5) (1034)
Medium 1-½ .937 15,000 CNLX2408
SF1500CX CNLX2406 * CNLX24010 * CNLX24012 *
Pressure (38.1) (23.79) (1034) *
High ¼ .083 60,000
F250C CN4402 CN4403 CN4404 CN4406 CN4408 CN44010 CN44012
Pressure (6.35) (2.11) (4140)
High ⅜ .125 60,000
F375C CN6603 CN6604 CN6606 CN6608 CN66010 CN66012
Pressure (9.53) (3.18) (4140)
High ⁹∕₁₆ .187 60,000
F562C CN9904 CN9906 CN9908 CN99010 CN99012
Pressure (14.3) (4.78) (4140)
High ⁹∕₁₆ .250 40,000 40CN9904
F562C40 40CN9906 * 40CN9908 * 40CN99010 * 40CN99012 *
Pressure (14.3) (6.35) (2760) *
High 1 .438 43,000
F1000C43 43CN1606 43CN1608 43CN16010 43CN16012
Pressure (25.4) (11.1) (2964)
* only available in 316 material
item numbers in table refer to type 316 stainless steel, unless specified.

Fittings and Tubing
High Pressure Ball Valves

DESCRIPTION
Autoclave Engineers’ Ball Valves are designed for on-
off, high flow, high pressure applications. The one-piece
trunnion mounted stem/ball eliminates the shear failure
common in two-piece designs. Re-torqueable seat glands
result in longer seat life and low friction stem seal reduces
actuation torque and enhances cycle life. They can be
C operated safely up to 20,000 psi and up to 400°F, and up
to 500°F with the high temperature option. 2-way, 3-way &
4-way switching and crossover styles are available.
Double Block and Bleed Ball Valve

Series 6DB Double Block Valve is a 2-stem ball valve
combined with a separate needle valve that provides a
convenient method of blocking and bleeding an instrument
injection port, gauge, or provides drain line isolation,
decreasing leak points and reducing overall weight. This
full port quarter turn double ball valve is designed for
operation up to 15,000 psi.
Subsea Series Ball Valves

Subsea Ball Valves have been designed to fulfill the
petroleum industries demand for externally pressurized
components. They incorporate the necessary design
features to provide a reliable externally pressurized valve
for the subsea industry and simplified the mounting for
ROV, diver, or remote actuation capabilities. These 2-way
and 3-way valves are able to withstand up to 20,000 psi
internal pressures at up to 12,500’ water depth.

Fittings and Tubing
High Pressure Ball Valves - Continued

HOW TO ORDER

XXXX XX X XX X XX XXXX
Table 1 Valve Series Table 5 End Connection Type2

2B 2 Way L Low Pressure
3B 3 Way M Medium Pressure C
3BD 3 Way Diverter H High Pressure
4B 4 Way Crossover P NPT
4BS 4 Way Switching Table 6 End Connection Size
6DB 3/8" Double Block and Bleed 2 ⅛”
S2B 2 Way Subsea Series 4 ¼”
S3B 3 Way Subsea 6 ⅜”
S3BD 3 Way Subsea Diverter 8 ½”
Table 2 Ball Orifice 9 ⁹∕₁₆”
3 ³∕₁₆” 12 ¾”
4 ¼” 16 1”
6 ⅜” Table 7 Options
8 ½” -HT High Temp.
12 ¾” -AO Air to Open
16 1” -AC Air to Close
Table 3 Material* -AOC Air to Open/Close
S 316 SS -EO1 Electric 120 VAC
Table 4 Maximum Rated Pressure1 -EO2 Electric 220 VAC
5 5000 psi -EO3 Electric 240 VAC
10 10000 psi
*For other options consult Rawson
15 15000 psi Matrix can build valves not yet available. Please refer to main catalog for exact size/
valve series selection
20 20,000 psi
¹Pressure chosen after considering orifice size, connection and temperature
requirements. See main catalog for all available operations
²Low Pressure connection sizes 1/8" through 1/2", Medium and High Pressure
connections not available in 1/8" or 1/2"

Fittings and Tubing
Manifold Blocks
DESCRIPTION
Parker Autoclave Engineers will design and build pressure manifolds
to meet specific installation, layout and pressure requirements. These
manifolds are capable of withstanding pressures from vacuum to 60,000
psi (4137 bar), and are available in a variety of materials and sizes.
Among the pressure connections that can be incorporated are Parker
Autoclave Engineers’ low, medium and high pressure, NPT, SAE, BSP
C and others. Transitions in system line sizes and tubing pressure series
can be accomplished through a specialty manifold. These manifolds are
appropriate wherever pressure tubing systems are utilized.
FEATURES
• Custom connections including number and type
• Special materials
• Pressures from vacuum to 100,000 psi (6895 bar)
Relief Valves
Series RVP (Metal Seat), RVS (Soft Seat)
DESCRIPTION
Series RVP & RVS relief valves provide reliable venting of gases
or liquids for set pressures from 1,500 psi to 60,000 psi. Standard
temperature range on RVP models is -423° F to 400° F. High
temperature option to 750° F also available. Temperature range on RVS
model is 32° F to 400° F. (Note: Seat material is Arlon).
These precision valves are designed for pressure gas systems,

cryogenic systems, petrochemical applications and other special
systems. They are capable of handling air, gases, steam, vapor and
liquids. They are not recommended for steam boiler applications and are
not ASME code stampable.
Relief valves are designed to open proportionally to increasing back

pressure and, therefore, are not recommended for applications requiring
immediate full valve flow at set pressure (such as decompositions,
polymerizations, etc.). Full flow of relief valve is defined at 10% over set
pressure.
Connection Size & Type (inches) Orifice Pressure Rating PSIG @ 100ºF (bar @ 38ºC)
Seat Type Item
Inlet Outlet FNPT in (mm) Minimum Set Maximum Set Maximum Back
Metal 5RVP9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .312 (7.92) 3,000 (207) 5,000 (345) 500 (34.5)
Metal 10RVP9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .250 (6.35) 3,000 (207) 10,000 (690) 500 (34.5)
Metal 15RVP9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .188 (4.78) 10,000 (689) 15,000 (1034) 500 (34.5)
Metal 20RVP9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .156 (4.02) 15,000 (1034) 20,000 (1379) 500 (34.5)
Metal 30RVP6072 F375C ¾ (19.1) .125 (3.18) 20,000 (1379 30,000 (2068) 500 (34.5)
Metal 45RVP9072 F562C ¾ (19.1) .093 (2.36 25,000 (1724) 45,000 (3103) 500 (34.5)
Metal 60RVP6072 F375C ¾ (19.1) .078 (1.98) 30,000 (2060) 60,000 (4137) 500 (34.5)
Soft 5RVS9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .312 (7.92) 1,500 (103) 5,000 (345) 500 (34.5)
Soft 10RVS9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .250 (6.35) 5,000 (345) 10,000 (690) 500 (34.5)
Soft 20RVS9072 SF562CX ¾ (19.1) .156 (4.02) 10,000 (690) 20,000 (1379) 500 (34.5)

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • High Purity Manifolds,
Fittings and Tubing
VNE Egmo
High Purity Stainless Steel Fittings and Tubing

SciMax
DESCRIPTION
SCiMax Semiconductor Flow Equipment is specially designed to
meet the stringent standards of the semiconductor industry, delivering
maximum results.Products meet ASTM A269/A270 and A632 Material
Composition Standards and ASTM A269 and A632 Mechanical Test
Standards. C
FEATURES
• Maximum Guaranteed Ra
Using unique polishing technology, EGMO guarantees the RA in all
internal surfaces, including bent areas where it is difficult to polish and
difficult to measure.
• Maximum Cleanability
The multi step cleaning cycle (degreasing, pickling, and electro-
polishing) is conducted to ensure that products are cleaned with
a perfect passivation layer. Final cleaning with ultra pure water is
undertaken in a clean room.
• Maximum Availability
State of the art manufacturing facilities and full marketing, distribution,
and support in Europe, the USA, and Asia enables EGMO to supply
semiconductor flow equipment of the highest quality standards to meet
the customer’s demands.
• Full Traceability
Each step of our production process is documented and recorded
starting from raw materials through finished goods.
Id Ra (Inch/ Surface Final Packing

Item Application Material Packing & Capping
Meter) Treatment Cleaning Environment Area
SCiMax 5 Ultra High Purity systems 316L 5/.125 EP UPW 18MO Class 10 UHP N2 purge + PE cap +
Double PE bag
SCiMax10 Ultra High Purity systems 316L 10/.25 EP UPW 18MO Class 10 UHP N2 purge + PE cap +
Double PE bag
SCiMax15 High purity systems 316L 15/.375 MP*/EP DI-WATER Class 1,000 N2 purge +PE cap + PE bag
SCiMax20 CDA, GN2, brething air 316L 20/.5 MP* DI-WATER Class 1,000 N2 purge +PE cap + PE bag
systems
SCiMax 25 CDA, GN2, Instrument air 316L 25/.625 MP* DI-WATER Class 1,000 N2 purge + PE cap + PE bag
SCiMax 30 CDA, GN2 304L/316L 30/.75 MP* DI-WATER Class 1,000 N2 purge + PE cap + PE bag
SCiMax 40 Main CDA, GN2, HI-VACUUM 304L/316L 40/1.0 Bright finish DI-WATER Control PE cap + PE bag
Environment
* MP - Seamless tubes are bright annealed only.

Fittings and Tubing
High Purity Stainless Steel Fittings and

Tubing - Continued
HOW TO ORDER TUBING

XXXX XXXX XX XX XXXX XXXX
C Table 1 Model Table 5 O.D. Size

SM40 SCiMax 40 .25 ¼”
SM30 SCiMax 30 .375 ⅜”
SM25 SCiMax 25 .5 ½”
SM15 SCiMax 15 .75 ¾”
SM10 SCiMax 10 1.0 1”
SM5 SCiMax 5 1.5 1½
Table 2 Material 2.0 2”
316L 316L Stainless Steel 2.5 2½”
304L 304L Stainless Steel 3.0 3”
Table 3 Surface Treatment 4.0 4”
EP Electro Polish 6.0 6”
MP* Mechanical Polish Table 6 Wall Thickness O.D. Size Availability
BA Bright Annealed .035 0.035” ¼”, ⅜”
Table 4 Tube Type .049 0.049” ½”
WE Welded .065 0.065” ½” -3”
SL Seamless .083 0.083” 4”
.109 0.109” 6”
* MP - Seamless tubes are bright annealed only.

Fittings and Tubing
High Purity Stainless Steel Fittings and

Tubing - Continued
HOW TO ORDER FITTINGS

XXXX XXXX XX XXXX XXXX
Table 1 Model Table 5 O.D. Size

C
SM40 SCiMax 40 .25 ¼”
SM30 SCiMax 30 .375 ⅜”
SM20 SCiMax 20 .75 ¾”
SM15 SCiMax 15 1.0 1”
SM10 SCiMax 10 1.5 1½
SM5 SCiMax 5 2.0 2”
Table 2 Material 2.5 2½”
Table 3 Surface Treatment 6.0 6”
EP Electro Polish
MP Mechanical Polish
Table 4 Fitting Shape
EL90 Elbow 90
EL45 Elbow 45
ETEE Equal Tee
ECRS Equal Cross
ECAP End Cap

Fittings and Tubing
High Purity Manifolds

Multi Tee
FEATURES
• Advanced and Unique internal welding technology
• Reduced dead leg in branch
• Reduced purge time
• Improved seam surface
C • Minimum weld per manifold
• Electropolish and passivation after welding
• Short installation time - Cost reduction
SPECIFICATIONS
SI.D FINISH Electropolish < 15 Ra
Mechanical Polish < 30 Ra
O.D FINISH Mechanical Polish or Electropolish
WALL THICKNESS 0.5 - 3 mm
MANIFOLD Weld connection SPECIFICATIONS
OUTLETS
APPLICATIONS Utility gas line laterals
Gland connection
Process Cooling Water
Clamp ferrule
Short manifolds for gas cabinets
Ball valve
PRODUCT RANGE Diameter 1/4” - 6”
Diaphragm valve
Length - up to 6 Meter
MATERIALS 304L
Outlets - Weld connection, Ball-valve, Gland connection,
316L (available in other alloys) Diaphragm valve
Inspection Tests & Documentation SciMax SciMax SciMax SciMax SciMax SciMax
Standard / Value SciMax 5
Description 40 30 25 20 15 10
Material Composition ASTM A269/A270, A632, JIS3459 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mechanical Tests ASTM A269, A632, JIS3459 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Visual Inspection 100% Internal procedure Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Dimensional Measurements ANSI B31.3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Hydrocarbon Cleaning Inspection CGA G-4.1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Helium Leak Test for Welded Fittings 1*10^-9 scc/sec Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inspection Certification EN 10204 3.1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ra Measurements ASME B46.1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Particles Test <10 particles (greater than 0.1µ Yes Yes
ft^3)
Moisture Test for Tube: Additional Moisture Δ0.5 ppm Yes Yes
on UHP N2 Purged Gas
Ultra Pure Water Resistivity 18 MΩ Yes Yes
SEM TEST - Scanning Electron Microscopy SEMATECH 90120401B 40 defects Yes Yes
for Defects (magnification*3500)
XPS TEST - X Ray Photoelectron SEMATECH 90120403B 1.5/1< Yes Yes
Spectroscopy for Analysis of Cr/Fe
XPS TEST - X Ray Photoelectron SEMATECH 90120403B 3/1< Yes Yes
Spectroscopy for Analysis of CrO/FeO
AES TEST - Auger Electron Spectroscopy for SEMATECH 91060573B / 20 < Yes Yes
Measuring of Oxide Thickness

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • Installation Support
Channel-Track & Tube-Way
Punched Angle
DESCRIPTION
Punched angle consists of 2" or 3" wide (each leg) of
perforated bar with round holes for 1/2" bolts and square
holes for 1/4" carriage bolt or machine screw. They may
also be ordered punched on one leg only. Punched angle
is available in aluminum, hot dipped galvanized steel,
stainless steel or fiberglass and in 10 ft or 20 ft lengths.
Angles when combined with corresponding fittings create C
protective instrument support systems for single tube,
multi-tube and electronic cable in marine and industrial
environments. Manufactured in the USA.
Size Material Item

2” X 2” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A200A200
2” X 2” X ⅛” H.D.G.A.F. Steel HG200A200
2” X 2” X 12, 14, 16 ga. 304 Stainless Steel SS200A200-(*)4
2” X 2” X ⅛” Fiberglass FG200A200
3” X 3” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A300A300
3” X 3” X ⅛” H.D.G.A.F. Steel HG300A300
3” X 3” X ⅛” Fiberglass FG300A300
Note:
Insert 2 For (*) For 12 Gauge
H.D.G.A.F - Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication steel

Fittings for Punched Angle

2" Angle Connector 3” Angle Connector
Item Material Item Material
A200ACN Aluminum A300ACN Aluminum
HG200ACN H.D.G.A.F. HG300ACN H.D.G.A.F
SS200ACN-4 T-304 S.S SS300ACN-4 T-304 S.S
SS200ACN-6 T-316 S.S. SS300ACN-6 T-316 S.S.
C
Inside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with Inside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with

3" Radius for 2" Punched Angle 3" Radius for 3" Punched Angle
A200AIHE Aluminum A300AIHE Aluminum
HG200AIHE H.D.G.A.F HG300AIHE H.D.G.A.F
SS200AIHE-4 T-304 S.S SS300AIHE-4 T-304 S.S
SS200AIHE-6 T-316 S.S. SS300AIHE-6 T-316 S.S.
Inside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with Outside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with

A200AOHE Aluminum A300AOHE Aluminum
HG200AOHE H.D.G.A.F. HG300AOHE H.D.G.A.F
SS200AOHE-4 T-304 S.S SS300AOHE-4 T-304 S.S
SS200AOHE-6 T-316 S.S. SS300AOHE-6 T-316 S.S.
Outside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with Outside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with

A200AOHE-12 Aluminum A300AOHE-12 Aluminum
HG200AOHE-12 H.D.G.A.F HG300AOHE-12 H.D.G.A.F
SS200AOHE-12-4 T-304 S.S SS300AOHE-12-4 T-304 S.S
SS200AOHE-12-6 T-316 S.S. SS300AOHE-12-6 T-316 S.S.
Inside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with Inside Horizontal/Vertical Elbow with

A200AIHE-14 Aluminum A300AIHE-14 Aluminum
HG200AIHE-14 H.D.G.A.F. HG300AIHE-14 H.D.G.A.F
SS200AIHE-14-4 T-304 S.S SS300AIHE-14-4 T-304 S.S
SS200AIHE-14-6 T-316 S.S. SS300AIHE-14-6 T-316 S.S.

1" Flanged Punched 2" Flanged Punched

Channel Channel
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Punched channel with 1" flanges on either side of the Punched channel with 2" flanges on either side of the
punched bar. The punched bar portions consists of round punched bar. The punched bar portions consists of round
holes for 1/2" bolts and square holes for 1/4" carriage bolt holes for 1/2" bolts and square holes for 1/4" carriage bolt
or machine screw. Channels available in either aluminum, or machine screw. Channels available in either aluminum,
hot dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel, in 1", hot dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel, in 2", 4" and C
1-1/2", 2", 4" and 6" widths and in 10 ft or 20 ft lengths. 6" widths and in 10 ft or 20 ft lengths. Punched channels,
Punched channels, when combined with corresponding when combined with corresponding fittings, create
fittings, create protective instrument support systems for protective instrument support systems for single tube,
single tube, multi-tube and electronic cable in marine and multi-tube and electronic cable in marine and industrial
industrial environments. Manufactured in the USA. environments. Manufactured in the USA.
Dimensions Material Item Dimensions Material Item

1” X1” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A100C100 2” X 2” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A200C200
1” X 1” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG100C100-(*) 2” X 2” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG200C200-(*)
1” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 304 S. S. SS100C100-(*)4 2” X 2” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 304 S. S. SS200C200-(*)4
1.5” X 1” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A150C100 4” X 2” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A400C200
1.5” X 1” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG150C100-(*) 4” X 2” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG400C200-(*)
1.5” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 304 S. S. SS150C100-(*)4 4” X 2” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 304 S. S. SS400C200-(*)4
1.5” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 316 S. S. SS150C100-(*)6 4” X 2” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 316 S. S. SS400C200-(*)6
2” X 1” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A200C100 6” X 2” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A600C200
2” X 1” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG200C100-(*) 6” X 2” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG600C200-(*)
4” X 1” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A400C100 Note:
Insert 2 for (*) for 12 Gauge
4” X 1” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG400C100-(*)
4” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 304 S. S. SS400C100-(*)4 Insert 6 for (*) for 16 Gauge
Example: SS400C200-66
4” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 316 S. S. SS400C100-(*)6
Denotes: 4” Wide X 2” Deep X 16 GA. X 316 S.S. Channel
6” X 1” X ⅛” 6063-T6 Aluminum A600C100 H.D.G.A.F - Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication steel
6” X 1” X 12, 14 GA. H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG600C100-(*)
6” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 304 S. S. SS600C100-(*)4
6” X 1” X 12, 14, 16 GA. 316 S. S. SS600C100-(*)6
Note:
Example: SS400C100-66
Denotes: 4” Wide X 2” Deep X 16 GA. X 316 S.S. Channel
H.D.G.A.F - Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication steel

Fittings for 1" Flanged Punched Channel

Channel Connector
Aluminum H.D.G.A.F. Stainless
Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CN HG101CN SS101CN
1-½” A151CN HG151CN SS151CN
A601CN HG601CN SS601CN
C
6”
Channel Outside Vertical Elbow, 3" Radius

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101COVE HG101COVE SS101COVE
1-½” A151COVE HG151COVE SS151COVE
Channel Inside Vertical Elbow, 3" Radius for 1" Flanged Punched Channel
Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CIVE HG101CIVE SS101CIVE
1-½” A151CIVE HG151CIVE SS151CIVE
Channel Horizontal Elbow, 3" Radius

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CHE HG101CHE SS101CHE
1-½” A151CHE HG151CHE SS151CHE
Channel Horizontal Cross, 3" Radius

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CHC HG101CHC SS101CHC
1-½” A151CHC HG151CHC SS151CHC
Channel Horizontal Tee, 3" Radius

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CHT HG101CHT SS101CHT
1-½” A151CHT HG151CHT SS151CHT

Fittings for 1” Flanged Punched Channel - Continued

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CHE-12 HG101CHE-12 SS101CHE-12-4
1-½” A151CHE-12 HG151CHE-12 SS151CHE-12-4
2” A201CHE-12 HG201CHE-12 SS201CHE-12-4
4” A401CHE-12 HG401CHE-12 SS401CHE-12-4
C
6” A601CHE-12 HG601CHE-12 SS601CHE-12-4

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101COVE-12 HG101COVE-12 SS101COVE-12-4
1-1/2” A151COVE-12 HG151COVE-12 SS151COVE-12-4
Channel Inside Vertical Elbow, 12" Radius

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CIVE-14 HG101CIVE-14 SS101CIVE-14-4
1-1/2” A151CIVE-14 HG151CIVE-14 SS151CIVE-14-4

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CHT-12 HG101CHT-12 SS101CHT-12-4
1-1/2” A151CHT-12 HG151CHT-12 SS151CHT-12-4
2” A201CHT-12 HG201CHT-12 SS201CHT-12-4
4” A401CHT-12 HG401CHT-12 SS401CHT-12-4
6” A601CHT-12 HG601CHT-12 SS601CHT-12-4

Channel Width
Item Item Item
1” A101CHC-12 HG101CHC-12 SS101CHC-12-4
1-1/2” A151CHC-12 HG151CHC-12 SS151CHC-12-4
2” A201CHC-12 HG201CHC-12 SS201CHC-12-4
4” A401CHC-12 HG401CHC-12 SS401CHC-12-4
6” A601CHC-12 HG601CHC-12 SS601CHC-12-4

Fittings for 2" Flanged Punched Channel

Channel Connector
Channel Width
Item Item Item

Channel Width
Item Item Item

Channel Width
Item Item Item
2” A202CHC HG202CN SS202CN

Channel Width
Item Item Item

Channel Width
Item Item Item

Fittings for 2” Flanged Punched Channel - Continued

Channel Width
Item Item Item
C
Channel Width
Item Item Item
2” A202CHE-12 HG202CHE-12 SS202CHE-12-4
4” A402CHE-12 HG402CHE-12 SS402CHE-12-4
6” A602CHE-12 HG602CHE-12 SS602CHE-12-4

Channel Width
Item Item Item

Channel Width
Item Item Item

Channel Width
Item Item Item
2” A202CHT-12 HG202CHT-12 SS202CHT-12-4
4” A402CHT-12 HG402CHT-12 SS402CHT-12-4
6” A602CHT-12 HG602CHT-12 SS602CHT-12-4

Channel Width
Item Item Item
2” A202CHC-12 HG202CHC-12 SS202CHC-12-4
4” A402CHC-12 HG402CHC-12 SS402CHC-12-4
6” A602CHC-12 HG602CHC-12 SS602CHC-12-4

Punched Flat Bar

DESCRIPTION
Punched channels, when configured with corresponding
fittings, create protective instrument support systems for
single tube, multi-tube and electronic cable in marine and
industrial environments. Available in aluminum, hot dipped
galvanized steel, stainless steel and fiberglass and in 2", 3",
4" and 6" widths. Punched flat bar consists of round holes for
C 1/2" bolts and square holes for 1/4" carriage bolt or machine
screw. Manufactured in the USA.
Dimensions Material Item

2” X 1/8 X 10’ 6063-T6 Aluminum A200FB
2” X 1/8 X 10’ H.D.G.A.F. STEEL HG200FB
2” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 304 S. S. SS200FB-(*)4
2” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 316 S. S. SS200FB-(*)6
2” X 1/8 X 10’ Fiberglass FG200FB
3” X 1/8 X 10’ 6063-T6 Aluminum A300FB
3” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 304 S. S. SS300FB-(*)4
3” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 316 S. S. SS300FB-(*)6
4” X 1/8 X 10’ 6063-T6 Aluminum A400FB
4” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 304 S. S. SS400FB-(*)4
4” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 316 S. S. SS400FB-(*)6
6” X 1/8 X 10’ 6063-T6 Aluminum A600FB
6” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 304 S. S. SS600FB-(*)4
6” X 12, 14, 16 GA. X 10’ 316 S. S. SS600FB-(*)6
Note:
Example: SS300FB-24
Denotes: 3” Wide X 12 Gauge 304 Stainless Steel
H.D.G.A.F.- Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication steel

Tubing Clamps
Single Line Tubing Clamps Duplex Line Tubing Clamps
Channel-Track Single Line Tubing Clamps are precision Channel-Track Duplex Tubing Clamps are constructed
manufactured from 316SS. All edges have been of high strength, temperature and corrosion resistant
mechanically deburred to protect tubing from any damage. 316SS. These precision manufactured clamps of fer an
These industry proven clamps provide a high strength, easy, positive clamping action that secures two evenly
corrosion resistant means by which to secure single runs spaced instrument tubing lines simultaneously. All sharp
of instrument tubing in an orderly fashion. Packaged in edges have been mechanically deburred to eliminate any
quantities of 50 per bag. Available upon request with #10 possible damage to coated tubing. Packaged in quantities
hole size. of 50 per bag. Available upon request with #10 hole size.
Item Tube Size (o.d.)
Item Tube Size (o.d.)
SCL-25-SS ¼”
DCL-25-SS ¼"
SCL-37-SS ⅜”
DCL-37-SS ⅜"
SCL-50-SS ½”
DCL-50-SS ½
SCL-63-SS ⅝”
SCL-75-SS ¾”
SCL-87-SS ⅞”
SCL-100-SS 1”
SCL-125-SS 1-¼”
Tubing Gang Clamps with Backplates

HOW TO ORDER
XXX X XX XX XX
Table 1
GCL Gang Clamps
Table 2 Tube Diameter
25 1/4" O.D.
37 3/8" O.D.
DESCRIPTION
50 1/2" O.D.
Channel-Track Tubing Gang Clamps with Backplates
are precision engineered devices that gather together Table 3 Material
from two (2) to twenty (20) tubes. With their construction SS 316SS
of 316SS, these clamps of fer a versatile and efficient, Table 4 Tube Capacity
high strength, corrosion resistant method of organizing XX Specify number of tubes (2 to 20), the
multiple runs of tubing. They are mechanically deburred gang clamps back plates will gather
to eliminate any sharp edges which could be damaging Table 5

to coated tubing. Packaged in quantities of 25 per bag. BP Back Plates
Available upon request with #10 hole size.

Tubing Clamps - Continued

Tubing Yoke Clamps
DESCRIPTION
Channel-Track Tubing Yoke Clamps are designed for use
in our perforated angle and channel. These clamps offer
a positive clamping action for one (1) to four (4) tubes
abreast, and can be used for stacking multiple rows of
C tubing for optimum space efficiency. Used with a carriage
bolt and wing nut assemble, they provide a fast easy
installation. They are precision manufactured from 316SS
for maximum corrosion resistance and strength.
Item Tube Size (o.d.) Tube Capacity
SS-25-YC-2 ¼" 1 or 2
SS-25-YC-3 ¼" 3 or 4
SS-37-YC-2 ⅜" 1 or 2
SS-37-YC-3 ⅜" 3 or 4
SS-50-YC-2 ½ 1 or 2
SS-50-YC-3 ½ 3 or 4
SS-75-YC-2 ¾ 1 or 2
Two or Three Directional Spacer Clamps

DESCRIPTION
channel as manufactured by Channel-Track & Tube-Way
Industries, or in 2” x 2” angle. The clamps for 5/8” o.d. and
3/4” tubes can be mounted in either 3”, 4”, or 6” channel
manufactured by Channel-Track & Tube-Way Industries.
Item Tube O.D Mode of Clamping

SRC-2-19-2D ³∕₁₆" Two Directional
SRC-2-25-2D ¼" Two Directional
SRC-2-31-2D ⁵∕₁₆" Two Directional
SRC-2-38-2D ⅜" Two Directional
SRC-2-50-2D ½" Two Directional
SRC-2-63-2D ⅝" Two Directional
FEATURES
SRC-2-75-2D ¾" Two Directional
• Standard materials of construction are 304 S.S. or 316
SRC-2-88-2D ⅞″ Two Directional S.S.
SRC-2-100-2D 1" Two Directional • Standard size are 3/16", 1/4", 5/16", 3/8", 1/2", 5/8", 3/4",
SRC-2-19-3D ³∕₁₆" Three Directional 7/8", and 1'
SRC-2-25-3D ¼" Three Directional • Other imperial sizes as well as metric sizes can be
SRC-2-31-3D ⁵∕₁₆" Three Directional manufactured
SRC-2-38-3D ⅜" Three Directional • Designed to meet the requirements of ASME Boiler
SRC-2-50-3D ½" Three Directional
Pressure Vessel Code, Section lll, Division One,
SRC-2-63-3D ⅝" Three Directional
Subtsection NF
• Can be supplied with Cert. of Compliance and/pr Mill
SRC-2-75-3D ¾" Three Directional
Test Reports
SRC-2-88-3D ⅞″ Three Directional
• For nuclear application clamps are in compliance with
SRC-2-100-3D 1" Three Directional
Federal Code of Regulation 10CFR50

Instrument Stands
Custom Stands
DESCRIPTION
Channel-Track can supply any custom configuration stand
or rack per customer specifications as needed with the
appropriate drawing. Standard offerings consist of the
following:
• Floor Mounts: Single, Double, Triple or Quad Vertical C
Uprights
• Wall Mounts: Single, Double and Triple Vertical Uprights
• Cable Mounts: Single, Double and Triple Vertical
Uprights; Horizontal and Vertical Process Line Mount
• U-bolt Mounts: Single, Double and Triple Vertical
Uprights; Horizontal and Vertical Processs Line Mount
• Strut mounting kits for columns or beams
• Mounting plates or flags for instruments
• Modular square and round tube mounting systems
• Grating clamps, beam clamps, gussets, channel
pushbutton, racks for multiple instruments
Wall Mount Instrument Stands

DESCRIPTION
Channel-Track’s Wall Mount units are made up of a base
plate welded to 2” Schedule 40 pipe sections. Stands
are hot dipped galvanized according to ASTM-A123
after fabrication. Wall mounts are available with one,
two or three vertical uprights for mounting instuments.
Wall mounts may also be manufacturerd from aluminum,
304SS & 316SS and arc spray metalizing, painted, or
powder coated.
Item Design Pipe Size Material Description

WM-RAE-HG-20 Wall Mount Right 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. Consists of a 1/4” thick base plate punched with slotted holes for 1/4” bolts and vertical right
Angle Elbow angle elbow made out of 2” Sch 40 pipe for vertical instrument mount.
WM-RAE-S4-20 Wall Mount Right 2” Schedule 40 304SS Consists of a 1/4” thick base plate punched with slotted holes for 1/4” bolts and vertical right
WM-RAE-S6-20 Wall Mount Right 2” Schedule 40 316SS Consists of a 1/4” thick base plate punched with slotted holes for 1/4” bolts and vertical right
WM-DBL-HG-20 Wall Mount Double 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. Consists of 1/4” thick base plate punched with slotted holes for 1/4” bolts and two vertical
uprights for wall mounting of moderate size instruments.
WM-TRP-HG-20 Wall Mount Triple 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. Consists of 1/4” thick base plate punched with slotted holes for 1/4” bolts and three vertical
uprights for wall mounting of moderate size instruments.
H.D.G.A.F. - Hot Dipped Galvanized after Fabrication

Instrument Stands - Continued

Floor Mount Instrument Stands
DESCRIPTION
Channel-Track’s Floor Mount stands are for the mounting
of instruments at grade level. Stands are fabricated using
2” or 3” Schedule 40 steel pipe welded to a 10”x 10”x
1/4”base plate and coated with hot dipped galvanizing
C to ASTM-A123 after fabrication. They are available with
one, two, three or four vertical uprights. Floor mount
stands may also be manufacturerd from aluminum, 304SS
& 316SS and arc spray metalizing, painted, or powder
coated. Instrument assemblies can be mounted directly on
stands or utilize the “Cable” or U-Bolt” mount assemblies.
Item Design Pipe Size Material Description

FMS-52-HG-20 Floor Mount Single 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMS-52-HG-30 Floor Mount Single 3” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. 3” Sch. 40 pipe, 52” long. For supporting large heavy instruments.
FMS-52-HG-32 Floor Mount Single 2” & 3” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. 40” long 3” Sch 40 pipe plus 12” long section of 2” Sch 40 pipe. Designed to offer
advantages of 3” pipe strength & 2” pipe convenience.
FMS-52-S4-20 Floor Mount Single 2” Schedule 40 304SS 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMS-52-S4-30 Floor Mount Single 3” Schedule 40 304SS 3” Sch. 40 pipe, 52” long. For supporting large heavy instruments.
FMS-52-S4-32 Floor Mount Single 2” & 3” Schedule 40 304SS 40” long 3” Sch 40 pipe plus 12” long section of 2” Sch 40 pipe. Designed to offer
FMS-52-S6-20 Floor Mount Single 2” Schedule 40 316SS 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMS-52-S6-30 Floor Mount Single 3” Schedule 40 316SS 3” Sch. 40 pipe, 52” long. For supporting large heavy instruments.
FMS-52-S6-32 Floor Mount Single 2” & 3” Schedule 40 316SS 40” long 3” Sch 40 pipe plus 12” long section of 2” Sch 40 pipe. Designed to offer
FMD-52-HG-20 Floor Mount Double 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMD-52-S4-20 Floor Mount Double 2” Schedule 40 304SS 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMD-52-S6-20 Floor Mount Double 2” Schedule 40 316SS 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMT-52-HG-20 Floor Mount Triple 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMT-52-S4-20 Floor Mount Triple 2” Schedule 40 304SS 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMT-52-S6-20 Floor Mount Triple 2” Schedule 40 316SS 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
weight instruments.
FMQ-52-HG-20 Floor Mount 2” Schedule 40 H.D.G.A.F. 2” Sch 40. pipe, 52” long floor mount single stand. For supporting moderate size &
Quadruple weight instruments.
H.D.G.A.F. - Hot Dipped Galvanized after Fabrication

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • Instrument Fittings,
Conversions, and Unions
Parker Instrumentation Products Division
Pipe Fittings
DESCRIPTION
The pipe fitting is designed as a leak-free connection for process control, instrumentation, and general plumbing
applications. Available in brass, steel, and stainless steel, this pipe fitting is precision machined from forgings for elbows,
tees and crosses, and from bar stock for straight connectors.
FEATURES
• Quality engineered for instrumentation applications • Rolled male threads for extra strength
• Packaged in sealed, clear plastic shrink wrapped boxes • Straight bodies machined from applicable ASTM bar
for cleanliness stock specifications C
• Working pressures calculated in accordance with Power • Shapes machined from close grain forgings
Piping Code ANSI B31.1 and Refiner Piping Code ANSI • Size ranges from 1/16" through 2" NPT
B31.3. • Materials – 316 Stainless Steel, Brass and Steel. (Other
• All pipe threads are National Pipe Taper (NPT) and materials by special order)
exceed the requirements of ANSI B1.20.1. • All exposed threads protected to prevent damage
HOW TO ORDER
PIPE FITTINGS
Easiest way to configure is to take item code from proceeding pages (values for Tables 1-3)
and add Material Designator

XX XX XXX XX
Table 1 1st End Size Designator* Table 4 Material Designator

1,2,4,6,8,10,12,16,20,24,32 B Brass
Table 2 2nd End Size Designator* SS 316SS
1,2,4,6,8,10,12,16,20,24,32 S Steel
Table 3 Body Designator *See Pipe Dimension table and proceeding pages
Note: Easiest way to configure is to take item from proceeding pages (values for
See Proceeding Pages (ex. MHN for Male Hex Nipple)
Tables 1-3) and add on Material Designator
NOTES: Special Fittings: If there is any question as to the fitting

Size: Pipe thread sizes are designated by the number of desired, particularly for special fitting configurations, it is
sixteenths of an inch. (3/8 NPT pipe = 6/16 = 6) suggested that a customer print be submitted with the
Material: Basic Material Type (B = Brass, SS = 316 fitting request for quote.
Stainless Steel, S = Steel)
Thread Type: All pipe threads are National Pipe Taper
(NPT) unless otherwise designated.
Pipe Dimensions
Straights and Elbows: Call out the largest pipe end first
Pipe
followed by the smaller pipe size. Size
Size
N.P.T. Pipe
R E Ref.
Tees and Crosses: For tees that are the same pipe sizes Designator Thread
(in)
on all ends the size designation 1 ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ – 27 0.38 0.11
is shown below: 2 ⅛ ⅛ – 27 0.38 0.19
• Example: 6-6-6 FT-B would be a 3/8” NPT Female 4 ¼ ¼ – 18 0.56 0.28
Tee in brass.
6 ⅜ ⅜ – 18 0.56 0.41
• Example: 4 FX-SS would be a 1/4” NPT Female
8 ½ ½ – 14 0.75 0.50
Cross in 316 SS.
12 ¾– 14 0.75 0.62
If a reducing tee or cross were specified, each size ¾
must be in sequence. First size the largest run (1 to 2) 16 1 1 – 11-½ 0.94 0.94
and then the branch (3 to 4). 20 1-¼ 1-¼ – 11-½ 0.97 1.25
• Example: 6-6-6-4 FX-SS 24 1-½ 1-½ – 11-½ 1 1.50

32 2 2 – 11-½ 1.03 1.94

Pipe Fittings - Continued

Male Hex Nipple MHN
NPT Thread Male Working Pressures (PSIG)
Item W HEX D (in.) R (in.)
T₁ T₂ Brass Stainless Steel Steel
1-1 MHN ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ 1.06 .38 6000 10000 10500
2-1 MHN ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ 1.06 .38 5600 9100 9700
2-2 MHN ⅛ ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ 1.06 .38 5600 9100 9700
4-1 MHN ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ ⅝ 1.25 .56/.38 4100 7500 8000
C 4-2 MHN ¼ ⅛ ⅝ 1.25 .56/.38 4100 7500 8000

4-4 MHN ¼ ¼ ⅝ 1.45 .56 4100 7500 8000
6-1 MHN ⅜ ¹⁄₁₆ ¾ 1.27 .56/.38 4000 7200 7600
6-2 MHN ⅜ ⅛ ¾ 1.27 .56/.38 4000 7200 7600
6-4 MHN ⅜ ¼ ¾ 1.45 .56 4000 7200 7600
6-6 MHN ⅜ ⅜ ¾ 1.45 .56 4000 7200 7600
8-6 MHN ½ ⅜ ⅞ 1.70 .75/.56 3900 6600 7000
8-8 MHN ½ ½ ⅞ 1.89 .75 3900 6600 7000
12-2 MHN ¾ ⅛ 1-⅛ 1.59 .75/.38 3800 6400 6800
12-4 MHN ¾ ¼ 1-⅛ 1.78 .75/.56 3800 6400 6800
12-6 MHN ¾ ⅜ 1-⅛ 1.78 .75/.56 3800 6400 6800
12-8 MHN ¾ ½ 1-⅛ 1.97 .75 3800 6400 6800
12-12 MHN ¾ ¾ 1-⅛ 1.97 .75 3800 6400 6800
16-2 MHN 1 ⅛ 1-⅜ 1.78 .94/.38 2700 4600 4900
16-4 MHN 1 ¼ 1-⅜ 1.97 .94/.56 2700 4600 4900
16-6 MHN 1 ⅜ 1-⅜ 1.97 .94/.56 2700 4600 4900
16-8 MHN 1 ½ 1-⅜ 2.16 .94/.75 2700 4600 4900
16-12 MHN 1 ¾ 1-⅜ 2.09 .94/.75 2700 4600 4900
16-16 MHN 1 1 1-⅜ 2.34 .94 2700 4600 4900
20-16 MHN 1-¼ 1 1-¾ 2.45 .97/.94 2000 3500 3700
20-20 MHN 1-¼ 1-¼ 1-¾ 2.48 .97 2000 3500 3700
24-24 MHN 1-½ 1-½ 2 2.61 1.00 1800 2900 3100
Male Close Nipple MCN
NPT Thread Working Pressure (PSIG)

Item D (in.) R (in.)
Male Brass Stainless Steel Steel
1-1 MCN ¹⁄₁₆ .75 .34 6000 10000 10500
2-2 MCN ⅛ .75 .34 5600 9100 9700
4-4 MCN ¼ 1.13 .49 4100 7500 8000
6-6 MCN ⅜ 1.13 .48 4000 7200 7600
8-8 MCN ½ 1.50 .66 3900 6600 7000
12-12 MCN ¾ 1.50 .66 3800 6400 6800
16-16 MCN 1 1.88 .84 2700 4600 4900


Male Hex Long Nipple MHLN NPT Thread
Working Pressure (PSIG)
Item Male W HEX D (in.) R (in.)
1-1 MHLN-(*) ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ * .38 6000 10000 10500
2-2 MHLN-(*) ⅛ ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ * .38 5600 9100 9700
2-2 MHLN-1½ ⅛ ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ 1.50 .38 5600 9100 9700
2-2 MHLN-2 ⅛ ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ 2.00 .38 5600 9100 9700
2-2 MHLN-2½ ⅛ ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ 2.50 .38 5600 9100 9700
4-4 MHLN-(*) ¼ ¼ ⅝ * .56 4100 7500 8000 C
4-4 MHLN-2 ¼ ¼ ⅝ 2.00 .56 4100 7500 8000
4-4 MHLN-2½ ¼ ¼ ⅝ 2.50 .56 4100 7500 8000
4-4 MHLN-3 ¼ ¼ ⅝ 3.00 .56 4100 7500 8000
4-4 MHLN-4 ¼ ¼ ⅝ 4.00 .56 4100 7500 8000
6-6 MHLN-(*) ⅜ ⅜ ¾ * .56 4000 7200 7600
8-8 MHLN-(*) ½ ½ ⅞ * .75 3900 6600 7000
8-8 MHLN-2 ½ ½ ⅞ 2.00 .75 3900 6600 7000
8-8 MHLN-3 ½ ½ ⅞ 3.00 .75 3900 6600 7000
*Specify Length
Female Hex Coupling FHC Item

NPT Thread Female
W HEX D (in.)
Working Pressure (PSIG)
1-1 FHC ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ½ .75 4500 7500 8000
2-1 FHC ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ ⅝ .75 4000 6400 6800
2-2 FHC ⅛ ⅛ ⅝ .75 4000 6400 6800
4-1 FHC ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ ¾ .92 4300 6600 7000
4-2 FHC ¼ ⅛ ¾ .94 4300 6600 7000
4-4 FHC ¼ ¼ ¾ 1.13 4300 6600 7000
6-1 FHC ⅜ ¹⁄₁₆ ⅞ .95 3500 5300 5600
6-2 FHC ⅜ ⅛ ⅞ 1.03 3500 5300 5600
6-4 FHC ⅜ ¼ ⅞ 1.13 3500 5300 5600
6-6 FHC ⅜ ⅜ ⅞ 1.13 3500 5300 5600
8-2 FHC ½ ⅛ 1-⅛ 1.22 3600 5200 5500
8-4 FHC ½ ¼ 1-⅛ 1.38 3600 5200 5500
8-6 FHC ½ ⅜ 1-⅛ 1.50 3600 5200 5500
8-8 FHC ½ ½ 1-⅛ 1.50 3600 5200 5500
12-2 FHC ¾ ⅛ 1-⅜ 1.39 3000 4300 4600
12-4 FHC ¾ ¼ 1-⅜ 1.55 3000 4300 4600
12-6 FHC ¾ ⅜ 1-⅜ 1.69 3000 4300 4600
12-8 FHC ¾ ½ 1-⅜ 1.88 3000 4300 4600
12-12 FHC ¾ ¾ 1-⅜ 1.53 3000 4300 4600
16-2 FHC 1 ⅛ 1-⅝ 1.44 3100 4500 4800
16-4 FHC 1 ¼ 1-⅝ 1.63 3100 4500 4800
16-6 FHC 1 ⅜ 1-⅝ 1.63 3100 4500 4800
16-8 FHC 1 ½ 1-⅝ 1.77 3100 4500 4800
16-12 FHC 1 ¾ 1-⅝ 1.72 3100 4500 4800
16-16 FHC 1 1 1-⅝ 1.89 3100 4500 4800
20-16 FHC 1-¼ 1 2 1.94 2300 3500 3700
20-20 FHC 1-¼ 1-¼ 2 1.94 2300 3500 3700
24-24 FHC 1-½ 1-½ 2-⅜ 1.94 2100 3200 3400


Adapter RA Item
NPT Thread
W HEX D (in.) R (in.)
Working Pressures (PSIG)
Female T₁ Male T₂ Brass Stainless Steel Steel
2-1 RA ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ ⅝ 1.03 .38 4000 6400 6800
2-2 RA ⅛ ⅛ ⅝ 1.03 .38 4000 6400 6800
4-1 RA ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ ¾ 1.20 .38 4300 6600 7000
4-2 RA ¼ ⅛ ¾ 1.20 .38 4300 6600 7000
4-4 RA ¼ ¼ ¾ 1.39 .56 4300 6600 7000
6-1 RA ⅜ ¹⁄₁₆ ⅞ 1.25 .38 3500 5300 5600
C 6-2 RA ⅜ ⅛ ⅞ 1.25 .38 3500 5300 5600
6-4 RA ⅜ ¼ ⅞ 1.44 .56 3500 5300 5600
6-6 RA ⅜ ⅜ ⅞ 1.44 .56 3500 5300 5600
8-2 RA ½ ⅛ 1-⅛ 1.50 .38 3600 5200 5500
8-4 RA ½ ¼ 1-⅛ 1.69 .56 3600 5200 5500
8-6 RA ½ ⅜ 1-⅛ 1.69 .56 3600 5200 5500
8-8 RA ½ ½ 1-⅛ 1.88 .75 3600 5200 5500
12-2 RA ¾ ⅛ 1-⅜ 1.56 .38 3000 4300 4600
12-4 RA ¾ ¼ 1-⅜ 1.75 .56 3000 4300 4600
12-6 RA ¾ ⅜ 1-⅜ 1.75 .56 3000 4300 4600
12-8 RA ¾ ½ 1-⅜ 1.94 .75 3000 4300 4600
16-2 RA 1 ⅛ 1-⅝ 1.81 .38 3100 4500 4800
16-4 RA 1 ¼ 1-⅝ 2.00 .56 3100 4500 4800
16-6 RA 1 ⅜ 1-⅝ 2.00 .56 3100 4500 4800
16-8 RA 1 ½ 1-⅝ 2.19 .75 3100 4500 4800
16-12 RA 1 ¾ 1-⅝ 2.19 .75 3100 4500 4800
16-16 RA 1 1 1-⅝ 2.38 .94 2700 4500 4800
20-16 RA 1-¼ 1 2 2.47 .94 2300 3500 3700
NPT Thread Working Pressures (PSIG)

Reducing Bushing RB Item W HEX D (in.) R (in.)
Male T₁ Female T₂ Brass Stainless Steel Steel
2-1 RB ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .63 .38 2900 6400 6800
4-1 RB ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ ⅝ .86 .56 4100 7500 8000
4-2 RB ¼ ⅛ ⅝ .86 .56 3600 6000 6400
6-1 RB ⅜ ¹⁄₁₆ ¾ .86 .56 4000 7200 7600
6-2 RB ⅜ ⅛ ¾ .86 .56 4000 6400 6800
6-4 RB ⅜ ¼ ¾ .86 .56 3000 5300 5600
8-2 RB ½ ⅛ ⅞ 1.11 .75 3900 6600 6800
8-4 RB ½ ¼ ⅞ 1.11 .75 3900 6400 7000
8-6 RB ½ ⅜ ⅞ 1.11 .75 2800 4600 4900
12-2 RB ¾ ⅛ 1-⅛ 1.17 .75 3800 6400 6800
12-4 RB ¾ ¼ 1-⅛ 1.17 .75 3800 6400 6800
12-6 RB ¾ ⅜ 1-⅛ 1.17 .75 3500 5300 5600
12-8 RB ¾ ½ 1-⅛ 1.17 .75 2800 4900 5200
16-2 RB 1 ⅛ 1-⅜ 1.36 .94 2700 4600 4900
16-4 RB 1 ¼ 1-⅜ 1.36 .94 2700 4600 4900
16-6 RB 1 ⅜ 1-⅜ 1.36 .94 2700 4600 4900
16-8 RB 1 ½ 1-⅜ 1.36 .94 2700 4600 4900
16-12 RB 1 ¾ 1-⅜ 1.36 .94 2500 4200 4500
20-12 RB 1-¼ ¾ 1-¾ 1.47 .97 2000 3500 3700
20-16 RB 1-¼ 1 1-¾ 1.47 .97 2000 3500 3700
24-16 RB 1-½ 1 2 1.58 1.00 1800 2900 3100
24-20 RB 1-½ 1-¼ 2 1.58 1.00 1700 2700 2800


Male Elbow ME
Item W HEX H (in.) R (in.)
1-1 ME ¹⁄₁₆ ⅜ .66 .38 5500 9500 10100
2-2 ME ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ .76 .38 5000 9100 9700
4-4 ME ¼ ⁹⁄₁₆ 1.09 .56 4100 7500 8000
6-6 ME ⅜ ¾ 1.22 .56 4000 7200 7600
8-8 ME ½ ⅞ 1.47 .75 3100 5800 6200 C
12-12 ME ¾ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.59 .75 3400 6400 6800
16-16 ME 1 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.97 .94 2700 4600 4900
Female Elbow FE
Item W HEX H (in.) H₁ (in.)
Female Brass Stainless Steel Steel
1-1 FE ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .50 .50 3800 7000 7500
2-1 FE ⅛ - ¹⁄₁₆ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 .66 2900 5500 5900
2-2 FE ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 .66 2900 5500 5900
4-2 FE ¼-⅛ ¾ .88 .88 2900 5500 5900
4-4 FE ¼ ¾ .88 .88 3000 5600 6000
6-6 FE ⅜ ⅞ 1.02 1.02 2700 5000 5300
8-8 FE ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 1.23 2500 4500 4800
12-12 FE ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.36 1.36 2000 3500 3700
16-16 FE 1 1-⅝ 1.63 1.63 2300 3900 4200
20-20 FE 1-¼ 1- ⅞ 1.70 1.70 1900 3100 3300
24-24 FE 1-½ 2-½ 2.08 2.08 1700 2500 2600
Female Elbow 45° FVE

Item W HEX H (in.) H₁ (in.)
1-1 FVE ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .47 .47 3800 7000 7500
2-2 FVE ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .47 .47 2900 5500 5900
4-4 FVE ¼ ¾ .69 .69 3000 5600 6000
6-6 FVE ⅜ ⅞ .75 .75 2700 5000 5300
8-8 FVE ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ .94 .94 2500 4500 4800
12-12 FVE ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.00 1.00 2000 3500 3700
16-16 FVE 1 1-⅝ 1.19 1.19 2300 3900 4200


Street Elbow SE
Item W HEX H (in.) H₁ (in.) R (in.)
Male Female Brass Stainless Steel Steel
1-1 SE ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 .72 .38 3800 7000 7500
2-1 SE ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 .78 .38 3800 7000 7500
2-2 SE ⅛ ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 .78 .38 2900 5500 5900

4-1 SE ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 1.09 .56 3800 7000 7500
C 4-2 SE ¼ ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 1.09 .56 2900 5500 5900
4-4 SE ¼ ¼ ¾ .88 1.09 .56 3000 5600 6000
6-1 SE ⅜ ¹⁄₁₆ ¾ .88 1.09 .56 3800 7000 7500
6-2 SE ⅜ ⅛ ¾ .88 1.22 .58 2900 5500 5900
6-4 SE ⅜ ¼ ¾ .88 1.22 .56 3000 5600 6000
6-6 SE ⅜ ⅜ ⅞ 1.02 1.22 .56 2700 5000 5300
8-2 SE ½ ⅛ ⅞ .95 1.47 .75 2900 5500 5900
8-4 SE ½ ¼ ⅞ .95 1.47 .75 3000 5600 6000
8-6 SE ½ ⅜ ⅞ 1.23 1.47 .75 2700 5000 5300
8-8 SE ½ ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 1.47 .75 2500 4500 4800
12-2 SE ¾ ⅛ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.00 1.59 .75 2900 5500 5900
12-4 SE ¾ ¼ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.00 1.59 .75 3000 5600 6000
12-6 SE ¾ ⅜ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 1.59 .75 2700 5000 5300
12-8 SE ¾ ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 1.59 .75 2500 4500 4800
12-12 SE ¾ ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.36 1.59 .75 2000 3500 3700
16-2 SE 1 ⅛ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.63 1.97 .94 2700 5500 5900
16-4 SE 1 ¼ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.63 1.97 .94 2700 5600 6000
16-6 SE 1 ⅜ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.50 1.97 .94 2700 5000 5300
16-8 SE 1 ½ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.63 1.97 .94 2500 4500 4800
16-12 SE 1 ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.36 1.97 .94 2000 3500 3700
16-16 SE 1 1 1-⅝ 1.63 1.97 .94 2300 3900 4200
20-20 SE 1-¼ 1-¼ 1-⅞ 1.70 2.38 .97 1900 3100 3300
Street Elbow 45° SVE

1-1 SVE ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .47 .66 .38 3800 7000 7500
2-2 SVE ⅛ ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .47 .72 .38 2900 5500 5900
4-4 SVE ¼ ¼ ¾ .63 1.05 .56 3000 5600 6000
6-6 SVE ⅜ ⅜ ⅞ .72 1.06 .56 2700 5000 5300
8-8 SVE ½ ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ .91 1.34 .75 2500 4500 4800
12-12 SVE ¾ ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ .97 1.38 .75 2000 3500 3700
16-16 SVE 1 1 1-⅝ 1.13 1.72 .94 2300 3900 4200


Male Tee MT
Item W HEX H₁ (in.) R (in.)
1-1-1 MT ¹⁄₁₆ ⁵⁄₁₆ .72 .38 5500 10100 9500
2-2-2 MT ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ .76 .38 5000 9700 9100
4-4-4 MT ¼ ⁹⁄₁₆ 1.09 .56 4100 8000 7500
6-6-6 MT
8-8-8 MT
⅜
½
¾
⅞
1.22
1.47
.56
.75
4000
3100
7600
6200
7200
5800
C
12-12-12 MT ¾ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.59 .75 3400 6800 6400
16-16-16 MT 1 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.97 .94 2700 4900 4600
20-20-20 MT 1-¼ 1-⅝ 2.22 .97 2000 3700 3500
24-24-24 MT 1-½ 1-⅞ 2.64 1.00 1800 3100 2900
Female Tee FT
Item W HEX H (in.)
1-1-1 FT ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .50 3800 7000 7500
2-2-2 FT ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 2900 5500 5900
4-4-4 FT ¼ ¾ .88 3000 5600 6000
6-6-6 FT ⅜ ⅞ 1.02 2700 5000 5300
8-8-8 FT ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 2500 4500 4800
12-12-12 FT ¾ 1-⁵/₁₆ 1.36 2000 3500 3700
16-16-16 FT 1 1-⅝ 1.63 2300 3900 4200
20-20-20 FT 1-¼ 1-⅞ 1.70 1900 3100 3300
24-24-24 FT 1- ½ 2- ½ 2.08 1700 2500 3600
Street Tee ST
1-1-1 ST ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .50 .72 .38 3800 7000 7500
2-2-2 ST ⅛ ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 .78 .38 2900 5500 5900
4-4-4 ST ¼ ¼ ¾ .88 1.09 .56 3000 5600 6000
6-6-6 ST ⅜ ⅜ ⅞ 1.02 1.22 .56 2700 5000 5300
8-8-8 ST ½ ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 1.47 .75 2500 4500 4800
12-12-12 ST ¾ ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.36 1.59 .75 2000 3500 3700
16-16-16 ST 1 1 1-⅝ 1.63 1.97 .94 2300 3900 4200


Male Branch Tee MBT
1-1-1 MBT ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .50 .72 .38 3800 7000 7500
2-2-2 MBT ⅛ ⅛ ⁹/₁₆ .66 .78 .38 2900 5500 5900
4-4-4 MBT ¼ ¼ ¾ .88 1.09 .56 3000 5600 6000
6-6-6 MBT ⅜ ⅜ ⅞ 1.02 1.22 .56 2700 5000 5300
C 8-8-8 MBT ½ ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 1.47 .75 2500 4500 4800
12-12-12 MBT ¾ ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.36 1.59 .75 2000 3500 3700
16-16-16 MBT 1 1 1-⅝ 1.63 1.97 .94 2300 3900 4200
Female Cross FX
Working Pressures (PSIG)
Item NPT Thread Female W HEX H (in.)
Brass Stainless Steel Steel
1 FX ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .50 3800 7000 7500
2 FX ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .66 2900 5500 5900
4 FX ¼ ¾ .88 3000 5600 6000
6 FX ⅜ ⅞ 1.06 2700 5000 5300
8 FX ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 2500 4500 4800
12 FX ¾ 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.36 2000 3500 3700
16 FX 1 1-⅝ 1.63 2300 3900 4200
Pipe Cap CP
Item W HEX D (in.)
1 CP ¹⁄₁₆ ⁷⁄₁₆ .50 4500 7500 8000
2 CP ⅛ ⁹⁄₁₆ .75 4000 6400 6800
4 CP ¼ ¾ .91 4300 6600 7000
6 CP ⅜ ⅞ 1.03 3500 5300 5600
8 CP ½ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.34 3600 5200 5500
12 CP ¾ 1-¼ 1.44 3000 4300 4600
16 CP 1 1-⅝ 1.63 3100 4500 4800


Hex Head Plug PH

Item W HEX D (in.) R (in.)
1 PH ¹⁄₁₆ ⅜ .54 .38 6000 10500 10000
2 PH ⅛ ⁷⁄₁₆ .56 .38 5600 9700 9100
4 PH ¼ ⁹⁄₁₆ .75 .56 4100 8000 7500
6 PH ⅜ ¹¹⁄₁₆ .78 .56 4000 7600 7200 C
8 PH ½ ⅞ .97 .75 3900 7000 6600
12 PH ¾ 1-¹⁄₁₆ 1.06 .75 3800 6800 6400
16 PH 1 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.25 .94 2700 4900 4600
Hollow Hex Plug PHH

Item W Internal Hex D (in.)
1 PHH ¹⁄₁₆ ⁵⁄₃₂ .30 6000 10000 10500
2 PHH ⅛ ³⁄₁₆ .30 5600 9100 9700
4 PHH ¼ ¼ .47 4100 7500 8000
6 PHH ⅜ ⁵⁄₁₆ .47 4000 7200 7600

Tube Fittings
CPI™ / A-LOK® Tube Fittings
DESCRIPTION
Parker CPI™ and A-LOK® Instrumentation Tube Fittings are designed as leak-free connections for process, power and
instrumentation applications. These single and two ferrule fittings are manufactured to the highest quality standards and
are available in a broad range of sizes, materials and configurations.
Parker CPI™ and A-LOK® Instrumentation Tube Fittings are supplied complete and ready to use. The ferrule(s) swage
onto the tube as it moves down the body seat creating a pressure/vacuum-tight seal on both tube and body by the
C interface pressure and surface finish of mating components. The Parker Suparcase® ferrule (back-ferrule only on
A-LOK®) creates a strong mechanical hold on the tube.
Parker CPI™ / A-LOK® tube fittings can be used with a wide variety of tubing materials and a broad range of tube wall
thicknesses. CPI™ / A-LOK® seals equally well on both thin wall and heavy wall tubing. Tubing and fitting materials
should be selected to be compatible with the fluid media. Due to thermal expansion characteristics and chemical
stability, the tubing should be of the same material as the fitting. (The exception is brass fittings and copper tubing).
CPI™ Fittings
CPI™ fittings feature a three piece, single ferrule design to work on all instrument grade tubing. Fittings are coated in
Molybdenum Disulfide to prevent galling and provide lubrication. The ferrule is treated with Suparcase® technology to
ensure sealing and provide excellent anti-vibration performance. CPI™ fittings’ superior body seat surface finish seals in
gases and liquids. These fittings are excellent in high thermo cycling applications.
A-LOK® Fittings
A-LOK® Fittings are an industry standard for all insturment grade tubing. These double ferrule fittings have silver coated
threads reduce galling. Back ferrules are treated with Suparcase® technology to provide a strong mechnanical grip on
the tube.
FEATURES
• Fittings for Tube to Male Pipe, Tube to Female Pipe, Tube to Tube Unions, Port Connectors, Tube to Welded Systems
and Components.
• Available as standard in Heat Code Traceable, 316 Stainless Steel
• Other materials include Brass, Aluminum, Monel, Hastelloy C® and many more
• Available in combination with a variety of ISO Threaded to Fractional Tube Connectors and ANSI pipe thread
configurations
• Do not twist tubing during installation
• Use with wide variety of tubing materials and a broad range of tube wall thicknesses
• Seals equally well on both thin wall and heavy wall tubing
• Secure leakproof joints capable of satisfying high pressure, vacuum and vibration applications
The Parker Suparcase®

back ferrule provides a
The Parker Suparcase®
strong mechanical and anti-
ferrule provides a strong Pressure seal by
Dynamic seal by vibration hold on the tube.
mechancial and anti-vibration front ferrule on
ferrule on tube and
hold on the tube tube and body
body
Molybdenum disulfide coated Close tolerance of nut

nut with fine pitch threads and body dimensions for Parker’s high quality, Deep tube abutment
ensure no galling accurate tube alignment silver plated nut and close tolerance
ensures no galling of of nut and body for
body threads accurate tube alignment

Tube Fittings - Continued

Ordering CPI™/A-LOK® Tube Fittings
Parker CPI™ / A-LOK® tube fitting part numbers are constructed using alphanumeric characters to identify the size,
style and material of the fitting. Generally, the first portion of the item number is listed on the proceeding product pages
(Size, Type and Thread). Material and Options will then be added on to these item numbers. These designators are
listed in the reference tables (Fitting Materials and Options). Fittings might not be available in every configuration.
Body Shape: A letter or combination of letters and numbers are used to designate the type of fitting for body designator.
(i.e. SBZ or MBT = male branch tee, GBZ or FA = female adapter, etc.) See proceeding pages for fitting types codes. C
May also be referred to as Body, Style or Shape.
Port Size: Tube and pipe thread sizes are designed by the number of sixteenths of an inch (1/2” tube = 8/16” = 8) (1/4”
pipe thread = 4/16” = 4). See Tube End Dimensional Data table for Size designators. Proceeding product pages list
sizes for fitting types.
INCHES
SIZE DESIGNATOR †D TUBE

STRAIGHT
TUBE O.D. †C H HEX E DIA. INS.
THREAD
DEPTH
1 ¹⁄₁₆ 10-32 0.43 ⁵⁄₁₆ 0.052 0.34
2 ¹⁄₈ ⁵⁄₁₆-20 0.6 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.093 0.5
3 ³⁄₁₆ ³⁄₈-20 0.64 ½ 0.125 0.54
4 ¼ ⁷⁄₁₆-20 0.7 ⁹⁄₁₆ 0.187 0.6
5 ⁵⁄₁₆ ½-20 0.73 ⅝ 0.25 0.64
6 ³⁄₈ ⁹⁄₁₆-20 0.76 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 0.281 0.67
8 ½ ¾-20 0.87 ⅞ 0.406 0.9
10 ⅝ ⅞-20 0.87 1 0.5 0.96
12 ¾ 1-20 0.87 1-¹⁄₈ 0.625 0.96
14 ⅞ 1-¹⁄₈20 0.87 1-¼ 0.75 1.03
16 1 1-⁵⁄₁₆-20 1.05 1-½ 0.875 1.24
20 1-¼ 1-⅝-20 1.52 1-⅞ 1.09 1.61
24 1-½ 1-¹⁵⁄₁₆-20 1.77 2-¼ 1.34 1.96
32 2 2-⅝-20 2.43 2-¾ 1.81 2.65
Dimensions C and D are shown in the finger tight position

†Average Value
Dimensions are for reference only, subject to change.
All Straights & Elbows: Call out largest CPI™ / A-LOK® tube end size first
followed by the smaller CPI™ / A-LOK® tube end or pipe thread size.
Fractional Tees & Crosses: For drop size tees – first size the run (1 to 2)
and then branch (3). Example – the size designator for a male run tee for 3/8”
O.D. tube and 1/4” male pipe thread would be 6-4-6. For crosses – first size
the run (1 to 2) and then the branch (3 to 4). For tees with all ends the same,
use the tube and size before and after the style designator; i.e. 4-4-4 JBZ
(CPI™), 4ET4 (A-LOK®).

Thread Types: See Thread Types table in How to Order for designators. Generally designated with first portion of item
number.
Sealing: BSP Taper threads require the use of a thread sealant. BSPP threads require a sealing washer. This washer
may either be a metal gasket (copper is standard) or a “bonded seal” (elastomer bonded to a metal retaining washer).
The BSPP, form “A” requires the use of a bonded seal. The BSPP, form “B” (cutting face) may be used with or without a
C sealing washer. For applications where the cutting face may not seal or where galling is a potential problem, the use of
a washer is suggested.
Examples: The Thread Type Designators have been bolded in the following examples for easy recognition:
• 4-4K FBZ-SS = 1/4” CPI™ tube fitting by 1/4” BSPT pipe thread
• 6-4R RA-SS = 3/8” female NPT by 1/4” BSPP (form A) reducing adapter. A bonded seal should be used with this
fitting.
• 6MSC4BR-316 = 3/8” A-LOK® tube fitting by 1/4” BSPP (form B). A copper washer should be used with this fitting.
Form A Form B
Materials: Basic Material Type (B=Brass, S=Steel, etc). Parker CPI/A-LOK Tube fittings for special applications, can be
furnished in almost every material suitable for machining.
Options: See the Options table for available options and designators. After the complete CPI™/A-LOK® number simply
add a “dash” then the suffix for the option.
Special Fittings: Consult the factory. If there is any question as to the fitting desired, particularly for special fitting
configurations, it is suggested that a customer print be submitted.


HOW TO ORDER
A-LOK Inch Parts
Easiest way to configure is to take item code from proceeding pages (values for Tables 1-4) and add Material
Designator and Options
XX XXX XX XXX XXXX XXXXX
C
Table 1 Port 1 Size Designator* Table 6 Option Designator
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12,14,16,20,24,32 ZYF Assembled with nylon ferrule(s)
Table 2 Body Designator ZY Ferrule only (e.g., 4TZ-ZY)
See Proceeding Pages (ex. MSC for Male Connector) TF Assembled with PTFE ferrule(s)
Table 3 Port 2 Size Designator* T Ferrule only (e.g., 4TZ-T)
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12,14,16,20,24,32 Z6 Preset nut and ferrule(s) on tube stub end
Table 4 Thread Type Designator SPF Silver plated ferrule(s). Contact factory.
N NPT/National Pipe Thread (ANSI B1.20.1) BP* Bulk packed. * Indicates the quantity i.e BP50 for a fifty count
package
K BSP/ISO Taper (BS21, ISO7/1)
LWH Lock wire hole. Contact factory.
R BSP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 FORM A⁽²⁾)
BZP Knurled nut. Replaces standard nut on CPI™/A-LOK® fittings for
BR BSP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 FORM B⁽³⁾) use on soft plastic tubing.
R-ED BSPP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 with C Silver plated nut. Replaces moly coated nut (BZ).
elastic sealing washer⁽⁴⁾)
MI Moly inside nut
GC BSPP Gauge Connector (B2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852)
CNQ Certified Nuclear Quality
M Metric Thread (ISO 6149-2)
C1 Grade A Cleaning. Special cleaning, assembly, inspection and
Table 5 Material Designator packaging for high purity applications.
B Brass C3 Cleaned for oxygen service. Meets the requirements of ASTM
316 Type 316SS G93-88; Standard Practice for Cleaning Methods for Materials
and Equipment used in Oxygen-Enriched Environments.
S Steel
NIC Nickel plated. Contact factory.
A Alumninum
CRM Chrome plated. Contact factory.
M Mondel 400 - Forgings, Monel 405 - Bar Stock
VO Viton O-ring
HC Hastelloy C-276
NC NACE. MRO175-2003
IN Inconel Alloy 600
NACE NACE. MRO175-2002 or prior version.
SS20 Carpenter 20
DFARS Defense Acquisition Regulations System
T Titanium
625 Inconel Alloy 625 Note: Easiest way to configure is to take item from proceeding pages (values for
Tables 1-4) and add on Material Designator and Options
825 Incoloy Alloy 825 * See Tube End Dimensional Data table
6MO 6MO ⁽¹⁾ N thread designator is only used for A-LOK® nomenclature.
⁽²⁾ Form A requires the use of a bonded washer.
⁽³⁾ Form B (cutting face) may be used with or without a sealing washer.
⁽⁴⁾ ED fittings are supplied with Nitrile sealing washers as standard. Fluorocarbon
seals are available upon request.


HOW TO ORDER
CPI Inch Parts
Easiest way to configure is to take item code from proceeding pages (values for Tables 1-4) and add Material
Designator and Options
C XX XX XXX XXX XXXX XXXXX
Table 1 Port 1 Size Designator* Table 6 Option Designator

1,2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12,14,16,20,24,32 ZYF Assembled with nylon ferrule(s)
Table 2 Port 2 Size Designator* ZY Ferrule only (e.g., 4TZ-ZY)
1,2,3,4,5,6,8,10,12,14,16,20,24,32 TF Assembled with PTFE ferrule(s)
Table 3 Thread Designator(1) T Ferrule only (e.g., 4TZ-T)
K BSP/ISO Taper (BS21, ISO7/1) Z6 Preset nut and ferrule(s) on tube stub end
R BSP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 FORM A⁽²⁾) SPF Silver plated ferrule(s). Contact Rawson.
BP* Bulk packed. * Indicates the quantity i.e BP50 for a fifty count
BR BSP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 FORM B⁽³⁾) package
R-ED BSPP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 with LWH Lock wire hole. Contact Rawson.
elastic sealing washer⁽⁴⁾)
BZP Knurled nut. Replaces standard nut on CPI™/A-LOK® fittings for
GC BSPP Gauge Connector (B2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852) use on soft plastic tubing.
M Metric Thread (ISO 6149-2) C Silver plated nut. Replaces moly coated nut (BZ).
Table 4 Body Designator MI Moly inside nut
See Proceeding Pages (ex. FBZ for Male Connector) CNQ Certified Nuclear Quality
Table 5 Material Designator C1 Grade A Cleaning. Special cleaning, assembly, inspection and
packaging for high purity applications.
B Brass
C3 Cleaned for oxygen service. Meets the requirements of ASTM
SS 316SS G93-88; Standard Practice for Cleaning Methods for Materials
S Steel and Equipment used in Oxygen-Enriched Environments.
A Alumninum CNG Compressed natural gas service. Assembled with a specific

o-ring compound.
M Mondel 400 - Forgings, Monel 405 - Bar Stock
NIC Nickel plated. Contact Rawson.
HC Hastelloy C-276
CRM Chrome plated. Contact Rawson.
IN Inconel Alloy 600
VO Viton O-ring
SS20 Carpenter 20
NC NACE. MRO175-2003
T Titanium
NACE NACE. MRO175-2002 or prior version.
625 Inconel Alloy 625
DFARS Defense Acquisition Regulations System
825 Incoloy Alloy 825
6MO 6MO Note: Easiest way to configure is to take item from proceeding pages (values for
Tables 1-4) and add on Material Designator and Options
* See Tube End Dimensional Data table
⁽¹⁾ N thread designator is only used for A-LOK® nomenclature. Implied with code
for CPI fittings.
⁽³⁾ Form B (cutting face) may be used with or without a sealing washer.
⁽⁴⁾ ED fittings are supplied with Nitrile sealing washers as standard. Fluorocarbon
seals are available upon request.

CPI™ and A-LOK® Tube to Pipe Connectors

NPT Male Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER
TUBE NPT PIPE A-LOK
WITH A C D R W HEX CPI ITEM
O.D. THREAD ITEM
100-1-1 ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ .93 .43 .78 .38 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1-1 FBZ 1MSC1N
100-1-2 ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.03 .43 .88 .38 ⁷⁄₁₆ 1-2 FBZ 1MSC2N
100-1-4 ¹⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.23 .43 1.08 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 1-4 FBZ 1MSC4N
200-1-1 ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.17 .60 .91 .38 ⅜ 2-1 FBZ 2MSC1N C
200-1-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.20 .60 .94 .38 ⁷⁄₁₆ 2-2 FBZ 2MSC2N
200-1-4 ⅛ ¼ 1.40 .60 1.14 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 2-4 FBZ 2MSC4N
200-1-6 ⅛ ⅜ 1.42 .60 1.16 .56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 2-6 FBZ 2MSC6N
200-1-8 ⅛ ½ 1.67 .60 1.41 .75 ⅞ 2-8 FBZ 2MSC8N
300-1-1 ³⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.23 .64 .97 .38 ⁷⁄₁₆ 3-1 FBZ 3MSC1N
300-1-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.23 .64 .97 .38 ⁷⁄₁₆ 3-2 FBZ 3MSC2N
300-1-4 ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.43 .64 1.17 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 3-4 FBZ 3MSC4N
400-1-1 ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.29 .70 1.00 .38 ½ 4-1 FBZ 4MSC1N
400-1-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.29 .70 1.00 .38 ½ 4-2 FBZ 4MSC2N
400-1-4 ¼ ¼ 1.49 .70 1.20 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-4 FBZ 4MSC4N
400-1-6 ¼ ⅜ 1.51 .70 1.22 .56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 4-6 FBZ 4MSC6N
400-1-8 ¼ ½ 1.76 .70 1.47 .75 ⅞ 4-8 FBZ 4MSC8N
400-1-12 ¼ ¾ 1.82 .70 1.53 .75 1-¹⁄₁₆ 4-12 FBZ 4MSC12N
500-1-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.34 .70 1.05 .38 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5-2 FBZ 5MSC2N
500-1-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.52 .73 1.23 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5-4 FBZ 5MSC4N
500-1-6 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅜ 1.55 .73 1.25 .56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 5-6 FBZ 5MSC6N
500-1-8 ⁵⁄₁₆ ½ 1.79 .73 1.5 .75 ⅞ 5-8 FBZ 5MSC8N
600-1-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.38 .76 1.09 .38 ⅝ 6-2 FBZ 6MSC2N
600-1-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.57 .76 1.28 .56 ⅝ 6-4 FBZ 6MSC4N
600-1-6 ⅜ ⅜ 1.57 .76 1.28 .56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 6-6 FBZ 6MSC6N
600-1-8 ⅜ ½ 1.82 .76 1.53 .75 ⅞ 6-8 FBZ 6MSC8N
600-1-12 ⅜ ¾ 1.88 .76 1.59 .75 1-¹⁄₁₆ 6-12 FBZ 6MSC12N
810-1-2 ½ ⅛ 1.53 .87 1.13 .38 ¹⁄₁₆ 8-2 FBZ 8MSC2N
810-1-4 ½ ¼ 1.71 .87 1.31 .56 ¹⁄₁₆ 8-4 FBZ 8MSC4N
810-1-6 ½ ⅜ 1.71 .87 1.31 .56 ¹⁄₁₆ 8-6 FBZ 8MSC6N
810-1-8 ½ ½ 1.93 .87 1.53 .75 ⅞ 8-8 FBZ 8MSC8N
810-1-12 ½ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹⁄₁₆ 8-12 FBZ 8MSC12N
810-1-16 ½ 1 2.28 .87 1.88 .94 1-⅜ 8-16 FBZ 8MSC16N
1010-1-6 ⅝ ⅜ 1.74 .87 1.34 .56 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-6 FBZ 10MSC6N
1010-1-8 ⅝ ½ 1.93 .87 1.53 .75 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-8 FBZ 10MSC8N
1010-1-12 ⅝ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹⁄₁₆ 10-12 FBZ 10MSC12N
1210-1-8 ¾ ½ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-8 FBZ 12MSC8N
1210-1-12 ¾ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12 FBZ 12MSC12N
1210-1-16 ¾ 1 2.28 .87 1.88 .94 1-⅜ 12-16 FBZ 12MSC16N
1410-1-12 ⅞ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-³∕₁₆ 14-12 FBZ 14MSC12N
1410-1-16 ⅞ 1 2.28 .87 1.88 .94 1-⅜ 14-16 FBZ 14MSC16N
1610-1-8 1 ½ 2.27 1.05 1.88 .75 1-⅜ 16-8 FBZ 16MSC8N
1610-1-12 1 ¾ 2.27 1.05 1.78 .75 1-⅜ 16-12 FBZ 16MSC12N
1610-1-16 1 1 2.46 1.05 1.97 .94 1-⅜ 16-16 FBZ 16MSC16N
2010-1-20 1-¼ 1-¼ 3.03 1.52 2.17 .97 1-¾ 20-20 FBZ 20MSC20N
2410-1-24 1-½ 1-½ 3.50 1.77 2.44 1.00 2-⅛ 24-24 FBZ 24MSC24N
3210-1-32 2 2 4.47 2.47 3.00 1.04 2-¾ 32-32 FBZ 32MSC32N
NOTE: A and C dimensions are typical finger-tight.
Sizes 20, 24, 32 require additional lubrication prior to assembly.

CPI™ and A-LOK® Tube to Pipe Connectors - Continued

NPT Male Bulkhead Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER CPI
TUBE NPT PIPE W A-LOK
WITH A C D L R ITEM
O.D. THREAD HEX ITEM
100-11-1 ¹∕₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.19 0.68 1.038 .53 .38 ⁵∕₁₆ 1-1 FH2BZ 1MBC1N
100-11-2 ¹∕₁₆ ⅛ 1.27 0.68 1.116 .53 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 1-2 FH2BZ 1MBC2N
C 200-11-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.83 1.23 1.571 .97 .38 ½ 2-2 FH2BZ 2MBC2N

300-11-2 ³∕₁₆ ⅛ 1.89 1.26 1.634 1.00 .38 ⁹∕₁₆ 3-2 FH2BZ 3MBC2N
400-11-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.95 1.31 1.655 1.02 .38 ⅝ 4-2 FH2BZ 4MBC2N
400-11-4 ¼ ¼ 2.132 1.31 1.842 1.02 .56 ⅝ 4-4 FH2BZ 4MBC4N
400-11-6 ¼ ⅜ 2.162 1.31 1.872 1.02 .56 ¹¹∕₁₆ 4-6 FH2BZ 4MBC6N
400-11-8 ¼ ½ 2.374 1.31 2.084 1.02 .75 ⅞ 4-8 FH2BZ 4MBC8N
500-11-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 2.08 1.42 1.779 1.12 .38 ¹¹∕₁₆ 5-2 FH2BZ 5MBC2N
500-11-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 2.27 1.42 1.966 1.12 .56 ¹¹∕₁₆ 5-4 FH2BZ 5MBC4N
600-11-2 ⅜ ⅛ 2.08 1.44 1.788 1.15 .38 ¾ 6-2 FH2BZ 6MBC2N
600-11-4 ⅜ ¼ 2.265 1.44 1.975 1.15 .56 ¾ 6-4 FH2BZ 6MBC4N
600-11-6 ⅜ ⅜ 2.265 1.44 1.975 1.15 .56 ¾ 6-6 FH2BZ 6MBC6N
600-11-8 ⅜ ½ 2.48 1.44 2.219 1.15 .75 ⅞ 6-8 FH2BZ 6MBC8N
810-11-4 ½ ¼ 2.494 1.65 2.094 1.25 .56 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 8-4 FH2BZ 8MBC4N
810-11-6 ½ ⅜ 2.494 1.65 2.094 1.25 .56 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 8-6 FH2BZ 8MBC6N
810-11-8 ½ ½ 2.712 1.65 2.312 1.25 .75 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 8-8 FH2BZ 8MBC8N
810-11-12 ½ ¾ 2.722 1.65 2.322 1.25 .75 1-⅛ 8-12 FH2BZ 8MBC12N
1010-11-6 ⅝ ⅜ 2.628 1.68 2.228 1.28 .56 1-½ 10-6 FH2BZ 10MBC6N
1010-11-8 ⅝ ½ 2.816 1.68 2.416 1.28 .75 1-½ 10-8 FH2BZ 10MBC8N
1210-11-8 ¾ ½ 3.00 1.87 2.601 1.47 .75 1-³∕₁₆ 12-8 FH2BZ 12MBC8N
1210-11-12 ¾ ¾ 3.00 1.87 2.601 1.47 .75 1-³∕₁₆ 12-12 FH2BZ 12MBC12N
1410-11-12 ⅞ ¾ 3.31 2.09 2.913 1.69 .75 1-⅜ 14-12 FH2BZ 14MBC12N
1610-11-12 1 ¾ 3.54 2.27 3.006 1.78 .75 1-⅝ 16-12 FH2BZ 16MBC12N
1610-11-16 1 1 3.72 2.27 3.194 1.78 .94 1-⅝ 16-16 FH2BZ 16MBC16N


Thermocouple Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
WITH A C D R ITEM
100-1-1BT ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.93 .43 0.78 .38 ⁵∕₁₆ 1-1 FH4BZ 1MTC2N
100-1-2BT ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.03 .43 0.88 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 1-2 FH4BZ 1MTC1N
100-1-4BT ¹⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.23 .43 1.08 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 1-4 FH4BZ 1MTC4N
C
200-1-1BT ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.17 .60 0.91 .38 ⅜ 2-1 FH4BZ 2MTC1N
200-1-2BT ⅛ ⅛ 1.20 .60 0.94 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-2 FH4BZ 2MTC2N
200-1-4BT ⅛ ¼ 1.40 .60 1.14 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 2-4 FH4BZ 2MTC4N
300-1-2BT ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.23 .64 0.97 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 3-2 FH4BZ 3MTC2N
300-1-4BT ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.43 .64 1.17 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 3-4 FH4BZ 3MTC4N
400-1-2BT ¼ ⅛ 1.29 .70 1.00 .38 ½ 4-2 FH4BZ 4MTC2N
400-1-4BT ¼ ¼ 1.49 .70 1.20 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 4-4 FH4BZ 4MTC4N
400-1-6BT ¼ ⅜ 1.60 .70 1.22 .56 ¹¹∕₁₆ 4-6 FH4BZ 4MTC6N
400-1-8BT ¼ ½ 1.87 .70 1.47 .75 ⅞ 4-8 FH4BZ 4MTC8N
500-1-4BT ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.52 .73 1.22 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-4 FH4BZ 5MTC4N
600-1-4BT ⅜ ¼ 1.57 .76 1.28 .56 ⅝ 6-4 FH4BZ 6MTC4N
600-1-6BT ⅜ ⅜ 1.57 .76 1.28 .56 ¹¹∕₁₆ 6-6 FH4BZ 6MTC6N
600-1-8BT ⅜ ½ 1.82 .76 1.53 .75 ⅞ 6-8 FH4BZ 6MTC8N
600-1-12BT ⅜ ¾ 1.88 .76 1.59 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 6-12 FH4BZ 6MTC12N
810-1-8BT ½ ½ 1.93 .87 1.53 .76 ⅞ 8-8 FH4BZ 8MTC8N
810-1-12BT ½ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 8-12 FH4BZ 8MTC12N
1010-1-12BT ⅝ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-12 FH4BZ 10MTC12N
1210-1-12BT ¾ ¾ 1.99 .87 1.59 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-12 FH4BZ 12MTC12N
1610-1-16BT 1 1 2.46 1.05 1.97 .94 1-⅜ 16-16 FH4BZ 16MTC16N


NPT Male Elbow for Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES PARKER PARKER
WITH TUBE NPT PIPE CPI ITEM A-LOK ITEM
C H L R W HEX
O.D. THREAD
100-2-1 ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ .75 0.70 .60 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 1-1 CBZ 1MSEL1N
100-2-2 ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ .75 0.70 .60 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 1-2 CBZ 1MSEL2N
C 200-2-1 ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ .93 0.70 .67 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-1 CBZ 2MSEL1N
200-2-2 ⅛ ⅛ .93 0.70 .67 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-2 CBZ 2MSEL2N
200-2-4 ⅛ ¼ .97 0.93 .72 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 2-4 CBZ 2MSEL4N
300-2-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.00 0.74 .74 .38 ½ 3-2 CBZ 3MSEL2N
300-2-4 ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.00 0.93 .74 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 3-4 CBZ 3MSEL4N
400-2-1 ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.06 0.74 .77 .38 ½ 4-1 CBZ 4MSEL1N
400-2-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.06 0.74 .77 .38 ½ 4-2 CBZ 4MSEL2N
400-2-4 ¼ ¼ 1.06 0.93 .77 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 4-4 CBZ 4MSEL4N
400-2-6 ¼ ⅜ 1.17 1.04 .88 .56 ¹¹∕₁₆ 4-6 CBZ 4MSEL6N
400-2-8 ¼ ½ 1.25 1.31 .96 .75 ¹³∕₁₆ 4-8 CBZ 4MSEL8N
500-2-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.13 0.79 .84 .38 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-2 CBZ 5MSEL2N
500-2-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.13 0.97 .84 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-4 CBZ 5MSEL4N
600-2-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.20 0.82 .91 .38 ⅝ 6-2 CBZ 6MSEL2N
600-2-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.20 1.01 .91 .56 ⅝ 6-4 CBZ 6MSEL4N
600-2-6 ⅜ ⅜ 1.23 1.13 .97 .56 ¹¹∕₁₆ 6-6 CBZ 6MSEL6N
600-2-8 ⅜ ½ 1.31 1.31 1.02 .75 ¹³∕₁₆ 6-8 CBZ 6MSEL8N
600-2-12 ⅜ ¾ 1.46 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 6-12 CBZ 6MSEL12N
810-2-4 ½ ¼ 1.42 1.12 1.02 .56 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-4 CBZ 8MSEL4N
810-2-6 ½ ⅜ 1.42 1.12 1.02 .56 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-6 CBZ 8MSEL6N
810-2-8 ½ ½ 1.42 1.31 1.02 .75 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-8 CBZ 8MSEL8N
810-2-12 ½ ¾ 1.57 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 8-12 CBZ 8MSEL12N
1010-2-6 ⅝ ⅜ 1.50 1.20 1.10 .56 ¹⁵∕₆ 10-6 CBZ 10MSEL6N
1010-2-8 ⅝ ½ 1.50 1.39 1.10 .75 ¹⁵∕₆ 10-8 CBZ 10MSEL8N
1010-2-12 ⅝ ¾ 1.57 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-12 CBZ 10MSEL12N
1210-2-8 ¾ ½ 1.57 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-8 CBZ 12MSEL8N
1210-2-12 ¾ ¾ 1.57 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-12 CBZ 12MSEL12N
1410-2-12 ⅞ ¾ 1.76 1.65 1.36 .75 1-⅜ 14-12 CBZ 14MSEL12N
1610-2-12 1 ¾ 1.93 1.65 1.45 .75 1-⅜ 16-12 CBZ 16MSEL12N
1610-2-16 1 1 1.93 1.84 1.45 .94 1-⅜ 16-16 CBZ 16MSEL16N
2010-2-20 1-¼ 1-¼ 2.61 1.88 1.75 .97 1-⅝ 20-20 CBZ 20MSEL20N
2410-2-24 1-½ 1-½ 3.06 2.38 2.00 1.00 1-⅞ 24-24 CBZ 24MSEL24N
3200-2-32 2 2 4.22 2.79 2.75 1.04 2-¹³∕₁₆ 32-32 CBZ 32MSEL32N
NOTE: C dimension is typical finger-tight.

Sizes 20, 24 require additional lubrication prior to assembly.


NPT Male 45° Elbow for Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES PARKER PARKER
WITH TUBE NPT PIPE CPI ITEM A-LOK ITEM
C L P R W HEX
O.D. THREAD
100-5-1 ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.43 0.47 0.57 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 1-1 VBZ 1MVEL1N
200-5-2 ⅛ ⅛ 0.60 0.53 0.57 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-2 VBZ 2MVEL2N
300-5-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 0.64 0.56 0.58 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 3-2 VBZ 3MVEL2N C
400-5-2 ¼ ⅛ 0.70 0.66 0.66 .38 ⁹∕₁₆ 4-2 VBZ 4MVEL2N
400-5-4 ¼ ¼ 0.70 0.66 0.86 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 4-4 VBZ 4MVEL4N
500-5-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 0.73 0.66 0.66 .38 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-2 VBZ 5MVEL2N
600-5-2 ⅜ ⅛ 0.76 0.72 0.67 .38 ⁹∕₁₆ 6-2 VBZ 6MVEL2N
600-5-4 ⅜ ¼ 0.76 0.72 0.67 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 6-4 VBZ 6MVEL4N
600-5-6 ⅜ ⅜ 0.76 0.75 0.95 .56 ¾ 6-6 VBZ 6MVEL6N
810-5-6 ½ ⅜ 0.87 0.75 0.95 .56 ¾ 8-6 VBZ 8MVEL6N
1010-5-8 ⅝ ½ 0.87 0.84 1.20 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-8 VBZ 10MVEL8N
1210-5-12 ¾ ¾ 0.87 0.84 1.20 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-12 VBZ 12MVEL12N
1410-5-12 ⅞ ¾ 0.87 1.36 1.27 .75 1-⁵∕₁₆ 14-12 VBZ 14MVEL12N
1610-5-16 1 1 1.05 1.19 1.14 .94 1-⁵∕₁₆ 16-16 VBZ 16MVEL16N
NPT Male Run Tee for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
WITH A C H L R ITEM
200-3-2TMT ⅛ ⅛ 1.63 0.93 0.71 0.66 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-2-2 RBZ 2MRT2N
200-3-4TMT ⅛ ¼ 1.89 0.97 0.93 0.70 .56 ⁹∕₁₆ 2-4-2 RBZ 2MRT4N
300-3-2TMT ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.66 0.96 0.70 0.70 .38 ⁷∕₁₆ 3-2-3 RBZ 3MRT2N
400-3-2TMT ¼ ⅛ 1.80 1.06 0.74 0.77 .38 ½ 4-2-4 RBZ 4MRT2N
400-3-4TMT ¼ ¼ 1.98 1.06 0.93 0.77 .56 ½ 4-4-4 RBZ 4MRT4N
500-3-2TMT ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.99 1.17 0.82 0.88 .38 ⅝ 5-2-5 RBZ 5MRT2N
500-3-4TMT ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 2.18 1.17 1.01 0.88 .56 ⅝ 5-4-5 RBZ 5MRT4N
600-3-4TMT ⅜ ¼ 2.20 1.20 1.01 0.91 .56 ⅝ 6-4-6 RBZ 6MRT4N
600-3-6TMT ⅜ ⅜ 2.42 1.31 1.12 1.02 .56 ¹³∕₁₅ 6-6-6 RBZ 6MRT6N
810-3-6TMT ½ ⅜ 2.53 1.42 1.12 1.02 .56 ¹³∕₁₅ 8-6-8 RBZ 8MRT6N
810-3-8TMT ½ ½ 2.72 1.42 1.31 1.02 .75 ⅞ 8-8-8 RBZ 8MRT8N
1010-3-8TMT ⅝ ½ 2.88 1.50 1.39 1.10 .75 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 10-8-10 RBZ 10MRT8N
1210-3-12TMT ¾ ¾ 3.02 1.57 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-12-12 RBZ 12MRT12N
1410-3-12TMT ⅞ ¾ 3.41 1.76 1.65 1.36 .75 1-⅜ 14-12-14 RBZ 14MRT12N
1610-3-12TMT 1 ¾ 3.59 1.94 1.65 1.45 .75 1-⅜ 16-12-16 RBZ 16MRT12N
1610-3-16TMT 1 1 3.78 1.94 1.84 1.45 .94 1-⅜ 16-16-16 RBZ 16MRT16N

Dimensions for reference only, subject to change.


NPT Male Branch Tee for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
WITH A C H L R ITEM
200-3-2TTM ⅛ ⅛ 1.84 0.92 0.70 0.66 38 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-2-2 SBZ 2MBT2N

200-3-4TTM ⅛ ¼ 1.96 0.98 0.93 0.72 .56 ½ 2-2-4 SBZ 2MBT4N
³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 3-3-2 SBZ 3MBT2N
C
300-3-2TTM 2.00 1.00 0.74 0.74 38 ½
400-3-2TTM ¼ ⅛ 2.12 1.06 0.74 0.77 38 ½ 4-4-2 SBZ 4MBT2N
400-3-4TTM ¼ ¼ 2.12 1.07 0.93 0.77 .56 ½ 4-4-4 SBZ 4MBT4N
500-3-2TTM ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 2.34 1.17 0.82 0.88 38 ⅝ 5-5-2 SBZ 5MBT2N
500-3-4TTM ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 2.34 1.17 1.01 0.88 .56 ⅝ 5-5-4 SBZ 5MBT4N
600-3-4TTM ⅜ ¼ 2.40 1.20 1.01 0.91 .56 ⅝ 6-6-4 SBZ 6MBT4N
600-3-6TTM ⅜ ⅜ 2.62 1.31 1.12 1.02 .56 ¹³∕₁₆ 6-6-6 SBZ 6MBT6N
810-3-6TTM ½ ⅜ 2.84 1.42 1.12 1.02 .56 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-8-6 SBZ 8MBT6N
810-3-8TTM ½ ½ 2.86 1.43 1.31 1.03 .75 ⅞ 8-8-8 SBZ 8MBT8N
1010-3-8TTM ⅝ ½ 2.86 1.53 1.42 1.13 .75 1 10-10-8 SBZ 10MBT8N
1210-3-12TTM ¾ ¾ 3.14 1.57 1.46 1.17 .75 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-12-12 SBZ 12MBT12N
1410-3-12TTM ⅞ ¾ 3.52 1.76 1.65 1.36 .75 1-⅜ 14-14-12 SBZ 14MBT12N
1610-3-12TTM 1 ¾ 3.88 1.94 1.65 1.45 .75. 1-⅜ 16-16-12 SBZ 16MBT12N
1610-3-16TTM 1 1 3.88 1.94 1.84 1.45 .94 1-⅜ 16-16-16 SBZ 16MBT16N


NPT Female Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER PARKER

INTERCHANGES WITH TUBE NPT PIPE CPI A-LOK
A C D W HEX ITEM ITEM
O.D. THREAD
100-7-1 ¹∕₁₆ ¹∕₁₆ 0.93 0.43 0.78 ⁷∕₁₆ 1-1 GBZ 1FSC1N
100-7-2 ¹∕₁₆ ⅛ 0.95 0.43 0.81 ⁹∕₁₆ 1-2 GBZ 1FSC2N
200-7-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.14 0.60 0.88 ⁹∕₁₆ 2-2 GBZ 2FSC2N
C
200-7-4 ⅛ ¼ 1.32 0.60 1.06 ¾ 2-4 GBZ 2FSC4N
300-7-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.17 0.64 0.91 ⁹∕₁₆ 3-2 GBZ 3FSC2N
300-7-4 ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.35 0.64 1.09 ¾ 3-4 GBZ 3FSC4N
400-7-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.23 0.70 0.94 ⁹∕₁₆ 4-2 GBZ 4FSC2N
400-7-4 ¼ ¼ 1.42 0.70 1.13 ¾ 4-4 GBZ 4FSC4N
400-7-6 ¼ ⅜ 1.48 0.70 1.19 ⅞ 4-6 GBZ 4FSC6N
400-7-8 ¼ ½ 1.67 0.70 1.38 1-¹∕₁₆ 4-8 GBZ 4FSC8N
500-7-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.27 0.73 0.97 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-2 GBZ 5FSC2N
500-7-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.46 0.73 1.16 ¾ 5-4 GBZ 5FSC4N
500-7-6 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅜ 1.51 0.73 1.22 ⅞ 5-6 GBZ 5FSC6N
600-7-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.29 0.76 1.00 ⅝ 6-2 GBZ 6FSC2N
600-7-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.48 0.76 1.19 ¾ 6-4 GBZ 6FSC4N
600-7-6 ⅜ ⅜ 1.54 0.76 1.25 ⅞ 6-6 GBZ 6FSC6N
600-7-8 ⅜ ½ 1.73 0.76 1.44 1-¹∕₁₆ 6-8 GBZ 6FSC8N
600-7-12 ⅜ ¾ 1.85 0.76 1.56 1-¼ 6-12 GBZ 6FSC12N
810-7-4 ½ ¼ 1.59 0.87 1.19 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-4 GBZ 8FSC4N
810-7-6 ½ ⅜ 1.65 0.87 1.25 ⅞ 8-6 GBZ 8FSC6N
810-7-8 ½ ½ 1.84 0.87 1.44 1-¹∕₁₆ 8-8 GBZ 8FSC8N
810-7-12 ½ ¾ 1.96 0.87 1.56 1-¼ 8-12 GBZ 8FSC12N
1010-7-6 ⅝ ⅜ 1.65 0.87 1.25 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 10-6 GBZ 10FSC6N
1010-7-8 ⅝ ½ 1.84 0.87 1.44 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-8 GBZ 10FSC8N
1010-7-12 ⅝ ¾ 1.96 0.87 1.56 1-⅜ 10-12 GBZ 10FSC12N
1210-7-8 ¾ ½ 1.84 0.87 1.44 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-8 GBZ 12FSC8N
1210-7-12 ¾ ¾ 1.96 0.87 1.56 1-⅜ 12-12 GBZ 12FSC12N
1410-7-12 ⅞ ¾ 1.96 0.87 1.56 1-⅜ 14-12 GBZ 14FSC12N
1610-7-12 1 ¾ 2.15 1.05 1.66 1-⅜ 16-12 GBZ 16FSC12N
1610-7-16 1 1 2.46 1.05 1.97 1-⅝ 16-16 GBZ 16FSC16N
2010-7-20 1-¼ 1-¼ 2.94 1.52 2.08 2 20-20 GBZ 20FSC20N
2410-7-24 1-½ 1-½ 3.28 1.77 2.22 2-⅜ 24-24 GBZ 24FSC24N
3210-7-32 2 2 4.00 2.47 2.53 2-⅞ 32-32 GBZ 32FSC32N



NPT Female Bulkhead Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER
TUBE NPT PIPE A-LOK
WITH A C D L W HEX CPI ITEM
O.D. THREAD ITEM
200-71-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.76 1.23 1.50 0.97 ⁹∕₁₆ 2-2 GH2BZ 2FBC2N

300-71-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.79 1.26 1.53 1.00 ⁹∕₁₆ 3-2 GH2BZ 3FBC2N
400-71-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.85 1.31 1.56 1.02 ⅝ 4-2 GH2BZ 4FBC2N
C 400-71-4 ¼ ¼ 2.04 1.31 1.75 1.02 ¾ 4-4 GH2BZ 4FBC4N

500-71-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.96 1.42 1.66 1.12 ¹¹∕₁₆ 5-2 GH2BZ 5FBC2N
500-71-8 ⁵⁄₁₆ ½ 2.38 1.42 2.08 1.12 1-¹∕₁₆ 5-8 GH2BZ 5FBC8N
600-71-4 ⅜ ¼ 2.17 1.44 1.88 1.15 ¾ 6-4 GH2BZ 6FBC4N
810-71-6 ½ ⅜ 2.43 1.65 2.03 1.25 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 8-6 GH2BZ 8FBC6N
810-71-8 ½ ½ 2.62 1.65 2.22 1.25 1-¹∕₁₆ 8-8 GH2BZ 8FBC8N
1010-71-8 ⅝ ½ 2.65 1.68 2.25 1.28 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-8 GH2BZ 10FBC8N
1210-71-12 ¾ ¾ 2.90 1.87 2.50 1.47 1-⅜ 12-12 GH2BZ 12FBC12N
1410-71-12 ⅞ ¾ 3.18 2.09 2.78 1.69 1-⅜ 14-12 GH2BZ 14FBC12N
1610-71-16 1 1 3.68 2.27 3.19 1.78 1-⅝ 16-16 GH2BZ 16FBC16N
NPT Female Elbow for Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES
CPI A-LOK
WITH TUBE O.D. NPT PIPE THREAD C H L W HEX ITEM ITEM
100-8-1 ¹⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 0.75 0.50 0.60 ⁷⁄₁₆ 1-1 DBZ 1FEL1N
100-8-2 ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ 0.79 0.75 0.64 ⁹⁄₁₆ 1-2 DBZ 1FEL2N
200-8-2 ⅛ ⅛ 0.97 0.75 0.71 ⁹⁄₁₆ 2-2 DBZ 2FEL2N
200-8-4 ⅛ ¼ 1.10 0.88 0.84 ¾ 2-4 DBZ 2FEL4N
300-8-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.00 0.75 0.74 ⁹⁄₁₆ 3-2 DBZ 3FEL2N
400-8-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.06 0.75 0.77 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-2 DBZ 4FEL2N
400-8-4 ¼ ¼ 1.20 0.88 0.91 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 4-4 DBZ 4FEL4N
400-8-6 ¼ ⅜ 1.25 0.88 0.96 ¹³⁄₁₆ 4-6 DBZ 4FEL6N
400-8-8 ¼ ½ 1.36 1.13 1.07 1 4-8 DBZ 4FEL8N
500-8-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.13 0.75 0.84 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5-2 DBZ 5FEL2N
500-8-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.24 0.88 0.94 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 5-4 DBZ 5FEL4N
600-8-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.20 0.75 0.91 ⅝ 6-2 DBZ 6FEL2N
600-8-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.26 0.88 0.97 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 6-4 DBZ 6FEL4N
600-8-6 ⅜ ⅜ 1.31 0.88 1.02 ¹³⁄₁₆ 6-6 DBZ 6FEL6N
600-8-8 ⅜ ½ 1.42 1.13 1.13 1 6-8 DBZ 6FEL8N
810-8-4 ½ ¼ 1.42 0.88 1.02 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4 DBZ 8FEL4N
810-8-6 ½ ⅜ 1.42 0.88 1.02 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6 DBZ 8FEL6N
810-8-8 ½ ½ 1.53 1.13 1.13 1 8-8 DBZ 8FEL8N
1010-8-6 ⅝ ⅜ 1.50 0.88 1.10 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-6 DBZ 10FEL6N
1010-8-8 ⅝ ½ 1.57 1.13 1.17 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-8 DBZ 10FEL8N
1210-8-8 ¾ ½ 1.57 1.13 1.17 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-8 DBZ 12FEL8N
1210-8-12 ¾ ¾ 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 12-12 DBZ 12FEL12N
1410-8-12 ⅞ ¾ 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 14-12 DBZ 14FEL12N
1610-8-12 1 ¾ 1.93 1.25 1.45 1-⅜ 16-12 DBZ 16FEL12N
1610-8-16 1 1 2.02 1.50 1.53 1-⅝ 16-16 DBZ 16FEL16N


NPT Female Run Tee for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER
TUBE A-LOK
WITH NPT PIPE THREAD A C H L W HEX CPI ITEM
O.D. ITEM
200-3-2TFT ⅛ ⅛ 1.72 0.96 0.75 0.70 ½ 2-2-2 MBZ 2FRT2N

300-3-2TFT ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.76 1.01 0.75 0.74 ½ 3-2-3 MBZ 3FRT2N
400-3-2TFT ¼ ⅛ 1.81 1.06 0.75 0.77 ½ 4-2-4 MBZ 4FRT2N C
400-3-4TFT ¼ ¼ 2.05 1.17 0.88 0.88 ¹¹∕₁₆ 4-4-4 MBZ 4FRT4N
500-3-2TFT ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.92 1.17 0.75 0.88 ⅝ 5-2-5 MBZ 5FRT2N
600-3-4TFT ⅜ ¼ 2.11 1.23 0.88 0.94 ¹¹∕₁₆ 6-4-6 MBZ 6FRT4N
810-3-4TFT ½ ¼ 2.56 1.42 0.88 1.02 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4-8 MBZ 8FRT4N
810-3-6TFT ½ ⅜ 2.30 1.42 0.88 1.02 ⅞ 8-6-8 MBZ 8FRT6N
810-3-8TFT ½ ½ 2.66 1.53 1.13 1.13 1 8-8-8 MBZ 8FRT8N
1010-3-8TFT ⅝ ½ 2.70 1.57 1.13 1.17 1-¹∕₁₆ 10-8-10 MBZ 10FRT8N
1210-3-12TFT ¾ ¾ 3.01 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 12-12-12 MBZ 12FRT12N
1410-3-8TFT ⅞ ½ 3.01 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 14-8-14 MBZ 14FRT8N
1410-3-12TFT ⅞ ¾ 3.01 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 14-12-14 MBZ 14FRT12N
1610-3-12TFT 1 ¾ 3.18 1.93 1.25 1.45 1-⅜ 16-12-16 MBZ 16FRT12N
1610-3-16TFT 1 1 3.52 2.02 1.50 1.65 1-⅝ 16-16-16 MBZ 16FRT16N
NPT Female Branch Tee for Fractional Tube
INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER
TUBE NPT PIPE A-LOK
WITH A C H L W HEX CPI ITEM
O.D. THREAD ITEM
200-3-2TTF ⅛ ⅛ 1.91 1.01 .075 0.70 ½ 2-2-2 OBZ 2FBT2N

300-3-2TTF ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 2.02 1.01 0.75 0.74 ½ 3-3-2 OBZ 3FBT2N
400-3-2TTF ¼ ⅛ 2.12 1.06 0.75 0.77 ½ 4-4-2 OBZ 4FBT2N
400-3-4TTF ¼ ¼ 2.34 1.17 0.88 0.88 ¹¹∕₁₆ 4-4-4 OBZ 4FBT4N
500-3-2TTF ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 2.34 1.17 0.75 0.88 ⅝ 5-5-2 OBZ 5FBT2N
600-3-4TTF ⅜ ¼ 2.46 1.23 0.88 0.94 ¹¹∕₁₆ 6-6-4 OBZ 6FBT4N
810-3-4TTF ½ ¼ 2.84 1.42 0.88 1.02 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-8-4 OBZ 8FBT4N
810-3-6TTF ½ ⅜ 2.84 1.42 0.88 1.02 ⅞ 8-8-6 OBZ 8FBT6N
810-3-8TTF ½ ½ 3.06 1.53 1.13 1.13 1 8-8-8 OBZ 8FBT8N
1010-3-8TTF ⅝ ½ 3.06 1.53 1.13 1.13 1 10-10-8 OBZ 10FBT8N
1210-3-12TTF ¾ ¾ 3.52 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 12-12-12 OBZ 12FBT12N
1410-3-12TTF ⅞ ¾ 3.52 1.76 1.25 1.36 1-⅜ 14-14-12 OBZ 14FBT12N
1610-3-12TTF 1 ¾ 3.86 1.94 1.25 1.45 1-⅜ 16-16-12 OBZ 16FBT12N
1610-3-16TTF 1 1 4.28 2.14 1.50 1.65 1-⅝ 16-16-16 OBZ 16FBT16N

CPI™ and A-LOK® Weld Fittings

Socket Weld Elbow for Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES
ITEM TUBE TYPE
WITH C L H P* X W HEX
O.D.
2-2 ZEBW 200-9-2 W ⅛ 0.92 0.66 0.63 .16 .38 ⁵⁄₁₆ CPI™
3-3 ZEBW 300-9-3 W ³⁄₁₆ 0.98 0.72 0.69 .20 .44 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
C 4-4 ZEBW 400-9-4 W ¼ 1.06 0.78 0.84 .25 .50 ⁹⁄₁₆ CPI™
6-6 ZEBW 600-9-6 W ⅜ 1.31 1.02 1.08 .34 .63 ¾ CPI™
8-8 ZEBW 810-9-8 W ½ 1.42 1.02 1.14 .41 .76 ¾ CPI™
10-10 ZEBW 1010-9-10 W ⅝ 1.57 1.17 1.35 .49 .94 1-¹⁄₁₆ CPI™
12-12 ZEBW 1210-9-12 W ¾ 1.57 1.17 1.39 .50 1.09 1-¹⁄₁₆ CPI™
16-16 ZEBW 1610-9-16 W 1 1.93 1.65 1.84 .56 1.38 1-⅝ CPI™
2-2 ZELW 200-9-2 W ⅛ 0.92 0.66 0.63 .16 .38 ⁵⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
3-3 ZELW 300-9-3 W ³⁄₁₆ 0.98 0.72 0.69 .20 .44 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
4-4 ZELW 400-9-4 W ¼ 1.06 0.78 0.84 .25 .50 ⁹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
6-6 ZELW 600-9-6 W ⅜ 1.31 1.02 1.08 .34 .63 ¾ A-LOK®
8-8 ZELW 810-9-8 W ½ 1.42 1.02 1.14 .41 .76 ¾ A-LOK®
10-10 ZELW 1010-9-10 W ⅝ 1.57 1.17 1.35 .49 .94 1-¹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
12-12 ZELW 1210-9-12 W ¾ 1.57 1.17 1.39 .50 1.09 1-¹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
16-16 ZELW 1610-9-16 W 1 1.93 1.65 1.84 .56 1.38 1-⅝ A-LOK®

*Socket Depth
Socket Weld Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES
ITEM TUBE E W TYPE
WITH A C D P* X
O.D. BORE HEX
2-2 ZHBW 200-6-2 W ¹⁄₈ 1.16 0.60 0.90 .16 0.38 .094 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
3-3 ZHBW 300-6-3 W ³⁄₁₆ 1.24 0.64 0.98 .20 0.44 .141 ½ CPI™
4-4 ZHBW 400-6-4 W ¼ 1.36 0.70 1.07 .25 0.50 .188 ⁹⁄₁₆ CPI™
6-6 ZHBW 600-6-6 W ⅜ 1.53 0.76 1.24 .34 0.63 .313 ¹¹⁄₁₆ CPI™
8-8 ZHBW 810-6-8 W ½ 1.74 0.87 1.34 .41 0.78 .438 ¹³⁄₁₆ CPI™
10-10 ZHBW 1010-6-10 W ⅝ 1.86 0.87 1.46 .47 0.94 .500 1 CPI™
12-12 ZHBW 1210-6-12 W ¾ 1.92 0.87 1.52 .50 1.09 .656 1-¹⁄₈ CPI™
16-16 ZHBW 1610-6-16 W 1 2.31 1.05 1.82 .56 1.44 .906 1-⁵⁄₈ CPI™
2-2 ZHLW 200-6-2 W ¹⁄₈ 1.16 0.60 0.90 .16 0.38 .094 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
3-3 ZHLW 300-6-3 W ³⁄₁₆ 1.24 0.64 0.98 .20 0.44 .141 ½ A-LOK®
4-4 ZHLW 400-6-4 W ¼ 1.36 0.70 1.07 .25 0.50 .188 ⁹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
6-6 ZHLW 600-6-6 W ⅜ 1.53 0.76 1.24 .34 0.63 .313 ¹¹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
8-8 ZHLW 810-6-8 W ½ 1.74 0.87 1.34 .41 0.78 .438 ¹³⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
NOTE: A and C dimensions are 10-10 ZHLW 1010-6-10 W ⅝ 1.86 0.87 1.46 .47 0.94 .500 1 A-LOK®
typical finger-tight. 12-12 ZHLW 1210-6-12 W ¾ 1.92 0.87 1.52 .50 1.09 .656 1-¹⁄₈ A-LOK®
Dimensions for reference only,
subject to change 16-16 ZHLW 1610-6-16 W 1 2.31 1.05 1.82 .56 1.44 .906 1-⁵⁄₈ A-LOK®

CPI™ and A-LOK® Weld Fittings - Continued
Buttweld Elbow for Fractional Tube
C
INCHES
INTERCHANGES X
ITEM TUBE BUTTWELD W TYPE
WITH C H L R BUTTWELD
O.D. PIPE SIZE HEX
O.D.
2-1/8 ZEBW2 200-2-2 W ⅛ ⅛ 0.93 0.70 0.67 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
3-1/8 ZEBW2 300-2-2 W ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.01 0.74 0.74 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
4-1/8 ZEBW2 400-2-2 W ¼ ⅛ 1.06 0.74 0.77 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
4-1/4 ZEBW2 400-2-4 W ¼ ¼ 1.10 0.97 0.78 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ CPI™
6-1/4 ZEBW2 600-2-4 W ⅜ ¼ 1.20 1.00 0.91 .56 .540 ⅝ CPI™
8-3/8 ZEBW2 810-2-6 W ½ ⅜ 1.42 1.11 1.02 .56 .675 ¹³⁄₁₆ CPI™
8-1/2 ZEBW2 810-2-8 W ½ ½ 1.42 1.30 1.02 .75 .840 ⅞ CPI™
10-1/2 ZEBW2 1010-2-8 W ⅝ ½ 1.50 1.39 1.10 .75 .840 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ CPI™
12-3/4 ZEBW2 1210-2-12 W ¾ ¾ 1.57 1.45 1.17 .75 1.050 1-¹⁄₁₆ CPI™
16-3/4 ZEBW2 1610-2-12 W 1 ¾ 1.94 1.64 1.45 .75 1.050 1-³⁄₈ CPI™
16-1 ZEBW2 1610-2-16 W 1 1 1.94 1.84 1.45 .94 1.315 1-⁵⁄₁₆ CPI™
2-1/8 ZELW2 200-2-2 W ⅛ ⅛ 0.93 0.70 0.67 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
3-1/8 ZELW2 300-2-2 W ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.01 0.74 0.74 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
4-1/8 ZELW2 400-2-2 W ¼ ⅛ 1.06 0.74 0.77 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
4-1/4 ZELW2 400-2-4 W ¼ ¼ 1.10 0.97 0.78 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
6-1/4 ZELW2 600-2-4 W ⅜ ¼ 1.20 1.00 0.91 .56 .540 ⅝ A-LOK®
8-3/8 ZELW2 810-2-6 W ½ ⅜ 1.42 1.11 1.02 .56 .675 ¹³⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
8-1/2 ZELW2 810-2-8 W ½ ½ 1.42 1.30 1.02 .75 .840 ⅞ A-LOK®
10-1/2 ZELW2 1010-2-8 W ⅝ ½ 1.50 1.39 1.10 .75 .840 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
12-3/4 ZELW2 1210-2-12 W ¾ ¾ 1.57 1.45 1.17 .75 1.050 1-¹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
16-3/4 ZELW2 1610-2-12 W 1 ¾ 1.94 1.64 1.45 .75 1.050 1-³⁄₈ A-LOK®
16-1 ZELW2 1610-2-16 W 1 1 1.94 1.84 1.45 .94 1.315 1-⁵⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
NOTE:
C dimension is typical finger-tight.
Pipe buttweld end will conform to Schedule 80 unless otherwise noted.

CPI™ and A-LOK® Weld Fittings - Continued
Buttweld Connector for Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES
ITEM TUBE BUTTWELD X BUTTWELD W TYPE
WITH A C D R
O.D. PIPE SIZE O.D. HEX
2-1/8 ZHBW2 200-1-2 W ⅛ ⅛ 1.20 0.60 0.94 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
3-1/8 ZHBW2 300-1-2 W ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.24 0.64 0.97 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ CPI™
4-1/8 ZHBW2 400-1-2 W ¼ ⅛ 1.29 0.70 1.00 .38 .405 ½ CPI™
4-1/4 ZHBW2 400-1-4 W ¼ ¼ 1.46 0.70 1.17 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ CPI™
5-1/8 ZHBW2 500-1-2 W ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.48 0.73 1.22 .38 .405 ½ CPI™
5-1/4 ZHBW2 500-1-4-W ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.49 0.76 1.23 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ CPI™
6-1/4 ZHBW2 600-1-4 W ⅜ ¼ 1.49 0.76 1.20 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ CPI™
6-3/8 ZHBW2 600-1-6 W ⅜ ⅜ 1.60 0.76 1.31 .56 .675 ¾ CPI™
6-1/2 ZHBW2 600-1-8 W ⅜ ½ 1.82 0.76 1.53 .75 .840 ⅞ CPI™
6-3/4 ZHBW2 600-1-12 W ⅜ ¾ 1.88 0.76 1.59 .75 1.050 1-¹⁄₈ CPI™
8-3/8 ZHBW2 810-1-6 W ½ ⅜ 1.71 0.87 1.31 .56 .675 ¹³⁄₁₆ CPI™
8-1/2 ZHBW2 810-1-8 W ½ ½ 1.93 0.87 1.53 .75 .840 ⅞ CPI™
8-3/4 ZHBW2 810-1-12 W ½ ¾ 1.99 0.87 1.59 .75 1.050 1-¹⁄₈ CPI™
10-1/2 ZHBW2 1010-1-8 W ⁵⁄₈ ½ 1.93 0.87 1.53 .75 .840 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ CPI™
12-3/4 ZHBW2 1210-1-12 W ¾ ¾ 1.99 0.87 1.59 .75 1.050 ⅞ CPI™
16-1 ZHBW2 1610-1-16 W 1 1 2.46 1.05 1.97 .94 1.310 1-¹⁄₁₆ CPI™
2-1/8 ZHLW2 200-1-2 W ⅛ ⅛ 1.20 0.60 0.94 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
3-1/8 ZHLW2 300-1-2 W ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.24 0.64 0.97 .38 .405 ⁷⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
4-1/8 ZHLW2 400-1-2 W ¼ ⅛ 1.29 0.70 1.00 .38 .405 ½ A-LOK®
4-1/4 ZHLW2 400-1-4 W ¼ ¼ 1.46 0.70 1.17 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
5-1/8 ZHLW2 500-1-2 W ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.48 0.73 1.22 .38 .405 ½ A-LOK®
5-1/4-ZHLW2 500-1-4-W ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.49 0.76 1.23 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
6-1/4 ZHLW2 600-1-4 W ⅜ ¼ 1.49 0.76 1.20 .56 .540 ⁹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
6-3/8 ZHLW2 600-1-6 W ⅜ ⅜ 1.60 0.76 1.31 .56 .675 ¾ A-LOK®
6-1/2 ZHLW2 600-1-8 W ⅜ ½ 1.82 0.76 1.53 .75 .840 ⅞ A-LOK®
6-3/4 ZHLW2 600-1-12 W ⅜ ¾ 1.88 0.76 1.59 .75 1.050 1-¹⁄₈ A-LOK®
8-3/8 ZHLW2 810-1-6 W ½ ⅜ 1.71 0.87 1.31 .56 .675 ¹³⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
8-1/2 ZHLW2 810-1-8 W ½ ½ 1.93 0.87 1.53 .75 .840 ⅞ A-LOK®
8-3/4 ZHLW2 810-1-12 W ½ ¾ 1.99 0.87 1.59 .75 1.050 1-⅛ A-LOK®
10-1/2 ZHLW2 1010-1-8 W ⁵⁄₈ ½ 1.93 0.87 1.53 .75 .840 ¹⁵/₁₆ A-LOK®
12-3/4 ZHLW2 1210-1-12 W ¾ ¾ 1.99 0.87 1.59 .75 1.050 ⅞ A-LOK®
16-1 ZHLW2 1610-1-16 W 1 1 2.46 1.05 1.97 .94 1.310 1-¹⁄₁₆ A-LOK®
Dimensions for reference only, subject to change

CPI™ and A-LOK® Port Connectors

Tube End Reducer for Fractional Tube
INCHES
PARKER
INTERCHANGES
WITH
T₁TURNED
T₂
MACHINED W
PARKER CPI
ITEM
A-LOK C
END TUBE A C D K BORE ITEM
END TUBE HEX
O.D.
O.D.
100-R-2 ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.10 0.43 0.95 0.53 ⁵⁄₁₆ 0.05 2-1 TRBZ 2TUR1
100-R-3 ³⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.13 0.43 0.98 0.58 ⁵⁄₁₆ 0.05 3-1 TRBZ 3TUR1
100-R-4 ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.24 0.43 1.09 0.63 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.05 4-1 TRBZ 4TUR1
200-R-1 ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.18 0.60 0.92 0.38 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.09 1-2 TRBZ 1TUR2
200-R-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.34 0.43 1.09 0.54 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.07 2-2 TRBZ 2TUR2
200-R-3 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.35 0.60 1.09 0.58 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.09 3-2 TRBZ 3TUR2
200-R-4 ¼ ⅛ 1.42 0.60 1.16 0.63 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.09 4-2 TRBZ 4TUR2
200-R-6 ⅜ ⅛ 1.48 0.60 1.22 0.69 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.09 6-2 TRBZ 6TUR2
200-R-8 ½ ⅛ 1.74 0.60 1.48 0.91 ⁹⁄₁₆ 0.09 8-2 TRBZ 8TUR2
300-R-2 ⅛ ³⁄₁₆ 1.37 0.63 1.11 0.53 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.08 2-3 TRBZ 2TUR3
300-R-4 ¼ ³⁄₁₆ 1.46 0.63 1.20 0.63 ⁷⁄₁₆ 0.13 4-3 TRBZ 4TUR3
400-R-2 ⅛ ¼ 1.45 0.70 1.16 0.53 ½ 0.08 2-4 TRBZ 2TUR4
400-R-3 ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.48 0.60 1.19 0.56 ½ 0.12 3-4 TRBZ 3TUR4
400-R-4 ¼ ¼ 1.54 0.70 1.25 0.63 ½ 0.16 4-4 TRBZ 4TUR4
400-R-5 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.57 0.70 1.28 0.66 ½ 0.16 5-4 TRBZ 5TUR4
400-R-6 ⅜ ¼ 1.60 0.70 1.31 0.69 ½ 0.19 6-4 TRBZ 6TUR4
400-R-8 ½ ¼ 1.82 0.70 1.53 0.91 ⁹⁄₁₆ 0.19 8-4 TRBZ 8TUR4
400-R-10 ⅝ ¼ 1.89 0.70 1.60 0.97 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 0.19 10-4 TRBZ 10TUR4
400-R-12 ¾ ¼ 1.88 0.70 1.59 0.97 ¹³⁄₁₆ 0.19 12-4 TRBZ 12TUR4
500-R-6 ⅜ ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.65 0.73 1.36 0.69 ⁹⁄₁₆ 0.25 6-5 TRBZ 6TUR5
500-R-8 ½ ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.87 0.73 1.58 0.91 ⁹⁄₁₆ 0.25 8-5 TRBZ 8TUR5
600-R-4 ¼ ⅜ 1.63 0.76 1.34 0.63 ⅝ 0.19 4-6 TRBZ 4TUR6
600-R-6 ⅝ ⅝ 1.70 0.76 1.41 0.69 ⅝ 0.28 6-6 TRBZ 6TUR6
600-R-8 ½ ⅜ 1.91 0.76 1.62 0.91 ⅝ 0.28 8-6 TRBZ 8TUR6
600-R-10 ⅝ ⅜ 1.98 0.76 1.69 0.97 ¹¹/₁₆ 0.28 10-6 TRBZ 10TUR6
600-R-12 ¾ ⅜ 1.98 0.76 1.69 0.97 ¹³/₁₆ 0.28 12-6 TRBZ 12TUR6 NOTE: A and C
810-R-4 ¼ ½ 1.77 0.87 1.37 0.63 ¹³/₁₆ 0.19 4-8 TRBZ 4TUR8 dimensions are typical
finger-tight.
810-R-6 ⅜ ½ 1.84 0.87 1.44 0.69 ¹³/₁₆ 0.19 6-8 TRBZ 6TUR8 Size 1, 2, and 3 do not
810-R-10 ⅝ ½ 2.12 0.87 1.72 0.97 ¹³/₁₆ 0.41 10-8 TRBZ 10TUR8 require a groove.
Size 4 and above tube
810-R-12 ¾ ½ 2.12 0.87 1.72 0.97 ¹³/₁₆ 0.41 12-8 TRBZ 12TUR8 stub is pre-grooved
as standard. Generic
810-R-16 1 ½ 2.37 0.87 1.97 1.22 1-¹/₁₆ 0.41 16-8 TRBZ 16TUR8
(non-grooved) can be
1010-R-12 ¾ ⅝ 2.15 0.87 1.75 0.97 ¹⁵/₁₆ 0.50 12-10 TRBZ 12TUR10 ordered through Quick
Response Department.
1010-R-14 ⅞ ⅝ 2.21 0.87 1.81 1.03 ¹⁵/₁₆ 0.50 14-10 TRBZ 14TUR10
Sizes 20, 24 require
1010-R-16 1 ⅝ 2.40 0.87 2.00 1.22 1-¹/₁₆ 0.50 16-10 TRBZ 16TUR10 additional lubrication
prior to assembly.
1210-R-8 ½ ¾ 2.15 0.87 1.75 0.91 1-¹/₁₆ 0.39 8-12 TRBZ 8TUR12 Add -Z6 for assembly of
1210-R-16 1 ¾ 2.46 0.87 2.06 1.22 1-¹/₁₆ 0.63 16-12 TRBZ 16TUR12 nuts and ferrules on the
tube stub end.
1610-R-24 1-½ 1 3.519 1.05 3.03 2.05 1-⅝ 0.88 24-16 TRBZ† 24TUR16 †All tube stubs over
2010-R-24 1-½ 1-¹/₄ 4.10 1.52 3.23 2.05 1-⁷⁄₈ 1.09 24-20 TRBZ† 24TUR20 1" come standard with
nuts and ferrule(s) pre-
2410-R-32 2 1-½ 5.17 1.52 4.10 2.74 2-¼ 1.34 32-24 TRBZ† 32TUR24 assembled (-Z6 option).

CPI™ and A-LOK® Port Connectors - Continued
Tube End Bulkhead Adapter for Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES PARKER CPI PARKER
WITH TUBE ITEM A-LOK ITEM
A C L K D BORE W HEX
O.D.
200-R1-2 ⅛ 1.95 1.23 0.97 .53 1.69 .093 ½ 2-2 T2H2BZ 2TUBC2
400-R1-4 ¼ 2.20 1.31 1.02 .63 1.91 .187 ⅝ 4-4 T2H2BZ 4TUBC4
C 600-R1-6 ⅜ 2.42 1.44 1.16 .69 2.13 .281 ¾ 6-6 T2H2BZ 6TUBC6
810-R1-8 ½ 2.87 1.65 1.25 .91 2.47 .406 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 8-8 T2H2BZ 8TUBC8
Tube stub is pre-grooved as standard. Generic (non-grooved) can be ordered
through Quick Response Department. Add -Z6 for assembly of nuts and ferrules on
the tube stub end.
Port Connector for Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES INCHES PARKER PARKER
WITH TUBE O.D. A K BORE CPI ITEM A-LOK ITEM
101-PC ¹⁄₁₆ 0.63 0.44 .031 1-1 ZPC 1PC1

201-PC-1 ¹⁄₁₆-⅛ 0.84 0.44 .031 1-2 ZPC 1PC2
401-PC-1 ¹⁄₁₆-¼ 0.91 0.44 .031 1-4 ZPC 1PC4
201-PC ⅛ 0.95 0.54 .078 2-2 ZPC 2PC2
401-PC-2 ⅛-¼ 1.05 0.54 .078 2-4 ZPC 2PC4
601-PC-2 ⅛- ⅜ 1.09 0.54 .031 2-6 ZPC 2PC6
301-PC ³⁄₁₆ 0.98 0.67 .116 3-3 ZPC 3PC3
401-PC ¼ 1.07 0.76 .156 4-4 ZPC 4PC4
601-PC-4 ¼-⅜ 1.15 0.64 .156 4-6 ZPC 4PC6
811-PC-4 ¼-½ 1.36 0.64 .156 4-8 ZPC 4PC8
601-PC ⅜ 1.16 0.84 .281 6-6 ZPC 6PC6
811-PC-6 ⅜-½ 1.40 0.72 .281 6-8 ZPC 6PC8
811-PC ½ 1.59 1.11 .375 8-8 ZPC 8PC8
1211-PC-8 ½-¾ 1.72 0.91 .375 8-12 ZPC 8PC12
1211-PC ¾ 1.65 1.16 .578 12-12 ZPC 12PC12
1611-PC 1 2.12 1.44 .813 16-16 ZPC 16PC16
NOTE: Tube stub is pre-grooved as standard. (Size 1, 2, and 3 not grooved). Generic (non-grooved 4-16) can be
ordered through Quick Response Department.
The machined ferrule end (T2) requires only 1/4 turn from finger tight to assemble.
Add -Z6 for assembly of nuts and ferrules on the tube stub end.

NPT Tube End Male Adapter for Fractional Tube

INCHES
INTERCHANGES PARKER CPI PARKER A-LOK
WITH TUBE NPT PIPE W ITEM ITEM
A R K BORE
O.D. THREAD HEX
1-TA-1-1 ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.00 0.38 0.38 ⁷⁄₁₆ .031 1-2 T2HF 1MA2N
2-TA-1-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.16 0.38 0.54 ⁷⁄₁₆ .078 2-2 T2HF 2MA2N
2-TA-1-4 ⅛ ¼ 1.38 0.56 0.54 ⁹⁄₁₆ .078 2-4 T2HF 2MA4N
3-TA-1-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.20 0.38 0.58 ⁷⁄₁₆ .116 3-2 T2HF 3MA2N
C
3-TA-1-4 ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.42 0.56 0.58 ⁹⁄₁₆ .116 3-4 T2HF 3MA4N
4-TA-1-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.25 0.38 0.63 ⁷⁄₁₆ .156 4-2 T2HF 4MA2N
4-TA-1-4 ¼ ¼ 1.46 0.56 0.63 ⁹⁄₁₆ .156 4-4 T2HF 4MA4N
4-TA-1-6 ¼ ⅜ 1.49 0.56 0.63 ¹¹⁄₁₆ .156 4-6 T2HF 4MA6N
4-TA-1-8 ¼ ½ 1.71 0.75 0.63 ⁷⁄₈ .156 4-8 T2HF 4MA8N
5-TA-1-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.29 0.38 0.66 ⁷⁄₁₆ .219 5-2 T2HF 5MA2N
5-TA-1-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.50 0.56 0.66 ⁹⁄₁₆ .219 5-4 T2HF 5MA4N
5-TA-1-6 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅜ 1.53 0.56 0.66 ¹¹⁄₁₆ .219 5-6 T2HF 5MA6N
5-TA-1-8 ⁵⁄₁₆ ½ 1.74 0.75 0.66 ⁷⁄₈ .219 5-8 T2HF 5MA8N
6-TA-1-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.32 0.38 0.69 ⁷⁄₁₆ .281 6-2 T2HF 6MA2N
6-TA-1-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.53 0.56 0.69 ⁹⁄₁₆ .281 6-4 T2HF 6MA4N
6-TA-1-6 ⅜ ⅜ 1.56 0.56 0.69 ¹¹⁄₁₆ .281 6-6 T2HF 6MA6N
6-TA-1-8 ⅜ ½ 1.78 0.75 0.69 ⁷⁄₈ .281 6-8 T2HF 6MA8N
8-TA-1-4 ½ ¼ 1.75 0.56 0.91 ⁹⁄₁₆ .281 8-4 T2HF 8MA4N
8-TA-1-6 ½ ⅜ 1.78 0.56 0.91 ¹¹⁄₁₆ .375 8-6 T2HF 8MA6N
8-TA-1-8 ½ ½ 2.00 0.75 0.91 ⁷⁄₈ .375 8-8 T2HF 8MA8N
10-TA-1-8 ⅝ ½ 2.06 0.75 0.97 ⁷⁄₈ .469 10-8 T2HF 10MA8N
12-TA-1-8 ¾ ½ 2.06 0.75 0.97 ⁷⁄₈ .469 12-8 T2HF 12MA8N
12-TA-1-12 ¾ ¾ 2.06 0.75 0.97 1-¹⁄₁₆ .578 12-12 T2HF 12MA12N
12-TA-1-16 ¾ 1 2.41 0.94 0.97 1-⅜ .813 12-16 T2HF 12MA16N
16-TA-1-12 1 ¾ 2.31 0.75 1.22 1-¹∕₁₆ .813 16-12 T2HF 16MA12N
16-TA-1-16 1 1 2.68 0.94 1.22 1-⅜ .813 16-16 T2HF 16MA16N
20-TA-1-20 1-¼ 1-¼ 3.16 0.97 1.71 1-¾ 1.000 20-20 T2HF 20MA20N
24-TA-1-24 1-½ 1-½ 3.72 1.00 2.05 2-⅛ 1.250 24-24 T2HF 24MA24N
32-TA-1-32 2 2 4.70 1.04 2.74 2-¾ 1.720 32-32 T2HF 32MA32N
NOTE:
Tube stub is pre-grooved as standard. Generic (non-grooved) can be ordered through Quick Response Department.
Inch sizes 1, 2, and 3 and metric sizes 2, 3, and 4mm do not have grooves.

Tube End NPT Female Adapter for Fractional Tube

INCHES
PARKER
INTERCHANGES NPT PARKER CPI
TUBE A-LOK
WITH PIPE A K W HEX BORE ITEM
O.D. ITEM
THREAD
1-TA-7-2 ¹⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.07 0.34 ⁹⁄₁₆ .031 1-2 T2HG 1FA2N
2-TA-7-2 ⅛ ⅛ 1.23 0.53 ⁹⁄₁₆ .093 2-2 T2HG 2FA2N
C 2-TA-7-4 ⅛ ¼ 1.38 0.53 ¾ .093 2-4 T2HG 2FA4N
3-TA-7-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.25 0.56 ⁹⁄₁₆ .116 3-2 T2HG 3FA2N
3-TA-7-4 ³⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.42 0.56 ¾ .116 3-4 T2HG 3FA4N
4-TA-7-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.31 0.63 ⁹⁄₁₆ .188 4-2 T2HG 4FA2N
4-TA-7-4 ¼ ¼ 1.47 0.63 ¾ .188 4-4 T2HG 4FA4N
4-TA-7-6 ¼ ⅜ 1.56 0.63 ⁷⁄₈ .188 4-6 T2HG 4FA6N
4-TA-7-8 ¼ ½ 1.8 0.63 1-¹/₁₆ .188 4-8 T2HG 4FA8N
5-TA-7-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.34 0.66 ⁹⁄₁₆ .219 5-2 T2HG 5FA2N
5-TA-7-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.5 0.66 ¾ .219 5-4 T2HG 5FA4N
5-TA-7-6 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅜ 1.59 0.66 ⁷⁄₈ .219 5-6 T2HG 5FA6N
6-TA-7-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.36 0.69 1-¹/₁₆ .281 6-2 T2HG 6FA2N
6-TA-7-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.55 0.69 ¾ .281 6-4 T2HG 6FA4N
6-TA-7-6 ⅜ ⅜ 1.59 0.69 ⁷⁄₈ .281 6-6 T2HG 6FA6N
6-TA-7-8 ⅜ ½ 1.84 0.69 1¹-¹/₁₆ .281 6-8 T2HG 6FA8N
8-TA-7-4 ½ ¼ 1.72 0.91 ¾ .391 8-4 T2HG 8FA4N
8-TA-7-6 ½ ⅜ 1.8 0.91 ⁷⁄₈ .391 8-6 T2HG 8FA6N
8-TA-7-8 ½ ½ 2.1 0.91 1-¹/₁₆ .390 8-8 T2HG 8FA8N
10-TA-7-6 ⅝ ⅜ 1.86 0.97 ⁷⁄₈ .469 10-6 T2HG 10FA6N
10-TA-7-8 ⅝ ½ 2.09 0.97 1-¹/₁₆ .469 10-8 T2HG 10FA8N
12-TA-7-8 ¾ ½ 2.1 0.97 1-¹/₁₆ .578 12-8 T2HG 12FA8N
12-TA-7-12 ¾ ¾ 2.16 0.97 1-¼ .578 12-12 T2HG 12FA12N
12-TA-7-16 ¾ 1 2.3 0.97 1-⅝ .578 12-16 T2HG 12FA16N
14-TA-7-12 ⅞ ¾ 2.22 1.02 1-⁵⁄₁₆ .578 14-12 T2HG 14FA12N
16-TA-7-12 1 ¾ 2.41 1.22 1-⅝ .813 16-12 T2HG 16FA12N
16-TA-7-16 1 1 2.54 1.22 1-⅝ .813 16-16 T2HG 16FA16N
20-TA-7-20 1-¼ 1-¼ 3.06 1.71 2-⅛ 1.000 20-20 T2HG 20FA20N
24-TA-7-24 1-½ 1-½ 3.5 2.05 2-⅜ 1.250 24-24 T2HG 24FA24N
32-TA-7-32 2 2 4.23 2.74 2-⁷⁄₈ 1.720 32-32 T2HG 32FA32N
NOTE:
Tube stub is pre-grooved as standard.
Generic (non-grooved) can be ordered through Quick Response Department.

DP Transmitter Calibration Adapters for Fractional Tube

DESCRIPTION
Parker CPI™ / A-LOK® adapters connect directly to the bleed port of a differential pressure transmitter so that the
calibration process can be simplified. Two sizes of adapters (1/4-28 Thd., 5/16-24 Thd.) are available to fit the vent ports
of Rosemount, Honeywell, and Foxboro DP transmitters. Both adapters are available in 316SS.
Calibration Adapter for Honeywell DP Transmitters Calibration Adapter for Rosemount/Foxboro
DP Transmitters
C
TRANSMITTER INTERCHANGES STRAIGHT INCHES

TYPE
Item WITH THREAD A B C D E F G H J HEX
(1) Rosemount/ 4-2 ZH2LX-SS-D950373 – ⁵⁄₁₆ -24 2.32 1.41 .70 2.03 .24 .60 .25 .06 .41 ½
Foxboro
(2) Honeywell 4-2 ZH2LX-SS-D940336 SS-400-1-0257 ¼ -28 1.75 .80 .70 1.46 .47 .60 .20 .03 – ½
(3) Rosemount/ 4-2 ZH2LX-SS-D030297 SS-400-1-0253 ⁵⁄₁₆-24 2.32 1.41 .70 2.03 .40 .60 .25 .05 .41 ½
Yokogawa
(4) ABB 4-2 ZH2LX-SS-D030249 – ¼ -28 1.74 .74 .70 1.44 .30 .60 .18 .05 – ½

CPI™ and A-LOK® Tube to Tube Unions

Union for Fractional Tube INCHES PARKER PARKER
INTERCHANGES WITH CPI A-LOK
TUBE O.D. A C D W HEX ITEM ITEM
100-6 ¹∕₁₆ 0.99 0.43 0.69 ⁵∕₁₆ 1-1 HBZ 1SC1
200-6 ¹∕₈ 1.39 0.60 0.88 ⁷∕₁₆ 2-2 HBZ 2SC2
300-6 ³∕₁₆ 1.48 0.64 0.95 ⁷∕₁₆ 3-3 HBZ 3SC3
400-6 ¼ 1.62 0.70 1.03 ½ 4-4 HBZ 4SC4
500-6 ⁵∕₁₆ 1.70 0.73 1.11 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-5 HBZ 5SC5
C 600-6 ³∕₈ 1.77 0.76 1.19 ⅝ 6-6 HBZ 6SC6
810-6 ½ 2.02 0.87 1.22 ¹³∕₁₆ 8-8 HBZ 8SC8
1010-6 ⅝ 2.05 0.87 1.25 ¹⁵∕₁₆ 10-10 HBZ 10SC10
1210-6 ¾ 2.11 0.87 1.31 1-¹∕₁₆ 12-12 HBZ 12SC12
1410-6 ⅞ 2.18 0.87 1.38 1-³∕₁₆ 14-14 HBZ 14SC14
1610-6 1 2.57 1.05 1.59 1-⅜ 16-16 HBZ 16SC16
2010-6 1-¼ 3.61 1.52 1.89 1-¾ 20-20 HBZ 20SC20
2410-6 1-½ 4.23 1.77 2.11 2-⅛ 24-24 HBZ 24SC24
3210-6 2 5.88 2.47 2.94 2-¾ 32-32 HBZ 32SC32

Reducing Union for Fractional Tube

INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER
T₁ TUBE A-LOK
WITH T₂ TUBE O.D. A C₁ C₂ D W HEX CPI ITEM
O.D. ITEM
200-6-1 ⅛ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.21 0.60 .43 0.81 ⁷⁄₁₆ 2-1 HBZ 2RU1
300-6-1 ³⁄₁₆ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.27 0.64 .43 0.86 ⁷⁄₁₆ 3-1 HBZ 3RU1
300-6-2 ³⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.44 0.64 .60 0.92 ⁷⁄₁₆ 3-2 HBZ 3RU2
400-6-1 ¼ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.38 0.70 .43 0.91 ½ 4-1 HBZ 4RU1
400-6-2 ¼ ⅛ 1.52 0.70 .60 0.97 ½ 4-2 HBZ 4RU2
400-6-3 ¼ ³⁄₁₆ 1.55 0.70 .64 1.00 ½ 4-3 HBZ 4RU3
500-6-2 ⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ 1.58 0.73 .60 1.03 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-2 HBZ 5RU2
500-6-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ ¼ 1.67 0.73 .70 1.08 ⁹∕₁₆ 5-4 HBZ 5RU4
600-6-1 ⅜ ¹⁄₁₆ 1.44 0.76 .43 1.00 ⅝ 6-1 HBZ 6RU1
600-6-2 ⅜ ⅛ 1.61 0.76 .60 1.06 ⅝ 6-2 HBZ 6RU2
600-6-4 ⅜ ¼ 1.71 0.76 .70 1.13 ⅝ 6-4 HBZ 6RU4
600-6-5 ⅜ ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.75 0.76 .73 1.16 ⅝ 6-5 HBZ 6RU5
810-6-2 ½ ⅛ 1.75 0.87 .60 1.09 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-2 HBZ 8RU2
810-6-4 ½ ¼ 1.85 0.87 .70 1.16 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4 HBZ 8RU4
810-6-6 ½ ⅜ 1.91 0.87 .76 1.22 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6 HBZ 8RU6
1010-6-6 ⅝ ⅜ 1.94 0.87 .76 1.25 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-6 HBZ 10RU6
1010-6-8 ⅝ ½ 2.05 0.87 .87 1.25 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-8 HBZ 10RU8
1210-6-4 ¾ ¼ 1.95 0.87 .76 1.25 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-4 HBZ 12RU4
1210-6-6 ¾ ⅜ 2.00 0.87 .76 1.31 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-6 HBZ 12RU6
1210-6-8 ¾ ½ 2.11 0.87 .87 1.31 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-8 HBZ 12RU8
1210-6-10 ¾ ⅝ 2.11 0.87 .87 1.31 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-10 HBZ 12RU10
1610-6-8 1 ½ 2.39 1.05 .87 1.50 1-⅜ 16-8 HBZ 16RU8
1610-6-12 1 ¾ 2.39 1.05 .87 1.50 1-⅜ 16-12 HBZ 16RU12
NOTE: A, C1 and C2 dimensions are typical finger-tight.


CPI™ and A-LOK® Tube to Tube Unions - Continued

Bulkhead Union for Fractional Tube
INCHES
PARKER
INTERCHANGES BULKHEAD PARKER
TUBE W
MAXIMUM A-LOK
WITH A C₁ C₂ D L₁ L₂ HOLE BULKHEAD CPI ITEM
O.D. HEX ITEM
DRILL SIZE THICKNESS
100-61 ¹∕₁₆ 1.23 .43 0.68 0.94 .28 0.53 ⁵∕₁₆ ¹³∕₆₄ ⅛ 1-1 WBZ 1BC1
200-61 ⅛ 2.02 .60 1.23 1.50 .34 0.97 ½ ²¹∕₆₄ ½ 2-2 WBZ 2BC2
400-61-2 ⅛- ¼ 2.17 .60 1.62 1.31 .34 1.02 ⅝ ²⁹∕₆₄ ¹⁷∕₃₂ 2-4 WBZ 2BC4 C
300-61 ³∕₁₆ 2.11 .64 1.26 1.59 .38 1.00 ⁹∕₁₆ ²⁵∕₆₄ ½ 3-3 WBZ 3BC3
200-61-4 ¼- ⅛ 2.18 .70 1.23 1.62 .41 0.97 ½ ²¹∕₆₄ ½ 4-2 WBZ 4BC2
400-61 ¼ 2.27 .70 1.31 1.69 .41 1.02 ⅝ ²⁹∕₆₄ ¹⁷∕₃₂ 4-4 WBZ 4BC4
500-61 ⁵∕₁₆ 2.40 .73 1.42 1.81 .44 1.12 ¹¹∕₁₆ ³³∕₆₄ ⁹∕₁₆ 5-5 WBZ 5BC5
600-61 ⅜ 2.46 .76 1.44 1.88 .47 1.16 ¾ ³⁷∕₆₄ ⁹∕₁₆ 6-6 WBZ 6BC6
810-61 ½ 2.80 .87 1.65 2.00 .47 1.25 ¹⁵∕₁₆ ⁴⁹∕₆₄ ¹⁹∕₃₂ 8-8 WBZ 8BC8
1010-61 ⅝ 2.86 .87 1.68 2.06 .47 1.28 1-¹∕₁₆ ⁵⁷∕₆₄ ¹⁹∕₃₂ 10-10 WBZ 10BC10
1210-61 ¾ 3.11 .87 1.87 2.31 .47 1.47 1-³∕₁₆ 1-¹∕₆₄ ²⁵∕₃₂ 12-12 WBZ 12BC12
1410-61 ⅞ 3.33 .87 2.09 2.53 .47 1.69 1-⅜ 1-⁹∕₆₄ ¹⁵∕₁₆ 14-14 WBZ 14BC14
1610-61 1 3.78 1.05 2.27 2.81 .56 1.78 1-⅝ 1-²¹∕₆₄ ¹⁵∕₁₆ 16-16 WBZ 16BC16
NOTE: For reducer sizes call out short end first.

A, C1 and C2 dimensions are typical finger-tight.
Dielectric Union Adapter for Fractional Tube

DESCRIPTION
Includes nuts, machined tube with molded PEEK insulator, preset ferrule, and dielectric identification ring
Dielectric Resistivity 10x109 OHMS @ 500 volts DC (Tested on Mil-STD-202F)
Dielectric withstanding voltage less than 100 microamps leakage @ 1500 volts AC
AMBIENT
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
TEMPERATURE, °F
TEMPERATURE
1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.93 0.86 0.79 0.72 0.64 0.56
DERATING FACTOR
INCHES PARKER
PRESSURE RATING @ Parker
A-LOK
T₁ TUBE T₂ TUBE
L E BORE W₁ HEX W₂ HEX 70°F LIQUID / GAS (PSI) CPI Item
END END ITEM
⅜ ½ 2.08 .30 ¹¹⁄₁₆ ⅞ 4000 / 3000 6-8 DEBTA-SS 6-8 DELTA

½ ⅝ 2.58 .38 ⅞ 1 3000 / 2000 8-10 DEBTA-SS N/A
*Other end connectors available upon request.

1) Polyetherether Ketone
NOTE: Makeup instructions included with parts in box when ordered as an Adapter only.


Dielectric Assembly for Fractional Tube
DESCRIPTION
Includes dielectric union adapter with assembled tube fitting unions.
PARKER CPI PARKER A-LOK

INCHES A† TYPE End Adapters
ITEM ITEM
4.08† *COMPRESSION 4H DEBTA 4H DELTA 6RU4/8RU4
C 4.20† *COMPRESSION 6H DEBTA 6H DELTA 6SC6/8RU6
4.79† *COMPRESSION 8H DEBTA 8H DELTA 8SC8/10RU8
3.59 FEMALE PIPE 4G DEBTA 4G DELTA 6FSC4N/8FSC4N
3.8 MALE PIPE 4F DEBTA 4F DELTA 6MSC4N/8MSC4N
†Finger tight assembly dimensions.

Union Elbow for Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES WITH TUBE CPI A-LOK
C L W HEX ITEM ITEM
O.D.
100-9 ¹⁄₁₆ .70 .55 ⅜ 1-1 EBZ 1EE1
200-9 ⅛ .88 .62 ⅜ 2-2 EBZ 2EE2
300-9 ³⁄₁₆ 1.00 .74 ½ 3-3 EBZ 3EE3
400-9 ¼ 1.06 .77 ½ 4-4 EBZ 4EE4
500-9 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.13 .84 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5-5 EBZ 5EE5
600-9 ⅜ 1.20 .91 ⅝ 6-6 EBZ 6EE6
810-9 ½ 1.42 1.02 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-8 EBZ 8EE8
1010-9 ⅝ 1.50 1.10 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-10 EBZ 10EE10
1210-9 ¾ 1.57 1.17 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12 EBZ 12EE12
1410-9 ⅞ 1.76 1.36 1-⅜ 14-14 EBZ 14EE14
1610-9 1 1.93 1.45 1-⅜ 16-16 EBZ 16EE16
2010-9 1-¼ 2.61 1.75 1-⅝ 20-20 EBZ 20EE20
2410-9 1-½ 3.06 2.00 1-⅞ 24-24 EBZ 24EE24
3210-9 2 4.22 2.75 2-¹³⁄₁₆ 32-32 EBZ 32EE32


Drop Size Elbows for Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES WITH TUBE CPI A-LOK
L₁ C₁ L₂ C₂ W HEX ITEM ITEM
O.D.
300-9-2 ³⁄₁₆-⅛ 0.74 1.01 0.70 0.96 ½ 3-2 EBZ 3-2 ELZ
400-9-2 ¼-⅛ 0.77 1.06 0.70 0.96 ½ 4-2 EBZ 4-2 ELZ
500-9-2 ⁵⁄₁₆-⅛ 0.88 1.17 0.78 1.04 ⅝ 5-2 EBZ 5-2 ELZ
C
500-9-4 ⁵⁄₁₆-¼ 0.88 1.17 0.85 1.14 ⅝ 5-4 EBZ 5-4 ELZ
600-9-2 ⅜-⅛ 0.91 1.20 0.78 1.04 ⅝ 6-2 EBZ 6-2 ELZ
600-9-4 ⅜-¼ 0.91 1.20 0.85 1.17 ⅝ 6-4 EBZ 6-4 ELZ
600-9-5 ⅜-⁵⁄₁₆ 0.91 1.20 0.88 1.17 ⅝ 6-5 EBZ 6-5 ELZ
810-9-4 ½-¼ 1.02 1.42 0.96 1.25 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4 EBZ 8-4 ELZ
810-9-5 ½-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.02 1.42 0.99 1.28 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-5 EBZ 8-5 ELZ
810-9-6 ½-⅜ 1.02 1.42 1.02 1.31 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6 EBZ 8-6 ELZ
1010-9-6 ⅝-⅜ 1.10 1.50 1.10 1.39 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-6 EBZ 10-6 ELZ
1010-9-8 ⅝-½ 1.10 1.50 1.10 1.50 ¹⁵⁄₁₆ 10-8 EBZ 10-8 ELZ
1210-9-4 ¾-¼ 1.16 1.56 1.10 1.39 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-4 EBZ 12-4 ELZ
1210-9-6 ¾-⅜ 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.45 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-6 EBZ 12-6 ELZ
1210-9-8 ¾-½ 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-8 EBZ 12-8 ELZ
1410-9-4 ⅞-¼ 1.36 1.76 1.30 1.59 1-⅜ 14-4 EBZ 14-4 ELZ
1610-9-8 1-½ 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-8 EBZ 16-8 ELZ
1610-9-12 1-¾ 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-12 EBZ 16-12 ELZ

Union Tee for Fractional Tube

INCHES PARKER
INTERCHANGES PARKER
TUBE A-LOK
WITH A C L W HEX CPI ITEM
O.D. ITEM
100-3 ¹⁄₁₆ 1.42 0.71 0.56 ⅜ 1-1-1 JBZ 1ET1

200-3 ⅛ 1.76 0.88 0.62 ⅜ 2-2-2 JBZ 2ET2
300-3 ³⁄₁₆ 1.96 0.96 0.70 ⁷⁄₁₆ 3-3-3 JBZ 3ET3
400-3 ¼ 2.12 1.06 0.77 ½ 4-4-4 JBZ 4ET4
500-3 ⁵⁄₁₆ 2.34 1.17 0.88 ⅝ 5-5-5 JBZ 5ET5
600-3 ⅜ 2.40 1.20 0.91 ⅝ 6-6-6 JBZ 6ET6
810-3 ½ 2.84 1.42 1.02 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-8-8 JBZ 8ET8
1010-3 ⅝ 3.06 1.53 1.13 1 10-10-10 JBZ 10ET10
1210-3 ¾ 3.14 1.57 1.16 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12-12 JBZ 12ET12
1410-3 ⅞ 3.52 1.76 1.36 1-⅜ 14-14-14 JBZ 14ET14
1610-3 1 3.86 1.93 1.45 1-⅜ 16-16-16 JBZ 16ET16
2010-3 1-¼ 5.22 2.61 1.75 1-⅝ 20-20-20 JBZ 20ET20
2410-3 1-½ 6.12 3.06 2.00 1-⅞ 24-24-24 JBZ 24ET24
3210-3 2 8.44 4.22 2.75 2-¹³⁄₁₆ 32-32-32 JBZ 32ET32



Drop Size Tees for Fractional Tube
Eliminates the extra connection when adapting with a tube stub reducer.

WITH T₁ TUBE O.D. T₂ TUBE O.D. T₃ TUBE O.D. A L₁ C₁ L₂ C₂ L₃ C₃ W HEX CPI ITEM A-LOK ITEM
400-3-4-2 ¼ ¼ ⅛ 2.10 0.76 1.05 0.76 1.05 0.70 0.96 ½ 4-4-2 JBZ 4-4-2 JLZ
600-3-6-4 ⅜ ⅜ ¼ 2.40 0.91 1.20 0.91 1.20 0.85 1.14 ⅝ 6-6-4 JBZ 6-6-4 JLZ
600-3-4-6 ⅜ ¼ ⅜ 2.34 0.91 1.20 0.85 1.14 0.91 1.20 ⅝ 6-4-6 JBZ 6-4-6 JLZ
600-3-4-4 ⅜ ¼ ¼ 2.34 0.91 1.20 0.85 1.14 0.85 1.14 ⅝ 6-4-4 JBZ 6-4-4 JLZ
810-3-8-6 ½ ½ ⅜ 2.84 1.02 1.42 1.02 1.42 1.02 1.31 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-8-6 JBZ 8-8-6 JLZ
810-3-8-4 ½ ½ ¼ 2.84 1.02 1.42 1.02 1.42 0.96 1.25 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-8-4 JBZ 8-8-4 JLZ
810-3-6-8 ½ ⅜ ½ 2.73 1.02 1.42 1.02 1.31 1.02 1.42 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6-8 JBZ 8-6-8 JLZ
810-3-4-8 ½ ¼ ½ 2.67 1.02 1.42 0.96 1.25 1.02 1.42 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4-8 JBZ 8-4-8 JLZ
810-3-6-6 ½ ⅜ ⅜ 2.73 1.02 1.42 1.02 1.31 1.02 1.31 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6-6 JBZ 8-6-6 JLZ
810-3-4-4 ½ ¼ ¼ 2.67 1.02 1.42 .96 1.25 .96 1.25 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4-4 JBZ 8-4-4 JLZ
1010-3-10-8 ⅝ ⅝ ½ 3.06 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 ⅞ 10-10-8 JBZ 10-10-8 JLZ
1010-3-10-6 ⅝ ⅝ ⅜ 3.06 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 ⅞ 10-10-6 JBZ 10-10-6 JLZ
1010-3-8-8 ⅝ ½ ½ 3.06 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 ⅞ 10-8-8 JBZ 10-8-8 JLZ
1010-3-8-6 ⅝ ½ ⅜ 3.06 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.42 ⅞ 10-8-6 JBZ 10-8-6 JLZ
1010-3-6-6 ⅝ ⅜ ⅜ 2.95 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.42 1.13 1.42 ⅞ 10-6-6 JBZ 10-6-6 JLZ
1010-3-6-8 ⅝ ⅜ ½ 2.95 1.13 1.53 1.13 1.42 1.13 1.53 ⅞ 10-6-8 JBZ 10-6-8 JLZ
1210-3-12-10 ¾ ¾ ⅝ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12-10 JBZ 12-12-10 JLZ
1210-3-12-8 ¾ ¾ ½ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12-8 JBZ 12-12-8 JLZ
1210-3-12-6 ¾ ¾ ⅜ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.45 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12-6 JBZ 12-12-6 JLZ
1210-3-12-4 ¾ ¾ ¼ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.10 1.39 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-12-4 JBZ 12-12-4 JLZ
1210-3-10-10 ¾ ⅝ ⅝ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-10-10 JBZ 12-10-10 JLZ
1210-3-8-8 ¾ ½ ½ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-8-8 JBZ 12-8-8 JLZ
1210-3-6-6 ¾ ⅜ ⅜ 3.01 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.45 1.16 1.45 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-6-6 JBZ 12-6-6 JLZ
1210-3-10-8 ¾ ⅝ ½ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-10-8 JBZ 12-10-8 JLZ
1210-3-10-6 ¾ ⅝ ⅜ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.45 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-10-6 JBZ 12-10-6 JLZ
1210-3-8-6 ¾ ½ ⅜ 3.12 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.56 1.16 1.45 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12-8-6 JBZ 12-8-6 JLZ
1410-3-14-6 ⅞ ⅞ ⅜ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 14-14-6 JBZ 14-14-6 JLZ
1410-3-14-4 ⅞ ⅞ ¼ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.30 1.59 1-⅜ 14-14-4 JBZ 14-14-4 JLZ
1410-3-12-12 ⅞ ¾ ¾ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 14-12-12 JBZ 14-12-12 JLZ
1410-3-12-8 ⅞ ¾ ½ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 14-12-8 JBZ 14-12-8 JLZ
1410-3-12-6 ⅞ ¾ ⅜ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 14-12-6 JBZ 14-12-6 JLZ
1410-3-10-6 ⅞ ⅝ ⅜ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 14-10-6 JBZ 14-10-6 JLZ
1410-3-8-12 ⅞ ½ ¾ 3.52 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 14-8-12 JBZ 14-8-12 JLZ
1610-3-16-12 1 1 ¾ 3.88 1.45 1.94 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-16-12 JBZ 16-16-12 JLZ


WITH T₁ TUBE O.D. T₂ TUBE O.D. T₃ TUBE O.D. A L₁ C₁ L₂ C₂ L₃ C₃ W HEX CPI ITEM A-LOK ITEM
1610-3-16-10 1 1 ⅝ 3.88 1.45 1.94 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-16-10 JBZ 16-16-10 JLZ
1610-3-16-8 1 1 ½ 3.88 1.45 1.94 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-16-8 JBZ 16-16-8 JLZ
1610-3-16-6 1 1 ⅜ 3.88 1.45 1.94 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 16-16-6 JBZ 16-16-6 JLZ
1610-3-16-4 1 1 ¼ 3.88 1.45 1.94 1.45 1.94 1.30 1.59 1-⅜ 16-16-4 JBZ 16-16-4 JLZ
1610-3-12-16 1 ¾ 1 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.45 1.94 1-⅜ 16-12-16 JBZ 16-12-16 JLZ C
1610-3-14-14 1 ⅞ ⅞ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-14-14 JBZ 16-14-14 JLZ
1610-3-14-12 1 ⅞ ¾ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-14-12 JBZ 16-14-12 JLZ
1610-3-14-8 1 ⅞ ½ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-14-8 JBZ 16-14-8 JLZ
1610-3-14-6 1 ⅞ ⅜ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 16-14-6 JBZ 16-14-6 JLZ
1610-3-14-4 1 ⅞ ¼ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.30 1.59 1-⅜ 16-14-4 JBZ 16-14-4 JLZ
1610-3-16-14 1 1 ⅞ 3.88 1.45 1.94 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-16-14 JBZ 16-16-14 JLZ
1610-3-12-10 1 ¾ ⅝ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-12-10 JBZ 16-12-10 JLZ
1610-3-12-8 1 ¾ ½ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-12-8 JBZ 16-12-8 JLZ
1610-3-10-6 1 ⅝ ⅜ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 16-10-6 JBZ 16-10-6 JLZ
1610-3-8-16 1 ⅝ 1 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.45 1.94 1-⅜ 16-8-16 JBZ 16-8-16 JLZ
1610-3-8-8 1 ⅝ ½ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.76 1-⅜ 16-8-8 JBZ 16-8-8 JLZ
1610-3-8-6 1 ⅝ ⅜ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 16-8-6 JBZ 16-8-6 JLZ
1610-3-8-4 1 ⅝ ¼ 3.70 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.76 1.30 1.59 1-⅜ 16-8-4 JBZ 16-8-4 JLZ
1610-3-6-6 1 ⅜ ⅜ 3.59 1.45 1.94 1.36 1.65 1.36 1.65 1-⅜ 16-6-6 JBZ 16-6-6 JLZ
NOTE: C dimensions are typical finger-tight.

Union Cross for Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES
TUBE CPI A-LOK
WITH A C L W HEX
O.D. ITEM ITEM
200-4 ⅛ 1.76 0.98 0.62 ⁷∕₁₆ 2 KBZ 2ECR2

300-4 ³⁄₁₆ 1.83 0.96 0.70 ⁷∕₁₆ 3 KBZ 3ECR3
400-4 ¼ 2.12 1.06 0.76 ½ 4 KBZ 4ECR4
500-4 ⁵⁄₁₆ 2.34 1.17 0.88 ⅝ 5 KBZ 5ECR5
600-4 ⅜ 2.40 1.20 0.91 ⅝ 6 KBZ 6ECR6
810-4 ½ 2.84 1.42 1.02 ¹³∕₁₆ 8 KBZ 8ECR8
1010-4 ⅝ 3.06 1.53 1.13 1-¹⁄₁₆ 10 KBZ 10ECR10
1210-4 ¾ 3.12 1.57 1.16 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12 KBZ 12ECR12
1410-4 ⅞ 3.52 1.76 1.36 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 14 KBZ 14ECR14
1610-4 1 3.86 1.93 1.45 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 16 KBZ 16ECR16


ISO Conversion Fittings

Ordering ISO Conversion Fittings
Parker ISO Adapters utilize the same basic part Options: For CPI-A-LOK Conversion Fittings. See the
numbering system that you are already familiar with from CPI/A-LOK How To Order table for list of available options
our CPI™ and A-LOK® Catalogs. To specify a Parker and designators. After the complete CPI™/A-LOK®
Instrumentation Connector with an ISO thread form, number simply add a “dash” then the suffix for the option.
simply suffix the size designator with the thread form
designator as illustrated. Special Fittings: Consult the factory. If there is any
question as to the fitting desired, particularly for special
C Port Size: Port sizes are incremented by 1/16” and fitting configurations, it is suggested that a customer print
only the numerator is required to specify a size in a part be submitted.
number. Larger sizes available
HOW TO ORDER
Port Sizes ISO CONVERSION FITTINGS
Size Designator Pipe Size (in) Easiest way to configure is to take Item Number (values
1 1
/₁₆ for Tables 1 - 5) from proceeding pages and add on
2 ⅛ Material Designator.
3 3
/₁₆
4 ¼ Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6
5 ⁵/₁₆ XX X XX X XXX XX
6 ⅜
Table 1 1st End Size Designator*
8 ½
1,2,4,6,8,10,12,16,20,24,32
10 ⅝
Table 2 Thread Designator1
12 ¾
(Blank) Fractional Tube Size
16 1
R BSP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 FORM A⁽²⁾)
Thread Types: See Thread Designator in How to Order
table. Generally designated with first portion of body Table 3 2nd End Size Designator*
designator. Leave Blank for Fractional tube size. 1,2,4,6,8,10,12,16,20,24,32

Table 4 Thread Designator¹
Materials: SS=Stainless Steel for Pipe Fittings, B=Brass (Blank) Fractional Tube Size
Sealing: BSP Taper threads require the use of a thread R BSP / ISO Parallel (BS2779, ISO 228/1+2, DIN 3852 FORM A⁽²⁾)
sealant. BSPP threads require a sealing washer. This Table 5 Body Designator
washer may either be a metal gasket (copper is standard) See Proceeding Pages (ex. MHN for Male Hex Nipple)
or a “bonded seal” (elastomer bonded to a metal retaining
Table 6 Material Designator
washer). The BSPP, form “A” requires the use of a bonded
B Brass
seal. Examples: The Thread Type Designators have been
bolded in the following examples for easy recognition: SS 316SS
• 6-4R RA-SS = 3/8” female NPT by 1/4” BSPP Note: Easiest way to configure is to take Item Number (values for Tables 1 - 5) from
proceeding pages and add on Material Designator.
(form A) reducing adapter. A bonded seal should be * See Tube End Dimensional Data table
used with this fitting. ⁽¹⁾Thread Designator not always necessary for Port 1 or Port 2. See product tables
on proceeding pages for actual configuration availability.
Form A

ISO Conversion Fittings - Continued

Male Hex Nipple NPT to BSP Taper
NPT BSPT Working Pressure

W D R
Item Thread Thread Brass Brass Stainless Stainless
HEX (in.) (in.)
T₁ T₂ PSI Bar Steel PSI Steel Bar
2-2K MHN ⅛-27 ⅛-28 ⁷⁄₁₆ 1.06 .38 5600 390 9100 630
4-4K MHN ¼-18 ¼-19 ⅝ 1.45 .56 4100 280 7500 520
6-6K MHN ⅜-18 ⅜-19 ¾ 1.45 .56 4000 280 7200 500
C
8-8K MHN ½-14 ½-14 ⁷⁄₈ 1.89 .75 3900 270 6600 460
12-12K MHN ¾-14 ¾-14 1⅛ 1.97 .75 3800 260 6400 440
16-16K MHN 1-11 ½ 1-11 1⅜ 2.34 .94 2700 190 4600 320
Used to connect a female NPT and a female BSPT threaded component.
Male Hex Nipple NPT to BSPP

NPT BSPP Working Pressure
W D R₁ R₂
HEX (in.) (in.) (in.)
2-2R MHN ⅛-27 ⅛-28 ⁹⁄₁₆ 1.07 .38 .28 5000 340 9100 630
4-4R MHN ¼-18 ¼-19 ¾ 1.44 .56 .44 4000 280 7500 520
6-6R MHN ⅜-18 ⅜-19 ⁷∕₈ 1.47 .56 .44 3900 270 7200 500
8-8R MHN ½-14 ½-14 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 1.78 .75 .56 3800 260 6600 460
12-12R MHN ¾-14 ¾-14 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1.95 .75 .63 3600 250 6400 440
16-16R MHN 1-11 ½ 1-11 1 ⁵⁄₈ 2.26 .94 .72 2600 180 4600 320
Used to connect a female NPT and a female BSPP threaded component.

Note: Bonded seal, page 28, must be used on BSPP end shown.
Please note the pressure ratings are based on taper threaded ends. The pressure rating for the BSPP
ends are dependent on the type of sealing washer used.
Female NPT to Male BSP Taper Adapter
NPT BSPT Working Pressure

W D R
HEX (in.) (in.)
2-2K RA ⅛-27 ⅛-28 ⁹⁄₁₆ 1.09 .38 3200 220 6100 420
4-4K RA ¼-18 ¼-19 ¾ 1.42 .56 3300 230 6200 430
6-6K RA ⅜-18 ⅜-19 ⁷⁄₈ 1.49 .56 2600 180 5000 340
8-8K RA ½-14 ½-14 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 1.94 .75 2400 160 4600 320
12-12K RA ¾-14 ¾-14 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 2.00 .75 2300 160 4300 300
16-16K RA 1-11 ½ 1-11 1⅝ 2.28 .94 2200 150 4100 280
Used to connect a male NPT and a female BSPT threaded component.


Female NPT to Male BSPP Adapter
NPT Working Pressure

BSPP W D R
Item Thread Brass Brass Stainless Stainless
Thread T₂ HEX (in.) (in.)
T₁ PSI Bar Steel PSI Steel Bar
2-2R RA ⅛-27 ⅛-28 ⁹⁄₁₆ .99 .28 3200 220 6100 420
4-4R RA ¼-18 ¼-19 ¾ 1.31 .44 3300 230 6200 430
C 6-6R RA ⅜-18 ⅜-19 ⁷⁄₈ 1.41 .44 2600 180 5000 340
8-8R RA ½-14 ½-14 1⅛ 1.74 .56 2400 160 4600 320
12-12R RA ¾-14 ¾-14 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 2.00 .63 2300 160 4300 300
16-16R RA 1-11 ½ 1-11 1⅝ 2.10 .72 2200 150 4100 280
Used to connect a male NPT and a female BSPP threaded component.
Note: Bonded Seal, page 26, must be used with BSPP end shown.
Female BSP Taper to Male NPT Adapter

Working Pressure
BSPT NPT
W D R Stainless
Item Thread Thread Brass Brass Stainless
HEX (in.) (in.) Steel
T₁ T₂ PSI Bar Steel PSI
Bar
2K-2 RA ⅛-28 ⅛-27 ⁹⁄₁₆ 1.09 .38 3200 220 6100 420
4K-4 RA ¼-19 ¼-18 ¾ 1.42 .56 3300 230 6200 430
6K-6 RA ⅜-19 ⅜-18 ⁷⁄₈ 1.49 .56 2600 180 5000 340
8K-8 RA ½-14 ½-14 1⅛ 1.94 .75 2400 160 4600 320
12K-12 RA ¾-14 ¾-14 1 ⁵∕₁₆ 2.00 .75 2300 160 4300 300
16K-16 RA 1-11 1-11 ½ 1⅝ 2.28 .94 2200 150 4100 280
Used to connect a male BSPT and a female NPT threaded component.
Female BSPP to Male NPT Adapter
Working Pressure
BSPP NPT
W D R Stainless
Item Thread Thread Brass Brass Stainless
HEX (in.) (in.) Steel
T₁ T₂ PSI Bar Steel Bar
PSI
2R-2 RA ⅛-28 ⅛-27 ⁹⁄₁₆ 1.09 .38 3200 220 6100 420
4R-4 RA ¼-19 ¼-18 ¾ 1.50 .56 3300 230 6200 430
6R-6 RA ⅜-19 ⅜-18 ⁷⁄₈ 1.49 .56 2600 180 5000 340
8R-8 RA ½-14 ½-14 1⅛ 1.88 .75 2400 160 4600 320
12R-12 RA ¾-14 ¾-14 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 2.00 .75 2300 160 4300 300
16R-16 RA 1-11 1-11 ½ 1⅝ 2.28 .94 2200 150 4100 280
Used to connect a male BSPP and a female NPT threaded component.


Male Hex BSP Taper Pipe Plug
BSPT Working Pressure

W D R
HEX (in.) (in.)
2K PH ⅛-28 ⁷⁄₁₆ .59 .38 3200 220 6100 420
4K PH ¼-19 ⁵∕₈ .81 .56 3300 230 6200 430
6K PH ⅜-19 ¾ .81 .56 2600 180 5000 340 C
8K PH ½-14 ⁷⁄₈ 1.06 .75 2400 160 3600 320
12K PH ¾-14 1⅛ 1.13 .75 2300 160 4300 300
16K PH 1-11 1⅜ 1.31 .94 2200 150 4100 280
Male Hex BSPP Parallel Pipe Plug
BSPT Working Pressure

W D R
HEX (in.) (in.)
2R PH ⅛-28 ⁹⁄₁₆ .55 .28 5000 340 9100 630
4R PH ¼-19 ¾ .78 .44 4000 280 7500 520
6R PH ⅜-19 ⁷⁄₈ .78 .44 3900 270 7200 500
8R PH ½-14 1-¹⁄₁₆ .99 .56 3800 260 6600 460
12R PH ¾-14 1-⁵⁄₁₆ 1.13 .63 3600 250 6400 440
16R PH 1-11 1-⅝ 1.21 .72 2600 180 4600 320
Note: Bonded seal page 26 must be used on BSPP end shown.

Please note the pressure ratings are based on taper threaded ends. The pressure rating for the BSPP
ends are dependent on the type of sealing washer used.

ISO Threaded to Fractional Tube Connectors

BSP Taper Male Connector
TUBE O.D. BSP A C D R PARKER PARKER
W HEX
(in.) Thread (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) CPI ITEM A-LOK ITEM
⅛ ⅛ -28 1.20 .60 .94 .38 ⁷⁄₁₆ 2-2K FBZ 2MSC2K
⅛ ¼-19 1.40 .60 1.14 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 2-2K FBZ 2MSC4K
¼ ⅛ -28 1.30 .70 1.00 .38 ½ 4-2K FBZ 4MSC2K
¼ ¼-19 1.50 .70 1.20 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-4K FBZ 4MSC4K
C ¼ ⅜-19 1.52 .70 1.22 .56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 4-6K FBZ 4MSC6K
¼ ½-14 1.76 .70 1.44 .75 ⁷⁄₈ 4-8K FBZ 4MSC8K
⁵⁄₁₆ ⅛ -28 1.34 .73 1.05 .38 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5-2K FBZ 5MSC2K
⁵⁄₁₆ ¼-19 1.53 .73 1.23 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5-4K FBZ 5MSC4K
⅜ ⅛ -28 1.39 .76 1.09 .38 ⅝ 6-2K FBZ 6MSC2K
⅜ ¼-19 1.59 .76 1.28 .56 ⅝ 6-4K FBZ 6MSC4K
⅜ ⅜-19 1.59 .76 1.28 .56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 6-6K FBZ 6MSC6K
⅜ ½-14 1.82 .76 1.53 .75 ⁷⁄₈ 6-8K FBZ 6MSC8K
½ ¼-19 1.75 .87 1.31 .56 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4K FBZ 8MSC4K
½ ⅜-19 1.75 .87 1.31 .56 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6K FBZ 8MSC6K
½ ½-14 1.93 .87 1.53 .75 ⁷⁄₈ 8-8K FBZ 8MSC8K
Connects fractional tube to female ISO taper thread.
BSPP Male Connector

PARKER
TUBE O.D. BSP A C D R W PARKER
A-LOK
(in.) Thread (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) HEX CPI ITEM
ITEM
⅛ ⅛-28 1.18 .60 0.92 .28 ⁹⁄₁₆ 2-2R FBZ 2MSC2R
⅛ ¼-19 1.38 .60 1.13 .44 ¾ 2-4R FBZ 2MSC4R
⅛ ⅜-19 1.43 .60 1.17 .44 ⁷⁄₈ 2-6R FBZ 2MSC6R
¼ ⅛-28 1.28 .70 0.98 .28 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-2R FBZ 4MSC2R
¼ ¼-19 1.49 .70 1.19 .44 ¾ 4-4R FBZ 4MSC4R
¼ ⅜-19 1.55 .70 1.25 .44 ⁷⁄₈ 4-6R FBZ 4MSC6R
¼ ½-14 1.77 .70 1.47 .56 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 4-8R FBZ 4MSC8R
⅜ ⅛-28 1.37 .76 1.06 .28 ⁵⁄₈ 6-2R FBZ 6MSC2R
⅜ ¼-19 1.57 .76 1.25 .44 ¾ 6-4R FBZ 6MSC4R
⅜ ⅜-19 1.59 .76 1.3 .44 ⁷⁄₈ 6-6R FBZ 6MSC6R
⅜ ½-14 1.84 .76 1.53 .56 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 6-8R FBZ 6MSC8R
½ ¼-19 1.71 .87 1.28 .44 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4R FBZ 8MSC4R
½ ⅜-19 1.74 .87 1.3 .44 ⁷⁄₈ 8-6R FBZ 8MSC6R
½ ½-14 1.96 .87 1.53 .56 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 8-8R FBZ 8MSC8R
¾ ½-14 1.93 .87 1.53 .56 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 12-8R FBZ 12MSC8R
¾ ¾-19 2.1 .87 1.69 .63 1⅜ 12-12R FBZ 12MSC12R
1 ½-14 2.21 1.05 1.72 .56 1⅜ 16-8R FBZ 16MSC8R
1 1-11 2.37 1.05 1.88 .72 1 ⁵⁄₈ 16-16R FBZ 16MSC16R
Connects fractional tube to female ISO parallel thread.

Note: Bonded Seal, must be used with BSPP end shown.

ISO Threaded to Fractional Tube Connectors - Continued

BSP Taper Female Connector
PARKER
TUBE O.D. BSPT A C D W PARKER
A-LOK
(in.) Thread (in.) (in.) (in.) HEX CPI ITEM
ITEM
¼ ⅛-28 1.23 .70 .94 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-2K GBZ 4FSC2K
¼ ¼-19 1.42 .70 1.13 ¾ 4-4K GBZ 4FSC4K
¼ ⅜-19 1.48 .70 1.19 ⁷⁄₈ 4-6K GBZ 4FSC6K
¼ ½-14 1.67 .70 1.38 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 4-8K GBZ 4FSC8K

C
⅜ ¼-19 1.48 .76 1.19 ¾ 6-4K GBZ 6FSC4K
⅜ ⅜-19 1.54 .76 1.25 ⁷⁄₈ 6-6K GBZ 6FSC6K
⅜ ½-14 1.73 .76 1.44 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 6-8K GBZ 6FSC8K
½ ¼-19 1.59 .87 1.19 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-4K GBZ 8FSC4K
½ ⅜-19 1.65 .87 1.25 ⁷⁄₈ 8-6K GBZ 8FSC6K
½ ½-14 1.84 .87 1.44 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 8-8K GBZ 8FSC8K
Connects fractional tube to male ISO taper thread.
BSPP Female Gauge Connector

PARKER
TUBE O.D. BSPP C D W PARKER
A (in.) A-LOK
(in.) Thread (in.) (in.) HEX CPI ITEM
ITEM
¼ ¼-19 1.48 .70 1.19 ¾ 4-4GC GBZ 4FSC4GC
¼ ⅜-19 1.48 .70 1.19 ⁷⁄₈ 4-6GC GBZ 4FSC6GC
¼ ½-14 1.72 .70 1.42 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 4-8GC GBZ 4FSC8GC
⁵⁄₁₆ ¼-19 1.51 .73 1.22 ¾ 5-4GC GBZ 5FSC4GC
⁵⁄₁₆ ½-14 1.61 .73 1.32 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 5-8GC GBZ 5FSC8GC
⅜ ¼-19 1.54 .76 1.25 ¾ 6-4GC GBZ 6FSC4GC
⅜ ⅜-19 1.53 .76 1.23 ⁷⁄₈ 6-6GC GBZ 6FSC6GC
⅜ ½-14 1.65 .76 1.36 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 6-8GC GBZ 6FSC8GC
½ ⅜-19 1.75 .87 1.35 ⁷⁄₈ 8-6GC GBZ 8FSC6GC
½ ½-14 1.90 .87 1.50 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 8-8GC GBZ 8FSC8GC
Connects fractional tube to male ISO parallel (gauge).

Note: Copper Washer, page 26, for female thread sealing, must be used on BSPP
female end shown.
BSP Taper Male Elbow

PARKER
TUBE BSPT C H L R W PARKER
A-LOK
O.D. (in.) Thread (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) HEX CPI ITEM
ITEM
¼ ⅛-28 1.06 .74 .77 .38 ½ 4-2K CBZ 4MSEL2K
¼ ¼-19 1.08 1.00 .78 .56 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-4K CBZ 4MSEL4K
¼ ⅜-19 1.17 1.13 .88 .56 ¾ 4-6K CBZ 4MSEL6K
¼ ½-14 1.26 1.31 .97 .75 ⁷⁄₈ 4-8K CBZ 4MSEL8K
⁵⁄₁₆ ¼-19 1.11 1.00 .81 .56 ⁵⁄₈ 5-4K CBZ 5MSEL4K
⅜ ⅛-28 1.20 .82 .91 .38 ⁵⁄₈ 6-2K CBZ 6MSEL2K
⅜ ¼-19 1.20 1.01 .91 .56 ⁵⁄₈ 6-4K CBZ 6MSEL4K
⅜ ⅜-19 1.26 1.13 .97 .56 ¾ 6-6K CBZ 6MSEL6K
½ ⅜-19 1.42 1.15 1.02 .56 ¹³⁄₁₆ 8-6K CBZ 8MSEL6K
½ ½-14 1.42 1.30 1.02 .75 ⁷⁄₈ 8-8K CBZ 8MSEL8K
Connects fractional tube to female ISO taper thread.

ISO Threaded to Fractional Tube Connectors - Continued

BSPP Male Elbow (Positionable)
PARKER
TUBE O.D. BSPP C H L R W PARKER
A-LOK
(in.) Thread (in.) (in.) (in.) (in.) HEX CPI ITEM
ITEM
¼ ⅛-28 1.06 1.04 .77 .63 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-2R CBZ 4MSEL2R
¼ ¼-19 1.14 1.27 .85 .79 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-4R CBZ 4MSEL4R
⅜ ¼-19 1.14 1.27 .85 .79 ⁹⁄₁₆ 6-4R CBZ 6MSEL4R

C
⅜ ⅜-19 1.50 1.46 1.02 .79 ¾ 6-6R CBZ 6MSEL6R
½ ¼-19 1.50 1.38 1.10 .79 ⁷⁄₈ 8-4R CBZ 8MSEL4R
½ ⅜-19 1.50 1.46 1.10 .79 ⁷⁄₈ 8-6R CBZ 8MSEL6R
½ ½-14 1.50 1.71 1.10 1.03 ⁷⁄₈ 8-8R CBZ 8MSEL8R
⅝ ½-14 1.50 1.81 1.10 1.03 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 10-8R CBZ 10MSEL8R
¾ ½-14 1.57 1.81 1.17 1.03 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 12-8R CBZ 12MSEL8R
¾ ¾-14 1.57 1.92 1.17 1.03 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 12-12R CBZ 12MSEL12R
1 ¾-14 1.94 2.11 1.45 1.03 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 16-12R CBZ 16MSEL12R
1 1-11 1.94 2.11 1.45 1.20 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 16-16R CBZ 16MSEL16R
BSPP Male Run Tee (Positionable)
PARKER
TUBE O.D. BSPP C H R W PARKER CPI
L (in.) A-LOK
(in.) Thread (in.) (in.) (in.) HEX ITEM
ITEM
¼ ⅛-28 1.06 1.04 .77 .63 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-2R-4 RBZ 4MRT2R
¼ ¼-19 1.14 1.27 .85 .79 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4-4R-4 RBZ 4MRT4R
⅜ ¼-19 1.20 1.27 .91 .79 ⁹⁄₁₆ 6-4R-6 RBZ 6MRT6R
½ ⅜-19 1.50 1.46 1.10 .79 ⁷⁄₈ 8-6R-8 RBZ 8MRT8R
½ ½-14 1.50 1.71 1.10 1.03 ⁷⁄₈ 8-8R-8 RBZ 8MRT8R
⅝ ½-14 1.50 1.81 1.10 1.03 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 10-8R-10 RBZ 10MRT8R
¾ ½-14 1.57 1.81 1.17 1.03 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 12-8R-12 RBZ 12MRT8R
¾ ¾-14 1.57 1.92 1.17 1.03 1 ¹⁄₁₆ 12-12R-12 RBZ 12MRT12R
1 1-11 1.94 2.11 1.45 1.20 1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 16-16R-16 RBZ 16MRT16R

Components
Tube Nut For Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES
TUBE CPI™ A-LOK®
WITH A W HEX
O.D. ITEM ITEM
102-1 ¹⁄₁₆ 0.31 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1 BZ 1NU1

202-1 ¹∕₈ 0.47 ⁷∕₁₆ 2 BZ 2NU2
¹∕₂
302-1
402-1
³⁄₁₆
¹∕₄
0.47
0.50 ⁹⁄₁₆
3 BZ
4 BZ
3NU3
4NU4
C
502-1 ⁵⁄₁₆ 0.53 ⁵∕₈ 5 BZ 5NU5
602-1 ³∕₈ 0.56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 6 BZ 6NU6
812-1 ¹∕₂ 0.69 ⁷∕₈ 8 BZ 8NU8
1012-1 ⁵∕₈ 0.69 1 10 BZ 10NU10
1212-1 ³∕₄ 0.69 1-¹∕₈ 12 BZ 12NU12
1412-1 ⁷∕₈ 0.69 1-¹∕₄ 14 BZ 14NU14
1612-1 1 0.81 1-¹∕₂ 16 BZ 16NU16
2012-1 1-¹∕₄ 1.25 1-⁷∕₈ 20 BZ 20NU20
2412-1 1-¹∕₂ 1.50 2-¹∕₄ 24 BZ 24NU24
3212-1 2 2.06 3 32 BZ 32NU32
NOTE: All size 20, 24 and 32 silver plated nuts should have a system
compatible lube (Permatex Anti-seize – Parker Catalog 4290-INST) or
equivalent applied to the fitting body threads and the inside back of nuts.
This will minimize the effort required to assemble the fitting properly.
Inverted Tube Nut For Fractional Tube
INCHES
INTERCHANGES
ITEM TUBE
WITH A W HEX
O.D.
1 BZI 1F2-1GC ¹⁄₁₆ .39 ¹∕₄
2 BZI 2F2-1GC ¹∕₈ .44 ⁷⁄₁₆

Components - Continued
Knurled Nut For Fractional Tube Inch Front Ferrule For Fractional Tube
INTERCHANGES INCHES INTERCHANGES INCHES TUBE

ITEM ITEM
WITH WITH O.D.
TUBE O.D. A
1FF1 103-1 ¹⁄₁₆
1 BZP 102-1K ¹⁄₁₆ .32
¹∕₈ 2FF2 203-1 ¹∕₈
2 BZP 202-1K .47
3 BZP 302-1K ³⁄₁₆ .47 3FF3 303-1 ³⁄₁₆
¹∕₄
C 4 BZP 402-1K ¹∕₄ .51 4FF4
5FF5
403-1
503-1 ⁵⁄₁₆
5 BZP 502-1K ⁵⁄₁₆ .54
6 BZP 812-1K ³∕₈ .57 6FF6 603-1 ³∕₈
8 BZP 602-1K ½ .69 8FF8 813-1 ¹∕₂
10 BZP 1012-1K ⅝ .69 10FF10 1013-1 ⁵∕₈

12FF12 1213-1 ³∕₄
14FF14 1413-1 ⁷∕₈
16FF16 1613-1 1
20FF20 2013-1 1-¹∕₄
24FF24 2413-1 1-¹∕₂
32FF32 3213-1 2
Note: Ferrules are available in standard metal

materials as well as standard plastics like
PTFE and nylon. Please consult the factory for
availability.
Ferrules Inch Back Ferrule For Fractional Tube
ITEM TUBE O.D. INTERCHANGES INCHES TUBE

ITEM
WITH O.D.
1 TZ ¹⁄₁₆ in
1BF1 104-1 ¹⁄₁₆
2 TZ ⅛ in
2BF2 204-1 ¹⁄₈
3 TZ ³⁄₁₆ in
3BF3 304-1 ³⁄₁₆
4 TZ ¼ in
4BF4 404-1 ¹∕₄
5 TZ ⁵⁄₁₆ in
5BF5 504-1 ⁵⁄₁₆
6 TZ ⅜ in
6BF6 604-1 ³∕₈
8 TZ ½ in
8BF8 814-1 ¹∕₂
10 TZ ⅝ in
10BF10 1014-1 ⁵∕₈
12 TZ ¾ in
12BF12 1214-1 ³∕₄
14 TZ ⅞ in
14BF14 1414-1 ⁷∕₈
16 TZ 1 in
16BF16 1614-1 1
20 TZ 1-¼ in
20BF20 2014-1 1-¹∕₄
24 TZ 1-½ in
24BF24 2414-1 1-¹∕₂
32 TZ 2 in
32BF32 3214-1 2
TZ 3 3 mm
Note: Ferrules are available in standard metal
TZ 6 6 mm
materials as well as standard plastics like
TZ 8 8 mm PTFE and nylon. Please consult the factory for
availability.
TZ 10 10 mm
TZ 12 12 mm
TZ 16 16 mm
Note:Ferrules are available in standard
metal materials as well as standard TZ 20 20 mm
plastics like PTFE and nylon. Please
consult the factory for availability. TZ 25 25 mm

Components - Continued
Ferrule Holder Cap For Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES
TUBE CPI™ A-LOK®
WITH A C W HEX
O.D. ITEM ITEM
100-C ¹⁄₁₆ 0.56 0.43 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1 PNBZ 1BLEN1

INCHES
PARKER PARKER
TUBE 200-C ⅛ 0.79 0.6 ⁷⁄₁₆ 2 PNBZ 2BLEN2
CPI™ ITEM A-LOK® ITEM
O.D.
¹∕₈ 2 CPI-*-SET 2 ALOK-*-SET
300-C ³⁄₁₆ 0.84 0.64 ⁷⁄₁₆ 3 PNBZ 3BLEN3
C
400-C ¼ 0.92 0.7 ½ 4 PNBZ 4BLEN4
¹∕₄ 4 CPI-*-SET 4 ALOK-*-SET
500-C ⁵⁄₁₆ 0.96 0.73 ⁹⁄₁₆ 5 PNBZ 5BLEN5
³∕₈ 6 CPI-*-SET 6 ALOK-*-SET
600-C ⅜ 1.01 0.76 ⅝ 6 PNBZ 6BLEN6
¹∕₂ 8 CPI-*-SET 8 ALOK-*-SET
810-C ½ 1.15 0.87 ¹³∕₁₆ 8 PNBZ 8BLEN8
¾ 12 CPI-*-SET 12 ALOK-*-SET
1010-C ⅝ 1.18 0.87 ⁵∕₁₆ 10 PNBZ 10BLEN10
1 16 CPI-*-SET 16 ALOK-*-SET
1210-C ¾ 1.25 0.87 1-¹⁄₁₆ 12 PNBZ 12BLEN12
*Material designator – 316-SS, B-Brass, S-Steel
1410-C ⅞ 1.31 0.87 1-³⁄₁₆ 14 PNBZ 14BLEN14
1610-C 1 1.52 1.05 1-⅜ 16 PNBZ 16BLEN16
2010-C 1-¼ 2.09 1.52 1-¾ 20 PNBZ 20BLEN20
2410-C 1-½ 2.53 1.77 2-⅛ 24 PNBZ 24BLEN24
3210-C 2 3.41 2.47 2-¾ 32 PNBZ 32BLEN32
NOTE: For body only specify PNZ.

A and C dimensions are typical finger-tight.
Plug For Fractional Tube

INTERCHANGES
TUBE W CPI™ A-LOK®
WITH THREAD A
O.D. HEX ITEM ITEM
100-P ¹⁄₁₆ 10-32 0.31 ⁵⁄₁₆ 1 FNZ 1BLP1

200-P ⅛ ⁵⁄₁₆-20 0.47 ⁷⁄₁₆ 2 FNZ 2BLP2
300-P ³⁄₁₆ ⅜-20 0.47 ½ 3 FNZ 3BLP3
400-P ¼ ⁷⁄₁₆-20 0.5 ⁹⁄₁₆ 4 FNZ 4BLP4
500-P ⁵⁄₁₆ ½-20 0.53 ⅝ 5 FNZ 5BLP5
600-P ⅜ ⁹⁄₁₆-20 0.56 ¹¹⁄₁₆ 6 FNZ 6BLP6
810-P ½ ¾-20 0.69 ⅞ 8 FNZ 8BLP8
1010-P ⅝ ⅞-20 0.69 1 10 FNZ 10BLP10
1210-P ¾ 1-20 0.69 1-⅛ 12 FNZ 12BLP12
1410-P ⅞ 1-⅛-20 0.69 1-¼ 14 FNZ 14BLP14
1610-P 1 1-⁵⁄₁₆-20 0.81 1-½ 16 FNZ 16BLP16
2010-P 1-¼ 1-⅝-20 1.35 1-⅞ 20 FNZ 20BLP20
2410-P 1-½ 1-¹⁵⁄₁₆-20 1.72 2-¼ 24 FNZ 24BLP24
3210-P 2 2-⅝-20 2.27 3 32 FNZ 32BLP32

Hose Fittings
13491N Straight Tube
Hose
Item Diameter R inch A inch A mm Cutoff Allow. B inch Cutoff Allow. B mm
Size
13491N-8-8 -8 ½ 2.80 71 2-⅛ 54
13491N-8-10 -10 ½ 2.81 71 2-⅛ 54
13491N-10-10 -10 ⅝ 2.96 75 2-¼ 58
13491N-12-12 -12 ¾ 3.37 86 2-9/16 65
C * Brass nipple, steel shell.
B - Brass nipple, brass nut, shell,
C - All components 303 stainless steel.
The 16T91N fitting includes 13491N with the 60HAB sleeve and 61HAB nut.
1AL91N A-LOK® Compression

Hose A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. B H Hex J Hex
Item
Size inch mm inch mm inch inch
w/nut & ferrule
1AL91N-4-4C -4 1.30 33 7/16 11 ½ 9/16
1AL91N-4-5C -5 1.35 34 7/16 11 ½ 9/16
1AL91N-6-6C -6 1.53 39 ½ 13 5/8 11/16
1AL91N-8-8C -8 1.61 41 7/16 11 13/16 ⅞
1AL91N-12-12C -12 1.86 47 ½ 13 1-⅛ 1-⅛
1AL91N-16-16C -16 2.11 58 7/16 11 1-⅜ 1-½
w/o nut & ferrules
1AL91N-4-4NC -4 1.30 33 7/16 11 ½ 9/16
1AL91N-4-5NC -5 1.35 34 7/16 11 ½ 9/16
1AL91N-6-6NC -6 1.53 39 ½ 13 5/8 11/16
1AL91N-8-8NC -8 1.61 41 7/16 11 13/16 ⅞
1AL91N-12-12NC -12 1.86 47 ½ 13 1-⅛ 1-⅛
1AL91N-16-16NC -16 2.11 58 7/16 11 1-⅜ 1-½
C - 316 stainless steel nipple, nut, ferrules 303 stainless steel shell.

Hose Fittings - Continued

1P691N CPI® Compression (With Nut and Ferrule)
Item Hose A A Cutoff Allow. Cutoff Allow. H Hex J Hex
w/nut & ferrules Size inch mm B inch B mm inch inch
1P691N-4-4C -4 1.30 33 7/16 11 ½ ⁹⁄₁₆
1P691N-4-5C -5 1.35 34 7/16 11 ½ ⁹⁄₁₆
1P691N-6-6C -6 1.53 39 ½ 13 ⅝ 11/16
1P691N-8-8C -8 1.61 41 7/16 11 15/16 ⅞
1P691N-12-12C -12 1.86 47 ½ 13 1-⅛ 1-⅛

C
1P691N-16-16C -16 2.06 58 7/16 14 1-⅜ 1-½
C - stainless steel nipple, nut and ferrule; 303 stainless steel shell.
Note: Nut part No. is XBZ-SS;ferrule part No. is XTZ-SS. X denotes dash size.
1TU91N Universal Tube Stub

Diameter R A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. B
Item Hose Size
inch inch mm inch mm
1TU91N-2-3C -3 ⅛ 1.33 34 ⅞ 22
1TU91N-3-3C -3 3/16 1.33 34 ⅞ 22
1TU91N-4-4C -4 ¼ 1.63 41 1-1/16 27
1TU91N-4-5C -5 ¼ 1.70 43 1-1/16 27
1TU91N-6-6C -6 ⅜ 1.81 46 1-3/16 30
1TU91N-8-8C -8 ½ 2.72 58 1-7/16 37
1TU91N-8-10C -10 ½ 2.14 54 1-7/16 37
1TU91N-10-10C -10 ⅝ 2.14 54 1-7/16 37
1TU91N-12-12C -12 ⅜ 2.24 57 1-7/16 37
1TU91N-16-16C -16 1 2.73 69 1-¾ 44
C - 316 stainless steel nipple, 303 stainless steel shell
10191N Male Taper Pipe Rigid

Hose Size A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. B H Hex
Item Thread Size
inch inch mm inch mm inch
10191N-2-4 ⅛-27 -4 1.27 32 ¾ 19 7/16
10191N-4-4 ¼-18 -4 1.50 38 15/16 24 9/16
10191N-4-5 ¼-18 -5 1.55 39 15/16 24 9/16
10191N-4-6 ¼-18 -6 1.60 41 15/16 24 9/16
10191N-6-6 ⅜-18 -6 1.65 58 1 25 11/16
10191N-6-8 ⅜-18 -8 1.71 43 1 25 11/16
10191N-8-8 ½-14 -8 1.94 49 1-¼ 32 11/16
10191N-8-10 ½-14 -10 1.96 50 1-¼ 32 11/16
10191N-8-12 ½-14 -12 2.42 61 1-¼ 32 1
10191N-12-12 ¾-14 -12 2.19 56 1-⅜ 35 1-⅛
10191N-16-16 1-11-½ -16 2.46 62 1-½ 38 1-⅜
10191-20-20 1-¼ - 11-½ -20 3.05 77 2-1/16 52 1-¾
* Brass nipple, steel shell.

B - Brass nipple and brass shell.


10691N SAE (JIC) 37° Swivel
Thread Hose A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. B H Hex J Hex
Item
Size Size inch mm inch mm inch inch
10691N-4-4 7/16-20 -4 1.43 36 ⅞ 22 ⅜ 9/16
10691N-5-5 ½-20 -5 1.56 40 15/16 24 7/16 5/8
10691N-6-6 9/16-18 -6 1.63 41 1 25 ½ 11/16
10691N-6-8 9/16-18 -8 1.69 43 1 25 9/16 11/16
C 10691N-8-8 ¾-16 -8 1.89 48 1-13/16 30 11/16 ⅞

10691N-8-10 ¾-16 -10 1.86 58 1-⅛ 29 ¾ ⅞
10691N-10-10 ⅞-14 -10 2.03 52 1-5/16 33 13/16 1
10691N-12-12 1-1/16-12 -12 2.12 54 1-5/16 33 1 1-¼
10691N-16-16 1-5/16-12 -16 2.45 62 1-9/16 40 1-¼ 1-½
10691-20-20 1-5/8- 2 -20 2.98 76 1-13/16 46 1-11/16 2
* Brass nipple, steel nut, shell.
- These fittings contain a dual seat that accepts both the JIC (45 deg.)male configurations. The size -6 and -12 swivel fittings
are shown under part number 10891N.
S - Steel nipple,steel nut, shell.

B - Brass nipple, brass nut , shell.
C - All components 303 stainless steel
10791N Female Pipe Swivel

Thread Hose A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. H Hex J Hex
Item
Size Size inch mm inch B mm inch inch
10791N-4-4 ¼-18 -4 1.50 38 15/16 24 9/16 11/16
10791N-6-6 ⅜-18 -6 1.67 42 1 25 5/8 ⅞
10791N-8-8 ½-14 -8 1.83 46 1-⅛ 29 ¾ 1

10791N-12-12 ¾-14 -12 2.09 53 1-5/16 33 1 1-¼
10791N-16-16 1-11-½ -12 2.26 57 1-5/16 33 1-3/16 1-⅜
* Brass nipple, steel nut and shell.

B - Brass nipple, brass nut , shell.
C - All components are 300 series stainless steel.


20190 Male Taper Pipe Rigid
Hose
Item Thread Size A inch A mm Cutoff Allow. B inch Cutoff Allow. B mm H Hex inch
Size
20190-2-4 ⅛-27 -4 1.33 34 ⅞ 22 9/16
20190-4-4 ¼-18 -4 1.58 40 1-1/16 27 9/16
20190-4-5 ¼-18 -5 1.66 42 1-⅛ 29 5/8
20190-4-6 ¼-18 -6 1.66 42 1-⅛ 29 11/16
20190-6-6 ⅜-18 -6 1.66 42 1-⅛ 29 11/16

C
20190-6-8 ⅜-18 -8 1.77 45 1-3/16 30 ⅞
20190-8-8 ½-14 -8 1.97 50 1-7/16 37 ⅞
20190-8-10 ½-14 -10 2.13 54 1-7/16 37 1
20190-12-12 ¾-14 -12 2.26 57 1-9/16 40 1-⅛
20190-12-16 ¾-14 -16 2.29 58 1-5/8 41 1-⅜
20190-16-16 1-11-½ -16 2.46 62 1-⅞ 48 1-⅜
20190-20-20 1-¼-11-½ -20 2.69 68 2-1/16 52 2

* Brass nipple and ferrule, steel socket.
B - Brass nipple, brass shell.
20690 SAE (JIC) 37° Swivel

Thread Hose A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. B H Hex J Hex
Item
Size Size inch mm inch mm inch inch
20690-4-4 7/16-20 -4 1.58 40 1-⅛ 29 9/16 9/16
20690-5-5 ½-20 -5 1.66 42 1-⅛ 29 5/8 5/8
20690-6-6 9/16-18 -6 1.74 44 1-3/16 35 11/16 11/16
20690-8-6 ¾-16 -6 1.85 47 1-5/16 33 ⅞ ⅞
20690-8-8 ¾-16 -8 1.98 50 1-⅜ 35 ⅞ ⅞
20690-8-10 ¾-16 -10 2.07 53 1-7/16 37 1 ⅞
20690-10-10 7/8-14 -10 2.22 56 1-½ 38 1 1
20690-12-12 1-1/16-12 -12 2.33 59 1-5/8 41 1-¼ 1-¼
20690-16-16 1-5/16-12 -16 2.52 64 1-¹5/16 49 1-⅜ 1-½
20690-20-20 1-5/8-12 -20 2.99 76 2-5/16 59 2 2
* Brass nipple and ferrule, steel nut and socket.
These fittings contain a dual seat that accepts both the JIC (37 deg.) and SAE (45 deg.) male configurations. The size -6
and -12 SAE (45 deg.) swivel fittings are shown under part number 20890.
B - Brass nipple, brass nut, shell.
23490 Straight Tube

Hose Tube Size Tube Size A A Cutoff Allow. B Cutoff Allow. B H Hex
Item
Size inch mm inch mm inch mm inch
23490-8-8 -8 ½ 6 3.06 78 2-½ 64 13/16
23490-8-10 -10 ½ 8 3.15 80 2-½ 64 1
23490-10-8 -8 5/8 8 3.26 83 2-5/8 67 13/16
23490-10-10 -10 5/8 10 3.28 83 2-5/8 67 1
23490-12-12 -12 ¾ 13 3.28 83 2-11/16 68 1-⅛
* Brass nipple and ferrule, steel socket.
B - Brass nipple, brass shell.
26T90 fitting includes 23490 with the 60HAB sleeve and 61HAB nut.

Filters
F Series Inline Filter
DESCRIPTION
Parker F Series Inline Filters are designed for protection
of instrumentation systems from undesirable materials.
Component changes or repair and maintenance can admit
dirt, chips, scale, or other contaminants to the small bore
tubing.
C
• Compact inline design with large filtration area Pressure Rating:
• Stainless steel and brass construction 316SS - ⅛" to ¾" 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
• Replaceable sintered 316 stainless steel filter element
316SS - 1" 5000 psig (345 bar) CWP
• Standard sintered metal micron ratings: 1, 5, 10, 50, and
All sizes with PTFE Seals 4000 psig (276 bar) CWP
100
• Optional 250 and 450 micron wire cloth filter elements Brass - ⅛" to 1" 3000 psig (207 bar) CWP
• Port connections include male and female NPT, CPI™, Seat Material Temperature
Rating:
A-LOK®, UltraSeal, VacuSeal, BSP, SAE, and Seal-
Fluorocarbon Rubber -15°F to +400°F (-26°C to +204°C)
Lok®
• Heat code traceability Nitrile Rubber -30°F to +275°F (-34°C to +135°C)
Ethylene Propylene Rubber -70°F to +275°F (-57°C to +135°C)
Neoprene Rubber -45°F to +250°F (-43°C to +121°C)
PTFE -65°F to +400°F (-54°C to +204°C)
Highly Fluorinated -15°F to +200°F (-26°C to +93°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber
Certificates DNV-ISO 9001, ASME N STAMP (NCA400/
NQA-1), NUPIC, RCC-M
Industry Applications Chemical, Petrochemical, Hydraulic Power
Units, Refining, Research Laboratories
Maximum Tube O.D (mm) 25
Maximum Tube O.D (inch) 1
Flow / Filter Data

Effective CV*
Filtration Area 1 Micron 5 Micron 10 Micron 50 Micron 100 Micron 250 Micron 450 Micron
Filter
Series Micron Micron Micron Micron Micron Micron Micron
sq in sq mm Range Range Range Range Range Range Range
.5 to 3 5 to 10 10 to 20 40 to 50 100 to 150 225 to 275 400 to 500
F2L 0.39 252 0.016 0.026 0.112 0.167 0.229 0.258 0.347
F4L 0.70 452 0.057 0.117 0.171 0.339 0.594 0.790 0.812
F6L 1.57 1013 0.059 0.139 0.202 0.805 1.224 2.421 3.141
F8L 2.53 1632 0.252 0.413 0.753 1.642 2.292 4.001 4.047
F12L 3.77 2432 0.294 0.808 1.042 2.339 3.556 6.384 6.869
F16L 4.47 2884 0.406 0.842 1.359 3.417 3.746 8.559 8.859
* Tested in accordance with ISA S75.02. Gas flow will be choked when P1 - P2 / P1 = Xт .
Xт =1.0 for micron sizes 1 through 100; 0.79 for the 250 micron size, and 0.68 for the 450 micron size.

Filters
FT Series Tee Filter
DESCRIPTION
Introduction
Parker FT Series Tee Filters are designed for protection
of instrumentation systems from undesirable materials.
Component changes or repair and maintenance can admit
dirt, chips, or other ontaminants to the small bore tubing.
FEATURES C
• Filter element replacement achievable without removing
filter from installation
• Compact, high strength forged body design with effective
SPECIFICATIONS
filtration areas of:
FT4 – 1.57 sq in (1013 sq mm) Pressure Ratings:
FT8 – 2.53 sq in (1632 sq mm) With Elastomeric and Metallic Seals:
• Stainless steel and brass construction Stainless Steel 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
• Standard sintered metal micron ratings: 1, 5, 10, 50, and Brass 2000 psig (138 bar) CWP
100 With PTFE Seals:
• Optional 250 and 450 micron wire cloth filter elements Stainless Steel 4000 psig (276 bar) CWP
• Optional bypass enables a continuous self cleaning flow Brass 2000 psig (138 bar) CWP
around the element Temperature Ratings:
• Port connections include male and female NPT, CPI™,
Nitrile Rubber -40°F to 275°F (-40°C to 135°C)
A-LOK®, UltraSeal, and VacuSeal
Highly Fluorinated Fluorocarbon -20°F to 500°F (-29°C to 260°C)
Rubber
Ethylene Propylene Rubber -70°F to 300°F (-57°C to 149°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber -40°F to 400°F (-40°C to 204°C)
Neoprene Rubber -65°F to 300°F (-54°C to 149°C)
Silver Plated Nickel Alloy Gasket -100°F to 900°F (-73°C to 482°C)
(C-ring)
PTFE -70°F to 400°F (-56°C to 204°C)
Note: This Pressure versus Temperature chart reflects the maximum temperature
range of indicated body materials. The temperature rating of the seal becomes the
limiting factor on temperature range.
Flow / Filter Data

Effective CV*
Filtration Area 1 Micron 5 Micron 10 Micron 50 Micron 100 Micron 250 Micron 450 Micron
Filter
Series Micron Micron Micron Micron Micron Micron Micron
sq in sq mm Range Range Range Range Range Range Range
.5 to 3 5 to 10 10 to 20 40 to 50 100 to 150 225 to 275 400 to 500
FT4 1.57 1012 0.072 0.157 0.195 0.231 0.289 0.511 0.549
FT8 2.53 1632 0.123 0.343 0.422 0.444 0.734 0.780 0.840
* Tested in accordance with ISA S75.02. Gas flow will be choked when P ¹ - P ² / P ¹ = Xт .
Xт =1.0 for micron sizes 1 through 100; 0.78 for the 250 micron size, and 0.81 for the 450 micron size.

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • Instrument Valves & Manifolds
Ball Valves
B Series, Two Way
DESCRIPTION
Parker manually, pneumatically, and electrically actuated
two-way B Series Ball Valves provide quick 1/4 turn on-off
control of fluids utilized in process and instrumentation
applications. A broad selection of valve body, seat, and
seal materials provide a wide range of pressures and
C temperatures at which the valve may be used.
FEATURES
• Free floating ball design provides seat wear
compensation.
• Available in 316 stainless steel and brass construction.
Monel® Alloy 400 and Hastelloy® C-276 construction
• Micro-finished ball provides a positive seal.
• Straight through flow path for minimum pressure drop.
• Bi-directional flow.
• Wide variety of US Customary and SI ports.
• 90° actuation.
• Panel mountable.
• Adjustable PTFE stem seal can be maintained in-line.
• Handle indicates flow direction.
• Low operating torques.
• Positive handle stops.
• Color coded handles.
• Optional pneumatic and electric actuation.
• Optional live-loaded PTFE stem seals.
• Optional non-adjustable O-ring stem seals.
• Optional upstream and downstream drain models.
• Optional stainless steel and extended handles.
Flow Calculations with 1000 psig Inlet Pressure
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Drop Water Air
CWP with PTFE Seats Valve Max. DP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C)
Series Cv
316 Stainless Steel 6000 psig (414 bar)* 1500 psig (103 bar) psig bar gpm m3/hr scfm m3/hr
Brass 3000 psig (207 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) 10 0.7 2.9 0.7 92.4 156.2
Monel® Alloy 400 B2L 0.93 50 3.5 6.6 1.5 200.3 338.3
100 6.9 9.3 2.1 272.0 458.9
B2 and B6: 3000 psig (207 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar)
10 0.7 7.4 1.7 231.7 391.5
B8: 2000 psig (138 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) B6L 2.34 50 3.5 16.5 3.8 494.2 834.7
100 6.9 23.4 5.3 657.0 1107.9
Hastelloy® C-276
10 0.7 20.3 4.6 637.1 1076.8
B2 and B6: 4000 psig (276 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar)
B8L 6.42 50 3.5 45.4 10.3 1373.6 2320.3
B8: 3000 psig (207 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) 100 6.9 64.2 14.6 1852.3 3124.8
* B6 Series: 6000 psig rating or 4400 psig (303 bar) CWP

B8 Series: 6000 psig rating or 4000 psig (276 bar) CWP

Ball Valves
B Series, Three Way
DESCRIPTION
Parker manually, pneumatically, and electrically actuated three-way B Series Ball Valves may be used as diverting or
selecting valves for fluids utilized in process and instrumentation applications. The standard three-way diverter valve
is designed to accept media through the bottom port and direct it out of two outlet ports. When equipped with spring-
loaded seats, the three-way valve may be used as a selector valve, alternately accepting media from either of two inlet
sources (side ports) and directing it through a single outlet (bottom port).
C
FEATURES
• Free floating ball design provides seat wear compensation.
• Available in 316 stainless steel and brass construction. Monel® Alloy 400 and
Hastelloy® C-276 construction available upon request.
• Micro-finished ball provides a positive seal.
• Straight through flow path for minimum pressure drop.
• Bi-directional flow.
• Wide variety of US Customary and SI ports.
• 90° actuation.
• Panel mountable.
• Adjustable PTFE stem seal can be maintained in-line.
• Handle indicates flow direction.
• Low operating torques.
• Positive handle stops.
• Color coded handles.
• Optional pneumatic and electric actuation.
• Optional live-loaded PTFE stem seals.
• Optional non-adjustable O-ring stem seals.
• Optional upstream and downstream drain models.
• Optional stainless steel and extended handles.
SPECIFICATIONS
Diverter Valve
Pressure Ratings with Bottom Port as Inlet CWP with PTFE Seats
316 Stainless Steel 6000 psig (414 bar)* 1500 psig (103 bar) Flow Calculations with 1000 psig Inlet Pressure
Brass 3000 psig (207 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) Pressure Drop Water Air
Monel® Alloy 400: B2 and B6 3000 psig (207 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) Valve Max. DP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C)
Series Cv
Monel® Alloy 400: B8 2000 psig (138 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) psig bar gpm m3/hr scfm m3/hr
Hastelloy® C-276: B2 and B6 4000 psig (276 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) 10 0.7 2.0 0.5 62.7 106.0
B2X 0.63 50 3.5 4.5 1.0 137.1 231.7
Hastelloy® C-276: B8 3000 psig (207 bar) 1500 psig (103 bar) 100 6.9 6.3 1.4 188.4 317.9
Pressure Rating with Side Ports as Inlets 150 psig (10 bar) 10 0.7 2.8 0.6 86.7 146.6
Selector Valve (Spring Loaded - B6 & B8 Models Only) B6X 0.87 50 3.5 6.2 1.4 190.5 321.8
100 6.9 8.7 2.0 263.2 444.4
Pressure Ratings with Bottom Port as Inlet CWP
10 0.7 11.5 2.6
316 Stainless Steel 6000 psig (414 bar)* 360.6
B8X 3.62 50 3.5 25.6 5.9 609.5
789.7
Brass 3000 psig (207 bar) 100 6.9 36.2 8.2
Pressure Rating with Side Port as Inlet CWP

316 Stainless Steel 3000 psig (207 bar)
Brass 3000 psig (207 bar)
* B6 Series: 6000 psig rating or 4400 psig (303 bar) CWP
B8 Series: 6000 psig rating or 4000 psig (276 bar) CWP

Ball Valves
MB Series
DESCRIPTION
2 Way In Line 2 Way Angle
Parker MB Series Ball Valves, with their rugged compact
design, offer positive shut off or directional control of fluids
in process, power and instrumentation applications. The
unique one piece seat/packing design insures excellent
sealing characteristics while
C accommodating a superior temperature range and cycle
life.
These valves are available in two-way and three-way
configurations, brass and stainless steel construction,
with a wide variety of port connections. Also, all ports are
suitable as inlets to full operating pressure of the valve.
FEATURES Three-Way
• One piece seat/packing design
• Broad temperature range
• Coated metal inserts
• One piece stem/ball
• Wide variety of US Customary and SI ports
• Panel mountable to ¼" thickness
• Bi-directional flow
• Handle indicates direction of flow
• Full operating pressure at any port
• Positive handle stops
• Color coded handles
• 100% factory tested
• Vent option
• Manual, electric or pneumatic actuation
• Leak-tight center-off position on three-way valves
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating
MB6 3000 psig* (207 bar) CWP
MB2/MB4/MB8 2500 psig* (172 bar) CWP
Temperature Rating -65°F to 300°F (-54°C to 149°C)
Orificer .052” to .406” (1.3mm to 10.3mm)
CV .05 to 6.96
Body Materials Stainless Steel and Brass
Body Configurations Two-way (in-line and angle), 3-way, 4-way
and 5-way
Port Connections Tube compression (CPI™ / A-LOK®),
NPT (Male / Female), BSP, VacuSeal and
UltraSeal
Port Size ¹∕₁₆” to ¾” and 3mm to 12mm
Seat/Packing PFA-Perfluoroalkoxy
* Preset from factory to 1000 psig (69 bar) bubble tight service. Packing nut must
be tightened to achieve higher pressures. Packing in vented MB Series Ball Valves
is factory adjusted for the maximum valve pressure rating of 500 psig (34 bar).

Ball Valves
HB Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker High Pressure HB4 Series Ball Valves provide
reliable shut-off or switching functions. The upper and
lower trunnion bearings enhance the resistance of the
trunnions against seizure, and increase the valve life in
extreme applications. The compact and rugged design
employs spring-loaded seats for high cycle life and low C
operating torques at pressures up to 10,000 psig (689
bar).
FEATURES
• PEEK trunnion bearings for longer cycle life
• Two-way and three-way designs
• Compact FNPT version for tight work areas Two-Way HB4L Design
• Blow-out resistant two-piece ball/stem
• Full operating pressure at any port
• Low operating torque
• Manual, electric or pneumatic actuation
• Panel mountable to 3/8" (9.6mm) thickness
• No packing to adjust
• Color coded fracture resistant handles
• Handle indicates direction of flow
• Positive handle stops
• Wide variety of US customary and SI ports
• Top of stem marked to indicate flow direction
• Compact package
• Heat code traceability
Three-Way HB4X Design
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating
PEEK (PKR) Seats 10,000 psig (689 bar) CWP
PCTFE (K) Seats 6,000 psig (414 bar) CWP
Temp. Rating -65˚F to 400˚F (-54˚C to 204˚C)
Body Materials Stainless steel
Body Config. Two-way and three-way
Port Connections Tube compression (CPI™/A-LOK®),
Short and long female NPT
Port Size 1/8” – 1/2” (6 mm to 12 mm)
Flow Data
Two-Way HB4L Three-Way HB4X
Cv 1.02 0.62
Xτ 0.42 0.71
0.188” 0.188”
Orifice
(4.8mm) (4.8mm)
Tested in accordance with ISA S75.02. Gas flow will be

choked when P₁ - P₂ / P₁ = Xτ .

Ball Valves - Continued
Flow Calculations, Two-Way HB4L Flow Calculations, Three-way HB4X

Inlet Pressure Drop Water Air Inlet Pressure Drop Water Air
Pressure DP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C) Pressure DP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C)
psig bar psig bar gpm m3/hr scfm m3/hr psig bar psig bar gpm m3/hr scfm m3/hr
1 0.1 1.0 0.2 10.8 17.4 1 0.1 0.6 0.1 6.6 10.6
100 7 10 0.7 3.2 0.7 32.0 50.7 100 7 10 0.7 2.0 0.4 20.0 31.9
C 50 3.5 7.2 1.6 50.5 76.0 50 3.5 4.4 1.0 37.1 57.4
10 0.7 3.2 0.7 101.3 171.3 10 0.7 2.0 0.4 61.8 104.4
1000 69 100 6.9 10.2 2.3 297.7 502.3 1000 69 100 6.9 6.2 1.4 187.2 316.1
500 34.5 22.8 5.2 446.7 749.6 500 34.5 13.9 3.1 337.4 567.7
100 6.9 10.2 2.3 542.0 919.9 100 6.9 6.2 1.4 333.1 565.4
3000 207 1000 69.0 32.3 7.3 1297.0 2198.9 3000 207 1000 69.0 19.6 4.5 903.4 1532.8
1500 103.4 39.5 9.0 1327.2 2248.8 1500 103.4 24.0 5.5 1004.4 1703.2
1000 69.0 32.3 7.3 2158.5 3662.7 1000 69.0 19.6 4.5 1393.5 2365.2
6000 414 2000 137.9 45.6 10.4 2188.5 4388.6 6000 414 2000 137.9 27.7 6.3 1803.8 3060.4
3000 206.8 55.9 12.7 2647.9 4486.8 3000 206.8 34.0 7.7 2004.9 3399.8
1000 69.0 32.3 7.3 2954.3 5020.2 1000 69.0 19.6 4.5 1858.9 3159.0
10000 689 2000 137.9 45.6 10.4 3818.4 6487.0 10000 689 2000 137.9 27.7 6.3 2499.6 4247.2
3000 206.8 55.9 12.7 4236.2 7194.9 3000 206.8 34.0 7.7 2903.0 4932.1
Ball Valves
MPB Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker MPB series manually, pneumatically and electrically actuated two-way and three-way ball valves are designed
for ¼ and ½ turn media shutoff or switching applications up to 20,000 psi. Our trunion style ball design and spring
loaded seats make the MPB series ideal for severe service applications. The end connector design enables a variety of
end connections and combinations for specific customer applications.

Ball Valves
SWB Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker’s three-piece SWB Series Ball Valves are durable
valves that can handle the pressure and piping loads. The
center section can swing out to quickly and easily replace
seats, seals and the ball without major disruption to the
piping system.
C
FEATURES
• Ultra low internal volume
• Free floating ball design allows for seat wear
compensation
• Self-compensating stem seal
• Spring-loaded seats
• Blow out resistant stem
• Fully enclosed body bolting
• Four bolt construction
• ISO-type actuator mounting design
• Pneumatic and electric actuation options
SPECIFICATIONS
Body Materials Stainless Steel
Seat Materials Reinforced PTFE, PEEK (size 4 only)
Seal Materials Nitrile Rubber, Ethylene Propylene
Rubber, Fluorocarbon Rubber, PTFE,
Grafoil® (size 4 only)
Flow Data Cv: 1.1 to 35.0
Pressure Ratings 2500 psig (172 bar)
Temperature Ratings — Seats
Reinforced PTFE Seats -65°F to 450°F (-54°C to 232°C)
PEEK Seats -65°F to 600°F (-54°C to 316°C)
Temperature Ratings — Seals
Nitrile Rubber Seals -40°F to 250°F (-40°C to 121°C)
Ethylene Propylene Rubber Seals -65°F to 300°F (-54°C to 149°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber Seals -15°F to 400°F (-26°C to 204°C)
PTFE Seals -65°F to 350°F (-54°C to 177°C)
Grafoil® Seals -65°F to 600°F (-54°C to 316°C)

Ball Valves - Continued

B12 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker's manually and pneumatically actuated two-way
B12 Series Ball Valves provide quick ¼ turn on-off control
of fluids used in process and instrumentation applications.
FEATURES
C • Blow-out resistant stem
• Spring-loaded ball seats
• Stainless steel construction
• Micro-finished ball provides positive seal
• Handle indicates flow direction
• Color coded handles
• Low operating torques
• Optional pneumatic actuation
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating 4,000 psig (276 bar) CWP
Orifice 0.50” (12.7mm)
Flow Coefficient Cv = 9.09
Xτ = 0.32

Bleed & Purge Valves

BV Series Bleed Valve
DESCRIPTION
Parker BV Series Bleed Valves are designed for use on
products such as multi-valve manifolds or gauge/root
valves. Functionally, the valve vents line pressure either
to atmosphere or to ontainment when used with the
optional barbed vent tube. Generally, bleed valves are
used whenever an instrument is removed from a system C
or to assist in the calibration of control devices. The BV
Series is also recommended for use in bleeding hydraulic
systems.
With No Handle
FEATURES
• Available in stainless steel, carbon steel and Alloy
N24135
• Vent tube directs excess gas or liquid from system lines
• Chrome plated stem provides extended cycle life with
improved sealability
• Positive stop/vent tube design prevents accidental
removal of the stem
• Compact design
• Wrench actuation
• Available in a variety of end configurations including male
pipe and SAE ports
• 100% factory tested With Handle
• Barbed vent tube option enables containment of vented
media SPECIFICATIONS
• Optional T-bar handle for wrench-less actuation Pressure Rating: 10,000 psig (689 bar) CWP
Temperature Rating:
Stainless Steel -65°F to 850°F (-54°C to 454°C)
Carbon Steel -20°F to 450°F (-29°C to 232°C)
Alloy N24135 (400) -65°F to 500°F (-54°C to 260°C)
Flow Data Cv = 0.13; xT = 0.53; Orifice = 0.125” (3.2mm).Tested
in accordance with ISA S75.02.Gas flow will be choked
when P1 – P2 / P1 = xT.
Caution These valves do not have a stem seal. It is imperative
to open the valve slowly and direct the vent tube away
from persons operating or near the valve. Because of
the absence of a stem seal, small amounts of media
will flow through the stem thread area when the valves
are opened.
End Connections Dimensions

Item E (hex) E (hex)
(Inlet) Port 1 (Outlet) Port 2 A inch A mm B Inch B mm C inch C mm D inch D mm
inch mm
2M-BV4 ⅛" Male NPT 3/16" O.D. Tube Stub 0.94 23.88 1.24 31.50 0.31 7.87 0.75 19.05 0.63 16.00
4M-BV4 ¼" Male NPT 3/16” O.D. Tube Stub 0.94 23.88 1.24 31.50 0.31 7.87 0.75 19.05 0.63 16.00
4KM-BV4 ¼" Male BSP 3/16” O.D. Tube Stub 0.94 23.88 1.24 31.50 0.31 7.87 0.75 19.05 0.63 16.00
4F5-BV4 ¼" Male SAE 3/16” O.D. Tube Stub 0.94 23.88 1.24 31.50 0.31 7.87 0.69 17.53 0.63 16.00
6M-BV8 ⅜" Male NPT 3/16” O.D. Tube Stub 1.03 26.16 1.49 37.85 0.44 11.18 0.88 22.35 0.88 22.35
8M-BV8 ½" Male NPT 3/16” O.D. Tube Stub 1.03 26.16 1.49 37.85 0.44 11.18 0.88 22.35 0.88 22.35
8F5-BV8 ½" Male SAE 3/16” O.D. Tube Stub 1.03 26.16 1.49 37.85 0.44 11.18 0.88 22.35 0.88 22.35

Bleed & Purge Valves

PG Series Purge Valve
DESCRIPTION
Parker PG Series Purge Valves may be utilized as either
bleed, purge, or drain valves. The compact valve requires
only a uarter turn with a wrench from finger-tight to ensure
a leak-tight seal on the first make-up. Additional wrenching
ensures a leak-tight seal up to the rated pressure.
C
FEATURES
• A 0.055 inch (1.4 mm) diameter vent hole in the cap
bleeds, drains, or purges system pressure
• Hex cap permits finger-tight or wrench assisted closure
• Crimped cap resists accidental disassembly
• A variety of body styles offers system design flexibility,
reduced space requirements, and helps to eliminate leak
paths
• Available in a variety of end configurations including:
CPI™, A-LOK®, male and female NPT, SAE, and Tube
Adapter onnections
• Optional PTFE Ball requires only finger-tight torque to
achieve a leak-tight seal
Available Purge Valve Body Styles
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Rating:
Stainless Steel -65°F to 600°F (-54°C to 316°C)
Brass -65°F to 400°F (-54°C to 204°C)
Carbon Steel -20°F to 350°F (-29°C to 177°C)
PTFE Ball Option -65°F to 350°F (-54°C to 177°C)
Pressure Rating:
Stainless Steel 4000 psig (276 bar) CWP
Brass 3000 psig (207 bar)
Carbon Steel 3000 psig (207 bar)
PTFE Ball Option 200 psig (14 bar)
Caution These valves do not have a cap thread seal. It is
imperative to open the valve slowly and direct the vent
hole away from ersons operating or near the valve.
Because of the absence of a cap seal, small amounts
of media will flow through the cap thread area when the
valves are opened.
PTFE Ball Option Purge Valves with the PTFE ball option require only
finger-tight operation for leak-tight shut-off and are
designed with a emovable cap for ball replacement.

Bleed & Purge Valves - Continued
Dimensions
End Connections A* (Closed)* B* C (hex) D (hex)
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm

2A ⅛” A-LOK® Compression 1.79 45.5 0.60 15.2 0.50 12.7 0.44 11.2
2Z ⅛” CPI™ Compression 1.79 45.5 0.60 15.2 0.50 12.7 0.44 11.2
2M ⅛” Male NPT 1.56 39.6 0.38 9.7 0.50 12.7 - -
2F ⅛” Female NPT 1.50 38.1 0.53 13.5 0.56 14.2 - -

2TA ⅛” Tube Adapter 1.69 42.9 0.55 14.0 0.50 12.7 - -
4A ¼” A-LOK® Compression 1.88 47.8 0.70 17.8 0.50 12.7 0.56 14.2
4M ¼” CPI™ Compression 1.76 44.7 0.56 14.2 0.56 14.2 - -
4F ¼” Male NPT 1.69 42.9 0.72 18.3 0.75 19.1 - -
4F5 ¼” Female NPT 1.78 45.2 0.41 10.4 0.75 19.1 - -
4TA ¼” Male SAE 1.91 48.5 0.72 18.3 0.50 12.7 - -

6A ¼” Tube Adapter 1.98 50.3 0.76 19.3 0.63 16.0 0.69 17.5
6Z ⅜” A-LOK® Compression 1.98 50.3 0.76 19.3 0.63 16.0 0.69 17.5
6M ⅜” Male NPT 1.78 45.2 0.56 14.2 0.69 17.5 - -
6F ⅜” Female NPT 1.75 44.5 0.78 19.8 0.88 22.4 - -
6TA ⅜” Male NPT 1.97 50.0 0.78 19.8 0.50 12.7 - -
6mm A-LOK®
M6A 1.88 47.8 0.70 17.8 0.55 14.0 0.55 14.0
Compression
M6Z 6mm CPI™ Compression 1.88 47.8 0.70 17.8 0.55 14.0 0.55 14.0
8A ½” A-LOK® Compression 2.12 53.8 0.87 22.1 0.81 20.6 0.88 22.4
8Z ½” CPI™ Compression 2.12 53.8 0.87 22.1 0.81 20.6 0.88 22.4
8M ½” Male NPT 2.03 51.6 0.75 19.1 0.88 22.4 - -
8F ½” Female NPT 1.94 49.3 0.97 24.6 1.06 26.9 - -
8F5 ½” Male SAE 2.08 52.8 0.47 11.9 1.13 28.7 - -
8TA ½” Tube Adapter 2.22 56.4 1.03 26.2 0.56 14.2 - -
8mm A-LOK®
M8A 1.97 50.0 0.75 19.1 0.63 16.0 0.63 16.0
Compression
M8Z 8mm CPI™ Compression 1.97 50.0 0.75 19.1 0.63 16.0 0.63 16.0
Dimensions in inches (millimeters) are for reference only, subject to change.

* For CPI™ and A-LOK®, dimensions are measured with nuts in the finger tight position.

Check Valves
C Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker C Series Check Valves are designed for uni-
directional flow control of fluids and gases in industries
such as chemical processing, oil and gas production
and transmission, pharmaceutical, pulp and paper,
power and utilities.
C
FEATURES
• Resilient, custom molded, blow-out resistant seat design
• Back stopped poppet minimizes spring stress
• 100% factory tested for both crack and reseat
Flow Calculations with 1000 psig (69 bar) Inlet Pressure
• Cracking pressures include: 1/3, 1, 5, 10, 25, 50, 75, and
100 psi. Pressure Drop Water Air
Valve Maximum DP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C)
• Port connections include male and female NPT, CPI™, Series CV
psig bar gpm m3/hr SCFM m3/hr
A-LOK®, UltraSeal, VacuSeal, BSP, SAE and Seal-Lok® 10 0.7 1.0 0.2 30.8 52.1
• Heat code traceability C2 0.31 50 3.4 2.2 0.5 67.2 112.8
100 6.9 3.1 0.7 92.0 155.3
SPECIFICATIONS 10 0.7 2.4 0.5 74.6 126.1

C4 0.75 50 3.4 5.3 1.2 162.7 273.0
Pressure Rating:** 100 6.9 7.5 1.7 222.8 376.2
316 SS – ⅛ " to ¾ ": 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP 10 0.7 7.1 1.6 225.3 380.9
C6 2.26 50 3.4 16.0 3.6 495.2 831.0
316 SS – 1”: 5000 psig (345 bar) CWP
100 6.9 22.6 5.1 685.1 1157.2
PTFE Seats, all sizes: 4000 psig (276 bar) CWP 10 0.7 11.2 2.5 352.0 595.0
C8 3.53 50 3.4 25.0 5.6 774.3 1299.4
Brass – 1/8" to 1": 3000 psig (207 bar) CWP
100 6.9 35.3 8.0 1072.4 1811.6
Seat Material Temperature Rating: 10 0.7 19.0 4.3 596.6 1008.3
C12 6.01 50 3.4 42.5 9.6 1287.5 2160.4
100 6.9 60.1 13.7 1738.5 2934.5
Nitrile -30°F to +275°F (-34°C to +135°C) 10 0.7 20.7 4.7 648.9 1096.6
Ethylene Propylene Rubber -70°F to +275°F (-57°C to +135°C) C16 6.56 50 3.4 46.4 10.5 1379.4 2314.7
100 6.9 65.6 14.9 1824.4 3077.6
PTFE -65°F to +400°F (-54°C to +204°C)
Highly Fluorinated Fluorocarbon -15°F to +200°F (-26°C to +93°C)
Rubber
Orifice: 078" to .656" (2.0 mm to 16.7 mm)
C v: 18 to 6.56
Certificates DNV-ISO 9001, ASME N STAMP
(NCA400/NQA-1), NUPIC, RCC-M
Industry Applications Chemical, Petrochemical, Hydraulic
Power Units, Refining, Research
Laboratories
Maximum Tube O.D (mm) 25
Maximum Tube O.D (inch) 1

Check Valves
CB Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker CB Series Check Valves are designed for uni-
directional flow control of fluids and gases. The unique
floating ball valve design handles demanding services in
power eneration, chemical processing, oil/ gas production,
and other demanding applications. The CB Series are C
specifically designed to reduce check valve maintenance
and performance requirements on dual fuel turbines.
Specific issues include, but are not limited to seat leakage,
coking, repair and maintenance. All of these issues
directly affect turbine efficiency, impacting operating costs.
The advanced seat materials of the CB Series Check Body End Connections Dimensions
Valves are particularly suited for higher temperature Size Inlet Port Outlet Port A B Hex
applications requiring high integrity leak rates and re- CB6 ⅜” A-LOK® (6A) ⅜” A-LOK® (6A) 2.72 1.00
sealing capabilities. or CPI™ (6Z) or CPI™ (6Z)
CB6 ⅜” A-LOK® (6A) ⅜” Male NPT 2.88 1.00
or CPI™ (6Z) (6M)
FEATURES
CB6
• Rugged and reliable floating ball valve seat design ½” A-LOK® (8A)
or CPI™ (8Z)
½” A-LOK® (8A)
or CPI™ (8Z)
2.78 1.00
optimizes sealing characteristics while minimizing effects

CB6 ½” A-LOK® (8A) ½” Female SAE 2.98 1.00
of coking. or CPI™ (8Z) (8G5)
• Optional hard PTFE coated ball cage resists poppet CB6 ½” A-LOK® (8A) ½” Male NPT 2.98 1.00
“stick” commonly experienced with fuel oil coking. or CPI™ (8Z) (8M)
• Fully field serviceable with Parker rebuild kits. Replace CB6 ½” Male JIC 37° ½” Female SAE 3.16 1.00
seats in minutes without special tools. Flare (8X) (8G5)
• Advanced reinforced PTFE copolymer seat materials CB8 ½” A-LOK® (8A) ½” A-LOK® (8A) 3.30 1.25
or CPI™ (8Z) or CPI™ (8Z)
designed by Parker for demanding applications such as
CB8 ½” A-LOK® (8A) ½” Female SAE 3.44 1.25
air purge and fuel oil. or CPI™ (8Z) (8G5)
• Integral “last chance” filter option for seat and nozzle CB8 ½” Male JIC 37° ½” Female SAE 3.48 1.25
protection. Flare (8X) (8G5)
• To even further reduce turbine downtime during repairs, CB8 ½” A-LOK® (8A) ½” Male NPT 3.44 1.25
utilize Parker’s metal flexible hoses. or CPI™ (8Z) (8M)
CB8 ⅝” A-LOK® (10A) ⅝” A-LOK® (10A) 3.30 1.25
SPECIFICATIONS or CPI™ (10Z) or CPI™ (10Z)
Shell Pressure Rating: 3000 psi CWP CB12 ¾” A-LOK® (12A) ¾” A-LOK® (12A) 3.56 1.375
Standard Crack Pressures: 1, 5, 10, 15, 50, 100, 120
CB12 ¾” A-LOK® (12A) ¾” Female SAE 3.84 1.375
Seat Materials, Back Pressure and Temperature Ratings: or CPI™ (12Z) (12G5)
Parkerfill 1000 psi @ 100°F CB12 ¾” A-LOK® (12A) ¾” Male NPT 3.84 1.375
300 psi @ 450°F or CPI™ (12Z) (12M)
Parker Carbon 2500 psi @ 100°F CB12 ¾” Male JIC 37° ¾” Female SAE 4.12 1.375
1250 psi @ 450°F Flare (12X) (12G5)

Check Valves
CBF Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker CBF Series Check Valves are designed for uni-
directional flow control of fluids and gases. The unique
floating ball valve design handles demanding services in
power eneration, chemical processing, oil/ gas production,
C and other demanding applications. The CBF Series are
specifically designed to reduce check valve maintenance
and performance requirements on dual fuel turbines.
Specific issues include, but are not limited to seat leakage,
coking, repair and maintenance. All of these issues directly
affect turbine efficiency, impacting operating costs. The
Body End Connections Dimensions
advanced seat materials of the CBF Series Check Valves
Size Inlet Port B Hex
are particularly suited for higher temperature applications Outlet Port A
requiring high integrity leak rates and re-sealing CBF8

½” A-LOK® (8A)
or CPI™ (8Z)
½” A-LOK® (8A)
or CPI™ (8Z)
4.50 1.375
capabilities.
½” A-LOK® (8A)
CBF8 ½” Female SAE (8G5) 4.70 1.375
or CPI™ (8Z)
FEATURES ½” Male JIC 37° Flare
CBF8
• Rugged and reliable floating ball valve seat design (8X)
½” Female SAE (8G5) 4.93 1.375
optimizes sealing characteristics while minimizing effects ½” A-LOK® (8A)

CBF8 ½” Male NPT (8M) 4.70 1.375
of coking. or CPI™ (8Z)
• Optional hard PTFE coated ball cage resists poppet CBF8

⅝” A-LOK (10A)
®
⅝” A-LOK (10A)
®
4.75 1.375
“stick” commonly experienced with fuel oil coking.
• Fully field serviceable with Parker rebuild kits. Replace CBF8
¾” A-LOK® (12A) ¾” A-LOK® (12A)
4.75 1.375
seats in minutes without special tools.
• Advanced reinforced PTFE copolymer seat materials CBF8
¾” A-LOK® (12A) ¾” Female SAE
5.14 1.375
or CPI™ (12Z) (12G5)
designed by Parker for demanding applications such as
¾” A-LOK (12A)
®
air purge and fuel oil. CBF8 ¾” Male NPT (12M) 4.96 1.375
or CPI™ (12Z)
• Integral “last chance” filter option for seat and nozzle ¾” Male JIC 37° Flare ¾” Female SAE
protection. CBF8 5.37 1.375
(12X) (12G5)
• To even further reduce turbine downtime during repairs,
utilize Parker’s metal flexible hoses.
SPECIFICATIONS
Shell Pressure Rating: 3000 psi CWP
Standard Crack Pressures: 1, 5, 10, 15, 50, 100, 120
Seat Materials, Back Pressure and Temperature Ratings:
Parkerfill 1000 psi @ 100°F
300 psi @ 450°F
Parker Carbon 2500 psi @ 100°F
1250 psi @ 450°F

Check Valves
CO Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker CO Series Check Valves are designed for uni-
directional flow control of fluids and gases in industries
such as chemical processing, oil and gas production and
transmission, pharmaceutical, pulp and paper, power and
utilities. The CO Series heck Valve is particularly suitable C
for applications requiring high integrity leak rates and re-
sealing capabilities.
• Seal integrity across the seat and to atmosphere is Pressure Rating: 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
tested to 4 x 10-9 std atm-cc/sec (4 x 10-10 kPa –L/sec) Seat Material
for the CO4L with luorocarbon rubber seals. All other Temperature Rating:
sizes and seal materials are tested to 1 x 10-5 std atm- Fluorocarbon Rubber -15°F to 400°F (-26°C to 204°C)
cc/sec (1 x 10-6 kPa – L/sec). Nitrile Rubber -30°F to 250°F (-34°C to 121°C)
• Special seat seal design provides a repeatable high Ethylene Propylene -70°F to 275°F (-57°C to 135°C)
integrity seal and accurate cracking pressures Rubber
• 100% factory tested. Cracking pressures include: ⅓, 1, Highly Fluorinated -15°F to 200°F (-26°C to 93°C)
5, 10, 25, 50, 75, and 100 psi. Fluorocarbon Rubber
• Valves are available with male and female NPT, CPI™, Orifice: 156" to .406" (4.0mm to 10.3mm)
A-LOK®, UltraSeal, male and female VacuSeal, and Tube C v: 43 to 2.65
Adapter
• Heat code traceability
Flow Calculations with 1000 psig (69 bar) Inlet Pressure
• Color coded identification labels indicate seal material
Water Air
Pressure Drop
Valve Maximum @ 60-1/2°F (16- @ 60-1/2°F (16-
DP
Series CV 1/2°C) 1/2°C)
psig bar gpm m3/hr SCFM m3/hr
10 0.7 2.0 0.4 61.8 104.5
C04 0.62 50 3.4 4.4 1.0 135.7 227.7
100 6.9 6.2 1.4 187.5 316.7
10 0.7 5.9 1.3 184.4 311.6
C06 1.85 50 3.4 13.1 3.0 404.4 678.5
100 6.9 18.5 4.2 557.9 942.3
10 0.7 8.4 1.9 264.2 446.5
C08 2.65 50 3.4 18.7 4.2 580.3 973.8
100 6.9 26.5 6.0 802.3 1355.3

Check Valves
LC Series Lift Check Valve
DESCRIPTION
Parker’s LC-Series Lift Check Valve has been designed
for a wide variety of temperature extremes found in
power,chemical, petrochemical, oil & gas, and laboratory
applications. The LC-Series, ideal for liquid service, has
C been designed to prevent flow in the reverse direction to
within 99.9% of forward flow. The gravity assisted poppet
uses back pressure to achieve a seal.
FEATURES
• Wide temperature range
• Variety of end connections available
• Compact design
• Rugged, forged body construction
• Stainless steel construction
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
Flow Data: Note: Valve must be mounted in proper orientation.
LC6 Series Cv= .63 Xт = .47

LC12 Series Cv = 1.20 Xт = .63
LC16 Series Cv = 2.29 Xт = .65

Two-Valve Block & Bleed Manifold

.187" Orifice 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” FNPT
FEATURES
• Carbon Steel Manifolds are Zinc Cobalt Plated with Dichromate Dip
• 316 SS Manifolds Meet NACE MR0175 Requirements (Latest Revision)
• 100% Pressure Tested
• Carbon Steel Weld End Connection Bodies are AISI 1018
Orifice Max
Max Cv C
Model End Connections Seat Type Height Seat Vent
Size Open
Ratings
V-570 .187” 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” FNPT Hard 5.38” 5.26” .53 1/4” NPT
V-575 .187” 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” FNPT Soft 5.38” 4.56” .83 1/4” NPT
V-612 .187” 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” MNPT Hard 5.38” 5.26” .53 1/4” NPT 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” MNPT
V-613 .187” 1/2” MNPT x 1/2” MNPT Soft 5.38” 4.56” .83 1/4” NPT
HOW TO ORDER

X X X XXX
Table 1 BODY CODE Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE

C [Std.] Carbon Steel T [Std.] Teflon® Pressure-Core™
P A105 Carbon Steel G Grafoil® Packed
S [Std.] 316 SS P Teflon® Packed [Hard Seat Only]
M Monel® V Viton® O-Ring
H Hastelloy-C® J Low-Temp Pressure-Core™
Table 2 SEAT CODE Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION
HARD SEAT CODE AM7 ½″Male Pipe Socket Weld (Process Port)
C [Std.] Carbide Ball GA Anti-Tamper Bonnet (All Positions - Hard Seats Only)
R Ceramic Ball GC Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Isolate Valve Only)
6 316 SS Ball GE Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Vent Valve Only - Hard Seats Only)
H Hastelloy-C® Ball GJ Bonnet Lock-Out (All Positions - Lock Not Provided -Hard
Seats Only)
N K-Monel® Ball
GK Bonnet Lock-Out (Isolate Valve Only - Lock Not Provided)
SOFT SEAT CODE
GM Bonnet Lock-Out (Vent Valve Only - Lock Not Provided -Hard
D Delrin® Cone / Washer [Std.]
Seats Only)
K Kel-F® Cone / Washer
P9 ¼″ Hex Head Pipe Plug in Vent/Test Port
P PEEK® Cone / Washer
TH Hydrostatic Testing
T Teflon® Cone / Washer
W Safety Bonnet Lock Plate
Z Tefzel Cone / Washer
WK Paper Tag
W1 316 SS Tag (20 Characters)
XL Clean for Critical Service (Oxygen or Chlorine)


.187" Orifice 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT
FEATURES
C Model
Orifice
End Connections
Seat
Height
Max
Max Cv
Seat Vent
Size Type Open
Ratings
V-614 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT Hard 4.00” 5.06” .53 1/4” NPT
V-615 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT Soft 4.00” 4.56” .83 1/4” NPT
V-626 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Hard 5.38” 5.12” .53 1/2” NPT
V-627 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Soft 5.38” 4.25” .83 1/2” NPT 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT
HOW TO ORDER

X X X XXX
Table 1 BODY CODE Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE

C [Std.] Carbon Steel T [Std.] Teflon® Pressure-Core™
P A105 Carbon Steel G Grafoil® Packed
S [Std.] 316 SS P Teflon® Packed [Hard Seat Only
M Monel® V Viton® O-Ring
H Hastelloy-C® J Low-Temp Pressure-Core™
Table 2 SEAT CODE Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION
HARD SEAT CODE AM7 ½" Male Pipe Socket Weld (Process Port)
C [Std.] Carbide Ball GA Anti-Tamper Bonnet (All Positions - Hard Seats Only)
R Ceramic Ball GC Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Isolate Valve Only)
6 316 SS Ball GE Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Vent Valve Only - Hard Seats Only)
H Hastelloy-C® Ball GJ Bonnet Lock-Out (All Positions - Lock Not Provided -Hard
Seats Only)
N K-Monel® Ball
GK Bonnet Lock-Out (Isolate Valve Only - Lock Not Provided)
SOFT SEAT CODE
GM Bonnet Lock-Out (Vent Valve Only - Lock Not Provided -Hard
D Delrin® Cone / Washer [Std.] Seats Only)
K Kel-F® Cone / Washer P9 ¼" Hex Head Pipe Plug in Vent/Test Port
P PEEK® Cone / Washer TH Hydrostatic Testing
T Teflon® Cone / Washer W Safety Bonnet Lock Plate
Z Tefzel Cone / Washer WK Paper Tag
W1 316 SS Tag

Two-Valve Versa-Mount Manifolds

.187" Orifice
FEATURES
(2) 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT
Model
Orifice
Size
End Connections
Seat
Type
Height
Max
Open
Max Cv
Seat Vent C
Rating
V-620 .187” (2) 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT Hard 5.30” 5.26” .53 1/4” NPT
V-621 .187” (2) 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT Soft 5.30” 4.56” 1/4” NPT
V-622 .187” (2) 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Hard 5.30” 5.26” .53 1/4” NPT
V-623 .187” (2) 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Soft 5.30” 4.56” 1/4” NPT
V-624 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT Hard 5.30” 5.26” .53 1/4” NPT
V-625 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT Soft 5.30” 4.56” 1/4” NPT (2) 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT
HOW TO ORDER

X X X XXX
Table 1 BODY CODE Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION

C [Std.] Carbon Steel AU7 ½" Integral Tube Fitting - Parker®
A-LOK Dual Ferrules (Process
P A105 Carbon Steel
Ports)
S [Std.] 316 SS
AV7 ½" Integral Tube Fitting -
M Monel® Swagelok® Dual Ferrules
(Process Ports)
H Hastelloy-C®
GA Anti-Tamper Bonnet (All Positions)
Table 2 SEAT CODE 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” MNPT
GC Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Isolate
HARD SEAT CODE Valve(s) Only)
C [Std.] Carbide Ball GE Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Vent Valve(s)
R Ceramic Ball Only)
6 316 SS Ball GJ Bonnet Lock-Out (All Positions -

Lock Not Provided)
H Hastelloy-C® Ball
GK Bonnet Lock-Out (Isolate Valve(s)
N K-Monel® Ball Only - Lock Not Provided)
SOFT SEAT CODE GM Bonnet Lock-Out (Vent Valve(s)
D Delrin® Cone / Washer [Std.] Only - Lock Not Provided)
K Kel-F® Cone / Washer P9 ¼" Hex Head Pipe Plug in Vent/

Test Port
P PEEK® Cone / Washer
T Teflon® Cone / Washer
VC CS Versa-Mount Bracket
Z Tefzel Cone / Washer
VS 316 SS Versa-Mount Bracket
Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE
VCH CS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount
T [Std.] Teflon® Pressure-Core™ Bracket
G Grafoil® Packed VSH 316 SS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount
Bracket
P Teflon® Packed [Hard Seat Only]
V Viton® O-Ring
WK Paper Tag
J Low-Temp Pressure-Core™
W1 316 SS Tag (20 Characters ~ See
page 61)
XL Clean for Critical Service (Oxygen
or Chlorine)


.136" Orifice 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT
FEATURES
C Orifice Seat
Max Max Cv
Mounting
Holes -
Model End Connections Height Open Seat Vent
Size Type Distance
Process Rating
Between
M-507 .136” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Hard 2.38” 2.50” .25. 2 - 1.00” 1/2” NPT
M-507 .136” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Soft 2.38” 2.50” .22 2 - 1.00” 1/2” NPT
M-508 .136” 1/4” FNPT x 1/4” FNPT Hard 2.81” 2.25” .25 2 - 1.00” 1/4” NPT
M-508 .136” 1/4” FNPT x 1/4” FNPT Soft 2.81” 2.25” .22 2 - 1.00” 1/4” NPT
1/4” FNPT x 1/4” FNPT
HOW TO ORDER

X X X XX
Table 1 BODY CODE

C [Std.] Carbon Steel
S [Std.] 316 SS
Table 2 SEAT CODE
HARD SEAT CODE
M [Std.] Integral Metal
SOFT SEAT CODE
D Delrin® Washer [Std.]
K Kel-F® Washer
P PEEK® Washer
T Teflon® Washer
Z Tefzel Washer
Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE
T [Std.] Teflon® Packed
G Grafoil® Packed
V Viton® O-Ring
Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION
H5 CS Mini Round Handles
H6 SS Mini Round Handles
VC CS Versa-Mount Bracket
VS 316 SS Versa-Mount Bracket
WK Paper Tag


.187" Orifice
1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT 1/2” FNPT x Flange
FEATURES
• Carbon Steel Manifolds are Zinc Cobalt
Plated with Dichromate Dip
• 316 SS Manifolds Meet NACE MR0175
Requirements (Latest Revision)
• Carbon Steel Weld End Connection Bodies C
are AISI 1018
Mounting
Max Max Cv
Orifice Seat Holes &
Model End Connections Height Open Seat Vent Flange x Flange
Size Type Distance
Process Rating
Between Slim Body Style
M-518 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Hard 2.50” 4.64” .53 2 - 1.00” 1/2” NPT
M-517 .187” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Soft 2.50”” 4.64” .83 2 - 1.00” 1/2” NPT
M-616 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Hard 3.75” 3.36” .53 2 - 1.00” 1/4” NPT
M-615 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Soft 3.75” 3.36” .83 2 - 1.00” 1/4” NPT
M-716 .187” Flange x Flange Hard 3.75” 3.36” .53 2 - 1.00” 1/4” NPT
M-715 .187” Flange x Flange Soft 3.75” 3.36” .83 2 - 1.00” 1/4” NPT
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION - cont’d
X X X XXXX T [Std.] Teflon® Pressure-Core™ TH Hydrostatic Testing

G Grafoil® Packed TS Steam Trace Block - 316 SS
Table 1 BODY CODE V Viton® O-Ring VC CS Versa-Mount Bracket
C [Std.] Carbon Steel J Low-Temp Pressure-Core™ VS 316 SS Versa-Mount Bracket
P A105 Carbon Steel P Teflon® Packed [Hard Seat Only] VCH CS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount
Bracket
S [Std.] 316 SS Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION
VSH 316 SS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount
M Monel® AU7 ½″ Integral Tube Fitting - Parker® Bracket
A-LOK Dual Ferrules (Process
H Hastelloy-C® Ports) W Safety Bonnet Lock Plate
Table 2 SEAT CODE AV7 ½″ Integral Tube Fitting - WA CS 2-¼″ Bolts for Rosemount®
HARD SEAT CODE Swagelok® Dual Ferrules 3051C, 3095, or 2024 with
(Process Ports) Coplanar™ (Flange Manifolds
C [Std.] Carbide Ball Only)
R Ceramic Ball WAW3 300 SS 2-¼″ Bolts for
GC Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Isolate Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or
6 316 SS Ball Valve(s) Only) 2024 with Coplanar™ (Flange
N K-Monel® GE Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Vent Valve(s) Manifolds Only)
Only) WAW9 316 SS 2-¼″ Bolts for
H Hastelloy-C®
GJ Bonnet Lock-Out (All Positions - Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or
SOFT SEAT CODE 2024 with Coplanar™ (Flange
Lock Not Provided)
D Delrin® Cone [Std.] Manifolds Only)
K Kel-F® Cone Only - Lock Not Provided) WK Paper Tag
P Peek® Cone GM Bonnet Lock-Out (Vent Valve(s) W1 316 SS Tag (20 Characters)
Only - Lock Not Provided) W3 300 SS Standard Length Flange
T Teflon® Cone
ME Slotted Instrument Flange Using Bolts (CS Standard)
Z Tefzel Cone
Bolts over 3” W9 316 SS Standard Length Flange
MH Viton® O-Ring Flange Seals Bolts (CS Standard)
MU Dielectric Isolation (Flange XL Clean for Critical Service (Oxygen

Manifolds Only) or Chlorine)
TC Steam Trace Block - Carbon Steel


.187" Orifice
1/2” FNPT x Flange
FEATURES
C
Mounting
Max Max Cv
Size Type Distance
Process Rating
Between
M-618 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Hard 3.75” 5.25” .53 2 -1.13” 1/2” NPT
M-617 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Soft 3.75” 5.25” .83 2 -1.13” 1/2” NPT
Slim Body Style
M-718 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Hard 3.75” 5.25” .53 2 -1.13” 1/2” NPT
M-717 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Soft 3.75” 5.25” .83 2 -1.13” 1/2” NPT
HOW TO ORDER

X X X XXXX
Table 1 BODY CODE Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION - cont’d
C [Std.] Carbon Steel AU7 ½″ Integral Tube Fitting - Parker® VCH CS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount
A-LOK Dual Ferrules (Process Bracket
P A105 Carbon Steel
Ports)
VSH 316 SS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount
S [Std.] 316 SS
AV7 ½″ Integral Tube Fitting - Bracket
M Monel® Swagelok® Dual Ferrules
(Process Ports) W Safety Bonnet Lock Plate
H Hastelloy-C®
GA Anti-Tamper Bonnet (All Positions) WA CS 2-¼ ″ Bolts for Rosemount®
Table 2 SEAT CODE 3051C, 3095, or 2024 with
GC Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Isolate Coplanar™ (Flange Manifolds
HARD SEAT CODE Valve(s) Only) Only)
C [Std.] Carbide Ball GE Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Vent WAW3 300 SS 2-¼ ″ Bolts for
R Ceramic Ball Valve(s) Only) Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or
2024 with Coplanar™ (Flange
6 316 SS Ball GJ Bonnet Lock-Out (All Positions -
Manifolds Only)
Lock Not Provided)
N K-Monel® WAW9 316 SS 2-¼ ″ Bolts for
Hastelloy-C® Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or
H Only - Lock Not Provided)
2024 with Coplanar™ (Flange
SOFT SEAT CODE GM Bonnet Lock-Out (Vent Valve(s) Manifolds Only)
D Delrin® Cone [Std.] Only - Lock Not Provided)
WK Paper Tag
Kel-F® Cone ME Slotted Instrument Flange Using
K W1 316 SS Tag (20 Characters)
Bolts over 3”
P Peek® Cone W3 300 SS Standard Length Flange
MH Viton® O-Ring Flange Seals
Bolts (CS Standard)
T Teflon® Cone
MU Dielectric Isolation (Flange
W9 316 SS Standard Length Flange
Z Tefzel Cone Manifolds Only)
Bolts (CS Standard)
Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE TC Steam Trace Block - Carbon Steel
XL Clean for Critical Service (Oxygen
T [Std.] Teflon® Pressure-Core™ TH Hydrostatic Testing or Chlorine)
V Viton® O-Ring VC CS Versa-Mount Bracket
J Low-Temp Pressure-Core™ VS 316 SS Versa-Mount Bracket
P Teflon® Packed [Hard Seat Only]


.250" Orifice
FEATURES
Mounting
C
Max Max Cv
Size Type Distance
Process Rating
Between
M2-517 .250” 1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT Soft 2.50” 4.78” .83 2 - 1.13” 1/2” NPT
M2-617 .250” 1/2” FNPT x Flange Soft 3.75” 5.67” .83 2 - 1.13” 1/2” NPT
1/2” FNPT x Flange
Three-Valve Manifolds
.187" Orifice
1/2” FNPT x 1/2” FNPT 1/2” FNPT x Flange
FEATURES
• Carbon Steel Manifolds are Zinc Cobalt
Plated with Dichromate Dip
• 316 SS Manifolds Meet NACE MR0175
Requirements (Latest Revision)
• Carbon Steel Weld End Connection Bodies
are AISI 1018
Mounting Instrument
Max Max Cv Flange x Flange
Orifice End Seat Holes & Ports
Model Height Open Seat Vent
Size Connections Type Distance (Distance
Process Rating
Between Between)
M-500 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Hard 2.87” 7.125” .53 2 - 1.13” 2.125” 1/2” NPT
1/2” FNPT
M-501 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Soft 2.87”” 7.125” .83 2 - 1.13” 2.125” 1/2” NPT
1/2” FNPT
M-650 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Hard 3.75” 7.125” .53 2 - 1.13” 2.125” 1/4” NPT
Flange
M-651 .187” 1/2” FNPT x Soft 3.75” 7.125” .83 2 - 1.13” 2.125” 1/4” NPT
Flange
M-750 .187” Flange x Hard 3.75” 7.125” .53 2 - 1.13” 2.125” 1/4” NPT
Flange
M-751 .187” Flange x Soft 3.75” 7.125” .83 2 - 1.13” 2.125” 1/4” NPT
Flange

Three-Valve Manifolds - Continued

HOW TO ORDER

X X X XXXX
Table 1 BODY CODE Table 4 OPTION DESCRIPTION

C [Std.] Carbon Steel AU7 ½″ Integral Tube Fitting - Parker® A-LOK Dual Ferrules
(Process Ports)
P A105 Carbon Steel
C S [Std.] 316 SS
AV7 ½″ Integral Tube Fitting - Swagelok® Dual Ferrules (Process
Ports)
M Monel®
H Hastelloy-C®
GC Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Isolate Valve(s) Only)
Table 2 SEAT CODE
GD Anti-Tamper Bonnet (Equalizer Valve(s) Only)
HARD SEAT CODE
GJ Bonnet Lock-Out (All Positions - Lock Not Provided)
C [Std.] Carbide Ball
GK Bonnet Lock-Out (Isolate Valve(s) Only - Lock Not Provided)
R Ceramic Ball
GL Bonnet Lock-Out (Equalizer Valve(s) Only - Lock Not
6 316 SS Ball Provided)
N K-Monel® Ball ME Slotted Instrument Flange Using Bolts over 3”
H Hastelloy-C® Ball MH Viton® O-Ring Flange Seals
SOFT SEAT CODE MU Dielectric Isolation (Flange Manifolds Only)
D Delrin Cone [Std.] M7 Required Slotting for Rosemount® 1151 Transmitters Series 6
& Above (Flange Manifolds Only)
K Kel-F® Cone
PB (2) ¼” Constant Purge Ports (Bottom) See pg. 61 for port
P PEEK® Cone locations.
T Teflon® Cone PT (2) ¼” Constant Purge Ports (Top) See pg. 61 for port
Z Tefzel Cone locations.
Table 3 STEM SEAL CODE P1 Purge or Test Connections
T [Std.] Teflon® Pressure-Core™ TC Steam Trace Block - Carbon Steel
K Teflon® Pressure-Core™ Back-up TH Hydrostatic Testing
V Viton® O-Ring VA Bracket Spacer for Flange to Flange Manifolds
J Low-Temp Pressure-Core™ VC CS Versa-Mount Bracket
P Teflon® Packed [Hard Seat Only] VS 316 SS Versa-Mount Bracket

VCH CS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount Bracket
VSH 316 SS Heavy-Duty Versa-Mount Bracket
WA CS 2-¼” Bolts for Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or 2024 with
Coplanar™ (Flange Manifolds Only)
WAW3 300 SS 2-¼” Bolts for Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or 2024 with
WAW9 316 SS 2-¼” Bolts for Rosemount® 3051C, 3095, or 2024 with
WK Paper Tag
W3 300 SS Standard Length Flange Bolts (CS Standard)
W9 316 SS Standard Length Flange Bolts (CS Standard)
X3 (2) ¼” Test Ports on Instrument Flange (Flange Manifolds
Only)

Hand Block Valve for Gauge Siphons

Gauge Siphons
DESCRIPTION
The PGI Gauge Siphon replaces the old style “Pigtail” siphon. The
siphon provides a thermal barrier, protecting your instruments from
harmful vapors. The siphon also reduces gauge whip, allowing
closer process installation. The siphon can be used as either a
freeze or steam protector when used with the proper fill fluids.
When very high heat is present, the siphon, used in conjunction with C
the PGI V-506 Grafoil Packed Hand Valve, reduces temperatures
seen at the instrument by lengthening the condensate leg.
CONNECTIONS
ITEM BODY COUPLING TUBE
INLET/OUTLET
Gauge Siphons
A7-524-C0 ½" MNPT x ½" FNPT 316 SS CS 316 SS
A7-524-C0S ½” MNPT x ½” FNPT 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS
A7-508-C0 ¾" MNPT x ¾" FNPT 316 SS CS 316 SS
A7-508-C0S ¾” MNPT x ¾” FNPT 316 SS 316 SS 316 SS
Gauge Siphons with Excess Flow Check
A7-509-C0 ½" MNPT x ½" FNPT 316 SS
Gauge Siphons with Excess Flow Check and Swivels
A7-507-C0 ½" MNPT x ½" FNPT 316 SS
Gauge Swivel
A7-530-C0 ½" MNPT x ½" FNPT 316 SS
A7-530-K0 ½" MNPT x ½" FNPT Monel
Hand Block Valve

CONNECTIONS
ITEM BODY & BONNET PACKING SEAT
INLET/OUTLET
V-506CCG ½" MNPT x ½" FNPT ASTM A105 CF Grafoil® Carbide Ball
V-506SCG ½” MNPT x ½” FNPT ASTM A479-316 SS Grafoil® Carbide Ball

Soft Seat Hand Valve

.187" & .250" Orifice V-507
FEATURES
• PGI Carbon Steel Products are Alkaline Zinc plated for corrosion
prevention.
• PGI 316 SS Products meet the requirements of NACE MR0175/ISO
15156-36.
C CONNECTIONS BODY & SEAT&
ITEM
INLET/OUTLET BONNET PACKING
.187" Orifice
V-501CDT ¼" MNPT × ¼" FNPT Carbon Steel
V-501SDT ¼” MNPT × ¼” FNPT 316 SS
V-503CDT ¼" FNPT × ¼" FNPT Carbon Steel
V-503SDT ¼" FNPT ×¼" FNPT 316 SS Delrin® Cone V-511
V-507CDT ½" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel Seat
V-507SDT ½” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS

V-509CDT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel
V-509SDT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
V-511CDT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Angle Carbon Steel
V-511SDT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT Angle 316 SS
Teflon®
V-529CDT ¾" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel Pressure-
V-529SDT ¾” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS Core® Stem
Seal
V-531CDT ½" MNPT × ¼" FNPT Carbon Steel
V-531SDT ½” MNPT × ¼” FNPT 316 SS
.250" Orifice
V2-507CDT ½" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel
V2-507SDT ½” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
V2-509CDT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel
V2-509SDT ½" FNPT ×½" FNPT 316 SS Max Pressure MAX Cv RATINGS
6,000 PSI @
V2-529CDT ¾" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel 200° F BODY STYLE
ORIFICE SIZE
V2-529SDT ¾” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS STRAIGHT ANGLE
V2-531CDT ½" MNPT × ¼" FNPT Carbon Steel .187” .83 .79
V2-531SDT ½” MNPT × ¼” FNPT 316 SS .250” 1.40

Soft Seat Hand Valve

.375" Orifice
V3-509
FEATURES
prevention.
15156-36.
• 100% Pressure Tested C
CONNECTIONS
ITEM BODY & BONNET SEAT& PACKING
INLET/OUTLET
V3-507CDT ½" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V3-507SDT ½" MNPT × ½" FNPT 316 SS
Delrin® Cone Seat
V3-509CDT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V3-509SDT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
V3-537CDT 1" MNPT × 1/2" FNPT Carbon steel
V3-537SDT 1” MNPT × 1/2” FNPT 316 SS Telfin® Pressure-Core® Stem
V3-541CDT ¾" FNPT × ¾" FNPT Carbon steel Seal
V3-541SDT ¾” FNPT × ¾” FNPT 316 SS MAX Cv RATINGS

V3-543CDT 1" FNPT × 1" FNPT Carbon steel BODY STYLE
ORIFICE SIZE
V3-543SDT 1” FNPT × 1” FNPT 316 SS STRAIGHT
V3-545CDT 1" MNPT × 1" FNPT Carbon steel .375” 3.00
Max Pressure 6,000 PSI@ 200°F
V3-545SDT 1” MNPT × 1” FNPT 316 SS
V3-547CDT ¾" MNPT × ¾" FNPT Carbon steel
V3-547SDT ¾” MNPT × ¾” FNPT 316 SS

Hard Seat Hand Valve

.187" Orifice
V-528
FEATURES
prevention.
15156-36.
C • Carbon Steel Weld End Connection Bodies are AISI 1018
CONNECTIONS BODY &
ITEM SEAT SEAL
INLET/OUTLET BONNET
V-500CCT ¼"MNPT X ¼"FNPT Carbon Steel Carbide Ball

V-500SCT ¼”MNPT X ¼”FNPT 316 SS Carbide Ball
V-502CCT ¼"FNPT X ¼"FNPT Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
V-502SCT ¼”FNPT X ¼”FNPT 316 SS Carbide Ball
Teflon® Pressure-
V-502MNT ¼”FNPT X ¼”FNPT Monel® Monel® Ball
Core® Stem Seal
V-510
V-506CCT ½"MNPT X ½"FNPT Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
V-506SCT ½”MNPT X ½”FNPT 316 SS Carbide Ball
V-506MNT ½”MNPT X ½”FNPT Monel® Monel® Ball
V-506HHT ½”MNPT X ½”FNPT Hast-C Hast-C
V-508CCT ½"FNPT X ½"FNPT Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
V-508SCT ½”FNPT X ½”FNPT 316 SS Carbide Ball
V-508MNT ½”FNPT X ½”FNPT Monel® Monel® Ball
V-510CCT ½"MNPT X ½"FNPT Angle Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
Max Pressure
V-510SCT ½”MNPT X ½”FNPT Angle 316 SS Carbide Ball 10,000 PSI @
200°F
V-528CCT ¾"MNPT X ½"FNPT Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
V-528SCT ¾”MNPT X ½”FNPT 316 SS Carbide Ball
V-530CCT ½"MNPT X ¼"FNPT Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
V-530SCT ½”MNPT X ¼”FNPT 316 SS Carbide Ball MAX Cv RATINGS
ORIFICE BODY STYLE

SIZE STRAIGHT ANGLE
.187” .53 .79

Hard Seat Hand Valve

.375" Orifice
FEATURES V3-508
prevention.
15156-36.
• Carbon Steel Weld End Connection Bodies are AISI 1018 C
CONNECTIONS
INLET/OUTLET
.375" Orifice
V3-506CCT ½" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel
V3-506SCT ½” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
Carbide Ball Seat
V3-508CCT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel
V3-508SCT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
V3-536CCT 1" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon Steel MAX Cv RATINGS
V3-536SCT 1” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS Telfon® Pressure-Core®
BODY STYLE
V3-540CCT ¾" FNPT × ¾" FNPT Carbon Steel Stem Seal
ORIFICE SIZE
STRAIGHT
V3-540SCT ¾” FNPT × ¾” FNPT 316 SS
V3-542CCT 1" FNPT × 1" FNPT Carbon Steel .375” 2.40
V3-542SCT 1” FNPT × 1” FNPT 316 SS Max Pressure 6,000 PSI

V3-544CCT 1" MNPT × 1" FNPT Carbon Steel @ 200°F
V3-544SCT 1” MNPT × 1” FNPT 316 SS

Soft Seat Multi-Port Gauge Valve

.187" & .250" Orifice
V-521
FEATURES
• PGI Carbon Steel Products are Alkaline Zinc plated for corrosion prevention.
• PGI 316 SS Products meet the requirements of NACE MR0175/ISO 15156-36.
C CONNECTIONS
INLET/OUTLET
.187" Orifice
V-521CDT ¼" FNPT × (3) ¼" FNPT Short Carbon Steel
V-521SDT ¼” FNPT × (3) ¼” FNPT Short 316 SS
Delrin® Cone Seat
V-517CDT ½" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel V-517
V-517SDT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS
V-519CDT ¾" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel
V-519SDT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS
V-573CDT ½" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Longbody Carbon Steel Teflon® Pressure-
V-573SDT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Longbody 316 SS Core® Stem Seal
V-574CDT ¾" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Longbody Carbon Steel

V-574SDT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Longbody 316 SS
.250" Orifice
V2-517CDT ½" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel
MAX Cv RATINGS
V2-517SDT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS Max Pressure 6000
V2-519CDT ¾" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel PSI @ 200°F BODY STYLE
ORIFICE SIZE
V2-519SDT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS STRAIGHT
.187” .83
.250” 1.40
Soft Seat Multi-Port Gauge Valve V3-517

.375" Orifice
FEATURES
• PGI Carbon Steel Products are Alkaline Zinc plated for corrosion prevention.
• PGI 316 SS Products meet the requirements of NACE MR0175/ISO 15156-36.
CONNECTIONS SEAT&
ITEM BODY & BONNET
INLET/OUTLET PACKING
V3-517CDT ½" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel Delrin® Cone
Seat
V3-517SDT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS
V3-519CDT ¾" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel Teflon®
MAX Cv RATINGS
Pressure-Core®
V3-519SDT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS Stem Seal BODY STYLE
ORIFICE SIZE
V3-577CDT 1" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel Max Pressure STRAIGHT
6000 PSI @
V3-577SDT 1” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS .375” 3.00
200°F

Hard Seat Multi-Port Gauge Valve

.187" Orifice
V-518
FEATURES
prevention.
15156-36.
CONNECTIONS BODY &
ITEM SEAT PACKING
INLET/OUTLET BONNET
V-516CCT ½" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
V-516SCT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS Carbide Ball
Teflon®
V-516MNT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard Monel® Monel® Ball Pressure-
V-518CCT ¾" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Standard Carbon Steel Carbide Ball Core® Stem
Seal MAX Cv RATINGS
V-518SCT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard 316 SS Carbide Ball
BODY STYLE
V-518MNT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Standard Monel® Monel® Ball ORIFICE SIZE
STRAIGHT
V-520CCT ½" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Longbody Carbon Steel Carbide Ball
.187” .53
V-520SCT ½” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Longbody 316 SS Carbide Ball Max Pressure
10,000 PSI @
V-532CCT ¾" MNPT × (3) ½" FNPT Longbody Carbon Steel Carbide Ball 200°F
V-532SCT ¾” MNPT × (3) ½” FNPT Longbody 316 SS Carbide Ball

Hard Seat Root Valve

.187" & .375" Orifice
V3-580
FEATURES
prevention.
15156-36.
C CONNECTIONS
INLET/OUTLET
.187" Orifice
V-579CCT ½" MNPT × (1) ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V-579SCT ½” MNPT × (1) ½” FNPT 316 SS
V-580CCT ½" MNPT × (2) ½" FNPT Carbon steel
Carbide Ball Seat
V-580SCT ½” MNPT × (2) ½” FNPT 316 SS
V-582CCT ¾" MNPT × (2) ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V-582SCT ¾” MNPT × (2) ½” FNPT 316 SS
V-584CCT 1" MNPT × (2) ½" FNPT Carbon steel
Teflon® Pressure-Core® Stem
V-584SCT 1” MNPT × (2) ½” FNPT 316 SS Seal
MAX Cv RATINGS
.375" Orifice BODY STYLE
ORIFICE SIZE
V3-579CCT ½" MNPT × (1) ½" FNPT Carbon steel Teflon® Pressure-Core® Stem STRAIGHT
V3-579SCT ½” MNPT × (1) ½” FNPT 316 SS Seal
.187” .53
V3-580CCT ½" MNPT × (2) ½" FNPT Carbon steel .375” 3.00
V3-580SCT ½” MNPT × (2) ½” FNPT 316 SS
V3-582CCT ¾" MNPT × (2) ½" FNPT Carbon steel
Max Pressure 6,000 PSI @ 200°F
V3-582SCT ¾” MNPT × (2) ½” FNPT 316 SS
V3-584CCT 1" MNPT × (2) ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V3-584SCT 1” MNPT × (2) ½” FNPT 316 SS
Soft Seat Block & Bleed Valve V2-904

.250" Orifice
FEATURES
prevention.
15156-36.
CONNECTIONS
INLET/OUTLET
Derlin® Cone Seat
V2-904CDT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
PTFE® Pressure-Core®
MAX Cv RATINGS
V2-904SDT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS Stem Seal Max Pressure 6,000
PSI @ 200°F BODY STYLE
ORIFICE SIZE
STRAIGHT
.250” 1.40

Hard Seat Block & Bleed Valve

.187" Orifice
FEATURES V-620
prevention.
15156-36.
CONNECTIONS
INLET/OUTLET
.187 Orifice
V-570CCT ½" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V-570SCT ½” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS V-690
Carbide Ball Seat
V-626CCT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V-626SCT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
V-572CCT ¾" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V-572SCT ¾” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS

V-612CCT ½" MNPT × ½" MNPT Carbon steel Teflon® Pressure-
Core® Stem Seal
V-612SCT ½” MNPT × ½” MNPT 316 SS
V-614CCT ½" FNPT × ½" MNPT Carbon steel
V-614SCT ½” FNPT × ½” MNPT 316 SS
V-620CCT* (2)½" FNPT × (1)½" MNPT Carbon steel
V-620SCT* (2)½” FNPT × (1)½” MNPT 316 SS
V-700SCT ½" MNPT × ½" MNPT 316 SS MAX Cv RATINGS
Double Block and Bleed BODY STYLE

V-690CCT ½" FNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel ORIFICE SIZE
Max Pressure 10,000 STRAIGHT
V-690SCT ½” FNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS PSI @ 200°F
.187” .53
V-692CCT ¾" MNPT × ½" FNPT Carbon steel
V-692SCT ¾” MNPT × ½” FNPT 316 SS
V-905CCT ¾" MNPT × ½" FNPT LongBody Carbon steel
V-905SCT ¾” MNPT × ½” FNPT LongBody 316 SS
*V-620 Bracket Mounted Block and Bleed Valve Includes mounting U-Bolt as standard
V-620 Bracket options shown at bottom of page.

Metering Valves
NS Series
DESCRIPTION
The Parker NS Series of metering valves are designed SPECIFICATIONS
to provide accurate and stable control of flow rates in Pressure Rating at all temperatures: 2000 psig (138 bar) CWP
analytical, instrumentation, and research applications. A Flow Data:
variety of connection sizes, body patterns and materials
Orifice: 0.03" (0.76mm)
of construction provide considerable application versatility.
In-line pattern: Cv = 0.039; Xт = 0.64
For higher flow rates, refer to the NM and NL Series of
C metering valves. Angle pattern: Cv = 0.042; Xт = 0.53
Stem Taper: 1°
FEATURES Turns to open: 13 +/- 1
• Precision tapered valve stem accurately controls flow Valve / Seal Temperature Ratings
• Brass or 316 SS forged body construction Nitrile Rubber: -10°F to 250°F (-23°C to 121°C)
• Panel or in-line mounting Ethylene Propylene Rubber: -40°F to 250°F (-40°C to 121°C)
• Positive handle stop prevents overtightening Neoprene Rubber: -40°F to 250°F (-40°C to 121°C)
• Angle or in-line patterns
Fluorocarbon Rubber: -10°F to 400°F (-23°C to 204°C)
• Valve stem threads not in contact with process fluid
• 100% function tested Rubber:
• Optional stem seals and handles Note: These products are not intended for use as shutoff valves.
NM/NL Series
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
The Parker NM and NL Series of metering valves provide Pressure Rating at all temperatures: 1000 psig (69 bar) CWP
higher flow rates than the NS Series of metering valves NM Specifications
and retain most of the features found in the NS Series. Flow Data:
FEATURES Orifice: 0.06" (1.5mm)
• Precisely tapered valve stem accurately controls flow In-line pattern: Cv = 0.055; Xт = 0.41
• Brass or 316 SS forged body construction Angle pattern: Cv = 0.057; Xт = 0.38
• Panel or in-line mounting
Stem Taper: 3°
Turns to open: 9 +/- 1
• Valve stem threads not in contact with process fluid
NL Specifications
• 100% function tested
Flow Data:
• Optional stem seals and handles
Orifice: 0.13" (3.3mm)
Angle pattern: Cv = 0.299; Xт = 0.60
Stem Taper: 5°
Valve / Seal Temperature Ratings
Nitrile Rubber: -10°F to 250°F (-23°C to 121°C)
Ethylene Propylene Rubber: -40°F to 250°F (-40°C to 121°C)
Neoprene Rubber: -40°F to 250°F (-40°C to 121°C)
Rubber:

Metering Valves - Continued

NM Dimensions
Item A* A* B* B* C C D D
(Inlet) Port 1 (Outlet) Port 2
inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm
⅛” Compression ⅛” Compression
2A-NML 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
A-LOK® A-LOK®
2A-NMA
A-LOK® A-LOK®
1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2 C
2F-NML ⅛” Female NPT ⅛” Female NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
2F-NMA ⅛” Female NPT ⅛” Female NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
2Z-NML 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
CPI™ CPI™
2Z-NMA 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
CPI™ CPI™
¼" Compression ¼" Compression
4A-NML 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
A-LOK® A-LOK®
¼” Compression ¼” Compression
4A-NMA 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
A-LOK® A-LOK®
4M-NML ¼" Male NPT ¼" Male NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
4M-NMA ¼” Male NPT ¼” Male NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.07 37.2
4V-NML ¼" VacuSeal ¼" VacuSeal 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.53 13.5 1.56 39.6
Inline Pattern with 1/8”
¼" Compression ¼" Compression
4Z-NML
CPI™ CPI™
1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6 Compression A-LOK End
¼” Compression ¼” Compression
Connections and Knurled
4Z-NMA 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
CPI™ CPI™ Handle
3mm 3mm
M3A-NML Compression Compression 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
A-LOK® A-LOK®
3mm 3mm
M3A-NMA Compression Compression 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
A-LOK® A-LOK®
3mm 3mm
M3Z-NML Compression Compression 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
CPI™ CPI™
3mm 3mm
M3Z-NMA Compression Compression 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
CPI™ CPI™
6mm 6mm
M6A-NML Compression Compression 1.09 27.7 1.09 27.7 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
A-LOK® A-LOK®
6mm 6mm
M6A-NMA Compression Compression 1.09 27.7 1.09 27.7 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
A-LOK® A-LOK®
6mm 6mm
M6Z-NML Compression Compression 1.09 27.7 1.09 27.7 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
CPI™ CPI™
6mm 6mm
M6Z-NMA Compression Compression 1.09 27.7 1.09 27.7 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
CPI™ CPI™


NL Series Dimensions
Item A* B* C C D
(Inlet) Port 1 (Outlet) Port 2 A* inch B* inch D mm
mm mm inch mm inch
2F-NLL ⅛” Female ⅛” Female NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
NPT
C 2F-NLA ⅛” Female
NPT
⅛” Female NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
4A-NLL ¼" ¼" Compression 1.16 29.5 1.16 29.5 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
Compression A-LOK®
A-LOK®
4A-NLA ¼” ¼” Compression 1.16 29.5 1.16 29.5 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
Compression A-LOK®
A-LOK®
4M-NLL ¼" Male NPT ¼" Male NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
4M-NLA ¼” Male NPT ¼” Male NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 1.07 37.2
4V-NLL ¼" VacuSeal ¼" VacuSeal 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.53 13.5 1.56 39.6
4Z-NLL ¼" ¼" Compression 1.16 29.5 1.16 29.5 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
Compression CPI™
CPI™
4Z-NLA ¼” ¼” Compression 1.16 29.5 1.16 29.5 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2 In-Line Patter with 1/4”
Compression CPI™ Compression A-LOK End
CPI™
Connections and Vernier
6A-NLL ⅜" ⅜" Compression 1.24 31.5 1.24 31.5 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
Compression A-LOK® Handle
A-LOK®
6Z-NLL ⅜" ⅜" Compression 1.24 31.5 1.24 31.5 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
Compression CPI™
CPI™
M6A- 6mm 6mm 1.12 28.4 1.12 28.4 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
NLL Compression Compression
A-LOK® A-LOK®
M6A- 6mm 6mm 1.15 29.2 1.15 29.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
NLA Compression Compression
A-LOK® A-LOK®
M6Z- 6mm 6mm 1.12 28.4 1.12 28.4 0.41 10.4 1.56 39.6
NLL Compression Compression
CPI™ CPI™
M6Z- 6mm 6mm 1.15 29.2 1.15 29.2 0.41 10.4 1.07 27.2
NLA Compression Compression
A-LOK® A-LOK®

Metering Valves
HR Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker HR Series Metering Valves provide the highest
degree of precision metering for moderate pressure
applications. A choice of seven precision ground, tapered
flat, non-rotating and non-rising valve stems enable
repeatable metering at flow capacities as low as 0.0004
Cv. With 15 stem turns, this valve offers the ultimate in
precision flow control. This series also features shut-off C
capability not found in most metering valves.
FEATURES
• Bubble tight shut-off
• Special fine pitch thread with 15 turn resolution is
isolated from contact with process fluids
• Non-rotating/non-rising valve stem design provides
smooth, non-reversing flow characteristics
• Seven optional valve stem tapers
• Special orifice liner assures long life
• Panel or in-line mounting
• Brass or 316 SS forged body construction Angle Pattern with Compression A-LOK End
• 100% function tested for actuation and shut-off Connections and Turns Counter Handle
• 3 handle options
• 5 different seat materials available
• High temperature and cleaned for oyxgen service
options
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating at all temperatures: 250 psig (17 bar) CWP
Flow Data*:
H0 Orifice: 0.000002 in²
H1 Orifice: 0.000083 in2
*Flow tested in accordance with ISA S75.02. Gas flow will be choked when P₁- P₂ /
P₁ = Xт .
**The Turns Counter Handle (TC) requires the HT option for use at temperatures
above 300°F (149°C).

In Line Pattern with 1/4”

Compression A-LOK End
Connections and Knurled Handle
C

Item
(Inlet) Port 1 (Outlet) Port 2 A† inch A† mm B† inch B† mm C inch C mm D inch D mm
1A-H#A 1/16” Compression 1/16” Compression 0.92 23.4 0.92 23.4 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
A-LOK® A-LOK®
1Z-H#A 1/16” Compression 1/16” Compression CPI™ 0.92 23.4 0.92 23.4 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
CPI™
2A-H#L ⅛" Compression ⅛" Compression A-LOK® 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
A-LOK®
2A-H#A ⅛” Compression ⅛” Compression A-LOK® 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
A-LOK®
2F-H#L ⅛" Female NPT ⅛" Female NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
2F-H#A ⅛” Female NPT ⅛” Female NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
2Z-H#L ⅛" Compression CPI™ ⅛" Compression CPI™ 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
2Z-H#A ⅛” Compression CPI™ ⅛” Compression CPI™ 1.03 26.2 1.03 26.2 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
4A-H#L ¼" Compression ¼" Compression A-LOK® 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
A-LOK®
4A-H#A ¼” Compression ¼” Compression A-LOK® 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
A-LOK®
4F-H#L ¼" Female NPT ¼" Female NPT 0.97 24.6 0.97 24.6 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
4F-H#A ¼” Female NPT ¼” Female NPT 0.97 24.6 0.97 24.6 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
4M-H#L ¼" Male NPT ¼" Male NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
4M-H#A ¼” Male NPT ¼” Male NPT 0.93 23.6 0.93 23.6 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
4Z-H#L ¼" Compression CPI™ ¼" Compression CPI™ 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
4Z-H#A ¼” Compression CPI™ ¼” Compression CPI™ 1.11 28.2 1.11 28.2 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
M3A-H#L 3mm Compression 3mm Compression 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
A-LOK® A-LOK®
M3A-H#A 3mm Compression 3mm Compression 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
A-LOK® A-LOK®
M3Z-H#L 3mm Compression 3mm Compression CPI™ 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
CPI™
M3Z-H#A 3mm Compression 3mm Compression CPI™ 1.00 25.4 1.00 25.4 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
CPI™
M6A-H#L 6mm Compression 6mm Compression 1.15 29.2 1.15 29.2 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
A-LOK® A-LOK®
M6A-H#A 6mm Compression 6mm Compression 1.15 29.2 1.15 29.2 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
A-LOK® A-LOK®
M6Z-H#L 6mm Compression 6mm Compression CPI™ 1.15 29.2 1.15 29.2 0.41 10.4 0.85 21.6
CPI™
M6Z-H#A 6mm Compression 6mm Compression CPI™ 1.15 29.2 1.15 29.2 0.41 10.4 0.73 18.5
CPI™
† For CPI™ and A-LOK®, dimensions are measured with nuts in the finger tight position.

Mini Hard Tip Needle Valves

100 Series
DESCRIPTION
NoShok's mini valves are small in size but deliver
maximum strength and durability. Available in zinc nickel-
plated steel, electro-polished stainless steel and brass,
these rugged mini valves are equipped with an FKM
O-ring and PTFE back-up ring below the stem threads
to protect against corrosion and galling. Stem threads C
are rolled for greater strength and ease of operation. 100
Series feature a metal-to-metal hard seat, and have a
maximum pressure of 10,000 psi for stainless steel and
steel models, and 6,000 psi for brass.
FEATURES
• Compact size valve built for maximum durability and
robust performance in the toughest applications
• 100% helium leak tested to 1 x 10-4 ml/s for guaranteed
performance and reliability
• Hard seat valves have a maximum pressure of 10,000
psi for stainless steel and steel models; 6,000 psi for
brass
• Available in zinc-nickel plated steel, electropolished
stainless steel, and brass
• FKM O-ring seal and PTFE back-up ring below the stem
threads to protect from corrosion and galling; PTFE or
Grafoil® packing optional
• All stems are 316 stainless steel
• All stem threads are rolled for strength and ease of
operation
• Patented body-to-bonnet, metal-to-metal seal is
designed to significantly increase the pressure range of
the valve (U.S. Patent 7,758,014)
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Zinc-nickel plated steel, electropolished 316 stainless steel, 360 brass
Connections 1/8" NPT, 1/4" NPT, 7/16"-20 UNF-2B, 9/16"-18 UNF-2B Male-male, Male-female, Female-female, in-line and angled configurations
Pressure ratings* Brass: 6,000 psi @ 200 °F Steel: 10,000 psi @ 200 °F Stainless steel: 10,000 psi @ 200 °F
Orifice size 0.172"
Flow coefficient CV 0.42
Stem seal & type All 316 stainless steel stems with FKM O-ring and PTFE back-up ring below the threads, PTFE or Grafoil® packing optional
Options Panel mountings, O-ring materials, handles, packings, regulating stem and stem tips
* If a packing option is chosen, maximum pressure rating is 6,000 psi.

Mini Soft Tip Needle Valves

150 Series
DESCRIPTION
NoShok's mini valves are small in size but deliver
maximum strength and durability. Available in zinc nickel-
plated steel, electro-polished stainless steel and brass,
these rugged mini valves are equipped with an FKM
O-ring and PTFE back-up ring below the stem threads
C to protect against corrosion and galling. Stem threads
are rolled for greater strength and ease of operation. 150
Series valves feature a patented Delrin non-rotating soft
tip stem. They have a maximum pressure of 6,000 psi for
stainless steel and steel models, and 3,000 psi for brass.
FEATURES
• Compact size valve built for maximum durability and
robust performance in the toughest applications
• 100% helium leak tested to 1 x 10-4 ml/s for guaranteed
performance and reliability
• Soft tip valves feature a patented Delrin® non-rotating
soft tip stem, and a back-up metal-to-metal seal (U.S.
Patent 6,820,857)
• Maximum pressure of 6,000 psi
• Available in zinc-nickel plated steel, electropolished
stainless steel, and brass
• FKM O-ring seal and PTFE back-up ring below the stem
threads to protect from corrosion and galling; PTFE
packing optional
• All stems are 316 stainless steel
• All stem threads are rolled for strength and ease of
operation
• Patented body-to-bonnet, metal-to-metal seal is
designed to significantly increase the pressure range of
the valve (U.S. Patent 7,758,014)
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials Zinc-nickel plated steel, electropolished 316 stainless steel, 360 brass
Connections 1/8" NPT, 1/4" NPT, 7/16"-20 UNF-2B, 9/16"-18 UNF-2B Male-male, Male-female, Female-female, in-line and angled configurations
Pressure ratings 6,000 psi @ 200 °F
Orifice size 0.172"
Flow coefficient CV 0.42
Stem seal & type All 316 stainless steel stems with FKM O-ring and PTFE back-up ring below the threads, PTFE packing optional
Options Panel mountings, O-ring materials, handles, packings, regulating stem and stem tips

Needle Valves
V Series - Integral Bonnet, 5,000 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker V Series Needle Valves are designed for positive
leak tight shut-off and regulation of fluids in process,
power, and instrumentation applications. With a wide
variety of port sizes and styles, temperature capabilities
ranging from -65°F to 450°F (-54°C to 232°C) and
pressures to 5000 psig (345 bar), V Series Needle C
Valves provide the user with the utmost in flexibility when
designing miniaturized tubing or piping systems.
FEATURES
• Choice of three stem types:
R-Stem – All metal, blunt stem tip
N-Stem – All metal, tapered needle stem tip
K-Stem – PCTFE stem tip
• Differential hardness between the strain hardened stem
and cold formed body threads provides improved cycle
life
• Choice of PTFE packing or elastomeric O-ring stem In-Line Pattern (Angle also Available)
seals
• 316 Stainless Steel, Steel, Brass and Monel® Alloy 400
construction
• Inline and angle patterns
• Panel mountable
• Optional color coded handles
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Ratings:
316 Stainless Steel: 5000 psig (345 bar) CWP
Brass, Steel and Monel® Alloy 400: 3000 psig (207 bar) CWP
Orifice: 0.078" to 0.312" (2.0mm to 7.9mm)
Cv: 0.12 to 1.90
Port size: ⅛" to ¾" (3mm to 12mm)
Temperature Ratings:
Stainless Steel and Monel® Alloy 400: -65°F to 450°F (-54°C to 232°C)
Brass: -65°F to 400°F (-54°C to 204°C)
Steel: -20°F to 350°F (-29°C to 177°C)
PTFE Packing: -65°F to 450°F (-54°C to 232°C)
PCTFE Stem Tip: -65°F to 350°F (-54°C to 177°C)
Nitrile Rubber Stem Seal: -30°F to 250°F (-34°C to 121°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber Stem Seal: -15°F to 400°F (-26°C to 204°C)
Ethylene Propylene Rubber Stem Seal: -70°F to 275°F (-57°C to 135°C)
Note: When combining body, seat and seal materials, the most restrictive
temperature rating becomes the limiting factor on temperature range.

Needle Valves
U Series - Union Bonnet, 6,000 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker U Series Union Bonnet Valves have been
engineered for use at pressures up to 6,000 (414 bar) and
temperatures as high as 1,200°F (649°C). A non-rotating
lower stem helps to extend packing life by removing
rotation from the packing area. Stem packing below
C the threads isolates the thread lubricant from the flow,
ensuring adequate lubrication regardless of the media.
FEATURES
• Union bonnet design ensures high integrity seal under
severe service applications
• Packing below the power threads protects thread
lubricants from media and isolates the lubricants from In-Line Pattern
the media
• Dust seal in the packing nut protects stem threads from
external contamination
• Stem swivel above the packing eliminates entrapment
area and increases packing life
• Choice of Grafoil® or PTFE packing
• Choice of Regulating or Blunt stem types. Blunt stem
type helps combat wire draw which may occur when two
phase flow is present (i.e. steam service)
• 316 stainless steel construction
• Panel mountable
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating: 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
Temperature Rating: Angle Pattern
PTFE packing: -65°F to 450°F (-54°C to 232°C)
Grafoil® packing: -65°F to 700°F (-54°C to 371°C)
Grafoil® packing with HT option: -65°F to 1200°F (-54°C to 649°C)
Orifice: .177” to .437” (4.5mm to 11.1mm)
Cv: .53 to 3.55

Needle Valves
NP6 Series - Screwed Bonnet, 6,000 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker NP6 Needle Valves are designed with packing
below the stem threads and a two-piece stem. The
packing below the threads protects the flow stream from
thread lubricant contamination or washout and also
protects the stem threads from potential damaging effects
of the media. The two-piece stem produces a non-rotating C
lower stem for superior, repeatable sealing and reduced
packing wear.
FEATURES
• Packing below power threads protects thread lubricants
from media and isolates the media from the lubricant for
severe service applications In-Line Pattern
• O-ring dust seal in bonnet protects stem threads from
external contamination
• Choice of two non-rotating stem types:
• Non rotating lower stem extends packing and valve life
• Panel mountable
• Optional color coded handles
Angle Pattern
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating: 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
Temperature Rating:
PCTFE: -65°F to 350°F (-54°C to 177°C)
Nitrile Rubber: -30°F to 250°F (-34°C to 121°C)
Ethylene Propylene -70°F to 275°F (-57°C to 135°C)
Rubber:
Grafoil®: -70°F to 700°F (-57°C to 371°C)

Needle Valves
SN6 Series - Integral Bonnet, 6,000 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker compact SN6 Needle Valves provide shut-off and
coarse regulation of liquids and gases utilized in process
and instrumentation applications. These rugged valves
are manufactured from stainless steel barstock and are
integral bonnet designs with packing above the stem
C threads.
FEATURES
• Integral bonnet design
• Choice of two stem types:
In-Line Pattern
• Choice of PTFE or Grafoil® packing
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating:
R Stem: 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
K Stem: 3000 psig (207 bar) CWP
Temperature Rating:
Grafoil® (G) Packing: -65°F to 700°F (-54°C to 371°C)
Angle Pattern

Needle Valves
PV Series - Rising Stem Plug Valve, 6,000 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker Rising Plug and Gauge/Root Valves are available
with a variety of seat and seal materials. They are screwed
bonnet designs featuring bonnet lock plates. The PV and
PVG Series of valves provide a straight-through flow path
in two orifice sizes. The valves utilize a non-wetted upper
stem and a non-rotating lower stem in conjunction with a C
tapered seat for positive shut-off and long seat life, even in
particulated media.
FEATURES
• Roddable, straight through flow path
• Bonnet lock plate resists accidental bonnet
disengagement
• Stem dust seal helps protect stem from external
contamination Without Gauge Port With Gauge Port
• Inlet side optional outlet – PVG ¼" Female NPT – PVG
½" Female NPT
• Rugged 316 stainless steel barstock construction
• Panel mounting option
• Gauge port option
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating:
Acetal Seat (DE): 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
PEEK Seat (PK): 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP
PCTFE Seat (K): 2200 psig (152 bar) CWP
PFA Seat (PFA): 750 psig (52 bar) CWP
Temperature Rating:
Seats
Acetal: -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C)
PEEK and PFA: -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C)
PCTFE: -20°F to 200°F (-29°C to 93°C)
Stem Seals
Nitrile Rubber (BN), -20°F to 250°F (-29°C to 121°C)
Silicone Rubber (SI),
and Ethylene Propylene
Rubber (EPR):
Fluorocarbon Rubber (V): -20°F to 400°F (-29°C to 204°C)
Highly Fluorinated -20°F to 200°F (-29°C to 93°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber (KZ):
Flow Data
PV4: Cv = 0.95; Xτ = 0.43; Orifice = 0.188” (4.8mm)
PV8: Cv = 2.01; Xτ = 0.33; Orifice = 0.250” (6.4mm)
* Tested in accordance with ISA S75.02. Gas flow will be choked when P₁ - P₂ / P₁
= Xт.
† For CPI™ and A-LOK®, dimensions are measured with nuts in the finger tight
position.

Needle Valves
MPN Series - 20,000 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker MPN series valves are designed for multi-turn
control of media regulation and shutoff up to 20,000 psi.
Additional packing materials are available for application
temperatures from -300° to +800° F. Standard critical
service design features, such as the packing below the
C thread and the non-rotating lower stem ensure longer
valve life in rugged applications.
Two Way Inline
Inlet/Outlet
Pattern Type Valve Model Connection PSI Range
Orifice Size Two Way Angle
Range
Size Range*
Two Way Inline L Model 1/8” - 1” 15,000 - 10,000 0.125” - .563”
Two Way Angle - MPI A Model 1/8” - 1” 15,000 - 10,000 0.125” - 0.688”
Connection
Three Way/Two Pressure XI Model 1/8” - 1” 15,000 - 10,000 0.125” - 0.688”
Connections
Three Way/One Pressure XO Model 1/8” - 1” 15,000 - 10,000 0.125” - 0.688”
Connection
Three Way/Two Stem XD Model 1/8” - 1” 15,000 - 10,000 0.125” - 0.688”
Connection
Two Way Angle Valves AR Model 1/8” - 1” 15,000 - 10,000 0.125” - 0.688”
(Replacable Seat)
Over Critical L-OC Model 1/8” - 1” 10,000 0.125” - .687”
Gauge GV Model 9/16” High Pressure Male Connection: 30,000

Tube Sub Connection: 15,000
Bleed BV Model 9/16” High Pressure Female Connection: 30,000
MPI Connection: 15,000
* 1/8” available with Female NPT (Female Pipe) Connection Only

**Other non standard connections available Three Way/Two Stem
Connection
End Connections
F Female NPT MP7 Parker MPI™

To 15,000 PSI (Medium Pressure Inverted)
To 15,000 PSI
MF Cone & Thread

(Medium Pressure Female) Gauge Valve
Bleed Valve
To 20,000 PSI

Relief Valves
RH4 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker RH4 Relief Valves are designed such that when
the upstream pressure exceeds the closing force exerted
by the spring, the lower stem opens, permitting flow
through the valve. Flow through the valve increases
proportionately to the increase in upstream pressure.
C
FEATURES
• Pressure settings are externally adjustable while the
valve is in operation. Eight different spring ranges
provide greater system sensitivity and enhanced
performance.
• Captured molded seat design is blow-out and chip
resistant.
• Manual Override option with positive stem retraction is
available for pressures up to 1500 psig (103 bar).This
option permits the user to relieve upstream pressure
while maintaining the predetermined cracking pressure.
• Color coded springs and labels indicate spring cracking
range.
• Lock wire feature secures a given pressure setting.
SPECIFICATIONS Flow Calculations

Working Pressure: Up to 6000 psig (414 bar) CWP. Inlet Pressure Drop Water Air
Up to 8000 psig (552 bar) during relief with no Pressure DP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C
internal seal damage.
psig bar psig bar gpm m³/hr SCFM m³/hr
Cracking Pressure: Eight springs, from 50 psig to 6000 psig in the
1 0.1 0.4 0.1 4.3 7.0
following ranges
100 7 10 0.7 1.3 0.3 13.2 21.0
50-350 psig (3.4-24.1 bar) 50 3.5 2.9 0.7 24.2 37.3
350-750 psig (24.1-51.7 bar) 10 0.7 1.3 0.3 40.9 69.0
1000 69 100 6.9 4.1 0.9 123.5 208.4
750-1500 psig (51.7-103.4 bar) 500 34.5 9.2 2.1 219.1 368.6
1500-2250 psig (103.4-155.1 bar) 100 6.9 4.1 0.9 220.1 373.5
2250-3000 psig (155.1-206.8 bar) 3000 207 1000 69.0 13.0 2.9 590.8 1002.4
1500 103.4 15.9 3.6 652.1 1105.7
3000-4000 psig (206.8-275.8 bar)
1000 69.0 13.0 2.9 916.8 1556.2
4000-5000 psig (275.8-344.7 bar) 6000 413 2000 137.9 18.3 4.2 1179.7 2001.3
5000-6000 psig (344.7-413.7 bar) 3000 206.8 22.5 5.1 1301.6 2207.0
Temperature Rating:
Nitrile Rubber -30°F to +225°F (-34°C to +107°C)
Highly Fluorinated -20°F to +200°F (-29°C to +93°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber
Ethylene Propylene -70°F to +275°F (-57°C to +135°C)
Rubber

Relief Valves
RL4 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker RL4 Relief Valves are designed such that when the
upstream pressure exceeds the closing force exerted by
the spring, the lower stem opens, permitting flow through
the valve. Flow hrough the valve increases proportionately
to the increase in upstream pressure.
C
FEATURES
• Pressure settings are externally adjustable while the
valve is in operation. Seven different spring ranges
provide greater system sensitivity and enhanced
performance.
• Manual override option with positive stem retraction is
available for the full working pressures range.This option
permits the user to relieve upstream pressure while
maintaining the predetermined cracking pressure.
• Color coded springs and labels indicate spring cracking
range.
• Back pressure has minimum effect on cracking pressure.
• Lock wire feature secures a given pressure setting.
SPECIFICATIONS Flow Calculations

Working pressure: Up to 400 psig (28 bar) CWP Inlet Water Air
Up to 600 psig (41 bar) during relief with no Pressure Drop DP
Pressure @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C
internal seal damage.
psig bar psig bar gpm m³/hr SCFM m³/hr
Cracking pressure: Seven springs with the following ranges
1 0.1 0.8 0.2 8.0 12.7
10-25 psig (0.7-1.7 bar) 100 6.9 10 0.7 2.4 0.5 24.2 38.2
25-50 psig (1.7-3.4 bar) 50 3.4 5.3 1.2 44.7 68.2
50-100 psig (3.4-6.9 bar) 10 0.7 2.4 0.5 33.8 55.4

200 13.8 50 3.4 5.3 1.2 68.7 111.2
100-150 psig (6.9-10.3 bar) 100 6.9 7.5 1.7 85.0 136.8
150-225 psig (10.3-15.5 bar) 100 6.9 7.5 1.7 112.2 184.9
300 20.7 150 10.3 9.2 2.1 125.2 205.0
225-400 psig (15.5-27.6 bar) 200 13.8 10.6 2.4 130.4 212.2
10-225 psig (0.7-15.5 bar) 150 10.3 9.2 2.1 153.9 255.1
400 27.6 200 13.8 10.6 2.4 165.4 273.6
Temperature Rating:
250 17.2 11.9 2.7 171.1 281.9
Nitrile Rubber -30°F to 225°F (-34°C to 107°C)
Highly Fluorinated -20°F to 200°F (-29°C to 93°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber
Ethylene Propylene Rubber -70°F to 275°F (-57°C to 135°C)
Fluorocarbon Rubber -10°F to 400°F (-23°C to 204°C)
Neoprene Rubber -45°F to 250°F (-43°C to 121°C)

Rotary Plug Valves

PR series
DESCRIPTION
Parker PR Series Plug Valves provide positive leak
tight shut-off, high flow capacity, and quick quarter-turn
operation in a compact attractive package. The patented
blow-out resistant seat design offers reliable sealing
technology at all operating pressures. In addition to on-off
actuation, the plug design allows forward flow throttling. C
A selection of valve seat and seal materials may be
chosen for media compatibility and performance over
a broad range of temperatures. The pressure balanced
atmospheric seals are backed by PTFE rings to enhance
their performance and increase cycle life.
• Patented blow-out resistant seat design Normal Flow Direction: 3000 psig (207 bar) CWP
• Pressures up to 3,000 psig (207 bar) CWP Reverse Flow Direction: 150 psig (10 bar)
• Quarter-turn operation Downstream Vent Option: 150 psig (10 bar)
• Reliable simple design
• Straight-through flow
• Stainless steel and brass construction Flow Calculations with 1000 psig Inlet Pressure
• Nitrile, ethylene propylene, fluorocarbon, and highly
Pressure Drop Water Air
fluorinated fluorocarbon rubber seats and seals Valve Max. ΔP @ 60°F (16°C) @ 60°F (16°C)
• PTFE back-up rings on atmospheric seals Series Cv
psig bar gpm m³/hr scfm m³/hr
• Low operating torque
10 0.7 3.9 0.9 123.1 209.6
• Minimum pressure drop PR4 1.24 50 3.4 8.8 2.0 265.9 446.3
• Throttling capability 100 6.9 12.4 2.8 359.6 607.0
• Positive handle stops 10 0.7 10.1 2.3 315.7 533.5
• Color coded fracture resistant nylon handles with PR6 3.19 50 3.4 22.6 5.1 672.3 1128.2
100 6.9 31.9 7.2 891.6 1504.1
directional flow indication
• Easy to service
• Options include lock-out devices, downstream venting,
and both stainless steel and T-bar handles

Manual Toggle Valves

VQ Series - 600 PSI Maximum
DESCRIPTION
Parker VQ Series Toggle Valves are the right combination
of performance and value for manual or pneumatic
on-off control in moderate pressure and temperature
applications. The manual version employs a toggle handle
for quick action at pressures up to 300 psig (21 bar).
C Compact double acting, normally closed, and normally
open pneumatically actuated versions of this valve are
ideal for automatic control at pressures up to 600 psig (41
bar).
FEATURES
• Quick acting
• Available with CPI™, A-LOK®, male and female NPT
end connections
• Panel mountable
• Color-coded handles
• 316 stainless steel and brass body construction
• Stem seal materials –
Fluorocarbon Rubber
Nitrile Rubber
Ethylene Propylene Rubber
Highly Fluorinated Fluorocarbon Rubber
• Optional handle positioners and anti-lock handles
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating at All Temperatures: 300 psig (21 bar) CWP
PTFE Stem Tip: -20°F to 200°F (-29°C to 93°C)

Actuated Toggle Valves

Actuated Valve - 600 PSI Maximum
FEATURES
• Available in normally open, normally closed, and double
acting models
• Available with CPI™, A-LOK®, male and female NPT
end connections
• Mounting bracket standard C
• 316 stainless steel and brass body construction
• Stem seal materials -
Fluorocarbon Rubber
Nitrile Rubber
Ethylene Propylene Rubber
Highly Fluorinated Fluorocarbon Rubber
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Rating at All Temperatures:
Size VQ4 Normally Closed: 600 psig (41 bar) CWP
Size VQ6 Normally Closed: 500 psig (35 bar) CWP
Normally Open: 450 psig (31 bar) CWP
Double Acting: 450 psig (31 bar) CWP
PTFE Stem Tip: -20°F to 200°F (-29°C to 93°C)
Normally Open (11AO) Normally Closed (11AC) Double Acting (11AD)

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • Instrument Tubing & Hose
Metal Tubing
FEATURES
• Stainless (316/L, 317/L, 304/L) to Exotic Materials, including Monel and 2507
Super Duplex
• Seamless or welded
• ¹/16 in to 2 in O.D.
• 0.10 in to 0.25 wall
• Domestic or imported
C Tubing Material General Application

Recommended
Temperature Range
Stainless Steel High Pressure, High Temperature, Generally Corrosive -425°F to 1,200°F¹
(Type 316) Media (-255°C to 605°C)
Carbon Steel High Pressure, High Temperature Oil, Air, Some Specialty -20°F to 800°F²
Chemicals (-29°C to 425°C)
Copper Low Temperature, Low Pressure Water, Oil, Air -40°F to 400°F
(-40°C to 205°C)
Aluminum Low Temperature, Low Pressure Water, Oil, Air, Some -40°F to 400°F
Specialty Chemicals (-40°C to 205°C)
Monel® 400 Recommended for Sour Gas Applications Well Suited for -325°F to 800°F
Marine and General Chemical Processing Applications (-198°C to 425°C)
Hastelloy® C-276 Excellent Corrosion Resistance to Both Oxidizing and -325°F to 1000°F
Reducing Media and Excellent Resistance to Localized (-198°C to 535°C)
Corrosion Attack
Carpenter® 20 Applications Requiring Resistance to Stress Corrosion -325°F to 800°F
Cracking in Extreme Conditions (-198°C to 425°C)
Inconel® Alloy 600 Recommended for High Temperature Applications with -205°F to 1200°F
Generally Corrosive Media (-130°C to 650°C)
Titanium Resistant to Many Natural Environments such as Sea -75°F to 600°F
Water, Body Fluids and Salt Solutions (-59°C to 315°C)
NOTE: Hastelloy® is a registered trademark of Haynes International. Inconel®, and Monel® are registered
trademarks of Special Metals Corporation.Carpenter® is a registered trademark of CRS Holdings Inc.
Max. Recommended
Material Type ASTM Tubing Specifications Condition
Hardness
Stainless Steel 304, 316, 316L ASTM-A-269, A-249, A-213, Fully Annealed 90 Rb
A632
Copper K or L ASTM-B75 B68, B88 (K or L)* Soft Annealed 60 Max. Rockwell
Temper 15T
Carbon Steel 1010 SAE-J524b, J525b Fully Annealed 72 Rb
ASTM-A-179
Aluminum Alloy 6061 ASTM B-210 T6 Temper 56 Rb
Monel® 400 400 ASTM B-165 Fully Annealed 75 Rb
Hastelloy® C-276 ASTM-B-622, B-626 Fully Annealed 90 Rb
C-276
Inconel® Alloy 600 ASTM B-167 Fully Annealed 90 Rb
600
Carpenter® 20 20CB-3 ASTM B-468 Fully Annealed 90 Rb
Titanium Commercially ASTM B-338 Fully Annealed 99 Rb 200 Brinell
Pure Grade 2 Typical

Metal Tubing - Continued

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
Ratings in gray not suitable for gas service
316 or 304 Stainless Steel (Seamless)

Tube Wall Thickness
O.D.
0.010 0.012 0.014 0.016 0.020 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120 0.134 0.156 0.188
Size
¹⁄₁₆ 5600 6900 8200 9500 12100 16800
⅛ 8600 10900 C
³⁄₁₆ 5500 7000 10300
¼ 4000 5100 7500 10300
⁵⁄₁₆ 4100 5900 8100
⅜ 3300 4800 6600
½ 2600 3700 5100 6700
⅝ 3000 4000 5200 6100
¾ 2400 3300 4300 5000 5800
⅞ 2100 2800 3600 4200 4900
1 2400 3200 3700 4200 4700
1-¼ 2500 2900 3300 3700 4100 4900
1-½ 2400 2700 3000 3400 4000 4500
2 2000 2200 2500 2900 3200
316 or 304 Stainless Steel (Welded)

Tube Wall Thickness
O.D.
Size 0.010 0.012 0.014 0.016 0.020 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120 0.134 0.156 0.188
¹⁄₁₆ 4800 5900 7000 8100 10300 14300
⅛ 7300 9300
³⁄₁₆ 4700 6000 8700
¼ 3400 4400 6400 8700
⁵⁄₁₆ 3400 5000 6900
⅜ 2800 4100 5600
½ 2200 3200 4300 5700
⅝ 2500 3400 4500 5200
¾ 2100 2800 3700 4200 4900
⅞ 1800 2400 3100 3600 4200
1 2100 2700 3100 3600 4000
1-¼ 2100 2400 2800 3100 3500 4200
1-½ 2000 2300 2600 2900 3400 4200

2 1700 1900 2100 2500 3000
• All working pressures have been calculated using the maximum allowable stress levels in accordance with ASME/ANSI B31.3, Chemical Plant and
Petroleum Refinery Piping or ASME/ANSI B31.1 Power Piping.
• All calculations are based on maximum outside diameter and minimum wall thickness.
• All working pressures are at ambient (72°F) temperature.

Metal Tubing - Continued

Maximum Allowable Working Pressure
Ratings in gray not suitable for gas service
Carbon Steel (Seamless) Aluminum (Seamless)

Tube Wall Thickness Tube Wall Thickness
O.D. O.D.
Size 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120 0.134 0.148 0.165 0.180 Size 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095
⅛ 8100 10300 ⅛ 8700

C ³⁄₁₆ 5200 6700 9700 ³⁄₁₆ 5600 8100
¼ 3800 4900 7100 9700 ¼ 4100 5900
⁵⁄₁₆ 3800 5500 7700 ⁵⁄₁₆ 3200 4600
⅜ 3100 4500 6200
⅜ 2600 3800
½ 2300 3300 4500 6000
½ 1900 2800 3800
⅝ 1800 2600 3500 4600 5400
⅝ 1500 2200 2900
¾ 2200 2900 3800 4400 5100
¾ 1800 2400 3200
⅞ 1800 2500 3200 3700 4300
⅞ 1500 2100 2700
1 1600 2100 2800 3200 3700 4100
1 1300 1800 2300 2700
1-¼ 1700 2200 2500 2900 3200 3700 3800
1-½ 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000 3400 3800 4000
2 1600 1800 2000 2200 2500 2800 3000
Copper (Seamless) Monel 400 (Seamless)

Tube Wall Thickness
Tube Wall Thickness
O.D. O.D.
0.010 .020 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120
Size 0.010 0.020 0.028 0.035 0.049 0.065 0.083 0.095 0.109 0.120 Size
¹⁄₁₆ 1700 3800 5400 ¹⁄₁₆ 5500 11800 16300
⅛ 2800 3600 ⅛ 8100 10400
1800 2300 3500

³⁄₁₆ 5100 6600 9600
³⁄₁₆
¼ 3800 4800 7000 9600
¼ 1300 1700 2600 3500
⁵⁄₁₆ 3800 5500 7500
⁵⁄₁₆ 1300 2000 2800
⅜ 3100 4500 6100
⅜ 1100 1600 2300
½ 2300 3300 4500 5900
½ 800 1200 1600 2200
⅝ 2700 3700 4900 5600
⅝ 900 1300 1700 2000
¾ 2300 3100 4000 4600 5400
¾ 800 1000 1400 1600 1900 1 2300 2900 3400 3900 4400
⅞ 600 900 1100 1300 1600
1 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1500
1-⅛ 500 700 900 1000 1200 1300
1-¼ 800 900 1100 1200
1-½ 650 750 850 950
• All working pressures have been calculated using the maximum allowable stress levels in accordance with ASME/ANSI B31.3, Chemical Plant and
Petroleum Refinery Piping or ASME/ANSI B31.1 Power Piping.
• All calculations are based on maximum outside diameter and minimum wall thickness.
• All working pressures are at ambient (72°F) temperature.

Metal Tube Products Plastic Tube Products

MJ – Metal Tube Jacket PJ - Plastic Tube Jacket
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION Multiple plastic tubing bundled together and jacketed with C
Single metal tubing jacketed with thermoplastic protective thermoplastic protective cover.
cover.
PA - Plastic Tubes Armored
Multiple metal tubing bundled together and jacketed with

thermoplastic protective cover.
MA - Metal Armored
DESCRIPTION
Plastic tubes covered with a galvanized steel interlocked
armor for crush resistance.
PAJ - Plastic Tubes Armored and

DESCRIPTION Jacketed
Metal tubes covered with a galvanized steel interlocked
armor for crush resistance.
MAJ - Metal Armor Jacketed
DESCRIPTION
Plastic tubes covered with a galvanized steel interlocked
armor and jacketed, for crush resistance and corrosion
protection.
DESCRIPTION
Metal tubes covered with a galvanized steel interlocked
armor and jacketed, for crush resistance and corrosion
protection.

Steam & Electric Trace Products

TT - Temptube® SH - Self Regulating High Temperature
Heated Bundles
DESCRIPTION
Insulated tubing products for hot-fluid where personnel
C protection and steam conveyance take place.
DESCRIPTION
Insulated and heated tubes with a self-regulating cable
LT - Light Trace for freeze protection and high temperature maintenance
applications capable for withstanding steam blowdown.
CS – Continuous Steam Purge

Bundles IS – Intermittent Steam Purge
Bundles
DESCRIPTION
Insulated process tubes with an insulated tracer tube for
keeping lines warm or lightly traced for low temperature
maintenance.
HT - Heavy Trace DESCRIPTION

High temperature steam purge bundles perfect for DP-
differential pressure measurement where tubes will
be exposed to high pressure steam continuously or
intermittently.
AB - Analyzer Heated Bundles

DESCRIPTION
Insulated process tubes with a non-insulated tracer tube
for keeping lines traced for high-temperature maintenance.
SL - Self-Regulating Low Temperature DESCRIPTION

Heated Bundles High temperature maintenance bundles with integral probe
electrical and thermocouple/RTD sensors designed into
the product.
PS - Analyzer Unheated Probe Support

Bundles
DESCRIPTION
Insulated and heated tubes with a self-regulating
heating cable for freeze protection and low temperature DESCRIPTION
maintenance applications. Probe support bundles within any combination of tubes
and wires, jacketed together in long lengths to support
probe calibration and electrical needs. Designed to meet
system needs.

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • Hose
Braided Metal Hose

DESCRIPTION
Parflex metal hose assemblies are designed for
applications where chemicals and temperature extremes,
either from media or atmosphere, are present. Factory
welded and ready to install, these Parflex metal hose
assemblies are leak-free, full vacuum hose solutions.
Parflex braided metal hose comes is available in 3
different versions: the General Purpose 9A Series, Ultra
Flexible 9M Series and High Pressure 9H Series. C
FEATURES
• Excellent chemical resistance
• Operates in high temperatures
• Sizes ¼” I.D. up to 6” I.D. (for sizes over 2” I.D., contact
Customer Service)
• Hydroformed design yields a uniform wall thickness,
promoting even distribution of stress during flexing and
reduces concentrated residual stress
• Full Vacuum - Maintains its shape under full vacuum,
other hose types collapse
• Fire safety – Maintains its integrity up to 1200°F
• Zero permeation
• Leak-free fitting weld connection

Braided Metal Hose - Continued

General Purpose Metal Hose -9A Series
FEATURES
• Hydroforming process maintains a more consistent tube wall thickness throughout the
hose and maintains a smoother finish than competitive mechanical forming methods
• The brightly annealed tube material used in hydroforming minimizes the risk of
Corrosion Crevice Cracking (CCR) failure and increases chemical resistance
• High percentage of braid coverage yields better cycle life and protection against tube
damage
C
SPECIFICATIONS
Tube: 300 series SS, Annular profile
Reinforcement: 300 series SS braid: 0, 1 or 2 layers
Temperature Range: -380°F to +1200°F (-228°C to +648°C)
For carbon steel fittings: -70°F to +900°F (-57°C to +482°C)
Working Pressure: Vacuum (30in/Hg) to 2700 psi depending on assembly specifications
9A General Purpose Hose

Metal Hose Size and Performance Specifications
Inside Number Outside Min. Bend Working Burst Weight
Diameter of Braids Diameter Radius Pressure Pressure per Foot
(in.) (#) (in.) (in.) (psi) (psi) (lbs.)
¼ 0 0.41 4.5 90 0.04
¼ 1 0.47 4.5 1800 7233 0.11
¼ 2 0.53 4.5 2700 9100 0.18
⅜ 0 0.65 5.0 70 0.10
⅜ 1 0.71 5.0 1558 6230 0.20
⅜ 2 0.77 5.0 2336 9345 0.30
½ 0 0.77 5.5 70 0.11
½ 1 0.83 5.5 1186 4743 0.22
½ 2 0.89 5.5 1779 7115 0.33
⅝ 0 0.96 7.0 57 0.17
⅝ 1 1.02 7.0 1205 4820 0.33
⅝ 2 1.08 7.0 1808 7230 0.49
¾ 0 1.16 8.0 43 0.19
¾ 1 1.22 8.0 898 3591 0.37
¾ 2 1.28 8.0 1347 5387 0.55
1 0 1.47 9.0 43 0.26
1 1 1.53 9.0 718 2872 0.50
1 2 1.59 9.0 1077 4308 0.74
1-¼ 0 1.75 10.0 43 0.29
1-¼ 1 1.83 10.0 645 2581 0.61
1-¼ 2 1.91 10.0 968 3872 0.93
1-½ 0 2.08 11.0 28 0.47
1-½ 1 2.16 11.0 531 2125 0.85
1-½ 2 2.24 11.0 797 3188 1.23
2 0 2.61 13.0 14 0.59
2 1 2.69 13.0 449 1797 1.11
2 2 2.77 13.0 674 2696 1.63
2-½ - 6 Contact Rawson for assistance.


Ultra Flexible Metal Hose - 9M Series
FEATURES
• Compressed corrugations for increased flexibility
• Hydroforming process maintains a more consistent tube wall thickness throughout the
hose and maintains a smoother finish than competitive mechanical forming methods
• The brightly annealed tube material used in hydroforming minimizes the risk of Corrosion
Crevice Cracking (CCR) failure and increases chemical resistance
damage C
SPECIFICATIONS
Tube: 300 series SS, Annular profile
Reinforcement: 300 series SS braid: 0, 1 or 2 layers
9M Flexible Metal Hose

¼ 0 0.42 3.7 90 0.07
¼ 1 0.48 3.7 1800 7233 0.14
¼ 2 0.54 3.7 2700 9100 0.21
⅜ 0 0.65 4.0 70 0.20
⅜ 1 0.71 4.0 1558 6230 0.30
⅜ 2 0.77 4.0 2336 9345 0.40
½ 0 0.77 4.4 70 0.22
½ 1 0.83 4.4 1186 4743 0.33
½ 2 0.89 4.4 1779 7115 0.44
⅝ 0 0.96 5.6 57 0.31
⅝ 1 1.02 5.6 1205 4820 0.47
⅝ 2 1.08 5.6 1808 7230 0.63
¾ 0 1.16 6.4 43 0.33
¾ 1 1.22 6.4 898 3591 0.51
¾ 2 1.28 6.4 1347 5387 0.69

1 0 1.47 7.1 43 0.45
1 1 1.53 7.1 718 2872 0.69
1 2 1.63 7.1 1077 4308 0.93
1-¼ 0 1.75 7.9 43 0.56
1-¼ 1 1.83 7.9 645 2581 0.88
1-¼ 2 1.91 7.9 968 3872 1.20
1-½ 0 2.08 8.7 28 0.82
1-½ 1 2.16 8.7 531 2125 1.20
1-½ 2 2.24 8.7 797 3188 1.58
2 0 2.61 10.3 14 0.95
2 1 2.69 10.3 449 1797 1.47
2 2 2.77 10.3 674 2696 1.99
2-½ - 6 Contact Rawson Service for assistance.


High Pressure Metal Hose - 9H Series
FEATURES
• Specially designed to maintain extreme pressure and flexibility
• Helical construction is self-draining
damage
SPECIFICATIONS
C Tube: 316 SS, Helical Profile
Reinforcement: 304 SS Braid - 1 or 2 layers
9H High Pressure Metal Hose


¼ 1 0.52 5.0 4600 18400 0.21

¼ 2 0.62 5.0 5800 23200 0.32
⁵⁄₁₆ 1 0.62 5.1 4000 16000 0.29
⁵⁄₁₆ 2 0.74 5.1 4800 19200 0.45
⅜ 1 0.70 5.5 3800 15200 0.36
⅜ 2 0.82 5.5 4000 16000 0.57
½ 1 0.82 5.7 2600 10400 0.43
½ 2 0.94 5.7 3700 14800 0.69
⅝ 1 0.97 6.1 2400 9600 0.51
⅝ 2 1.09 6.1 2700 10800 0.82

¾ 1 1.19 6.5 2000 8000 0.64
¾ 2 1.31 6.5 2200 8800 1.03
1 1 1.39 7.9 1500 6000 0.78
1 2 1.51 7.9 2000 8000 1.25
1-¼ 1 1.75 9.4 1100 4400 1.15
1-¼ 2 1.87 9.4 1600 6400 1.70
2 1 2.07 12.2 1000 4000 1.45
2 2 2.19 12.2 1500 6000 2.16


End Connection Types
*06-Female JIC swivel connections are available with and without the back-up hex. End users must specify fitting preference at the time of quote.


HOW TO ORDER

XX X XX XX XX XX X X
Table 1 Hose Series Table 4 First End Size

9A General Purpose -4 ¼
9M Flexible -6 ⅜
C 9H High Pressure -8 ½
Table 2 Code # -10 ⅝
0 No braid, 321 SS Tube -12 ¾
1 304 SS Single braid, 321 SS Tube -16 1
2 304 SS Double braid, 321 SS Tube -20 1-¼
3 No braid, 316 SS Tube -24 1-½
4 304 SS Single braid, 316 SS Tube -32 2
5 304 SS Double braid, 316 SS Tube -40 2-½
6 316 SS Single braid, 321 SS Tube Table 5 Second End Size
7 316 SS Double braid, 321 SS Tube -4 ¼
8 316 SS Single braid, 316 SS Tube -6 ⅜
9 316 SS Double braid, 316 SS Tube -8 ½
Table 3 First and Second End Connection** -10 ⅝
01 Male Pipe Thread (with hex) - NPTF -12 ¾
MT Male Pipe Toe (no hex) - NPT -16 1
02 Female Pipe Thread - NPT -20 1-¼
03 Male JIC 37° Flare -24 1-½
06 Female JIC 37° Flare Swivel -32 2
07 Female Pipe Swivel -40 2-½
U7 Female Pipe Union - NPT Table 6 Hose Size
TU Universal Tube Stub -4 ¼
JC Female Oring Face Seal (ORFS) Swivel -6 ⅜
AL A-lok® Compression -8 ½
HV Male VacuSeal™ -10 ⅝
P6 CPI™ Compression -12 ¾
Q1 UltraSeal™ Swivel -16 1
VH Female VacuSeal™ -20 1-¼
9K Raised Face Weld Neck 150lb Fixed Flange -24 1-½
9Y Raised Face Weld Neck 300lb Fixed Flange -32 2
4K Schedule 40 Type A Stub with 150lb Lap Joint Flange -40 2-½
1Y Schedule 40 Type A Stub with 300lb Lap Joint Flange Table 7 Fitting Material
8K Raised Face 150lb Fixed Slip-on Flange (Blank) Steel
8Y Raised Face 300lb Fixed Slip-on Flange C Stainless Steel
K 316 Stainless Steel
Table 8 Overall Length
XX Expressed in inches
(1) Only 9A & 9M products are available in the complete range of product options.
9H hose is only available in codes 4 & 5 (1 or 2 304 SS braids, and 316 SS tube)
(2) 304 SS is standard material. 316 SS is available upon request.
*End Connection always Alpha Numeric TU01, not 01TU.
** Not all fitting configurations are available in full array of sizes.

PTFE Hose
919/919B Series
FEATURES
• Excellent chemical compatibility
• Handles extreme temperatures to +450°F
• Environmentally safe
• Low moisture permeability
• Low friction minimizes pressure drops and deposits
• Use 919B Series with static-dissipative core tube when conveying
non-conducting fluids such as oils, paints, fuels, steam, etc C
APPLICATIONS
• Chemical transfer lines
• General hydraulics
• Compressed air/gases
• Adhesive dispensing
• Coolant Lines
• Medical Gases
SPECIFICATIONS
Tube Construction 919 - Natural FDA Compliant PTFE
919B - Black Static-Dissipative PTFE
Tube Reinforcement 304 Stainless Steel braid
Temperature Range -100°F to +450°F (-73°C to +232°C)
Operating Parameters Change in length at working pressure is +2% to -4%
Min. Burst Pressure is 4x Max. Working Pressure at 73°F (23°C)
Fittings 90, 91 & 91N Series. Crimp information can be found online
Certifications Meets or Exceeds SAE 100R14A - 919
Meets or Exceeds SAE 100R14B - 919B
FDA CFR 177.1550 (Natural tube)
Maximum Maximum Minimum Minimum Vac.

Nomi- Nomi- Permanent Field
Maximum Maximum Working Working Bend Bend Rating Weight Weight
Item Type nal I.D. nal I.D. Fitting Attachable
O.D. inch O.D. mm Pressure Pressure Radius Radius Hg./73°F lbs./ft. kg./mtr.
inch mm Series Series
psi MPa inch mm inch
919-3 Natural ⅛ 3 0.25 6 3,000 20.7 1.5 38 28 0.04 0.06 91 –
919-4 Natural ³⁄₁₆ 5 0.32 8 3,000 20.7 2 51 28 0.06 0.09 91N 90
919-5 Natural ¼ 6 0.38 10 3,000 20.7 3 76 28 0.09 0.13 91N 90
919-6 Natural ⁵⁄₁₆ 8 0.44 11 2,500 17.2 4 102 28 0.1 0.15 91N 90
919-8 Natural ¹³⁄₃₂ 10 0.53 13 2,000 13.8 5 127 28 0.13 0.19 91N 90
919-10 Natural ½ 13 0.63 16 1,500 10.3 6.5 165 28 0.15 0.22 91N 90
919-12 Natural ⅝ 16 0.75 19 1,200 8.3 7.5 191 12 0.19 0.28 91N 90
919-16 Natural ⅞ 22 1.03 26 1,000 6.9 9 229 14 0.27 0.4 91N 90
919-20 Natural 1-⅛ 29 1.28 33 625 4.3 16 406 10 0.39 0.58 91 90
919B-4 Conductive ³³⁄₁₆ 5 0.32 8 3,000 20.7 2 51 28 0.06 0.09 91N 90
919B-5 Conductive ¼ 6 0.38 10 3,000 20.7 3 76 28 0.09 0.13 91N 90
919B-6 Conductive ⁵⁄₁₆ 8 0.44 11 2,500 17.2 4 102 28 0.1 0.15 91N 90
919B-8 Conductive ¹³⁄₃₂ 10 0.53 13 2,000 13.8 5 127 28 0.13 0.19 91N 90

Heavy Wall PTFE Hose

929/929B Series
FEATURES
• Tight bend radius
• Excellent kink resistance
• Enhanced resistance to gas permeation due to increased PTFE wall
thickness (.040”)
• Use 929B Series with static-dissipative core tube when conveying
non-conducting fluids such as oils, paints, fuels, steam, etc
C
APPLICATIONS
• Chemical transfer lines
• General hydraulics
• Compressed air/gases
• Adhesive dispensing
• Coolant Lines
• Medical Gases
SPECIFICATIONS
Tube Construction 929 - Natural FDA Compliant PTFE
929B - Black Static-Dissipative PTFE
Tube Reinforcement 304 Stainless Steel braid
Temperature Range -100°F to +450°F (-73°C to +232°C)
Operating Parameters Change in length at working pressure is +2% to -4%
Min. Burst Pressure is 4x Max. Working Pressure at 73°F (23°C)
Fittings 91N Series. Crimp information can be found online
Certifications Meets or Exceeds SAE 100R14A - 929
Meets or Exceeds SAE 100R14B - 929B
FDA CFR 177.1550 (Natural tube)
Max- Maxi-
Minimum Minimum Vac.
Nominal Nomi- Maxi- imum mum Permanent
Maximum Bend Bend Rating Weight Weight
Item Type I.D. nal I.D. mum Working Working Fitting
O.D. inch Radius Radius Hg./73°F lbs./ft. kg./mtr.
inch mm O.D. mm Pressure Pressure Series
inch mm inch
psi MPa
929-4 Natural ³⁄₁₆ 5 0.34 9 3,000 20.7 2 51 28 0.08 0.12 91N
929-6 Natural ⁵⁄₁₆ 8 0.47 12 2,500 17.2 4 102 28 0.12 0.18 91N
929-8 Natural ¹³⁄₃₂ 10 0.59 15 2,000 13.8 4.6 117 28 0.16 0.23 91N
929B-4 Conductive ³⁄₁₆ 5 0.34 9 3,000 20.7 2 51 28 0.08 0.12 91N
929B-6 Conductive ⁵⁄₁₆ 8 0.47 12 2,500 17.2 4 102 28 0.12 0.18 91N
929B-8 Conductive ¹³⁄₃₂ 10 0.59 15 2,000 13.8 4.6 117 28 0.16 0.23 91N
929B-12 Conductive ⅝ 16 ¾ 19 1200 8 6.5 165 12 0.186 27.7 91N
929B-16 Conductive ⅞ 22 1-⅛ 29 1250 9 7.5 188 14 0.488 72.6 91N

Bulk Instrumentation and Accessories • Tube Fabricating Equipment
Tube Benders
PTB Heavy Duty 180° Tube Bender

• New design for accurate and tight bends up to 180° in
stainless steel and other tougher metals Table 1 Table 2
• Rollers in bending handle reduce friction and bending XXX XXX
effort; eliminate scoring of tubing
• Comfortable and durable ergonomically molded cushion Table 1 Series
grips PTB Parker Tube Bender
• Vise lug for mounting in vise Table 2 Tube O.D.
• Clamshell packaging available for ¼", ⅜", 6mm, 8mm 4T 1/4"
and 10mm models 6T 3/8"
• Patented, quick action trigger release repositions two-
8T 1/2"
stage handle midway through a bend when both handles
6M 6mm
meet
8M 8mm
10M 10mm
12M 12mm

Cutting & Deburring Tools

PTC Tube Cutter
DESCRIPTION
All tube cutters are 100% factory tested to ensure accurate
spiral-free cutting. The Parker tube cutter cuts stainless
steel, soft copper, and aluminium tubing from ⅛" to 1-⅛"
and 4 mm to 28 mm O.D.
FEATURES
C • Lower profile swing radius – 4-¼"
• Rollers feature flare cut-off groove to reduce tube loss when
damaged flare is removed
• Lightweight die-cast solid aluminium body
• Enclosed hardend steel, thrust bearing feed mechanism for
smoothest cutting action and trouble free operation
• Cutter wheels are made of the highest quality wear and
abrasion-resistant chronium steel and precision machined to
exacting specifications for accurate cutting and long life
• Unique design eliminates spiraling for clean right angle cuts
Mini-Tube Cutter
DESCRIPTION
For those customers working in tight areas or with small size tubing, the Mini-Tube Cutter is the answer. It will work
in close spaces on tubing from ⅛” to ⅝”. It will work on all materials and the cutterwheel is replaceable. For tubing
sizes-2(⅛” O.D.) to 10 (⅝” O.D.)

Cutting & Deburring Tools - Continued

Inner-Outer Reaming and Deburring Tools
DESCRIPTION
A quick twist of the wrist will deburr either the O.D. or
the I.D. of the tube end. Parker’s deburrer can be used
on annealed steel, stainless steel, copper or aluminium,
for tube sizes ³∕₁₆" to 1-½" O.D. Insert the tube into the
convexed end of the duburrer for inside deburring and
the opposite end for outside deburring. Rotate in either
direction. C
FEATURES
• Reams both inside and outside edges of tube with 3
hollow ground cutters
• Tough die cast body
• Replacement blades can be ordered
• Deburrs both clockwise and counter clockwise
• Flutted body is shaped to fit comfortably in palm
Sawing Vise
DESCRIPTION
Hacksaw guide will accommodate tube, pipe and hose
from sizes 3 (³∕₁₆" O.D.) to 32 (2" O.D.). Assures square
cut-offs within ±1°. Use a fine tooth hacksaw blade for
smoother cuts.To use mount in vise or bolt to bench.
Clamp tubing, pipe or hose into the vise and cut off; guide
ensures accurate square cuts.

Tools
Manual Coning and Threading Tools
DESCRIPTION
Parker Autoclave Engineers manufactures a manual coning tool for
optimum coning performance with tubing sizes up to 1/16” (14.3 mm)
O.D. This is a precision quality manual tool to permit on-site end
preparation for AE medium and high pressure tubing installations.
Interchangeable collets for each size tubing provide proper centering
of tubing. The cutting feed arrangement permits the operator to
C control the depth of cut to assure against work hardening effects.
Interchangeable tool steel cutting blades are used in pairs to assure
more accurate and faster coning and are designed to square-off and
finish the tube as the cone is completed. There is a provision for
applying metal cutting lubricants to the cutting zone.
The threading die holder is designed to hold the appropriate die for
any of the standard Parker Autoclave Engineers tubing sizes through
1/16” (14.3 mm) O.D. Interchangeable guide bushings properly guide
the tool for accurate thread cutting.
Micrometer Adjustable Torque Wrench

DESCRIPTION
Parker Autoclave Engineer’s has available an adjustable
torque wrench with a number of wrench adapters for accurate
tightening of packing glands and tube nuts. Included are tables
showing torque requirements for all valves and components.
The wrench can be adjusted to the ranges shown and is used
with interchangeable wrench adapters for hex sizes from ½”
through 1-7/8”. Item numbers for wrench adapters are listed on
chart.
Item Description Packing Gland or

Wrench Tube Nut Hex
P-1680 Torque Wrench - Range 20 to 150 ft. lbs. (27 to 203 Nm)
Adapter Item Size
91020 Torque Wrench - Range: 75 to 250 ft. lbs. (102 to 339 Nm) in (mm)
P-1681 1/2 (12.7)
P-1682 9/16 (14.3)

P-1683 5/8 (15.9)
P-9813 3/4 (19.05)
P-1685 13/16 (20.6)
P-1686 7/8 (22.2)
P-1687 15/16 (23.8)
P-9901 1 (25.4)
P-1688 1-1/16 (27)
P-1689 1-3/16 (30.2)
P-1690 1-3/8 (34.9)
P-6040 1-1/2 (38.1)
P-10076 1-7/8 (47.6)

Tools - Continued
Hydraulic Tube Bender
DESCRIPTION
For single pass bending of high pressure tubing. The
Parker Autoclave Engineers hydraulic tube bender is
designed to bend heavy wall tubing quickly, accurately
and reliably with only one setup. The tube bender is
complete with pump, cylinder, frame and bending shoes
which are self-contained in a portable, lockable case.
C
Item Description
HTB Tube Bender with hand operated hydraulic pump
HTB-A Tube Bender with air operated hydraulic pump option in place of hand pump
Coning and Threading Machine

Separate heads for coning and threading are powered by a single motor and drive
system. Available models cone and thread Parker Autoclave Engineers medium and
high pressure tubing.
FEATURES
• One-half hp motor, 115 VAC 60 Hz (220 VAC 50 Hz) volt capacitor start.
• No reversing necessary on threading operation; pop-open die prevents thread
damage.
• Complete tooling is available; specify tooling sizes required.
• Coning head has feed wheel for easy, precision feeding.
• Complete with oil pump and reservoir.
• Unit mounted on stand complete with locking casters for ease of mobility and stability.
• Available with optional reservoir heater
• CE mark standard on 220 VAC 50 Hz models
Item Description Dimensions Shipping Weight

AEGCTM-2 Coning and Threading Machine 56” h x 28” w x 20” d (1.4m x .7m x .5m) 350 lbs (159 kg)
AEGCTM-2E-CE CE Version - Coning and Threading Machine 56” h x 28” w x 20” d (1.4m x .7m x .5m) 350 lbs (159 kg)

Section Cover page
Local Representation
Rawson, Inc. has branch offices and sales representatives located throughout the
United States.
Main Index
Pressure and temperature Measurement

Gauges
Process Gauges
U.S. Gauge.........................................................................................................................446
Perma-Cal Industries..........................................................................................................452
General Purpose Gauges
U.S. Gauge.........................................................................................................................455
NoShok...............................................................................................................................471
Specialty Gauges
Dwyer..................................................................................................................................473
Parker Autoclave Engineers................................................................................................475
Orange Research................................................................................................................476
Gauge Accessories
U.S. Gauge.........................................................................................................................480
Gauge & Seal Assemblies
US Gauge...........................................................................................................................481
Diaphragm Seals
Mansfield & Green..............................................................................................................488
Pressure Transmitters
PMT.....................................................................................................................................497
ABB.....................................................................................................................................503
United Electric.....................................................................................................................515
Pressure Switches
United Electric.....................................................................................................................519
Precision Sensors...............................................................................................................526
Thermometers
Bimetal Thermometers
Tel-Tru.................................................................................................................................531
Non-Contact Thermometers
Tel-Tru.................................................................................................................................537
RTDs, Thermowells & Thermocouples
Applied Sensor Technologies..............................................................................................540
JMS.....................................................................................................................................544
Texas Thermowell...............................................................................................................551
Temperature Switches
United Electric.....................................................................................................................552
Temperature Transmitters
ABB.....................................................................................................................................559
445
Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Process Gauges
U.S. Gauge
Gauges
Cast Aluminum Process Gauge

SOLFRUNT® Models 1901, 1931
DESCRIPTION
The 4-½" 1901 and 1931 4-½" process gauges have an aluminum
back-flanged case for applications needing stem or wall mounting. The
SOLFRUNT gauge case was designed with an integral wall between the
measuring element and window, and a pressure relieving back for increased
safety. Models are available with wetted surface material in brass/phosphor
bronze or 316L stainless steel, dry or liquid filled and in 18 vacuum,
compound and pressure ranges.
D SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 4-½"
Accuracy ±0.5% of span (Grade 2A), except where seamless
stainless steel Bourdon tubes are used in following ranges:
Type 316L from 10000 to 11600 psi; accuracy is ±0.5% on
ascending pressure and ±1.0% on descending pressure
Bourdon Tube Phosphor bronze/silver brazed or 316L seamless stainless
steel/TIG welded
Window High temperature acrylic, laminated shatter-resistant glass Model Number 1901 1931
options available Bourdon Tube Phosphor Bronze 316L Stainless Steel
Movement Geared movement with components of corrosionresistant Socket Brass 316L Stainless Steel
300 series stainless steel. Movement can be removed for
examination and cleaning without disturbing span and scale Sizes 4-½" 4-½"
shape adjustments
Ranges Item Item
Dial Aluminum with baked white background and black markings
0-30" Hg VAC 150200 150215
Pointer Anodized aluminum, micro-adjustable with black finish
(optional lazy hand available, part number 156147, with dry 30"-0-15 psi 150201 150216
gauges only) 30"-0-30 psi 150202 150217
Case and Ring For Stem or Wall Mounting: Cast aluminum, back-flanged 30"-0-100 psi 150204 150219
case with bayonet ring, black finish and stainless steel
pressure-relieving back (liquid fill kit available) 0-15 psi 150205 150220
Connection Brass or 316L stainless steel, ½-14 ANPT standard (¼-18 0-30 psi 150206 150221
ANPT optional) 0-60 psi 150207 150222
0-100 psi 150208 150223
0-160 psi 150209 150224
0-200 psi 150210 150225
0-300 psi 150211 150226
0-400 psi 150212 150227
0-600 psi 150213 150228
0-1000 psi 150214 150230
0-1500 psi - 150231
0-2300 psi - 150232
0-3500 psi - 150233
0-6000 psi - 150234
* Metric and dual scale dials are available on all 1900 Series gauges
¼-18 ANPT available – use 155XXX when ordering
For factory liquid filling please add LG for Glycerin or LS for Silicone to the end of
the item numbers, for example 150200LG

4 ½" Cast Aluminum Panel Mount Process Gauge

SOLFRUNT® Models 1903, 1933
DESCRIPTION
The Models 1903 and 1933 4-½" process gauges are designed for process
applications that require a panel mounted gauge. The 1903 and 1933 have a
cast aluminum front flange case with a lower-back mount process connection.
Models are available with wetted surface material in brass/phosphor bronze
or 316L and are supplied in 21 vacuum, compound and pressure ranges.
The SOLFRUNT gauge case was designed with an integral wall between the
measuring element and window, and a pressure relieving back for increased
safety.
SPECIFICATIONS
D
Sizes 4-½"
Accuracy ±0.5% of span (Grade 2A), except where stainless steel
bourdon tubes are used in following ranges: Type 316L
from 10000 to 11600 psi; accuracy is ±0.5% on ascending
pressure and ±1.0% on descending pressure
Model Number 1903 1933
Bourdon Tube Phosphor bronze/silver brazed or 316L seamless
stainless steel/TIG welded Bourdon Tube Phosphor Bronze 316L Stainless Steel
Window High temperature acrylic, laminated shatter-resistant Socket Brass 316L Stainless Steel
glass options available
Sizes 4-½" 4-½"
Movement Geared ARC-LOC with components of corrosionresistant
300 series stainless steel. Movement can be removed Ranges Item Item
for examination and cleaning without disturbing span and 0-30" Hg VAC 150350 150365
scale shape adjustments
30"-0-15 psi 150351 150366
Dial Aluminum with baked white background and black
markings 30"-0-30 psi 150352 150367
Pointer Anodized aluminum, micro-adjustable with black finish 30"-0-60 psi 150353 150368
(optional lazy hand available, part number 074963, with
30"-0-100 psi 150354 150369
dry gauges only)
0-15 psi 150355 150370
Case and Ring For Panel Mounting: Cast aluminum, front-flanged case
with steel hinged ring, black finish and pressure-relieving 0-30 psi 150356 150371
back
0-60 psi 150357 150372
Connection Brass or 316L stainless steel, ½-14 ANPT standard (¼-18
ANPT, optional) 0-100 psi 150358 150373
0-160 psi 150359 150374
0-200 psi 150360 150375
0-300 psi 150361 150376
0-400 psi 150362 150377
0-600 psi 150363 150378
0-1000 psi 150364 150379
0-1500 psi - 150380
0-2300 psi - 150381
0-3500 psi - 150382
0-6000 psi - 150383
0-11600 psi - 150384

4 ½" Low Pressure Process Gauge

SOLFRUNT® Model 1929
DESCRIPTION
Designed for pressure measurements as low as a few inches of water. The
1929 is available in spans from 30" H2O to 10 psi and utilizes a unique sensing
element. The 1929 is composed of a stack of diaphragm capsules, each
consisting of two plates contoured into a convex/concave configuration to
nest into one another resulting. This results in a low internal volume element
developing large forces to drive the mechanism in extremely low pressure
ranges. The SOLFRUNT gauge case was designed with an integral wall
between the measuring element and window, and a pressure relieving back
for increased safety. To use the gauge with corrosive or viscous fluids, the
D measuring element may be filled and attached to a Mansfield & Green Type L
or Type ST diaphragm seal.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 4-½" Model Number 1929
Accuracy ±1% of span (Grade 1A) Capsule 316L Stainless Steel
Diaphragm 316L stainless steel, heli-arc welded Socket 316L Stainless Steel
Window High temperature acrylic; laminated shatterresistant glass Sizes 4-½”
option available, part number G038312
Ranges Item
Movement Heavy brass U-frame construction with nickel silver rocker
arm on stainless steel pivots. Brass sector and nickel silver 0-30" H₂O VAC 132789
pinion operate on brass bearings. Minimum and maximum
0-60" H₂O VAC 132790
stops prevent segment and pinion disengagement
15"-0-15" H₂O 132872
Dial Aluminum with white background and black markings
30"-0-30" H₂O 132787
Pointer Knife-edged, micrometer adjustable, black finish
60"-0-60" H₂O 132788
Case and Ring For Stem or Wall Mounting: PET turret case (black) with
glass-filled, threaded, polypropylene ring and plastic 0-30" H₂O 132784
pressure-relieving back
0-60" H₂O 132785
Connection 316L stainless steel; ½-14 ANPT standard (¼-18 ANPT
optional) 0-100" H₂O 132786
0-200" H₂O 132795
0-3 psi 132791
0-5 psi 132792
0-10 psi 132793
* Metric and dual scale dials are available


4 ½" Process Gauge with Brass Internals

DESCRIPTION
The 1980 4 ½" process gauge has a PET turret style case, an integral wall
between the measuring element and window and a pressure relieving back for
increased safety. The PET case gives this gauge superior impact strength and
a broad spectrum of chemical resistance making it perfect for chemical and
petrochemical processing applications. The gauge case was also designed with
an integral wall between the measuring element and window, and a pressure
relieving back for increased safety. Available with wetted surface material
in brass/phosphor bronze, dry or liquid filled and available in 26 vacuum,
compound and pressure ranges.
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 4-½"
Accuracy ±0.5% of span (Grade 2A) Bourdon tube: Phosphor bronze/
silver brazed
Model Number 1980⁺
Window High temperature acrylic, other options available
Bourdon Tube Phosphor Bronze
Movement Geared movement with components of corrosionresistant
300 series stainless steel Socket Brass
Dial Aluminum with baked white background and black Sizes 4-½"
markings
Ranges Item
(optional lazy hand available, part number 132371, with dry 0-30" Hg VAC 150000
gauges only) 30"-0-15 psi 150001
Case and Ring For Stem or Wall Mounting: PET turret case (black) with 30"-0-30 psi 150002
glass-filled polypropylene threaded ring and pressure-
relieving back. E-Z Fill option available. 30"-0-60 psi 150003
Connection Brass, ½-14 ANPT standard (¼-18 ANPT, optional) 30"-0-100 psi 150004
30"-0-150 psi 150005
0-15 psi 150006
0-30 psi 150007
0-60 psi 150008
0-100 psi 150009
0-160 psi 150010
0-200 psi 150011
0-300 psi 150012
0-400 psi 150013
0-600 psi 150014
0-1000 psi 150015
+ When ordering EZ Fill Option – use 170XXX (for ½-14 ANPT); use 175XXX (for
¼-18 ANPT)
the item numbers, for example 170000LG

4 ½" Process Gauge with Dampened Movement

SOLFRUNT® Models 1981 & 1981 Advantage
DESCRIPTION
The 1981 and 1981 Advantage 4-½" process gauges have all 316L
stainless steel wetted surfaces with a seamless Bourdon tube. The 1981
Advantage includes a dampened movement option to provide users with
some of the benefits of liquid filling. These models have PET turret style
cases, integral walls between the measuring elements and windows and
a pressure relieving backs for increased safety. The PET case provides
superior impact strength and a broad spectrum of chemical resistance
making these gauges perfect for chemical and petrochemical processing
applications. Available dry, with a dampened movement, or liquid filled
D and supplied in 26 vacuum, compound and pressure ranges.
Model Number 1981 Advantage⁺ 1981⁺
Bourdon Tube 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
SPECIFICATIONS Socket 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Sizes 4-½" Movement Dampened Standard
Accuracy ±0.5% of span (Grade 2A), except where seamless stainless Sizes 4-½" 4-½"
steel bourdon tubes are used in following ranges: Type 316L Ranges Item Item
from 10000 to 11600 psi; accuracy is ±0.5% on ascending
pressure and ±1.0% on descending pressure 0-30" Hg VAC 150016DM 150016
Bourdon Tube 316L seamless stainless steel/TIG welded 30"-0-15 psi 150017DM 150017
Window High temperature acrylic, laminated shatterresistant glass 30"-0-30 psi 150018DM 150018
options available (G038312)
30"-0-60 psi 150019DM 150019
Movement Geared movement with components of corrosionresistant 300
series stainless steel; optional dampened movement available 30"-0-100 psi 150020DM 150020
on Advantage unit 30"-0-150 psi 150021DM 150021
Dial Aluminum with baked white background and black markings 0-15 psi 150022DM 150022
(dual scale and custom dials available)
0-30 psi 150023DM 150023
(optional lazy hand, 132371 for dry gauges only) 0-60 psi 150024DM 150024
Case and Ring For Stem or Wall Mounting: PET turret case (black) with glass- 0-100 psi 150025DM 150025
filled polypropylene threaded ring and pressure-relieving back, 0-160 psi 150026DM 150026
EZ Fill option available
0-200 psi 150027DM 150027
Connection 316L stainless steel, ½-14 ANPT standard (¼-18 ANPT,
optional) 0-300 psi 150028DM 150028
Liquid Filling The Model 1981 is also available in liquid filled or field fillable 0-400 psi 150029DM 150029
(E-Z Fill) configurations.
0-600 psi 150030DM 150030
0-800 psi 150031DM 150031
0-1000 psi 150032DM 150032
0-1500 psi 150033DM 150033
0-2000 psi 150523DM 150523
0-2300 psi 150034DM 150034
0-3000 psi 150509DM 150509
0-3500 psi 150035DM 150035
0-5000 psi 150510DM 150510
0-6000 psi 150036DM 150036
0-10000 psi 150524DM 150524
0-11600 psi 150037DM 150037
⁺ When ordering E-Z Fill option – use 170XXX (for ½-14 ANPT); use 175XXX (for
¼-18 ANPT)
¼–18 ANPT available – use 155XXX when ordering

4 ½" Process Gauge with Monel Internals

DESCRIPTION
The 1986 4-½" SOLFRUNT process gauge has a Monel
bourdon tube and socket and is typically used for HF
service (hydrofluoric acid) during the alkylation process
at a refinery. The turret style case is made of black
glass reinforced thermoplastic (PBTB), has an integral
wall between the measuring element and window and
a pressure relieving back for increased safety. The PET
case provides superior impact strength and a broad
spectrum of chemical resistance and makes the 1986
perfect for chemical and petrochemical processing D
applications. The 1986 comes with an E-Z Fill field fillable
case standard and is supplied in 21 vacuum, compound,
and pressure ranges. Standard dials are single scale psi,
but this gauge can be ordered with custom dials.
SPECIFICATIONS Model Number 1986 1986
Sizes 4-½" Bourdon Tube K MONEL K MONEL
Accuracy ±0.5% of span (Grade 2A) Socket MONEL MONEL
Bourdon Tube K MONEL, MONEL/micro-brazed Sizes 4-½" 4-½"
Window Polycarbonate Connections ½” NPT ¼” NPT
Movement Aluminum alloy Ranges Item Item
Dial Aluminum with baked white background and black 0-30” Hg VAC 170060K 175060K
markings
30”-0-15 psi 170061K 175061K
Pointer Aluminum, micro-adjustable with black finish
30”-0-30 psi 170062K 175062K
Case and Ring For Stem or Wall Mounting: PET turret case (black) with
glass reinforced thermoplastic, threaded ring and pressure- 30”-0-60 psi 170063K 175063K
relieving back (optional yellow case available, add YEL to 30”-0-100 psi 170064K 175064K
end of spec number)
30”-0-150 psi 170065K 175065K
Connection MONEL, ½-14 ANPT standard (¼-18 ANPT, optional)
30”-0-300 psi 270449K 275449K
0-15 psi 170066K 175066K
0-30 psi 170067K 175067K
0-60 psi 170068K 175068K
0-100 psi 170069K 175069K
0-160 psi 170070K 175070K
0-200 psi 170071K 175071K
0-300 psi 170072K 175072K
0-400 psi 170073K 175073K
0-600 psi 170074K 175074K
0-1000 psi 170075K 175075K
0-2000 psi 170529K 175529K
0-3000 psi 170530K 175530K
0-5000 psi 170531K 175531K
0-10000 psi 170532K 175532K
This table is not intended to be all inclusive of all possible configurations

* Metric and dual scale dials are available on all 1900 Series gauges.
For yellow case option, please add YEL to the end of item numbers
the item numbers, for example 170060KLG

Perma-Cal Industries
Direct Drive Pressure Gauge

DESCRIPTION
Perma-Cal® gauges have a very low volume elastic
The advantage of Perma-Cal® direct drive over
element and solid front case that provide the safest gauge
conventional C- tube gauges is simple, there is only one
possible. C-tube gauges have a relatively large volume
moving part No gears, linkages, or springs to wear or
elastic element that in cases of catastrophic failure could
break. Perma-Cal® gauges have a unique helical-wound
spill large amounts of process. Not all direct drive gauges
elastic element that is attached directly to the pointer
offer the industry standard solid front for case safety. The
shaft. This eliminates the need for any movement-
Perma-Cal® configuration of solid front and rear blowout
amplifying gears or linkages (the parts of a C-tube that
features provides the customer with the safest possible
fail most frequently). Perma-Cal® gauges maintain their
case style.
structural integrity and accurate calibration in the most
demanding environments, even during prolonged and
rugged use. Perma-Cal® direct drive pressure gauges FEATURES
D provide the lowest cost of ownership by giving the best • All metal powder coated case
value in durability, reliability, and accuracy. • All stainless steel case available
• Field adjustable back or bottom fitting location
Perma-Cal® gauges have more durability and longevity • Field convertible from no flange configuration to front or
than liquid-filled gauges, without the mess or problems rear flange
of liquid fill. Perma-Cal® gauges do not have any of the • Ambient temperatures to 435 °f (225 c)
problems filling solves. There are no gears or linkages to
lubricate, and they are internally dampened with a small
application of heavy (600,000 centistokes) silicone grease
that eliminates pointer flutter.
Unique Inconel X-750

helical-wound sensing
element provides
unmatched accuracy,
Front flange, rear flange, sensitivity and longevity
no flange, or turret cases
available Rugged and safe ABS,
Aluminum, GFN cases
PSI, Feet of Sea Water, and Standard 316SS fitting-
Metric scales available bottom or rear position
Internal, replaceable 316SS

8½" 6", 4½, 3½" and 2½" filter snubber, elastomer
dials isolator, or low volume
diaphragm seal freeze and
Standard solid front case corrosion protection

Direct Drive Pressure Gauge - Continued

SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Range Vacuum to 0 - 15,000 psi
Accuracy ±.25% F.S. , ±.5% F.S., ±.5% M.S. ±1% F.S.
Proof Pressure (min) 150% of F.S. below 8,000 psi, 125% of F.S 8,000 psi and higher
Burst Pressure (min) 500% of F.S. or 25,000 psi whichever is less
Endurance (min) 250,000 20-80% F.S. cycles for ranges below 4,000 psi
Wetted Parts Inconel X-750, 316SS, 304SS & Silver Braze (other options available)
Repeatability & Sensitivity ± .01% F.S.
Calibration Position Vertical, other positions available
HOW TO ORDER
X X X X X X XX X X X X
Table 1 Product Type Table 5 Pointer Type

1 Pressure Gauges I Process (bold, easy-reading)
2 Seawater Depth Gauges ( FSW Ranges ) T Test (knife-edged, precision reading)
3 Caisson Gauges (8½" and 6" dial sizes only) Table 6 Dial Trim
Table 2 Accuracy Dial Size Mirror Dampening ? External Material*
Band ? Zero
0 ¼% Full Scale (8½", 6", 4½ " and 2½" dials; Calibration
Adj. ?
Certification included)
A 2½", 4½", 6" No No Yes Stainless
1 ½% Full Scale (6", 4½", 3½" and 2½" dials)
B 2½", 4½", 6" No Yes Yes Stainless
2 1% Full Scale, ½% Mid Scale (6", 4½", 3½", 2½" and 2" dials)
D 2", 2½", 3½", No Yes No Stainless*
Table 3 Dial Size
4½"
0 6" (External zero adjust included)
M 2½", 4½", 6", Yes Yes Yes Stainless
1 4½" (External zero adjust included on test gauges, optional on 8½"
process gauges)
N 2", 2½", 3½", No No No Stainless*
2 3½" (External zero adjust not available; zero adjust pointer 4½"
included)
R 3½", 4½", 6", No Yes No Stainless
3 2½" (External zero adjust included on test gauges, optional on 8½"
process gauges)
S 3½", 4½", 6", No No No Stainless
4 2" (No external zero adjust) 8½"
8 8½" (External zero adjust included) W 2½", 4½", 6", Yes No Yes Stainless
8½"
Table 4 Case Type
*Note: All 2" dials are aluminum. Code D & N 3½" dials are vinyl.
F Front Flange (8½", 6", 4½" and 2½" only)
M No Flange Metalic (4½" only; Flange Kit available)
N No Flange (6", 4½", 2½" and 2" only)
R Rear Flange (6", 4½" and 2½" only)
S No Flange Stainless Steel (4½" only; Flange Kit available)
T Turret (4½" and 3½")

Direct Drive Pressure Gauge - Continued
Table 7 Pressure Range Table 10 Fitting Type

XX A two character code specifies pressure range and units 1 ¼ NPT
of measurement, i.e., psi, kPa, Bar, kgcm², FSW, etc. See
2 Not Assigned
Bulletin T-103 for available ranges and their corresponding
codes. NOTE: The maximum pressure for 2" gauges is 1000 3 ½ NPT
psig.
4 MS 33514E4
Table 8 Case Color
5 AS 4395E4 (MS 33656E4)
A Black
6 MS 33649E4
B Blue
7 Not Assigned
G Green
8 9/16-18 O-ring union (MIL-G-18997)
D R Red
9 ¼ BSP
W White
X Customer Specified (VCR Style, etc.)
Y Yellow
Table 11 Misc. Options (Select as many as needed)
H High Temp ( Glass-filled nylon, 4½" yellow turret only )
C Calibration Certificate (not apropos on ¼% ... all come with a
U Unpainted ( 2", M, S and -Z case types only ) Cal. Cert.)
Table 9 Fitting Position E EPDM Isolator Installed
0 Rear H Helium leak test
2 Bottom (6 o'clock position) L Tempered glass
4 Top (12 o'clock position) N Nicrobraze
O Cleaned for Oxygen service
P Pointer stop pin
R Reid Vapor Handle
T Stainless steel tag
V Viton® Isolator installed
Z Aluminum case (2½" NF, 4½" RF & 8½" RF case types only)

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • General Purpose
Gauges
U.S. Gauge
All Stainless Steel Gauges

Models 1550, 1553
DESCRIPTION
The 1550 and 1553 are 2-½" (63mm) and 4" (100mm)
affordable liquid filled gauges that have all 316 stainless
steel wetted parts and are designed to endure the harsh
environments of chemical and petrochemical processing
plants. Liquid filling extends the life of a dry gauge in these
environments by protecting the movement from vibration,
dampening shocks and improves readability. Glycerin
is the standard fill fluid, with silicone, mineral oil or dry
(unfilled) available upon request.
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 2-½" (63mm) or 4" (100mm)
Ranges Vacuum – 30"-0 Hg VAC (counterclockwise rotation with
increasing vacuum) Compound – 30" Hg VAC-0, 0-15
through 0-300 psi Pressure – 0-15 psi through 0-15000 psi
Accuracy 2-½" ±3-2-3% FS (Grade B); 4" ±1.0% FS (Grade A)
Bourdon Tube 316 SST
Window Tempered glass, sealed with BUNA-N gasket
Movement SST
Dial White aluminum with black markings; black psi inner scale
and blue kPa outer scale; custom dials available in OEM
quantities
Pointer 63mm – black aluminum; 100mm – black aluminum,
adjustable DIN style
Case and Ring 63mm – For Stem or Center Back Mounting: 300 Series
stainless steel, solid back case with stainless steel crimped
ring. BUNA-N multi-function plug with removable nipple for
venting, pressure relief, and liquid fill access 100mm – For
Stem Mounting: 300 Series stainless steel, bayonet type
ring.
Connection 316 SST; 63mm – ¼-NPT; 100mm – ½-NPT
Restrictor Optional 316 SST, threaded style

Gauges
All Stainless Steel Gauges - Continued

Size Gauge 2-½” (63mm) 2-½” (63mm) 4” (100mm)
¼-18 NPT Lower Mount ¼-18 NPT Center Back ½-14 NPT Lower Mount
Connection
Connection Mount Connection Connection
Bourdon Tube Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
Socket Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
Model No. 1550 1553 1550
Ranges Item Item Item
30" Hg VAC 253000A 253027A 254000A
30"-0-15 253001A 253028A 254001A
D 30"-0-30 253002A 253029A 254002A

30"-0-60 253003A 253030A 254003A
30"-0-100 253004A 253031A 254004A
30"-0-150 253005A 253032A 254005A
30"-0-200 253006A 253033A 254006A
30"-0-300 253007A 253034A 254007A
0-15 psi 253008A 253035A 254008A
0-30 psi 253009A 253036A 254009A
0-60 psi 253010A 253037A 254010A
0-100 psi 253011A 253038A 254011A
0-160 psi 253012A 253039A 254012A
0-200 psi 253013A 253040A 254013A
0-300 psi 253014A 253041A 254014A
0-400 psi 253015A 253042A 254015A
0-600 psi 253016A 253043A 254016A
0-800 psi 253017A 253044A 254017A
0-1000 psi 253018A 253045A 254018A
0-1500 psi 253019A 253046A 254019A
0-2000 psi 253020A 253047A 254020A
0-3000 psi 253021A 253048A 254021A
0-4000 psi 253022A 253049A 254022A
0-5000 psi 253023A 253050A 254023A
0-6000 psi 253024A 253051A 254024A
0-10000 psi 253025A - 254025A
0-15000 psi - - 254026A
All gauges are stocked dry at our distribution center. For factory liquid filling please add the following letters after the item number when ordering:
• LG - for liquid-filled with glycerin • LS - for liquid-filled with silicone • LM - for liquid-filled with mineral oil
• LM - Lower Mount , CBM - Center Back Mount

Gauges
4" Utility Gauges with Stainless Steel

Case and Brass Internals
Models 1555, 1558
DESCRIPTION
The 4” versions of the Model 1555 and 1558 liquid-fillable
gauges combine low cost and high accuracy with a rugged
stainless steel case and brass internals for corrosive and
high vibration environments. Typical applications include
pumps, compressors, HVAC, petrochemical processing
and power generation. They come in 18 vacuum,
compound and gauge pressure ranges. Glycerin is
standard fill fluid, with silicone, mineral oil or dry (unfilled)
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 4" (100mm)
Ranges Vacuum – 30"-0 Hg VAC (counterclockwise rotation
with increasing vacuum) Compound – 30" Hg VAC-0,
0-15 through 0-100 psi Gauge – 0-15 psi through
0-6000 psi
Accuracy ±1.6% FS
Bourdon Tube Phosphor bronze
Window Polycarbonate, sealed to case with a polychloroprene
gasket
Movement Brass
Dial White aluminum with black markings; black psi inner

scale and kPa outer scale
Pointer Black aluminum
Case and Ring For Stem Mounting: 300 Series stainless steel, solid
back case with stainless steel crimped ring. BUNA-N
multi-function plug with removable nipple for venting,
pressure relief, and liquid fill access (Model 1555) For
Panel Mount Units: Incorporate 3-hole stainless steel
front mounting flange (Model 1558)
Connection Brass, ¼-NPT LM and CBM; ½-NPT LM
Restrictor Brass, push type .018" orifice (400 psi and above)

Gauges
4” Utility Gauges with Stainless Steel

Case and Brass Internals - Continued
Stem Mounting ¼-18 NPT Front Flange Panel Mounting ¼-18 NPT Stem Mounting ½-14 NPT
Series 1550 (4")
Lower Mount Connection Center Back Mount Connection Lower Mount Connection
Bourdon Tube Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze
Connection Brass Brass Brass
Model Number 1555 1558 1555
Ranges Item Item Item
0-30" Hg VAC 171967A 171985A -
30"-0-15 psi 171968A 171986A -
D 30"-0-30 psi 171969A 171987A -
30"-0-60 psi 171970A 171988A -
30"-0-100 psi 171971A 171989A -
0-15 psi 171972A 171990A -
0-30 psi 171973A 171991A 173183A
0-60 psi 171974A 171992A 173184A
0-100 psi 171975A 171993A 173185A
0-160 psi 171976A 171994A 173186A
0-200 psi 171977A 171995A -
0-300 psi 171978A 171996A -
0-600 psi 171979A 171997A -
0-1000 psi 171980A 171998A 173187A
0-1500 psi 171981A 171999A 173188A
0-2000 psi 171982A 172000A 173189A
0-3000 psi 171983A 172001A 173190A
0-5000 psi - - 173191A
0-6000 psi 171984A 172002A -
All gauges are stocked dry at our distribution center. For factory liquid filling please add the following letters after the item number when ordering:
• LG - for liquid-filled with glycerin • LS - for liquid-filled with silicone • LM - for liquid-filled with mineral oil

Gauges
Utility Gauges with Stainless Steel Case

and Brass Internals
Models 1555, 1558 and 1559
DESCRIPTION
The U.S. Gauge 1555, 1558 and 1559 are
liquid fillable utility gauges designed for a
wide range of rugged service applications
on pumps, compressors, hydraulic systems,
machine tools and petrochemical processing
equipment. Gauges feature a corrosion
resistant 300 series stainless steel case and
ring, and durable polycarbonate window. D
Phosphor bronze Bourdon tube, brass
movement, and socket connections are
standard. They come in 1-½", 2" and 2-½"
versions and are available in psi and bar,
kPa, and kg/cm² metric ranges. Glycerin
is the standard fill fluid, with silicone and
mineral oil and dry available upon request.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 1-½", 2", 2-½"
Ranges Dual scale psi/bar (100 x kPa)
Accuracy ±3-2-3% of span(Grade B)
Window Polycarbonate
Movement Brass
Dial Aluminum, white background with blue and black
markings
Pointer Aluminum, black finish
Case and Ring 300 series stainless steel
Connection 1-½" – ⅛-27 CBM, NPT; 2" and 2-½" – ¼-18 NPT
LM, CBM and CBM with front flange
Seals BUNA-N

Gauges
Utility Gauges with Stainless Steel Case

and Brass Internals - Continued
⅛-27 NPT Center ¼-27 NPT Lower ¼-18 NPT Center ¼-18 NPT Lower ¼-18 NPT Center ¼-18 NPT Center Back
Series P-1550† Back Mount Mount Connection Back Mount Mount Connection Back Mount Mount Connection
Connection Connection Connection
1-½" Stem 2" Stem Mounting 2" Stem Mounting 2-½" Stem Mounting 2-½" Front Flange 2-½" Stem Mounting
Type
Mounting Panel
Bourdon Tube Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze Phosphor Bronze
Connection Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass Brass
Model Number 1559 1555 1559 1555 1558 1559
Ranges* Item Item Item Item Item Item
D 0-30 psi 166664 165282 165289 165296 172324A 165303

0-60 psi 166665 165283 165290 165297 172325A 165304
0-100 psi 166666 165284 165291 165298 172326A 165305
0-160 psi 166667 165285 165292 165299 172327A 165306
0-300 psi 166668 165286 165293 - 172329A 165307
0-1000 psi 166669 165288 165295 165302 172332A 165309
0-600 psi - 165287 165294 165300 172331A 165308
0-30" Hg VAC - - - 171722A 172317A 171733A
30"-0-15 psi - - - 171723A 172318A 171734A
30"-0-30 psi - - - 171724A 172319A 171735A
30"-0-60 psi - - - 171725A 172320A 171736A
30"-0-100 psi - - - 171726A 172321A 171737A
30"-0-150 psi - - - 171727A 172322A 171738A
0-15 psi - - - 171728A 172323A 171739A
0-200 psi - - - 171729A 172328A 171740A
0-400 psi - - - 171730A 172330A 171741A
0-1500 psi - - - 171731A 172333A 171742A
0-2000 psi - - - 165377 172334A 165380
0-3000 psi - - - 165378 172335A 165381
0-5000 psi - - - 171732A 172336A 171743A
† Stainless steel case and crimped ring

* All dials have 3 scale dial face (psi / bar / x100 = kPa); other scales and ranges are available.
Options available on special request
1. Center back mount with U-clamp (fixed on case)
2. U-clamp kit available for 2-½" 1559 (169861A)

Gauges
Open Front Stainless Steel Gauges

Model 656
DESCRIPTION
The 656 Series are suitable for corrosive environments in
chemical, petrochemical, refining, power, marine, and food
and pharmaceutical processing applications.
They are ideally suited for uses on equipment where
excessive vibration and pulsation are encountered, such
as pumps, compressors, machine tools, etc. The liquid
fill minimizes the effect of these severe environments,
protects the gauge internals, and provides continuous
lubrication on the mechanism, all adding up to extended
service life. D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 2-½” (63mm) and 4” (100mm)
Ranges 2-½” – 30” Hg-0 psi through 0 to 10000 psi (0 psi to
6000 psi on the lower back mount model) 4” – 30”
Hg-0 psi through 0 psi to 23000 psi
Accuracy Model 6562 (2-½”) – ±1.6% of full scale (Grade B)
Model 6566 (4”) – ±1.0% of full scale (Grade 1A)
Bourdon Tube 316L stainless steel
Model 6562 (2-½”) – Less than or equal to 800 psi, C

type Bourdon tube; greater than or equal to 1000 psi,
helical Bourdon tube
Model 6566 (4”) – Less than or equal to 1000 psi,

Bourdon tube; greater than or equal to 1500 psi,
helical Bourdon tube
Window 2-½” – Polycarbonate (laminated shatter-resistant
glass window optional)
4” – Laminated shatter-resistant glass window
Movement 304 stainless steel
Dial White aluiminum with black lettering. Single scale psi
dials are standard, but dials can be changed out for
kPa/psi, kPa, psi/bar, or bar.
Pointer 2-½” aluminum alloy, black painted; adjustable
pointer on 4”, aluminum black
Case and Bezel Ring 304 stainless steel, bayonet type
Case Pressure Relief Top – Rubber disc for 2-½” Back – Rubber disc for 4”
Process Connection 316L stainless steel 2-½” – ¼ –18 NPT standard
4” – Lower mount ¼–18 NPT or ½–14 NPT standard;
Lower back mount ¼–18 NPT standard
Working Pressure Steady – 50% of full scale; over range protection –
125% of full scale
Working Temperature Ambient: -40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C)
Fluid: -4°F to 176°F (-20°C to 80°C)

Gauges
Open Front Stainless Steel Gauges - Continued

Model 656 (2-½") Stem Mounting¹ Stem Mounting¹ Front Flange Panel Mounting² U-clamp Panel Mounting²
6562 Lower Mount, ¼-18 6562 Center Back Mount, ¼-18 6562 Lower Back Mount, ¼-18 NPT 6562 Lower Back Mount, ¼-18
Model Number
NPT NPT NPT
Bourdon Tube 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Connection 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Ranges* Item Item Item Item
0-30" Hg VAC 256000 256024 256048 256072
30"-0-15 psi 256001 256025 256049 256073
30"-0-30 psi 256002 256026 256050 256074
30"-0-60 psi 256003 256027 256051 256075
30"-0-100 psi
D
256004 256028 256052 256076
30"-0-150 psi 256005 256029 256053 256077
0-15 psi 256007 256031 256055 256079
0-30 psi 256008 256032 256056 256080
0-60 psi 256009 256033 256057 256081
0-100 psi 256010 256034 256058 256082
0-160 psi 256011 256035 256059 256083
0-200 psi 256012 256036 256060 256084
0-300 psi 256013 256037 256061 256085
0-400 psi 256014 256038 256062 256086
0-600 psi 256015 256039 256063 256087
0-1000 psi 256016 256040 256064 256088
0-1500 psi 256017 256041 256065 256089
0-2000 psi 256018 256042 256066 256090
0-3000 psi 256019 256043 256067 256091
0-4000 psi 256020 256044 256068 256092
0-5000 psi 256021 256045 256069 256093
0-6000 psi 256022 256046 256070 256094
0-10000 psi 256023 256047 256071 256095
¹Single scale psi dials are standard, but dials can be changed out at the factory for kPa/psi, kPa, psi/bar, or bar
²Metric and dual scale dials are available.

Gauges
Open Front Stainless Steel Gauges - Continued

Model 656 (4") Stem Mounting Stem Mounting Front Flange Panel Mounting
6566 Lower Mount, ¼-18 6566 Lower Mount, ½-14 6566 Lower Back Mount, ¼-18
Model Number
NPT NPT NPT
Bourdon Tube 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Connection 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Ranges* Item Item Item
0-30" Hg VAC 356000 356025 356050
30"-0-15 psi 356001 356026 356051
30"-0-30 psi 356002 356027 356052
30"-0-60 psi 356003 356028 356053
30"-0-100 psi
D
356004 356029 356054
30"-0-150 psi 356005 356030 356055
0-15 psi 356007 356032 356057
0-30 psi 356008 356033 356058
0-60 psi 356009 356034 356059
0-100 psi 356010 356035 356060
0-160 psi 356011 356036 356061
0-200 psi 356012 356037 356062
0-300 psi 356013 356038 356063
0-400 psi 356014 356039 356064
0-600 psi 356015 356040 356065
0-800 psi 356016 356041 356066
0-1000 psi 356017 356042 356067
0-1500 psi 356018 356043 356068
0-2000 psi 356019 356044 356069
0-3000 psi 356020 356045 356070
0-6000 psi 356021 356046 356071
0-10000 psi 356022 356047 356072
0-14500 psi 356023 356048 356073
0-23000 psi 356024 356049 356074
* Metric and dual scale dials are available.

Gauges
Solid Front Stainless Steel Gauges

DESCRIPTION
Designed with safety as the top priority, the Model 659
provides users with a solid-front and pressure relieving
back design in all stainless steel construction. The 659
is ideal for applications in chemical and petrochemical
processing, offshore equipment, exploration, petroleum
storage, and many other demanding applications. The 659
is available in both 2-½” (63 mm) and 4” (100 mm) sizes,
panel mount and low mount configurations and dry or
liquid filled with glycerin, mineral oil, or silicone DC-200.
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 2-½” (63mm) and 4” (100mm)
Ranges 2-½” – 30” Hg-0 psi through 0 to 10000 psi 4” – 30” Hg-0
psi through 0 to 23000 psi
Accuracy Model 6592 (2-½”) – ±1.6% of full scale (Grade B)
Model 6596 (4”) – ±1.0% of full scale (Grade 1A)
Bourdon Tube 316L stainless steel
Model 6592 (2-½”) – Less than or equal to 800 psi, C

type Bourdon tube; greater than or equal to 1000 psi,
helical type Bourdon tube
Model 6596 (4”) – Less than or equal to 1000 psi, C type

Bourdon tube; greater than or equal to 1500 psi, helical
type Bourdon tube
Window 2-½” – Polycarbonate (laminated shatter-resistant glass

window optional)
4” – Laminated shatter-resistant glass window
Movement 304 stainless steel
Dial White aluiminum with black lettering. Single scale psi
dials are standard, but dials can be changed out for kPa/
psi, kPa, psi/bar, or bar.
Pointer 2-½” aluminum alloy, black painted; adjustable pointer on
4”, aluminum black
Case and Bezel Ring 304 stainless steel; bayonet type
Case Pressure Relief Safety back
Process Connection 316L stainless steel
2-½” – ¼-18 NPT standard
4” – LM ¼-18 NPT or ½-14 NPT standard; lower back
mount 14-18 NPT standard
Working Pressure Steady – 50% of full scale; over range protection – 125%
of full scale
Working Temperature Ambient: -40°F to 140°F (-40°C to 60°C)
Fluid: -4°F to 176°F (-20°C to 80°C)

Gauges
Solid Front Stainless Steel Gauges - Continued

Model 659
Stem Mounting Front Flange Panel Mounting
(2-½")
6592 Lower Mount, ¼-18 6592 Lower Back Mount, ¼-18
Model Number
NPT NPT
Bourdon Tube 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Connection 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Ranges* Item Item
0-30" Hg VAC 259000 259025
30"-0-15 psi 259001 259026
30"-0-30 psi 259002 259027
30"-0-60 psi 259003 259028
30"-0-100 psi 259004 259029 D
30"-0-150 psi 259005 259030
30"-0-200 psi 259006 259031
0-15 psi 259007 259032
0-30 psi 259008 259033
0-60 psi 259009 259034
0-100 psi 259010 259035
0-160 psi 259011 259036
0-200 psi 259012 259037
0-300 psi 259013 259038
0-400 psi 259014 259039
0-600 psi 259015 259040
0-1000 psi 259016 259041
0-1500 psi 259017 259042
0-2000 psi 259018 259043
0-3000 psi 259019 259044
0-4000 psi 259020 259045
0-5000 psi 259021 259046
0-6000 psi 259022 259047
0-10000 psi 259023 259048
0-15000 psi 259024 259049
* Metric and dual scale dials are available. Please add SR behind item number when ordering if you need a shatter-resistant glass window.

Gauges
Solid Front Stainless Steel Gauges - Continued

Model 659 (4") Stem Mounting Stem Mounting Front Flange Panel Mounting
6596 Lower Mount, ¼-18 6596 Lower Mount, ½-14 6596 Lower Back Mount, ¼-18
Model Number
NPT NPT NPT
Bourdon Tube 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Connection 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel
Ranges* Item Item Item
0-30" Hg VAC 359000 359029 359058
30"-0-15 psi 359001 359030 359059
30"-0-30 psi 359002 359031 359060
30"-0-60 psi 359003 359032 359061
D 30"-0-100 psi 359004 359033 359062
30"-0-150 psi 359005 359034 359063
0-15 psi 359008 359037 359066
0-30 psi 359009 359038 359067
0-60 psi 359010 359039 359068
0-100 psi 359011 359040 359069
0-160 psi 359012 359041 359070
0-200 psi 359013 359042 359071
0-300 psi 359014 359043 359072
0-400 psi 359015 359044 359073
0-600 psi 359016 359045 359074
0-1000 psi 359018 359047 359076
0-1500 psi 359019 359048 359077
0-2000 psi 359020 359049 359078
0-3000 psi 359021 359050 359079
0-5000 psi 359023 359052 359081
0-10000 psi 359025 359054 359083
0-15000 psi 359027 359056 359085
0-23000 psi 359028 359057 359086
* Metric and dual scale dials are available.

Gauges
General Purpose Gauge

Series P-500
DESCRIPTION
U.S. Gauge Series P-500 utility gauges provide
economical, reliable service in a wide variety of
applications including pumps, compressors, and other
equipment. Gauges are available in 1-½", 2", 2-½", 3-½",
and 4-½" steel cases in center-back and lower mount
configurations.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 1-½", 2", 2-½", 3-½", and 4-½"
Ranges 30" Hg VAC through 0-5000 psi D
Accuracy ±3-2-3% (Grade B)
Window Glass except 1-½" is polycarbonate
Movement Brass
Dial Galvalume
Pointer Aluminum, painted black
Case Black painted steel
Connection 1-½” - ¹∕₈-27 NPT Low and Center Back Mount; 2” - ¹∕₈-27
NPT and ¼-18 NPT Low Mount and Center Back Mount;
2-½” - ¹∕₈-27 NPT and ¼-18 NPT Low Mount and Center
Back Mount; 3-½” - ¼-18 NPT Low Mount; 4-½” - ¼-18
NPT Low Mount
1-½" 2" 2-½" 3-½" 4-½"

Connection Ranges
Item Item Item Item Item
⅛-27 CBM 0-30" Hg VAC 146021A 163930 - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-15 psi 146010A - - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-30 psi 166320 - - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-60 psi 166321 055155A - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-100 psi 166322 046776A - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-160 psi 166323 070791A - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-200 psi 146015A 102673A - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-300 psi 146016A 051805A - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-600 psi 146017A - - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-1000 psi 146018A - - - -
⅛-27 CBM 0-2000 psi 146019A - - - -
⅛-27 LM 0-30" Hg VAC 146020A 47225A - - -
⅛-27 LM 0-15 psi 146000A 052420A - - -
⅛-27 LM 0-30 psi 166327 163931 059306A - -
⅛-27 LM 0-60 psi 146002A 164005 058129A - -
¼-18 LM 0-30" Hg VAC - 163712 171222A 171223A 5333A
⅛-27 LM 0-100 psi 166318 163271 049660A - -
⅛-27 LM 0-160 psi 146004A 048302A 048536A - -
⅛-27 LM 0-200 psi 166777 046645A 050852A - -
⅛-27 LM 0-300 psi 146006A 048363A 046647A - -
⅛-27 LM 0-600 psi 146007A - - - -

Gauges
General Purpose Gauge - Continued

1-½" 2" 2-½" 3-½" 4-½"
Connection Ranges
Item Item Item Item Item
⅛-27 LM 0-1000 psi 146008A - - - -
⅛-27 LM 0-2000 psi 146009A - - - -
¼-18 LM 30"-0-15 psi - 47000A 47001A 5493A 63754A
¼-18 LM 30"-0-30 psi - 167218 47105A 5495A 5549A
¼-18 LM 30"-0-60 psi - 57548A 46646A 5496A 12290A
¼-18 LM 30"-0-150 psi - 50517A 47411A 5499A 12292A
¼-18 LM 30"-0-300 psi - - 58156A 15936A -
¼-18 CBM 0-15 psi - 046987A 052827A - -
D ¼-18 CBM 0-30 psi - 163949 165213 - -
¼-18 CBM 0-60 psi - 163272 165214 - -
¼-18 CBM 0-100 psi - 163273 163284 - -
¼-18 CBM 0-160 psi - 163274 163285 - -
¼-18 CBM 0-200 psi - 163275 163286 - -
¼-18 CBM 0-300 psi - 163276 163287 - -
¼-18 CBM 0-600 psi - 046991A 050851A - -
¼-18 CBM 0-1000 psi - - 050870A - -
¼-18 CBM 0-2000 psi - - 171399A - -
¼-18 CBM 0-3000 psi - - 171401A - -
¼-18 LM 0-15 psi - 047615A 047102A 5502A 5546A
¼-18 LM 0-30 psi - 163149 163278 168536 5804A
¼-18 LM 0-60 psi - 163269 163279 168537 5551A
¼-18 LM 0-100 psi - 162988 163280 168538 5554A
¼-18 LM 0-160 psi - 163270 163281 168539 5559A
¼-18 LM 0-200 psi - 163147 163282 168540 5561A
¼-18 LM 0-300 psi - 163148 163283 168541 5563A
¼-18 LM 0-400 psi - 047492A 049611A 5515A 12265A
¼-18 LM 0-600 psi - 047493A 046648A 5516A 5337A
¼-18 LM 0-1000 psi - 047494A 047496A 5519A 12266A
¼-18 LM 0-2000 psi - - 171398A - -
¼-18 LM 0-3000 psi - - 171400A - -
¼-18 LM 0-5000 psi - - 143072A - -
⅛-27 LM 30"-0-15 psi - 66662A - - -
⅛-27 LM 30"-0-60 psi - 47925A - - -
⅛-27 LM 30"-0-150 psi - 49609A - - -
Other sizes, ranges, and mounting configurations are available for OEM quantities

Gauges
General Purpose Gauge for OEMs

Series P-575
DESCRIPTION
U.S. Gauge P-575 utility gauges provide economical,
reliable service in a wide range of applications including
pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Other sizes,
ranges, and mounting configurations are available for
OEM quantities.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 1-½" and 2"
Ranges 0-30 through 0-300 psi (metric or dual scale available)
Accuracy ±3-2-3% of span (Grade B) D
Window Polystyrene (optional polycarbonate)
Movement Brass
Dial Galvalume (ABS optional)
Pointer Galvalume
Case ABS
Connection ⅛-27 NPT, ¼-18 NPT, center-back or lower mount

Gauges
Low Lead General Purpose Gauge

Model 500LL
DESCRIPTION
U.S. Gauge Low Lead Series P-500 gauges adhere to
the “Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act” enacted by
the U.S. Congress January 2011. U.S. Gauge Low Lead
Series P-500 utility gauges provide economical, reliable
service in a wide variety of applications including potable
water pumps, compressors, and other equipment. Gauges
are available in 1-½" and 2" steel cases in center-back
and lower mount configurations. Other sizes, ranges, and
mounting configurations are available for OEM quantities.
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes 1-½", 2"
Ranges 0-30 through 0-160 psi
Accuracy ±3-2-3% (Grade B)
Window 1-½" is polycarbonate, 2" is glass
Movement Brass
Dial Galvalume
Pointer Aluminum, painted black
Case Black painted steel
Connection Brass, center-back or lower mount ⅛-27 NPT for 1-½";
¼-18 NPT for 2"
1-½" 2"
Item Ranges Item Ranges
Connection Connection
166327NL 0-30 psi ⅛-27 LM 163149NL 0-30 psi ¼-18 LM
146002ANL 0-60 psi ⅛-27 LM 163269NL 0-60 psi ¼-18 LM
166318NL 0-100 psi ⅛-27 LM 162988NL 0-100 psi ¼-18 LM
146004ANL 0-160 psi ⅛-27 LM 163270NL 0-160 psi ¼-18 LM
166320NL 0-30 psi ⅛-27 CBM 163949NL 0-30 psi ¼-18 CBM
LM - Lower Mount , CBM - Center Back Mount

Gauges
NoShok
All Stainless Steel Gauge

400/500 Series
DESCRIPTION
NoShok's 400/500 Series dry and liquid filled, all stainless steel
gauges are the ultimate corrosion resistant, heavy-duty, vacuum
and pressure gauges. They are used in corrosive service world-wide
where ruggedness and reliability are critical. Typical applications
include chemical and petroleum refineries, pharmaceutical, offshore
drilling and production, paper mills and more.
FEATURES
• The ultimate corrosion-resistant heavy-duty vacuum and pressure gauges
• Extreme high pressure ranges available from vacuum through 100,000 psi
• 1-1/2”, 2”, 2-1/2”, 4” and 6" sizes – bottom or back connected
• Cases and polished bezels are constructed of solid 304 stainless steel, with 316 stainless steel internals
D
• Vacuum, compound and zero based ranges
• Bourdon tubes are matched to stainless steel precision movements and balanced pointers for smooth, accurate
indication
• Glycerine filling (in the 500 Series) further enhances gauge life by constantly lubricating the movement and dampening
the effects of vibration, pulsation and shock.
• NoShok's agriculture ammonia gauges (25-406 and 25-506) feature a nickel-plated brass connection with a 316
stainless steel Bourdon tube
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Sizes 1-1/2", 2-1/2", 4" and 6"
Connection 1/8" NPT on 1-1/2" sizes, 1/4" NPT on 2", 2-1/2" and 4" sizes, 1/2" NPT on 4" and 6" sizes. Available in bottom and back
configurations.
Case 304 stainless steel
Lens Acrylic on 1-1/2" and 2", Trogamide on 2-1/2", Instrument glass on 4" and safety glass on 6" sizes
Bourdon Tube 316 stainless steel
Movement Stainless steel
Available Ranges Vacuum and compound through 100,000 psi. Dependent on model and size.
Options and Accessories Panel mount options, orifices, adjustable pointers, max indicating pointers, metric and special dials, special connections,
extreme high pressure ranges and more.
Operating Limitations Working Pressure
Dynamic 60% of dial range
Static 90% of dial range
Ambient Temperature
400 Series -40 °F to 140 °F (-40 °C to 60 °C)
500 Series - Glycerine Fill -4 °F to 140 °F (-20 °C to 60 °C)
500 Series - Special Fill -40 °F to 140 °F (-40 °C to 60 °C)
Media Temperature
400 Series - 1-1/2" and 2-1/2" -40 °F to 212 °F (-40 °C to 100 °C)
400 Series -4" and 6" -40 °F to 392°F (-40 °C to 200 °C)
500 Series - Glycerine Fill -4 °F to 212 °F (-20 °C to 100 °C)
500 Series - Special Fill -40 °F to 212 °F (-40 °C to 100 °C)
Accuracy
400 Series - 1-1/2" ±2.5%
400 Series - 2-1/2" ±1.5%
400 Series - 4 and 6" ±1.0%
500 Series - 2-1/2" ±1.5%
500 Series - 4 and 6" ±1.0%
Warranty 400 Series: One Year; 500 Series: Three Years
For further accuracy, standard dial configurations, dial layouts and warranty information consult specific product catalogs.

Gauges
ABS & Stainless Steel Gauge

900 Series
DESCRIPTION
NoShok's ABS and Stainless Steel cased liquid filled
gauges are high quality gauges that incorporate unique
design features aimed at extended service life and
reliability. They are used world-wide where pulsation,
vibration and shock are present and the media is not
corrosive to brass
FEATURES
• Extremely high quality pressure gauges available in a liquid filled version for extended service life and shock
resistance
D • Ranges available from vacuum to 15,000 psi
• 1-1/2",2,2-1/2”, 4" sizes - bottom or back connected
• Light weight shatter-resistant ABS case with acrylic lens for extra strength, or 304 stainless steel case with
polycarbonate lens
• Unique O-ring case and connection seals guard against leakage and protect against shock and vibration
• Relief disc on top or back provides positive case relief
• Brass and copper alloy movement
• High grade glycerin fill dampens the effects of pulsation,vibration and shock loads, and provides lubrication of the
movement
• Volume oriented
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Sizes 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2" and 4"
Connection 1/8" NPT back connection on 1-1/2" size, 1/4" NPT bottom and back on 2-1/2" and 4" sizes, SAE J1926-37/16-20
Adjustable
Case ABS or 304 stainless steel dependent on model
Lens Acrylic or polycarbonate on 1-1/2" and 2-1/2" ; instrument glass on 4"
Bourdon Tube Brass and copper alloy
Movement Brass and Delrin®, and all brass
Available Ranges Vacuum and compound through 15,000 psi
Options and Accessories Panel mount options, orifices, adjustable pointers, max indicating pointers, metric and special dials, special connec-
tions, extreme high pressure ranges and more.
Operating Limitations Working Pressure
Dynamic 60% of dial range
Static 90% of dial range
Temperature
Ambient -4 °F to 140 °F (-20 °C to 60 °C) (Glycerine fill)
Media -40 °F to 140 °F (-40 °C to 60 °C) (Special fill)
Accuracy
900 Series - 1-1/2" and 2" ±2.5%
900 Series - 2-1/2" ±1.5%
900 Series - 4" ±1.0%
Warranty Three years
For further accuracy, standard dial configurations, dial layouts and warranty information consult specific product catalogs.

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Specialty Gauges
Dwyer
Magnehelic Differential Pressure Gauges

2000 Series
DESCRIPTION
Select the Magnehelic® gage for high accuracy--guaranteed within 2%
of full scale--and for the wide choice of 81 models available to suit your
needs precisely. Using Dwyer's simple, frictionless Magnehelic® gage
movement, it quickly indicates low air or non-corrosive gas pressures--
either positive, negative (vacuum) or differential. The design resists shock,
vibration and over-pressures. No manometer fluid to evaporate, freeze or
cause toxic or leveling problems. It's inexpensive, too.
The Magnehelic® gage is the industry standard to measure fan and blower
pressures, filter resistance, air velocity, furnace draft, pressure drop D
across orifice plates, liquid levels with bubbler systems and pressures in
fluid amplifier or fluidic systems. It also checks gas-air ratio controls and
automatic valves, and monitors blood and respiratory pressures in medical
care equipment
FEATURES
• Filter Monitoring
• Air Velocity with Dwyer Pitot Tube
• Blower Vacuum Monitoring
• Fan Pressure Indication
• Duct, Room or Building Pressures
• Clean Room Positive Pressure Indication
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases. (Natural Gas option available.)
Note: May be used with hydrogen. Order a Buna-N diaphragm. Pressures must be less than 35 psi.
Wetted Materials: Consult Rawson.
Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover, Exterior finish is coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.
Accuracy: ±2% of FS (±3% on -0, -100PA, -125PA, -10MM and ±4% on -00, -60PA, -6MM ranges), throughout range at 70°F (21.1°C).
Pressure Limits: -20 in Hg. to 15 psig.† (-0.677 bar to 1.034 bar); MP option; 35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52 bar).
Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 psig (1.72 bar), standard gages only.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 140°F.* (-6.67 to 60°C).
Size: 4" (101.6 mm) diameter dial face.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult Rawson for other position orientations.
Process Connections: 1/8" female NPT duplicate high and low pressure taps - one pair side and one pair back.
Weight: 1 lb 2 oz (510 g); MP & HP 2 lb 2 oz (963 g).
Standard Accessories: Two 1/8" NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two 1/8" pipe thread to rubber tubing adapters and three flush mounting adapterswith
screws. (Mounting and snap ring retainer substituted for three adapters in MP & HP gage accessories.)
Agency Approval: RoHS. (Note: -SP models not RoHS approved.)
†For applications with high cycle rate within gage total pressure rating, next higher rating is recommended. See Options Page.
*Low temperature models available as special option.

Photohelic Switch/Gauge
A3000 Series
DESCRIPTION
Photohelic® Switch/Gages function as versatile, highly repeatable
pressure switches combined with a precise pressure gage employing
the time-proven Magnehelic® gage design. The Photohelic® switch/gage
measures and controls positive, negative or differential pressures of air
and compatible gases. Standard models are rated to 25 psig (1.7 bar)
with options to 35 (2.4) or 80 (5.5 bar) psig. Single pressure 36000S
models measure to 6000 psig (413 bar) with a 9000 psig (620 bar) rating.
Two phototransistor actuated, DPDT relays are included for low/high
limit control. Easy to adjust set point indicators are controlled by knobs
D located on the gage face. Individual set point deadband is one pointer
width - less than 1% of full scale. Set points can be interlocked to provide
variable deadband - ideal for control of fans, dampers, etc. Gage reading
is continuous and unaffected by switch operation, even during loss of
electrical power. Choose from full scale pressure ranges from a low 0-.25"
(0-6 mm) w.c. up to 30 psi (21 bar); single positive pressure to 6000 psig
(413 bar).
FEATURES
• Air Conditioner Systems
• Clean Rooms
• Fume Exhaust Systems
SPECIFICATIONS
Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
Wetted Materials: Consult Rawson.
Accuracy: ±2% of FS at 70°F (21.1°C). ±3% on -0 and ±4% on -00 models.
Pressure Limits: -20" Hg. to 25 psig (-0.677 to 1.72 bar). MP option; 35 psig (2.41 bar), HP option; 80 psig (5.52 bar). 36003S – 36010S; 150 psig
(10.34 bar). 36020S and higher; 1.2 x full scale pressure.
Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F. (-6.67 to 48.9°C) Low temperature option available.
Process Connections: 1/8" female NPT.
Size: 4" (101.6 mm) dial face, 5" (127 mm) O.D. x 8-1/4" (209.55 mm)
Weight: 4 lb (1.81 kg).
Switch Specifications
Switch Type: Each setpoint has 2 Form C relays (DPDT).
Repeatability: ±1% of FS.
Electrical Rating: 10A @ 28 VDC, 10A @ 120, 240 VAC;
Electrical Connections: Screw terminals. Use 167°F (75°C) copper conductors only.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz; 240 VAC & 24 VAC power optional.
Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult Rawson for other position orientations.
Set Point Adjustment: Adjustable knobs on face.
Agency Approvals: CE, CSA, UL. NOTE: Optional (-EXPL) Explosion-proof Enclosure does not possess any agency approvals.

Parker Autoclave Engineers
Instrument Quality Gauges

DESCRIPTION
Pressure gauges are offered for use in low, medium and high pressure systems.
Instrument quality gauges are available to pressure of 80,000 psi (5115.7 bar).
FEATURES
• Accuracy within ±0.5% of full scale range
• Plastic dial cover/solid front aluminum alloy case
• Blow-out back panel for pressure relief in the event of Bourdon tube failure
• 316 Stainless steel Bourdon tubes**
• Precision stainless steel movement for accuracy and resistance to atmospheric
corrosion
• Pointer zero adjustment located on front of gauge behind dial cover for convenience
Calibrated in psi only
Pressure Range Minor Interval Value Dial Diameter
D
Item Connection
(psi) (psi) (inches)
P-0499-CG Bottom 0-1000 10 4-½”
P-0479-CG Bottom 0-1500 10 4-½”
P-0480-CG Bottom 0-3000 20 4-½”
P-0481-CG Bottom 0-5000 50 4-½”
P-0482-CG Bottom 0-10,000 100 4-½”
P-0483-CG Bottom 0-15,000 100 4-½”
P-0487-CG Bottom 0-20,000 200 4-½”
P-0488-CG** Bottom 0-30,000 200 6”
P-0489-CG** Bottom 0-50,000 500 6”
P-0490-CG** Bottom 0-80,000 1,000 6”

P-0482B-CG Back 0-10,000 100 4-½”
P-0483B-CG Back 0-15,000 100 4-½”
P-0487B-CG Back 0-20,000 200 4-½”
P-0488B-CG Back 0-30,000 250 6”
P-0489B-CG Back 0-50,000 500 6”
Optional Electrical Contact Face

Fits Gauges Dial Diameter
Item
(inches)
P-0713 4-½”
P-0714 6”
Note:
Gauge connections are 1/4” (F250C) coned-and-threaded connection. Furnished with collar and gland.
Flush panel mounting - Panel mounting kits are stocked to permit flush panel mounting of any instrument
quality gauge. These will be furnished at an additional charge when specified on order -- add “PM” to
order number. To order gauge panel mount kit seperate please contact Rawson.
Optional electrical contact face - Available for all instrument quality gauges. With adjustable low and high
electrical contacts, this option permits gauges to provide pressure control for automatic or remote opera-
tion, or for fail-safe set points.
**Bourdon Tube material for 0-80,000 psi (0-5116 bar) and 0-50,000 psi (0-3447 bar) gauge is Inconel
718. Bourdon Tube material for 0-30,000 psi (0-2068 bar) gauge is K Monel.

Orange Research
"Piston Type" Differential Pressure Gauge/

Transmitter/Switch
1200/1300 Series
DESCRIPTION
The differential pressure gauges with piston type sensor
are for liquid applications where durability and long life
are required. Acting in the place of two pressure gauges,
these units allow for one simple reading on an easy-to-
read scale. Popular in filtration, flow and level applications,
they are a low cost alternative to bourdon tube and
bellows designs.
D A magnet attached to the dial pointer shaft follows a

spring-loaded sensor magnet that moves as changes.
In this way the differential pressure displacement of the
sensor is translated to our easy to read 2.5 to 6-inch
diameter dials. Switch, relay or transmitter outputs can
accompany the gauges or be supplied on their own,
without a dial.
FEATURES
• Heavy duty — to 10,000 psi line pressure
• Weatherproof design and rugged construction
• Gauge, switch and transmitter versions
• Popular in filtration and flow measurements
• 0-5 to 0-1000 psid
• Dial cases, mounting brackets and array of standard options to choose from
Accuracy Porting
Maximum line pressure/
Item Differential pressure range (F.S.) (Many porting Electrical Available**
temperature
(Ascending) types available)
1201PG/PGS/PS 0-5 to 0-150 psid (0-0.33 to 0-10 3000 psig (200 bar) 200°F 2% ¼” NPT 1 switch no enclosure
bar) (93°C)
1203PG/PGS/PS/ 0-5 to 0-150 psid (0-0.33 to 0-10 5000 psig (340 bar) 200°F 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches 1 relay
PGT/PT bar) (93°C) transmitter Class 1 Div. 2/
NEMA 4X For Class 1 Div. 1,
see pg. 26
1206PG* 0-5 to 0-150 psid (0-0.33 to 0-10 10,000 psig (680 bar) 200°F 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches, 1 relay NEMA
bar) (93°C) 4X
1306PG* 0-100 to 0-1000 psid (0-7 to 0-67 7500 psig (482 bar) 200°F 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches, 1 relay NEMA
bar) (93°C) 4X
P=Piston G=Gauge S=Switch T=Transmitter

*PS and PGS transmitter versions available
**NEMA 4X switch models have a ½ inch NPT conduit port as standard. A DIN 43650A-PG11 with mating connector is optional, rated IP65 & NEMA 4X

Differential Pressure Gauge/Transmitter/Switch

with Explosion Proof Enclosure
1204/1504/1514/1804 Series
DESCRIPTION
This explosion-proof line incorporates the same piston
or diaphragm sensors and pressure bodies found in the
1200, 1500 and 1800 Series. The heavy-duty enclosures
are designed to seal the electronics from environments
where flammable gases or vapors often exist and to
contain any potential explosions. Orange Research adds
an additional extension pin with a secondary magnet to
trigger reed switches or to control transmitter output. The
secondary magnet and electronics are located in a sealed D
explosion-proof box adjacent to the pressure body. The
switches and electrical connections are housed in special
UL, CSA, FM and ATEX approved enclosures.
The cast aluminum housings have two mounting lugs,

two 3/4" NPT electrical conduit ports, and meet the follow
specifications: Class 1, Gr. B, C, & D; Class 2, Gr. E,
F and Class 3. They also meet NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9, & 12
specifications.
FEATURES
• Class 1, Div. 1 rated enclosures
• Rugged, weatherpoof design
• 0-5” H2O to 0-300 psid
Accuracy Porting
Item Differential pressure range (F.S.) (Many porting types Electrical Available
temperature
(Ascending) available)
1204PGS/PS/ 0-5 to 0-150 psid 0-0.33 to 0-10 bar) 5000 psig (340 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches 1 or 2
PGT/PT relays transmitter Class
1 Div. 1
1504DGS/DS/ 0-5 to 0-300 psid (0-0.33 to 0-20 bar) 3000 psig (100 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches 1 or 2
DGT/DT relays transmitter Class
1 Div. 1
1514DGS/DS/ 0-1 to 0-50 psid (0-0.07 to 0-3.3 bar) 1500 psig (100 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches 1 or 2
DGT/DT relays transmitter Class
1 Div. 1
1804DGS/DS/ 0-5” H2O to 0-8 psid (0-125 mm H2O Aluminum body 100 psig (7 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches 1 or 2
DGT/DT to 0-0.5 bar) bar)/200°F (93°C) Stainless steel relays transmitter Class
body 150 psig (10 bar)/200°F (93°C) 1 Div. 1
P=Piston D=Diaphragm G=Gauge S=Switch T=Transmitter

Heavy Duty "Diaphragm Type" Differential

Pressure Gauge/Transmitter/Switch
1502/1533 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 1502 and 1533 Series have a heavy-duty diaphragm
that is designed for high differential pressures, to 300
psid. This extends the range of the diaphragm sensor
differential pressure line – much higher than the more
sensitive 1516 model. Though heavy-duty, the diaphragms
are still flexible and repeatable enough to match the ±2%
accuracy of other differential pressure gauges.
D Series 1502 models are availble as a stand along gauge

(DG) or gauge with a single switch option (uncovered),
while the Series 1533 comes in 4 different model
configurations with up to two switches or a transmitter
within a NEMA 4X enclosure.
FEATURES
• High differential pressure ranges
• 0-5 to 0-300 psid
Accuracy Porting
Item Differential pressure range** (F.S.) (Many porting Electrical Available***
temperature
(Ascending) types available)
1502DG 0-10* to 0-300 psid (0-0.33 to 0-20 3000 psig (200 bar)/200°F 2% ¼” NPT Not available
bar) (93°C)
1533DGS/DS/ 0-10* to 0-300 psid (0-0.33 to 0-20 3000 psig (200 bar)/200°F 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches NEMA 4X
DGT/DT bar) (93°C) transmitter
D=Diaphragm G=Gauge S=Switch T=Transmitter

*Fluorosilicone diaphragm is standard for 0-10 psid, Buna diaphragm is standard for above 0-10 psid
**Ranges available by diaphragm material:
• Fluorosilicone: 0-10 to 0-300 psid
• Buna: 0-15 to 0-300 psid
• EPDM: 0-15 to 0-300 psid
• Viton: 0-25 to 0-300 psid
***NEMA 4X switch models have a ½ inch NPT conduit port as standard. A DIN 43650A-PG11 with mating connector is optional, rated IP65 & NEMA 4X

"Diaphragm Type" Low Differential Pressure Gauge/

Transmitter/Switch
1500/1800 Series
DESCRIPTION
The popular 1516 Series models measures from 0-1 psid
up to 0-50 psid.The 1800 Series models include Orange
Research's most sensitive diaphragm which can measure
from 0-5” H2O to 0-8 psid.The diaphragm type sensor
separates the high and low pressure ports making them
popular for gases as well as liquids. There is no bypass
between these ports as with piston models. As differential
pressure changes the diaphragm sensor magnet moves
proportionally. This movement is tracked by a pointer D
magnet, which rotates, relaying the reading onto an easy
to read 2.5 to 6 inch dial.
FEATURES
• Low differential pressure ranges at high line pressures, down to 0-5 inches H2O
• Popular in filtration, flow and level measurements
• 0-5” H2O to 0-50 psid
Accuracy Porting
Differential pressure
Item Maximum line pressure/ temperature (F.S.) (Many porting types Electrical Available*
range
(Ascending) available)
1516DG/DGS/DS/ 0-1 to 0-50 psid (0-0.07 1500 psig (100 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches
DGT/DT to 0-3.3 bar) transmitter Class 1
Div. 2
1518DG/DGS 10-0-10 to 50-0-50 psid 1500 psig (100 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches Class
(0.5-0-0.5 to 3.3-0-3.3 1 Div. 2
bar)
1831DG/DGS 0-5” H2O to 0-8 psid Aluminum body 100 psig (7 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches No
(0-125 mm H2O to 0-0.5 Stainless steel body 150 psig (10 bar)/200°F enclosure
bar) (93°C)
1833DGS/DS/DGT/DT 0-5” H2O to 0-8 psid Aluminum body 100 psig (7 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches 1
(0-125 mm H2O to 0-0.5 Stainless steel body 150 psig (10 bar)/200°F relay transmitter
bar) (93°C) Class 1 Div.
1835DG/DGS/DS 5-0-5” H2O to 8-0-8 psid Aluminum body 100 psig (7 bar)/200°F (93°C) 2% ¼” NPT 1 or 2 switches No
(125 mm-0-125 mm H2O Stainless steel body 150 psig (10 bar)/200°F enclosure
to 0.5-0-0.5 bar) (93°C)
D=Diaphragm G=Gauge S=Switch T=Transmitter

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Gauge Accessories
U.S. Gauge
Sta-Kool™ Cooling Element

DESCRIPTION
AMETEK USG recommends using a Sta-Kool™, capillary
or diaphragm seal to protect pressure gauges, pressure
transmitters or pressure switches (not supplied by USG) from
process temperatures exceeding 190ºF. Anything exceeding
190ºF will start to degrade weld joints and electronics. The
Sta-Kool™ can be either threaded or welded (to eliminate a
potential leak path) to any pressure gauge with ½" NPT male
connection made out of compatible material. Furthermore,
the Sta-Kool™ cooling element can be attached in between
a pressure gauge and diaphragm seal for the most
D comprehensive process measurement protection possible,
protecting the instrument from pulsation and temperature
extremes.
SPECIFICATIONS
Connection ½-14 NPT male X ½-14 NPT female
Body Material 316L stainless steel
Weight 15 oz. (0.4 kg)
Operating Parameters 5000 psi maximum at 100°F (38°C) 750ºF (400°C)
maximum at 3500 psi TEMPERATURE REDUCTION PROFILE
Results based on actual laboratory environmental
Item Description conditions and is to be used as reference only. Actual
250471 Sta-Kool 316L SST cooling element usage results in the field may vary based on additional
process parameters subjected to the device.

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Gauge & Seal
Assemblies
US Gauge
All Welded Process Gauge and Diaphragm Seal

XR-81 1st Generation
DESCRIPTION
The XR-81 1st Generation is an all welded system combines
the proven durability and performance of US Gauge 4-1/2"
SOLFRUNT 1981 dry 316L SST process gauge and M&G
all welded 316L SST diaphragm seal with male threaded
connection. This system is NACE MR-01-03 and NACE MR-
01-75/ISO 15156-3 compliant and offers superior protection
in corrosive and hazardous media applications than
standalone gauges. Designated operating pressure is 3000
psi at 100°F and has a maximum pressure rating of 5000 psi.
D
FEATURES
• Cost effective
• Best solution for operator safety
• Leak-proof – all joints are welded
• Seamless bourdon tube gauge standard
• Compact size
• Tamper resistant
• 4:1 safety ratio
• Designed to withstand 4X of full scale pressure on the gauge
APPLICATIONS
• Refineries
• Petrochemical Manufacturing
• Oilfield Equipment
• Chemical Manufacturing
SPECIFICATIONS
Gauge Model 1981 with PET case, 316L SST socket and 316L SST seamless Bourdon tube
Ranges From 0 to 15 psi to 0 to 3000 psi
Process Connection ½ NPT male connection standard, other connections available upon request
Seal Wetted Parts 316L stainless steel, MONEL, HASTELLOY C bodies; 316L stainless steel, MONEL, HASTELLOY C and Tantalum diaphragms; other wetted
materials may be available upon request
Seal Fill Fluid DC 200 silicone standard; other fills available upon request
Options Orifice restrictors on gauge; flush port on seal, Sta-Kool™ cooling element, shatter-resistant window on gauge, and capillaries

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Gauge and Seal
Assemblies
All Welded Process Gauge and

Diaphragm Seal - Continued
Model XR-81 1st Generation
Connection Size ½" M NPT ½" M NPT ½" M NPT
Case Type Dry EZ-Fill EZ-Fill
Gauge Model 1981 1981 1981
Seal Upper Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
Diaphragm Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
Seal Lower Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
PSI PSI PSI
D
Dial Scale¹
System Fill Type¹ DC 200 DC 200 DC 200
Gauge Case Fill Fluid²: N/A Dry See Note
Pressure Range Item Item Item
0 - 15 PSI 150022SS 170022SSL 170022SSLX
0 - 30 PSI 150023SS 170023SSL 170023SSLX
0 - 60 PSI 150024SS 170024SSL 170024SSLX
0 - 100 PSI 150025SS 170025SSL 170025SSLX
0 - 160PSI 150026SS 170026SSL 170026SSLX
0 - 200 PSI 150027SS 170027SSL 170027SSLX
0 - 300 PSI 150028SS 170028SSL 170028SSLX
0 - 400 PSI 150029SS 170029SSL 170029SSLX
0 - 600 PSI 150030SS 170030SSL 170030SSLX
0 - 800 PSI 150031SS 170031SSL 170031SSLX
0 - 1,000 PSI 150032SS 170032SSL 170032SSLX
0 - 1,500 PSI 150033SS 170033SSL 170033SSLX
¹ Contact Rawson for dual scale dials and single scale metric dials.
² For factory case liquid filling, substitute LG for Glycerin and LS for Silicone for LX suffix. Contact Rawson for other case or system fill options.

Assemblies

Diaphragm Seal
XR-81 New Design with Finned Top All Welded Seals
DESCRIPTION
The new XR-81 Finned Top model is an all welded system
which combines the proven durability and performance of
US Gauge 4-1/2" SOLFRUNT 1981 dry 316L SST process
gauge and a modified M&G all welded 316L SST diaphragm
seal with male threaded connection. The new design features
cooling fins added to the bottom of the seal body. The fins
allow for higher operating temperature while protecting the
pressure gauge as well as increased strength to preventing
D
rupture. The fins are able to reduce the process temp from
225°F to 160°F by the time it sees the bourdon tube. The
option of including a flushing port to the seal is available.
This system is NACE MR-01-03 and NACE MR-01-75/ISO

15156-3 compliant and offers superior protection in corrosive
and hazardous media applications than standalone gauges.
Designated operating pressure is 3000 psi at 100°F and has
a maximum pressure rating of 5000 psi.
FEATURES
• Cost effective
• Compact size
APPLICATIONS
• Refineries
SPECIFICATIONS
Gauge Model 1981 with PET case, 316L SST socket and 316L SST seamless Bourdon tube
Seal Wetted Parts 316L stainless steel, MONEL, HASTELLOY C bodies; 316L stainless steel, MONEL, HASTELLOY C and Tantalum diaphragms; other
wetted materials may be available upon request

Assemblies

Model XR-81 New Design with Finned Top All-Welded Seals
Connection Size ½" M NPT ½" M NPT ½" M NPT ½" M NPT
Dial Scale¹ PSI PSI PSI PSI
Case Type Dry EZ Fill EZ Fill EZ Fill
Gauge Model 1981 1981 1981 1981
Seal Upper Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
Diaphragm Material 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
316L SST 316L SST 316L SST 316L SST
D
Seal Lower Material
System Fill Type² DC 200 DC 200 DC 200 DC 200
Gauge Case Fill Fluids N/A Dry Glycerin DC 200
Pressure Range Item Item Item Item
0 - 15 psi XR1015P27LLRL XRL015P27LLRL XRL015P27LLRLK XRL015P27LLRLL
0 - 1000 psi XR110CP27LLRL XRL10CP27LLRL XRL10CP27LLRLK XRL10CP27LLRLL
For Flushing Connection change the 9th character to a 9.

¹ Contact Rawson for dual scale dials and single scale metric dials.
² For factory case liquid filling, substitute LG for Glycerin and LS for Silicone for LX suffix. Contact Rawson for other case
or system fill options.
Diaphragm seal filled with silicon standard. Other fill fluids, such as Halocarbon also available.

Assemblies

Diaphragm Seal
XR-86
DESCRIPTION
The XR-86 all-welded system combines the proven durability
and performance of US Gauge 4-1/2" SOLFRUNT Process
Gauge and M&G Diaphragm Seal. The XR-86 is for
preferring customers the SOLFRUNT 1986 process gauge
with MONEL socket and MONEL seamless bourdon tube or
applications requiring exotic metals mounted and welded to
the M&G XR Diaphragm Seal. In addition, the XR-86 all-
welded system us NACE MR-01-03 and NACE MR-01-75/
D
ISO 15156-3 compliant and offers superior protection in
corrosive and hazardous media applications than standalone
gauges.
FEATURES
• Cost effective
• Compact size
APPLICATIONS
• Refineries
SPECIFICATIONS
Gauge Model 1986 with PET case, MONEL socket and MONEL seamless Bourdon tube
Seal Wetted Parts 316L stainless steel, MONEL, HASTELLOY C bodies; 316L stainless steel, MONEL, HASTELLOY C and Tantalum diaphragms; other
wetted materials may be available upon request

Assemblies

Model XR-86 1st Generation All-Welded Seals
Connection Size ½" M NPT ½" M NPT
Dial Scale¹ PSI PSI
Case Type E-Z Fill E-Z Fill
Gauge Model 1986 1986
Seal Upper Material 316L SST 316L SST
Diaphragm Material MONEL MONEL
MONEL MONEL
D
Seal Lower Material
System Fill Type¹ DC 200 DC 200
Case Fill Fluid Type² Dry See Note 2 Below
Pressure Range Item Item
0 - 15 psi 170066KSL 170066KSLX
0 - 30 psi 170067KSL 170067KSLX
0 - 60 psi 170068KSL 170068KSLX
0 - 100 psi 170069KSL 170069KSLX
0 - 160 psi 170070KSL 170070KSLX
0 - 200 psi 170071KSL 170071KSLX
0 - 300 psi 170072KSL 170072KSLX
0 - 400 psi 170073KSL 170073KSLX
0 - 600 psi 170074KSL 170074KSLX
0 - 1000 psi 170075KSL 170075KSLX
0 - 1500 psi 170540KSL 170540KSLX
¹Contact Rawson for dual scale dials and single scale metric dials.
²For factory case liquid filling, substitute LG for Glycerin and LS for Silicone for LX suffix.
Contact Rawson for other case or system fill options.
Diaphragm seal filled with silicon standard. Other fill fluids, such as Halocarbon also
available.

Assemblies
All Welded Sanitary Gauge and Diaphragm Seal

CSTG Series
DESCRIPTION
The CSTG-Series all-welded system combines the proven durability and
performance of a US Gauge 656 series liquid fillable all stainless steel
gauge and M&G sanitary diaphragm seal. It is 3A approved for dairy, food
& beverage, biotech, and pharmaceutical application. The CSTG all-welded
316L sanitary system offers exceptional reliability and cost advantage to an
individual gauge threaded to diaphragm seal as it eliminate the potential leak
path and contaminants between the seal and the pressure gauge. The gauge
is available in both 2 ½” (63mm) and 4” (100mm) with 316L SST internals
and 304 SST case and bezel and the diaphragm is compatible with piping
systems such as Ladish Tri-Clover and Cherry-Burrell.
D
FEATURES
• Operating Range: 29” Hg – 600 psi
• Operating Temperature: 100°F
• Displacement: 0.06 in³
• Welded Diaphragm
• Clamped process connection
SPECIFICATIONS
Seal Type Piping System Operating Pressure Volumetric Displacement
Ladish Tri-Clamp 50 psig and up .007 cubic inches
GC “Fast Clamp” 10 psig and up .06 cubic inches
CSTG - 656 Gauge Welded to CST Seal
Cherry-Burrell “S” Clamp Seal 10 psig and up .13 cubic inches
Replaces 16 A Cap
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXX XXX XX XXXX XXX XXX XX
Table 1 Base Model Number Table 5 Gauge Case Fill

CSTG CSTG 656 gauge welded to CST seal GL Glycerin
Table 2 Process Connection Size MI Mineral oil
15 1-½” Tri-Clamp –– Not used
20 2” Tri-Clamp Table 6 System Fill (Gauge/Seal Fill)
30 3” Tri-Clamp GL Glycerin
Table 3 Gauge Connection Type NE Neobee M20
A Lower back mount 100mm (4”) MI Mineral oil
B Lower mount 100mm (4”) Table 7 Calibration Certification
C Center back mount 63mm (2-½”) /C NIST traceable data
L Lower mount 63mm (2-½”) – Not used
Table 4 Gauge Pressure Range
Other ranges and types available upon request.
015 0 to 15 psig
030 0 to 30 psig
060 0 to 60 psig
100 0 to 100 psig
160 0 to 160 psig
300 0 to 300 psig
600 0 to 600 psig

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Diaphragm Seals
Mansfield & Green
Sanitary Diaphragm Seals

C Series
DESCRIPTION
C Series diaphragm seals feature a simple, one-piece design with diaphragms fastened
directly onto the instrument top housing. Type C seals are crafted of 316 stainless steel
with quick-couples that meet 3A Standards per specification 37-01 for use in sanitary
piping applications in the food, beverage, pharmaceutical, and other industries requiring
extreme levels of purity. Type C Series seal elements are designed to mount on tees or
welding ferrules. Their design allows for fast, efficient removal and installation for flushing or
changing process media, line cleanout, and equipment washdown situations. Seal pressure
and temperature specifications are determined by the sanitary piping system limitations.
FEATURES
D • All welded 316 SST construction meets 3A Standards
• Ideal for food, beverage, pharmaceuticals, or high purity applications
• Compatible with a variety of piping systems
• Quick connection and disconnection from process
• Ideal for washdowns, line cleanout, flushing, or changes to process media
• Body Material: 316 stainless steel
• Instrument Connection: ¼ NPT or stem for tubing
• Diaphragm Material: 316 ELC stainless steel
SPECIFICATIONS
Seal Type Piping System Operating Pressure Volumetric Displacement
CSI Cherry-Burrell “I” Line CIP 10 psig and up .06 cubic inches
Seal Replaces 16 AL Cap
CST Ladish Tri-Clamp 50 psig and up .007 cubic inches
GC “Fast Clamp” 10 psig and up .06 cubic inches
Cherry-Burrell “S” Clamp
Seal Replaces 16 A Cap 10 psig and up .13 cubic inches
CSQ Cherry-Burrell “Q” Line 10 psig and up .06 cubic inches
Seal Replaces 16 AQ Solid Cap
Accessories
Part Number Description
No.13 Clamp Used with CSI, CST and CSQ seals

Economy Diaphragm Seals

E Series
DESCRIPTION
The E Series is one of the most economical seal designs available
and features a unique construction that is free of bolts. The EW
Model seals protect against leakage and fugitive emissions as
defined by the EPA Clean Air Act of 1990. Ideal where process
media may adversely affect the life of the gauge component.
Available with ranges up to 5,000 psig (Type ES up to 2,000 psig)
and can be supplied with male threads for direct connection to the
process without the need for additional fittings.
FEATURES
• All welded 316L SST construction meets EPA 1990 Clean Air Act D
Standards
• No gasketing
• No bolting
• Materials available for corrosive applications
• Superior low pressure response with .002” thick diaphragm
• Minimum volumetric displacement where process temperatures
exceed 250°F
• Seal ratings to 5000 psig
• Compatible with most 100mm (pressure range over 100 psi) and
smaller gauges

Low Pressure Diaphragm Seals

L Series
DESCRIPTION
The L Series elements provide users with a cost effective solution for
demanding low-pressure applications. These seals feature a removable
elastomer diaphragm for pressure ranges from 29" Hg vacuum to 1,250 psig at
100°F. The L Series comes in 11 base models dependent on the seal mounting
criteria, flushing connection and process application. Prevent inaccuracies by
avoiding very low span in gauge or differential pressure applications which do
not provide sufficient differential pressure energy to drive the instrument, seal
element, and fill liquid column. L Series diaphragm seals employ diaphragms
retained between two bolted members. In the LB and LG models, the
diaphragms are located between the top and bottom. The diaphragm is loosely
D retained in the upper housing for easy repair or replacement. This extends the
life of the seal element and allows for field replacement and service.
FEATURES
• Removable elastomer diaphragms
• Ideal for low pressure sensitivity bellows and diaphragm type gauges
• Superior low pressure response: Pressures as low as 2" H2O and Vacuum to 29" Hg (LA and LH Models)
• Large volumetric displacement: 1.38 cubic inches
• Seal ratings to 5000 psig
SPECIFICATIONS
Seal Type Seal Mounting Operating Temperature Operating Pressure Process Application Flushing Connection
LB Thread 100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar)² Low Pressure No Flush
LG Thread 100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar) Low Pressure ¼" NPT With Flushing
Connection
LA Thread 100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar)¹ Vacuum No Flush
LH Thread 100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar)¹ Vacuum ¼" NPT With Flushing
Connection
LC Flange – Flange Dependent² Low Pressure No Flush
LD Flange – Flange Dependent Low Pressure With Flushing Connection
LJ In-Line Flow ThruA 100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar) Low Pressure No Flush
LK In-Line Flow ThruB 100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar) Low Pressure No Flush
LM In-Line Flow Thru C
100°F (38°C) 1250 psig (86 bar) Low Pressure No Flush
LN In-Line Flow ThruD – Flange & Schedule Low Pressure No Flush
Dependent
LP In-Line Flow ThruE – Flange & Schedule Low Pressure No Flush
Dependent
¹ 5000 psig available at 100°F (345 bar at 38°C)

² LB and LC Series with non-metal exposed materials are rated at 100 psi (7 bar)
A
In-line flow thru welded by user
B
In-line flow thru thread-attached connection
C
In-line flow thru welded by user, pipe supplied, schedule dependent
D
In-line flow thru for ¾” to 2” pipe diameters
E
In-line flow thru for 3” to 8” pipe diameters
LC -Supplied in ½"+¾" with class150-1500 ANSI flange rating 1" with class 150-600 ANSI rating.
2-8" with class 150-300 ANSI rating

Removable Metal Diaphragm Seals

R Series
DESCRIPTION
Used in general purpose applications, this seal element has a
removable metal diaphragm. Ideal for applications from 15 to 2,500 psig
at 100°F, these elements feature a diaphragm that is easily replaced
by the user. R Series diaphragms have integral gaskets with a baked-
on TEFLON® finish. The fluid filled cavity is also sealed by a VITON®
O-ring. Seals are available in a variety of materials.
FEATURES
• Removable metal diaphragm extends seal service life, lowers
operating costs and the self-gasketing simplifies field maintenance.
• Materials available for corrosive applications D
• Ideal for general purpose applications
• .07 cubic inch volumetric displacement
• Standard seal ratings to 2000 psig (optional to 5000 psig)
• Continuous duty seal element
SPECIFICATIONS
RB Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar)¹ General Purpose No Flush
RG Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar)² General Purpose With Flushing Connection
RA Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar)¹ Removable Bottom³ No Flush
RH Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar)² Removable Bottom³ With Flushing Connection
RC Flange – Flange Dependent General Purpose No Flush
RD Flange – Flange Dependent General Purpose With Flushing Connection
RR Flange – Flange Dependent Tantalum Clad Bottom No Flush
RJ In-Line Flow ThruA 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Removable Bottom³ No Flush
RK In-Line Flow Thru B
100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Removable Bottom³ No Flush
RM In-Line Flow ThruC 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar)² Removable Bottom³ No Flush
RN In-Line Flow ThruD – Flange & Sched. Removable Bottom³ No Flush
Dependent
RP In-Line Flow ThruE – Flange & Sched. Removable Bottom³ No Flush
Dependent
¹ Optional 5000 psig available at 100°F (345 bar at 38°C)

² Optional 3000 psig available at 100°F (207 bar at 38°C)
³ Removable bottom without loss of fill fluid
A
B
C
D
E

General Purpose Welded Metal Diaphragm Seals

S Series
DESCRIPTION
Economical seal incorporates a diaphragm welded
permanently to the top housing. Contoured upper housing
permits free movement of the diaphragm with accurate
response to pressure changes and protects the seal from
distortion. This series’ welded metal seals are ideal for general
purpose applications with ranges from 15 to 2,500 psig at
100°F. Optional ranges are available up to 20,000 psig. The ST
Model is available for vacuum applications with ranges down to
29" Hg.
FEATURES
D • Diaphragm directly welded to upper flange eliminates the need
for a retaining ring and minimizes the risk of leaks.
• Ideal for general purpose application
• Optional seal ratings to 10,000 psig
• Compatible with most 4-½” and smaller gauges
SPECIFICATIONS
SB Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar)¹ General Purpose No Flush
SG Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar)¹ General Purpose With Flushing Connection
SX Thread³ 100°F (38°C) 10000 psig (690 bar) High Pressure No Flush
SW Thread⁴ 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar) EPA Clean Air Act No Flush
SC Flange – Flange Dependent General Purpose No Flush
SD Flange – Flange Dependent General Purpose With Flushing Connection
SR Flange – Flange Dependent Tantalum Clad Bottom No Flush
SJ In-Line Flow ThruA
100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar)² Saddle Mounted No Flush
SK In-Line Flow ThruB 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar)² Thread Attached No Flush
SM In-Line Flow ThruC 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar)² Butt Welded No Flush
SN In-Line Flow ThruD – Flange & Sched. Small Pipe No Flush
Dependent
SP In-Line Flow ThruE – Flange & Sched. Larger Pipe No Flush
Dependent

² Optional 3000 psig available at 100°F (207 bar at 38°C)
³ No bleed screw
4
Top, bottom, and diaphragm must be the same
A
B
C
D
E

Welded Metal Diaphragm Seal for Tank

Applications
SCE Series
DESCRIPTION
The SCE Series of seals is ideal for applications where piping or insulation
requires extension of the diaphragm into the flow-stream of the process
media. They are also suitable for tank level applications. The seals have
slip on flanges and the extension body, available in a range of lengths,
is designed to fit on 3” or 4” Schedule 40 pipe. SCE diaphragms are TIG
welded to the extension. Standard flanges are zinc plated carbon steel,
seal body and diaphragms are available in 316L low carbon stainless
steel or HASTELLOY® C. Operating pressure is limited to the ANSI flange
pressure and temperature ratings. D
FEATURES
• Extended diaphragm seals are ideal for tank applications
• Continuous duty
• Slip on flange design simplifies installation
• Furnished with ANSI Class 150, 300, or 600 flanges
• Standard volumetric displacement is .13 cubic inch
Welded Metal Diaphragm Seal for Fugitive

Emissions
SCW Series
DESCRIPTION
Designed for applications requiring control of fugitive emissions, toxic and
explosive media, these all welded seals incorporate stainless steel housing
and are available with ranges from 10 psig to Class 300. These seals
feature ANSI standard slip on flange for easy installation and are available
in HASTELLOY® C, MONEL and other materials.
FEATURES
• Ideal for applications requiring control of fugitive emissions
• Leak protection against toxic and explosive media as defined by EPA
Clean Air Act of 1990
• Continuous duty
• Permanent seal without gasket
• Pressure ranges from 10 psig (.7 bar) to ANSI Class 300
• Standard volumetric displacement is .06 cubic inch

All Welded Metal Flush Flange Diaphragm Seal

SFX Series
DESCRIPTION
The SFX Series seal elements feature a one-piece, all welded
construction with an integrated raised face ANSIB16.5 class flange seal,
surface machined into the upper housing. The seal’s unique design
allows for easy installation and maintenance. The design permits free
movement of the diaphragm with simultaneous response to pressure
changes. It also protects the seal element from distortion due to improper
handling during maintenance routines.
FEATURES
• Self cleaning flush diaphragm face makes this series ideal for viscous process
environments
D • Ideal For Gas and Liquid Applications
• One-piece construction
• Built-in over pressure protection (continuous duty diaphragm profile)
• Designed for corrosive applications
• Easy installation and maintenance
• Continuous duty
• All-welded construction
• No gaskets
• ¼” and ½” NPT instrument connections
• Flanged attached process connection
• ANSI B16.5 compliant
• Compatible with most transmitters, transducers, pressure switches, pressure gauges, etc.
Welded Metal Diaphragm Seals for Jacked

Pipelines
SMJ and SNJ Series
DESCRIPTION
These seal elements are used in applications where there is a jacketed
pipeline and where heated or cooled processes are involved. The SMJ
Series conforms to Schedule 40 process pipe rating (other schedules
available). SNJ seals meet ANSI flange pressure/temperature ratings.
FEATURES
• Welded diaphragm
• Diaphragm welded directly to instrument housing
• Continuous duty
• SNJ features slip on flanges for easy installation
• Socket weld connections included on jacket
• SMJ butt welded directly to pipeline
• Pressure ranges to 1500 psig (103 bar)
SPECIFICATIONS
Seal Type Seal Mounting Operating Temperature Operating Pressure Flange Connection Jacket Connection
SMJ Butt Welded 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Not Included Per Schedule Type
SNJ Flange 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Slip On, Included Socket Weld, Included

Low Pressure Welded Metal Diaphragm Seals

ST Series
DESCRIPTION
ST Series is designed to protect electronic transmitters,
transducers, and low pressure gauges against process
media damage. This series of seals is ideal for transmitter
applications where closed systems require high sensitivity.
The continuous duty design permits instrument removal or
replacement while a system is in operation without causing
leakage of the process media. The instrument (top flange) and
process (bottom flange) are sealed with non-asbestos aramid
fiber gasket. Other gasket materials available.
FEATURES
• Ideal for protecting instrumentation from process media D
• Ideal for process control and pipelines
• Optional seal ratings to 3000 psig (207 bar)
SPECIFICATIONS
SBT Thread 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar)¹ Low Pressure/VAC² No Flush
SGT Thread 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar)¹ Low Pressure/VAC² With Flushing Connection
SCT Flange – Flange Dependent Low Pressure/VAC² No Flush
SDT Flange – Flange Dependent Low Pressure/VAC² With Flushing Connection
SMT In-Line Flow Thru 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Jacketed Pipeline Butt Welded
SNT In-Line Flow Thru 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Jacketed Pipeline Flange Attached

² These seals can be used for vacuum down to 29” Hg

Corrosive Application Teflon Diaphragm Seals

T Series
DESCRIPTION
The T Series diaphragm seals feature a TEFLON diaphragm that is field replaceable. They are ideal for corrosive
applications with ranges from 0 to 10 psig at 100°F. Seals are suitable for applications with a temperature range of-40
to 400°F. The T Series comes in 11 basic models dependent on the seal mounting criteria, flushing connection and
process application.
FEATURES
• Removable molded TEFLON diaphragm
• Continuous duty
• Ideal for corrosive applications
• Volumetric displacement of .40 cubic inches
• Upper contoured housing allows for the maximum flexing
D with the minimum diaphragm distortion
• Seal ratings to 2500 psig (172 bar)
• Available with flushing connection
• Available in DIN and metric sizes
SPECIFICATIONS
TA Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar) General Purpose No Flush
TB Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar) General Purpose No Flush
TG Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar) General Purpose With Flushing Connection
TH Thread 100°F (38°C) 2500 psig (172 bar) General Purpose With Flushing Connection
TC Flange 100°F (38°C) Flange Dependent General Purpose No Flush
TD Flange 100°F (38°C) Flange Dependent General Purpose With Flushing Connection
TJ In-Line Flow Thru A
100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Saddle Mounts No Flush
TK In-Line Flow ThruB 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Thread Attached No Flush
TM In-Line Flow ThruC 100°F (38°C) 1500 psig (103 bar) Butt Weld No Flush
TN In-Line Flow ThruD 100°F (38°C) Flange & Schedule Small Pipe No Flush
Dependent
TP In-Line Flow ThruE 100°F (38°C) Flange & Schedule Large Pipe No Flush
Dependent
A
B
In-line flow thru thread-attached or socket weld connection
C
D
E

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Pressure Transmitters
PMT
Explosion Proof & Field Adjustable Pressure

Transmitter
Model 88C
DESCRIPTION
The Model 88 is the most durable, accurate and costeffective
pressure transmitter presently available. The compact size ,
weight and integral juction box permit simple field wiring and
quick installation time A 4 to 20 mA output is standard with a
12 to 40 VDC power supply. With all 316 stainless steel welded
construction, the Model 88 is compatible with corrosive media
and hazardous environments. With the cover retained by a
stainless steel chain and no internal jumpers for span turndown,
losses due to misplaced or dropped parts are eliminated. D
FEATURES
• A miniature, low-priced, full-featured transmitter – just 1.67 lb.
• All welded 316 stainless steel construction and wetted parts
(no aluminum)
• Ranges from 0 to 3 through 0 to 5000 psig (0 to 0.2 to 0 to 350
bar)
• 0.25% accuracy
• Zero and span adjustability
• Full 5:1 range turndown
• Integral junction box
• FM for explosion-proof; CSA for explosion-proof and
intrinsically safe
• 4 to 20 mA output at 12 to 40 VDC
• 5-year warranty
HOW TO ORDER

XX X XXX X X
Table 1 Model Table 4 Material

88 88 Pressure transmitter A 316 SS (base), 316 SS (diaphragm), silicone (liquid fill) Other
Consult factory
Table 2 Approvals
Table 5 Output
C FM certified for explosion-proof and CSA certified for explosion-
proof and intrinsic safety 2 4 to 20 mADC
Table 3 Pressure ranges Table 6 Calibration ranges
001 3 to 15 psi (21 to 104 kPa) Will be calibrated at maximum range in psi if not specified
002 0/6 to 0/15 psi (0/0.4 to 0/1 bar) * Consult rawson for additional options
003 0/15 to 0/30 psi (0/1 to 0/2 bar)
004 0/20 to 0/100 psi (0/1.4 to 0/7 bar)
005 0/60 to 0/300 psi (0/4 to 0/20 bar)
006 0/200 to 0/1000 psi (0/14 to 0/70 bar)
007 0/600 to 0/3000 psi (0/40 to 0/200 bar)
008 0/1000 to 0/5000 psi (0/70 to 0/350 bar)
Non-std. 0/3 to 0/6 psi (0.2 to 0/0.4 bar) Consult factory

Explosion Proof & Field Adjustable

Flushmount Pressure Transmitter
Model 88F
DESCRIPTION
The Model 88F is a durable, full featured, flush diaphragm pressure
transmitter. designed to mount flush against process media and to
prevent any media particles, such as from paper slurry, from collecting
at the diaphragm. The compact size weight and integral junction box
permits simple field wiring and quick installation time
FEATURES
• A high-quality, full featured transmitter at just 1.6 lbs. (720 grams)
D • Designed to mount flush against process media
• All welded 316 stainless steel construction (no aluminum)
• Standard Hastelloy C diaphragm
• Ranges from 0-3 through 0-300 psig (0-.2 through 0-20 bar)
• ±0.25% accuracy
• Full 5:1 turndown
• 4-20 mA output at 12-40 VDC
• 316 stainless steel coupling and plug available for mounting and maintenance
• FM for explosion-proof
• CSA for explosion-proof and intrinsic safety
• Meet NACE Standards
HOW TO ORDER
XXX XXX X X XX XX
Table 1 Model Table 5 Approvals

88F 88F Flushmount pressure transmitter FM Factory Mutual for explosion-proof
Table 2 Pressure ranges CS Canadian Standards Association for explosion-proof and intrinsic
safety
002 0/3 to 0/15 psi (0/0.2 to 0/1 bar)
CL Approved by Cenelec for intrinsic safety
003 0/6 to 0/30 psi (0/0.4 to 0/2 bar)
Table 6 Coupling
004 0/20 to 0/100 psi (0/1.4 to 0/7 bar)
SC 316 SS coupling; TEFLON gasket
005 0/60 to 0/300 psi (0/4 to 0/20 bar)
PC 316 SS plug and coupling; TEFLON gasket
Table 3 Material
NC No coupling; TEFLON gasket
A 316 SS Hastelloy C (diaphragm), silicone oil (liquid fill)
Table 7 Calibration ranges
B 316 SS Hastelloy C (diaphragm), mineral oil (liquid fill)*
Will be calibrated at maximum range in psi if not specified
F 316 SS Hastelloy C (diaphragm), fluorolube (liquid fill)*
L 316 SS and diaphragm, mineral oil (liquid fill)*
Other Consult factory for availability
Table 4 Output
2 4 to 20 mADC

Fixed Range Pressure Transmitter

Model 831 Standard
DESCRIPTION
The Model 831 Standard transmitters is a durable, accurate and cost-effective
fixed range pressure transmitter. An all 316 stainless steel transmitter, designed
for years of stable performance in even the toughest environmental and
corrosive media conditions. With its all-welded construction, this transmitter is
weatherproof and capable of a direct spray with forces up to 200 psi without
internal leakage. The standard Model 831 features a 4 to 20 mA output
standard with a 12 to 30 VDC power supply.
FEATURES
• All welded 316L stainless steel construction and wetted parts
• ¾ inch NPT female conduit connection cable
• 24 inch cable length standard D
• CSA approved, explosion proof, and meet NACE standards for off-shore
applications
• FM approved with the explosion proof rating
• Inline connection for slim profile
• Rugged construction
• Available with conduit adapter
• Optional EMI protection
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X XXXX X X X XX XX
Table 1 Model Table 6 Isolation diaphragm material

831 831 Pressure transmitter H 316L process connection, Hastelloy C276 diaphragm
Table 2 Process connection L 316L process connection and diaphragm (standard)
F ¼ inch NPT male Table 7 Fill fluid
H ½ inch NPT male M Mineral oil – minimum operating temperature limited to 10°F
(-12°C)
T ½ inch NPT female
S DC silicone (standard)
Table 3 Pressure types
Table 8 Electrical termination¹
A Absolute
A PVC (standard)
C Compound
B PVC/EMI
G Gauge
C TEFLON
V Vacuum
D TEFLON/EMI
Table 4 Pressure ranges
E-Z Additional cable material/EMI option, consult factory
0006 0 to 6 psi (0 to 0.41 bar)
Table 9 Cable length
0015 0 to 15 psi (0 to 1 bar)
A 2 ft. (standard)²
0030 0 to 30 psi (0 to 2.1 bar)
B 5 ft.
0100 0 to 100 psi (0 to 6.9 bar)
C 10 ft.
0300 0 to 300 psi (0 to 20.7 bar)
D 15 ft.
1000 0 to 1000 psi (0 to 69.0 bar)
E 20 ft.
3000 0 to 3000 psi (0 to 206.9 bar)
F 25 ft.
5000 0 to 5000 psi (0 to 344.8 bar)
G-Z Additional lengths up to 1000 ft., consult factory
Table 5 Input/Output
* Consult factory for additional options
B 12 to 30 VDC/4 to 20 mA
1 For standard PVC cable in 2ft length, eletncal termination and cable length fields
can be omitted.
2 FM explosion proof requres a condcut seal at 18" max.

Fixed Range, Low Power Pressure Transmitter

Model 831 Low Power
DESCRIPTION
The Model 831 transmitters are the most durable, accurate and cost-effective
fixed range pressure transmitter available. An all 316 stainless steel transmitter,
it is designed for years of stable performance in even the toughest environmental
and corrosive media conditions. The Model 831 Low Power provides a three wire
1-5 or 0.8-3.2 voltage output and requires less than 30 milliwatts of total power
to operate. The combination of low power requirement, small size, excellent
performance and low price make the Model 831 Low Power transmitter ideal for
critical outdoor applications on battery or solar power.
FEATURES
D • ¾ inch NPT female conduit connection cable
• 24 inch cable length standard
applications
• FM approved with the explosion proof rating
• 8 to 14 or 6 to 14 VDC with reverse polarity protection
• Perfect for solar or battery applications
• Current draw <3 mA
• Optional EMI protection
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Model Table 6 Isolation diaphragm material

831 831 Pressure transmitter H 316L process connection, Hastelloy C276 diaphragm
Table 2 Process connection L 316L process connection and diaphragm (standard)
F ¼ inch NPT male Table 7 Fill fluid
H ½ inch NPT male M Mineral oil – minimum operating temperature limited to 10°F
(-12°C)
A Absolute
A PVC (standard)
C Compound
B PVC/EMI
G Gauge
C TEFLON
V Vacuum
D TEFLON/EMI
Table 4 Pressure ranges
0006 0 to 6 psi (0 to 0.41 bar)
0015 0 to 15 psi (0 to 1 bar)
0030 0 to 30 psi (0 to 2.1 bar)
B 5 ft.
0100 0 to 100 psi (0 to 6.9 bar)
C 10 ft.
0300 0 to 300 psi (0 to 20.7 bar)
D 15 ft.
1000 0 to 1000 psi (0 to 69.0 bar)
E 20 ft.
3000 0 to 3000 psi (0 to 206.9 bar)
F 25 ft.
5000 0 to 5000 psi (0 to 344.8 bar)
Table 5 Input/Output
* Consult factory for additional options
C 8 to 14 VDC/1 to 5 VDC (low power model)
1 For standard PVC cable in 2ft length, eletncal termination and cable length fields
D 6 to 14 VDC/0.8 to 3.2 VDC (low power model) can be omitted.
2 FM explosion proof requires a condcut seal at 18" max.

Fixed Range Differentral Pressure Transmitter

Model 831D
DESCRIPTION
The Model 831D transmitters is a the durable, accurate and cost-effective
fixed range pressure transmitter. An all 316 stainless steel transmitter, it is
designed for years of stable performance in even the toughest environmental
and corrosive media conditions. With its all-welded construction, this transmitter
is weatherproof and capable of a direct spray with forces up to 200 psi without
internal leakage. proof ratings. The 831D carries the CSA explosion-proof rating
and meet NACE standards for offshore applications. The Model 831D featurea
4 to 20 mA output standard with a 12 to 30 VDC power supply.
FEATURES
• ¾ inch NPT female conduit connection cable D
• 24 inch cable length standard
applications
• In line connection for slim profile
• Available in pressure ranges from 6 psid to 500 psid
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Model Table 7 Fill fluid

831 831 Pressure transmitter M Mineral oil – minimum operating temperature limited to 10°F
(-12°C)
Table 2 Process connection
F ¼ inch NPT male
H ½ inch NPT male
A PVC (standard)
B PVC/EMI
C TEFLON
D Differential pressure
D TEFLON/EMI
Table 4 Differential ranges
0006 0 to 6 psid (0 to 0.41 bar)
0015 0 to 15 psid (0 to 1 bar)
0030 0 to 30 psid (0 to 2.1 bar)
B 5 ft.
0060 0 to 60 psid (0 to 4.1 bar)
C 10 ft.
0100 0 to 100 psid (0 to 6.9 bar)
D 15 ft.
0150 0 to 150 psid (0 to 10.3 bar)
E 20 ft.
0200 0 to 250 psid (0 to 13.8 bar)
F 25 ft.
0300 0 to 300 psid (0 to 20.7 bar
0500 0 to 500 psid (0 to 34.5 bar)
Table 5 Input/Output * Consult factory for additional options
1 For standard PVC cable in 2ft length, eletncal termination and cable length
B 12 to 30 VDC/4 to 20 mA fields can be omitted.
2 FM explosion proof requires a condcut seal at 18" max.
Table 6 Isolation diaphragm material
H 316L process connection, Hastelloy C276 diaphragm
L 316L process connection and diaphragm (standard)

Explosion Proof Pressure Transmitter

Model 851
DESCRIPTION
The Model 851 is designed for years of stable performance in even
the toughest environmental and media conditions, such as refineries,
petrochemical facilities, and waste water treatment facilities. Approvals
include ratings for CSA, for both intrinsic safety and explosion-proof, and
FM for explosion-proof only. The Model 851 also meets NACE standards
for offshore applications. With the cover seal, double O-ring assembly,
this transmitter is weather proof and capable of direct spray/clean-in-place
applications.
FEATURES
• A miniature, low-priced full-featured transmitter – just 1 lb. (450 grams)
D • All welded 316 stainless steel construction and wetted parts (no aluminum)
• ±0.25% accuracy
• Full 5:1 range turndown
• 4-20 mA output at 12-40 VDC
• Watertight cable or conduit connection optional
• Mount version
• Straight in-line construction for a slim profile
• 24 inch (61cm) cable standard
• Surgcand EMI profected
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X XXXX X X X X X X
Table 1 Model Table 5 Electrical connection

851 851 Pressure transmitter N Standard nut/cable³
Table 2 Process connection C ½ inch NPT female conduit connection/cable* (required for
explosion proof)
T ½ inch NPT
Table 6 Diaphragm
F Flush1 (Adapter coupling must be welded to process piping, must
be HASTELLOY) L 316L stainless steel
Table 3 Pressure type H HASTELLOY C276
G Gauge Table 7 Fill
A Absolute S Silicone
V Vacuum M Mineral oil
C Compound Table 8 Agency approval
Table 4 Pressure ranges A Factory Mutual (FM), Canadian Standard Association (CSA)
3015 3 to 15 psi (0.2 to 1 bar) For explosion-proof (FM, CSA) and intrinsically safe (CSA) 2
0006 0/3 to 0/6 psi (0/0.2 to 0/0.4 bar) Consult factory C Canadian Standard Association (CSA) intrinsically safe
0015 0/6 to 0/15 psi (0/0.4 to 0/1 bar) Table 9 Coupling (flush only)
0030 0/6 to 0/30 psi (0/0.4 to 0/2.1 bar) S 316L stainless steel coupling; TEFLON gasket
0100 0/20 to 0/100 psi (0/1.4 to 0/7 bar) P 316L stainless steel plug, coupling; TEFLON gasket
0300 0/60 to 0/300 psi (0/4 to 0/20 bar) N No coupling; TEFLON gasket
1000 0/200 to 0/1000 psi (0/14 to 69.0 bar) 1. Flush connection only available up to 300 psi (20 bar)
3000 0/600 to 0/3000 psi (0/40 to 206.9 bar) 2. Explosion-proof approval requires “C” electrical connection option
3. Not available with agency approval “A”, FM/CSA explosion-proof
5000 0/1000 to 0/5000 psi (0/70 to 0/344.8 bar) * Cable length is 24 inch (22 AWG) standard

ABB
Pressure Transmitters
266MST/RST
DESCRIPTION
Model 266MST is a differential pressure transmitter with “multisensor technology”
suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well as level, pressure and
density in applications with working pressure up to 41Mpa / 5945psi. The unique
combination of several sensor systems in a single device allows simultaneous
measurement of differential pressure and absolute pressure. The sensor
temperature and the absolute pressure are also used for eliminating environmental
effects on the sensor. Model 266RST is an absolute pressure transmitter based
on a differential pressure sensor where the negative chamber is evacuated to full
vacuum. It is suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam pressure.
FEATURES D
• Base accuracy from 0.04 % of calibrated span (optional 0.025 %)
• Proven sensor technology together with state-of-the-art digital technology
• Large turn down ratio of up to 100:1
• Comprehensive selection of sensors for optimized performance and stability
• 10-year stability: 0.15 % of URL
• Local configuration via control buttons on LCD indicator
• New TTG (through-the-glass) key technology enables quick and easy local
configuration without the need to open the cover - even in environments with
explosion protection
• IEC 61508 certification for SIL2 (1oo1) and SIL3 (1oo2) applications
• Full compliance with Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) category III
266DSH/PSH/VSH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266DSH is a differential pressure transmitter suitable for measuring liquid,
gas or steam flow as well as level, pressure and density. Model 266PSH is a gauge
pressure transmitter manufactured in DP Style. Model 266VSH is an absolute
pressure transmitter manufactured in DP Style.
FEATURES
• Reliable sensing system coupled with very latest digital technologies provides
large turn down ratio up to 100:1
• Comprehensive sensor choice for optimal in-use total performance and stability
• 10–year stability: 0.15 % of URL
• Flexible configuration facilities provided locally via local LCD keypad
• New TTG (Through-The-Glass) keypad technology allows quick and easy local
configuration without opening the cover, even in explosion proof environments
• IEC 61508 certification version for SIL2 (1oo1) and SIL3 (1oo2) applications
• Full compliance with PED Category III

Pressure Transmitters - Continued

266GST/AST
DESCRIPTION
Model 266GST is a gauge pressure transmitter suitable for measuring liquid, gas
or steam pressure as well as liquid level in an open tank. Model 266AST is an
absolute pressure transmitter suitable for liquid, gas or steam applications.
FEATURES
• Proven sensor technology together with state-of-the-art digital technology large
turn down ratio of up to 100:1
• Comprehensive selection of sensors optimized performance and stability
• 10-year stability 0.15 % of URL
D • Flexible configuration options local configuration via keys on LCD indicator
configuration without the need to open the cover - even in environments with
explosion protection
• Full compliance with Pressure Equipment Directive (PED)category III
266GSH/ASH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266GSH is a gauge pressure transmitter suitable for measuring liquid, gas
or steam pressure as well as liquid level in an open tank. Thanks to its stability and
reliability it works within stated performance even in extreme ambient and process
conditions. Model 266ASH is an absolute pressure transmitter suitable for liquid,
gas or steam applications. It provides a broad selection of options, such as fill
fluids and wetted materials, allowing operation even with critical process media at
harsh environment.
FEATURES
• Base accuracy from 0.06 % of calibrated span
• Reliable sensing system coupled with very latest digital technologies provides large
turn down ratio up to 100:1
• Comprehensive sensor choice optimize in-use total performance and stability
• 10–year stability 0.15 % of URL
configuration without opening the cover, - even in explosion proof environments

Direct Mount Pressure Transmitters

266MDT/GDT/ADT
DESCRIPTION
266MDT is the differential pressure transmitter with “multisensor
technology” suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well as
level, pressure and density characterized by a direct mount seal. This
transmitter can be configured with a direct mount diaphragm seal and
a standard pressure connection or combined with a remote diaphragm
seal. 266GDT is a gauge pressure transmitter with direct mount seal
suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam pressure as well as liquid
level in open tanks. 266ADT is an absolute pressure transmitter with
direct mount seal suitable for liquid, gas or steam applications.
FEATURES D
• Proven sensor technology together with state-of-the-art digital
technology with large turn down ratio of up to 60:1
• Comprehensive selection of sensors for optimized performance and
stability
• 10-year stability: 0.15 % of URL
• Flexible configuration options local configuration via keys on LCD
indicator
• New TTG (through-the-glass) key technology enables quick and
easy local configuration without the need to open the cover - even in
environments with explosion protection
266DDH/HDH/NDH
DESCRIPTION
266DDH is the differential direct-mount seal transmitter that allows full
installation capability. This transmitter can be configured with a direct mount
diaphragm seal and a standard pressure connection or combined with a
remote diaphragm seal. In order to show its flexibility the 266DDH can be
transformed into a gauge pressure transmitter thanks to the appropriate gauge
filter for the atmosphere reference. 266HDH is the high overload direct-mount
gauge pressure transmitter and the 266NDH is the high overload direct-mount
absolute pressure transmitter.
FEATURES
• New TTG (Through-The-Glass) keypad technology allows quick and easy
local configuration without opening the cover, even in explosion proof
environments
• IEC 61508 certification vrsion for SIL2 (1oo1) and SIL3 (1oo2) applications
• PED compliance to sound engineering practice (SEP)

Direct Mount Pressure Transmitters - Continued

266GDH/ADH
DESCRIPTION
266GDH is a gauge pressure transmitter with direct mount seal suitable for
measuring liquid, gas or steam pressure as well as liquid level in open tanks.
Model 266GDH and 266ADH have the direct mount seal on the positive side,
respectively with the reference at atmospheric or vacuum pressure, for gauge
(266GDH) or absolute measurements (266ADH).
FEATURES
• Reliable sensing system coupled with very latest digital technologies
provides large turn down ratio up to 60:1
D • Comprehensive sensor choice optimize in-use total performance and stability
• New TTG (Through-The-Glass) keypad technology allows quick and easy
local configuration without opening the cover, even in explosion proof
environments
Pressure Transmitters with Remote Seal

266MRT/GRT/RRT/ART
DESCRIPTION
Model 266MRT is a differential pressure transmitter with “multisensor
technology” suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well as
level, pressure and density characterized by the remote seal construction.
The unique combination of several sensor systems in a single device
allows simultaneous measurement of differential pressure and absolute
pressure. The sensor temperature and the absolute pressure are also
used for eliminating environmental effects on the sensor. Models 266GRT
or 266ART/266RRT for gauge pressure measurements with reference to
atmospheric pressure or absolute pressure measurements with reference to
vacuum are only equipped with one diaphragm seal.
FEATURES
• Proven sensor technology together with state-of-the-art digital technology
large turn down ratio of up to 60:1
• Comprehensive selection of sensors optimized performance and stability
• Flexible configuration options local configuration via keys on LCD indicator
configuration without the need to open the cover - even in environments
with explosion protection

Pressure Transmitters with Remote Seal - Continued

266GRH/ARH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266GRH is a gauge pressure transmitter with remote seals suitable for
measuring liquid, gas or steam pressure as well as liquid level in open tanks. Model
266ARH is an absolute pressure transmitter suitable for measuring liquid, gas or
steam characterized by the remote seal construction.
FEATURES
• Flexible configuration facilities provided locally via local LCD keypad D
266DRH/PRH/HRH/VRH/NRH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266DRH is a differential pressure transmitter
suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well
as level, pressure and density characterized by the
remote seal construction. Model 266PRH is a gauge
pressure transmitter manufactured in DP Style suitable
for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well as level,
pressure and density characterized by the remote seal on
the high pressure side. Model 266HRH is a high overload
gauge pressure transmitter suitable for measuring liquid,
gas or steam flow as well as level, pressure and density
characterized by the remote seal construction. Model
266VRH is an absolute pressure transmitter manufactured
in DP Style suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam
flow as well as level, pressure and density characterized
by the remote seal on the high pressure side. Model
266NRH is a high overload absolute pressure transmitter
suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well as
level, pressure and density characterized by the remote
seal construction.
FEATURES
• Reliable sensing system coupled with very latest digital technologies provides large turn down ratio up to 60:1
• New TTG (Through-The-Glass) keypad technology allows quick and easy local configuration without opening the
cover, even in explosion proof environments

Direct Mount Differential Pressure Transmitter

266DHH
DESCRIPTION
266DDH is the differential direct-mount seal transmitter that allows full installation
capability. This transmitter can be configured with a direct mount diaphragm seal
and a standard pressure connection or combined with a remote diaphragm seal. In
order to show its flexibility the 266DDH can be transformed into a gauge pressure
transmitter thanks to the appropriate gauge filter for the atmosphere reference. The
long-term stability and its proven reliability make of 266DDH the best choice for
gauge and differential pressure measurements.
FEATURES
D • Reliable sensing system coupled with very latest digital technologies provides large
High Overload Pressure Transmitters

266HSH/NSH
DESCRIPTION
266HSH is a high overload gauge pressure transmitter with a maximum working
pressure up to 105 MPa, 15225 psi suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam
pressure in a pipe or on an open tank. With a long-term stability, 266HSH grants
lasting performances even in extreme ambient and process conditions. Model
266NSH is an absolute pressure transmitter with an integrated high overload
protection system. Model 266NSH is suitable for a broad selection of options
allowing total flexibility maximizing the cost-effective aspect, providing at the same
time a reliable solution for all those applications characterized by critical process
media at extended temperature ranges.
FEATURES
• Reliable sensing system coupled with very latest digital technologies provides large

High Static Differential Pressure Transmitter

266MSH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266MSH is a differential pressure transmitter with “multisensor technology”
suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well as level, pressure and
density in applications with working pressure up to 41Mpa / 5945psi. The unique
combination of several sensor systems in a single device allows simultaneous
measurement of differential pressure and absolute pressure. The sensor
temperature and the absolute pressure are also used for eliminating environmental
effects on the sensor. MSH represents the smartest solution in Safety loop
applications.
FEATURES
• Base accuracy from 0.06 % of calibrated span D
High Static Differential Pressure Transmitter with

Remote Seals
266MRH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266MRH is a differential pressure transmitter with “multisensor
technology” suitable for measuring liquid, gas or steam flow as well
as level, pressure and density characterized by the remote seal
construction. The unique combination of several sensor systems in a
single device allows simultaneous measurement of differential pressure
and absolute pressure. The sensor temperature and the absolute
pressure are also used for eliminating environmental effects on the
sensor.
FEATURES
provides large turn down ratio up to 60:1

Liquid Level Interface Level Transmitter

266DLH
DESCRIPTION
Model 266DLH is a specific application transmitter using a differential
design for liquid level interface and density measurements, typically for
two non-mixable liquids (one upon the other) of different specific gravity,
in a tank. The transmitter has a defined structure with two seals– one
direct mount flanged flush diaphragm seal is on the high pressure side
and one remote seal, selectable wafer or flanged flush diaphragm,
is fitted via capability to the low pressure side. It is very important to
highlight that the seals should have the same physical characteristics
(size, materials, etc.) for the two sides.
D FEATURES
• Specific design for low pressure optimize in-use total performance and stability
• PED compliance to sound enginnering practice (SEP)
Multivariable Pressure Transmitters

266CSH/CST/JSH/JST
DESCRIPTION
266CSH and 266CST are multivariable for mass flow measurement
with compensation, fill level measurement with compensation for gases,
steam, and liquids including dynamic compensation of pressure and
temperature changes. 266JSH and 266JST are high-performance
transmitters for measuring differential pressure, absolute pressure, and
process temperature in a single device.
FEATURES
• Base accuracy: 0.075 % of calibrated span (266CSH, 266JSH) and
0.04 % of calibrated span (266CST, 266JST)
• Proven sensor technology together with state-of-the-art digital
technology large turn down ratio of up to 100:1
• Comprehensive range of functions
• Integrated counting function
• Binary output as pulse / frequency output or limit monitor
• 10-year stability 0.15 % of URL
• Local configuration via keys on LCD indicator
• New TTG (through-the-glass) key technology enables quick and easy local configuration without the need to open the
cover - even in potentially explosive environments

Multivariable Pressure Transmitters with Remote

Seal
266CRH/CRT/JRH/JRT
DESCRIPTION
266CRH and 266CRT are multivariable transmitters with
remote diaphragm seals for mass flow measurement with
compensation, fill level measurement with compensation
for gases, steam, and liquids including dynamic
compensation of pressure and temperature changes.
266JRH and 266JRT are high-performance multivariable
transmitters with remote diaphragm seals for measuring
differential pressure, absolute pressure, and process D
temperature in a single device.
FEATURES
• Base accuracy: 0.075 % of calibrated span (266CRH, 266JRH) and 0.04 % of calibrated span (266CRT, 266JRT)
• Proven sensor technology together with state-of-the-art digital technology large turn down ratio of up to 60:1
• Integrated counting function
• Binary output as pulse / frequency output or limit monitor
• Local configuration via keys on LCD indicator
• New TTG (through-the-glass) key technology enables quick and easy local configuration without the need to open the
cover - even in potentially explosive environments

PressureTransmitters
364 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 364 family of transmitters represent the best solution for
hazardous areas and high demanding flow, level and pressure
applications. The 364 family also includes transmitters with
direct mount and/or remote diaphragm seal. The unique
combination of compact size, with optional clear view
intelligent display, low weight and corrosion resistant stainless
steel housing are combined with a comprehensive range of
process wetted materials and process connections.
FEATURES
D • Long term stability of 0.15% for 10 years
• The solution for multiple installation in reduced spaces
• All stainless steel construction with smart drain/vent solution
• Boltless and gasket-free one piece body design
• On board LCD display with intuitive menu navigation
• Bi-directional flow and totalization capability
• 4-20 mA output with HART communication
• Standard local Zero & Span adjustments
• Standard surge protector
• Standard “all stainless steel” construction
• Standard one-piece boltless process chambers
• Standard drain/vent valves
• Standard NACE MR0175 wetted material
• Standard Hastelloy C276 diaphragms
• In field replaceable auto-configurable electronics modules
Model Measurement Measuring ranges Process connections Construction Electrical connection
364DS Differential Pressure 0.05 to 16000 kPa 1/4 - 18 NPT female direct All stainless steel body 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
1.5 (CM20)
364PS0 Gauge Pressure 0.5 mbar to 160 bar 1/2 - 14 NPT female Hastelloy process diaphragms 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
high overload 0.2 inH2O to 2320 psi through adapter on process axis Optional indicator 1.5 (CM20)
0.05 to 16000 kPa 1/4 - 18 NPT female direct All stainless steel body
364GS Gauge Pressure 0.5 mbar to 160 bar 1/2 - 14 NPT female Hastelloy process diaphragms 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
0.2 inH2O to 2320 psi through adapter on process axis Optional indicator 1.5 (CM20)
12.5 to 60000 kPa 1/2 - 14 NPT female All stainless steel body
364AS Absolute Pressure 125 mbar to 600 bar 1/2 - 14 NPT male Hastelloy process diaphragms 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
50 inH2O to 8700 psi DIN EN 837-1 G 1/2 B all direct on process axis Optional indicator 1.5 (CM20)
12.5 to 10000 kPa 1/2 - 14 NPT female All stainless steel body
125 mbar to 100 bar 1/2 - 14 NPT male Hastelloy process diaphragms
93.8 mmHg to 1450 psia DIN EN 837-1 G 1/2 B all direct on process axis Optional indicator
364DR Differential Pressure 0.2 to 16000 kPa Two remote seals or one remote seal and one All stainless steel body 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
and Level threaded connection (1/4 - 18 NPT female Hastelloy process diaphragms 1.5 (CM20)
direct or 1/2 - 14 NPT female through adapter Optional indicator
on process axis; 1/4 - 18 NPT female or 1/2 -
14 NPT female through adapter side entry)
364PR Gauge Pressure 2 mbar to 160 bar One remote seal and reference side vented 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
and Level 0.8 inH2O to 2320 psi with filter to atmosphere All stainless steel body 1.5 (CM20)
0.54 to 16000 kPa Hastelloy process diaphragms
5.4 mbar to 160 bar Optional indicator
2.14 inH2O to 2320 psi
364DD Differential or 0.54 to 16000 kPa
One direct mount seal and one remote seal or All stainless steel body 1/2 -14 NPT M20 x
Gauge Pressure
one threaded connection (1/4 - 18 NPT female Hastelloy process diaphragms 1.5 (CM20)
and Level
or 1/2 - 14 NPT female through adapter side Optional indicator
entry)


Remote Diaphragm Seals

S26, S364
DESCRIPTION
The S26 line and S364 line of remote seals are used in combination with 2600T transmitters, allowing differential,
gauge or absolute pressure measurements. They can be directly mounted with a short capillary connecting the integral
seal to the transmitter sensor or connected through a capillary system which link the transmitter sensor to a “remote”
seal of any version. Using remote seal the transmitter can be selected with two seals using same fill fluid, capillary and
diaphragm size or one seal having the other side configured with a process flange for wet/dry leg connection or a blind
flange providing vacuum or atmospheric reference.
FEATURES
• S26 line is for use with 266 series of pressure transmitters
• S364 line is for use with 364 series of pressure transmitters
• Fill fluids dedicated for high temperature applications D
• Specific diaphragm materials to withstand these high corrosion environments
• Seals with anti-stick coating for those highly viscous sticky applications
• A complete range of process connections like chemical tees, wafer, flange mounting (flush or extended), threaded
union, welded bushing, Pulp & Paper connections, easily cleanable sanitary and aseptic connections
Flanged models Off-line seal

Available with threaded or ASME/
Rotating and fixed flange models
EN flanged process connection,
(flush and extended) specifically
the Off-line model matches
designed to connect to flanged pipe
small process connections.
fittings according to ASME, JIS and
Recommended for clean process
EN standards.
fluid measurements.
Ring-Joint construction Sanitary models

DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Diaphragm seals developed
This type of diaphragm seal,
according to the stringent
flanged according to ASME
3-A requirements. Available
standard, has been designed for
with different process fittings
high pressure/high temperature
(Triclamp, Cherry Burrel, Union
conditions.
Nut and Sanitary), this range
Wafer / Pancake demonstrates ABB’s commitment
DESCRIPTION to satisfy users needs by
Designed to connect to ASME engineering solutions for the most
and EN standard flanges the demanding processes.
wafer diaphragm seal offers
stable performance for a large
Union connection
number of applications. Joints DESCRIPTION
and flushing rings complete A screw thread process
the already wide offering. connection that provides a
Wafer seals represent a flush diaphragm for gauge
cost-effective and reliable pressure applications. Originally
application solution. designed by Taylor Instrument
this connection is combined with
the “all welded” technology to
provide a high integrity solution
for arduous applications.

Remote Diaphragm Seals - Continued

Chemical Tee Pulp & Paper
Available only from ABB and Designed especially for
designed for the chemical and preventing process media from
Oil&Gas industries, the Chemical plugging the process connection,
Tee remote seal is designed to Pulp & Paper diaphragm seals
connect to a Wedge Flow Element can be manufactured with anti-
or to any process fitting with stick coatings which remove the
the appropriate dimensions. need for manual cleaning and
therefore reduce costs.
D
Button Urea service
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION This specialized remote seal is
Button seals are designed
manufactured from materials
for accurate high pressure
which match the aggressively
measurement with a small
corrosive conditions when Urea is
diaphragm size. This type of
present in the process. The urea
connection is especially suitable
grade wetted materials ensure
for plastic and resins production
stable performances even in
processes, at high pressure and
high temperature / high vacuum
high temperature conditions.
conditions. Huey test available as
option.
In-line
Socket & Saddle
In line seals are suitable for
These diaphragm seals have
measuring the pressure of fluids
been developed to meet the
in pipes. The pressure measuring
requirements of users who
diaphragm forms the pipe wall
require a directly welded
making this type of seal suitable
process connection. Suited for
for measuring the pressure
highly viscous process fluids
of flowing fluids particularly those
measurements.
that are highly viscous or contain
solids.

United Electric
Analog Explosion Proof Pressure Transmitter

TX200 Series
DESCRIPTION
The TX200 is a compact, rugged pressure transmitter utilizing ASIC technology to provide optimum sensor signal
conditioning and temperature compensation of the sensor output. It is designed for process control industries
worldwide and ideally suited for petrochemical and upstream oil and gas applications. The fixed range model TX200B
is recommended for use where process pressure is consistent within the range and where physical access to the
transmitter is limited or not required. The field adjustable model TX200A allows access to zero and span the transmitter.
The transmitter may be spanned up to 5:1 and for ease of calibration, does not require a calibrated pressure source and
can be calibrated in-place.
FEATURES
• ASIC 4-20 mA or 1-5 or 0-10 voltage outputs
• Fixed range or field adjustable
• 0.25% accuracy D
• Compact, 316 stainless steel, hermetically sealed enclosure
• cULus & ATEX certified for Class I, Div. 1, Zone 1
• Pressure ranges: up to 25,000 psi
• 5:1 pressure range turndowns
• Wide variety of pressure connections
• Certification of calibration accompanies every unit
• Control panel mounting or direct process mounting
APPLICATIONS
• Offshore & onshore drilling rigs
• Safety shutdown & control panels
• SCADA systems
• Monitoring tubing & casing pressures
• Wellhead monitoring
• Closing unit (BOP accumulator)
• Gas flow monitoring
• Pipeline compressor stations
• Pump monitoring & protection
• Metering runs
• Pipeline integrity
• Process monitoring & control
• Equipment monitoring & safety shutdown for pump, compressor & turbine skid packages
• Provides reliable asset management data

Analog Explosion Proof Pressure

HOW TO ORDER
XXXXX XX XX X X X XXXX
Table 1 Type Table 5 Pressure Connection

TX200 TX200 1 ¼” NPT (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 15-16
Table 2 Model 2 ½” NPT (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
A Field-adjustable transmitter 3 ½” NPT (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
B Fixed range transmitter 4 HF4 high pressure autoclave ¼” (female)
Fixed range transmitter (no additional codes required) HF6 high pressure autoclave ⅜” (female); NOT AVAILABLE
D 15929¹
Table 3 Pressure Range²
5
RANGES 03-05, 15-16
6 LF4 medium pressure autoclave ¼” (female); NOT AVAILABLE
03 0 to 15 psi RANGES 03-05, 15-16
04 0 to 30 psi 7 LF6 medium pressure autoclave ⅜” (female); NOT AVAILABLE
05 0 to 50 psi RANGES 03-05, 15-16
06 0 to 100 psi 8 ¼” NPT (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 15-16
07 0 to 250 psi 9 7/16-20 SAE (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
08 0 to 500 psi A G-¼ (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
09 0 to 1000 psi B G-½ (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
17 0 to 1500 psi C 7/16-20 SAE (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
18 0 to 2000 psi D HM4 high pressure autoclave ¼” (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES
03-05, 15-16
10 0 to 2500 psi
E HM6 high pressure autoclave ⅜” (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES
19 0 to 3000 psi 03-05, 15-16
11 0 to 5000 psi F LM4 medium pressure autoclave ¼” (male); NOT AVAILABLE
20 0 to 6000 psi RANGES 03-05, 15-16
12 0 to 7500 psi G LM6 medium pressure autoclave ⅜” (male); NOT AVAILABLE

RANGES 03-05, 15-16
13 0 to 10,000 psi
H G-¼ (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
14 0 to 15,000 psi
J G-½ (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
15 0 to 20,000 psi
Table 6 Output
16 0 to 25,000 psi
T 4-20 mA
Table 4 Pressure Reference
D 1-5 VDC
S psi (sealed gage)
P 0-10 VDC; NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 03-06
1 Model incorporates enclosure, pressure range, connection and output. Model Table 7 Options
15929 is 316 stainless steel ¼” NPT (female) pressure connection and welded
diaphragm with 4-20 mA output (TX200B only). M276 Pressure range markings in bar
M277 Pressure range markings in kPa
2 Table 3 Pressure Ranges (codes 03-08) are welded 316 stainless steel
diaphragm and pressure connection. Pressure Ranges (codes 09-19) are welded M278 Pressure range markings in Kg/cm2
15-5 stainless steel diaphragm with 316 stainless steel pressure connection. M423 ATEX flameproof compliant epoxy-coated aluminum junction box,
Pressure Range (codes 15 & 16) are 1-piece, weld-free 316 stainless steel pre-wired (not UL or cUL approved). NOT AVAILABLE ON M20
diaphragm and HF4 high pressure autoclave ¼” (female). METRIC THREAD ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VERSION
M441 M20 metric thread (male) electrical connection
M444 Paper ID tag
M446 Stainless steel ID tag and wire
M460 External ground screw; required by ATEX for non-metallic conduit
systems
M513 UL/CSA approved explosion-proof junction box, pre-wired, meets
enclosure type 4 requirements only. NOT ATEX COMPLIANT
M550 Oxygen service cleaning; alcohol cleaning to remove residue from
the process connection

HART® Smart Explosion Proof Pressure

Transmitter
TX200H Series
DESCRIPTION
The TX200H is a HART Smart pressure transmitter that provides simplified field adjustment while reliably
communicating asset management data utilizing the latest HART 7 specification. A proprietary calibration process
insures optimum temperature compensation limiting thermal effects on the sensor output. It is suited for process
control industries worldwide and provides a cost-effective solution to using conventional HART transmitters. Real-time
diagnostics report device health status and process performance, alerting users to potential problems to troubleshoot
before escalation occurs and avoiding process downtime and emergency maintenance.
FEATURES
• HART® 7 communication protocol with 4-20 mA output
• 0.25% accuracy
D
• Compact, 316 stainless steel, hermetically sealed enclosure
• cULus & ATEX certified for Class I, Div. 1, Zone 1
• Pressure ranges up to 25,000 psi
• 0:1 pressure range turndowns simple field adjustment
• Wide variety of pressure connections
• Certification of calibration accompanies every unit
• Easy integration with existing system wiring
APPLICATIONS
• Offshore & onshore drilling rigs
• Safety shutdown & control panels
• SCADA systems
• Monitoring tubing & casing pressures
• Wellhead monitoring
• Closing unit (BOP accumulator)
• Gas flow monitoring
• Pipeline compressor stations
• Pump monitoring & protection
• Metering runs
• Pipeline integrity
• Process monitoring & control
• Equipment monitoring & safety shutdown for pump, compressor & turbine skid packages
• Provides reliable asset management data

HART® Smart Explosion Proof Pressure

HOW TO ORDER
XXXXX X XX X X X XXXX
Table 1 Type Table 5 Pressure Connection

TX200 TX200 1 ¼” NPT (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 15-16
Table 2 Model 2 ½” NPT (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
H HART Smart transmitter 3 ½” NPT (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
Table 3 Pressure Range¹ 4 HF4 high pressure autoclave ¼” (female)
HF6 high pressure autoclave ⅜” (female); NOT AVAILABLE
D 03 0 to 15 psi 5
RANGES 03-05, 15-16
04 0 to 30 psi
6 LF4 medium pressure autoclave ¼” (female); NOT AVAILABLE
05 0 to 50 psi RANGES 03-05, 15-16
06 0 to 100 psi 7 LF6 medium pressure autoclave ⅜” (female); NOT AVAILABLE
07 0 to 250 psi RANGES 03-05, 15-16
08 0 to 500 psi 8 ¼” NPT (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 15-16
09 0 to 1000 psi 9 7/16-20 SAE (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
17 0 to 1500 psi A G-¼ (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
18 0 to 2000 psi B G-½ (female); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
10 0 to 2500 psi C 7/16-20 SAE (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
19 0 to 3000 psi D HM4 high pressure autoclave ¼” (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES
03-05, 15-16
11 0 to 5000 psi
E HM6 high pressure autoclave ⅜” (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES
20 0 to 6000 psi 03-05, 15-16
12 0 to 7500 psi F LM4 medium pressure autoclave ¼” (male); NOT AVAILABLE
13 0 to 10,000 psi RANGES 03-05, 15-16
14 0 to 15,000 psi G LM6 medium pressure autoclave ⅜” (male); NOT AVAILABLE

RANGES 03-05, 15-16
15 0 to 20,000 psi
H G-¼ (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
16 0 to 25,000 psi
J G-½ (male); NOT AVAILABLE RANGES 14-16
Table 4 Pressure Reference
Table 6 Output
S psi (sealed gage)
H 4-20 mA, HART® 7 communication protocol
Table 7 Options
M276 Pressure range markings in bar
M277 Pressure range markings in kPa
M278 Pressure range markings in Kg/cm2
M423 ATEX flameproof compliant epoxy-coated aluminum junction box,
pre-wired (not UL or cUL approved). NOT AVAILABLE ON
M20 METRIC THREAD ELECTRICAL CONDUIT VERSION
M441 M20 metric thread (male) electrical connection
M444 Paper ID tag
M446 Stainless steel ID tag and wire
M460 External ground screw; required by ATEX for non-metallic conduit
systems
M513 UL/CSA approved explosion-proof junction box, pre-wired, meets
enclosure type 4 requirements only. NOT ATEX COMPLIANT
M550 Oxygen service cleaning; alcohol cleaning to remove residue from
the process connection
¹ Table 3 Pressure ranges (codes 03-08) are welded 316 stainless steel diaphragm and pressure connection. Pressure ranges (codes 09-19) are welded 15-5 stainless
steel diaphragm with 316 stainless steel pressure connection. Pressure Range (codes 15 & 16) are 1-piece, weld-free 316 stainless steel diaphragm and HF4 high
pressure autoclave ¼” (female).

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Pressure Switches
United Electric
Hazardous Location Electronic Pressure/

Differential Pressure Switches
One Series
DESCRIPTION
The One Series W models are intrinsically safe (2W2D models
only) and non-incendive transmitter-switches that monitor gauge
pressure and differential pressure. The One Series can effectively
do the job of three – replacing a switch, a gauge and a transmitter.
All One Series models feature patented IAW™ (I Am Working)
intelligent self-diagnostics for applications where undetected faults
cannot be tolerated. Set point and deadband (hysteresis) are
100% programmable, providing precise adjustments for switch
cycling with unsurpassed accuracy and repeatability. Analog 4-20 D
mA output models provide field scalability, simplifying your PLC
programming.
FEATURES
• 3 ways to power the control - 2-wire discrete input power, loop-powered analog input or external power supply
• Liquid crystal display provides instrument health and alarm status
• IAW™ (I Am Working) self-diagnostics constantly monitor the health status of the control to eliminate the “blind switch”
issue
• 2-Wire models drops in place of existing mechanical switches and use the same wiring and control schemes providing
a cost-effective upgrade path
• Loop-powered models provide a 4-20 mA output and include programmable solid-state relay (SSR) switches
effectively replacing a transmitter, switch and a gauge
• High-powered SSR models switch up to 10 amperes
• Two independent SSRs combine with a 4-20 mA output for stop/start, window mode and starting permissive
applications
• Solid-state design allows for switching in high cycle rate applications without degradation
• Repeatability: 0.1% of full range span
• Accuracy: 0.5% of full range span at room temperature
• Many switch output and sensor options

Explosion Proof Electronic Pressure/Differential

Pressure Switches
One Series Ex D
DESCRIPTION
The One Series Ex D electronic pressure switches set the standard for solid-
state digital process monitoring. With a fully adjustable set point & deadband
and 0.1% repeatability, the One Series is suitable for a wide variety of harsh
and hazardous applications. Available in Type 4X enclosures for explosion-
proof and non-incendive area classifications, these electronic switches are
designed to provide protection for plants, capital equipment and people.
FEATURES
D • Digital process and status display
• Fully adjustable set point and deadband
• Local and remote self-diagnostic reporting
•3 ways to power the control - 2-wire discrete input power, loop-powered analog input or external power supply
• Agency certifications for hazardous locations - cULus, IECEx, GOST, CE and ATEX
• Class I, Division 1 and Division 2 approvals
• Provides alarm and shutdown for critical safety applications
• Solid-state design allows for switching in high cycle rate applications without degredation
• Multiple sensor types and ranges - Gage pressure from full vacuum up to 6000 psi; Differential pressure up to 200 psid

Hazardous Location Pressure/Differential

Pressure Micro-Switches
12 Series
DESCRIPTION
12 Series hazardous location switches are ideal for operation in tough applications
where space is at a premium. A snap-action Belleville spring assembly is used to provide
vibration resistance and prolonged switch life. The 316 stainless steel enclosure and
hermetically sealed switch provide rugged protection from the environment. Approved
for use in hazardous locations worldwide, the 12 Series is installed within applications
ranging from offshore oil rigs to rotating equipment, and more.
FEATURES
• Pressure Ranges: 30" Hg Vac to 12,500 psi
• WC Range: -20" wc Vac to 200" wc pressure
D
• Differential Pressure Range: 0.7” wcd to 150 psid
• UL, cUL, and ATEX approved for Div. 1 or Zone 1 hazardous locations; CE compliant
• Dual seal compliant to ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 & NEC 501.17
• 316 Stainless steel wetted parts are NACE MR-0175 compliant
• Snap-acting Belleville spring for long life, vibration resistance and stability
• Optional Hastelloy® and Monel® sensor material for corrosive media
• Optional medium-pressure and high-pressure autoclave pressure connections
Specifications
Storage Temperature -58° to 203°F (-50 to 95°C)
Operating Ambient 58 to 203°F (-50 to 95°C). Set point shifts less than 1% of range for a 50°F (28°C) ambient temperature change. Slight ambient effects for 25-
Temperature 50’ extra capillary length on temperature switch models, consult factory.
Media Temperature Pressure models: Sensor types 2, 7, 9: -50 to 400°F (-45 to 204°C) Sensor types 3, 4, 8: -20 to 200°F (-28 to 93°C) Sensor types 5, 6: 0 to
320°F (-18 to 160°C) Sensor type P, W: 0 to 200°F (-18 to 93°C); 20 to 250°F (-7 to 121°C) for optional Viton sensor
Differential pressure models: Sensor type K: 0 to 180°F (-18 to 82°C); 20 to 250°F (-7 to 121°C) for optional Viton sensor
Set Point Repeatability Pressure models: Sensor types 2, P: ±1.5% of adjustable range Sensor types 3-9, W: ±1% of adjustable range
Differential pressure models: K1 to K3: ±1%, K4 to K6: ±1.5% of adjustable range
Shock Differential pressure : set point repeats after 15 G’s, 10 millisecond duration
Pressure models: Set point repeats after 75 G’s, 10 milliseconds
Vibration Differential press: Set point repeats after 2.5 G’s, 10-2000 Hz.
Pressure models: Set point repeats after 15 G’s, 10-2000 Hz
Enclosure 316 stainless steel
Enclosure Classification Certified to Enclosure Type 4X Class I, Division 1 product meets enclosure Type 7; Class II, Division I product meets enclosure type 9.
Certified to IP66 requirements
Pressure Connection ½" NPT (female) or ¼" NPT (female). Differential pressure: ⅛" NPT (female)

General Purpose, Weather-Tight Pressure/

Differential Pressure Switches
100 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 100 Series is a cost-effective pressure switch for process plants and OEM equipment. The rugged, one piece
enclosure features a slanted cover for wiring accessibility. A wide variety of microswitch and process-connection options
make this versatile series ideal for applications requiring a rugged weather-proof mechanical switch.
FEATURES
• Single Switch Output
• Epoxy Coated and Gasketed Cast Aluminum Enclosure Type 4X
• Tamper-Resistant Set Point “Lock”
• Proof Pressures to 10,000 psi (689,5 bar)
D • Adjustable Ranges
• Pressure Range: 30 “Hg Vac to 5000 psi
• “WC Ranges: 300 “wc Vacuum to 250 “wc Pressure
• Differential Pressure Ranges: 0.2 “wcd to 500 psid
• UL listed and cUL certified
• CE compliant to low voltage directive and pressure equipment directive
• Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic safety compliance
• Single switch (SPDT or DPDT) output
• Welded stainless steel diaphragm models
• Ultra low pressure, “wc models
• Optional sensor material for corrosive media
• Polished stainless steel flushmount connection
• Pump switch models with wide adjustable deadband
APPLICATIONS
Typical applications that utilize the 100 Series are heat tracing, freeze protection, processing equipment (pumps, com-
pressors), inputs for annunciator panels, and fire suppression systems.
Base Model Type Description
H100 Pressure One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with “High-Low” reference scale
H100K Differential Pressure One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with “High-Low” reference scale

Hazardous Location Pressure/Differential Pressure

Switches
117 Series
DESCRIPTION
Approved for Division 2, Zone 2 hazardous and corrosive atmospheres, and with optional Zone 0 intrinsic safety
compliance, the 117 Series can be used to measure vacuum, pressure, and differential pressure, in a variety of
applications. The rugged, one piece enclosure features a slanted cover for wiring accessibility to the enclosed terminal
block that is wired to either a SPDT or DPDT hermetically sealed microswitch. All welded, stainless steel pressure
connections and sensors provide superior corrosion resistance – NACE compliant – and fire-safe protection within the
harshest environments.
FEATURES
• Epoxy Coated Type 4X Enclosure and Stainless Steel Component Parts
• Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch, SPDT or DPDT Output
D
• Terminal Block Wiring
• Pressure Range: 30” Hg Vac to 3500 psi
• “WC Range: 300 “wc vacuum to 250 “wc pressure
• Differential Pressure Ranges
0.8 “wcd to 500 psid
• Approved for Division 2, Zone 2 hazardous locations
• Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic safety compliance for Zone 0
APPLICATIONS
The 117 Series is an ideal choice for the most demanding applications; typically steel and aluminum mills, chemical and
petrochemical plants, pulp and paper mills, wastewater treatment plants, midstream and downstream oil & gas, and
pharmaceutical plants.
H117 Pressure One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with “High-Low” reference scale
H117K Differential Pressure One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with “High-Low” reference scale

Explosion Proof Pressure/Differential Pressure

Switches
120 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 120 Series offers a variety of pressure, vacuum and differential pressure ranges, as well as process connections,
wetted materials and sensor types. With a common flexible platform, models can quickly be adapted at the factory for
special requirements, such as ranges, process connections and electrical ratings.
FEATURES
• Class I, Div. 1 & 2, (Zone 1) Class II, Div. 1 & 2 Class III
• Choice of one or two SPDT, optional DPDT output
• Dual electrical conduit openings
• Terminal block wiring
D • Welded diaphragm or bellows sensor
• Ultra-low pressure ranges
• Standard product approvals include cULus, ATEX & IECEx
• Internal adjustment hex or external adjustment via calibrated dial(s) with tamper
resistant cover
• Integral cover lock
• Wide variety of sensor materials
• Wide adjustable deadband models
APPLICATIONS
Typical industries using 120 Series switches include chemical, petrochemical, refinery, oil and gas production and trans-
mission, and pharmaceuticals.
J120 Pressure One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale, dual conduits
H121 Pressure One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
H122 Pressure Two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
H122P Pressure Two SPDT; hermetically sealed switches; epoxy coated enclosure; external common adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
J120K Differential Pressure One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale, dual conduits
H121K Differential Pressure One SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
H122K Differential Pressure Two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit

Weather-Tight Pressure/Differential Pressure

Multi-Switches
400 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 400 Series is a versatile family of vacuum, pressure and differential pressure switches for applications that
require single or multiple switching capabilities. Dual and triple switch versions provide multi-output for alarm and
shutdown, pre-alarm and alarm, high/low limit or level staging functions. A wide variety of microswitch and process
connection options, along with a weather-tight enclosure, make the 400 Series an ideal choice for most ordinary location
applications. Its worldwide use is assured with approvals and certifications to agency standards. Widely used throughout
the process industries, the 400 Series provides threshold protection and control for many critical functions.
FEATURES
• 1, 2 & 3 switch outputs
• Epoxy-coated enclosure designed to meet enclosure type 4X
D
• Setting via reference dial or hex screw adjustment
• FM approved
• Adjustable Ranges
• "WC Range: 300 "wc vacuum to 250 “wc pressure
• Pressure Range: 30 “Hg Vac to 6000 psi
Differential Pressure Range: 1"wcd to 200 psid
• UL listed and cUL certified, FM approved
• One, two or three switch outputs may be separated up to 100% of range
• Wide variety of available options and pressure sensor modules.
J400 Pressure One SPDT output; internal hex screw adjustment
J402 Pressure Two SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment
J403 Pressure Three SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment
J400 Pressure One SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial
J402 Pressure Two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial
J403 Pressure Three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial
J400K Differential Pressure One SPDT output; internal hex screw adjustment
J402K Differential Pressure Two SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment
H400K Differential Pressure One SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial
H402K Differential Pressure Two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial

Precision Sensors
PRECISION SENSORS Section Table of Contents
High Purity Differential Pressure Switch

D48W
DESCRIPTION
The High Purity Differential Pressure Switches are
designed and manufactured specifically for clean
processes requiring reliability and longevity. These
switches features 2 ports, port 1 is suitable for high
purity gases and other media. Port 2 is suitable
for dry air or inert gases. All products are 100%
Helium leak tested, comply with European safety
requirements, bear the CE part mark and are UL
recognized.
FEATURES
D • Electron beam welded 316L pressure sensor provides
fatigue resistant hermetic barrier to contain the
process media of port 1
• Port 1 has a 10 Ra or better electropolished 316L
stainless steel wetted surface APPLICATIONS
• Negative rate "Snap Action" Belleville spring enhances • Clean Processes
the life of the pressure sensor • Load - lock Chambers
• "Snap Action" electrical switch minimizes contact • Gas Delivery Systems
bounce and improves contact life • Mini Environments
• Epoxy seal for strain relief
SPECIFICATIONS
Calibration All units are factory set to customer specifications
Construction Electron beam welded diaphragm;negative rate "Snap Action" Belleville load spring
Media Port 1: any liquid or gas compatible with 316L stainless steel; Port 2: dry air or inert gas
Leakage 100% helium leak tested to 1x10⁻⁹ std cc/sec (Port 1)
Surface Finish Port 1: 10 Ra or better
Temperature Operating: 0 to 130°F; Non-operating: -40 to 180°F; Higher tempareture constructions are available
Electrical All units utilize a UL recognized and CSA listed electrical switch. Gold contacts: 1 amp resistive, 0.5 amp inductive at 28
VDC; Silver contacts: 5 amp resistive, 3 amp inductive at 28 VDC, 5 amp resistive at 250 VAC; mechanical contact life
up to 10 million cycles
Enclosure The mechanism, electrical switch and writing are exposed to the media of Port 2
Installation Insentive to mounting attitude
Available Settings 20 to 250 mm Hg differential
Hysterisis (Deadband) 20 mm HG + 5% of setting
Repeatability ±5 mm + 2% of setting
Proof Pressure Differential 100 PSID
Proof Pressure Both Ports Simultaneousiy 300 PSIG

High Purity Differential Pressure Switch - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
XXXX XX X X XXX XX XX XX XX X XX X
Table 1 Model Table 8 Finish

D48W 20 to 400 mm Hg differential 10 20 Ra (standard)
Table 2 Port Layout 5 5 Ra
1H Port 1; High pressure Table 9 Contact Position
1L Port 1: Low pressure NC Normally closed (0 PSID)
Table 3 Actuation NO Normally open (0 PSID)
I Increasing differential pressure DT SPDT (3 wires)
D Decreasing differential pressure Table 10 Contact Material D
Table 4 Units G Gold
P PSI S Silver
I Inches of mercury ("Hg) Table 11 Lead Lenght
M mm of Hg 11 Enter the lead lenght (24" standard)
Table 5 Setting Table 12 Electrical Interface
100 Enter the setting L Free leads
Table 6 Port 1 End Fitting C Crimp type connector; specify manufacturer and P/N [Amp MR
1 - 640507 (or 8) - 0 standard]
VM ¼" Male end seal type
Table 7 Port 2 End Fitting * Other options such as custom pressure connections and different meterials are
VM ¼" Male end seal type available upon request.
4B ¼ Barb fitting (standard)

High Purity Pressure Switch

W Series
DESCRIPTION
Designed specifically for the demanding requirements of semiconductor tool OEMs, they provide highly repeatable
on-off switching for alarm, shutdown and interlock applications. Wetted surfaces are VIM - VAR 316L and are
standardly 10 Ra or 5 Ra depending on the requirement. End connections include face-seal, flow-through and
flush-type fittings. Set points can be gauge, absolute or vacuum and cycle life can be over 1 million on-off cycles.
Manufacturing of high-purity products is done in a clean-room environment.
FEATURES
• Clean, Reliable, Long Life Performance
• Highly Accurate and Repeatable Design
• Tamper Proof Setting
• No Adjustment Needed
D • UL Recognized, CE Marked
SPECIFICATIONS
Calibration All models are factory set and are not field resettable
Construction Electron beam welded diaphragm sensor for fatigue resistant hermetic barner to contain process media; Negative rate "Snap Action" Belleville
load spring for long term repeatability.
Materials Wetted parts are VIM - VAR 316L stainless steel; Other materials are available
Leakage 100% helium leak tested to 1 x 10⁻⁹ std-cc/sec.
Surface Finish 10 Ra standard, 5 Ra optional
Temperature Operating: 0° to 130°F Non-operating: -40 to 180°F Higher temperature constructions are available
Electrical All units utilize a UL recognized and CSA listed electrical switch. Gold contacts: 1 A resistive, 0.5 A inductive @ 28 VDC Silver contacts: 5 A
resistive, 3 A inductive @ 28 VDC, 5 A resistive @ 250 VAC; except E units which are 3 A @28 VDC
Enclosure P and PV type units are vented to ambient conditions for sensing reference (ambient) pressure; E type units have hermetically sealed contacts,
a fixed reference pressure and a secondary seal
Installation Insensitive to mounting attitude
Minimum Operating Up to 1,000,000 cycles depending on type and application
Proof Pressure Internal Volume

Part Number Pressure Type Available Settings Deadband (Actuation Value) Repeatability
(PSIA to PSIG)** (CC)*
PV48W Vacuum 10 to 150 mm Hg VAC 20 mm Hg + 5% of setting ± 5 mm Hg + 2% of setting 0 to 15 2.22
PV36W Vacuum 125 to 750 mm Hg VAC 40 mm Hg + 5% of setting ± 15 mm Hg + 2% of setting 0 to 25 1.06
P48W Gauge 0.2 to 3 PSIG 0.5 PSI + 5% of setting ± 0.1 PSI + 2% of setting 0 to 15 2.22
P36W Gauge 2.5 to 20 PSIG 1.0 PSI + 6% of setting ± 0.3 PSI + 2% of setting 0 to 25 1.06
P17W Gauge 15 to 100 PSIG 4.0 PSI + 7% of setting ± 1.5 PSI + 4% of setting 0 to 300 0.46
E48W Absolute 10 to 150 Torr 20 Torr + 5% of setting ± 5.0 Torr + 2% of setting 0 to 15 2.22
E36W Absolute 100 to 1000 Torr 40 Torr + 6% of setting ± 15 Torr + 2% of setting 0 to 25 1.06
E17W Absolute 1000 to 5000 Torr 200 Torr to 1000 Torr ± 75 Torr + 4% of setting 0 to 300 0.46
*With ¼" end seal fitting

**Higher proof pressure available

Three in One Pressure Device

Staset
DESCRIPTION
Designed for semiconductor fabrication and OEM process equipment, Staset®
combines the safety of a “tamper proof” switch, the output of a transducer and the
convenience of a gauge in a reliable, cost effective 1⅛” package. Available with a
backlit rotating display, choice of analog output, LED indication of switch contact
state, Staset® is an ideal choice for accurate long-term protection of equipment
and processes. Staset® eliminates potential leak paths by reducing the number of
fluid connections. Threshold protection is achieved with a tamper proof switch and
deadband that can be factory set from 1% to 98% of full scale.
FEATURES
• Backlit display with 180° CW & 90° CCW rotation
• Tamper proof switch points (Deadband set to customer specification) D
• 5 Million cycle life
• Optional 0-5VDC, 0.2-5.2VDC or 4-20mA analog output
• 316L SS wetted surfaces, 5Ra
• Status LED
• UL Recognized
• CE Marked
• RoHs Compliant
SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Sensor Micromachined silicon piezoresistive strain gauge isolated from process media by a rugged 2 mil. 316L stainless steel diaphragm.
Construction Wetted material – 316L stainless steel, pressure compartment welded leak tight to 1x10⁻⁹ atm cc/sec
Switch Output Isolated SPST (Form A) solid-state relay, normally open or normally closed, factory set to pressure value referenced in model chart
Deadband Factory set to any value from 1% to 98% full scale
Switching Response Time 30 ms max.
Switching Output Rating 0.25 amps AC or DC continuous, 0.4 amps peak, 50 V maximum
Switch Point Accuracy 0.4% full scale rms at 22 +/- 5°C. This includes: linearity, hysteresis, zero offset, span, and long term drift. Temperature coefficient
(zero and span): 0.017% full scale/°C.
Switch Point Repeatability 0.25% full scale
Status LED Indicates circuit condition – open or closed, and power on. Green indicates power on, circuit closed; red indicates power on, circuit
open.
Temperature Range Operating 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F); Non-Operating -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F)
Internal Volume 0.5 cc for standard ¼ End Seal type connection
Input Power 12 to 30 VDC, 25 mA minimum. Product is reverse polarity protected
Fail Safe Upon power loss, contacts will default to the open state
Life 5 million cycles minimum
System Pressure Display 3 digit backlit LCD display of system pressure with 1% full scale accuracy from 0 to 50°C
Analog Outputs 4 to 20 mA analog output, isolated, current sinking; loop resistance 0 to 900 ohms linear with input range of 12 to 30 VDC. 0 to 5 VDC
or 0.2 to 5.2 VDC analog output proportional to listed pressure range within +/- 1% full scale from 0 to 50°C, 10K ohms minimum load
impedance.
Approvals UL recognized component under File #E179859.
CE marked, conforms to the LVD and EMC directives
Proof of performance data available upon request.
“Window” Mode The window mode allows for the output to be in one state (open or closed) while inside a band, and change state outside the band.
The higher and lower pressure set points must be defined, along with whether the switch is to be open or closed inside the band
(deadband does not apply). For instance, a typical callout will be “switch closed between 50 psia and 20 psia.”
Compound Gauge Feature For EAN100D Model, unit is programmed to display 15 psi vacuum to 85 psi pressure.
For EAN300 Model, unit is programmed to display 15 psi vacuum to 285 psi pressure.
The sealed gauge unit output varies with site atmospheric pressure. The analog output option is over the full scale range.

Three in One Pressure Device - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXX X XX XX X XX X X XX XX
Table 1 Model Table 5 Units

Code Type Range/Unit Proof Burst P PSI
Pressure Pressure
T Torr
EAN 15 Absolute 0 to 770 Torr 45 psia 10000 psia
K Kpa or Mpa (depending on range)
(1 to 102
KPa) Table 6 Pressure Connection
EAN 30 Absolute 0 to 1500 60 psia 10000 psia VM ¼ male End Seal type (Standard)
Torr (0 to 206
KPa) FM Flow-through type,/Male End Seal type, both ends
D EAN 100 Absolute 0 to 99 psia

(7 to 689
200 psia 10000 psia FF Flow-through type,/Female End Seal type, both ends
SC 1-⅛” Surface Mount C Seal per SEMI F86-0304
KPa)
Table 7 Electrical Connection
EAN 300 Absolute 0 to 300 psia 600 psia 10000 psia
(0 to 2.06 L Free leads (standard)
MPa) C Crimp-type connector (Amp MR Series Standard)
EGN 100 Gauge 0 to 99 psig 0 to 200 psig 500 psig Table 8 Lead Length
(7 to 689
KPa) X Specify in inches-24" is standard
EGN 300 Gauge 0 to 300 psig 0 to 600 psig 1500 psig Table 9 Analog Output
(0 to 2.06
- No Analog Output
MPa)
A 4-20 mA
Table 2 Display
V1 0-5 VDC
- No LCD Display
V2 0.2-5.2 VDC
D LCD Display
Table 10 Options
Table 3 Closing Pressure (Increasing or Decreasing)
- No options
Please specify value within model's pressure range
WM Window Operating Mode
Table 4 Opening Pressure (Increasing or Decreasing)
CG Compound Gauge Feature
Please specify value within model's pressure range

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Thermometers
Tel-Tru
Bimetal Thermometers
Bi-Metal Thermometer
Bi-Metal Thermometer • LENS
• Extra heavy duty instrument glass standard
• Shatterproof glass, tempered glass, and plastics
optional
• CASE AND BEZEL
• 304 stainless steel standard • POINTER
• 316 stainless steel optional • Black painted aluminum
• All external parts corrosion • Balanced and precisely assembled to bimetal
resistant to most chemicals coil stem
• Parts designed for maximum • Direct transfer of coil movement to
strength to meet requirements of temperature displayed on dial D
heavy duty industrial applications
• Manufactured with precision
tooling on modern OSHA approved
stamping equipment
• Statistical Process Control QA
methods used to assure component
quality and process consistency
• Polished finish identifies Tel-Tru
quality
• Cases may be silicone filled for
additional dampening of extreme
vibration, or to assure consistent
performance in low process
temperature/high environmental
humidity applications
• EXTERNAL RESET
• Calibration adjustment using an Allen
• DATE STAMPING wrench discourages inadvertent tampering
• Available for QA tracking of industrial • Stainless steel pinion is sealed with a
thermometers silicone “O” ring to maintain integrity of
• HERMETIC SEAL hermetic seal
• Case/Bezel assembly is a precision • Pinion works with gear teeth cut and formed
interference fit in dial
• Silicone gasket provides dustproof and • Models without reset are available
leakproof seal
• Welded construction-Unique 360º TIG • DIAL
weld joins case, stem and threaded • True anti-parallax dial on 3", 4"' 5" models
connection • Graduations on dial ring are on the same plane as the
• Testing conforms with ASME B40.3 pointer tip minimizing reading error
procedures • Concave design of dial ring enhances readability
• White appearing .032" anodized aluminum
• THREADED CONNECTION • Graduations for each temperature range are calculated
• 304 stainless steel standard to match deflection data of bimetallic material
• 316 stainless steel optional • Large easy to read black numerals and graduations are
• Precision manufactured on Tel-Tru CNC machines printed on precision pad printing equipment in our factory
• Statistical Process Control QA methods used to assure
component quality and process consistency

Bi-Metal Thermometer - Continued

• BIMETAL COIL
• Super sensitive bimetallic helix coil
• Fabricated to tight tolerances
• Heat treated for stress relief
• Silicone coated to minimize pointer vibration and maximize heat transfer and
response time
• Angular deflection of each coil is tested for perfect match with dial graduation layouts
in precision calibration baths designed and built by Tel-Tru with accuracy to ±1⁄10°F
• IMMERSION:
D • Groove around stem shows minimum immersion point on each thermometer
• For most accurate reading sensitive portion of stem must be completely immersed
• BIMETAL BUSHING
• Pressed into groove on stem
• Centers coil in stem
• 302 stainless steel stem wire goes through center of bushing connecting bimetal
element to pointer, minimizes coil touching tube wall
• Centering bearings are used at regular intervals on long stem thermometers
• STEM
• 304 Stainless steel tubing is welded/drawn and fabricated to exacting tolerances
• 316 stainless steel optional
• Standard stem diameter is .250" (6.35mm) – options include .375" (9.52mm), .236"
(6mm) and .315" (8mm)
• Stem lengths available from 21⁄2" to 120"
• Tip is welded and finished for hermetic seal and unique look
• TEMPERATURE RANGES • QUALITY SYSTEM

• 20 Standard Fahrenheit ranges from -100° to 1000° • ISO 9000 comparable
• 20 Standard Celsius ranges from -75° to 550° • Assures that all materials, methods and processes meet
• 13 Standard Dual scale ranges Tel-Tru’s highest standards for form, fit, and function
• Availability of over 120 ranges developed, may vary by • Statistical Process Control QA methods used to assure
dial size component quality and process consistency
• Calibration lab for NIST traceable verification of all
• OVER TEMPERATURE LIMITS standard thermometers and measuring instruments used
• Up to 250°F: 100% in manufacturing process
• 250° F to 550°F: 50%
• 550° F to 1000°F: 800°F for continuous use, • ACCURACY
intermittent use over 800°F • Per ASME B40.3 Grade A ±1% full span is guaranteed
• Calibration is to standards traceable to National Institute
of Standards and Testing (NIST)
• Tel-Tru methods:
* Most careful and precise in the industry
* Produces typical accuracy better than ASME B40.3
Grade AA (1%-1⁄2%-1%) full span

Adjustable Angle Industrial Thermometers

3", 4" and 5" Thermometers
DESCRIPTION
Heavy Duty design, with versatile case and stem that
can be adjusted to almost any angle for easy viewing.
Preferred by the process, offshore, power, pharmaceutical
and chemical industries.
SPECIFICATIONS
Stem Lengths: 2½", 4", 6", 9", 12", 15", 18" and 24" (available up
to 120").
Stem Diameter: .250" standard up to 42" stem.
D
.375" standard over 42" stem.
Connection: ½" NPT.
External Reset: Easy to calibrate by inserting ¹∕₁₆" Allen wrench into
reset opening.
Construction: 304 stainless steel external parts. Welded
construction. Corrosion resistant to most chemicals.
Hermetic seal: Per ASME B40.3 dustproof and leakproof.
Harness: All stainless steel brackets with screws that loosen
to allow 360° rotation of head and 180° adjustment
of stem position.
Bellows: Heavy-duty flexible stainless steel. Hermetically
sealed at case and connection. Protects
mechanism that transfers temperature change from
bimetal coil to pointer.
Dial: True Anti-Parallax dial, easy-to-read from any
angle, minimizes reading errors. Anodized
aluminum with large black numbers and
graduations.
Lens: Glass.
Bimetal Coil: Helix coil is silicone coated on ranges below 500°F
for vibration dampening and to maximize heat
transfer and response time.
Accuracy: ±1% full span per ASME B40.3 Grade A.
Adjustment of the angle between case and stem
may affect accuracy up to 0.5% of span (ASME
B40.3).
Over Temperature Limits: Up to 250°F 100%; 250°F to 550°F, 50%; 550°F to
1000°F, continuous use up to 800°F, intermittent
use over 800°F.
Item Description
AA-375R 3" diameter head with calibration feature

Back Connected Industrial Thermometers

DESCRIPTION
A rugged 90° back angle, rear threaded connection
design. Commonly used in industrial, pulp and paper, food
and beverage processing, HVAC, and OEM applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Stem Lengths: 2½", 4", 6", 9", 12", 15", 18" and 24"
(available up to 120").
D Stem Diameter: .250" standard up to 42" stem.

.375" standard over 42" stem.
External Reset: Models with calibration feature are easy to
calibrate by inserting ¹∕₁₆" Allen wrench into
reset opening.
construction. Corrosion resistant to most
chemicals.
Dial: True Anti-Parallax dial, easy-to-read from
any angle, minimizes reading errors.
Anodized aluminum with large black
numbers and graduations.
Lens: Glass.
Bimetal Coil: Helix coil is silicone coated on ranges
below 500°F for vibration dampening and
to maximize heat transfer and response
time.
Accuracy: ±1% full span per ASME B40.3 Grade
A. When using maximum or minimum
temperature indicator, accurate to within
11/2% full span.
Over Temperature Limits: Up to 250°F 100%; 250°F to 550°F, 50%;
550°F to 1000°F, continuous use up to
800°F, intermittent use over 800°F.
Item Description
GT-300 3" diameter head
GT-300R 3" diameter head with calibration feature
MX-325R 3" diameter head with calibration feature and min or max
temperature indicator
MM-325R 3" diameter head with calibration feature and min and max
MX-525R 5" diameter head with calibration feature and min or max
MM-525R 5" diameter head with calibration feature and min and max

Back Connected Industrial Thermometers - Continued

1 ¾" and 2" Thermometers
DESCRIPTION
A smaller size, heavy duty, rear connected unit commonly
used in OEM equipment and light industrial applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
Stem Lengths: GT Models 2½", 4", 6", 8", 12", and 18". LN Models
2½", 4", 6", 9", 12", 15", 18" and 24" (available up
to 120").
Stem Diameter: GT model .150" standard up to 18" stem.
LN model .250" standard up to 42" stem.
D
LN model .375" is standard over 42" stem.
LN-250 (With 2" dial)
Connection: GT models ⅛", ¼", or ⅜" NPT is standard. LN
models ¼" NPT is standard.
External Reset: LN-250R is easy to calibrate by loosening the socket
head screw (above hex connecting nut) with ⁵∕₆₄"
Allen wrench.
Dial: Anodized aluminum with large black numbers and
graduations.
Lens: Glass.
1000°F, continuous use up to 800°F, intermittent use
over 800°F.
Item Description
GT-200 1¾" diameter head
LN-250 2" diameter head
LN-250R 2" diameter head with calibration feature

Bottom Connected Industrial Thermometers

DESCRIPTION
A sturdy straight form design commonly used for industrial
applications and OEM equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Stem Lengths: 2½", 4", 6", 9", 12", 15", 18" and 24" (available up
to 120").
Stem Diameter: .250" standard up to 42" stem.
D .375" standard over 42" stem.
External Reset: Easy to calibrate by inserting Allen wrench into reset
opening.
Dial: True Anti-Parallax dial, easy-to-read from any angle,
minimizes reading errors. Anodized aluminum with
large black numbers and graduations.
Lens: Glass.
1000°F, continuous use up to 800°F, intermittent use
over 800°F.
Item Description
BC-350R 3" diameter head with calibration feature

Tel-Tru
Non-Contact Thermometers
Non-Contact Infrared Long Range Professional

Thermometers
Tel-Fast QT4242L
DESCRIPTION
The QT4242L Long Range Professional Grade Infrared Thermometer is the
most advanced Tel-Fast infrared thermometer manufactured today. This dual-
laser model features precision temperature measurement and high resolution
optics.
SPECIFICATIONS
D
Temperature Range -76/1600°F (-60/900°C)
Distance to Target Ratio 30:1
Accuracy/ Resolution +/-2% of reading or 2°C (4°F), whichever is greater
Ambient Operating Temperature 32/122°F (0/50°C)
Dual Laser Targeting
Measures Maximum Temperature during scan
Key Features Select F or C
Adjustable Emissivity (preset at .95)
Backlit LCD Display
Power 2 x AAA batteries for 180 hours, Auto-Off
Weight/Dimensions 11.3 oz. (with batteries); 9 x 6 x 2.8"
Carrying Case Hard ABS padded plastic carrying case included
Non-Contact Infrared Professional Grade

Thermometers
Tel-Fast QT418LD
DESCRIPTION
The QT418LD Professional Grade Infrared Thermometer is an all-purpose Tel-Fast
Professional Grade Infrared Thermometer which offers features and specifications to meet
practically any surface or contact measurement application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy/ Resolution +/-2% of reading 1/10th degree resolution
Laser Targeting K-Type thermocouple port accepts any mini-K-Probe (sold separately)
Measures Min- Max-Dif-Avg Temperature during scan
Adjustable Emissivity
Backlit LCD Display
Power 2 AAA batteries for 130 hours, Auto-Off
Weight/Dimensions 9 oz., 7.5 x 6 x 1.5"
Carrying Case Sold separately

Non-Contact Infrared General Grade

Thermometers
Tel-Fast QT418L1
DESCRIPTION
TThe QT418L1 Professional Grade Infrared Thermometer is the most rugged of the
Tel-Fast professional grade thermometers. Its list of features and specifications meet
practically any measurement application.
SPECIFICATIONS
D Temperature Range -76/932°F (-60/500°C)

Accuracy/ Resolution +/-2% of reading with 1/10th degree resolution
Laser Targeting
Measures Min- Max-Dif-Avg Temperature during scan
Key Features Programmable HI and LOW audible temperature alarms
Select F or C
Backlit LCD Display
Weight/Dimensions 9 oz., 7.5 x 6 x 1.5"
Carrying Case Sold separately
Non-Contact Infrared Professional Grade Food

Inspection Thermometers
Tel-Fast QTFI40L
DESCRIPTION
The QTFI40L Professional Grade Food Inspector’s Infrared Thermometer meets tough
HACCP requirements. It’s the model that food inspectors rely on when high accuracy is
essential.
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy/ Resolution +/- 1.8°F (1°C) at 32 to 150°F of reading with 1/10th degree resolution
Below 32°F: +/- 2°F (1°C), +/- 0.1°C—Above 150°F: +/- 1.5% (meets HACCP ranges)
Ambient Oper. Temp. 32/122°F (0/50°C)
Laser Targeting
Key Features Measures Average and Maximum temperatures
Select F or C
Weight/ Dimensions 7 oz., 3 x 6 x 1.5"
Carrying Case N/A

Non-Contact Infrared Food Inspection

Thermometers
Tel-Fast QT303F
DESCRIPTION
The QT303F Food Service and Inspection Thermometer is an advanced Food
Inspector’s Infrared Thermometer, Contact Probe and HACCP Alarm. It is a
3-in-one unit offering infrared, Needle-Tipped K-Type probe and GO-NO GO
critical temperature visible alarms at -40 and 140°F. Probe folds into long side
when not in use.
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range Infrared: -67/572°F (-55/250°C)
Needle Tip - K Probe: -67/626°F (-55/330°C)
Distance to Target Ratio 2.5 : 1
Infrared +/- 1.8°F (1°C) at 32 to 149°F of reading
Below 32°F: +/- 2°F (1°C) +/- 0.1°C-Above 150°F: +/- 1.5%
Accuracy/ Resolution
K Probe: +/- 0.9°F (0.5°C)
1/10th degree resolution
3-in-1 with Contact Probe and HACCP Alarm
Key Features
Measures Average, Minimum, and Maximum temperatures
Weight/ Dimensions 2.7 oz., 0.95 x 1.5 x 6.1"
Carrying Case N/A
Non-Contact Infrared General Use Thermometers

Tel-Fast 2
DESCRIPTION
The Tel-Fast 2 thermometer is hand-held, battery-operated devices that safely
and accurately measure temperature using non-contact infrared technology. It
has a 10:1 optics ration and comes in 2 temperature ranges and is available
with or without a laser. The optional laser increases ease of use and accuracy
by making aiming even more precise.
SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range QT10 and QTL10*: 0/750°F (-18/399°C)
QT10Z and QTL10Z*: -67/260°F (-55/125°C)
* L denotes Laser
Distance to Target Ratio 10:1 with 1" min. target
Accuracy/ Resolution Up to 600°F (315°C): ±2% of reading or 3°F (2°C) plus one digit, whichever
is greater
Over 600°F (315°F): -4%
1°F (1°C) resolution
Power 9-volt battery, Auto-Off
Weight/ Dimensions 3.3 oz. (without battery), 4.7 x 1.9 x 1.4"
Carrying Case Included

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • RTDs, Thermowells &
Thermocouples
Applied Sensor Technologies
Temperature Sensors
Sensor Types
Thermocouples
A thermocouple is two wires of dissimilar metals joined at
one end. Changes in temperature at the junction induce a
change in electromotive force (emf) at the other end. Our
standard offering includes base-metal (J, K, E and T) and
noble-metal (R, S, and B) calibrations.
RTDs or Resistance Temperature Detectors

An RTDs resistance increases as the temperature
increases. We offer both wire-wound and thin-film designs,
D depending on the application. Many possible curves
are available, from 100-ohm, 500-ohm, and 1000-ohm
platinum RTDs in both DIN and American alphas, to
nickel-iron and copper curves.
Thermistors
Thermistors rely on the resistance change in a ceramic
semiconductor, with the resistance dropping non-linearly
with a temperature rise. Many different elements are
offered, including the common 10K and 100K curves.
IC Sensors
The integrated circuit (IC) temperature transducer
provides either voltage or current output and is extremely
linear.
Custom Designed Sensors for OEM Customers
Sensor Configurations
Applied Sensor Technologies has a broad selection of
standard temperature sensors that are designed for
general
industrial use. These are available for a variety of uses
and come in many standard configurations:
• Terminal Heads – Configurations including NEMA 4 and
explosion proof heads; with or without NUN (nipple-
union-nipple) connections
• Leadwire – Stainless steel sheath with fiberglass, Teflon®
or PVC insulation available with a variety of protective
coverings including Teflon® sleeves
• Process Mount – Double and single sided process mount
styles and single sided instrument mounts
• Plugs – Standard and mini male plugs with and without
leadwires
• Surface Mount – A variety of mounting options including
washer styles, mounting lugs and weld pads; with
fiberglass or Teflon® insulation

Thermocouples
Temperature Sensors - Continued
Heat Trace RTDs

Heat Trace RTDs simplify installation and reduce your
maintenance expenses. Designed for use in any pipe or
surface temperature measuring application, these sensors
have:
• NEMA 4 or explosion-proof heads
• Heat transfer pad with excellent temperature response
• Rugged stainless steel sheaths for excellent mechanical
protection
• Replaceable element design for simplified RTD D
replacement — To replace a faulty element, you simply
remove the head cover, disconnect the leads and
remove the flexible element. You then insert the new
element and reconnect the leads. Your process is up and
running in minutes. Style(s) Description
• Options include dual RTD sensors, thermocouple Thermocouples - Terminal Head Styles - Types J, K, E, T
sensors and a variety of head styles
15 NEMA 4, welded NPT process fitting
21 Welded sheath, no process fitting, with optional head
Temperature Sensor Accessories 22 ATEX-approved, explosion-proof, welded NPT process fitting
• Thermowells and protection tubes 45 NEMA 4, spring-loaded, NUN hardware
• Thermocouple extension wire 48 Spring loaded hex fitting, NUN hardware, optional head
• Temperature sensor heads and terminal blocks 65 NEMA 4 connection head with flexible armor cable
• Extension lead wire assemblies
75 Spring-loaded hex fitting, with optional head
• Plugs and other terminations
Explosion-proof, spring-loaded, NUN hardware
• Compression fittings 77
78 Explosion-proof, welded NPT process fitting
82 NEMA 4 connection head with tungsten carbide tip
Thermocouples - Terminal Head Beaded Styles - Types R, S, B, J, K
81N Primary protection tube only
81B Dual protection tubes, bushing mounting
81C Dual protection tubes, collar mounting
81F Dual protection tubes, flange mounting
80 NEMA 4 head, beaded element
50 Replacement element for J/K beaded thermocouples
51 Replacement element for R,S,B assemblies
Thermocouples - Sheath Styles
2/4/2028 Sheath with leadwire, stripped ends
3 Sheath with leadwire and armor
5/7/1969 Sheath with leads and plug
14/74 Sheath with attached plug
23I/23P/24 Sheath with leads and NPT process or instrument fitting
32 Washer mounting with leads and armor
38 Cutable sheath
41 Mounting lug with leadwire
71 Spring-loaded bayonet cap with armor

Thermocouples
Temperature Sensors - Continued

Style(s) Description Style(s) Description
RTD - Terminal Head Styles Protection tubes
15 NEMA 4, welded NPT process fitting CT1 Plain ceramic tube
21 Welded sheath, no process fitting, with optional head CT2, CT3 Ceramic tube with hex fitting or nipple
22 ATEX-approved, explosion-proof, welded NPT process fitting MT1, MT2 Closed tube, with or without bushing
45 NEMA 4, spring-loaded, NUN hardware MT4 Closed tube, with welded or ring-type flange
48 Spring loaded hex fitting, NUN hardware, optional head Special secondary (outer) protection tubes
65 NEMA 4 connection head with flexbile cable PT2 Outer protection tube, with bushing
75 Spring-loaded hex fitting, with optional head PT3 Outer protection tube, with slip flange
77 Explosion-proof, spring-loaded, NUN hardware Transmitters
D 78 Explosion-proof, welded NPT process fitting UNI5-S Isolated 4-20 mA output

RTD - Sanitary Process Connection Styles UNI5-I Isolated 4-20 mA output
33 Sanitary process connection with terminal head UNI5-H Isolated HART® protocol output
58 Sanitary process connection with leadwire TC2/RTD2 Non-isolated 4-20 mA output
RTD - Sheath Styles Accessories
3 Sheath with leadwire and armor - NEMA 4 & 4X terminal heads and blocks
14 Sheath with attached plug - FM/CSA/ATEX approved explosion-proof terminal heads and
blocks
20/28 Sheath with leadwire, stripped ends
- Connection Components (plugs/jacks, compression fittings, sprin-
23I/23P/24 Sheath with leads and NPT process or instrument fitting
gloaded fittings, bayonet adaptors)
32 Washer mounting with leads and armor
- Thermocouple and extension wire
38 Cutable sheath
39 Weld pad mounting with leadwire
41 Mounting lug with leadwire
42 Sheath with protective teflon sleeve
Style(s) Description
Thermowells - Bar stock
H, S NPT process connections
HL, SL NPT process connections, with lag
LS NPT process connections, limited space
F, FH Flange connection, welded or ring-type joint
SW Socket-weld connection
SWL Socket-weld connection, with lag
WIH Weld-in connection
WIHL Weld-in connection, with lag
VS Van Stone flange connection

Thermocouples
The Sensor Box™

DESCRIPTION
The Sensor Box™ provides the process customer with an
alternative to expediting, emergency orders and large amounts
of “dead” inventory. A modular system of sensors, hardware and
tools, the Sensor Box™ is used by the maintenance professional
to build a variety of temperature sensor assemblies on-site, in
minutes. The Sensor Box™ can be customized in many ways, to
meet customers’ specific needs.
FEATURES
• Base kits for either 0.250” or 0.188” diameter sensors. Base kits
include your choice of sensor pods (thermocouples and RTDs sensor
with lead wire), housing, nylon wire guides, crimper, wire stripper, tube D
cutter, screwdriver, tape measure and instructions
• Optional NEMA 4 or Explosion Proof terminal heads package.
Includes terminal heads, ceramic terminal blocks, spring-loading kits,
union connectors and nipples
• Large range of additional common components and tools to include in
your box for true customization
• By having all the tools at hand you can greatly reduce expediting,
emergency orders and premium charges
• Allows for lower, more flexible inventory

Thermocouples
JMS
SwiftyCalc
DESCRIPTION
Design thermowells that last and extend the life of your
temperature sensors with JMS SwiftyCalc.
The only US Standard regarding the strength of

thermowells has just had its first significant revision in 35
years. There are new geometries, new requirements, new
capabilities and more than 60 new pages of math and
physics calculations to boot in the ASME PTC 19.3-TW
(2010).
Your objective? To ensure your thermowell designs meet

D the standard. Your tool? SwiftyCalc. Now free from JMS
Southeast, Inc. to registered users. Ask About Swifty Sensor Service
JMS Southwest offers a unique 24-hour delivery
The JMS SwiftyCalc quickly provides you with a service of their products at NO extra charge to you.
thermowell design based upon your material requirements
and process variables that you can count on to meet the
ASME PTC 19.3-TW (2010) standard. Save your results
to your own account and return later to modify on the fly.
JMS SwiftyCalc also provides you with instant theoretical
maximums for insertion length and flow rate. SwiftyCalc is
perfect for faster response time and increased reliability in
your temperature measurement system.
FEATURES
• Ensure your thermowell designs meet the standard
• Quantify the design possibilities for your thermowell
application.
• Document temperature de-rated thermowell strength
calculation results and drawings to match.
• Promptly establish list pricing for your budgetary needs.
• Get a quick, free wake frequency calculation report
based on the new ASME PTC 19.3-TW (2010).
• Save configurations so that you can come back later to
tinker with them.
• Compare multiple thermowell designs to a single process
and vice versa quickly and easily.
• Get theoretical max insertion and flow criteria on the fly.
• Print a one page report showing pass / fail results.
• Simple interface to receive pricing for your well with the
push of a button.

Thermocouples
Analog Bemometer
DESCRIPTION
This thermometer combines the convenience, simplicity,
and self-powered actuation of a bimetal thermometer with
the digital accuracy and data acquisition capabilities of
a thermocouple or RTD. With standards traceable to the
NIST, this new instrument offers simplified calibration for
ISO 9000 compliance and other statistical process control
requirements. It is also ideal in applications requiring
easy and quick readability while still affording a means
of electronic data acquisition. There is no need to add
additional access points or thermowells to your existing
process in order to gain different types or readings. FEATURES D
• Bimetal Dependability
This is available with a 3” or 5” dial, in a Back Connected • Thermocouple / RTD Accuracy
or Adjustable angle case, 1/4” stem diameter in lengths • Direct AND Electronic Reading
to 12”, 1/2” NPT connection, in ranges from -100°F • Easy To Use
(-70°C) to 500°F (260°C), with Fahrenheit, Celsius and • Easy To Calibrate
Dual Scale Dials available. Thermocouple output may be • Two Sensors in One Instrument
accessed via a plug-in connector; RTD output is accessed
by a terminal block. Both have 1/2” conduit threaded
mounting (PWK option) and a plastic cap standard.
Optional weatherproof housing is available. Construction
is of type 304 series stainless steel with a glass crystal. It
is hermetically sealed per ASME B40.3 standard. It also
comes with a one-year warranty.
HOW TO ORDER
XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
Table 1 Model Table 4 Standard Ranges

30 3” Back connection Dual scale F/C Celsius only Fahrenheit only
32 3” Adjustable angle 01 -100/150°F & -70/70°C -70/70°C -100/150°F
50 5” Back connection 02 -40/120°F & -40/50°C -50/50°C -40/120°F
52 5” Adjustable angle 03 25/125°F & -5/50°C 0/50°C 25/125°F
Table 2 Stem Length 04 0/140°F & -20/60°C 0/140°F
040 4 inches 05 0/200°F & -15/90°C 0/100°C 0/200°F
060 6 inches 06 0/250°F & -20/120°C -20/120°C 0/250°F
090 9 inches 07 20/240°F & -5/115°C 20/240°F
120 12 inches 08 50/300°F & 10/150°C 0/150°C 50/300°F
X Other, specify 09 50/400°F & 10/200°C 0/200°C 50/400°F
Table 3 Scale Type 10 50/500°F & 10/260°C 0/250°C 50/500°F
0 Dual scale °F / °C Table 5 Sensor Type
1 Celsius only J Thermocouple output, Type J
2 Fahrenheit only K Thermocouple output, Type K
E Thermocouple output, Type E
T Thermocouple output, Type T
3 100W RTD output, 3 wire

Thermocouples
Miniature and Industrial Thermocouples

HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14
X X X X X X X XX X XX X X XX XX
Table 1 Description Table 6 Measuring Junction

1 Thermocouple G Grounded O* Weld pad, removable
ungrounded
Table 2 Type
U Ungrounded P* Reduced tip, grounded
_" J, T, K, E, N, X (Other, specify)
E Exposed (Isolated on dual) Y* Reduced tip, ungrounded
Table 3 Limits of Error/ Element Construction
I Isolated R* Gas/Air, exposed
1 Standard Single
J* Pointed tip, grounded S* Gas/Air, grounded
2 Standard Dual
D 3 Special Single
K* Pointed tip, ungrounded T* Gas/Air, ungrounded
L* Weld pad, grounded V* Enlarged tip, grounded
4 Special Dual
M* Weld pad, ungrounded W* Enlarged tip, ungrounded
6 Standard Triple
N* Weld pad, removable X* Other, specify
X Other, specify grounded
Conductor Size Conductor Size Length
Outside Table 7
Table 4 (For Base Metals Only) (For Base Metals Only)
Diameter
Single (AWG) Dual (AWG) --” Length in inches
OD Single Dual Table 8 Standard Industrial Attaching Device
P 1/2” 10 12 Spring Loaded Extension Assembly
A 3/8” 13 16 D Single threaded (process) H4 4" NUN, 304SS
Y 5/16” 14 16 C Double threaded w/ oil ring N4 4" NUN, GALV
B 1/4” 16 18 A Double w/ threaded retainer WH4 4" NUW, 304SS
R 6mm 16 18 E Adjustable spring WG4 4" NUW, GALV
C 3/16” 19 20 S Double threaded SH4 4" NU, 304SS
D 1/8” 22 24 B Bayonet assembly S4 4" NU, GALV
E 1/16” 28 30 BD Bayonet oil seal H6 6" NUN, 304SS
F* 1/25” 32 34 Welded N6 6" NUN, GALV
X Other, specify G Single threaded (process) WH6 6" NUW, 304SS
Z N/A F Single threaded reversed WG6 6" NUW, GALV
(attached head)
Table 5 Sheath Material Max °F
W Double threaded SH6 6" NU, 304SS
H 304 Stainless Steel 1650
Compression S6 6" NU, GALV
J 310 Stainless Steel 2100
H* SS w/ SS ferrule Other Options
V STABALOY 2220
I* SS w/ Teflon ferrule X Other, specify
K 316 Stainless Steel 1650
J* SS w/ Lava ferrule Z N/A
M Inconel 600 2100
K* SS w/ Nylon ferrule
C Teflon coated SS 400
L* Brass w/ Brass ferrule
S Titanium 400
Q Hastelloy C-276 800 Please see Technical Catalog for additional helpful information and code
specifications.
P Pyrosil 2300 Table 6: * Provide description when selecting these options.
Table 7: If sensor requires factory bend order from Technical Catalogt page 2-1. L
X Other, specify --
is the overall length of the sensor to the transition, wire or plug. This includes non-
fixed attaching devices.
Table 8: Spring Loaded -Spring material, 1000°F rated (for 1/4” Ø sensors). Com-
pression - *Length (#7) calculated without attaching device. Other Options- CSA
Certified assemblies, see Technical Catalog

Thermocouples
Miniature and Industrial Thermocouples - Continued

Table 9 Process NPT/Custom Extension Assembly Table 13 Cold End Termination - Pick as many as applicable
L 1/8” Connectors
M 1/4” B Miniature plug
P 1/2” (Standard w/ symbols W, S, C, and N in Table 8) C Standard plug
O 3/4” F High temperature plug (< 800°F)
X Other, specify WM* Microphone style plug (6DA)
Z N/A D Miniature jack
Table 10 Lead Wire Type & Length in Inches E Standard jack
Z No lead wires G High temperature jack (< 800°F)
1__” Glass braid - Solid 20 AWG WF Microphone style jack (6DA)
2__” PVC - Solid 20 AWG Transmitters
D
3__” Teflon - Solid 20 AWG 8H Isolated transmitter
4__” Hi-temp glass braid - Solid 20 AWG 8N Non isolated transmitter
5__” Kapton - Solid 20 AWG 8I Hart Protocol
7__” Bare wire 8E Intrinsically Safe
8__” PVC coil cord - Standard when using Table 8 symbol B and Table 8D Hart / Intrinsically Safe
13-R
Heads - Exp. Proof
X__” Other, specify
I Aluminum, NEMA 4X, FM, CSA (6IA/6B4)
Table 11 Armor or Heat Shrink
J 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X, FM, CSA (6ISS/6B4)
A 3/16” ID SS flex armor
P Aluminum, NEMA 4X, FM, CSA, ATEX, IECEx (6IAIEC/6B4)
B 3/16” ID SS flex armor teflon coated white
U 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X, ATEX, IECEx (6ISSATEX/6B4)
C 3/16” ID SS flex armor teflon coated black
Heads - Gen. Purpose
D 1/8” ID SS flex armor
L Aluminum w/ hinged cover (6L/6B4)
F SS overbraid
M Aluminum w/ screw cover & chain (6M/6B4)
G Heat shrink / sleeving
R Aluminum high dome, hinged cover (6R/6B4)
H Jacket to match primary insulation
N Cast iron w/ screw cover (6N/6B4)
J Aluminum mylar shielded and jacketed to match primary insulation
Q Black nylon, NEMA 4 (6Q/6B4)
X Other, specify
SS 316 stainless steel w/ screw cover & chain (6SS/6B4)
Z N/A
Other
Table 12 Type of Transition
A Bare Ends
H Heat shrink Q Cuttable (see full catalog)
K Spade Lugs (6SL)
S Size on size M M12 Fixed mount
O Open terminal block (6B4)
T 3/8” OD X Other,specify
X Other, specify
(Standard)
Table 14 Options - Use only if applicable
R 1/4” OD Z No transition
1* Stainless steel tag
Table 9: To add a custom extension assembly not described in selection #8, select
“X” and specify. Ex. NUN5G1 2* Plastic tag
Table 10: For stranded wire, add ”S” before symbol designation in this column. 24
3* Paper tag
AWG or smaller may be used to accommodate some smaller diameters and flex
armor extensions. 4* Laser etch on probe
Table 11: Bell Springs are used for most wire extensions at transition. A special
armor adapter is used when armor is longer than 60”. 5 Calibrate at specified point(s). Corrections data provided for each
Table 12: For high humidity / moisture environments, < 500°F put a “2” after your point.
selection. For example, R2. For high temperatures at the transition area (500°F - 5L* Standard Lot Calibration
1200°F) put a “3” after your selection. For example, T3.
Table 13: Transmitters-Add span range after transmitter selection. For ex: 8H(0- 6** Premium calibration report. Corrections data will be provided for
200C). temperatures within the range.
Table 14: * Must specify information required on tag / to be etched. * AMS 2750D 6L* Premium Lot Calibration
and AMS 2750E compliant. ** Must specify increments & range (Ex. 0 to 300°F, 10°
increments) 7 CE Marking
8 Guide 17025 calibration
9 Bar Code

Thermocouples
Resistance Temperature Devices
Note: L is the overall length of the sensor to the transition, wire or plug. This includes non-fixed attaching devices.
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15
X X X XX X X X XX X XX X X X XX XX
Table 1 Description Table 5 Tube Material

3 RTD K 316 Stainless Steel
Table 2 Element Type - Platinum 0.00385 alpha (Ω/Ω/°C) L 316 LSS
Resistor Accuracy at Thermometer Resistor Class M I-600 (Use if symbol Table 7 >500°F)
0°C Class
C Teflon Coated, SS
B ± 0.3°C (Competitor’s Std) B ≥ F 0.30
S Titanium
E ± 0.15°C (JMS Standard) A ≥ F 0.15
X Other, specify
P* ± 0.06°C AA ≥ 1/2 F 0.10
Table 6 Lnegth (L)
S* ± 0.03°C (Best Accuracy ) 1/4 AA ≥ 1/10 F 0.10
__” Immersion length in inches
X Other, specify -- --
Table 7 Max. Temperature at which tip will be exposed
Table 3 Element Construction
A Cryogenic (-196°C to 0°C)
S Single Standard construction
B* <200°C (392°F) =3 Teflon
D Dual Standard construction
C* <285°C (550°F) =5 Kapton
J Single Swaged construction
D* <350°C (662°F) =1 Fiberglass
K Dual Swaged construction
E* <660°C (1220°F)
X Other, specify
Please see Technical Catalog for additional helpful information and code
Table 4 Tube Diameter & Tip Construction specifications.
Tube Diameter - Must Choose 1 Tip Construction-Must Choose 1 Table 2: Wound Wound or film resistors may be used. * For compliant results, use
4 wire RTD for high accuracy (types P & S).
P 1/2” (.500”) N Normal, closed tip Table 3: Use swaged for high temperature, bendability, high vibration and/or longer
(Standard) than 6 ft.
Table 4: * When selecting these options, a description must be provided. See
A 3/8” (.375”) K* Pointed tip
Technical Catalog for example of removable weld pad.
Y 5/16” (.312”) M* Weld pad Table 6: L is the overall length of the sensor to the transition, wire or plug. This
includes non-fixed attaching devices.
B 1/4” (.250”) O* Weld pad, removable Table 7: * If no transition (Z) is in symbol 13, we recommend these corresponding
R 6mm (.236”) R2 Gas/Air, exposed selections for primary wire insulation in symbol 10.
C 3/16” (.188”) W* Enlarged tip

D 1/8” (.125”) Y* Reduced tip
X Other, specify
Z N/A

Thermocouples
Resistance Temperature Devices - Continued

Table 8 Standard Industrial Attaching Device Table 11 Armor or Heat Shrink/Jacket
Spring Loaded Extension Assembly A 3/16” ID SS flex armor (Standard)
D Single threaded (process) H4 4" NUN, 304SS B 3/16” ID SS flex armor teflon coated white
C Double threaded w/ oil ring N4 4" NUN, GALV C 3/16” ID SS flex armor teflon coated black
A Double w/ threaded retainer WH4 4" NUW, 304SS D 1/8” ID SS flex armor
E Adjustable spring WG4 4" NUW, GALV F SS overbraid
S Double threaded SH4 4" NU, 304SS G Heat shrink / sleeving
B Bayonet assembly S4 4" NU, GALV H Jacket to match primary insulation
BD Bayonet oil seal H6 6" NUN, 304SS J Alum mylar shielded and jacketed to match primary insulation
Welded N6 6" NUN, GALV Z N/A
G Single threaded (process) WH6 6" NUW, 304SS X Other, specify
F Single threaded reversed WG6 6" NUW, GALV Table 12 Wire Configuration D
(attached head)
T 2 Wire
W Double threaded SH6 6" NU, 304SS
Y 3 Wire
Compression S6 6" NU, GALV
W 4 Wire
H* SS w/ SS ferrule Other Options
Table 13 Type of Transition
I* SS w/ Teflon ferrule X Other, specify
H Heat shrink
J* SS w/ Lava ferrule Z N/A
S Size on size
K* SS w/ Nylon ferrule
T 3/8” OD
L* Brass w/ Brass ferrule
R 1/4” OD
Table 9 Process NPT/Custom Extension Assembly
Q Cuttable (See full catalog )
L 1/8”
Y M12
M 1/4”
X Other,specify
P 1/2” (Standard w/ symbols W, S, & C above)
Z No transition
O 3/4”
Table 8: Spring Loaded-Spring material, 1000°F rated (for 1/4” Ø sensors). Com-
X Other, specify* pression- *Length (#7) calculated without attaching device. Other Options: CSA
Z N/A Certified assemblies, see Technical Catalog
Acronym Definitions:
Table 10 Lead Wire Type & Length in Inches S/L = Spring Loaded
1__” Fiberglass braid SS = Stainless Steel
Galv = Galvanized
3__” Teflon (Standard) NUN = Nipple-Union-Nipple
4__” Hi-temp glass braid NUW = Nipple-Union-Welded Fitting
NU = Nipple-Union-Spring Loaded Fitting
5__” Kapton Table 9: To add a custom extension assembly not described in selection #8, select
“X” and specify. Ex. NUN5G1
X__” Other, specify
Table 10: All wire in tubes > 1/8” OD will be 24 AWG. Smaller tubes will have a
Z N/A max. of 28 AWG. If no transition or armor is specified, wire may be fragile. JMS
standard lead wire for RTDs is stranded plated copper.
Table 12: Use a double symbol for 2 separate lead wires if dual elements. For
example, TT.
Table 13: For high humidity / moisture environments, < 500°F put a “2” after your
selection. For example, R2. For high temperatures at the transition area (500°F -
1200°F) put a “3” after your selection. For example, T3.

Thermocouples
Resistance Temperature Devices - Continued

Table 14 Cold End Termination - Pick as many as applicable Table 15 Options
Connectors 1* Stainless steel tag
B Miniature plug 2* Plastic tag
C Standard plug 3* Paper tag
F High temp plug (< 800°F) 4* Laser etch on probe
WM* Microphone style plug (6DA) 5 Calibrate at specified point(s). Corrections data provided for each
point.
D Miniature jack
6** Premium calibration report. Corrections data will be provided for all.
E Standard jack
7 CE Marking
G High temp jack (< 800°F)
8 Guide 17025 calibration
WF* Microphone style jack (6DA)
Bar Code
D
9
V Hermetic plug (6DC)
M MTR
Y M12 watertight plug
Table 14: Connectors - * Use double symbol here for matching female connector.
Heads - Exp. Proof
(Ex. B/BB male with matching female). Transmitters-Add span range after transmit-
I Aluminum, NEMA 4X, FM, CSA (6IA/6B4) ter selection. For ex: 8H(0-200C).
Table 15: * Must specify information required on tag / to be etched. * AMS 2750D
J 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X, FM, CSA (6ISS/6B4) and AMS 2750E compliant. ** Must specify increments & range (Ex. 0 to 300°F, 10°
P Aluminum, NEMA 4X, FM, CSA, ATEX, IECEx (6IAIEC/6B4) increments)
U 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4

Heads - Gen. Purpose
L Aluminum w/ hinged cover (6L / 6B4)
M Aluminum w/ screw cover & chain (6M / 6B4)
N Cast iron w/ screw cover (6N / 6B4)
Q Black nylon, NEMA 4 (6Q / 6B4)
R Aluminum high dome w/hinged cover (6R /6B4)
SS 316 stainless steel w/ screw cover & chain (6SS / 6B4)
Transmitters
8H Isolated transmitter
8N Non isolated transmitter
8I Hart Protocol
8E Intrinsically Safe
8D Hart / Intrinsically Safe
8M Integral transmitter (see 3-5)
Other
A Bare Ends
K Spade Lugs (6SL)
O Open terminal block (6B4)
X Other, specify

Thermocouples
Texas Thermowell
Thermowells & Protection Tubes

Thermowells & Protection Tubes
DESCRIPTION
A properly selected thermowell will protect the temperature instrument from damage resulting from these process
variables. Additionally, a thermowell enables removal of the temperature instrument for replacement, repair, or testing
without affecting the process system.
Parker PGI Texas Thermowell specializes in the design and manufacture of all types of thermowells. The 21 Series
thermowell designs shown in this guide are styles that are popular throughout industry. Special designs, as well as
modifi cations of our standard offerings, are also available.
FEATURES
• Designed to protect temperature instruments from
damage in process systems where pressure, velocity, or
viscous, abrasive, and corrosive materials are present,
individually or in combination D
• Used in virtually all process industries, including
refining/petrochemical, oil and gas, chemical, food and
beverage, pharmaceutical, biomedical, cement, power
generation,and nuclear
• Facilitate the removal of the temperature instrument
for replacement, repair, or testing without affecting the
process system
• Wide range of mount, shank, and connection styles,
including threaded, flanged, vanstone, socket weld,
weldin and sanitary styles
• Over 24 materials to choose from
• Immersion "U" lengths from 1.6" to 45" and up
Call Rawson for all possible options and configurations.
A sampling of thermowell configurations

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Temperature Switches
United Electric
Hazardous Location, Electronic Temperature

Switches
One Series
DESCRIPTION
The One Series W models are intrinsically safe (2W2D models only) and non-incendive transmitter-switches that
monitor temperature. The One Series can effectively do the job of three – replacing a switch, a gauge and a transmitter.
All One Series models feature patented IAW™ (I Am Working) intelligent self-diagnostics for applications where
undetected faults cannot be tolerated. Set point and deadband (hysteresis) are 100% programmable, providing precise
adjustments for switch cycling with unsurpassed accuracy and repeatability. Analog 4-20 mA output models provide field
scalability, simplifying your PLC programming.
FEATURES
• 3 ways to power the control - 2-wire discrete input power,
D Loop-powered analog input or external power supply
• Liquid crystal display provides instrument health and
alarm status
• IAW™ (I Am Working) self-diagnostics constantly monitor
the health status of the control to eliminate the “blind
switch” issue
• 2-Wire models drop in place of existing mechanical
switches and use the same wiring and control schemes
providing a cost-effective upgrade path
• Loop-powered models provide a 4-20 mA output and
include programmable solid-state relay (SSR) switches
effectively replacing a transmitter, switch and a gauge
• High-powered SSR models switch up to 10 amperes
• Two independent SSRs combine with a 4-20 mA output
for stop/start, window mode and starting permissive
applications
• Solid-state design allows for switching in high cycle rate
applications without degradation
• Multiple switch output and sensor options

Explosion Proof, Electronic Temperature Switches

One Series Ex D
DESCRIPTION
The One Series electronic temperature switch set the standard for solid-state digital
process monitoring. With a fully adjustable set point & deadband and 0.1% repeatability,
the One Series is suitable for a wide variety of harsh and hazardous applications. Available
in Type 4X enclosures for explosion-proof and non-incendive area classifications, these
electronic switches are designed to provide protection for plants, capital equipment and
people.
FEATURES
• Digital process and status display
• Fully adjustable set point and deadband
• Local and remote self-diagnostic reporting
• 3 ways to power the control - 2-wire discrete input power, Loop-powered analog input or D
external power supply
• Agency certifications for hazardous locations - cULus, IECEx, GOST, CE and ATEX
• Class I, Division 1 and Division 2 approvals
• Provides alarm and shutdown for critical safety applications
• Solid-state design allows for switching in high cycle rate applications without degradation
• Multiple sensor types and ranges - RTD temperature from -300 to 1,000°F (-184 to
538°C)

Hazardous Location Temperature Micro Switches

12 Series
DESCRIPTION
12 Series hazardous location switches are ideal for operation in tough
applications where space is at a premium. A snap-action Belleville spring
assembly is used to provide vibration resistance and prolonged switch life.
The 316 stainless steel enclosure and hermetically sealed switch provide
rugged protection from the environment. Approved for use in hazardous
locations worldwide, the 12 Series is installed within applications ranging
from offshore oil rigs to rotating equipment, and more.
FEATURES
• UL, cUL, and ATEX approved; CE compliant
• Dual seal compliant to ANSI/ISA 12.27.01 & NEC 501.17
D • 316 stainless steel wetted parts are NACE MR-0175 compliant
• Snap-acting Belleville spring for long life, vibration resistance and stability
• Mounting bracket available for retrofit applications
• Ranges from - 130°F to 650°F
SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Temperature -58° to 203°F (-50 to 95°C)
Operating Ambient Temperature - 58 to 203°F (-50 to 95°C). Set point shifts less than 1% of range for a 50°F (28°C) ambient temperature change. Slight
ambient effects for 25-50’ extra capillary length on temperature switch models, consult factory.
Set Point Repeatability ±1% of adjustable range
Shock Set point repeats after 15 G’s, 10 millisecond duration
Vibration Set point repeats after 2.5 G’s, 10-2000 Hz.
Encloseure 316 stainless steel
Encloseure Classification Certified to Enclosure Type 4X Class I, Division 1 product meets enclosure Type 7; Class II, Division I product meets enclosure
type 9. Certified to IP66 requirements
Temperature assembly Bulb and capillary: Non-toxic oil fill; 6 feet 304 stainless steel. Optional lengths available Immersion Stem: 316 stainless steel
Temperature Deadband Typically 2% of range under laboratory conditions (70°F ambient circulating bath at a rate of ½°F per minute change)

General Purpose, Weather-Tight Temperature

Switches
100 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 100 Series is a cost-effective temperature switch for
process plants and OEM equipment. The rugged, one piece
enclosure features a slanted cover for wiring accessibility. A
wide variety of microswitch and process-connection options
make this versatile series ideal for applications requiring a
rugged weather-proof mechanical switch.
FEATURES
• Single switch output
• Epoxy coated and gasketed cast aluminum enclosure type 4X
D
• Tamper-resistant set point “lock”
• Heat Trace and Freeze protection thermostats
• Temperature Range: -180 to 650°F
• UL listed and cUL certified.
• CE compliant to low voltage directive and pressure equipment directive.
• Single switch (SPDT or DPDT) output
• Welded stainless steel diaphragm models
• Polished stainless steel flushmount connection
• Pump switch models with wide adjustable deadband
APPLICATIONS
Typical applications that utilize the 100 Series are heat tracing, freeze protection, processing equipment (pumps,
compressors), inputs for annunciator panels, and fire suppression systems.
Base Model Description

B100 Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial
C100 Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference
E100 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial
F100 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with no reference

Hazardous Location Temperature Switches

117 Series
DESCRIPTION
Approved for Division 2, Zone 2 hazardous and corrosive
atmospheres, and with optional Zone 0 intrinsic safety
compliance, the 117 Series can be used to measure
temperature in a variety of applications. The rugged,
one piece enclosure features a slanted cover for wiring
accessibility to the enclosed terminal block that is wired to
either a SPDT or DPDT hermetically sealed microswitch.
All welded, stainless steel pressure connections and
sensors provide superior corrosion resistance – NACE
compliant – and fire-safe protection with in the harshest
D environments.
FEATURES
• Epoxy Coated Type 4X Enclosure and Stainless Steel Component Parts
• Hermetically Sealed Snap Switch, SPDT or DPDT Output
• Terminal Block Wiring
• Adjustable Temperature Ranges: -120 to 640°F
• Approved for Division 2, Zone 2 hazardous locations
• Optional ATEX or GOST intrinsic safety compliance for Zone 0
APPLICATIONS
The 117 Series is an ideal choice for the most demanding applications; typically steel and aluminum mills, chemical and
petrochemical plants, pulp and paper mills, wastewater treatment plants, midstream and downstream oil & gas, and
pharmaceutical plants.

B117 Immersion stem; One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with reference dial
E117 Bulb and capillary; One SPDT output; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with reference dial

Explosion-Proof Temperature Switches

120 Series
DESCRIPTION
Meeting hazardous location requirements through
worldwide approvals and certifications, UE’s 120 Series
is the choice where potentially explosive or highly
corrosive atmospheres exist.
The 120 Series offers a variety temperature ranges,
as well as process connections, wetted materials
and sensor types. With a common flexible platform,
models can quickly be adapted at the factory for special
requirements, such as ranges, process connections and
electrical ratings.
FEATURES D
• Class I, Div. 1 & 2, (Zone 1), Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Class III
• Choice of one or two SPDT, optional DPDT output
• Dual electrical conduit openings
• Terminal block wiring
• Welded diaphragm or bellows sensor
• Standard product approvals include cULus, ATEX & IECEx
• Internal adjustment hex or external adjustment via calibrated dial(s) with tamper resistant cover
• Integral cover lock
• Wide variety of sensor materials
• Wide adjustable deadband models
• Heat tracing temperature models
APPLICATIONS
Typical industries using 120 Series switches include chemical, petrochemical, refinery, oil and gas production and
transmission, and pharmaceuticals.

B121 Immersion stem; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
B122 Immersion stem; two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
C120 Immersion stem; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference scale, dual conduits
E121 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
E122 Bulb and capillary; two SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; external adjustment with reference dial, single conduit
F120 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; epoxy coated enclosure; internal adjustment with no reference dial, dual conduits
820E Bulb and capillary; one SPDT; external adjustment and temperature indication, dual conduits
822E Bulb and capillary; two SPDT; external adjustment and temperature indication, dual conduits

Weather-Tight, Temperature Multi-Switches

400 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 400 Series is a versatile family temperature switches for applications that
require single or multiple switching capabilities. Dual and triple switch versions
provide multi-output for alarm and shutdown, pre-alarm and alarm, high/low limit
or level staging functions. A wide variety of microswitch and process connection
options, along with a weather-tight enclosure, make the 400 Series an ideal
choice for most ordinary location applications. Its worldwide use is assured with
approvals and certifications to agency standards. Widely used throughout the
process industries, the 400 Series provides threshold protection and control for
many critical functions.
FEATURES
D • 1, 2 & 3 switch outputs
• Epoxy-coated enclosure designed to meet enclosure type 4X
• Setting via reference dial or hex screw adjustment
• FM approved
• Adjustable Temperature Ranges:-180 to 650° F
• UL listed and cUL certified, FM approved
• One, two or three switch outputs may be separated up to 100% of range
• Wide variety of available options and sensor modules

B400 Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial
B402 Immersion stem; two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial
B403 Immersion stem; three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial
C400 Immersion stem; one SPDT output; internal hex screw adjustment
C402 Immersion stem; two SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment
C403 Immersion stem; three SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment
E400 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal adjustment with reference dial
E402 Bulb and capillary; two SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial
E403 Bulb and capillary; three SPDT outputs; internal adjustment with reference dial
F400 Bulb and capillary; one SPDT output; internal hex screw adjustment
F402 Bulb and capillary; two SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment
F403 Bulb and capillary; three SPDT outputs; internal hex screw adjustment

Pressure and Temperature Measurement • Temperature Transmitters
ABB
Head Mounted Temperature Transmitter

TTH200
DESCRIPTION
The TTH200 head mounted temperature transmitter is the standard
device of the new TTx200 / TTx300 product family in proven
2-wire technology. The TTH200 is provided for all HART standard
applications in temperature measurement with one sensor. The
main advantage is increased measuring accuracy resulting from
conversion of the sensor signal into a stable output signal close
to the sensor. The TTH200 supports the same functionality as
the TTH300, but without sensor redundancy and sensor drift
monitoring. The temperature transmitter can be configured using
EDD device management tool or via FDT / DTM technology. It is D
available with Ex-approvals and SIL certifications with an optional
LCD display.
FEATURES
• Universal sensor input: Resistance thermometer, thermocouple, Ohm and mV
• Various sensor error-calibration possibilities
• Output signal (temperature linear), 4 to 20 mA, HART signal
• Accuracy 0.1 %, long-term stability 0.05 % per year
• Available with FM, ATEX, CSA and SIL 2/3 approvals
• Optional transmitter controlled graphic LCD display
• Continuous sensor monitoring and self-monitoring
• Sensor error adjustment
SPECIFICATIONS
Communication protocol HART
Device type Head mounted temperature transmitter
Input One sensor :
- Resistance thermometers, resistance-type transmitters (0…5000 Ohm)
- Thermocouples, voltages, mV transmitter (-125…1100 mV)
Sensor connection Pt100 2-, 3-, 4 wire, thermocouple with internal cold junction
Technical features Continuous sensor monitoring and self-monitoring :
- Supply voltage monitoring
- Wire break and corrosion monitoring
Sensor error adjustment
Electrical isolation
Display (optional) Transmitter-controlled graphic (alphanumeric) LCD display type AS for process-, sensor- or current-value display
Configuration DTM, EDD
Functional safety SIL2, SIL3 in Dual Configuration in accordance with IEC 61508
Approvals for explosion protection ATEX, IECEx, FM, CSA, GOST, other approvals are pending

Head Mounted Temperature Transmitter

TTH300
DESCRIPTION
The TTH300 is for enhanced (e.g. redundancy) head mounted
and thermocouple applications with HART, PROFIBUS PA
or Foundation Fieldbus communication with a proven 2-wire
technology featuring a multitude of new functions and enhanced
diagnostic information. The main advantage is increased
measuring accuracy resulting from conversion of the sensor
signal into a stable output signal close to the sensor. The
temperature transmitter can be configured via FDT / DTM in
DAT200 (Asset Vision Basic) or any standard FTD tool via EDD or
local HMI (optional). For PROFIBUS the configuration is possible
D via GST-file, EDD or DTM and for Foundation Fieldbus via EDD.
It is available with Ex-approvals and SIL certificates.
FEATURES
• Input functionality 1 or 2 sensor, 2 x Pt100 three-wire circuit
• Output signal: 4 to 20 mA (HART), PROFIBUS PA 3.01, Foundation Fieldbus ITK 5.1
• Sensor error adjustment, redundancy and drift monitoring
• Optional transmitter controlled graphic LCD display
• Configuration via DTM or EDD
• Supply voltage monitoring and wire break and corrosion monitoring in accordance with NE89
• Extended diagnostics in accordance with NE 107
• Device safety in accordance with NE 53 and NE 79
• SIL2 in accordance with IEC61508 (for HART)
SPECIFICATIONS
Communication protocol HART, FF, PA
Device type Head mounted temperature transmitter
Input Two sensors :
2 x Pt100 2- and 3-L, 2x thermocouple and a mixture of 1x Pt100 2-, 3-, 4 wire and 1x thermocouple
- Supply voltage monitoring, - Wire break and corrosion monitoring
Specific linearization :
- Callendar-van Dusen coefficients, - Table of variate pairs / 32 points
Display (optional) Transmitter-controlled graphic (alphanumeric) LCD display type A (TTH300), LCD display type B (TTF300/TTF350) with dual
function:
- Transmitter configuration via push button (HMI)
- Process-, sensor- or current value display
Configuration HART (DTM, EDD, HMI), FF (EDD, HMI), PA (DTM, EDD, HMI, GSD)I
Functional safety HART, SIL2/SIL3 in dual configuration in accordance with IEC 61508

Field Mounted Temperature Transmitter

TTF300
DESCRIPTION
The TTF300 HART temperature transmitter features proven 2-wire
technology with a multitude of new functions such as enhanced
(e.g. redundancy) field mounting applications with 4 to 20 mA
HART, Profibus and Foundation Fieldbus communication. Options
include a transmitter-controlled LCD display which enables direct
access to configure the device and process, sensor or current
value display. The field housings are either made of aluminum die
cast or of stainless steel. The rating plates are made of stainless
steel. The devices are available with a tube mounting kit or a wall
mounting kit. The TTF300 is also available with Ex-approvals and D
SIL certificates.
FEATURES
• Sensor error adjustment, redundancy and drift monitoring
• Input functionality 1 or 2 sensor, 2 x Pt100 three-wire circuit
• Output signal: 4 to 20 mA (HART), PROFIBUS PA 3.01, Foundation Fieldbus ITK 5.1
• Configuration via LCD indicators, DTM or EDD
• Supply voltage monitoring and wire break and corrosion monitoring in accordance with NE89
• Extended diagnostics in accordance with NE 107
• Device safety in accordance with NE 53 and NE 79
• SIL2 in accordance with IEC61508 (for HART)
SPECIFICATIONS
Communication protocol HART, FF, PA
Device type Field device, single compartment technology, 2 cable glands
Input Two sensors :
2x Pt100 2- and 3-L, 2x thermocouple and a mixture of 1x Pt100 2-, 3-, 4 wire and 1x thermocouple
function:

Field Mounted Temperature Transmitter

TTF350
DESCRIPTION
The TTF350 is the high-end model in the TTx300 HART family
of temperature transmitters. It features dual compartment
housing technology, with ABB’s global heavy duty design, 3
cable entries for improved functions and a large LCD display
with configuration options. Process optimization via sensor drift
detection and increased system uptime based on sensor backup
/ redundancy enabling reduced costs are only a few examples of
new system functions. The field housings of the transmitter are
either made of aluminum die cast or of stainless steel. The rating
D plates are made of stainless steel. The devices are available with
a tube mounting kit or a wall mounting kit.
FEATURES
• Can monitor two sensors
• Universal sensor input (RTD, thermocouple, Ohm, mV)
• Output signal (temperature linear), 4 to 20 mA, HART signal
• Sensor drift detection
• Sensor backup/automatic sensor redundancy switching
• Accuracy 0.1%, long-term stability 0.05% per year
• Supply voltage monitoring and wire break and corrosion monitoring in accordance with NE 89
• Extended diagnostics in accordance with NE107
• Dual compartment field-mount housing
• Approvals for explosion protection include intrinsically safe, non-incendive, dust-ignition proof and flame proof
enclosures
• Configuration via LCD display, FDT/DTM and EDD
SPECIFICATIONS
Device type Field device, dual compartment technology, 3 cable glands
Input Two sensors :
2x Pt100 2- and 3-L, 2x thermocouple and a mixture of 1x Pt100 2-, 3-, 4 wire and 1x thermocouple
function:

Rail Mounted Temperature Transmitter

TTR200
DESCRIPTION
The TTR200 is a transmitter in rail mounted housing with 2-channel
devices providing two 4 to 20 mA output signals. The transmitter’s 17.5
mm housing allows it to be mounted in confined spaces like connector
boxes or cabinets. The TTR200 transmitter provides increased device
safety in compliance with NE89 and NE107 and hardware write protection.
FEATURES
• Universal input
• Output signal is 4 to 20 mA HART communication
• Accuracy: 0.1 °C
• Optional transmitter controlled graphic LCD display D
• Configuration according to FDT/DTM or EDD standard
• Two function LEDs, supply voltage monitoring and wire break and
corrosion monitoring in accordance with NE89
• Device safety in accordance with NE53
• Extended diagnostics
• Approvals for explosion protection include ATEX, IECEx- Zone 0 and
FM/CSA
• Mechanical configuration lock to prevent unintended tampering
• Can be placed in cabinet racks or connector boxes
SPECIFICATIONS
Device type Rail mounted temperature transmitter
Input One sensor :
- Supply voltage monitoring
- Wire break and corrosion monitoring
Configuration DTM, EDD
Functional safety SIL2, SIL3 in Dual Configuration in accordance with IEC 61508

Temperature Sensor Assemblies

SensyTemp TSP100
DESCRIPTION
The SensyTemp TSP100 family of temperature sensor assemblies is for
low and medium process requirements. They allow for measuring inset
replacement during operation. With their short response time and high
vibration resistance these devices meet the most demanding process
requirements. The main application for this RTD or thermocouples
temperature sensors with welded protection tube is pipe and tank
engineering. They communicate via Foundation Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA,
HART, 4 to 20 mA or direct sensor output. The TSP100 Series is available
with or without transmitter controlled LCD display in the connection head
D for process, sensor or current value display.
FEATURES
• Suitable for main process connections and control systems
• Connection head houses and protects transmitter or terminal block
• Several connection heads are available, manufactured from various materials and with different cap locking systems
• Extension tube protects electronics from high process temperatures
• Interchangeable measuring insert allows for easy calibration and/or replacement at any time without having to shut
down the plant.
• Measuring components can be connected directly into the process using compression fittings
• Sensor can be designed with or without a thermowell
• Optional digital LCD indicator display
• Indicators are protected by a housing cover with window
APPLICATIONS
• Chemical industry
• Energy industry
• General process engineering
• Tank and pipeline construction
• Mechanical and plant engineering
SPECIFICATIONS TSP111 TSP121 TSP131

Process connections Without thermowell : With welded tubular thermowell : With drilled barstock thermowell :
- Insertion in an existing thermowell - Screw-in thread, Flange or Com- - Screw-in thread, Flange or Welded
pression fitting connection
Modular design Measuring inset, thermowell, extension tube, connection head, transmitter
Interchangeable measuring inset
Connection head BUZ: Aluminium, with hinged cover
BUZH: Aluminium, with upper hinged cover
BUZHD: Aluminium, with upper hinged cover and display type AS
BUKH: Plastic, with upper hinged cover
Transmitter Transmitter in connection head
Output signals in thermovoltage, 4 to 20 mA, HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Temperature ranges Resistance thermometers: -196…600 °C (-320.8…1112 °F)
Thermocouples: -40…1100 °C (-40…2012 °F)
Maximum pressure Up to 700 bar (10,150 psi)
Measuring insets According to DIN 43735, replaceable
TSA 101: Ceramic terminal block with connection terminals, permanently mounted transmitter or flying leads
Display (optional) Transmitter-controlled graphic (alphanumeric) LCD display type AS for process-, sensor- or current-value display
Functional safety SIL2 in accordance with IEC 61508
Approvals for explosion protection ATEX (Ex ia), GOST, other approvals are pending

Temperature Sensor Assemblies

SensyTemp TSP300
DESCRIPTION
The SensyTemp TSP300 family of heavy duty RTD or thermocouples
temperature sensors assemblies is for the pipe and tank engineering in
high process requirements (e.g. offshore). They allow for measuring inset
replacement during operation. With their short response time and high
vibration resistance these devices meet the most demanding process
requirements. They are for heavy duty application with direct sensor output
or 4 to 20 mA HART Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus or wireless application.
They are also available with explosion proof and intrinsic safe Ex-approvals
for gas and dust and SIL certificates.
FEATURES D
• Suitable for main process connections and control systems
• Connection head houses and protects transmitter or terminal block
• Several connection heads are available, manufactured from various materials and with different cap locking systems
• Aluminum or stainless steel screw-on cover for offshore applications
• Extension tube protects electronics from high process temperatures
• Interchangeable measuring insert allows for easy calibration and/or replacement at any time without having to shut
down the plant.
• Measuring components can be connected directly into the process using compression fittings
• Sensor can be designed with or without a thermowell
• Available with and without digital LCD indicator display including device configuration (HMI)
• Indicators are protected by a housing cover with window
APPLICATIONS
• Offshore and coastal areas
• Petroleum and natural gas production and transportation
• Petrochemical industry
• Chemical industry
• Energy industry
SPECIFICATIONS TSP311 TSP321 TSP331
Process connections Without thermowell : With welded tubular thermowell : With drilled barstock thermowell :
- Insertion in an existing thermowell - Screw-in thread, Flange or Com- - Screw-in thread, Flange or Welded
pression fitting connection
Modular design Measuring inset, thermowell, extension tube, connection head, transmitter
Interchangeable measuring inset
Connection head AGL: Aluminum, with screw-on cover
AGLH: Aluminum, with high screw-on cover
AGLD: Aluminum, with screw-on cover and display
AGS: Stainless steel, with screw-on cover
AGSH: Stainless steel, with high screw-on cover
AGSD: Stainless steel, with screw-on cover and display
Output signals in thermovoltage, 4 to 20 mA, HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus
Temperature ranges Resistance thermometers: -196…600 °C (-320.8…1112 °F)
Thermocouples: -40…1100 °C (-40…2012 °F)
Maximum pressure Up to 700 bar (10,150 psi)
Measuring insets According to DIN 43735, replaceable
TSA 101: Ceramic terminal block with connection terminals, permanently mounted transmitter or flying leads
Display (optional) Transmitter-controlled graphic (alphanumeric) LCD display type A with dual function :
- Transmitter configuration via push button (HMI) - Process-, sensor- or current value display
Functional safety SIL2 in accordance with IEC 61508
Approvals for explosion protection ATEX (Ex ia, Ex d), GOST, other approvals are pending

Sensor Assemblies for High Temperature

Applications
SensyTemp TSH200
DESCRIPTION
SensyTemp TSH200 family of temperature sensors assemblies have
been designed to meet the requirements of temperature applications
from 600 °C to 1800 °C (1112 °F to 3272 °F). These temperature
sensors consist of a straight thermocouple, thermowell, connection
head and transmitter. The straight thermocouples were designed to
be used for high temperature applications such as industrial furnaces,
combustion processes and melting processes. Communication is
D established via Foundation Fieldbus, PROFIBUS PA, HART, 4 to 20
mA or direct sensor output. The thermowells come in either metal,
ceramic or ceramic with platinum finish. All temperature sensors of
the TSH200 series can be calibrated in the ABB lab with traceability to
a national standard
FEATURES
• Suitable to main process connections and control systems
• Process connections include stop flange with counter flange, threaded socket or welded standard flange
• Transmitter in connection head means reduced wiring, high measuring accuracy, high interference resistance, process
safety via SIL classification
APPLICATIONS
• Industrial furnaces
• Garbage and hazardous waste incineration
• Reheating and tempering furnaces
• Cement and brick production
• Porcelain and ceramics industry
• Glass manufacturing
• Smelting operations
• Blast furnaces, air-circulation furnaces
SPECIFICATIONS
Product series TSH210 TSH220 TSH250
Thermowell properties Metal thermowell Ceramic thermowell Ceramic thermowell with platinum tip
Process connections Stop flange with counter flange, threaded socket, welded standard flange
Components Thermocouple, thermowell, inner tube, Thermocouple, thermowell, inner tube, Thermocouple, thermowell, platinum
process connection, connection head, holding tube, process connection, sleeve, intermediate tube, holding tube,
transmitter connection head, transmitter connection head, transmitter
Designs Supports numerous applications :
- In accordance with EN 50446 and also available in accordance with ABB standard
Connection head AUZ: Aluminium, with hinged cover
AUZH: Aluminium with upper hinged cover
BUZ: Aluminium, with hinged cover
BUZH: Aluminium, with upper hinged cover
Output signals in thermovoltage, 4 to 20 mA, HART, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus
Max. operating temperature 1300 °C (2372 °F) 1800 °C (3272 °F) 1650 °C (3002 °F)

Section Cover page
Improve Equipment Reliability and Safety
Rawson and EM&T are committed to providing the most accurate data and the highest
quality products to our customers. We can supply all the products and services needed
for a complete and state of the art steam analysis, helping you improve the steam quality,
equipment reliability and steam system safety at your site.
Main Index
Energy Optimization
Consulting & Surveys
Rawson EM&T..........................................................................................................................570
Desuperheaters
SPX Copes-Vulcan�� 571
Manifolds
TLV�� 576
Steam Traps
TLV�� 577
569
Energy Optimization • Consulting & Surveys
Rawson EM&T
Maintenance Management and Consulting
(Advise In-House Resources in the following areas)
• Steam Trap System Database Management
• Steam Trap Maintenance Response Management
• Steam & Condensate Application Solutions
• Logical Solutions Using In-House Resources
• Engineering Assistance – Steam, Condensate & Other Areas
Steam Trap System Analysis using TLV’s TM5 EX

• Design tailored database in TrapMan® software
• Develop survey routes & test safely accessible traps
• Install stainless steel identification tags to each location
E • Attach brightly colored markers to failed locations
• Provide comprehensive reporting with recommendations
• Post survey training and auditing options
Compressed Gas Leak Survey using TLV’s SonicMan®

• Identify various gas leaks and assigning monetary value
• Tag each leak location physically and digitally
• Provide comprehensive reporting
• Mitigation assistance
Pressure Gauge Evaluation Survey

• Identify Gauges by Process, Manufacturer, Size, etc.
• Examine for Damage, Readability & Functionality
• Provide informative decisive reporting
• Reporting includes recommended replacements
Services provided in:

Texas, Louisiana, Southern Arkansas,
SW Mississippi, SE New Mexico

Energy Optimization • Desuperheaters
Mechanical Atomizing Desuperheaters

MA-I / MA-IU
DESCRIPTION
The Copes-Vulcan MA-I/MA-IU Mechanical Desuperheater is generally used
for attemporating applications featuring steady loads. It is particularly designed
for rugged service and can maintain final temperature to within 20°F (11°C) of
saturation.
Maximum cooling liquid capacity is 25,860 lbs/hr (11,700 kg/hr) at a nozzle
differential pressure of 160 psi (1100 kPa) when using 100°F (38°C) water.
Multiple units or other models can be installed in a header for higher capacities.
This model is available in two mounting options. The MA-I is designed for
welding to the pipe line and the MA-IU is flange mounted. The MA-IU also offers
mounting commonality with other ‘U’-series desuperheaters (MA-IIU, MNSD-V
and SAMN-U).
MA-II / MA-IIU
DESCRIPTION
The Copes-Vulcan MA-II/MA-IIU is a mechanical atomizing desuperheater that
E
is generally used for applications which feature steady loads. It is particularly
designed for rugged service and can maintain final temperature to within 20°F
(11°C) of saturation.
In addition to steady load service, it is often used for attemporating applications,
and performs equally well for both. Maximum cooling liquid capacity is 175,000
lb/hr (80,000 kg/hr) at a nozzle differential pressure of 400 psi (2760 kPa) when
using 100°F (38°C) water.
This model is available in two mounting options. The MA-II is designed for
welding to the pipe line and the MA-IIU is flange mounted. The MA-IIU also
offers mounting commonality with other ‘U’-series desuperheaters (MA-IU,
MNSD-V and SAMN-U).
MA-III / MA-IIIU
DESCRIPTION
The MA-III/MA-IIIU is a multi nozzle mechanical atomizing desuperheater that
reduces steam or gas temperatures by introducing cooling liquids directly into
the hot fluid. The MA-III/MAIIIU is a probe style direct contact heat exchanger.
The liquid passes through the main tube of the desuperheater to the spray
nozzles and discharges into the steam header.
The MA-III/MA-IIIU is generally used for applications which feature steady and
transient loads. The primary use is for interstage attemperation of high pressure
and temperature superheated steam and is specially designed for intermittent
use. It is well suited for applications where limited differential pressure is
available for injection purposes. The MA-III/MA-IIIU is also designed for higher
capacities than the MA-I and SAMN at the same time supporting wider range of
the liquid flows.
This model is available in two mounting options. The MA-III is designed for
welding to the pipe line and the MA-IIIU is flange mounted. The MA-IIIU also
offers mounting commonality with other ‘U’-series desuperheaters (MA-IU, MA-
IIU, MNSD-V and SAMN-U).

Multiple Nozzle Spray Desuperheater

MNSD
DESCRIPTION
The Copes-Vulcan Multiple Nozzle Spray Desuperheater offers optimum
performance and rangeability in a variable spray tube design. The MNSD
fills the performance gap between the limited capability of a simple
mechanical spray type desuperheater and the virtually unlimited capability
of Copes-Vulcan’s Variable Orifice Desuperheater. The MNSD offers high
temperature capabilities and up to Class V leakage rating.
Steam Atomizing Desuperheater

SA-35
E DESCRIPTION
The Copes-Vulcan SA-35 Steam Atomizing Desuperheater is used to
reduce the temperature of vapors such as steam with condensate such as
water. It was developed to obtain a more uniform spray under varying load
conditions where no pressure drop in the steam header can be tolerated.
This desuperheater is made in four sizes, in pressure classes up to and
including Class 1500.
Spring Assisted, Multiple Nozzle Spray

Desuperheater
SAMN-U
DESCRIPTION
The spring assisted multiple nozzle desuperheater reduces steam or gas
temperatures by introducing cooling liquids directly into the hot vapor.
Copes-Vulcan's SAMN-U has six nozzles which can be opened or closed
to vary the coolant flow. This provides a higher turndown than single nozzle
units where the amount of coolant flow is dependent only on the ability to
vary the pressure drop across the nozzle.
SAMN-U contains an integral spring loaded flow plug which moves in
response to a change in pressure differential between the coolant inlet
pressure and the main header pressure. As the plug moves, more or less
nozzles are uncovered introducing more or less coolant into the main
header. The cooling water inlet pressure is controlled by a Copes-Vulcan
Severe Duty or General Service Globe Valve.

Variable Annulus Desuperheater

VAD
DESCRIPTION
The VAD is a cost effective, line size desuperheater. Produced from stock
materials it is readily available to satisfy general desuperheating and gas
cooling applications.
Essentially a dynamically contoured, stainless steel spray head
concentrically located within a short section of pipe (body). The pipe acts as
the desuperheater’s outer body and pressure boundary. It fits into the main
vapor line via either line size flanged or butt weld end connections for easy
installation.
Variable Orifice Desuperheater

VO-76
DESCRIPTION E
Copes-Vulcan’s VO Variable Orifice Desuperheater is recognized industry
wide as the most versatile desuperheater available. It is easily capable of
meeting the most demanding needs for desuperheating in both the power
and process industries.
The VO offers extremely fine control and exceptional turndown that is limited
only by the rangeability of the coolant control valve itself.
The VO-76 is also available with a housing fabricated from forged and
wrought piping components when technical specifications and/or N.D.T.
requirements preclude the use of castings. Again, reducers and flanges
can be added as required, but unlike the cast VO-76, this applies to both
inlet and outlet on the fabricated version of the VO-76. By using various
sized reducers/expanders and/or flanges, an almost endless variation of
dimensions and end connections can be achieved.
VO-II
DESCRIPTION
Copes-Vulcan’s VO Variable Orifice Desuperheater is recognized industry
wide as a versatile desuperheater. It is easily capable of meeting the most
demanding needs for desuperheating in both the power and process
industries.
The VO offers extremely fine control and exceptional turndown that is limited
only by the rangeability of the coolant control valve itself.
With excellent mixing of vapor and coolant, control is possible throughout
the entire operating range to within 3± 5° F (± 2.5° C) of the set point which
can be as close as 10° F (5° C) above saturation. The coolant pressure
which is required at the inlet to the VO need only be 5 psi (35 kPa) above
the pressure of the vapor being desuperheated.
Because virtually all of the desuperheating occurs within the VO body itself,
the temperature sensing element can be as close as 14—20’ (4—6m) from
the desuperheater outlet.

Desuperheater Selection Guide

MA VO
Desuperheater SAMN VAD SA-35 MNSD-V PRDS
MA-I MA-I I MA-I I I VO-76 VO-I I
2:1 2:5:1 3:3:1 9:1 15:1 25:1 Up to 100:1 Up to 100:1 50:1 Typ.
Turndown Ratio (on coolant (on coolant (on coolant (on coolant (on coolant (on vapor flow) Up to 75:1 (limited only (limited only by (varies with
flow) flow) flow) flow) flow) (2) by CWV) CWV) trim)
Type of Atomizing Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Mechanical Velocity Vapor Mechanical Velocity Velocity Velocity
Minimum Outlet Tem-

Sat. + 20F Sat. + 20F Sat. + 15F Sat. + 15F Sat. + 10F Sat. + 15F Sat. + 15F Sat. + 10F Sat. + 10F Sat. + 10F
perature
Temperature Control
±15F ±15F ±10F ±10F ±5F ±10F ±10F ±5F ±5F ±5F
Accuracy (5)
Vertical w/
Vertical w/ flow
Mounting/Orientation Any Any Any Any Any Any Any flow Any
upward
upward
E ANSI Pressure Class

150-
2500 150-2500 900-2500 150-2500 150-600 150-1500 150-2500 150-2500 150-900 150-250
1500
Minimum
3” 8” 8” 8” 6” 1” 4” 6” (7) 2” 3” 1”
Size
Main Header
Size
Maximum No limita-
24” 30” 30” 30” 24” 16” 24” 24” (7) No limitations No limitations
Size tions
3-4, 4-6, 6-8, Standard:1”x 2”

1”-16”
8-10 3/2, 3/2, 3/5, to 6”x12”
Size(s) 3” 3” 3” 3” 14 separate 2”-24” 3”-20”
(Fig. Size-Min. 4/5 Custom: 8”x16”
sizes
Header) & up
Thd., Flg. or
Coolant SW SW SW or BW Flg. or SW Flg. or BW Flanged Flanged Flanged SW
BW
Std. End
Connections:
Header
Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged Flg. or BW Flanged Flanged Flg. or BW Flanged SW/BW
Mounting
Coolant Shutoff Class III-V III-V III-V III-V III-V III-V V III-V III-V III-V
@ max. 50,000 ft/ 30,000 ft/ 30K ft/min

50,000 ft/min 50,000 ft/min 1/3 sonic 50,000 ft/min 50,000 ft/min 30K ft/min (4)
flow min min (4)
Velocity
Per Application
Limits:
@ min. 1,800 ft/ 1,000 ft/min
5,000 ft/min 5,000 ft/min 900 ft/min 2,000 ft/min 1,000 ft/min NA 600 ft/min
flow min (1)
@ max. 3 psi Per Appli-

Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible Per Application
flow nominal cation
Pressure
Per Application
Drop:
@ min. 3 psi Nominally Nominally
Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible Negligible
flow nominal 3-5 psi 3-5 psi
Required Coolant Pressure

40-160 psi 60-400 psi 30-500 psi 225-1000 psi 7-25 psi 10-40 psi 60-3,000 psi 5-100 psi 5 psi Per Application
Steam Line Pressure +
Atomizing Steam Pressure

(Nozzle Delta P) Line NA NA NA NA NA Any (3) NA NA NA NA
Pressure +

Desuperheater Selection Guide - Continued

MA VO
Desuperheater SAMN VAD SA-35 MNSD-V PRDS
MA-I MA-I I MA-I I I VO-76 VO-I I
Distance to Temperature
30-50 ft. 30-50 ft. 16-30 ft. 16-30 ft. 20-33 ft. 25-40 ft. 16-30 ft. 12-20 ft. 12-20 ft. 12-18 ft.
Sensor (DTS)
Min. Straight Up-

Pipe Distance stream- 3 pipe diam- 3 pipe 5 pipe 5 pipe diam- 6 pipe 3 pipe diam- 5 pipe diam- 5 pipe diam-
to Elbow or eters diameters diameters eters diameters eters eters Long radius Long radius eters
Valve (not less than (not less not less not less than (not less (not less than not less than elbows may elbows may not less than
3 ft.) than 3 ft.) than 4 ft.) 4 ft.) than 1 ft.) 4 ft.) 4 ft.) be installed be installed 3 ft.)
at inlet and at inlet and
Down- outlet outlet
70% of 70% of 50% of 70% of LR Elbow
stream- 70% of “DTS” 70% of “DTS” 80% of “DTS”
“DTS” “DTS” “DTS” “DTS” (refer to GN-03)
System Components
MA-D.S.H MA-III VAD-D.S.H VO-D.S.H

MA-D.S.H SAMN-D.S.H SA-35-D.S.H MNSD-V VO-D.S.H
Coolant Coolant Coolant Coolant PRDS-D.S.H
Coolant Valve Coolant Valve Coolant Valve Temp Con- Coolant Valve
Valve Valve Valve Valve Coolant Valve
Temp Con- Temp Control- Temp Controller troller (6) Temp Control-
Temp Con- Temp Con- Temp Con- Temp Con- Temp Controller
troller (6) ler (6) (6) Block Valve ler (6)
troller (6) troller (6) troller (6) troller (6)
Installation Guidance
E
Notes No. GN-04 GN-05 Pending GN-08 GN-09 GN-06 GN-07 GN-02 GN-02 GN-03
Product Specifications No. PS. No. 29

PS No. 18 PS No. 19 PS No. 60 PS No. 28 PS No. 51 PS No. 20 PS No. 21 PS No. 21 PS No. 23 & 24
& 52
1.Velocity is as low as 1,000 ft/min is possible depending on amount of residual superheat and temperature differential between vapor and coolant.
2.25:1 turndown is subject to a check on the amount of atomizing vapor being used.
3.Pressure breakdown orifices or PRV may be required in order to limit the pressure drop to less than critical.
4.Velocity shown is seat velocity. Inlet and outlet velocities will be much lower.
5.Control accuracy is a function of the complete system which includes temperature controller and coolant valve.
6.Application involving pressure reduction will include a pressure reducing valve (PRV) and pressure controller.
7.6”-24” Header for 3/2 & 3/3; 12”-24” Header for 3/5 and 12”-20” Header for 4/5 Model.

Energy Optimization • Manifolds
Steam and Condensate Manifold with Built-in

Sealed Valves
M4 / M8 / M12
BENEFITS
Forged steel manifolds for steam distribution and condensate recovery
on tracing and other applications.
1. Rugged and versatile design minimizes installation area and easily
adapts to plant requirements.
2. Each line has a built-in bellows sealed valve, minimizing installation
space.
3. Good seal with stellite hardened surfaces on valve plugs and valve
seats.
4. Durable stainless steel bellows eliminate gland leakage.
5. Built-in blowdown and drain connections.
6. Complete condensate manifold packages are available, incorporating
E shutoff valves and steam traps.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model M4 M8 M12
No. of Connections 4 8 12
Steam Outlet* / Condensate Inlet** Connection*** Screwed Socket Weld Screwed Socket Weld Screwed Socket Weld
Size (in) ½, ¾ ½, ¾ ½, ¾ ½, ¾ ½, ¾ ½, ¾
Connection*** Socket Weld
Steam Outlet* / Condensate Inlet**
Size (in) 1½
Connection*** Socket Weld
Drain* / Blowdown**
Size (in) 1½
Maximum Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 710
Maximum Operating Temperature (°F) TMO 752
Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 825
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°F) TMA 800
* When used as a steam manifold ** When used as a condensate manifold

*** Flanged connections available as an option
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR REMOVE THIS PRODUCT WHILE IT IS UNDER PRESSURE. Allow internal pressure of this product to equal
atmospheric pressure and its surface to cool to room temperature before disassembling or removing. Failure to do so could cause burns or other
injury. READ INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY.

Energy Optimization • Steam Traps
Selection Guide
Max. Max.
Appear- Operating Thermo- Blow-
Model Operating Dis- Air Replace-
ance Pressure Body static Built- down
(Connec- Tempera- charge Jacket- able
(Construc- Range Material Air Vent- in Valve
tion) ture Capacity ing Module
tion) (psig) ing (Option)
(°F) (lb/h)
Compact trap design includes built-in Y-strainer (P21S ver.C is designed for use in copper tracing applications)
3.5(6) - 300
P21S ver.C
( ):Vertical Cast 850
(S)*
Installation 800 Stainless
Steel (BD1)
P46S
5 - 650** 1040
(S)*
Wide range of pressure and discharge capacities
P46SRN Stainless E
Steel*** 1630
(S,W)*
or
P46SRM Carbon
5 - 650 2980
(S,W,F)* Steel
P46SRW Cast
800 5490
(S,W)* Steel (BD2)
Stainless
Steel***
P65SRN
5 - 925 or 1030
(S,W)*
Carbon
Steel
Universal flange allows easy inline trap unit replacement
FP46UC Stainless
5 - 650 750 1630
(S,W,F)* Steel (BD2)
Ideal for use on high-temperature/high-pressure steam mains

HR80A
115 - 1150 887 410
(W,F)*
Cro-Mo
HR150A Alloy
230 - 2100 480
(W,F)* Steel
1022
HR260A
230 - 3700 505
(W)*
* Letters in brackets show pipe connections available: S = screwed, W = socket weld, F = flanged.
** For best performance over extended periods, it is recommended that the trap be operated at or below 300 psig.
*** Except for flanged models.
Full product details (sizes, pressures, capacities and materials) are included in the individual specification data sheets (SDS).Call Rawson for more information.
To avoid abnormal operation, accidents or serious injury, DO NOT use this product outside of the specification range. Local regulations may restrict
the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.

Selection Guide
Operating Maximum Maximum
Pressure Operating Operating Air Body
Model Application
Range Temp Capacity Venting Material
(psig) (°F) TMO (lb/h)
Cast Iron,
Heat Exchangers Tank
Ductile Iron
JX Vacuum Automatic Heaters Coils, Dryers
428 47,520 or
Series – 300 X-element Unit Heaters
Stainless
Process Equipment
Steel
Cast Steel Heat Exchangers
JH-X Vacuum Automatic or Tank Heaters Coils, Dryers
464 40,000
Series – 450 X-element Stainless Unit Heaters
Steel Process Equipment
Cast Steel Steam Mains Turbines

E JH-B
1.5 – 1,500 800 14,950
Automatic or Tracer Lines
Series Bimetal Stainless Process Heaters
Steel Heat Exchangers
Cast Steel
Optional Steam Mains
JH Vacuum or
986 970 Automatic Small to Medium
Series – 1,740 Low Alloy
LEX Process Equipment
Cast Steel
FS Steam Mains
Automatic Stainless
Series 1.5 – 650 800 1,510 Turbines
Bimetal Steel
QuickTrap Tracer Lines
SS Automatic Stainless Steam Mains

1.5 – 650 800 1,510
Series Bimetal Steel Tracer Lines
Superheated or High-
SH Automatic
1.5 – 1,500 800 2,110 Cast Steel Pressure Steam Mains
Series Bimetal
Process Equipment
Cast Iron Large Capacity

J10 Manual (J10) Process Equipment
7 – 650 800 366,470
JH15 Air Vent Cast Steel Heat Exchangers
(JH15) Heaters
Cast Iron
Large Capacity
(JL9X/JL14-X)
JL Vacuum Automatic Process Equipment
464 133,560 Cast Steel
Series – 450 X-element Heat Exchangers
(JLH9X/
Heaters
JLH14-X)
The highest figures listed may not apply to all traps within each series.
Full product details (sizes, pressures, capacities and materials) are included in the individual specification data sheets (SDS).Call Rawson for more information.
Local regulations may restrict the use of these products to below the conditions quoted.
Contact TLV directly or your local representative for further information.
Special TLV Free Float traps available for: • Biotechnology Applications • Dowtherm • Soot Blowing • Gas and Air Applications

Compact Thermodynamic Disc Trap

PowerDyne® P46S
BENEFITS
Stainless steel trap includes Y-strainer for reliable performance in
tracing, instrumentation, and steam mains.
1. Hardened stainlees steel working surfaces for long service life.
2. Air-jacketing reduces no-load cycling and extends service life.
3. Lapped disc provides seam-tight seal for long service life.
4. Built-in screen for extended trouble-free service.
5. Installing an optional belowdown valve enables quick and easy
removal of scale.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model P46S
Connection Screwed
Size (in) ¼, ⅜, ½
Maximum Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 650* E
Maximum Operating Pressure (psig) 5
Maximum Operating Temperaure (°F) TMO 800
Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 650
Maximum Allowable Temperaure (°F) TMA 800
Maximum Back Pressure 80% of Inlet Pressure
* For best performance over extended periods, it is recommended that the trap be
operated at or below 300 psig.
Discharge Capacity
1. Differential pressure is the difference between the inlet and outlet pressure of
the trap.
2. Recommended safety factor: at least 2.

Thermodynamic Disc Trap with Thermostatic Air

Venting
PowerDyne® P46SRN / P46SRM / P46SRW / P65SRN
BENEFITS
Inline repairable trap for steam mains, tracers and coils, with wide capacity
range to match various conditions. Available in carbon steel or stainless steel.
1. Inline replaceable valve module to lower repair costs.
3. Quick thermostatic air venting with bimetal ring for fast start-up.
4. Lapped disc provides steam-tight seal without air binding for long service life.
5. Built-in screen for extended trouble-free service.
6. Hardened stainless steel working surfaces for long service life.
SPECIFICATION
Model P46SRN P46SRM P46SRW P65SRN
Body Material A105 A182 F304 A105 A182 F304 A216 Gr.WCB A105 A182 F304
Connection S, SW S SW S SW F S SW S, SW S SW S SW
Size (in) ½, ¾, 1 ½, ½, ½, ½, ½, ½, ½, 1 ½, ½, ½, ½, ¾, 1
¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1 ¾, 1
Max. Operating Press. (psig) 650 650 650 925
PMO
Min. Operating Press. (psig) 5
Max. Operating Temp. (°F) 800
TMO
Max. Allowable Press. (psig) 1192@100°F 1294 @ 100°F 1192 @ 100°F 1294 @ 100°F 1097@100°F 1550 @ 1683 @ 100°F
PMA* 100°F
Max. Allowable Temp. (°F) 800@725psig 1022 @ 800 @ 725psig 1022 @ 664psig 800@667psig 800 @ 1022 @ 863psig
TMA* 664psig 943psig
Maximum Back Pressure 80% of inlet pressure

Thermodynamic Disc Trap with Thermostatic Air

Venting - Continued
Discharge Capacity Pressure Temperature Rating*
E
S=Screwed, SW=Socket Weld, F=Flanged
1. Differential pressure is the difference between the inlet and outlet pressure of the trap.

Universal Thermodynamic Disc Trap with

Thermostatic Air
PowerDyne® FP46UC QuickTrap®
BENEFITS
Inline replaceable and cleanable 2-bolt universal flange steam trap with high
air venting capability. For steam mains, tracers and coils.
1. Two-bolt flange connector, replaceable trap unit and module valve seat permit
replacement in minutes without disturbing piping.
2. Universal flange permits trap installation in optimum position regardless of piping.
3. Screen is located in connector to provide protection while keeping replacement
costs low.
4. Connector gaskets are easily replaced after cleaning to allow for trap unit reuse.
6. Quick thermostatic air venting with bimetal ring for fast start-up.
E 7. Lapped disc provides steam-tight seal without air-binding for long service life.
8. Hardened stainless steel working surfaces for long service life.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model FP46UC
Connection Screwed Socket Weld Flanged
Size (in) ½, ¾, 1
Minimum Operating Pressure (psig) 5
Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 953 @ 100°F
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°F) TMA 752 @ 710 psig
Connector Unit F46
Trap Unit P46UC*
* Designed for use with F46, F32 Connector Units and V1/V2/V1P Trap Station.

Universal Thermodynamic Disc Trap with

Thermostatic Air - Continued
Discharge Capacity
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE OR REMOVE THIS PRODUCT WHILE IT IS UNDER PRESSURE.

Allow internal pressure of this product to equal atmospheric pressure and its surface to cool to room temperature before disassembling or
removing. Failure to do so could cause burns or other injury. READ INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY.

High-Pressure Thermodynamic Disc Trap with

Thermostatic Air
PowerDyne® HR80A
BENEFITS
Air-jacketed disc trap for drainage of high-pressure and temperature steam
mains and turbines.
1.Inline replaceable valve module to facilitate maintenance and lower repair costs.
2.Six body bolts fasten the cover and hold the module valve seat in the trap body to
promote good sealing.
3.Lapped disc provides steam-tight seal.
4.Air-jacketing reduces no-load cycling and reduces wear.
5.Quick thermostatic air-venting with bimetal ring for fast start-up and elimination of
air binding.
6.Built-in screen with large surface area for extended trouble-free operation.
7.Hardened working surfaces for long life.
E
SPECIFICATIONS
Model HR80A
Connection Screwed Socket Weld
Size (in) ½, ¾, 1
Minimum Operating Pressure (psig) 115

Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 1480 @ 100°F
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°F) TMA 1022 @ 449 psig
* This Rating Graph is based on Allowable Stress Values of ASTM-Materials at each

temperature.

High-Pressure Thermodynamic Disc Trap with

Thermostatic Air - Continued
Discharge Capacity

Universal Free Float and Thermostatic Steam Trap

with Three Point Setting
FreeFloat® FS3 / FS5 QuickTrap®
BENEFITS
Two-bolt universal connector facilitates inline steam trap replacement in
minutes on steam mains, tracers and light process.
1. Constant water seal and unique three-point seating ensure steam tight seal
even under no-load conditions.
2. Universal flange allows trap to be positioned in the correct attitude,
regardless of pipeline configuration.
3. Up to 1740 psig hydraulic shock rating ensures excellent resistance of the
float to water hammer.
4. Unique free-float design eliminates concentrated wear ensuring long
reliable life.
5. Durable thermostatic air vent for exceptionally fast start-up.
E 6. One screen located in connector and one in trap ensure trouble-free
operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model FS3 FS5
Connection Screwed Socket Weld Flanged Screwed* Socket Weld Flanged
Size (in) ½, ¾,1 ½, ¾,1 ½, ¾,1 ½, ¾,1
Orifice No. 10, 18, 21 10, 21, 32
Maximum Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 150, 250, 300 150, 300, 450
Maximum Differential Pressure (psi) ΔPMX 150, 250, 300 150, 300, 450
Minimum Operating Pressure (psig) 1.5 1.5
Maximum Operating Temperature ( ̊F) TMO 752 752
Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 345 450
Maximum Allowable Temperature ( ̊F) TMA 752 752
Connector Unit F32 F32
Trap Unit S3 ** S5**
* FS5 screwed connection requires special installation procedure. Consult Rawson.

** For use with F32 Connector Unit and V1/V2 Trap Station.
Discharge Capacity
To avoid abnormal operation, accidents or serious injury,

DO NOT use this product outside of the specification
range. Local regulations may restrict the use of this
product to below the conditions quoted.
1. Line numbers within the graph refer to orifice numbers.
2. Differential pressure is the difference between the inlet and outlet pressure of the
trap. DO NOT use traps under conditions that exceed
3. Capacities are based on continuous maximum differential pressure, as condensate backup
4. Recommended safety factor: at least 1.5. will occur!

Free Float Steam Trap with Thermostatic Air

Venting
FreeFloat® JH7RL-X, JH7RL-B / JH7RM-B
BENEFITS
A reliable and durable cast steel steam trap for use on medium-size process
equipment. JH7RL-B/ JH7RM-B are also suitable for both superheated and
high-pressure process equipment.
1. Self-modulating free float provides continuous, smooth, low-velocity
condensate discharge as process loads vary.
2. Precision-ground float, constant water seal and three- point seating design
ensure a steam-tight seal, even under no-load conditions.
3. Rugged float construction with up to 1500 or 2300 psig* hydraulic shock
rating ensures excellent resistance to water hammer.
4. JH7RL-X: Thermostatic capsule (X-element) with “fail open” feature vents
air automatically at close-to-steam temperature.
5. JH7RL-B/JH7RM-B: Thermostatic bimetal air vent valve vents air E
automatically for rapid startup.
6. Built-in screen with large surface area ensures extended trouble-free operation.
7. Easy, inline access to internal parts simplifies cleaning and reduces maintenance costs.
* Depending on orifice No.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model JH7RL-X H7RL-B JH7RM-B
Connection Screwed Socket Weld Flanged Socket Weld Flanged Socket Weld Flanged
Size (in) 1, 1½ ¾, 1, ½, 2 ¾, 1, ½, 2 ¾, 1, ½, 2 ¾, 1, ½, 2 ¾, 1, ½, 2 ¾, 1, ½, 2
Orifice No. 2, 5, 10, 14, 22, 32 2, 5, 10, 14, 22, 32, 40, 46 65
Maximum Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 30, 75, 150, 200, 315, 450 30, 75, 150, 200, 315, 450, 600, 650 925
Maximum Differential Pressure (psi) Δ PMX 30, 75, 150, 200, 315, 450 30, 75, 150, 200, 315, 450, 600, 650 925
Minimum Operating Pressure (psig) Vacuum 1.5 1.5
Maximum Operating Temperature (°F) TMO 464 800 800
Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 600 650 925
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°F) TMA 800 800 800
Type of Air Vent X-element (11°F subcooling) Bimetal (vents air up to approx. 212°F )
the use of this product to below the conditions quoted


Venting - Continued
Discharge Capacity
1. Line numbers within the graph are orifice numbers.

3. Capacities are based on continuous discharge of condensate 11°F below saturated temperature.
4. Recommended safety factor: at least 1.5.
DO NOT use traps under conditions that exceed maximum differential pressure, as condensate backup will occur!


Venting
FreeFloat® JH8R-X
BENEFITS
A reliable and durable cast steel steam trap for use on large-size
process equipment. JH8R-B is also suitable for high-pressure process equipment
1. Self-modulating free float provides continuous, smooth, low-velocity condensate
discharge as process loads vary.
2. Constant water seal design ensures a steam-tight seal, even under low-load
conditions.
3. Only one moving part, the free float, eliminates concentrated valve wear and
provides long maintenance-free service life.
4. Rugged float construction with up to 1500 or 1600 psig* hydraulic shock rating
ensures excellent resistance of the float to water hammer.
5. JH8R-X: Thermostatic capsule (X-element) with “fail open” feature vents air
automatically at close-to-steam temperature. E
6. JH8R-B: Thermostatic bimetal air vent valve vents air automatically for rapid
startup.
7. Built-in screen with large surface area ensures extended trouble-free operation.
* Depending on orifice No.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model JH8R-X JH8R-B
Connection Flanged Flanged
Size (in) 2, 3 2, 3
Orifi ce No. 2 , 5 , 10 , 14 , 22 , 32 40, 46
Maximum Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 30, 75, 150, 200, 315, 450 600, 650
Maximum Differential Pressure (psi) Δ PMX 30, 75, 150, 200, 315, 450 600, 650
Minimum Operating Pressure (psig) Vacuum 1.5
Maximum Operating Temperature (°F) TMO 464 800
Maximum Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 650 650
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°F) TMA 800 800
Type of Air Vent X-element (11 °F subcooling) Bimetal (vents air up to approx. 212 °F)
the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.


Venting - Continued
Discharge Capacity
1. Line numbers within the graph are orifi ce numbers.

3. Capacities are based on continuous discharge of condensate 11°F below saturated temperature.
Do not use traps under conditions that exceed maximum differential pressure, as condensate backup will occur!


Venting
FreeFloat® J6S-X
BENEFITS
A reliable and durable stainless steel steam trap with tight shut-off for
use on medium-size process equipment.
1. Self-modulating free float provides continuous, smooth, low velocity
condensate discharge as process loads vary.
2. Precision-ground float, constant water seal and three-point seating
design ensure a steam-tight seal, even under no-load conditions.
3. Only one moving part, the free float, prevents concentrated wear and
provides long maintenance-free service life.
4. Thermostatic capsule (X-element) with “fail open” feature vents air
automatically until close-to-steam temperature.
5. Built-in screen with large surface area ensures extended trouble-free
operation. E
6. Easy, inline access to internal parts simplifies cleaning and reduces
maintenance costs
SPECIFICATIONS
Model J6S-X
Connection Screwed
Size (mm) 15, 20, 25
Orifice No. 2, 5, 10, 16, 21
Maximum Operating Pressure (MPaG) PMO 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 1.6, 2.1
Maximum Differential Pressure (MPa) ΔPMX 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 1.6, 2.1
Minimum Operating Pressure (MPaG) 0.01
Maximum Operating Temperature (°C) TMO 220
Subcooling of X-element Fill (°C) up to 6
Type of X-element B
PRESSURE SHELL DESIGN CONDITIONS (NOT OPERATING CONDITIONS):
Maximum Allowable Pressure (MPaG) PMA: 2.1 1 MPa = 10.197 kg/cm2
Maximum Allowable Temperature (°C) TMA: 220
To avoid abnormal operation, accidents or serious injury, DO NOT use this product outside of the specification range. Local regulations may
restrict the use of this product to below the conditions quoted.


Venting - Continued
Discharge Capacity
1. Line numbers within the graph are orifice numbers.

3. Capacities are based on continuous discharge of condensate 6°C below saturated steam temperature.
Do not use traps under conditions that exceed maximum differential pressure, as condensate backup will occur!

Balanced Pressure Thermostatic Steam Trap

LV21
BENEFITS
Maintainable stainless steel trap with high air venting capability and light condensate
capacity for steam mains, tracing, and process equipment.
1. Patented “fail open” design for critical service.
2. Hardened stainless steel valve head and seat for maximum longevity.
3. Positive open-close operation reduces valve wear.
4. “Pressure-to-close” valve design improves life.
5. Valve, four diaphragms and casing have matching contours for high superheat
capability and water hammer resistance.
6. Large screen promotes trouble-free service.
7. Self-draining for freeze protection in vertical use.
8. Flat mirror-finish valve head provides tightest sealing for energy efficiency and life.
9. Compact for easy installation.
10. Maintainable design lowers cleaning costs. E
SPECIFICATIONS
Model LV21
Connection Screwed
Size (in) ¼, ⅜, ½, ¾
Max. Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 300
Min. Operating Pressure (psig) Vacuum
Max. Operating Temp. (°F) TMO see graph at right
Max. Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 900
Max. Allowable Temperature (°F) TMA 800
Subcooling of Capsule Fill (°F) up to 11 (option: up to 40)
Type of X-element B (option: T)

Balanced Pressure Thermostatic Steam Trap - Continued
E
Discharge Capacity


L21S / L32S
BENEFITS
Inline repairable steel-bodied traps with high air venting capability and light to
medium condensate capacity for tracing and process equipment.
1. Patented " fail open"design for critical service.
2. Hardended stainless steel valve head and seat for maximum longevity.
3. Positive open-close operation reduces valve wear.
4. "Pressure-to-close" valve design improves life.
5. Valve, multiple diaphragms and casing have matching contours for high
superheat capability and water hammer resistance.
6. Built-in screen promotes trouble-free service.
7. Self-draining for freeze protection in vertical use.
8. Flat mirror-finish valve head provides tightest sealing for energy efficiency
and life.
9. Compact and capable of self adjusting to wide flow.
10. Easily cleanable and repairable design lowers maintenance costs. E
11. Model L32SC with built-in check valve is available upon request.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model L21S L32S
Connection Screwed Socket Weld Screwed Socket Weld
Size (in) ½, ¾, 1
Max. Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 300 450
Max. Operating Temp (°F) TMO see graph at right
Max. Allowable Pressure (°F) PMA 450
Subcooling of X-element Fill (°F) up to 11
Type of X-element B
Number of Diaphragms 4 5

E Discharge Capacity


FL21 / FL32 QuickTrap®
BENEFITS
Inline replaceable and cleanable 2-bolt universal flange steam trap with high air
venting capability. For steam mains, tracers and light process.
1. Two-bolt flange connector permits trap replacement or cleaning in minutes.
2. Patented “fail-open” design for critical service.
3. “Pressure-to-close” valve design with hardened stainless steel valve head
and seat for maximum life.
4. Valve, four diaphragms and casing have matching contours for high
superheat capability and water hammer resistance.
5. Flat mirror-finish valve head provides tightest sealing for energy efficiency
and life.
6. Pipeline screen located in connector protects and keeps trap module
replacement costs low.
7. Easily cleanable and repairable design with replace-able module gaskets
lowers maintenance costs. E
SPECIFICATIONS
Model FL21 FL32
Connection Screwed Socket Weld Flanged Socket Weld Socket Weld Flanged
Size (in) ½, ¾, 1 ½, ¾, 1 ½, ¾, 1 ½, ¾, 1 ½, ¾, 1
Max. Operating Pressure (psig) PMO 300 450
Maximum Back Pressure 90% of inlet pressure
Max. Operating Temperature (°F) TMO see graph at right
Max. Allowable Pressure (psig) PMA 450
Subcooling of X-element Fil (°F) up to 11
Type of X-element B
Connector Unit F32
Trap Unit L21* L32*
* Designed for use with F32 Connector Unit and V1/V2 Trap Station.

E
Discharge Capacity


Section Cover page
Personalized Training Classes
Our technically competent and highly trained sales force will add value to your inventory
through free product training sessions, presented on-site, that will aid in the use and
proper application of the products you purchase from Rawson, once again providing
assistance meant to stretch your inventory dollars to the maximum.
Specialty Equipment
Main Index
Filtration Systems
Amiad Water Systems................................................................................................... 602
Speed Sensors
Aitek............................................................................................................................... 622
Tachometers
Aitek............................................................................................................................... 629
Pumps
Jet Pumps
Penberthy...................................................................................................................... 631
High Purity Pumps
Trebor............................................................................................................................ 633
Chemical Heaters
Trebor............................................................................................................................ 638
Wash Down Equipment
Strahman Valves........................................................................................................... 639
Vibration Switches & Monitors
Robertshaw................................................................................................................... 645
601
Specialty Equipment • Filtration Systems Amiad Water Systems
Automatic, Self-Cleaning Screen Filtration System

ABF Series
DESCRIPTION
The ABF Series consists of heavy duty automatic with an
electric self-cleaning mechanism. The five models of the
ABF series range in flow-rates of up to 32000 gpm with
screens ranging from 3,500-200 micron filtration degree.
Operation
Amiad’s suction-scanning technology combines focused
flush with automation to provide 100% cleaning of the
screen area, using less than 1% of the total process water
for cleaning. The self-cleaning cycle is triggered by the
accumulation of suspended solids (filter cake) on the
screen surface, as measured by the pressure differential.
Because cleaning is performed “as needed”, it results
in minimal water and energy waste. Suction-scanning
technology eliminates the need to isolate the filter during
the self-cleaning cycle. The focused cleaning and the
minimal exhaust requirement allow for uninterrupted
process flow.
FEATURES
F • Heavy duty system for high loads of suspended solids
and high flowrates
• Durable electrically driven revolving-brush cleaning
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
mechanism
• Automatic flushing according to pressure differential and/ Filter housing and lid Epoxy or Polyester coated carbon steel 37-2
or time Cleaning mechanism Stainless steel 316L, PVC, Acetal
• Option for continuous flushing Exhaust valve Epoxy-coated cast iron, Natural rubber
• Low pressure operation, suitable for 30 psi and lower Seals Synthetic rubber, Teflon
• No interruption of downstream flow during flushing Control Brass, Stainless steel, Nylon
APPLICATIONS: * Amiad offers a variety of construction materials.

• Water Supply Systems
• Cooling Water
• Wastewater Treatment
Model ABF-3000 ABF-6000 ABF-10000 ABF-15000 Mega ABF 40000 Mega ABF 60000
Maximum flowrate¹ 150 m³/h (660 700 m³/h (3100 US 1000 m³/h (4400 US 1800 m³/h (8000 US 4000 m³/h (17600 US 7200 m³/h (32000
US gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) US gpm
Inlet/Outlet diameter 3”-6” (80-150 8”-14” (200-350 mm) 8”-16” (200-400 mm) 14”-20” (350-500 mm) 16”-28” (400-600 mm) 20”-36” (500-900 mm)
mm)
Standard filtration Perforated screen 3500, 2500, 1500, 800 micron
degrees Wedge Wire Screen 800, 500, 300, 200 micron
Min. working pressure 2 bar (30 psi); 1 bar (15 psi) upon request
Max. working pressure 10 bar (145 psi); 16 bar (232 psi) upon request
Max. working 60°C (140°F); 95°C (203°F) upon request
temperature
Electrical Supply 230/480 VAC
Flushing cycle time 15 seconds 15-30 seconds At 60 Hz 15-30 seconds At 15-30 seconds At 4 x 15-30 seconds 4 x 15-30 seconds
60 Hz 60 Hz
Flushing criteria Differential pressure of 0.5 bar (7psi), time intervals and manual operation
¹ Actual flow is dependent on micron rating and assumed total suspended solids.

Specialty Equipment • Filtration Systems

EBS Series
DESCRIPTION
The EBS Series is an automatic filtration systems with an electric self-
cleaning mechanism. EBS systems range in flowrates of up to 32000 gpm
with screens designed ranging from 800-10 micron filtration degree. Inlet/
Outlet flanges are available from 8”-36” diameter.
Operation
Amiad’s suction-scanning technology combines focused flush with
automation to provide 100% cleaning of the screen area, using less than 1%
of the total process water for cleaning. The self-cleaning cycle is triggered
by the accumulation of suspended solids (filter cake) on the screen surface,
as measured by the pressure differential. Because cleaning is performed
“as needed”, it results in minimal water and energy waste. Suction-scanning
technology eliminates the need to isolate the filter during the self-cleaning
cycle. The focused cleaning and the minimal exhaust requirement allow for
uninterrupted process flow.
FEATURES
• Large filtration area, reliable operating mechanism and simple construction
make the EBS filter the ideal solution for filtration of high-flow and poor
quality water to very finefiltration degrees
• Automatic flushing according to pressure differential and/or time F
• No interruption of downstream flow during flushing
• Robust and reliable self-cleaning mechanism even on marginal operation
conditions
• Minimal volume of reject water allows excellent operation during flush
mode
• Operation and cleaning cycle is controlled by Programmable Logic Control
(PLC) which allows for wide range of control options and integration
• Control board also provides alarm output, continuous flush mode and flush
cycles counter
APPLICATIONS: MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

• Water Supply Systems Filter housing and lid Epoxy or Polyester coated carbon steel 37-2
• Irrigation Systems Cleaning mechanism Stainless steel 316L, Acetal
• Cooling Water Exhaust valve Epoxy-coated cast iron, Natural rubber
Synthetic rubber, Teflon
• Industrial Pre-Filtration Seals
Control Aluminum, Brass, Stainless steel, PVC, Nylon
* Offers a variety of construction materials and screens.
Model EBS 10000 EBS 15000

Maximum flowrate¹ 1200 m3/h (5300 US gpm 1800 m3/h (8000 US gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 8”-16” (200-400 mm) 10”-20” (250-500 mm)
Standard filtration degrees Weave Wire Screen 800, 500, 300, 200, 130, 100, 80,50, 25, 10 micron
Min. working pressure 2 bar (30 psi)
Max. working pressure 10 bar (150 psi); 16 bar (232 psi) upon request
Max. working temperature 60°C (140°F)
Electrical supply 3 phase, 220/380/440 VAC 50/60 Hz
Flushing criteria Differential pressure of 0.5 bar (7 psi), time intervals and manual operation

Automatic, Self-Cleaning Screen Filtration

System
Omega Series
DESCRIPTION
The Omega Series is an Automatic self-cleaning filter
which provides higher efficiency and smaller footprint,
combining Amiad’s superior Suction Scanning mechanism
with a multi-screen design. The Omega's flowrate range
is up to 22,000 gpm and from 500-10 micron filtration
degree. Inlet/Outlet flanged connections are available in
the ranges of 8”-32”.
Operation
accumulation of suspended solids (filter cake) on the
screen surface, as measured by the pressure differential.
Because cleaning is performed “as needed”, it results
in minimal water and energy waste. Suction-scanning
technology eliminates the need to isolate the filter during
F the self-cleaning cycle. The focused cleaning and the
minimal exhaust requirement allow for uninterrupted
process flow.
The Omega’s operation and cleaning cycle is controlled

and monitored by Programmable Logic Control (PLC). The
PLC allows for wide range of control options from a stand
along controller to fully integrated into the customer’s
central control system.
FEATURES MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
• Based on Amiad’s tried and proven suction scanning Filter housing Carbon steel, epoxy coating inside & outside
screen filtration technology Filter lid Carbon steel, epoxy coating inside & outside
• Highly efficient self-cleaning mechanism; fine filtration Screen Weavewire 316 or screens molded reinforced PP
performances, down to 10 microns with 316L
• Small footprint Cleaning mechanism Stainless steel 316
• Exceptionally high filtration area and flow per unit Exhaust valve Epoxy-coated cast iron, natural rubber or EPDM
• ASME/ATEX/IECEX available on request Seals Synthetic rubber, NBR
• Cleaning carried out by multiple suctions scanners with
Control Stainless steel, nylon
option for Spring Loaded Nozzles.
• Control board options include alarm output, contentious Other construction materials & coatings for corrosive use, are available upon
request.
flush mode and flush cycles counter
• Automatic self cleaning begins when signal received
from differential pressure switch and/or based on set
time parameter
APPLICATIONS:
• Membrane Protection
• Municipal Water
• Industrial Water
• Oil and Gas
• Irrigation


System - Continued
Model Omega I Omega I E Omega II Omega II E
Maximum flowrate¹ 675 m³/h (2,972 gpm) 880 m³/h (3,875 gpm) 1350 m³/h (5,944 gpm) 1750 m³/h (7,705 gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 200 - 300 mm (8”-12”); Flange standards as per request 250 - 500 mm (10”-20”); Flange standards as per request
Minimum working pressure² 2 bar (30 psi) 2 bar (30 psi)
Maximum working pressure 10 bar (150 psi); 16 bar (230 psi) upon request 10 bar (150 psi); 16 bar (230 psi) upon request
Filtration area 13,500 cm² (2,100 in²) 18,000 cm² (2,800 in²) 27,000 cm² (4,185 in²) 36,000 cm² (5,600 in²)
Flushing cycle time 25 sec 25 sec 25 sec 25 sec
Model Omega III Omega III E Omega IV Omega IV E

Maximum flowrate¹ 2700 m³/h (11,890 gpm) 3500 m³/h (15,410 gpm) 4050 m³/h (17,830 gpm) 5250 m³/h (23,120 gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 350 - 600 mm (14”-24”); Flange standards as per request 450 - 800 mm (18”- 32”); Flange standards as per request
Minimum working pressure² 2 bar (30 psi) 2 bar (30 psi)
Maximum working pressure 10 bar (150 psi); 16 bar (230 psi) upon request 10 bar (150 psi); 16 bar (230 psi) upon request
Filtration area 54,000 cm² (8,400 in²) 72,000 cm² (11,200 in²) 81,000 cm² (12,600 in²) 108,000 cm²(16,700 in²)
Flushing cycle time 2x25 sec 2x25 sec 3x25 sec 3x25 sec
¹ Subject to filtration degree and water quality. Flow data at 100 micron average water quality.
² For special low pressure conditions and fine filtration with SLN, please consult Rawson.


System
SAF Series
DESCRIPTION
The Amiad SAF Series are sophisticated, yet easy-to-
operate, automatic filtration system, with a self-cleaning
mechanism driven by an electric motor. The SAF supports
flow-rates of up to 1760 gpm, with various screens
designed to cover a range of 800-10 micron filtration
degree, and are available in inlet/outlet diameters of 2”-
10”.
Operation
Filter housing Epoxy-coated carbon steel 37-2
SMC Polyester / Epoxy-coated carbon steel 37-2
accumulation of suspended solids (filter cake) on the Filter lid
screen surface, as measured by the pressure differential. Cleaning mechanism Stainless steel 316L, Acetal
Because cleaning is performed “as needed”, it results Exhaust valve Epoxy-coated cast iron, Natural rubber
in minimal water and energy waste. Suction-scanning Seals Synthetic rubber, Teflon
technology eliminates the need to isolate the filter during Control Aluminum, Brass, Stainless steel, PVC, Nylon
F the self-cleaning cycle. The focused cleaning and the * Amiad offers a variety of construction materials. Consult Rawson for specifica-
minimal exhaust requirement allow for uninterrupted tions.
process flow.
Two types of control boards are available for the SAF

filters: Programmable Logic Control (PLC) or Electro-
Mechanical Relay and Timer.
FEATURES
• Large filter area, reliable operating mechanism and
simple construction make the SAF system the ideal
solution for filtration of poor quality water to very fine
filtration degrees
• Automatic flushing according to pressure differential and/
or according to time
• Robust and reliable self-cleaning mechanism even on
marginal operation conditions
• Minimal volume of reject water allows excellent operation
in continuous flush mode
APPLICATIONS:
• Irrigation Systems
• Cooling Water
• Waste Water Treatment
• Industrial Pre-Filtration


System - Continued
Model SAF 1500 SAF 3000 SAF 4500 SAF 6000
Maximum flowrate¹ 80 m³/h (352 US gpm) 150 m³/h (660 US gpm) 250 m³/h (1100 US gpm) 400 m³/h (1760 US gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 2" (50mm), 3" (80mm), 4" 3" (80mm), 4" (100MM), 4" (100mm), 6" (150mm), 8" 6" (150mm), 8" (200mm), 10"
(100mm) 6"(150mm) (200mm) (250mm)
Standard filtration degrees Weave Wire Screen 800, 500, 300, 200, 130, 100, 80, 50, 25, 10 micron
Min. working pressure 2 bar (30 psi); For lower pressure please consult manufacturer
Max. working pressure 10 bar (150 psi) 10 bar ( 150 psi); 16 bar (232
psi) upon request
Max. working temperature 50°C (122°F) 50°C (122°F) 60°C (140°F); 95°C (203°F) 60°C (140°F); 95°C (203°F)
upon request upon request
Electrical Supply 3 phase, 220 / 380 / 440 VAC 50 / 60 Hz
Flushing cycle time 15 seconds 20 seconds 20 seconds 40 seconds
Flushing criteria Differential pressure of 0.5 bar (7psi), time intervals and manual operation
¹Actual flow is dependent on micron rating and assumed total suspended solids.


TAF Series
DESCRIPTION
Amiad’s TAF Series consists of easy-to-operate 2” and 3” automatic filters
constructed of high quality plastic and driven by either an electrical or electronic
self-cleaning mechanism. The various types of TAF screens are designed to cover a
filtration degree range of 500-10 micron and flow rates up to 220 US gpm
Operation
Amiad’s suction-scanning technology combines focused flush with automation to
provide 100% cleaning of the screen area, using less than 1% of the total process
water for cleaning. The self-cleaning cycle is triggered by the accumulation of
suspended solids (filter cake) on the screen surface, as measured by the pressure
differential. Because cleaning is performed “as needed”, it results in minimal water
and energy waste. Suction-scanning technology eliminates the need to isolate the
filter during the self-cleaning cycle. The focused cleaning and the minimal exhaust
requirement allow for uninterrupted process flow.
FEATURES
• Unique electric drive mechanisms
• Automatic flushing according to differential pressure and/or time
• Option for continuous flushing
• Low power consumption
F • No interruption of downstream flow during flushing
• Electronically monitored cleaning with flexible control options
APPLICATIONS:
• Cooling Water
Filter housing and lid PA+GF
Cleaning mechanism PVC, Delarin
Exhaust valve Plastic, Natural rubber
Seals NBR
Control Brass, Stainless steel, PE, PP
* Consult Rawson for optimum flow depending on filtration degree & water quality.
Model 2” TAF 500 2” TAF 750 3” TAF 750

Maximum flow rate¹ 25 m³/h (110 US gpm) 25 m³/h (110 US gpm) 45 m³/h (198 US gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 2” (50 mm) 2” (50 mm) 3”(80 mm) or 3” Flanged
Standard filtration degrees 500, 300, 200, 130, 100, 80, 50, 25, 10 micron
Min. working pressure 1.5 bar (22 psi); Can be lower if pressure is increased for flushing
Max. working pressure 8 bar (116 psi)
Max. working temperature 60°C (140 °F)
Electrical Supply 110/220 VAC
Flushing cycle time 16 seconds
¹Actual flow is dependent on micron rating and assumed total suspended solids.


M100 Series
DESCRIPTION
The Amiad Filtomat M100 Series are mid-range automatic filtration
system ideal for remote installation sites with a water-driven self-
cleaning mechanism that doesn’t require external power source to
operate. With their various screen areas the M100 models support
flow-rates of up to 1760 gpm, with filtration degrees of 500 down
to 80 micron and inlet/outlet diameters from 2”-10”.
FEATURES
• Large filtration area, reliable operating mechanism and simple construction make the M100 filters the ideal solution for
agricultural and municipal filtration systems where no power is available.
• Automatic flushing according to pressure differential
• Minimal volume of reject water
Filter housing Epoxy-coated carbon steel 37-2. (Stainless Steel 316 on request)
Filter lid Epoxy-coated carbon steel 37-2. (Stainless Steel 316 on request) High density
Polypropylene
Cleaning mechanism PVC and Stainless Steel 316L
Exhaust valve Brass, Stainless steel 316, BUNA-N
Seals BUNA-N F
Control Aluminum, Brass, Stainless steel 316, PVC, Acetal
Model M100 750 M100 1500 M100 4500 M100 6800

Maximum flow rate* 40 m³/h (175 US gpm) 80 m³/h (350 US gpm) 180 m³/h (793 US gpm) 400 m³/h (1760 US gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 2” (50mm), 3” 80mm 3” (80mm), 4” (100 mm) 4” (100 mm), 6” (150 mm) 4''(100), 6” (150mm), 8”
(200mm), 10” (250mm)
Standard filtration degrees 500, 300, 200, 130, 100, 80 micron
Min. working pressure 2 bar (30 psi); For lower pressure please consult Rawson
Max. working pressure 8 bar (116 psi) 8 bar (116 psi) 10 bar (150 psi) 10 bar (150 psi)
Flushing cycle time 10 seconds 10 seconds 15 seconds 15 seconds
¹Actual flow is dependent on micron rating and assumed total suspended solids


MCFM Series
DESCRIPTION
Amiad’s Filtomat MCFM are automatic filtration system
with an optional continuous self-cleaning mechanism
designed for high flow rates and heavy dirt loads of fibrous
and sticky particles. The MCFM models support flow rates
of up to 3300 gpm, in filtration degrees of 3000 down to 15
micron and inlet/outlet diameters of 4”-12”. The MCFM’s
self cleaning process is operated by a programmable logic
controller (PLC). The PLC algorithm shifts the cleaning
process, back and forth, between modes (pressure
differential, time interval, continuous flushing, super flush
or reduced flow) according to the actual real-time dirt load
on the filter.
FEATURES
• Designed for heavy dirt-load applications
• Very affective in filtering out fibrous and sticky particles
• Outstanding results even in low pressure lines
• Electronically controlled self-cleaning algorithm responding to dirt-load variations in real time
• Cost effective solution for wide range of high dirt-load applications
• Compact design supporting high flow rates
F • Easy to install, operate and maintain
• Operation and cleaning cycle is controlled by Programmable Logic Control (PLC) which allows for wide range of
control options and integration
Filter housing Epoxy-coated carbon steel 37-2. (Stainless steel 316 on request)
Filter lid Epoxy-coated carbon steel 37-2. (Stainless steel 316 on request)
Cleaning mechanism Plastic and stainless steel 316l
Flush valve Brass, stainless steel 316, BUNA-N
Seals BUNA-N
* Amiad offers a variety of construction materials. Consult Rawson for specifications.
MCFM 8000 MCFM 12000

Model 4” MCFM-8000 6” MCFM-8000 8” MCFM-8000 6” MCFM-12000 8” MCFM-12000 10” MCFM-12000
Maximum flow rate¹ 120 m3/h (528 US 250 m³/h (1100 US 375 m³/h (1650 US 250 m³/h (1100 US 375 m³/h (1650 US 500 m³/h (2200 US
gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 4” (100 mm) 6” (150 mm) 8” (200 mm) 6” (150 mm) 8” (200 mm) 10” (250 mm)
Filtration degrees 3000, 1500, 800, 400, 200, 150, 120, 100, 80, 50, 40, 30, 25, 15 micron
Min. working 0.4 bar (5.8 psi); 1.5 bar (21 psi) for filtration degree of 30, 25, 15 micron
pressure
Max. working 10 bar (150 psi)
pressure
Max. working 65°C (149°F)
temperature
Flushing modes DP/Time interval, continuous, super-flush, reduced flow
² Consult Rawson for lower or higher flow-rates.

Automatic, Self-Cleaning Disc Filtration

System
Super Galaxy Series, Battery Design
DESCRIPTION
The Super Galaxy filter is based on Arkal’s SpinKlin disc filtration
technology which is a modular, automatic, self cleaning filter designed
for high flow rates and may be installed either vertically or horizontally.
With its unique grooved disc, depth filtration technology and patented
self cleaning mechanism, SpinKlin filters cover a wide range of industrial,
marine, municipal and agricultural applications from 400 to as fine as 20
micron filtration degrees. Battery is a system of filters that are backwashed
individually. The number of filters in a battery is determined according to the
system designed flow rate and may have between 3 to 6 filters, with 12”- 20”
inlet / outlet diameters.
Operation
Each filter contains multiple filtration spines on which the SpinKlin discs are
stacked. These thin, color-coded polymeric discs are diagonally grooved in
opposite directions on both sides to a specific micron size. When mounted
on the spine, the discs’ grooves form a matrix of consecutive stopping
points letting the water pass through while stopping suspended solids. A
tightening cylinder compresses the discs by a preloaded spring, piston and
differential pressure, ensuring accurate filtration degree with no possibility of F
breakthrough.
FEATURES
• Spin Klin® disc, depth filtration and patented backwash technology
• New design containing 16 spines in one body, all polymeric
• Reduced number of components and modular flexibility
• Corrosion resistant materials
• Minimal maintenance
• Supporting legs with clamps to secure the Super Galaxy on any given manifold pipe size
• Polymeric clamp for the filter housing, allows easy opening without any tools
• Newly designed polymeric connector between the filter pod and the manifold
• Unique clamp for wafer butterfly valve connection for battery systems
APPLICATIONS
• Tertiary (Wastewater) Treatment
• Potable Water Treatment
• Irrigation
Filter Housing Polypropylene
Filter Body Polypropylene
Grooved Disc Polypropylene or Nylon
Backwash mechanism Backwash BF valves air or electrically activated, (main valve 8” and drain valve 4”)
Backwash valve Polypropylene, butterfly valve
Seals EPDM. NBR
Control PLC or as customer specification

Automatic Self Cleaning Disc Filtration

System
Super Galaxy Series, Modular Design
DESCRIPTION
The Super Galaxy filter is based on Arkal’s SpinKlin disc
filtration technology which is a modular, automatic, self
cleaning filter designed for high flow rates and may be
installed either vertically or horizontally. With its unique
grooved disc, depth filtration technology and patented self
cleaning mechanism, SpinKlin filters cover a wide range of
industrial, marine, municipal and agricultural applications
from 400 to as fine as 20 micron filtration degrees.
SpinKlin modules are groups of filters that backwash
together as a complete unit. The number of filters in each
module of a specific system is determined by the system
flow rate and water quality and may have between 2 - 6
filters with 12” - 20” inlet/outlet pipe diameters.
FEATURES
• SpinKlin® disc, depth filtration and patented backwash
technology
F • New design containing 16 spines in one body, all
polymeric
Filter Housing
• Reduced number of components and modular flexibility Polypropylene
• Corrosion resistant materials Filter Body Polypropylene
• Minimal maintenance Grooved Disc Polypropylene or Nylon

• Supporting legs with clamps to secure the Super Galaxy Backwash mechanism Backwash BF valves air or electrically activated
on any given manifold pipe size. Backwash valve Polypropylene, butterfly valve
• Polymeric clamp for the filter housing, allows easy Seals EPDM. NBR
opening without any tools Control PLC or as customer specification
• Newly designed polymeric connector between the filter
pod and the manifold
• Unique clamp for wafer butterfly valve connection for
battery systems
APPLICATIONS
• Tertiary (Wastewater) Treatment
• Potable Water Treatment
• Irrigation


System
4” SK Galaxy
DESCRIPTION
The 4” SpinKlin (SK) Galaxy Series are modular, all
polymeric, automatic disc filters with a patented self-
cleaning backwash mechanism which receive pressurized
backwash water from an internal source. The 4" SK
Galaxy systems' flow rates range from 200 m³/hr (880
gpm) to 3,000 m³/hr (13,200 gpm) with filtration degrees
ranging from 20 – 400 micron. Inlet /Outlet from 200 - 400
mm (8” – 16”) diameter.
FEATURES
• Micron-precise depth filtration of solids
• Innovative disc technology captures and retains large
amounts of solids
• Long-term operation with minimal maintenance
• Easy and simple operation
• Short automatic backwash with regulated water volume MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
for a small water footprint Filter Housing & Lid RPP (Reinforce Polypropylene) & RPA (Reinforce
• Permanently eliminates the need to replace filter media Polyamide)
• Compact design allows flexible foot print design Disc elements PA (Polyamide) or PP (Polypropylene) F
Backwash valves RPP (Reinforce Polypropylene) or RPA (Reinforce
Internal Source Backwash Battery Polyamide)
Manifolds PP (Polypropylene)
Seals NBR or EPDM, (Viton optional)
Control Tubing PE or PA
During filtration mode, flow is (A+B). During Backwash

(BW) mode, each filter unit (pod) sequentially goes into
Backwash.Flow direction is reversed by means of au-
tomatic valves (B). Water is provided to system by the
other filter units in the battery (A-B). The remaining flow
(A) is supplied to the system.


System - Continued
Model 3 unit battery 4 unit battery 5 unit battery 6 unit battery 7 unit battery 8 unit battery
Min. backwash pressure 2.8 bar (30 psi)
Maximum recommended 100µ 300 m³/h (1,321 400 m³/h (1,761 500 m³/h (2,201 600 m³/h (2,642 700 m³/h (3,082 800 m³/h (3,522
flow rate gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm)
Maximum recommended 55µ 150 m³/h (660 200 m³/h (880 250 m³/h (1,101 300 m³/h (1,321 350 m³/h (1,541 400 m³/h (1,761
Maximum recommended 20µ 75 m³/h (330 gpm) 100 m³/h (440 150 m³/h (660 175 m³/h (770 175 m³/h (770 225 m³/h (990
flow rate gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm) gpm)
Available filtration degrees 400, 200, 130, 100, 70, 55, 40, 20 micron
Filtration volume 17,219 cm³ (1,051 22,959 cm³ (1,401 28,698 cm³ (1,751 34,438 cm³ (2,101 40,177 cm³ (2,451 45,918³ cm (2,802
in³) in³) in³) in³) in³) in³)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 200 mm (8”) 250 mm (10”) 250 mm (10”) 300 mm (12”) 300 mm (12”) 350mm (14”)
Dry weight standard 270 kg (594 lb) 350 kg (770 lb) 440 kg (968 lb) 530 kg (1,166 lb) 670 kg (1,447 lb) 770 kg (1,694 lb)
Backwash Data
Valve drain port 80 mm (3”)
Flushing time 20 seconds
F Min. flow for backwash 50 m³/h (220 gpm)


System
4” SK Galaxy EX.S
DESCRIPTION
The 4” SpinKlin (SK) Galaxy EX.S Series are modular,
all polymeric, automatic disc filters with a patented self-
backwash water from an external source. The 4" SK
Galaxy EX.S systems' flow rates range from 200 m³/
hr (880 gpm) to 3,000 m³/hr (13,200 gpm) with filtration
degrees ranging from 20 – 400 micron. Inlet /Outlet from
200 - 400 mm (8” – 16”) diameter.
FEATURES
amounts of solids
• Short automatic backwash with regulated water volume
for a small water footprint
• Permanently eliminates the need to replace filter media
• Compact design allows flexible foot print design
F
• External source backwash is higher energy for low
operating pressure and fine filtration
External Source Backwash Battery
During filtration mode, flow is (A). During BW mode each

filter unit (pod) sequentially goes into BW. Flow direction
is reversed by means of automatic valves, for the filter
BW mode. Filtered water is provided to the system by
external source (B).The remaining flow (A) is supplied to
the system.


System - Continued
Filter Housing & Lid RPP (Reinforce Polypropylene) & RPA (Reinforce Polyamide)
Disc elements PA (Polyamide) or PP (Polypropylene)
Backwash valves RPP (Reinforce Polypropylene) or RPA (Reinforce Polyamide)
Maximum recommended 55µ 150 m³/h (660 200 m³/h (880 250 m³/h (1,101 300 m³/h (1,321 350 m³/h (1,541 400 m³/h (1,761
Maximum recommended 20µ 75 m³/h (330 100 m³/h (440 150 m³/h (660 175 m³/h (770 175 m³/h (770 225 m³/h (990
F Available filtration degrees 400, 200, 130, 100, 70, 55, 40, 20 micron
Filtration volume 17,219 cm³ 22,959 cm³ 28,698 cm³ 34,438 cm³ (2,101 40,177 cm³ 45,918 cm³
(1,051 in³) (1,401 in³) (1,751 in³) in³) (2,451 in³) (2,802 in³)
Inlet/Outlet diameter 200 mm (8”) 250 mm (10”) 250 mm (10”) 300 mm (12”) 300 mm (12”) 350 mm (14”)
Dry weight external 340 kg (748 lb) 440 kg (968 lb) 550 kg (1,210 lb) 650 kg (1,430 lb) 810 kg (1,782 lb) 920 kg (2,024 lb)
source backwash
Backwash Data
Flushing time 15 seconds for external source backwash
Min. flow for backwash 50 m³/h (220 gpm)


System
6” SK Galaxy
DESCRIPTION
backwash water from an internal source.The 6” SK
Galaxy systems' flow rates range from 200 m³/hr (880
gpm) to 3,000 m³/hr (13,200 gpm) with filtration degrees
ranging from 20 – 400 micron. Inlet /Outlet from 200 - 400
mm (8” – 16”) diameter.
FEATURES
amounts of solids
for a small water footprint
• Compact design allows flexible foot print design F
Internal Source Backwash Battery
During filtration mode, flow is (A+B). During Backwash

(BW) mode, each filter unit (pod) sequentially goes into
Backwash.Flow direction is reversed by means of auto-
matic valves (B). Water is provided to system by the other
filter units in the battery (A-B). The remaining flow (A) is
supplied to the system.


System - Continued
Maximum recommended 100μ 360 m³/h (1,585 480 m³/h (2,113 600 m³/h (2,642 720 m³/h (3,170 840 m³/h (3,698 960 m³/h (4,227
Maximum recommended 55μ 240 m³/h (1,057 320 m³/h (1,409 400 m³/h (1,761 480 m³/h (2,113 560 m³/h (2,466 640 m³/h (2,818
Maximum recommended 20μ 120 m³/h (528 160 m³/h (704 200 m³/h (881 240 m³/h (1,057 280 m³/h (1,233 320 m³/h (1,409
F Filtration volume 27,552 cm³ 36,736 cm³ 45,920 cm³ 55,104 cm³ (3,360 64,288 cm³ 73,472 cm³ (4,480
(1,680 in³) (2,240 in³) (2,800 in³) in³) (3,920 in³) in³)
Dry weight standard 540 kg (1,180 lb) 710 kg (1,562 lb) 860 kg (1,892 lb) 1,030 kg (2,266 lb) N/A N/A
Backwash Data
Flushing time 20 seconds


System
6” SK Galaxy EX.S
DESCRIPTION
backwash water from an external source.The 6” SK
Galaxy EX.S systems' flow rates range from 200 m³/
hr (880 gpm) to 3,000 m³/hr (13,200 gpm) with filtration
degrees ranging from 20 – 400 micron. Inlet /Outlet from
200 - 400 mm (8” – 16”) diameter.
FEATURES
• External Source Backwash is higher energy for low
operating pressure and fine filtration degrees.
amounts of solids
for a small water footprint F
• Compact design allows flexible foot print design
External Source Backwash Battery
During filtration mode, flow is (A). During BW mode each

filter unit (pod) sequentially goes into BW. Flow direction
is reversed by means of automatic valves, for the filter
BW mode. Filtered water is provided to the system by
external source (B).The remaining flow (A) is supplied to
the system.


System - Continued
Maximum recommended 20µ 120 m³/h (528 160 m³/h (704 200 m³/h (881 240 m³/h (1,057 280 m³/h (1,233 320 m³/h (1,409
F Filtration volume 31,680 cm³ 42,240 cm3 52,800 cm3 63,360 cm3 73,920 cm3 84,480 cm3
(1,933 in³) (2,578 in³) (3,222 in³) (3,865 in³) (4,511 in³) (5,155 in³)
Dry weight external source 600-630 kg 770-800 kg 970-1,070 kg 1,150-1,270 kg N/A N/A
backwash (1,320-138 lb) (1,694-1,760 lb) (2,134-2,354 lb) (2,530-2,794 lb)
Backwash Data
Flushing time 15 seconds for external source backwash

High Flow Multimedia Filtration System

BMF Series
DESCRIPTION
The PEP BMF Series system is the most rugged high flow
filtration system available in the marketplace today. The
bi-media filter bed traps solid particulate in the filtration
mode, thus increasing the differential pressure across the
filter. When a pre-set differential is hit, the linked valves
are reversed by the pneumatic actuator, and the filter
backwashes and cleans the media. Once the backwash
cycle is complete, the filtration returns automatically to the
filtration mode.
FEATURES
• Virtually unlimited flow rates and pressures to 600 PSI.
ASME code stamp optional.
• Variety of materials including epoxy coated carbon steel
and optional stainless steel.
• NEMA 3R control panel with overload protection, motor
starter and disconnect.
• Retentions of 10. 5 and .5 micron depending on media
selection.
• Standard diameters to 96”. Multiple units optional.
• Mechanically linked butterfly valves for automatic or F
manual backwash.
Components Standard Design Options

Filter Vessel Epoxy coated carbon steel, non-ASME, 50 psig with manual & auto air vents, 100 and 150 psig , ASME code stamp
access ports and drain
Internal Distribution Schedule 80 PVC over drain and under drain
Filter Media Unigran 85 (10 micron) Unigran 55 (5 micron) and Unigran 20 (0.5 micron)
Backwash Initiation Automatic: 24-hour/7-day clock, differential pressure switch and manual push Remote control via BMS
button Manual: single lever
Backwash Source Tower/system water or city/external source water Auto selection dual source
Backwash Duration 3 minutes @ 20 gpm/ft² (field adjustable timer)
Face Piping Schedule 80 PVC Epoxy coated carbon steel or 304 stainless steel
Pump/Motor System matched centrifugal pump with close-coupled TEFC motor
Control Valves Butterfly valve, wafer style with epoxy coated cast iron body and nylon 11 coated
ductile iron disc; EDPM seal
Valve Actuation Pneumatic diaphragm type actuator with fail safe spring-to-close Electric Actuator
Electrical Controls UL listed control panel in NEMA 3R enclosure with lockable access cover, power
disconnect switch, thermal overload protection, and control voltage transformer with
fused protected secondary side.
Supply Power All standard voltages @ 50 or 60 Hz (single and three phase)
Base / Skid Epoxy coated carbon steel I-beam base
Warranty One year against defects in materials and workmanship.

Specialty Equipment • Speed Sensors
Aitek
Passive Speed Sensors

70085 Series
DESCRIPTION
Control and protection circuits have relied on variable
reluctance technology for years. With few components
and no moving parts, the passive magnetic speed sensors
can provide a signal from the inside of an aircraft engine
at temperatures approaching 425°C or from the hub of an
automobile wheel at high shock and vibration.
FEATURES
• High reliability
• Simple installation
• Long life due to no moving parts or contacts
• Self powered operation
• Wide variety of shapes and sizes
• Easy alignment
• Can be designed for almost any environment
Output Output
Thread Sensor
Thread Termination Operating Standard Guarentee
Item Description Termination Length Length
F
Size Length² Temp (deg F) Voltage Voltage
(in) (in)
(P-P) (P-P)
70085-1010-001 General Purpose ⅝ Connector A 1.125 2.25 -67 to 225 40 V 3.4 V
70085-1010-118 General Purpose ⅝ Connector A 5 6.125 -67 to 225 40 V 3.4 V
70085-1010-002 High Sensitivity ⅝ Connector A 1.125 2.25 -67 to 225 150 V 12.9 V
70085-1010-408 High Sensitivity ⅝ Connector A 5 6.125 -67 to 225 150 V 12.9 V
70085-1010-004 Conduit Fitting General Purpose ⅝ Wires 10 ft 1.125 2.125 -94 to 225 43 V 4.3 V
70085-1010-469 Conduit Fitting General Purpose ⅝ Wires 10 ft 2.75 3.75 -94 to 225 43 V 4.3 V
70085-1010-028 Power Output ⅝ Connector A 1.437 2.53 -94 to 225 75 V 21.5 V
70085-1010-078 Full Thread General Purpose ⅝ Wires 12 in 1.812 1.812 -67 to 225 40 V 3.4 V
70085-1010-137 Full Thread General Purpose ⅝ Wires 24 in 2.937 2.937 -67 to 225 40 V 3.4 V
70085-1010-131 Full Thread Power Output ⅝ Cable 10 ft 1.687 1.687 -67 to 225 120 V 15.1 V
70085-1010-214 Full Thread Power Output ⅝ Cable 10 ft 2.937 2.937 -67 to 225 120 V 15.1 V
70085-1010-220 Full Thread High Sensitivity ⅝ Wires 36 in 2.937 2.937 -67 to 225 150 V 12.8 V
70085-8080-003 Full Thread High Sensitivity ⅝ Wires 12 in 1.812 1.812 -67 to 225 150 V 12.8 V
70084-1713-111 Molded High Sensitivity ⅝ Connector A 1.125 2.5 -40 to 302 190 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-421 Molded ⅝ Connector A 2.475 3.6 -67 to 225 63 V 4.9 V
70085-1010-424 Molded ⅝ Connector A 4.493 5.618 -67 to 225 63 V 4.9 V
70085-1010-425 Molded M16 x 1.5 Connector A 3 4.125 -67 to 225 63 V 4.9 V
70085-1010-007 General Purpose ⅜ Wires 6 in 0.812 1.252 -67 to 225 21 V 1.6 V
70085-1010-056 General Purpose ⅜ Wires 6 in 3.625 4.065 -67 to 225 21 V 1.6 V
70085-1010-086 High Sensitivity ⅜ Wires 18 in 0.812 1.252 -67 to 225 55 V 4.2 V
70085-1010-355 High Sensitivity ⅜ Wires 40 in 0.812 1.252 -67 to 225 55 V 4.2 V
70085-1010-041 General Purpose High ⅜ Wires 40 in 0.812 1.252 -99 to 450 24 V 2V
Temperature

Passive Speed Sensors - Continued

Output Output
Thread Sensor
(in) (in)
(P-P) (P-P)
Temperature
Temperature
70085-1010-174 High Sensitivity High Temperature ⅜ Wires 60 in 0.812 1.252 -85 to 32 55 V 3.6 V
70085-8080-001 Full Thread High Sensitivity ⅜ Wires 6 in 1.5 1.5 -67 to 225 55 V 4.2 V
70085-1010-314 Smooth Body High Sensitivity .375 no thd Cable 10 ft 1.375 1.375 -22 to 185 55 V 4.2 V
70085-8080-004 Smooth Body High Sensitivity .375 no thd Cable 6 in 2.5 2.5 -22 to 185 55 V 4.2 V
70085-1010-024 General Purpose High ¼ Wires 8 in 0.687 1 -99 to 450 4.7 V 0.4 V
Temperature
70085-1010-227 General Purpose High ¼ Wires 8 in 1.687 2 -99 to 450 4.7 V 0.4 V
Temperature
70085-1010-472¹ General Purpose High ¼ Wires 60 in 0.687 1.187 -99 to 450 4.7 V 0.4 V
Temperature
70085-1010-182 General Purpose High 10 Wires 18 in 0.5 0.5 -99 to 450 6V 0.3 V
Temperature
70085-1010-289 General Purpose High 10 Wires 18 in 1.25 1.25 -99 to 450 6V 0.3 V
Temperature
70085-1010-037 High Sensitivity 10 Wires 18 in 0.5 0.5 -67 to 225 13 V 0.6 V
F
70085-1010-299 High Sensitivity 10 Wires 18 in 1.25 1.25 -67 to 225 13 V 0.6 V
70085-1010-005 UL/ATEX/CSA ¾ Wires 10 ft 1.875 3.125 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-081 UL/ATEX/CSA ⅝ Wires 10 ft 1.5 2.75 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-327 UL/ATEX/CSA ¾ Wires 10 ft 2.75 4 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-328 UL/ATEX/CSA ¾ Wires 10 ft 4 5.25 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-329 UL/ATEX/CSA ⅝ Wires 10 ft 2.75 4 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-330 UL/ATEX/CSA ⅝ Wires 10 ft 4 5.25 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-411 UL/ATEX/CSA ⅝ Wires 10 ft 1.875 3.125 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-412 UL/ATEX/CSA ⅝ Wires 10 ft 6 7.25 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-413 UL/ATEX/CSA ¾ Wires 10 ft 1.5 2.75 -85 to 32 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-414 UL/ATEX/CSA ¾ Wires 10 ft 6 7.25 -85 to 212 54 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-403 FM/ATEX ⅝ Cable - 1.5 2.75 -67 to 450 90 V 9.4 V
70085-1010-405 FM/ATEX ¾ Cable - 2.75 4 -67 to 450 90 V 9.4 V
70085-1010-406 FM/ATEX ⅝ Cable - 2.75 4 -67 to 428 60 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-415 FM/ATEX ⅝ Cable - 4 5.25 -67 to 450 90 V 9.4 V
70085-1010-540 FM/ATEX ¾ Cable - 4 5.25 -40 to 428 60 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-541 FM/ATEX ¾ Cable - 1.88 3.13 -40 to 428 60 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-542 FM/ATEX ¾ Cable - 2.75 4 -40 to 428 60 V 13.4 V
70085-1010-543 FM/ATEX ¾ Cable - 6 7.25 -40 to 428 60 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-111 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 1.5 2.75 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V

Passive Speed Sensors - Continued

Output Output
Thread Sensor
(in) (in)
(P-P) (P-P)
70085-3030-112 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 2.75 4 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-113 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 4 5.25 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-114 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 6 7.25 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-211 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 1.5 2.75 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-212 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 2.75 4 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-213 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 4 5.25 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-214 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 6 7.25 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-222 IEC EX ⅝ Cable - 2.75 4 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-235 IEC EX M16 x 1.5 Cable - 1.5 2.75 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
70085-3030-237 IEC EX M16 x 1.5 Cable - 1.5 2.75 -85 to 203 54 V 13.4 V
*Output is based on .030" air gap at 500 IPS

¹ Egress is a 2-conductor, AWG #26, shielded Teflon cable with 3" long shrink tubing over housing and cable for extra protection. Extra locknut provided.
² A designates Group A in Connector/Cable Assembly table. Please contact Rawson for more details.

Active Speed Sensors

RH Series
DESCRIPTION
The RH Series consists of single-element based, zero speed, single channel
speed sensors and are an excellent choice for general purpose speed sensing.
FEATURES
• 1 channel output
• Zero speed to 15kHz operation
• Standard gear tooth sensing
• No installation alignment
• General noise immunity
• Lowest cost
Supply
Termination Thread Sensor Operating
Item Description Thread Size Tracking or Termination
Length¹ Length (in) Length (in) Temp (deg F)
TTL
RH1612-013 Hex Body with Cable ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1622-013 Hex Body with Cable ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1612-014 Hex Body with Cable ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1622-014 Hex Body with Cable ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1512-013 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1522-013 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257 F
RH1512-014 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1522-014 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1612-005 Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1622-005 Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1612-006 Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1622-006 Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1612-007 Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector B 4 6.512 -40 to 257
RH1622-007 Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector B 4 6.512 -40 to 257
RH1612-009 Fully Threaded with Leads ¾ TTL Wires 12 in 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1622-009 Fully Threaded with Leads ¾ ST Wires 12 in 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1612-010 Fully Threaded with Leads ¾ TTL Wires 12 in 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1622-010 Fully Threaded with Leads ¾ ST Wires 12 in 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1512-005 Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1522-005 Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1512-006 Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1522-006 Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1512-007 Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector B 4 6.512 -40 to 257
RH1522-007 Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector B 4 6.512 -40 to 257
RH1512-009 Fully Threaded with Leads ⅝ TTL Wires 12 in 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1522-009 Fully Threaded with Leads ⅝ ST Wires 12 in 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1512-010 Fully Threaded with Leads ⅝ TTL Wires 12 in 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1522-010 Fully Threaded with Leads ⅝ ST Wires 12 in 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1612-025 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.375 4.75 -40 to 257

Active Speed Sensors - Continued

Supply
Termination Thread Sensor Operating
Item Description Thread Size Tracking or Termination
Length¹ Length (in) Length (in) Temp (deg F)
TTL
RH1622-026 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1622-027 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1512-026 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1522-026 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
RH1512-027 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1522-027 UL/CSA Explosion Proof Sensors ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
RH1320-001 Fully Threaded ⅜ ST Wires 12 in 1.63 1.63 -13 to 257
RH1320-003 Fully Threaded ⅜ ST Cable 10 ft 1.63 1.63 -13 to 257
RH1320-009 Fully Threaded ⅜ ST Wires 12 in 1.63 1.63 -13 to 257
RH1320-010 Fully Threaded ⅜ ST Cable 10 ft 1.63 1.63 -13 to 257
RH1320-012 Fully Threaded ⅜ ST Cable 10 ft 3 3 -13 to 257
RH1320-005 Round Body ⅜ Dia ST Wires 12 in - - -13 to 257
RH1320-006 Round Body ⅜ Dia ST Cable 10 ft - - -13 to 257
*NOTE: RTD Temperature Sensing Feature

¹ B designates Group B in Connector/Cable Assembly table. Please contact Rawson for more details.

DH Series
DESCRIPTION
The DH Series consists of differential based, zero-speed, precision, single channel,
speed sensors. At power-up they calibrate themselves to the unique magnetic signature
of their installed application and continue to update the calibration as the sensor is
running. A DH sensor can sense each change in target movement, regardless of speed,
from zero to 15 kHz frequency range, generating a steady pulse train of frequency
proportional to target speed.
FEATURES
• 1 channel output
• Fine, 32 DP capability
• Single tooth/valley target
• Extended airgap (0.100" + for 12DP and coarser targets)
• EMI hardened
• High tolerance to target run-out
• Self-calibrating


Supply Thread Sensor
Thread Termination Operating
Item Description Tracking or Termination Length Length
Size Length¹ Temp (deg F)
TTL (in) (in)
DH1512-113 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1522-113 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1512-114 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1522-114 Hex Body with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1612-105 Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1622-105 Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1612-106 Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1622-106 Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1512-105 Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1522-105 Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector B 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1512-106 Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1522-106 Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector B 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1512-107 Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector B 4 6.512 -40 to 257
DH1522-107 Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector B 4 6.512 -40 to 257
DH1512-109 Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1522-109 Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 257
DH1512-110 Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257 F
DH1522-110 Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 257
DH1512-210 Fully Threaded with Cable and Temperature Output ⅝ ST* Cable 10 ft 2.75 2.75 -40 to 257
DH1522-210 Fully Threaded with Cable and Temperature Output ⅝ ST* Cable 10 ft 2.75 2.75 -40 to 257
*NOTE: RTD Temperature Sensing Feature

¹ B designates Group B in Connector/Cable Assembly table. Please contact Rawson for more details.

BH Series
DESCRIPTION
The BH Series of sensors are bi-directional, zero velocity sensors which are self-calibrating to the specific customer
application and provide two independent frequency outputs and a direction signal output to indicate change in direction
of the sensed, ferrous target. The Bi-directional sensor can also be referred to as a dual channel sensor since it utilizes
two Hall Effect sensing elements, physically offset from each other.
FEATURES
• 2 output channels + direction
• Fine, 32 DP capability
• Single tooth/valley target
• No installation alignment
• Extended airgap (0.100" + for 12DP and coarser targets)
• EMI hardened
• High tolerance to target run-out
• Self-calibrating
• Direction sensing


Supply
Thread Termination Thread Sensor Operating
Item Description Tracking or Termination
Size Length¹ Length (in) Length (in) Temp (deg F)
TTL
BH1512-001 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ⅝ TTL Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1512-002 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ⅝ TTL Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1512-013 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1512-014 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1522-001 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ⅝ ST Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1522-002 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ⅝ ST Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1522-013 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1522-014 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1612-001 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ¾ TTL Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1612-002 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ¾ TTL Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1612-013 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1612-014 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1622-001 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ¾ ST Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1622-002 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with 6 Pin Connector ¾ ST Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1622-013 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1622-014 Bi-Directional, Hex Body with Cable ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
F BH1512-005 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1512-006 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ⅝ TTL Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1512-009 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 4 4 -40 to 293
BH1512-010 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ TTL Cable 10 ft 6 6 -40 to 293
BH1522-005 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1522-006 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ⅝ ST Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1522-009 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 4 4 -40 to 293
BH1522-010 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ⅝ ST Cable 10 ft 6 6 -40 to 293
BH1612-005 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1612-006 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ¾ TTL Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1612-009 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 4 4 -40 to 293
BH1612-010 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ¾ TTL Cable 10 ft 6 6 -40 to 293
BH1622-005 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector C 1.5 3.375 -40 to 293
BH1622-006 Bi-Directional, Round Body with Connector ¾ ST Connector C 2.75 4.625 -40 to 293
BH1622-009 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 4 4 -40 to 293
BH1622-010 Bi-Directional, Fully Threaded with Cable ¾ ST Cable 10 ft 6 6 -40 to 293
¹ C designates Group C in Connector/Cable Assembly table. Please contact Rawson for more details.

Specialty Equipment • Tachometers
Aitek
Digital Process Tachometer

Tachpak 30
DESCRIPTION
The TACHPAK 30 computing tachometer is a dual channel instrument.
It measures input frequency and converts the resulting quantities to
an analog output, utility RS485 communication, 2 solid state and 2
mechanical relay functions.
It can be used in rate period or counter mode.
The simplified programming can be done in the field or office via PC/
Windows-based TACHLINK or with the addition of a TACHTROL plus
remote display. Security mode guarantees unauthorized access to
programming changes.
Typically, the new TACHPAK 30 is used with magnetic sensors as a signal
source. However, it may receive sine wave or square wave TTL signals
from any frequency source including phase-shifted frequencies from bi-
directional Hall sensors to indicate change in direction.
FEATURES
• Quicker Response Time - 7.6 ms (analog), 16.5 ms (mech.
Relays), 2 ms (dig. Relays)
• Higher Level of Accuracy - 0.1% (analog), 0.005% (relays)
• Field programmable - With TACHLINK or TACHROL plus
• Digital Configuration - Approaches real time F
• Analog Outputs - 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
• Relays - (2) mechanical Form C,6 A @ 277 Vac, (2) solid state Item Input Power Enclosure
Net
Form A 0.4A @ 60 Vac or DC Weight(lbs.)
T77530-10 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc
• AC or DC power - 80-264 Vac, 50/60 Hz; 12-30 Vdc Standard 0.7
• Digital Display - Will accept (8) TACHTROL plus remote displays T77530-40 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc NEMA-4X 3.5
• 9 Computed Functions T77530-70 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc Explosion Proof 24.0
Digital Input Tachometer

Tachtrol 30
FEATURES
• Quicker Response Time - 7.6 ms (analog), 16.5 ms (mech.
Relays), 2 ms (dig. Relays)
• Higher Level of Accuracy - 0.1% (analog), 0.005% (relays)
• Field programmable - With TACHLINK or TACHROL plus
• Digital Configuration - Approaches real time
• Analog Outputs - 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, -20 to +20 mA
• Relays - (2) mechanical Form C,6 A @ 277 Vac, (2) solid state
Form A 0.4A @ 60 Vac or DC
• AC or DC power - 80-264 Vac, 50/60 Hz; 12-30 Vdc
• Digital Display - Will accept (7) TACHTROL plus remote displays
• 9 Computed Functions
• Display capabilities include two independent output channels Item Input Power Enclosure
Net
Weight(lbs.)
for speed, count period or equation results, Alarm status /
T77630-10 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc Std. Panel Mount 0.9
security, Mode, User defined units for each channel, 128x64 LCD
T77630-40 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc NEMA-4X 4.0
graphics display with backlight.
T77630-70 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc Explosion Proof 42.0

Specialty Equipment • Tachometers
Digital Remote Display For Tachometers

Tactrol® Plus
FEATURES
• An extension of the TACHPAK and TACHTROL lines.
While this device has no intrinsic tachometer function, it is
used as a remote display for TP10 & 30 and TT 10 & 30
• Serves as a gateway with both TT and TP instruments
for secure, remote programming and alarm reset.
• Use as a hub for multiplexing displays.
Item Input Power Enclosure Net Weight(lbs.)

T77810-10 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc Std. Panel Mount 0.6
T77810-40 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc NEMA 4X 3.7
T77810-70 80-264 Vac/12-30 Vdc Explosion Proof 42.0
Tachometer Power Supply Kit with

T-Bus Connector
F FEATURES
• Optional use with all TACHPAK 30 and TACHTROL 30 when more supply
power required.
• Rating: 100-240 VAC/24 VDC/1.5A
• Net weight: 1 lb.
Item:T775/6-PWR SPLY

Specialty Equipment • Pumps
Jet Pumps
Penberthy
Jet Pumps for Pumping Liquids

DESCRIPTION
Pumping liquids using a liquid or gas (steam) motive is one of the most recognized uses of Penberthy jet pumps. These
units can also be used for blending, evacuating, exhausting and priming. These units are self-priming, have no moving
parts and provide a very simple cost effective method of handling a wide variety of liquids and processes. Jet pums are
used for all aspects of water treatment, refrigeration, petroleum, petro chemical, mining and general process industries.
FEATURES
• Simple two-piece construction
• No moving parts to wear out
• No lubrication
• Wide variety of special material to suit the most diverse
applications
• Virtually maintenance free
• Cost effective and inexpensive
• No power or special installation requirements
APPLICATIONS
• Lifting or Elevating Liquids
• Draining Sump or Well
• Blending
• Handing Granular Solids with Liquids
• Boosting Suction Pressure to Centrifugal Pump
• Aeration or Agitation
• Producing the Best Possible Vacuum F
• Priming Centrifugal Pumps
Models Size Availablity Standard Materials

LL, LM, LH 1/2"A-4" Cast: Low Lead Bronze, Iron, Carbon Steel, 316 STS
LL, LM, LH 4" & up Fabricated: Carbon Steel, 316 STS
LL, LM, LH 1/2"A-3" Non-Metallic: PVC, PP, PVDF (Kynar™)
GL, GH 1/2"A-4" Cast: Low Lead Bronze, Iron, Carbon Steel, 316 STS
GL, GH 4" & up Fabricated:Carbon Steel, 316 STS
Ratings
Model¹ LL Low Head LM Medium Head LH High Head GL Low Head GH High Head
Motive (Operating) Medium Liquid Liquid Liquid Steam Steam
Motive Pressure Range 15-200 PSIG 15-200 PSIG 15-200 PSIG 60-150 PSIG 35-150 PSIG
Nominal Operating Medium Pressure² 2 psig (Sp. Gr. 1.0) 1.5 psig (Sp. Gr. 1.0) 1 psig (Sp. Gr. 1.0)
Motive Steam Pressure to Elevate Liquid 50 ft 150 PSIG 75 PSIG
Discharge Head Pressure Range to 50 ft -H2O 40 to 80 ft -H2O 80 ft or more -H2O

Suction Lift³ up to 27 ft-H2O up to 27 ft-H2O up to 27 ft-H2O to 20 ft to 20 ft
Minimum Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) 3 ft-H2O 3 ft-H2O 3 ft-H2O 13 ft 13 ft
¹ For models using liquid as motive medium, values are based on water at Sp. Gr. = 1.0
² PSIG/PSIG of Discharge
³ For models using steam as motive medium, water temp to 120°F
Please see technical brochure on how to calculate NPSH

Jet Pumps for Pumping Gases

DESCRIPTION
Pumping gases using a liquid or gas (steam or air) motive
is an effective means of exhausting, evacuating and
priming and can be used in a wide variety of operations
and industries. These jet pumps offer many advantages
over other methods of moving gases; they have no moving
parts and provide a very simple cost effective method
of handling a wide variety of gases and processes.
Jet pumps are used for all aspects of water treatment,
refrigeration, petroleum, petro chemical, brewing, distilling
and general process industries.
FEATURES
• Simple two-piece construction
• No moving parts to wear out
• No lubrication
• Wide variety of special material to suit the most diverse applications
• Cost effective and inexpensive
APPLICATIONS
• Producing the Best Possible Vacuum
F • Reducing Pressure
• Moving Gases
• Aeration or Agitation
• Priming Centrifugal Pumps
Models Size Availablity Standard Materials

GL, GH 1/2"A-4" Cast: Low Lead Bronze, Iron, Carbon Steel, 316 STS
GL, GH 4" & up Fabricated: Carbon Steel, 316 STS
GL, GH 1/2"A-3" Non-Metallic: PVC, PP, PVDF (Kynar™)
U, L, 2NC 1H-18H Cast: Carbon Steel, Iron Body, 316 STS Nozzle or All 316 STS
Ratings
Model GL GH U L 2NC
Motive medium Steam, Gas Steam, Gas Steam Steam Steam
Motive medium pressure range 60-120 psig (415-830 20-80 psig (140-550 80-200 psig (550-1380 80-200 psig (550-1380 100-200 psig (690-1380
kPag) kPag) kPag) kPag) kPag)
Application range, 6-30 (.18-1.04) 6.5-30 (.2-1.04) 6-12 (.18-.36) 3-6 (.09-.18) 0.5-3 (.002-.09)
inches Hg Abs(kg/cm² Abs)
Functions Evac/Exh/Prime Evac/Exh/Prime Evac/Exh Evac/Exh Evac/Exh

Trebor
High Purity Pumps
High Purity Pumps

Magnum 610
DESCRIPTION
The Magnum 610 was designed with the help of end users
to meet the needs of chemical recirculation applications
with moderate flow rates. It’s a simple, compact design
that utilizes few moving parts for improved serviceability.
This is a highly reliable pump due in part to our patented
non-stall air logic design.
FEATURES
• Completely Non-Metallic Option
• High suction capability (Patented floating PTFE check
valve)
• PTFE/PFA Fluid path
• Non-Penetrated, double layer PFA diaphragm
• Adjustable exhaust muffler (for high Backpressure/Low
Flow)
• Max Flow: 9.5 GPM (36 LPM)
• Max Temperature: 100 °C (212 °F) HOW TO ORDER
• Max Pressure: 60 PSIG (4.1 BAR) Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4
• CE Certified XXXXX XXX XX XX
F
Table 1 Model
610R Magnum 610 Recirculation Pump
610E Magnum 610 External Control Pump
610NM Magnum 610 Non-Metallic Pump
Table 2 Piping Connection
000 ¾” NPT-Without Fluid Port Fittings
F08 ½” Flare Tube Adapter
F12 ¾” Flare Tube Adapter
T12 ¾” PFA Tube Stub-Out
Table 3 Surge Suppressor
00 No Surge Suppressor
85 Model 85 Surge Suppressor – Pump Mounted
95 Model 85 Surge Suppressor – Pump Mounted
Table 4 Options
A0 No Option
A1 Cycle Probe. Requires monitoring device
A2 Quick Change Base
A4 Leak Probes
A6 Remote Exhaust

High Purity Pumps

Magnum 620
DESCRIPTION
The Magnum 620 was designed with innovative thread-
on pump heads to help end-users service this pump
more easily. It’s a completely non-metallic pump with no
tie bolts. In addition, the updated design improved the
pressure capability of the pump for more rigorous process
demands. The newest control style, the 620D, is capable
of delivery and recirculation in applications where system
backpressures are high and fluctuate.
FEATURES
• High backpressure capable (D-Style control only)
• PTFE/PFA Fluid path
• Non-stall air login (Reliable operation in diverse
applications)
• No elastomer O-Ring seals HOW TO ORDER
• Quick release base
• Multiple options for feedback and control
XXXX XXX XX XX
• Max Flow: 11 GPM (41.6 LPM) 620R/E, 10.3 GPM (39
LPM) 620D
• Max Temperature: 110 °C (230°F) 620R/E, 100°C Table 1 Model
F (212°F) 620D 620R Magnum 620 Recirculation Pump
• Max Pressure: 80 PSIG (5.1 BAR) 620E Magnum 620 External Control Pump
• CE Certified 620D Magnum 620 Delivery Pump
Table 2 Fluid Connection
000 1” NPT - No Adapter Fittings
T12 ¾” PFA Tube Stub-Out
00 1” NPT - Without Fluid Port Fittings
40 ½” Flare Tube Adapter
85 ¾” Flare Tube Adapter
Table 4 Options
A0 No Option
A1 Cycle Probe
A2 Remote Exhaust (620R and 620E Only)
A3 Leak Probe (Quantity 2)
A5 End of Stroke Sensor and Leak Probe (620E Only)
A6 Alternate Base 1-Piece Molded Base for 620R and 620D Quick
Release Base for 620E
A7 Cycle Probe and Leak Probe
A8 End of Stroke Sensor with Plugs (620E Only)
A9 End of Stroke Sensor with Cycle Probes (620E Only)
B1 Cycle Probe and Leak Probe with Quick Release Base (620E Only)

High Purity Pumps

Maxim 50
DESCRIPTION
The Maxim 50 is our most widely used pump across many
industries because of its reliability and control features.
The pump was designed to withstand highly aggressive
chemical applications and has been proven to withstand
wear and chemical attack in chemical solutions that
typically form crystals or suspend solids, which shorten
the life of most pumps. In addition, the unique construction
eliminates the need for O-ring seals.
FEATURES
• Diffuser head technology (Optional)
• Non-Penetrated, double layer PTFE diaphragm
• Completely non-metal construction
• Smart pilot technology
• PTFE/PFA Fluid path HOW TO ORDER
• Quick release base Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5
• Max Flow: 13.2 GPM (50 LPM) XXXX XXX XX X XX
• Max Temperature: 180 °C (356 °F) M50R/E/U, 100 °C
(212 °F) M50D
• Max Pressure: 80 PSIG (5.5 BAR) M50D/E/U, 60 PSIG F
(4.1 BAR) M50R Table 1 Model
• CE Certified M50R Maxim 50 Recirculation Pump

M50D Maxim 50 Chemical Delivery Pump
M50E Maxim 50 External Control Pump with End-of-Stroke Probes (2 ea)
M50U Maxim 50 External Control without End-of-Stroke Probes
Table 2 Fluid Connection
000 No Adapter Fitting
B08 ½" Weldable PFA Pipe
F16 1” Flare Tube Adapter
P12 ¾” NPT Adapter Nuts
T12 ¾” PFA Tube Stubout
00 No Surge Suppressor
85 Model SS85 Surge Suppressor-Pump Mounted
95 Model SS95 Surge Suppressor-Pump Mounted
Table 4 Leak Detection
0 No Probe
1 Leak Probes
Table 5 Options
A0 No Option
A2 Cycle Probe
A4 Check Muffler
A6 Polypropylene or PVDF Union Nuts
B2 Remote Exhaust (M50R & M50D only)
B3 Diffuser Head
More Options Available, Contact Rawson for Information

High Purity Pumps

Evolve 55
DESCRIPTION
The Evolve 55 was engineered specifically to meet
the needs of aggressive applications found in modern
chemical processes. We started with the popular, market
proven technology found in our Maxim 50 and created a
pump with a higher operating pressure, a higher flow rate,
improved diaphragm performance, and with the same
small footprint as the Maxim 50. All at a lower price.
FEATURES
• Diffuser head technology
• Restrained, unattached diaphragm patent pending
• PFA/PTFE Fluid path
• Simplified port adapter options
• Smart pilot technology
• Patented Non-stall shuttle system
• Max Flow: 15 GPM (56 LPM)
• Max Temperature: 100° C (212° F)
• Max Pressure: 100 PSIG (0.69 MPa)
• CE Certified
HOW TO ORDER
F PUMP
Table 1 Table 2
XXXX XX
Table 1 Model
E55D Evolve 55 Distribution
Table 2 Options
A0 No Option
HOW TO ORDER
FLUID PORT FITTINGS
(ORDERED SEPARATELY)
Table 3 Table 4 HOW TO ORDER

XXX XXX SURGE SUPPRESSORS
(ORDERED SEPARATELY)
Table 3 Pump Seal

Table 5
O12 FFKM (PERLAST) O-ring Seal
XX
G12 PTFE Gasket Seal
Table 4 Piping Connection Table 5 Surge Suppressor
000 ¾” Pipe Stubout Model SS40 Surge Suppressor
T12 ¾” Tube Stubout Model SS85 Surge Suppressor
F08 ½” Flare Fitting Model SS95 Surge Suppressor
F12 ¾” Flare Fitting
F16 1” Flare Fitting
X12 ¾” Pillar Fitting
P12 ¾” FNPT
YYY Customer Specified
Standard Maxim 50 Fluid Port Fittings also available. Contact your
sales representative for details.

High Purity Pumps

Purus 20
DESCRIPTION
Driven by the needs of process technicians for a
maintenance free, high purity chemical pump, Trebor
designed the Purus 20, which took a revolutionary
approach to PFA injection molding. The approach created
a reliable, leak proof, disposable pump that costs less
than most other company’s rebuild kits. The Purus 20
is well-suited for low flow, chemical waste and transfer
applications where time spent on pump maintenance is
undesirable.
FEATURES
• All PFA/PTFE materials
• Integrated flare fitting (Other options available)
• Compact size
• Welded construction
• Max Flow: 5.30 GPM (20.06 LPM) HOW TO ORDER
• Max Temperature: 120 °C (248 °F)
• Max Pressure: 60 PSIG (4 Bar)
• CE Certified XXXX XXX X XX
F
Table 1 Model
P20F Purus 20 Pump - PFA
Table 2 Controllers
000 No Controller
7F PC7 Controller - PFA
7P PC7 Controller - PP
Table 3 Fluid Fittings
0 ½” Flare
1 ½” Pillar Super 300
2 ½” Tube Stub
Table 4 Options
B0 No Option
B2 Leak Sensor

Specialty Equipment • Chemical Heaters
Trebor
Inline Chemical Heater

IQL
DESCRIPTION
Trebor’s Inline Chemical Heaters are unlike any other
heating technology on the market because of our thin film
on quartz electric resistive technology. That technology,
combined with high purity materials, a quick ramp up time,
crevice-free design, and customizable configurations,
creates reliable and efficient heating that has proven
effective for the past 10 years. Because of the design
simplicity and flexibility, we can accommodate a wide
range of application needs with only two models – a high
temperature version and a low temperature version. These
heaters are well-suited as a plug-and-play design for a
variety of applications, especially with fluids that need to
be heated quickly and at point-of-use.
FEATURES
• Patented sealing technology
• High purity flow path
• Series or parallel configuration
• No purging required
F • Max Flow: 0.53 to 7.40 GPM, (2.01 to 28.01 LPM)
• Max Temperature: 212 °F (100 °C) IQL, 392 °F (200 °C)
IQH
• Max Pressure: 80 PSIG (5.5 BAR)
• CE Certified, Semi S2, Semi S3
HOW TO ORDER
XXX XXXXXXX XXX X X X 00
Table 1 Model Table 4 Low Liquid Level Sensor

IQL IQ Chemical Heater 100 °C A None
IQH IQ Chemical Heater 200 °C B Capacitive
Table 2 Configuration C Optic
03V208S 3 kW, 208 VAC, Single Φ Table 5 Leak Sensor
03V400Y 3 kW, 400 VAC, 3 Φ Wye A N/O 24vdc Conductive
04V208S 4 kW, 208 VAC, Single Φ B N/C 24vdc Conductive
04V400Y 4 kW, 400 VAC, 3 Φ Wye Table 6 Over-Temp Safety Sensor
06V400S 6 kW, 400 VAC, Single Φ A J-Type T/C
06V400D 6 kW, 400 VAC, 3 Φ Delta B PT1000 (RTD)
Table 3 Fluid Connection Table 7 Options
B08 ½” PureBond - ½” Gripper 00 No Option
B12 ¾” PureBond - ½” Gripper
F08 ½” Flare - ½” Flare
F12 ¾” Flare - ½” Flare
X12 ¾” Super 300 Pillar - ½” Pillar
X08 ½” Pillar

Specialty Equipment • Wash Down Equipment
Strahman Valves
Steam and Cold Water Mixing Unit with

Temperature Gauge
M-5000TG and M-5700TG
DESCRIPTION
This unit produces hot water instantly from a steady supply of steam and cold
water. All mixing units-hose stations in the M-5000TG/M-5700TG Series are
equipped with a dial-type gauge that indicates the wash water’s exact temperature.
Users can easily regulate the temperature by turning the unit’s steam and
cold water valves. For added safety, these units shut off their steam source
automatically if the cold water supply falls below 50 psi for any reason preventing
hazardous steam from exiting the unit and causing steam burns.
The Temperature Indicating (TG) models (M-5000TG and M-5700TG) are equipped
with a dial-type gauge that accurately indicates the wash water’s temperature. They
also feature a specially designed blending chamber to thoroughly blend steam and
cold water.
Mounting Options
Wall-Mounted: Mount one inch away from the walls for easy cleanup. Units come
complete with spacers, complete mounting instructions and ⅜” studs for easy
mounting. F
Recessed Series: Designed to conceal mixing unit piping in a stainless steel box for
recessed wall mounting. All exposed parts are stainless steel. These units are ideal
for new construction or other places where concealed piping and good looks are
desirable.
Pedestal Series: Can be mounted anywhere floor piping is available. The pedestal
tube, head and cover are ruggedly constructed of stainless steel, while the mixing
unit is stainless steel, making it ideal where efficiency and good looks are desired.
FEATURES
• Body Materials: Bronze or Stainless Steel
• Mounting Options: Wall, Recessed or Pedestal
• Required Steam Pressure: Low, Medium or High
• Maximum Water Temperature: 200°F
• Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psi
• Required Water Pressure: 50-80 lbs.

Steam and Cold Water Mixing Unit with

Temperature Gauge - Continued
Item Required Steam Pressure GPM Body Material Mounting Valve/Entry
M5000LWG Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Bronze Wall-Mounted Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5000LWA Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Bronze Wall-Mounted Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5000MWG Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Wall-Mounted Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5000MWA Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Wall-Mounted Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5000HWG High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Wall-Mounted Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5000HWA High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Wall-Mounted Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5000LRG Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Bronze Recessed Wall Box Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5000LRA Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Bronze Recessed Wall Box Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5000MRG Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Recessed Wall Box Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5000MRA Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Recessed Wall Box Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5000HRG High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Recessed Wall Box Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5000HRA High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Bronze Recessed Wall Box Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5700LWG Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Stainless Steel Wall-Mounted Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5700LWA Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Stainless Steel Wall-Mounted Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5700MWG Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Wall-Mounted Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5700MWA Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Wall-Mounted Angle Valve/Back Entry
F M5700HWG High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Wall-Mounted Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5700HWA High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Wall-Mounted Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5700LRG Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Stainless Steel Recessed Wall Box Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5700LRA Low (80-95 psi) 5-7 Stainless Steel Recessed Wall Box Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5700MRG Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Recessed Wall Box Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5700MRA Medium (96-130 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Recessed Wall Box Angle Valve/Back Entry
M5700HRG High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Recessed Wall Box Globe Valve/Top Entry
M5700HRA High (131-150 psi) 4 ½-6 Stainless Steel Recessed Wall Box Angle Valve/Back Entry
*Pedestal #2 Series Mounted Units available. Please contact Rawson.

Steam pressure required at installation site to ensure proper operation of mixing unit.
Hose and Nozzle sold seperately.

Hose Assemblies
Hose Assemblies for Mixing Units
DESCRIPTION
All Strahman hoses are assembled with bronze or stainless steel fittings. Some
hoses include stainless steel internal spring assemblies on one or both ends
for added durability and extended hose life. Strahman hoses come standard in
25, 50, 75 and 100 foot lengths. Standard length 50 foot hose supplied for use
on mixing units-hose stations.
Premium Wrapped Hose Assembly

Crafted with precisely woven super-strength cord, Strahman’s premium
wrapped water hose is engineered to provide extreme flexibility and strength,
while remaining lightweight. The hose is covered with Neoprene, making it
resistant to lactic acid and oil, and its unique braided construction resists
kinks and contributes to the hose’s ability, making it as flexible as rope and
practically indestructible. Available in red, white and black . Premium wrapped
hoses are assembled with a ⅝” hose adapter with a ball stop.
Extruded Hose Assembly

Strahman’s Extruded “Yellow” Hose costs less than the standard braided hoses, making it an economical solution for
applications that don’t require premium wrapped construction. The Extruded Hose is flexible, lightweight and easy to
handle, yet it offers the same heavy-duty quality you expect from Strahman. This versatile, ⅝” I.D. hose expertly resists
oil, abrasives, and fatty and lactic acids, and it is designed to handle a wide range of temperatures and work pressures. F
Available in yellow, black and white. Extruded Hose assemblies come with a ¾” male NPT fitting on one end and swivel
adapter on the other end.
Ergonomic Extruded Hose Assembly

This flexible, lightweight ⅝” extruded high pressure hot water hose is made to fit Strahman’s mixing units-hose stations
(M-5000, M-159, M-156N, M-358, M-2000TS, M-5000TS). The Ergonomic Extruded Hose Assemblies come with a ¾”
male NPT fitting on one end and Swivel-Pro adapter on the other end.
Hose I.D. /O.D. Colors Temperature Maximum Minimum Use/Rating

Description Available Rating Working Pressure Burst Code
⅝” I.D. / 1⅛” O.D. Extruded Black, Yellow, White -20 to 200˚F 300 psi 1,500 A
⅝” I.D. / 1⅛” O.D. Red, White, Black -20 to 200˚F 300 psi 1,500 B
Premium Wrapped
Note: When used with mixing-unit hose stations, the maximum pressure rating will be 150 psi.
Note: Do not excessively tighten hose end nut during installation.
USE/RATING CODES:
A: USE - Excellent abrasion resistance, oil, fat and chemical resistance.
B: USE - Oil, fat and chemical resistance.
RATING - General purpose hose for food, water and air with FDA approved tube.
RATING - General purpose hose for food, water and air with FDA approved tube.

Water-Saver Spray Nozzles

M-70, M-70 Low Flow and S-70 Series
DESCRIPTION
This rubber-coated, precision-made nozzle enables the operator to achieve any type of
stream of water — from a soft spray to a strong, straight stream — simply by pressing
the lever. This convenient control of the wash assures better cleaning with a lot less
effort. The Automatic Water Saver Spray Nozzle automatically shuts off the moment
the lever is released, thereby eliminating all waste of water. By purchasing an M-70
Low Flow, you will benefit from reduced water consumption rates and still get the same
modern and innovative engineering principals and premium quality parts found in all of
our products.
FEATURES
• Maximum working pressure: 150 psi (10 bar)
• Maximum recommended operating temperature: 200°F/93°C
• M-70 Series and Low Flow: all bronze construction; S-70 Series: stainless steel
construction
• Available Colors & Model Numbers: Black (M-70, M-70FL, S-70) White (M-75, M-75LF,
S-75) Red (M-77, M-77LF, S-77)
• Long handle design grip for whole hand placement
• Replaceable (heavy duty) rubber cover
• Stainless steel seat design prevents nozzle seat leakage
F • Instant water shut-off when trigger is released
• Optional ½”, ⅝”, ¾” I.D. hose barb, or ¾” GHT swivel or non swivel adapter with
locking ring; bronze or stainless steel
• Intended for water use only; not suitable for steam service
• 1-year limited warranty
M-70 FLOW TEST

PSI Standard Series (gpm) Low Flow Series (gpm)
20 3¼ 2¼
30 4¼ 2¾
40 5⅛ 3¼
50 5⅞ 3¾
60 6¾ 4⅛
70 7½ 4½
80 7¾ 4⅞
90 8¼ 5
100 9 5⅛

Ergonomic Spray Nozzles

Hydro-Pro 150 and Hydro-Pro 150 Low Flow Series
DESCRIPTION
The Strahman Hydro-Pro 150® is constructed with a stainless steel housing for
strength and durability, yet this solid, water saver spray nozzle weighs less than
two pounds, and is ergonomically designed to reduce user fatigue. In addition to
being extremely lightweight, the Hydro-Pro 150® features a patented, locking trigger
mechanism that allows users to lock in a desired spray pattern without having to
maintain pressure on the trigger. Equipped with a waterproof nylon cover that resists
cracks and abrasions.It stays cool even when using water as hot
as 200°F.
Along with these features, when you purchase a Hydro-Pro 150 Low Flow Spray
Nozzle, you willl quickly see a reduction in water consumption and the savings that
are sure to go along with it!
FEATURES
• Maximum working pressure: 150 psi (10 bar)
• Maximum recommended operating temperature: 200°F/93°C
• Standard and Low Flow available in black, white and red
• Available with or without swivel adapter
• Intended for water use only; not suitable for steam service
HYDRO-PRO-150 FLOW TEST
F
PSI Standard Series (gpm) Low Flow Series (gpm)
20 3¼ 2¼
30 4¼ 2¾
40 5⅛ 3¼
50 5⅞ 3¾
60 6¾ 4⅛
70 7½ 4½
80 7¾ 4⅞
90 8¼ 5
100 9 5⅛

Thermostatically Controlled Mixing Unit

M-5000TS
DESCRIPTION
The Model M-5000TS lets you combine steam and cold water to produce hot water
efficiently — without the safety concerns normally associated with steam use. Allowing
for a maximum water temperature of 200°F, the automatic unit includes an easy-to-use
temperature gauge that senses even slight variations to monitor water temperature
accurately. The M-5000TS unit’s hermostatically designed safety shut-off valve
prevents the unit from overheating, and the thermostat is hydraulically formed, liquid-
filled bellows.
FEATURES
• Maximum water temperature: 200°F/93°C
• Minimum discharge water temperature: 100°F/38°C
• Maximum working pressure: 150 psi steam, 80 psi cold water
• Minimum working pressure: 80 psi steam, 50 psi cold water
• Thermostatically designed safety shut-off prevents unit from overheating
• Unit automatically compensates for water pressure fluctuations to maintain desired
water temperature
• Thermostat is hydraulically formed, liquid-filled bellows
• Removable parts for easy cleanup and inspection
• Unit is easily installed
F • All bronze body with bronze, brass and stainless steel internal parts.
Item Body Material Mounting Valve/Entry
M5000TCWB Bronze Wall-Mounted Ball Valve/Top Entry
Hose and Nozzle Sold Seperately

Specialty Equipment • Vibration Switches & Monitors

Robertshaw
Vibration Malfunction Detection Switches

Model 368 Vibraswitch
DESCRIPTION
The 368 pneumatically operated vibraswitch constitutes the most effictive
known method of avoiding costly damage due to mechanical malfunction
of rotating and reciprocating machinery where air is the operating control
medium.
FEATURES
• Acceleration sensitive measures total destructive shock
• 15 psig to 50 psig supply pressure
• Adjustable set point range 0G to 4.5G
• NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure
• Local manual or remote pneumatic reset
• Suitable for hazardous areas
• 20 psi output alaram
SPECIFICATIONS
Inlet Pressure 15-50 psig
Control Pressure (Tripped) 3 psig nominal
Reset Pressure 15-50 psig
Setpoint Range 0-4.5 g (peak), adjustable 1 g per turn
F
Accuracy ± 5% of full range at frequencies 0 to 300 Hz
Shock 40 g @11 ms maximum
System Operating Conditions: Reset - No Flow Tripped - 0.266 SCFM @ 20 psig
Cover Enclosure Materials High impact, ABS Thermoplastic
Base Enclosure Materials Type 360 (Cu Free) Aluminum
Locations used in Hazardous, outdoor, unprotected (NEMA-4)


EURO366 Vibraswitch
DESCRIPTION
The EURO366 Vibraswitch malfunction detector provides maximum
protection from rotating and reciprocating of large motors, pumps or
compressors. It is intended for indoor or outdoor use in hazardous or
non-hazardous areas with ATEX and CE certifications.
FEATURES
• Flame Proof (Explosion Proof)
• Self Powered - No external power necessary
• Local or electric remote reset
• Minimum Maintenance - No moving parts except when set-point is
exceeded
• Optional space heater to prevent condensation
• AC or DC reset coil options
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure Cast aluminum UNI 4514 alloy
Enclosure Classification Flame (Explosion) proof EEx-d-IIA/B/C-T6 IP66
T85° C
F Flame Proof Certification CESI 03 ATEX 186

Enclosure Protection IP66 Standard
Enclosure Sealing Neoprene o-ring
Enclosure Finish Polyurethane painted olive drab
Mounting Location Outdoors, unprotected
External Bolts Stainless steel
Nameplate Stainless steel
Conduits 2 x 3/4" UNI 6125-74 (will accept 3/4 NPT fitting)
Ambient Temperature Limits -30° C to +85° C (-22° F to +185° F)
Humidity To 95% relative humidity @ 37.7° C (100° F)
Shock 40 g @ 11 ms maximum
Vibration Measurement Range (Peak):
Mounted Horizontal 0 to 4.5 g from 0 to 300 Hz
Mounted Vertica 0 to 3.5 g from 0 to 300 Hz
Set Point Adjustment 1 turn per g
Accuracy ± 5% of full range from 0 to 300 Hz
Ambient Temperature Effect ± 10%/55.5° C (132° F) maximum
Reset Coil:
All except 240 VAC coils Duty Cycle 4 minutes ON max, 10 minutes OFF min
240 VAC coil Duty Cycle 1 minute ON max, 10 minutes OFF min
Notes:
1. 3/4" UNI opening will also accept 3/4" NPT fittings.
2. Plug may be discarded if not required.
4. Space heaters are intended to prevent condensation in the enclosure where climate conditions require. Space heaters are not required in most applications.


EURO366G Vibraswitch
DESCRIPTION
The EURO366G Vibraswitch malfunction detector provides maximum
protection from rotating and reciprocating of large motors, pumps or
compressors. It is intended for indoor or outdoor use in hazardous or
non-hazardous areas with ATEX and CE certifications.
FEATURES
• Flame Proof (Explosion Proof )
• Does not require any form of external power to operate.
• Measures total destructive shock, not displacement.
• No moving parts except when set-point is exceeded.
• Instrument is rugged and durable - no wearing parts.
• Reset Manual at unit and choice of remote electrical.
• AC or DC Reset coil options
• IP66 Cast Iron Enclosure for outdoor and indoor use.
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure Cast Iron EN-GJL200
Enclosure Classification Flame (Explosion) proof EEx-d-IIB/C-T6 IP66 T85° C
Flame Proof Certification CESI 03 ATEX 186
Enclosure Protection IP66 Standard F
Mounting Location Outdoors, unprotected
External Bolts Stainless steel
Nameplate Stainless steel
Conduits 2 x 3/4" UNI 6125-74 (will accept 3/4 NPT fitting)
Ambient Temperature Limits -20° C to +40° C (Standard), (Anti-condense painted into enclosure) -40° C to +60° C (Optional)
Humidity To 95% relative humidity @ 37.7° C (100° F)
Shock 40 g @ 11 ms maximum
Vibration Measurement Range (Peak):
Mounted Horizontal 0 to 4.5 g from 0 to 300 Hz
Mounted Vertical 0 to 3.5 g from 0 to 300 Hz
Set Point Adjustment 1 turn per g
Accuracy ± 5% of full range from 0 to 300 Hz
Ambient Temperature Effect ± 10%/55.5° C (132° F) maximum
Reset Coil:
All except 240 VAC coils Duty Cycle 4 minutes ON max, 10 minutes OFF min
240 VAC coil Duty Cycle 1 minute ON max, 10 minutes OFF min
Notes:
1. 3/4" UNI opening will also accept 3/4" NPT fittings.
2. Plug may be discarded if not required.
4. Space heaters are intended to prevent condensation in the enclosure where climate conditions require. Space heaters are not required in most applications.


Models 365A, E365A & 366 Vibraswitches
DESCRIPTION
The 365A/E365A and 366 Vibraswitch malfunction detectors provide
maximum protection for large motors, pumps, compressors and other
rotating or reciprocating equipment by responding to mechanical
malfunctions the instant they occur. Failing bearings, bent shafts,
broken blades, overspeeding and similar malfunctions cause
increased imbalance or high frequency vibration detectable with these
Vibraswitches. The instruments may be wired to actuate an alarm or
cause shutdown before costly damage occurs. They are designed for
maintenance-free service in permanent installations and the 366 is for
installations where weather-resistant enclosures are required.
FEATURES
• Acceleration sensitive—measures total destructive shock
• SPDT or DPDT contact options
• AC or DC remote reset coil
• 365A/E365A for use in hazardous locations (UL & cUL) with explosion-proof and weatherproof enclosure
F • E365A inlcudes CE(ATEX) certification and INMETRO approval
• Model 366 is CSA Certified/NEMA Type 4 & 12 Weatherproof Enclosure
• Optional space heater to prevent condensation


375A & 376A Vibraswitch Series
DESCRIPTION
The 375A and 376A Vibraswitches are identical to the
365A and 366 models, except that they incorporate built-in
electronic circutry for start and/or monitoring time delay
functions for the prevention of false shutdowns resulting
from transient vibrations. All models include provisions for
remote reset. The 375A is FM approved. The 376A has a
NEMA 4 enclosure. Both require 120 VAC power.
FEATURES
• Acceleration sensitive—measures total destructive shock
• Optional rain-shield for unprotected outdoor installations
• Model 375A - Explosion Proof, FM Certified• Model 376A -
Weatherproof Enclosure, NEMA 4 (NEMA 4X option)
• "Start Delay" is often required on machines that start automatically
and exhibit excessive vibration for short periods of time only during
starting• "Monitor Delay" is required on machines that exhibit
excessive vibration of a transient nature which occurs during normal
operation. F
• Solid State Switching-Alarm or shutdown voltage completely isolated
from instrument supply
SPECIFICATIONS
Enclosure:
375A Aluminum, unpainted (standard) FM Approved for Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G
hazardous locations Aluminum, epoxy painted (optional)
376A Aluminum base, unpainted (standard) with ABS thermoplastic cover & Kraton thermoplastic gasket, NEMA 4. Epoxy
painted base (optional), NEMA 4X
Switch Contacts:
Start Delay Only Models SPDT (dry contacts) 5 A at 120 or 240 VAC
Monitor or Start & Monitor Delay Models SPST Triac (solid state contacts) 2 A maximum, 50 mA minimum at 120 VAC only (will not switch DC) Field selectable for
NO or NC operation
Set Point Range:
Mounted Horizontal 0 to 4.5 G (peak)
Mounted Vertical 0 to 3.5 G (peak)
Frequency Range 0 to 300 Hz
Set Point Adjustment 1 G per turn (approximate)
Temperature limits:
Storage -40° to +160° F (-40° to +71° C)
Operating -20 to +140° F (-29° to +60° C)
Shock 75 G @ 11 ms maximum
Supply Voltage 120 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply Power 15 W maximum
Delay Time Accuracy ±30%
Agency Certification:
375A FM Files 0Q7A3.AE & 0R1H7.AE
376A None

Vibration Switch Electronic Monitor

Model 563A Vibraswitch Monitor
DESCRIPTION
The Robertshaw Model 563A Vibraswitch Electronic Monitor is a
microprocessor based supervisory control system designed for use with
Robertshaw Model 365A or 366 Vibraswitch Malfunction Detection Switches.
It may be used with one to eight Vibraswitches and has been programmed
to provide a means of differentiating between valid excessive vibration and
excessive vibration resulting from temporary external disturbances.If the
duration of the excessive vibration exceeds the preset limits, an alarm and/or
shutdown condition is generated by a set of relay contacts.
FEATURES
• Monitors up to eight 365A or 366 Vibraswitches
• Adjustable start delay - 0 to 999 seconds
• Adjustable monitor delay - 0 to 99 seconds
• NEMA 4 (weatherproof) or explosion-proof enclosures
• Eight LED indicators
• 5 amp SPDT alarm/shut down contacts
• Integral manual reset push button
• Optional remote reset PB and/or alarm indicators
• 4 Power supply options-120 VAC, 240 VAC, 24 VDC or 48 VDC
F
SPECIFICATIONS
Timing Accuracy ±5% @ 68° F
Timing Range:
Start Delay 0 to 999 Seconds
Monitor Delay 0 to 99 Seconds
Setting Resolution 1 Second
Operating Temperature -40° F to +160° F (-40° C to +72° C)
Storage Temperature -55° F to +225° F (-49° C to +107° C)
Vibration Limits .0.5G 15 to 100 Hz
Relative Humidity 95% at 100° F

Section Cover page
Cost Advantages
We buy in large volumes and pass the savings onto you. We will arrange an
organization’s purchasing activities to ensure scheduled material delivery to meet the
buyer’s required date and order cycle time requirements.
Flow
Main Index
Flow Meters
Thermal Mass Flow Meters
ABB.............................................................................................................................654
Swirl & Vortex Flow Meters
ABB.............................................................................................................................657
Rotameters/Variable Area Flow Meters
ABB.............................................................................................................................659
Orange Research.......................................................................................................660
Parker Porter...............................................................................................................661
USGI Chemical Feed..................................................................................................667
Turbine Flow Meters
Blancett.......................................................................................................................670
Doppler/Ultrasonic Flow Meters
Dynasonics.................................................................................................................671
Coriolis Flow Meters
ABB.............................................................................................................................678
Differential Pressure Flow Meters
Cone & Wedge Flow Meters
ABB.............................................................................................................................681
Dynamic Flow Computers...........................................................................................682
Orifice Plates
ABB.............................................................................................................................683
Orange Research.......................................................................................................685
Pitot Tubes
ABB.............................................................................................................................686
Air Monitor Corporation...............................................................................................689
Electromagnetic Flow Meters
ABB.............................................................................................................................693
Flow Transmitters, Monitors & Computers

Blancett.......................................................................................................................695
Dynamic Flow Computers...........................................................................................696
Air Monitor Corporation...............................................................................................700
Sight Flow Indicators
Penberthy...................................................................................................................705
653
Flow • Thermal Mass Flow Meters
ABB
Flow Meters
Thermal Mass Flowmeter

Sensyflow FMT200-D
DESCRIPTION
Sensyflow FMT200-D is ABB's compact specialist for basic
compressed air systems. With a turndown ratio of 1:100,
it allows metering and leakage detection together in one
instrument.
FEATURES
• Direct mass and standard flow measurement of compressed air, nitrogen and biogas
• Flow measurement independent of operating pressure and temperature
• Leakage detection in pipe systems
• Accuracy < 2% of rate
• Low pressure drop < 10 mbar
• Measured value display starting at 0 Nm3/h
• Quick response time < 0.5 s
• Negligible pressure loss
• No moving parts, no wear, maintenance-free
• Easy installation via screwed or flanged pipe components
• Weld-on adapters for larger meter sizes
• Compact unit with signal output on sensor head

Sensyflow FMT200-ECO2
G
DESCRIPTION
Sensyflow FMT200-ECO2 is a compact, highly dynamic measuring system
for direct mass or standard volume measurement in pneumatic applications
such as paint robot control, compressed air systems, machines for gas
dosing and burner control. The device consists of an easy to install pipe
component which accommodates the sensor unit and the evaluation
electronics. It directly provides a linearized output signal, and it is calibrated
and immediately ready for use. A standard RS 232 interface allows you
to change over between the individual output signals (current, voltage,
frequrency, pulse and alarm) and to configure the device.
FEATURES
• Compact and arbitrary mounting
• Response time < 25 ms
• Highly modular process connections
• Ex version for Zone 2 and Zone 22
• Wide measuring range of 1:100
• Variable process connections include flanges, threads, tubes
• Output signals: Current, voltage, frequency, pulse, alarm, parameter setting via RS 232 interface
• PC application software available


Sensyflow FMT400-VTS/-VTCS
DESCRIPTION
Sensyflow FMT400-VTS/-VTCS is a compact mass flow meter for gases and gas mixtures.
The 24 V powered instrument supplies 0(4) to 20 mA directly from the sensor head. Sensyflow
pipe accessories ensure the sensor is located in the optimum position within the process.
Versions
The FMT400-VTS offers user-friendly installation with a maximum temperature of 572°F
and maximum pressure of 580 psi. This version is suitable for harsh conditions in process
applications due to its rugged design. Sensyflow pipe accessories come either as partial
measuring section, in wafer form or as weld-on adapter for pipe diameters up from DN 150.
The Sensyflow FMT400-VTCS is a hygienic design made of all stainless steel with a maximum temperature rating
of 302°F and maximum pressure range 145 – 232 psi. The hygienic design allows CIP and SIP cleaning procedures
without removing the sensor from the process. With only 120 mm insertion length, it is more compact than the Sensyflow
FMT400-VTS. Pipe components with DIN11851 threads or FG flanges are available from DN 25 to DN 80.
FEATURES
• Direct mass flow measurement of gases
• 0(4) to 20 mA directly from the sensor
• No additional pressure and temperature compensation
• Wide measuring range up to 1:100
• Certifications: CSA, DVGW, CE, Ex Zone 2
• Process gas calibration with clean gases and gas mixtures
• Quick response time ≤ 0.5 s
• Defined and reproducible mounting position in the middle of the pipeline G
• Pipe components for DN 25 ... DN 200 (1 ... 8")
• Weld-on adapters for larger diameters and rectangular ducts
• Reliable and convenient hot tap fittings
• Approvals for explosion protection: ATEX zone 2 / 22 version: -20 ...130 °C (-4 ... 266 °F)

Sensyflow FMT500-IG
DESCRIPTION
Sensyflow FMT500-IG is a digital mass flow meter for air, gases and gas mixtures in process
applications. The system is supplied with LCD display, integrated gas temperature measurement
and totalizer functions. Communication and configuration is via the PROFIBUS DPV1 protocol
or analog output/HART. Compact and remote versions allow for flexible mounting solutions.
ATEX certified versions for Zone 0 and 1 applications are available.
FEATURES
• Easy Set-up menu for user-friendly commissioning
• Various alarm and limit value functions, status and diagnostic signals
• Gas temperature measurement
• The flowmeter provides the measuring signals either as analog/HART or PROFIBUS signals (depending on the
version)
• Certificates: ATEX/GOST for zone 0, FM/CSA, DVGW


Sensyflow FMT700-P
DESCRIPTION
Sensyflow FMT700-P is the high end product offering of the
Sensyflow series. It supplies best accuracy together with an unrivalled
response time of only 12 ms. Sensyflow FMT700-Psupplies analog
and digital output signals and allows direct connection to ASAM-GDI
conformance measuring systems.
FEATURES
• For air in test bench applications
• Maximum accuracy: < 1% of rdg
• Extremely short response time: T63 ≈ 12 ms
• Huge turn-down ratio: 1:40
• Analog and serial interface
• User-friendly handling
• Perfect quick fit pipe setup
• Wide range of mounting accessories
• Measuring ranges DN 25 to DN 200
• Separate supply/evaluation unit with display, diagnostic functions and various signal outputs
• Used in quality assurance, test bench applications, research and development
• Complete system with inlet/outlet runs, flow conditioner and links
FlowMeter Application Table

G Key Applications Features
Recommended
Nominal Rangeability
Piping Requirements
Limited Applicability
Reynolds Numbers
Nominal Upstream
Optimal Accuracy
Not Recommended
Viscous Liquid
Type of Output
Pressure Loss
Size Available
N None
Relative Cost
Maintenance
Clean Liquid
Dirty Liquid
Limitations
Installation
Clean Gas
L Low
Corrosive
Dirty Gas
Slurries
M Medium
Steam
H High
Orifice Plate > 1” 3/4% 3/1 > 30000 H L 10-30D M-H M-H √
Integral Orifice 1”, 1.5” 2% 3/1 > 10000 H L 10-30D L M-H √
Wedge > 0.5” 1/2% 3/1 > 500 M M 5-10D L L √
Flow Nozzle > 2” 1-1/2% 3/1 > 75000 H M 10-30D M L √
Venturi Tube > 2” 1% 3/1 > 75000 L H 5-10D M L √
Pitot Tube > 0.5” 1% 3/1 > 40000 L L 10-30D L L √
Magnetic > 1” 1/2% 10/1 None L H 5D H M Linear
Rotameter ≤ 3” 2% 10/1 None M L None L L Linear
Turbine > 0.25” 1/2% 10/1-50/1 ≤ 2-15 cSt H M 10-20D L M-H Linear
Vortex Shedding > 1” 1% 20/1 > 10000 M M 15-25D L-M M Linear
Doppler > 0.5” 2-5% 1-/1 None L M 5-20D L L Linear
Ultrasonic/Transit Time > 0.5” 2-5% 10/1 None L M 5-20D L L Linear
Mass Coriolis > 0.5” 1/4% 25/1 None M H None H L-M Linear

Flow • Swirl & Vortex Flow Meters
ABB
Swirl Flowmeter
FS4000
DESCRIPTION
The FS400 Swirlmeter design provides high performance
and reliable measurement of liquid, gas and steam. The
swirl flowmeters use a specific frequency measurement
principle which provides high accuracy of 0.5% and low flow
measurement capability. Additionally, ABB’s swirl flowmeters
help you save up to 80% installation space, because only
shortest upstream and downstream sections are required,
typically 3 x DN/1 x DN.
The system has a freely configurable, two-line LC display for

the actual flow rate and totalization. Settings can be changed
directly via 3 push buttons or via magnet sensors with closed
housing. Additional to the 4-20mA analog signal a freely
configurable switching output is already available. This can
be used universally as pulse output, high-low alarms or for
system supervision. The FS4000 is available as compact or
remote design with 10m cable length.
FEATURES
• Size spectrum: DN 15 (1/2”) to DN 400 (16”)
• Accuracy: max. ± 0.5 % of measured value for liquids, gases and steams.
• High dynamic measuring range 1:25
• DSP converter with most modern digital filter technology for the safe detection of also weakest sensor signals
• Optionally integrated PT100 e.g. for very economic mass flow-measurement of saturated steam or for temperature
monitoring/alarms.
G
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy for liquids ± 0.5% of rate
Accuracy for gases and steam ± 0.5% of rate
Process connection/meter sizes
Flange design DN 15 (1/2") - DN 400 (16")
Media temprature -55 °C to +280 °C (-67 °F to 536 °F)
Media viscosity max.30cP
Required straight pipe runs
Upstream section 3xDN
Downstream section 1xDN

Flow • Swirl & Vortex Flow Meters
Vortex Flowmeter
FV4000
DESCRIPTION
The robust vortex flowmeters FV4000 provide reliable measurement of liquid,
gas and steam and are available in flange-mount and wafer-type designs. As
the sensor is placed in the path of the fluid, no particle build-up or deposits
affect the measurement. Due to its high measuring dynamic and accuracy and
its low installation cost the wafer-type design with an insertion length of 65 mm
(DIN-version) is the perfect alternative to orifice plate flowmeters.
The system has a freely configurable, two-line LC display for the actual flow
rate and totalization. Settings can be changed directly via 3 push buttons or via
magnet sensors with closed housing. Additional to the 4-20mA analog signal
a freely configurable switching output is already available. This can be used
universally as pulse output, high-low alarms or for system supervision. The
FV4000 is available as compact or remote design with 10m cable length.
FEATURES
• Size range flange: DN 15 (1/2”) to DN 300 (12”), wafer: DN 15 (1/2”)
to DN 150 (6”)
• DSP converter with most modern digital filter technology for the safe
detection of also weakest sensor signals
• Very robust and simple primary
• Optionally integrated PT100 e.g. for very economic mass flow-
measurement of saturated steam or for temperature monitoring/
alarms
• DIN-wafer instruments in dazzle-compatible installation length (65
G mm) for easy replacement of standard orifices
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy for liquids ± 0.75% of rate
Accuracy for gases and steam ± 1% of rate
Process connection/meter sizes
Flange design DN 15 (1/2") - DN 300 (12")
Water type design DN 25 (1") - DN 150 (6")
Media temprature -55 °C to + 400 °C (-67 °F to 750 °F)
Media viscosity max.7.5cP
Required straight pipe runs (mimnimum sections, depending on the installation)
Upstream section 15xDN
Downstream section 5xDN

Flow • Rotameters/Variable Area Flow Meters
Metal Cone Variable Area Flowmeter

ABB
VA Master FAM540
DESCRIPTION
They can be utilized for measuring the flow of liquids, steam and gases,
especially when aggressive or opaque fluids are to be metered, or where
glass tube variable area flowmeters are not appropriate for safety reasons.
They are indispensable where high pressure and/or high temperature
operating conditions exist. The stainless steel primaries as well as the
PTFE liner primaries are proven in many applications even under hardest
conditions. Available as analog indicator with or without alarms as well as
electronic transmitter with 4-20 mA , HART and NAMUR contact outputs
and with an optional graphical display. They can be used in all hazardous
areas in flameproof, intrinsic safety or non-sparking design.
There are 4 primary instrument designs in the FAM540 Family: FAM541

Standard-line with flange connections, FAM544 Hygienic design, FAM545
with PTFE-liner for aggressive fluids and FAM546 with a steam jacket for
temperature sensitive fluids
FEATURES
• Graphic, 2-line display
• Magnet stick operation
• Configuration also possible with closed housing
• Easily adjustable for new operating conditions
• Short, straight-through design for easy installation
• Optional: 4 to 20 mA transmitter output, minimum ±/or maximum alarms, graphical display, HART communications
• Approvals for explosion protection include ATEX, IECEx, FM and CSA
G
APPLICATIONS
• Deionization, water purification, waste water treatment
• Gas sampling systems, nitrogen generators
• Power utility applications, cooling water, burner control
• Corrosive liquids, chemical injection
• Food and beverage applications
SPECIFICATIONS
Model FAM541 (Standard design) FAM544 (Hygienic design) FAM545 (PTFE liner design) FAM546 (Heating jacket design)
Measured value error 1.6 % qg = 50 % 1.6 % qg = 50 % 2.5 % qg = 50 % 1.6 % qg = 50 %
VDE / VDI 3513 VDE / VDI 3513 VDE / VDI 3513 VDE / VDI 3513
Reproducibility 0.25 % of measured value
Process connection Flange acc. to DIN, Thread DIN 11851, SMS Flange acc. to DIN, Flange acc. to DIN,
ASME, JIS, female thread 1145 ASME, JIS ASME, JIS
Connection meter sizes DN 15 (1/2")...DN 100 (4") DN 25 (1")...DN 100 (4") DN 25 (1")...DN 80 (3") DN 25 (1")...DN 100 (4")
Max. temperature of measured medium 400 °C (752 °F) 140 °C (284 °F) 120 °C (248 °F) 400 °C (752 °F)
Max. pressure rating PN 400 / class 2500 PN 40 PN 40 / class 300 PN 100 / class 600
Indicator / transmitter
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP 65 / 67; NEMA 4X
Indicator, mechanical Analog indicator without limit signal transmitter; analog indicator with limit signal transmitter
Indicator, electronic Analog indicator with transmitter (4 ... 20 mA), with / without LCD display
Communication HART protocol (with transmitter only)
Supply power Without, for analog indicator without limit signal transmitter 8 V DC via isolated switch amplifier, for analog indicator with limit
signal transmitter 10 … 46 V DC (Ex: 10 …30 V DC), for analog indicator with transmitter

Orange Research
High Flow Variable Area Meters

2200/2300/2400 Series
DESCRIPTION
The variable-area flowmeters are designed for liquid or gas applications where
rotameters often fall short. These models have large dials with bold markings
and characters that are easy to read from a distance. They also handle high
line pressures and can be mounted in any orientation. Like rotameters, they are
mounted directly in the flow stream, but with bodies machined from solid blocks
of metal, they handle high-pressure applications of up to 5000 psi (vs 150 psi for
rotameters). This makes them a natural for hydraulic systems.
FEATURES
• Large, easy-to-read dial
• Rugged, high line pressure design
• Vertical or horizontal mounting
• 0-1 to 0-30 GPM (liquid)
• 1.5-10 to 1-100 SCFM (gas)
SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy F.S./
Flow Range
Repeatability)
Type Max. Line Electrical
Model Type Porting Turndown*
Description Press/Temp Air & Available**
Liquids Air & Gas Liquids
Gas
FG Flow Gauge Only 1.5-10 to 3-25

2221 0-1 to 0-5 GPM (0- 1/4” 3000 1 or 2
FGS Flow Gauge with Switch SCFM (40-280 to 2%/1% 5%/1% 10:1
3.8 to 0-19 LPM) NPT psig/200°F switches
FT Flow Switch Only 75-700 SLPM)
1 or 2
FGS Flow Gauge with Switch switches;
1.5-10 to 3-25
G 2223
FS
FGT
Flow Switch Only
Flow Gauge with Transmitter
0-1 to 0-5 GPM (0-
3.8 to 0-19 LPM)
SCFM (40-280 to
1/4”
NPT
5000
psig/200°F
2%/1% 5%/1% 10:1
1 relay
transmitter;
75-700 SLPM)
FT Flow Transmitter Only NEMA 4X
Class 1-Div. 2
0-1 to 0-10 GPM
FG Flow Gauge Only 4-30 to 10-100
2321 (0-3.8 to 0-38 1/2” 3000 1 or 2
FGS Flow Gauge with Switch SCFM (100-850 2%/1% 5%/1% 10:1
LPM) NPT psig/200°F switches
FS Flow Switch Only SLPM)
1 or 2
FGS Flow Gauge with Switch 0-1 to 0-10 GPM switches;
4-30 to 10-100
FS Flow Switch Only (0-3.8 to 0-38 1/2” 5000 1 relay
2323 SCFM (100-850 2%/1% 5%/1% 10:1
FGT Flow Gauge with Transmitter LPM) NPT psig/200°F transmitter;
SLPM)
FT Flow Transmitter Only NEMA 4X
Class 1-Div. 2
FG Flow Gauge Only 0-10 to 0-30 GPM

1500 1 or 2
2421 FGS Flow Gauge with Switch (0-38 to 0-115 - 1” NPT 2%/1% - 10:1
psig/200°F switches
FS Flow Switch Only LPM
1 or 2
0-10 to 0-30 GPM switches;
FGS Flow Gauge with Switch 1500
2423 (0-38 to 0-115 - 1” NPT 2%/1% - 10:1 1 relay
FS Flow Switch Only psig/200°F
LPM transmitter;
NEMA 4X
*Turndown results in 1st mark at approximately 10% of full scale

**NEMA 4X switch models have a 1/2 inch NPT conduit port as standard. A DIN 43650A-PG11 with mating connector is optional, rated IP65 & NEMA 4X

Parker Porter
Metal Tube Variable Area Flowmeter

P100 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker P Series metal tube variable area flowmeters (armored rotameters)
feature a robust design particularly suited for severe duty applications
where safety is a concern. The P100 Series, with welded stainless steel
construction and a maximum pressure rating of 4000 PSIG (1500 PSIG
with Valve) is ideal for low flow, high pressure applications. Hastelloy® and
Monel® construction is available for corrosive media applications.
FEATURES
• 316L or Hastelloy® C-276 welded parts
• Max temperatures range from 275°F to 400°F
• Optional Inductive Slot Sensor Alarm
• Scales can be produced in any volumetric unit
• Percent of maximum flow rate scales (gases and liquids) is also available
• Certified calibrations conforming to ISA RP 16.6 available
• 304 stainless steel rear mounting bracket is available
• 4000 PSIG maximum pressure
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials
Metering Tube 316L Stainless Steel Hastelloy®C-276 and Monel®
Internal Components 316L Stainless Steel Hastelloy®C-276 and Monel®
Inlet/Outlet ¼" FNPT, Horizontal Control valve
316L Stainless Steel Hastelloy®
Fitting Material
C-276 and Monel®
Connection Type ¼" FNPT
Scale
Elastomers (valve meters only)
Plastic
Standard Optional Viton® Buna, EPR, and Kalrez®
G
Case and Side Cover Die Cast Aluminum
Performance
Water Capacities .16 to 25 GPH; .6 to 95 LPH
Air Capacities 1 to 120 SCFH; 28.3 to 3400 SLPH
Scale 60 mm (2") Direct reading
Accuracy ±5% of Full Scale Flow
Turndown 10:1 to 12.5:1, unless otherwise indicated
Repeatability 1%
EPR 300°F (149°C)
Buna 275°F (135°C)
Maximum Temperatures O-Ring
Viton® 350°F (177°C)
Material
Kalrez® 400°F (204°C)
No O-ring 400°F (204°C)
Valve models 1,500 psig
Maximum Pressures
Non-valve models 4,000 psig
Ambient Temperature 33°F to 400°F (1°C to 204°C)
Options
Alarm Single, Inductive Slot Sensor
Certified Conform to ISA RP 16.6
Calibrations Scales Can be produced in any volumetric unit
Rear Mounting Bracket 304 Stainless Steel

Metal Tube Variable Area Flowmeter - Continued

P710 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker P Series metal tube variable area flow meters (armored rotameters)
feature a robust design particularly suited for severe duty applications where
safety is a concern. P710 Series flow meters utilize a float and tapered tube
design which offers longer, more linear scales, better pointer stability and greater
accuracy than competitively priced products. Available 4-20mA transmitter adds
versatility. There is an Inductive Slot Sensor alarm available as an option. Like
inductive ring sensors, slot sensors are 2-wire, DC, low-current devices and are
designed to be used with a remote intrinsic safety barrier/switch isolator. Single or
dual slot sensors are available for the P710 Series
FEATURES
• 316L metering tube and internal components
• 304 stainless steel housing
• Max. Pressure: 1500 PSIG (with NPT connections)
• Inductive slot sensor alarm is available as an option
• Viton®, Buna, EPR and Kalrez® elastomers available
• Vertical NPT or flanged process connections
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials
Metering Tube 316L Stainless Steel
Internal Components 316L Stainless Steel
Inlet/Outlet Fittings 316L Stainless Steel NPT or Flange, Vertical
G Fitting Material 316L Stainless Steel
Standard: Viton®
Elastomers
Optional: Buna, EPR, and Kalrez®
Performance
Water 33 GPH to 450 GPM
Capacities
Air 4 to 100 SCFM
Scale 120mm Direct reading, detachable
Repeatability 1%
EPR 225°F (107°C)
Buna 275°F (135°C)
Max. Temp. for O-Ring Material
Viton® 350°F (177°C)
Kalrez® 400°F (204°C)
Max. Temp. for NPT Fitting 1,500psi
Temp 150# 300# 600#
Max. Pressures for SS Flange 200°F 225psi 600psi 1,200psi
Class 300°F 200psi 540psi 1,100psi
400°F 180psi 515psi 1,000psi
Options
Single or Dual Inductive Slot Sensor, 4-20mA
Alarm
Transmitter
Certified Calibrations Conform to ISA RP 16.6
Scales Can be produced in any volumetric unit

P750 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker P Series metal tube variable area flow meters (armored rotameters)
feature a robust design particularly suited for severe duty applications where
safety is a concern. P750 Series flow meters are constructed from 316L
stainless steel and feature flange connections, elastomer free all welded
construction and an end to end length of 250mm. An available 4-20 mA
transmitter option adds versatility.
FEATURES
• 316L Stainless Steel metering tube
• Max temperature: 400°F (204°C)
• Max Pressure: 600 PSIG (see specifications)
• Certified calibrations conforming to ISA RP 16.6
available
• All welded construction, no O-rings or gaskets
• Optional single or dual inductive slot sensor alarm
• Standard 250mm end to end dimension
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials
Metering Tube 316L Stainless Steel
Overall Length 250 millimeters
Internal Components 316L Stainless Steel
Inlet/Outlet Fittings 150# or 300# Flange, Vertical
Indicator Housing 304 Stainless Steel
G
Flange Material 316L Stainless Steel
Performance
Water: 33 GPH to 16.5 GPM
Capacities
Air: 2.2 SCFM to 76 SCFM
Scale 120 mm Direct reading, Detachable
Turndown 10:1
Repeatability 1%
Maximum Temperature 400°F (204°C)
Temp 150# 300#
200°F 225 psi 600 psi
Max. Pressure for SS Flange Class
300°F 200 psi 540 psi
400°F 180 psi 515 psi
Options
Single or Dual Inductive Slot Sensor,
Alarm
4-20 mA Transmitter

P800 Series
DESCRIPTION
The P800 Series Metal Tube Variable Area flow meter is a simple yet highly
accurate compact flow meter conforming to the latest industry standards.The meter
comes standard with 316L stainless steel wetted materials making it suitable for
process environments. The industry standard 250 mm face-to-face dimension on
the P800 simplifies piping design, resulting in engineering and installation space
savings as well as retrofit capability for other manufacturers.
FEATURES
• Standardized face-to-face dimensions for all sizes from
½" to 6", enables system design efficiencies
• Suitable for the measurement of liquids, gases and
steam in a variety of demanding industrial applications
• For electronics, intrinsically safe design is availablet
• Local indication included as standard
• Other options include:
• 4-20 mA output
• HART communication
• Alarm contacts
SPECIFICATIONS
• Scales can be produced in any volume unit or mass flow
units
Flange 316L Stainless Steel
• Intrinsically Safe Exi (ATEX, FM)
Tapered Tube 316L Stainless Steel
Dampener Float Guide 316L Stainless Steel
All units for gas measurement are equipped with dampeners Float 316L Stainless Steel
as a standard. A dampener can be added to products for liquid Housing Support 316 Stainless Steel
G applications with pulsation. Stop Ring 316L Stainless Steel
The dampener should not be used for such measuring Indicator 12 Aluminum Die Cast
substances such as chlorine gas, which tend to form chemical Flow Rate Scale Ranges
compounds, and fluids that contain rust, debris and oil.
Water¹ Minimum: 0.2 - 8 Gal/min (0.7 - 31 L/hr)
The dampener replaces the upper float guide. Maximum: 220 - 440 Gal/min (833 - 1667 L/min)
Air² Minimum: 42 - 1589 ft³/h (1.2 - 45 m³/h) (nor)
Maximum: 13773 - 21189 ft³/h (390 - 600 m³/h) (nor)
Turndown 10:1
Accuracy ±1.5% F.S.
Approx. Weight 5.5 - 40 lbs. (2.5 - 18 kg)
Indicator Construction IP 65 equivalent to NEMA ¹²/₁₃
Output Signals 1 Point Reed Switch Alarm, 4-20 mA and HART
Operating Conditions
Max. Operating At ambient temperature: 595 psig (41 barg)
Pressure At 248°F (120°C): 479 psig (33 barg)
Oper. Fluid Temp. Local Indication Model: -4°F - +572°F (-20°C - +300°C)
Range Transmitter Model: -4°F - +391°F (-20°C - +200°C)
Oper. Ambient Temp. Local Indication Model: -58°F - +212°F (-50°C -
Range +100°C)
¹ Liquid equivalent to water density 1.0g/cm3, viscosity 1.0cp
² Gases equivalent to Air @ 0°C 1 atm

Glass Tube Variable Area Flowmeter

P430 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker P Series glass tube flowmeters deliver unsurpassed performance and value
in a wide variety of gas and liquid applications. P430 Series flow meters feature
borosilicate glass tubes with stainless steel frames and horizontal connections and
are available with 65mm and 150mm scale sizes. Available fiber optic or inductive
ring sensor alarms, as well as integrated metering valves, provide the needed
versatility for many industrial process and sample handling applications.
FEATURES
• Borosilicate glass metering tube
• Max temperature:250°F (121°C) for gases 200°F (93°C) for liquids
• Max Pressure: 200 PSIG (see specifications)
• Optional inductive ring and fiber optic alarm sensors available
• Direct reading detachable scales available in any volumetric unit
SPECIFICATIONS
Materials
Metering Tube Borosilicate Glass
Internal Components 316L Stainless Steel, Black Glass, Sapphire, Carboloy,Tantalum
Inlet/Outlet Fittings ⅛" and ¼" FNPT, Horizontal Control Valve Optional
Fitting Material 316L Stainless Steel
Elastomers Standard: Viton® Optional: Buna, EPR, and Kalrez®
Performance
Capacities Water .72 to 1,800 cc/mn
Air 66 to 70,000 cc/mn G
Scale 65mm, 150mm Direct reading, detachable
Accuracy 65mm: ±6% of FullScale Flow
150mm: ±4% of Full Scale Flow
Repeatability 1%
Gases 250°F (121°C)
Maximum Temperature
Liquids 200°F (93°C)
316L SS Fittings 200 psig
Maximum Pressures PVC Fittings 130 psig
PVDF Fittings 150 psig
Options
Alarm Fiber Optic or Inductive Ring Sensor (see details)

Acrylic Tube Variable Area Flowmeter

P520 & P530 Series
DESCRIPTION
Parker P520 and P530 Series acrylic flowmeters are constructed to the same high quality
standards as the entire P series line. They represent a cost effective alternative to glass tube
flowmeters in less critical applications.The economical machined cast acrylic block construction
is ideal for OEM use and the P530 Series includes an inlet precision metering valve for
applications requiring flow control.
FEATURES
• Brass, PVC or stainless steel process connections
• Metering tube of machined cast acrylic
• Max temperature: 130°F (54°C) for liquids 100°F (38°C) for gases
• Capacities: 7 GPH to 20 GPM for water 2.6 SCFH to 60 SCFM for air
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Number P520 P520 P530 P530
Block Number 2C 3C,5C,6C, 7C 2C 3C, 5C, 6C, 7C
Meter Tube Cast Acrylic Cast Acrylic Cast Acrylic Cast Acrylic
Fittings Brass*, 316L SS PVC*, Brass, 316L SS Brass*, 316L SS PVC*, Brass, 316L SS
O-Rings EPR*, Buna, Viton® EPR*, Buna, Viton® EPR*, Buna, Viton® EPR*, Buna, Viton®
Valve Assembly Not Available Not Available Brass* 316L Stainless Steel Brass* 316L Stainless Steel
Performance
Water Capacity 7 GPH to 20 GPM
Air Capacity 2.6 SCFH to 60 SCF
Scale 50mm, 75 mm, 100mm, 127mm, 250mm Direct reading
G Accuracy 50mm ± 6% of Full Scale Flow
75 mm ± 4% of Full Scale Flow
100mm ± 4% of Full Scale Flow
6C-04, 6C-06 ± 7% of Full Scale Flow
Repeatability 50mm 3%
75 mm 2%
100mm 2%
6C-04, 6C-06 4%
127mm 2%
250mm 1/2%
Max. Temp Gases 100°F (38°C)
Max. Temp. Liquids 130°F (54°C)
Max. Water Pressure 125 psig
Max. Air Pressure 100 psig
Connections and Mounting Dimensions
Block Number Connection Size Centerline H Thread J Diameter L
2C ¼” FNPT – – 0.625
3C ½” MNPT x ¼” FNPT 3 .25 – 20 1
5C ½” MNPT x¼” FNPT 3.937 .25 – 20 1
6C 1” MNPT 4 .25 – 20 1.375
7C ½” FNPT 8.75 .375 –24 1.25
Options
*Standard Construction
Block 2C is supplied with .875" hex mounting nuts on plumbing connections.
Blocks 3C, 5C, 6C and 7C have mounting studs depicted in dimension “H” and thread “J.” (Mounting nuts not supplied.)

USGI Chemical Feed
Glass-Tube, Stainless-Frame Purge Meter

DESCRIPTION
For low-capacity, low-pressure applications we offer
glass tube purge meters with stainless steel frames.
Purge meters are designed for purging instruments,
cases, and control lines, and are readily adapted to
liquid-level indication, sampling, liquid-specific gravity
determination, and similar applications. For low-flow,
higherpressure applications, armored purge meters
are available. For high volume flows, glass-tube and
metal tube meters are available in a variety of sizes and
configurations for metering both air and liquid.
These glass-tube meters have a rugged stainless steel
frame, available in 1½- inch and 3-inch scale lengths,
and use a high-stability float for accurate, repeatable
performance. Meters can be supplied with flow
controllers and plastic bezels for flush mounting (not
available with 1½-inch scale purge meter).
Accuracy ±Full Scale Maximum Operating Maximum Operating

Series Description Connections
(10:1 Range) Pressure Temperature
Glass-Tube Purge Meters Stainless-Frame General purpose 10% Horizontal ¼-in. FNPT 17 bar (250 psi) 121° C (250º F)
measurement of low-volume flows.
Arma-View® II Purge Meter G

DESCRIPTION
Low-flow, high-temperature and pressure applications available
with optional 4-20mA transmitter and flow controller. An optional
FM-approved hazardous location 4-20mA transmitter provides
remote indication of flow rate. An optional purgetype-purgetype flow
controller keeps flow constant regardless of pressure variations.
It is offered in 316 stainless steel construction, for inlet and outlet
configurations. It can be assembled to the meter or as a standalone
in the process line.

Armored Low-Flow Arma-View® II Purge Meters Measures extra 5% Horizontal ¼-in. FNPT 100 bar (1500 psi) 204° C (400º F)
Meters low-volume flows of aggressive fluids at high
pressure.

Armored Purge Meter

DESCRIPTION
This armored purge meter operates over a 10:1 range. Scales are 1¼ inches
long. The ½-inch meter has a GPH or SCFH scale; the ¾-inch meter, a
GPM or SCFM scale. Each also has a percent scale. Construction of meter
body is 316 stainless steel with Buna-N and TFE. Heavy-duty stainless steel
construction ensures proper operation to 100 bar (1500 psi) and 400°F. At
no time is the glass scale tube exposed to the process fluid. A stainless steel
sheath encloses the O-ringsealed glass tube. Flow switch available.

Armored Low-Flow Armored Purge Meter Measures low-volume 10% Horizontal ½-, ¾-in. 100 bar (1500 psi) 204° C (400º F)
Meters flows of aggressive fluids at high pressure and FNPT
temperatures.
Armored Flowmeter
DESCRIPTION
This inexpensive, 5% accuracy flowmeter gives reliable flow indication of
G aggressive fluids at high temperatures and pressures. Available options
include a 4-20mA output flow signal and high/low alarm switch. Meter
sizes (pipe connections) are ½-, 1-, 1½-, and 2- inches with capacities to
492 Ipm (130 gpm) water and 250 sccm (150 scfm) air at STP. Operating
range is 10:1. Mounting is vertical in line with NPT female connections.
All wetted parts are stainless steel (except polypropylene float); Buna-N,
Viton® or EPR O-rings. The float has an encapsulated alnico magnet.
Accuracy ±Full Maximum Operating Maximum Operating

Scale (10:1 Range) Pressure Temperature
Armored Flowmeters Stainless-Body Low-cost, all-metal meter 5% Vertical ½-, 1-, 1½-, 100 bar (1500 psi) 93° C (200º F) air 204° C
for flow indication and flow switching of 2-in. (400º F) water
aggressive fluids at higher pressures and
temperatures.

Glass-Tube Varea-Meter® Flowmeter

DESCRIPTION
These rotameters have a wide range of capacities and tube sizes. Metering
accuracy is 2% of full scale over a 10:1 range. Beaded-guide tubes are available
with 5- or 10-inch scales. End fittings for vertical and horizontal connections come in
NPT sizes. Choice of wetted parts materials such as 316 stainless, Kynar®, Buna-N,
and Viton® give a good balance between cost and maximum corrosion resistance.

Glass-Tube Varea- Stainless-Frame For accurate flow measurements 2% Vert. or Horz. ½-, 1-, 20 bar (300 psi) 93° C (200º F)
Meter® Flowmeters of fluids in applications where a glass tube is 1½-, 2-in. FNPT
acceptable.
Metal-Tube Varea-Meter® Flowmeter

DESCRIPTION
The metal-tube Varea-Meter® flowmeter offers simple installation, calibration,
and configuration while providing reliable longterm performance in gas or liquid G
service. Available in a variety of tube sizes (½-, ¾-, 1-, and 1½ inches) and flange
facings and ratings, these flowmeters measure over a 10:1 range for aggressive
fluids at high temperatures and pressures. Metering accuracy is 2% of full scale.
The standard tube-and-float material is 16 stainless steel; a Hastelloy® C float
is also available. Options include a 4-20 mA FMapproved hazardous locations
transmitter for remote indication of flow rate. External alarm switches are
available for high/low alarm.

Metal-Tube Varea-Meter® Metal-Tube For metering aggressive 2% Vertical ½-, 1-, 1½-in. 82 bar (1200 psi) 316° C (600º F)
Flowmeters fluids accurately at high pressures and 150, 300 lb. Flange
temperatures.

Flow • Turbine Flow Meters
Turbine Flowmeter
Blancett
Model 1100
DESCRIPTION
The Model 1100 Turbine Flow Meter is designed to withstand the demands of the most rigorous flow measurement
applications. Originally developed for the secondary oil recovery market, the Model 1100 is an ideal meter for liquid flow
measurement on or off the oilfield.
FEATURES
• Accurate and repeatable flow measurement from 0.6
- 3 gpm (20 - 100 BPD) to 500 - 5,000 gpm (17,000 -
171,000 BPD)
• Capable of electronic integration, to provide displayed
flow rate, totalization, current or voltage outputs
• Capable of measuring flow on piping systems from ½"
to 10"
• Superior materials of construction for high performance
in aggressive environments
• Only one moving part for reduced maintenance costs
• Rugged 316 stainless steel construction offers long
service life in severe operating environments
• Available in NPT, BSP, Victaulic®, Flange, or Hose
Barbed end connections
• NIST traceable calibration
• Field replaceable repair kits allow for turbine
replacement without loss of accuracy
G Model 1100
Recommended Repair Approx.

Max Flow Ranges Meter End to End
Item Bore Size End Connections Strainer Kit Part K-Factor
PSI. Weight Length
GPM BPD M³/D Mesh Number Pulses/Gal
B110-375-½ ⅜" ½" Male NPT 5,000 0.6 - 3 20 -100 3.3 - 16 60 B251-102 18,000 1 3"
B110-500-½ ½" ½" Male NPT 5,000 0.75 - 7.5 25 - 250 4.1 - 41 60 B251-105 13,000 1 3"
B110-750-½ ¾" ½" Male NPT 5,000 2 - 15 68 - 515 10.9 - 81.75 60 B251-108 3,300 1 3"
B110-375 ⅜" 1" Male NPT 5,000 0.6 - 3 20 - 100 3.3 - 16 60 B251-102 18,000 2 4"
B110-500 ½" 1" Male NPT 5,000 0.75 - 7.5 25 - 250 4.1 - 41 60 B251-105 13,000 2 4"
B110-750 ¾" 1" Male NPT 5,000 2 - 15 68 - 515 10.9 - 81.75 60 B251-108 3,300 2 4"
B110-875 ⅞" 1" Male NPT 5,000 3 - 30 100 - 1,000 16 - 160 60 B251-109 3,100 2 4"
B111-110 1" 1" Male NPT 5,000 5 - 50 170 - 1,700 27.25 - 272.5 40 B251-112 870 2 4"
B111-115 1-½" 1-½" Male NPT 5,000 15 - 180 515 - 6,000 82 - 981 20 B251-116 330 5 6"
B111-121 1-½" 2" Male NPT 5,000 15 - 180 515 - 6,000 82 - 981 20 B251-116 330 6 6"
B111-120 2" 2" Female NPT 5,000 40 - 400 1,300 - 13,000 218 - 2.180 20 B251-120 52 14 10"
B111-130 3" 3" Grooved End 800 60 - 600 2,100 - 21,000 327 - 3.270 10 B251-131 57 15 12-½"
B111-140 4" 4" Grooved End 800 100 - 1,200 3,400 - 41,000 545 - 6.540 10 B251-141 29 20 12"
B111-160 6" 6" Grooved End 800 200 - 2,500 6,800 - 86,000 1.090 - 13.626 4 B251-161 7 46 12"
B111-180 8" 8" Grooved End 800 350 - 3,500 12,000 - 120,000 1.363 - 19.076 4 B251-181 3 56 12"
B111-200 10" 10" Grooved End 800 500 - 5,000 17,000 - 171,000 2.725 - 27.252 4 B251-200 1.6 80 12"
* Part number includes turbine meter and standard magnetic pickup. For other pickup options, see table below.
Note: Insert a “C” before dash for turbine meters with explosion proof rating. No pick-up included. Example: B111C-110

Flow • Doppler/Ultrasonic Flow Meters
Dynasonics
Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter

DFX Series
FEATURES
• Non-intrusive, clamp-on transducers for most pipes
from ¼" (6 mm) and above.
• Wide velocity range: 0.15 to 30 FPS (0.05 to 9
MPS).
• Flexibility: with automatic gain control and in-fi eld
linearization, the DFX will adapt to a wide variety
of applications.
• Inherent immunity to VFD and other electronic/
ultrasonic noise.
• Hot-tappable Insertion probe transducer available
for concrete, FRP/GRP, or woodstave pipes.
• Microprocessor-based system; configuration and
accumulation data stored in non-volatile flash
ROM.
HOW TO ORDER
Digital Doppler Ultrasonic Flow Transmitter
DDFXD
X X X X X X X G
Table 1 Transmitter Type Table 4 Input/Output 2
2 Rate and Totalizer N None
Table 2 Power Supply 1 4-20mA
A 115 VAC 2 Dual Relay
B 230 VAC 3 Rate Pulse
C 100 VAC Table 5 Totalizer
E 9-28 VDC A Eight digit resettable
Table 3 Input/Output 1 Table 6 Approvals
N None N General safety to US/Canadian standards
1 4-20mA Table 7 Options
2 Dual Relay N None
3 Rate Pulse

Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter - Continued

Doppler Ultrasonic Transduser Set Insertion Doppler probe
DT9 DP7
X XXX X XXX X X XXX X XXX X
Table 1 Piping Environment* Table 1 Piping Environment

4 Std temp/Std pipe 1 8" (203 mm)
5 Std temp/small pipe 2 18" (457 mm)
6 High temp/Std pipe 3 28" (711 mm)
7 High temp/small pipe 4 38" (965 mm)
*Std Temp: Maximum (+250 °F) (+121 °C) High Temp: Maximum (+400 °F) (+204 5 48" (1220 mm)
°C) Small Pipe: ¼"-1" (6 mm - 25 mm) Std. Pipe: 1" (25 mm) and above.
Table 2 Cable Length
020 20' (6.1 m)
020 20' (6.1 m)
050 50' (15 m)
050 50' (15 m)
100 100' (30 m)
100 100' (30 m)
Maximum length: 990' (297 m) in 10' (3 m) increments
Table 3 Conduit Type
N None
N None
A Flexible armored
A Flexible armored
Table 4 Conduit Length
000 0' (0 m)
000 0' (0 m)
020 20' (6.1 m)
020 20' (6.1 m)
G 050 50' (15 m)
050 50' (15 m)
100 100' (30 m)
100 100' (30 m)
Table 5 Options
Table 5 Options
N General Safety to US/Canadian standards
N General safety to US/Canadian standards
B 1½" RF flange, General Safety

Handheld Ultrasonic Doppler Flowmeter

UFX Series
DESCRIPTION
The Series UFX Doppler Flow Meter features an
advanced ultrasonic measuring technology, providing
accurate and reliable flow velocity assessments.
FEATURES
• Non-invasive, hand-held transducer and battery-
powered electronics packaged in a NEMA 4 (IP65)
rated enclosure
• Measures fluid velocities from 0.3...30 FPS (0.1...9
MPS)
• Reliable readings on nearly all liquid applications
containing a minimum of 100 ppm of 100 micron size
suspended solids or entrained gases
• Optional CE approved version for pipes size 1 in. (25
mm) and above
• Large four-digit LCD display provides velocity readout
in user selected units (FPS or MPS)
• Easy to use flow verification instrument for industrial
and municipal applications including paper pulp stock,
concrete slurries, dredging,primary sludge and waste
activated sludge
HOW TO ORDER
Table 1 Table 2 G
DUFX1
XX XX
Table 1 Transducer Type Table 2 Approvals

B1 Small Pipe, ¼"...1" (6...20 mm) CE CE Generic Light Industrial*
D1 Std. Pipe, 1" (25 mm) and greater
F1 Both B1 and D1
(Leave blank if no approvals are required)
*CE available with Std. Pipe Transducer only.
Unit includes carrying case, one tube silicone couplant (for temporary mounting), and four AA batteries

Clamp-On Ultrasonic Flow/Energy Meter

TFX Ultra™ Series
DESCRIPTION
The TFX Ultra transit time meter measures clean liquids as well as
those with small amounts of suspended solids or aeration such as
surface water or sewage.
FEATURES
• Bi-directional flow measurement system. Totalizer options include
forward, reverse and net total
• Modbus RTU and BACnet MSTP over RS485; Ethernet
connections including BACnet/IP, EtherNet/IP, and Modbus TCP/
IP protocols
• Large, easy-to-read digital display
• Rugged, aluminum enclosure ensures a long service life in harsh
environments
• Certified for hazardous area installation in North America and
Europe
HOW TO ORDER
METER WITH INTEGRAL FLOW TRANSDUCER
DTFX
X X X X X X X X X X
Table 1 Model Table 5 Keypad

B Flow Meter Model K Keypad
G E Energy Meter Model N No Keypad
Table 2 Pipe Size/Measurement Range Table 6 Advanced Communications
A ½" ANSI Pipe (DN 15) E 10/100 Base-T (EtherNet/IP, BACnet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP)
B ¾" ANSI Pipe (DN 20) B BACnet MSTP
C 1" ANSI Pipe (DN 25) C BACnet MSTP; 10/100 Base -T (EtherNet/IP, BACnet/IP,
D 1-¼" ANSI Pipe (DN 32) Modbus TCP/IP)
E 1-½" ANSI Pipe (DN 40) N None
F 2" ANSI Pipe (DN 50) P Total Pulse Output (Energy Meter model only)
G ½" Copper Tube H BACnet MSTP 76800 Baud
H ¾" Copper Tube Table 7 Energy Temperature Range
I 1" Copper Tube N None (Select for Flow Meter Model B)
J 1-¼" Copper Tube A 32…122° F (0…50° C)
K 1-½" Copper Tube B 32…212° F (0…100° C)
L 2" Copper Tube C -40…350° F (–40…177° C)
M ½" OD Standard Tube D –4…85° F (–20…30° C)
N ¾" OD Standard Tube Table 8 Area Approvals
P 1" OD Standard Tube F General Safety, Hazardous Locations, and CE (see

Specifications Page)
Q 1-¼" OD Standard Tube
N General Safety (Power Supply C Only)
R 1-½" OD Standard Tube
Table 9 Options
S 2" OD Standard Tube
N None
Table 3 Transducer Material/Temperature
C 4- Pin (male); Brad Harrison Micro-Change (Available for
P PVC, –40…185° F (–40…85° C) D/C Power Only)
C CPVC, –40…250° F(–40…121° C) A Cable Gland Kit
Table 4 Power Table 10 Language (Leave blank for English)
A A/C 95…264 V AC) F French
C A/C (20…28 V AC) S Spanish
D D/C (10…28 V DC)

Clamp-On Ultrasonic Flow/Energy Meter - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
METER WITH REMOTE FLOW TRANSDUCER

DTFX
X XX X X X X X X X
Table 1 Transmitter Type Table 6 Energy Temperature Range

B Flow Meter Model N None (Selected for Flow Meter Model B)
E Energy Meter Model A 32…122° F (0…50° C)
Table 2 Remote Transmitter B 32…212° F (0…100° C)
ZN Use with DTTN/DTTH/DTTL Large Pipe Transducers C –40…350° F (–40…177° C)
(pipes larger than 2") or DTTS/DTTC Small Pipe Trans-
D –4…85° F (–20…30° C)
ducers (pipes ½"…2")
Table 7 Approvals
Table 3 Power Supply
F General Safety, Hazardous Locations, and CE
A A/C (95…264 V AC
N General Safety (Power Supply C Only)
C A/C (20…28 V AC)
Table 8 Options
D D/C (10…28 V DC)
Table 4 Keypad N None
K Keypad C 4-Pin (male); Brad Harrison Micro-Change (Available for

D/C Power Only)
N No Keypad
A Cable Gland Kit
Table 5 Advanced Communications
Table 9 Language (Leave blank for English)
E 10/100 Base-T (Ethernet/IP,Bacnet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP)
F French
B BACnet MSTP
S Spanish
BACnet MSTP; 10/100 Base-T (EtherNet/IP, BACnet/IP,
C
Modbus TCP/IP) G
N None
P Total Pulse Output (Energy Meter Model Only)
H BACnet MSTP 76800 Baudh

Clamp-On Ultrasonic Flow/Energy Meter - Continued

Flow Transducer – Pipes larger than 2” Flow Transducers - Small Pipes 1/2”…2”
DTT DTT
XXX X XXX X X XXX X XXX X X X
Table 1 Construction Table 1 Type

N Standard: 250° F (121° C) (CPVC, Ultem) S Standard: 185° F (85° C) (PVC, Ultem)
H High Temp: 350° F (176° C)(PTFE, Vespel) C High Temp: 250° F (121° C) (CPVC, Ultem)
L Large Pipe - 500 KHz: 250° F (121° C) (CPVC, Ultem)* Table 2 Nominal Pipe Size
Table 2 Cable Length D ½"
020 20' (6 m) F ¾"
050 50' (15 m) G 1"
100 100' (30 m) H 1-¼"
Table 3 Conduit Type J 1-½"
N None L 2"
A Flexible Armored Table 3 Pipe Type
S Submersible (DTTN and DTTL Only) Limited to 100 feet P ANSI Pipe
(30 m)
C Copper Pipe
Conduit Length (Standard construction: Conduit length =
Table 4 T Rigid Tubing
Cable length)
000 None
G 020 20' (6 m)
020 20' (6 m)
050 50' (15 m)
050 50' (15 m)
100 100' (30 m)¹
100 100' (30 m)¹
Table 5 Installation
N None
N General Purpose
A Flexible Armored
F Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D (DTTN Only)
000 None
020 20' (6 m)
050 50' (15 m)
100 100' (30 m)¹
¹Maximum length: 990’ (300 m) in 10' (3 m) increments

* Recommended for pipe sizes larger than 24” (610 mm)

Portable Clamp-On Ultrasonic Flow/Energy Meter

DXN Series
DESCRIPTION
The DXN Portable Ultrasonic Flow and Energy Meter is a true hybrid instrument, capable of measuring liquid flow with
multiple technologies, including: Doppler, transit time and liquid thermal (heat energy) flow. Easy to install by clamping
onto the outside of the pipe, the DXN measures flow using non-invasive ultrasonic sensors. Compatible with a pipe
wall thickness gauge, inside pipe diameter can be verified to ensure accurate ultrasonic measurements when piping
details are unknown or unavailable.
FEATURES
• One portable meter does it all - TRUE HYBRID
instrument switches automatically between transit time
and Doppler measurement as needed
• Take control of your reading with the industry’s only
advanced touch-screen interface featuring job-specifi c
controls
• Always have your data on hand with usercustomizable
site-specifi c parameters, 1 GB internal data logging,
and USB connectivity for additional storage capability
• Take more accurate readings with superior
measurement processing speed; takes over 100 flow
readings per second
• Built to handle rigorous environments with an outdoor-
readable FULL COLOR WVGA display and protective
cover
HOW TO ORDER
G
DXN
X X X X X X
Table 1 Model Table 4 Carrying Case

P Portable S Standard –Outer case with shoulder strap
Table 2 Power Cord Table 5 Approvals
A North American N CE + General Safety, U.S., Canada, and EU
U U.K., Singapore Table 6 Options
E Euro N None
J Japan
C China
Table 3 Sensor & Hardware Kit
B Basic - Small pipe and standard pipe transit time
transducers
T All Transit Time - Basic Kit and large pipe transducers
H Hybrid - Basic kit and Doppler transducers
E Energy - Basic kit and non-invasive RTDs
F Full - Includes all, transit time, Doppler, RTDs and wall
thickness gauge

Flow • Coriolis Flow Meters
ABB
Coriolis Mass Flowmeter

Coriolis Master FCB/FCH 100 Series
DESCRIPTION
The CoriolisMaster FCB130, FCB150, FCH130, FCH150 is the low-cost and simple
ABB mass flowmeter with the new DSP transmitter. The device is equipped with
a Modbus interface and two fast digital outputs that can be configured as pulse
outputs, frequency outputs or binary outputs.
FEATURES
• Space-saving, robust design
• Variety of process connections
• Two digital outputs
• Communication via Modbus RTU protocol
• Approval for use in potentially explosive atmospheres.The user can select the "i" or "e" type of protection for the output
circuits; the type chosen will depend on the circuits which are connected.The type of protection can be changed even
after installation has been completed.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model FCB1xx for standard applications FCH1xx for hygienic applications
Process connections Flange DIN 2501 / EN 1092-1, Flange ASME Threaded pipe connection DIN 11851, Tri-Clamp and other connections
B16.5, Threaded pipe connection DIN 11851, on request
Tri-Clamp and other connections on request
Wetted materials Stainless steel Nickel alloy C4 / C22 (optional) Stainless steel, polished 1.4404 (AISI 316L) or 1.4435 (AISI 316L)
Approvals and certificates - Explosion protection: ATEX / IECEx, cFMus - Explosion protection: ATEX / IECEx, cFMus
- Others on request - Hygiene approvals: EHEDG, FDA
- Others on request
Measuring accuracy for liquids FCB130 FCB150 FCB130 FCB150
Mass flow ¹) 0.4 % and 0.25 % 0.1 % and 0.15 % 0.4 % and 0.25 % 0.1 % and 0.15 %
G Volume flow ¹) 0.4 % and 0.25 % 0.15% 0.4 % and 0.25 % 0.15%
Density 0.01 kg/l - 0.002 kg/l 0.01 kg/l 0.002 kg/l
- 0.001 kg/l (optional) 0.001 kg/l (optional)
- 0.0005 kg/l ²) 0.0005 kg/l ²)
Temperature 1K 0.5 K 1K 0.5 K
Measuring accuracy for gases ¹) 1% 0.5% 1% 0.5%
Permissible measuring medium temperature -50 ... 160 °C -50 ... 205 °C -50 ... 160 °C -50 ... 205 °C
(-58 ... 320 °F) (-58 ... 400 °F) (-58 ... 320 °F) (-58 ... 400 °F)
Power supply 11 … 30 V DC
IP rating according to EN 60529 IP 65, IP 67, IP 68 and NEMA 4X
Communication Modbus RTU, RS485
Outputs in serial production — Digital output 1: passive
— Digital output 2: passive
Capabilities External output zero return, external totalizer reset, forward/reverse flow metering, empty pipe detection based on
preconfigured density alarm, self-monitoring and diagnostics and field optimization for flow and density
Concentration measurement "DensiMass" Yes, optional on models FCB150 and FCH150
"FillMass" fill function Yes, optional on models FCB150 and FCH150
1) Indication of accuracy in % of the measured value (% of measured value)

2) Measuring accuracy following on-site calibration under operating conditions

Coriolis Mass Flowmeter

Coriolis Master FCB/FCH 300 Series
DESCRIPTION
The CoriolisMaster FCB330, FCB350, FCH330, FCH350 is the most
cost-effective and least complex ABB mass flowmeter featuring the new
DSP transmitter. The device is available in the integral mount design
with internal transmitter and in the remote mount design with external
transmitter. The integral mount design reduces the time and effort spent
on installation and wiring. Flowrate information can be viewed directly
at the meter site and the meter can be installed in systems saving even
more space than is currently possible.
FEATURES
• Space-saving, rugged design
• Variety of process connection options
• Two separate current outputs for measuring mass or volume flow, density, or temperature, as well as one pulse output
• Digital input and output
• Communication via HART protocol
• Ex approval. The user can select the "i" or "e" type of protection for the output circuits; the type chosen will depend on
the circuits which are connected. The type of protection can be changed even after installation has been completed.
The digital outputs can be configured as NAMUR outputs by the user.

Coriolis Mass Flowmeter - Continued

SENSOR SPECIFICATIONS
Model FCB300 flowmeter sensor for FCH300 flowmeter sensor hygienic applications (integral mount design)
standard applications (integral
mount design)
Process connections Flange DIN 2501 / EN 1092-1, Threaded pipe connection DIN 11851, Tri-Clamp and other connections on
Flange ASME B16.5, Threaded request
pipe connection DIN 11851, Tri-
Clamp and other connections
on request
Wetted materials Stainless steel Stainless steel, polished 1.4404 (AISI 316L) or1.4435 (AISI 316L)
Nickel-Alloy C4 / C22
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 IP 65 / 67, NEMA 4X IP 65 / 67, NEMA 4X
Approvals and certificates ATEX / IECx, cFMus, NEPSI ATEX / IECEx, cFMus, NEPSI Hygienic and sterile requirements (EHEDG,
and others on request FDA) and others on request
Enclosure Integral mount design, remote mount design
Measuring accuracy for liquids FCB330 FCB350 FCH330 FCH350
Mass flow ¹) 0.4 % and 0,25 % 0.1 % and 0.15 % 0.4 % and 0.25 % 0.1 % and 0.15 %
Volume flow ¹) 0.4 % and 0.25 % 0.15 % 0.4 % and0,25 % 0.15 %
Density 0.01 kg/l — 0.002 kg/l 0.01 kg/l — 0.002 kg/l
— 0.001 kg/l (option) — 0.001 kg/l (option)
— 0.0005 kg/l ²) — 0.0005 kg/l ²)
Temperature 1K 0,5 K 1K 0,5 K
Measuring accuracy for gases ¹) 1% 0.5 % 1% 0,5 %
Permissible temperature of the medium being measured -50 … 160 °C -50 … 200 °C -50 … 160 °C -50 … 200 °C
(-58 … 320 °F) (-58 … 392 °F) (-58 … 320 °F) (-58 … 392 °F)
Enclosure FCT transmitter with integral or remote mount design
Cable length Maximum 10 m (33 ft), remote mount design only
G Power supply 100 … 230 V AC, 24 V AC/DC
Current output Current output 1: 0/4 … 20 mA active or 4 … 20 mA passive
Current output 2: 4 ... 20 mA passive
Pulse output Active (not Zone 1 / Div. 1) or passive
Capabilities External output zero return, external totalizer reset, forward / reverse flow metering, empty pipe detection
based on preconfigured density alarm < 0.5 kg/l, self-monitoring and diagnostics and field optimization for flow
and density
Communication HART protocol
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529 Integral mount design: IP 65/IP 67, NEMA 4X
Remote mount design: IP 67, NEMA 4X
1) Stated measuring accuracy in % of rate (% o. r.)

2) Measuring accuracy following on-site calibration under operating conditions

Flow • Differential Pressure Flow Meters
Cone & Wedge Flow Meters
Wedge Flowmeter
ABB
WedgeMaster FPD570
DESCRIPTION
The WedgeMaster FPD570 flowmeter is a compact wedge flowmeter designed for
the measurement of liquids, gases and steam in pipelines of DN25 to DN150 (1
to 6 in). The meter combines a wedge sensor with an integral isolating/equalizing
manifold and transmitter in a single, leak tested and configured assembly.
WedgeMaster has no critical metering surfaces to wear and requires fewer
upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths than many DP devices. Available
in 2 versions, 4 standard wedge (H/D) ratios and with up to 5 DP span limits to
choose from.
Versions
WedgeMaster V is a compact Wedge flowmeter for measurement of liquids, gases
and steam in volumetric units (actual volume). It uses either the ABB 266DSH or
ABB 364DS transmitter and provides a flow rate and total display with an output
of 4 to 20 mA proportional to the actual volume flowrate. WedgeMaster V has
a stainless steel body and an alloy, 304 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel
transmitter case.
WedgeMaster M is compact Wedge flowmeter, providing measurement directly

in either mass- or corrected volume-units for liquids and steam. Gas flow
measurement is provided directly in reduced volume units. It uses the ABB 267CS
multivariable transmitter to measure DP, temperature and pressure, providing a flowrate and total display and transmits
a 4 to 20 mA signal proportional to the mass- or corrected volume-flowrate. WedgeMaster M has a stainless steel body,
an alloy transmitter case (optional stainless steel) and an optional internal temperature element.
G
There are up to 5 DP sensor ranges available.
FEATURES
• Compact flowmeter with 3-valve instrument manifold (optional 5-valve), optional integral temperature element for
corrected mass/volume calculations and integral DP of multivariable transmitter factory fitted to the manifold.
• Rugged construction with wear-resistant metering element
• Can measure bi-directional flow
• Minimum straight pipe requirements-5 pipe diameters upstream and 3 downstream for specified performance
• Stable meter factor down to Re=500, giving large flow turndown• Leak tested; Corrosion and erosion resistant
• Metering accuracy of up to 0.5% of reading when used in calibration range
• Transmitter with optional PILD and TTG technologies
• The PILD (Plugged Impulse Line Detection) feature generates a warning via HART communication if either or both of
the impulse lines become fully or partially obstructed.
• TTG (Through The Glass) keypad technology allows configuration without the need to remove instrument covers, even
in hazardous areas.
• Output signals via HART (4 to 20 mA), Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus, MODBUS or Wireless HART protocols.

Dynamic Flow Computers
Differential Pressure Cone Meter

SmartCone®
DESCRIPTION
Dynamic Flow Computers SmartCone® “Variable Area/Beta Ratio”
Differential Pressure Cone Meter is a fluid flow meter that uses
a measured differential pressure to provide a robust, accurate,
repeatable and optimal cost measurement solution for both gas
and liquid measurement.
The SmartCone® meter produces a differential pressure which

can be read by any standard differential pressure or multivariable
transmitter.
The meter is the first differential pressure cone meter to use artifact
calibration techniques similar to orifice plate technology, which is
inherent in the design. Each SmartCone® meter has a verifiable
geometry between subsequent manufactured devices using
accurate and robust machined castings. It features the unique
ability to offer a beta or area ratio change per diameter using
interchangeable ARC’s. This allows the metered products’ flow
velocity characteristics to be aligned correctly throughout the life of
the meter.
FEATURES
• Maximum differential pressure: Up to 400 inches of water column(100 kPa)
• Metering Accuracy of up to ±0.5%
• Repeatability: ±0.1% of Full Scale or Better Without Stacked DP
G • Sturdy Stainless Steel Construction
• Built-in Temperature (RTD) Port
• Optional Downstream Pressure Tap
• Wafer or Flange Design
• Standard NPT Ports
• Standard Built-in RTD Port
• Available up to 1500 ANSI
• Self-aligning, self-centering, interchangeable ARC (Area/Beta Ration Changer) machined from 316SS
• 10:1 turndown with each ARC
• 3 Available ARCs per meter line size
APPLICATIONS
• Liquid & Gas Measurement
• Well Head Measurement
• Custody Transfer
• Fuel Metering
• Wet Gas
• Steam & Steam Injection
• Test Separators
• Compressor Skids
• Pipeline

Orifice Flowmeter
Orifice Plates
ABB
OriMaster FPD500
DESCRIPTION
The FPD500 orifice plate flowmeter has been extended in size range to
cover pipe sizes with nominal bores from 0.5 to 12 in (15 to 300 mm).
ABB has added a new option for the 4 to 12 in (100 to 300 mm) line
size and above that allows the orifice plate itself to be removed and
replaced from the meter on the site. This saves the cost of a complete
meter replacement if the orifice plate becomes damaged, and changing
the plate provides increased rangeability. OriMaster is available in two
versions.
Versions
OriMaster V is a compact flowmeter for general purpose measurement in volumetric units (actual volume). OriMaster
V uses the ABB 364 or 266 DP transmitter to provide a flow rate and total display and a 4 to 20 mA output proportional
to the actual volume flowrate. The transmitter case and meter body are all in stainless steel as standard when the 364
transmitter is fitted. 316 stainless steel transmitter cases are also available. There are 5 DP sensor ranges available.
OriMaster M is a compact flowmeter, providing measurement directly in mass units for liquids and steam. Gas flow is
measured directly in reduced volume units. OriMaster M uses the ABB 267 multivariable transmitter to measure DP,
temperature and pressure, providing a flowrate display and a 4 to 20 mA output proportional to the mass or corrected
volume flowrate. The body is stainless steel and the case is alloy. Options include stainless steel case, internal
temperature element, Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus or Modbus communication output. There are 3 DP sensor
ranges available.
FEATURES
• For existing conventional orifice installations as well as being a cost-effective first-choice meter for new applications. G
• Optional removable orifice plate and integral temperature elements extend versatility and functionality
• Orifice flowmeter assembly complete with choice of integral orifice plate bores, for pipe sizes 1/2, 1 and 11/2 in.
(DN15, DN25 and DN40)
• Replaceable orifice plates enable low-cost repair or re-ranging
• Threaded or flanged pipe connection
• Optional upstream and downstream pipework
• Integral 3- or 5-valve instrument manifold
• Integral multivariable transmitter(mass flow) and optional RTD for direct reading of mass (liquids and steam) and
corrected volume (gas)
• Partial or complete blockage detection of DP connections. Plugged impulse line detection provides warnings visually
and via outputs.
• 'Through-the-glass' (TTG) keypad technology enables configuration without the need to remove instrument covers,
even in hazardous areas
• Fully leak tested
• Units can be water-calibrated, providing an element metering accuracy of up to 0.5 % of reading when used within
calibrated range

Integral Orifice Flowmeter

I/OMaster FPD510
DESCRIPTION
The integrated orifice design of the FPD510 is a solution or low flow rates
in small-bore pipelines. In each meter size (0.5, 1 and 1.5 inch or 15, 25 or
40 mm), the device offers replaceable small-bore orifice plates, ensuring a
suitable differential pressure at the required flow rate. I/OMaster is supplied
with threaded or flanged connections on a body that includes the required
upstream and downstream run. Output signal in HART (4 to 20 mA), Profibus
PA, Foundation Fieldbus, MODBUS or Wireless HART communication
protocols. I/OMaster is available in two versions.
Versions
I/OMaster V is a compact integral orifice flowmeter for general purpose
measurement of liquids, gases and steam in volumetric units (actual volume).
It uses either the ABB 266 DSH or ABB 364DS transmitter and provides a
flow rate and total display with an output of 4 to 20 mA proportional to the actual volume flowrate. I/OMaster V has a
stainless steel body and an alloy, 304 or 316 stainless steel transmitter case. There are 6 DP sensor ranges available.
I/OMaster M is a compact integral orifice flowmeter, providing measurement directly in mass or corrected volume
units for liquids and steam. Gas flow measurement is provided directly in reduced volume units. It uses the ABB
267CS multivariable transmitter to measure DP, temperature (from a user-supplied external temperature element) and
pressure; providing a flowrate and total display and transmits a 4 to 20 mA signal proportional to the mass or corrected
volume flowrate. The I/OMaster M has a stainless steel body and an alloy transmitter case (optionally stainless steel).
There are 4 DP sensor ranges available.
G
FEATURES
• Designed to measure low flowrates of liquids and gases in small pipelines
• Can be readily rescaled as process conditions change
• Orifice flowmeter assembly complete with choice of integral orifice plate bores for pipe sizes 1/2, 1 and 1-1/2 in.
(DN15, DN25 and DN40)
• Choice of threaded connection or flanged metering run
• Optional upstream and downstream pipework
• Integral 3 or 5 valve instrument manifold
• Integral DP or multivariable transmitter, factory-fitted to manifold
• Units can be water calibrated, providing an element metering accuracy of up to 0.5% of reading when used within
calibrated range
• Replaceable orifice plates enable low-cost repair or re-ranging
• HART® communication provides digital process variable (%, mA or engineering units) superimposed on 4 to 20 mA
signal, with protocol based on Bell202 FSK standard
• Output signal in HART digital (4 to 20 mA), Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus or Wireless HART
communication protocols

Orange Research
Fixed Orifice Flowmeter

2020 Series
DESCRIPTION
The fixed-orifice flowmeters are designed for low flow
applications, from 0-2 to 0-40 GPH. Like the variable-area
flowmeters they are built from solids blocks of metal making
them a favorite for high line pressure applications, to 3000 psi.
You will find many in hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
Though rugged, they maintain the sensitivity required for low

flow measurements.We use a fixed Delrin orifice centered on
a spring-loaded Buna-N diaphragm-magnet sensor, which
provides sensitive responses to changes in flow. This diaphragm
sensor is magnetically coupled to a pointer, which relays the flow
rate onto an easy to read square-root calibrated dial.
These in-line flowmeters often replace rotameters, which have

small scales that can be difficult to read, especially with dirty or
opaque fluids.
FEATURES
• Large, easy-to-read dial
• Rugged, high line pressure design
• Vertical or horizontal mounting
• 0-2 to 0-40 GPH
• 1.5-5 SCFM
SPECIFICATIONS
G
Max. Line Accuracy
Flow Range Electrical
Model Type Type Description Porting Pressure/ (F.S./Repeatability) Turndown*
Available
Liquids Air & Gas Temp Liquids Air & Gas
0-2 to 0-40 GPH 1.5-5 SCFM

3000
2021 FG Flow Gauge Only (0-8 to 0-150 (60-140 1/4” NPT 2%/1% 5%/1% 2 switches 3:1
psig/200°F
LPH) SLPM)
0-2 to 0-40 GPH 1.5-5 SCFM

Flow Gauge with 3000
2021 FGS (0-8 to 0-150 (60-140 1/4” NPT 2%/1% 5%/1% 2 switches 3:1
Switch psig/200°F
LPH) SLPM)
0-2 to 0-40 GPH 1.5-5 SCFM
3000
2021 FS Flow Switch Only (0-8 to 0-150 (60-140 1/4” NPT 2%/1% 5%/1% 2 switches 3:1
psig/200°F
LPH) SLPM)
*Turndown results in 1st mark at approximately 30% full scale

Pitot Tubes
Averaging Pitot Flowmeter

ABB
PitoMaster FPD550
DESCRIPTION
The FPD550 brings the TORBAR averaging pitot tube flowmeter into the compact DP family.
It is designed for "one-hole" installation, which makes it easier to use in retrofit situations in
existing piping. The PitoMaster offers very low permanent pressure loss characteristics in
pipes ranging from 4-in. to 24-in. (100-mm to 600-m) nominal diameter. Users can specify
either flanged or threaded process connections. PitoMaster is available in two versions.
Versions
The PitoMaster V is a compact averaging pitot tube flowmeter for general purpose
measurement of liquids, gases and steam in volumetric units (actual volume). It uses the
ABB 266 DSH transmitter and provides a flow rate and total display with an output of 4 to 20
mA proportional to the actual volume flowrate. PitoMaster V has a stainless steel body and
an alloy, 304 stainless steel or 316 stainless steel transmitter case.
PitoMaster M is a compact averaging pitot tube flowmeter, giving measurement directly in

mass- or corrected volume-units for liquids and steam. Gas flow measurement is directly
in reduced volume units. It uses the ABB 267CS multivariable transmitter to measure DP,
temperature and pressure, providing a flowrate and total display and transmits a 4 to 20 mA
signal proportional to the mass or corrected volume flowrate. PitoMaster M has a stainless
steel body, an aluminum alloy transmitter case (optionally stainless steel) and an optional
internal temperature element.
For both versions there are 6 DP sensor ranges available.
G
FEATURES
• For applications requiring very low pressure losses and offers a simple and economical flowmeter solution in existing
pipelines where no flowmeter exists.
• Suited to low pressure gas measurement in larger pipelines
• Averaging Pitot tube assembly with choice of pipe sizes from DN100 to DN 600 (4 to 24 in.)
• Threaded or flanged pipe connection
• Integral 3-valve instrument manifold (optional 5-valve manifold available)
• Optional integral mineral-insulated temperature element for corrected volume/mass calculations; optional integral
temperature transmitter
• Integral DP or multivariable transmitter, factory fitted to manifold
• Dual averaging feature gives improved accuracy with asymmetric flow profiles
• Unique profile shape offers high flow turndown
• Low permanent pressure loss low energy consumption and running costs as well as reduced carbon footprint
• The 'Plugged Impulse Line Detection' (PILD) feature generates a warning via HART communication if either or both of
the impulse lines become fully or partially obstructed.
• Can also be configured to drive the analog output signal to the 'Alarm current'
• Output signal in HART digital (4 to 20 mA), Profibus PA, Foundation Fieldbus, Modbus or Wireless HART
communication protocols

Averaging Pitot Tubes

TORBAR
DESCRIPTION
TORBAR is a multi-port, averaging pitot flowmeter that utilizes the classical pitot
tube principle and can be supplied as a primary element only or coupled with a
266 DP or multivariable transmitters. TORBAR has multiple impact-sensing ports
across the pipe diameter and produces an averaged differential pressure signal
proportional to the flow rate. It is type calibrated so that no further calibration is
necessary once the meter is installed. It is simple to install and prior to installation,
ABB calculates the resonant frequency band, ensuring that the device is suitable
for the purpose. It is available in a wide range of sizes and can be used in
rectangular ducts.
Versions
• For insertion through a threaded fitting with a compression coupling
• For insertion through a flange
• 'Hot-tap' versions – to enable insertion and withdrawal under pressure
• Small pipe size versions – equipped with 15 to 50 mm (0.5 to 2 in) in-line fittings and butt-welded, screwed or flanged
ends
• Tribar – a single-insertion flowmeter comprising an integral valve manifold and a DP transmitter connected to a
TORBAR element. The Tribar can be supplied with an RTD element with or without a temperature transmitter
• Mass Tribar – a single-insertion flowmeter comprising an integral valve manifold, an RTD temperature sensor and a
Smart, multivariable transmitter attached to a TORBAR element. Mass Tribar computes the mass flow of liquids and
gaseswithautomaticcompensation for changes in pressure and temperature.
FEATURES
• Suitable for liquids, gases, saturated and super-heated steam G
• Unique profile shape enables high flow turndown
• Dual averaging for better accuracy
• One-piece outer tube for optimum strength
• Suitable for pipe sizes from 10mm to 8000mm
• Suitable for square or rectangular section ducts
• Optional Integral Transmitter and RTD: Provides compact volumetric or mass flow metering
• Zero co-efficient drift ensures long term stability
• Low permanent pressure loss means low energy consumption – and significant cost benefits
• Low installation and maintenance costs
APPLICATIONS
• Water, natural gas, flue gas, nitrogen, combustion gases, ventilation air, sea water, cooling water, crude oil, saturated
and superheated steam.
• Onshore and Offshore Oil and Gas
• Petrochemical
• Power
• Metals and HVAC

Averaging Pitot Tubes - Continued

SPECIFICATIONS
Accuracy ± 1% of actual flow rate
Repeatability ± 0.1%
Reynolds Number Minimum Re 1.2x104
Flow Rate Turndow Typically 10:1 (100:1 of DP). Restriction being the resolution of the transmitting device under a square root relationship
Max Working Pressure Up to 500 bar (7251 psi)
Max Working Temperature Up to 600°C (1112°F)
Maximum Viscosity 200 cp (mPas)
Standards/Approvals BS, ANSI, ASME, ISO and DIN
Testing Leak tested
Materials of Construction 316L stainless steel, others available on request
Traceability Full material traceability
Markings/Certifications CE marking (97/23/EC PED); NDE and Hydrostatic Pressure Test Certificates available

Air Monitor Corporation
Pitot Traverse Station

LO-flo / SS
DESCRIPTION
The LO-flo Pitot Traverse Station is a combination air
equalizer-straightener with self-averaging Pitot tube
traverse station. The LO-flo is fabricated entirely of
Type 316 stainless steel with all welded construction. It
is capable of operation up to 1000ºF and is suitable for
application to corrosive gases within the limitation of the
316 stainless steel construction.
The LO-flo provides highly accurate measurement of low
air volumes of 2 to 2000 CFM for monitoring, indicating,
and controlling applications when coupled with ultra-low
span electronic differential pressure or flow transmitters
(such as the Air Monitor VELTRON II, MASS-tron II, and
VELTRON DPT-plus transmitters).
SPECIFICATIONS
• Accuracy: 2% of actual flow.
• Operating Temperature: Continuous operation to 900°F.
• Maximum Static Pressure: 20 psig.
• Casing: Schedule 5, Type 316 stainless steel pipe.
• Casing Depth:
12" deep for Models P and F.
12" deep plus the depth of two transitions for Models R and FR.
See rear cover for detailed dimensions.
• Flanges: 150 lb. raised face, Type 316 stainless steel for Models F and FR.
• Air Equalizer – Straightener Cell: G
Type 316 welded stainless steel cell.
2" deep x ⅛″ cell for sizes ¾" up to 3".
3" deep x ¼" cell for sizes 4" up to 8".
• Total Pressure Manifold: Type 316 stainless steel tubing.
• Static Pressure Chamber: Type 316 stainless steel.
• Signal Connections: ¼" FPT.
• Special Construction:14 ga, 10 ga, and ¼" plate flanges. Integral RTD temperature sensor and transmitter. PVC,
Inconel, Hastelloy, etc., materials of construction.

Nozzle Pitot Flow Station

ACCU-flo / NP
DESCRIPTION
The ACCU-flo/NP is a combination precision nozzle and
multipoint self-averaging Fechheimer Pitot airflow measuring
station. When combined with an ultra high accuracy
transmitter such as Air Monitor’s VELTRON II, MASS-tron
II or VELTRON DPT-plus, the ACCU-flo/NP provides high
accuracy (±0.5%) flow measurement for process monitoring
and control applications. Due to the combined effect of the
integral flow straightener cell and the nozzle, the ACCU-flo/
NP requires little or no upstream straight run to achieve its
published measurement accuracy. Constructed of either
Type 316 stainless steel or carbon steel with a combination
of welded and bolted flanges, the ACCU-flo/ NP is capable
of operation up to 900ºF and is suitable for application to
corrosive gases within the limitations of Type 316 stainless
steel.
SPECIFICATIONS
• Accuracy: 0.5% of actual flow.
• Operating Temperature: Continuous operation to 900°F.
• Maximum Static Pressure: Dependent on materials of construction, operating temperature, and installation.
• Casing:
Model S. Rolled sheet metal, Type 316 stainless steel.
G Model HP. Pipe, Type 316 stainless or carbon steel.
• Flanges:
Model S. 10 ga. plate, Type 316 stainless steel.
Model HP. 150 lb. raised face flange, stainless or carbon steel.
• Nozzle: Type 316 stainless steel.
• Air Straightener Cell: ¼” or ⅜” hexagonal welded cell, Type 316 stainless steel.
• Total & Static Pressure Sensors: Type 316 stainless steel.
• Signal Fittings: ¼” FPT, stainless or carbon steel to match casing material.
• Non-Recovered Pressure Loss: 42-45% of the velocity head (pressure) for the design flow rate.
• Special Construction: Integral temperature sensor and transmitter. Static pressure port. Temperature port. 316
stainless zeroing valve with ¼" NPTF connection.

Airflow Traverse Probe

VOLU-probe / SM
DESCRIPTION
The VOLU-probe/SM Airflow Traverse Probe is ideally suited for new installations or retrofit applications requiring
accurate flow measurement in pipes or small duct locations having limited straight duct runs. The "tube-in-tube" design
has multiple total and static pressure sensing ports along the length of the probe to traverse the airstream in a single
line across the duct or pipe, providing separately averaged pressures at the signal connections. The VOLU-probe/SM
is suited for clean applications, operating at temperatures ranging from –20 to 900ºF. As a primary flow sensing means,
the OLU-probe/SM can be used in industrial process applications such as fiber quenching, process drying, emission
monitoring, wastewater treatment, etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
• Accuracy: ±2%; dependent upon quantity and
placement of probes to achieve traverse of ducted
airflow.
• Outputs: Averaged signals of static and total pressure.
• Operating Velocity: 100 to 10,000 FPM.
• Directional Sensitivity: Not measurably affected by
directional airflows with pitch and yaw angles up to
30º.
• Traverse Pattern: On an equal area basis for
rectangular probes. On an equal concentric area basis
for circular probes.
• Resistance: Less than 0.1 times the velocity pressure
head at probe operating velocity.
• Construction: All welded construction, utilizing Type
316 stainless steel. 10 ga. plate, 1" MPT, or 150 lb. RF
flange mounting options. G

Stainless Steel Pitot Airflow Traverse Probe

VOLU-probe / SS
DESCRIPTION
The VOLU-probe/SS Stainless Steel Pitot Airflow Traverse Probe is
ideally suited for new installations or retrofit applications requiring
accurate airflow measurement in locations having limited straight
duct runs. Multiple sets of total and static pressure sensing ports
along the entire length of the VOLU-probe/SS traverse the airstream
in a single line across the duct, and average the sensed pressures
in separate manifolds. An array of VOLU-probe/SS probes are used
to properly sense the typically stratified flow to provide an equal
area traverse of an entire duct cross-section. The VOLU-probe/
SS is suited for clean or harsh and particulate laden applications,
operating at temperatures ranging from –20 to 900°F. As a primary
flow sensing means, the VOLU-probe/SS can be used in industrial
process applications ranging from power generation (combustion
airflow), fiber quenching, process drying, emission monitoring, etc.
FEATURES
• No Air Straighteners Required: The VOLU-probe/SS unique dual offset static pressure sensor and patented
chamfered total pressure sensor design permit the accurate measurement of the airflow rate in highly turbulent flow
locations (with directional yaw and pitch varying up to 30º from the duct's longitudinal axis) without the need for
upstream air straightening means.
• Offered in Two Models: The VOLU-probe/SS is offered in two basic configurations to facilitate installation in new or
existing ducts or stacks; the Model 1 for external mounting, and the Model 2 for internal mounting.
G • Negligible Resistance to Airflow: The VOLU-probe/SS cylindrical configuration and smooth surface free of external
sensor protrusions permit the airstream to flow unrestricted around and between the installed traverse probes, creating
a very minimal, if not negligible resistance to airflow (Ex: 0.046 IN w.c. at 2000 fpm air velocity).
• Performs Equal-Weighted Averaging of Flow Signals: Through the use of separate averaging manifolds, the
VOLU-probe/SS instantaneously averages, on an equal-weighted basis, the multiple pressures sensed along the
length of the probe, producing separate "averaged" total pressure and static pressures at the probe's external signal
connections.
• Provides for Equal Area Traverse: Each VOLU-probe/SS contains multiple total and static pressure sensors
specifically and precisely located along the length of the probe to provide an equal area traverse of ducted airflow.
For rectangular duct configurations, the sensors are spaced at equal distances along the probe. For circular duct
configurations, the sensors are located at the centers of the equivalent concentric area along the probe.
• True Velocity Pressure Measurement: The total and static pressure components of airflow measured by the VOLU-
probe/SS can be directly converted in velocity pressure (and velocity) without the use of correction factors, thereby
facilitating flow verification with a Pitot tube or other hand held instrumentation.
• No Sensor Protrusions: The VOLU-probe/SS total and static pressure sensors are all contained within the confines
of the external surface of the probe. There are no protruding sensors to be bent, broken, or otherwise damaged during
installation or possible subsequent removal for inspection or cleaning.
• Rugged Construction Assures Long Service Life: The standard VOLU-probe/SS is fabricated from Type 316
stainless steel using all welded construction. See Page 4 for construction options, and contact Factory for alternate
materials of construction such as Hastelloy, Inconel, Kynar, PVC, etc.

Flow • Electromagnetic Flow Meters
ABB
Electromagnetic Flowmeter
ProcessMaster FEP300, FEP500
DESCRIPTION
The ProcessMaster series of electromagnetic flowmeters offers the industry’s
widest range of liners, electrodes and sizes for demanding process applications
in the chemical, power, oil and gas, pulp and paper and metals and mining
industries. These modular flowmeters improve process control by as much as
60% using innovative signal processing and enhanced noise filtering technology.
The ProcessMaster FEP300 is the standard model designed to detect empty or
partially filled pipes via a TFE electrode. The ProcessMaster FEP500 extends the
functionality and options and is able to detect not only empty or partially filled pipes,
but also gas bubbles or deposits on electrodes.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model ProcessMaster FEP300 ProcessMaster FEP500
Nominal diameter DN 3-DN 2000 (1/1 - 80“) DN 3-DN 2000 (1/10-80“)
Nominal pressure PN 10-PN 100, Cl 150-CI 600 PN 10-PN 100, Cl 150-CI 600
Process connection Flanges in accordance with DIN/EN, ASME, JIS and others Flanges in accordance with DIN/EN, ASME, JIS and others
Lining Hard rubber, soft rubber, PTFE, PFA, ETFE Hard rubber, soft rubber, PTFE, PFA, ETFE
Protection class IP 67 or IP 68 IP 67 or IP 68
Fluid temperature Up to 180 °C (356 °F) Up to 180 °C (356 °F)
Ex approvals ATEX, IEC Zone 1 and Zone 2,FM, CSA Div 1 and Div 2, NEPSI ATEX, IEC Zone 1 and Zone 2, FM, CSA Div 1 and Div 2,
Zone 1 and Zone 2, GOSTATEX, IEC Zone 1 and Zone 2, FM, NEPSI Zone 1 and Zone 2, GOSTATEX, IEC Zone 1 and Zone
CSA Div 1 and Div 2, NEPSI Zone 1 and Zone 2, GOST 2, FM, CSA Div 1 and Div 2, NEPSI Zone 1 and Zone 2, GOST
Inputs/Outputs Analog output (4 to 20 mA), pulse output, contact input/output Analog output (4 to 20 mA), pulse output, contact input/output
Measuring accuracy 0.4 % (optionally 0.2 %) of rate 0.3 % (optionally 0.2 %) of rate
G
Measuring ranges - Two
Graphic display/Navigation Backlit, high-contrast and configurable display with line recorder Backlit, high-contrast and configurable display with line
function intuitive navigation and configuration recorder function intuitive navigation and configuration
General functions Mass units, editable counter Mass units, editable counter
Startup functions - Grounding check
Diagnostics/Monitoring Functions Detection of empty and partially filled pipes Detection of empty and partially filled pipes, gas bubbles or
deposits on electrodes, conductivity monitoring, temperature
monitoring, trend data recording, "fingerprint" technology
Batch functions - Presetting counter, overrun correction, external start/stop,
batch end contact
Verifications/Diagnostic tool ScanMaster, in situ verification software option ScanMaster, in situ verification software option
Hardware options - Versions for extremely abrasive fluids:
• Ceramic carbide liner,
• Tungsten carbide electrodes,
• Double layer electrodes
Communications HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION fieldbus HART, PROFIBUS PA, FOUNDATION fieldbus
Compatibility - Backwards compatible to old sensors installed in the field

Flow • Electromagnetic Flow Meters
Electromagnetic Flowmeter
FSM4000
DESCRIPTION
The flowrate of liquids, slurries, pastes and sludges can be measured
accurately with the FSM4000. The measurement system consists of a
flowmeter sensor (SE41F or SE21) and a transmitter (S4) in a remote
mounted design. It is specially designed to measure involve fast changing
processes, two phase liquids, continuous and pulsating flows (piston
pump application) in the pulp and paper and the food and beverage
industry.
FEATURES
• Measure the flowrate of liquids, slurries, pastes and sludges with an electrical conductivity of at least 20 µS/cm (opt.
5/0.5 µS/cm)
• Measurements of high pulp stock with consistencies up to 15% oven dry
• High accuracy
• Backwards compatible with older (up to 20 years) flowmeter sensors
• HART, PROFIBUS PA and Foundation Fieldbus communications
• Digital signal processing (DSP) and zero stability ensure long-term stability and accuracy in both flow directions
• Enhanced diagnostic functions and monitoring of coil and electrode
• Verification via fingerprint.
• Pressure equipment designed according to PED Directive 97/23 EC
• Meter size 1/25 to 40“ with a variety of process connection styles and sizes
• Hygienic certification: 3A, EHEDG
• Liners, PFA, PTFE, ETFE, hard or soft rubber, ceramic carbide
• Standardized installation lengths for DIN, ASME B16.5 or JIS B2210-10K flanges
• AC/DC supply power
G
SPECIFICATIONS
Model FSM4000-SE21 FSM4000-SE41F
Applications Hygienic design for food and pharmaceutical industries with Flowmeter system for all applications with flanged
variety of process connections connection
Housing Stainless Steel Aluminium
Meter size 1/25 - 4 in. (DN 1 - DN 100) 1/25 - 4 in. (DN 1- DN 100)
Accuracy 0.5 % of rate 0.5 % of rate
Linings PFA, PEEK, Torlon PFA, PTFE, hard rubber, soft rubber, ceramic carbide;
others available on request
Process connections Wafer, threaded pipe connection, weld stubs, Tri-Clamp, Flanged
external thread and hygiene connections
Fluid temperature -13°F to 266 °F -13°F to 356 °F
Ambient temperature -13°F to 140°F -13°F to 140°F
CIP / SIP Water/Steam max 150 °C (302 °F) / 1h -
Output Current output 0/4 to 20 mA; Pulse output: passive or active, Current output 0/4 to 20 mA; Pulse output: passive or
switchable; Configurable contact output/input active, switchable; Configurable contact output/input
Communication HART, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus HART, PROFIBUS PA, Foundation Fieldbus
Power Supply 85 to 253 V AC / 24 V DC 85to 253 V AC / 24 V DC
Certificates 3-A approval, FDA approval, EHEDG -

Flow • Flow Transmitters, Monitors & Computers
Blancett
Flow Monitor
B3000 Series
FEATURES
• Robust alarm parameters provide faster warning when
something changes in the process or pipeline.
• Greater control, greater visibility of batch operations.
• Advanced connectivity options allow you to connect
meters to your network for remote monitoring and
process automation capabilities.
• Solar, battery, and 4-20 milliamperes loop power options
provide a number of benefits including: ability to install
in remote location and be up and running immediately,
maintain readings and settings during power loss, and
battery-life up to 8 years.
• Updated display and totalization options provide more
flow information including simultaneous display of rate
and total as well as standard, batch and grand totals.
• Various mounting and enclosure options ensure there is
a B3000 model for your operation.
G
HOW TO ORDER

B30
X X XX
Table 1 Model Table 2 Mounting Style

B Base M Meter
A Advanced A Remote (cable sold separately)
S Solar S Swivel
W Explosion-Proof(Base)* - Loop Power Only Table 3 Units of Measure
X Explosion-Proof(Base)* - Battery and Loop Power CS Customer Selectable
Y Explosion-Proof(Advanced)* - Loop Power Only * For hazardous locations the monitor must be installed on an Explosion-Proof rated
Z Explosion-Proof(Advanced)* - Battery and Loop Power meter.
To maintain compliance, optional kit P/N B280-737 for meter mounting is required.

Dynamic Flow Computers
Single Meter Flow Computers

E-Chart
DESCRIPTION
The E-Chart is single meter run, custody flow computer
for liquid or gas applications featuring one digital/ status/
frequency input, two digital/switch outputs, one analog
output and one RS-232/RS-485 communication port. A
second port is available with a WDS upgrade.
FEATURES
• Easy to Set Up
• Custody Compliant
• Multifunctional
• Single Screen Graphical Diagnostic
• Alerts Against Operator Errors
• Software Generated Chart Recordings
• Interactive DYNACOM Configuration Software
• All Software/Firmware Updates Available Online
• Available with Multivariable Transmitter
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Output
Electrical/Conduit Two 3/4" NPT Digital/Switch/Pulse Two outputs 5-28 VDC
Connections: One 1” NPT Output
G Housing (Flow
Computer):
Material: copper free aluminum
Painting: epoxy or polyurethane.
Analog Output One output (16 bit) 4-20mA
Communication
Classification: NEMA 4X class 1 div. 1 – IP66
RS232/485 Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Display: Text - 8 lines x 16 characters
Graphics – 64 x 128 pixels RS232 (w/ Elbow Option) Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Terminal Blocks: Easily accessible; removable for easy connection Protocol MODBUS® RTU/ASCII
Certifications: CSA for class 1, div. 1, groups B, C and D Optional Modem, Radio, Bluetooth
UL for class I, zone 1, AEx d IIB+H2
Diagnostic
Temperature Limits: Operation: -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C)
Storage: -50 to 190 °F (-46 to 87 °C) Multivariable: P, DP, T
Analog inputs/outputs
Humidity: 100% Digital/switch inputs
Digital/switch outputs
Electrical Monitor/Alarm
Pulse/frequency inputs
Voltage 7 to 24 VDC Internal temperature
Battery voltage
Power Consumption 0.3 watt
Internal power supply
Solar Board (Optional) 10/20 watts, 12 volts
Flow Computation
UPS (Optional) 7 day operation
Primary Elements: Orifice, V-Cone, Wedge, Annubar, Venturi,
Processor 32 bits @ 16.7Mhz Turbine, PD, Vortex, Ultrasonic
Flash ROM 4 MB @ 70 Nano Seconds Equations: AGA8 methods 1, 2, and detailed; 24A,B,C;
Steam NBS
RAM 2 MB @ 70 Nano Seconds Others added continuously
Real Time Clock Years/Months/Days/Hours/Minutes Consult factory for complete list
Input
Digital/Switch/Frequency One input 5-28 VDC
Input


E-Lite
DESCRIPTION
The E-Lite is a single meter run, custody flow computer
for liquid or gas applications. The E-Lite comes with
1 RTD input OR two 4-20mA analog inputs. It also
includes 1 RS-232/RS-485 communication port with a
second port available with a WDS upgrade. With the
EXP Expansion two 4-20mA/1-5VDC analog inputs, two
1-30VDC analog/status/frequency inputs, two digital/
switch output and one 4-20mA analog output are added.
FEATURES
• Easy to Set Up
• Multifunctional
Physical Input/Output
Electrical/Conduit Two 3/4" NPT Analog Input One 4-20mA (or 0-5VDC) input
Connections: One 1” NPT
Housing (Flow Computer): Material: copper free aluminum
RTD Input One RTD input (Direct connection to flow
computer uses one of the analog input channels)
G
Diagnostic
Multivariable: P, DP, T
RTD Connection: To flow computer terminal block
Display: Text - 8 lines x 16 characters Digital/switch inputs
Graphics – 64 x 128 pixels Digital/switch outputs
Monitor/Alarm
Terminal Blocks: Easily accessible; removable for easy connection
Internal temperature
Certifications: CSA for class 1, div. 1, groups B, C and D Battery voltage
UL for Class I, zone 1, AEx d IIB+H2 Internal power supply
Temperature Limits: Operation: -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) Communication
Storage: -50 to 190 °F (-46 to 87 °C)
RS232/485 Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Humidity: 100%
RS232 (w/Elbow Option) Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Electrical
Protocol MODBUS® RTU/ASCII
Voltage 7 to 24 VDC
Optional Modem, Radio, Bluetooth
Flow Computation
Primary Elements Orifice, V-Cone, Wedge, Annubar,
UPS (Optional) 7 day backup Venturi,Turbine, PD, Vortex, Ultrasonic
Processor 32 bits @ 16.7Mhz Equations AGA8 methods 1, 2, and detailed; 24A,B,C;
Steam NBS
Flash ROM 4 MB @ 70 Nano seconds Others added continuously
RAM 2 MB @ 70 Nano seconds Consult factory for complete list
Extended Memory 128 MB virtual hard disk

(Optional)
Real Time Clock Years/Months/Days/Hours/Minutes


E-Plus
DESCRIPTION
The E-Plus is a single meter run (up to three meter runs),
custody flow computers for liquid or has applications. It
features three 4-20mA/1-5VDC analog inputs, one RTD
input (direct connection to the flow computer uses two of
the analog input channels), one 4-20mA analog output, one
digital/status input, two digital/switch outputs, two frequency
inputs (frequency input uses one digital input or output
channel) and one RS-232/RS-485 communication port. A
second port is available with a WDS upgrade.
FEATURES
• Easy to Set Up
• Multifunctional
Physical Input
Electrical/Conduit Two 3/4" NPT Analog Input Three 4-20mA (or 0-5V) inputs
Connections: One 1” NPT
Digital/Switch Input One input (4 optional with slow pulse) 5-28 VDC
G Housing (Flow
Computer):
Material: copper free aluminum
Frequency Input Two inputs (Frequency inputs uses one digital input
channel and/or one digital output)
RTD One RTD input (Direct connection to flow computer
RTD Connection: To flow computer terminal block
uses two of the analog input channels)
Display: Text - 8 Lines x 16 characters
Output
Graphics – 64 x 128 pixels
Digital/Switch/Pulse Two outputs
Terminal Blocks: Easily accessible; removable for easy connection
Output 8-28 VDC
Certifications: CSA for class 1, div. 1, groups B, C and D
Analog Output One output (16 bit) 4-20mA
UL for class I, zone 1, AEx d IIB+H2
Communication
Temperature Limits: Operation: -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C)
Storage: -50 to 190 °F (-46 to 87 °C) RS232/485 Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Humidity: 100% RS232(w/Elbow Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Option)
Electrical
Voltage 10 to 28 VDC
Optional Modem, Radio, Bluetooth
Diagnostic
Multivariable: P, DP, T
UPS (Optional) 7 day backup
Processor 32 bits @ 16.7Mhz Digital/switch inputs
Digital/switch outputs
Flash ROM 4 MB @ 70 Nano seconds Monitor/Alarm
RAM 2 MB @ 70 Nano seconds Internal temperature
Battery voltage
Real Time Clock Years/Months/Days/Hours/Minutes Internal power supply
Flow Computation
Primary Elements Orifice, V-Cone, Wedge, Annubar, Venturi,Turbine,
PD, Vortex, Ultrasonic, etc.
Equations AGA8 methods 1, 2, and detailed; 24A,B,C; Steam
NBS. Others added continuously - Consult factory
for complete list

Bi-Directional Flow Computers

MicroMV
DESCRIPTION
The MicroMV is a 32-bit, dual meter Run, custody flow computer for liquid, industrial
gas and natural gas applications. This flow computer features three frequency channels,
four analog inputs, one analog output, four digital I/O's, one RS-232 port, two RS-485
ports, one Printer output and a Rosemount multivariable transmitter. An input or output
expansion module is also available.
FEATURES
• Easy to Set Up
• Multifunctional
SPECIFICATIONS
Input
• Micro MV100 - Four 4-20mA or 0-5VDC Analog Inputs
Four 4-20mA (or 0-5Vdc) inputs (expandable to 9
(24 Bit), One 4-20mA Analog Output (16 Bit) Analog Input
inputs) Resolution 24 bits
• Micro MV 100 XI - Nine 4-20mA or 0-5VDC Analog
Pulse/Frequency Three inputs
Inputs (24 Bit), One 4-20mA Analog Output (16 Bit) Input
• Micro MV 100 XO-Four 4-20mA or 0-5VDC Analog Inputs Digital/Switch Input Four inputs (4 mutual contacts software selectable to
(24 Bit), Four 4-20mA Analog Outputs (16 Bit) be input or output – see Digital Output*)
RTD Input Direct connection to flow computer (RTD connection to
SPECIFICATIONS flow computer uses two of the analog input channels)
Physical Output
Electrical/Conduit Two 3/4" NPT Digital/Switch/ Four outputs (4 mutual contacts software selectable to G
Connections One 1” NPT Pulse Output be input or output – see Digital Input*)
Housing (Flow Material: copper free aluminum Analog Output One output (expandable to 4) 4-20mA
Computer) Painting: epoxy or polyurethane.
Communication
RS485 Quantity 2 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
RTD Connection To flow computer terminal block
RS232 Quantity 1 @ 1200 – 19200 bps
Display Plasma; 4 lines x 20 characters each line. With
back light; four non-intrusive keys for configuration, Printer Port Quantity 1
operation, and calibration
Certifications CSA for class 1, civ. 1, groups B, C and D
UL for class I, zone 1, AEx d IIB+H2 Optional Modem, Radio, Ethernet, Bluetooth
Temperature Limits Operation: -40 to 185 °F (-40 to 85 °C) Disgnostic

Storage: -50 to 190 °F (-46 to 87 °C) Multivariable: P, DP, T
Humidity 100% Analog inputs/outputs
Digital/switch inputs
Electrical Digital/switch outputs
Monitor/Alarm
Voltage 7 to 28 VDC
Internal temperature
Power 0.5 watt Battery voltage
Consumption Internal power supply
Solar Board 10/20 watts, 12 volts Flow Computation
(Optional)
Number of Trains Three bi-directional (dependent on application)
UPS (Optional) 2 day operation
Flow Calculation Simultaneous gas and liquid
Processor 32 bits @ 16.7Mhz
Primary Elements Orifice, V-Cone, Wedge, Annubar, Venturi, etc.
Memory 2 MB, 35 day storage Turbine, PD, Vortex, Ultrasonic.
Extended Memory 128 MB virtual hard disk Equations AGA3, API14.3, AGA7, AGA9, API5.6, API5.7, AGA8
(Optional) methods 1, 2, and detailed; API 2540; API11-2-1,
11-2-1M; 11-2,2, 11-2-2M; GPA15, 16; API2565; tables
Real Time Clock Years/Months/Days/Hours/Minutes
5A,B; 6A,B,C; 23A,B,C; 24A,B,C; 53A,B; 54A,B,C; 23
and 24. Others added continuously Consult factory for
complete list

Air Monitor Corporation
Ultra Low Range Pressure & Flow “Smart”

Transmitter
VELTRON DPT-plus
DESCRIPTION
The VELTRON DPT-plus ultra-low range pressure and flow
"smart" transmitter is designed to convert the low magnitude
pressure signal generated by airflow station or probe, and
a temperature input into 4-20mA signals proportional and
linear to flow (or pressure) and temperature. The VELTRON
DPT-plus is equipped with AUTO-zero for the elimination of
zero error due to thermal, electric, or mechanical effects. The
VELTRON DPT-plus is packaged in a NEMA 4X enclosure
with industry-standard process connections. The integral
LCD display provides a continuous readout of the measured
process and two additional lines of operating data.
FEATURES
• Available in multiple natural spans covering the range of
0.05 IN w.c. to 10.0 IN w.c. with an accuracy of 0.1% of
natural span.
• On-board microprocessor performs the functions of
operating parameter selection, transmitter configuration,
input/output and display signal scaling, and transducer
calibration.
• Imbedded software performs span, flow, and 3-point "K" factor calculations.
• Operating span can be electronically selected anywhere between the Natural Span and 40% of Natural Span,
G without having to perform recalibration with an external pressure source.
• Air Density Correction: Capable of accepting a process temperature input to perform density correction to
volumetric or mass flow.
• High Turndown Ratio Operation: Furnished with a transducer automatic zeroing circuit and can maintain linear
output signals on applications requiring 10 to 1 velocity (100 to 1 pressure) turndown.
• Continuous Display of Process: Multi-line, backlit, graphical LCD for use during transmitter configuration and
calibration, and to display multiple measured processes in engineering units.
• Factory Mutual approved for Explosion Proof: Class 1, Division 1, Groups B, C, D; Dust Ignition Proof: Class II, III,
Division 1, Groups E, F, G; Suitable for indoor and outdoor NEMA Type 4X hazardous locations.

Ultra Low Range Pressure & Flow Transmitter

VELTRON DPT
DESCRIPTION
The VELTRON DPT ultra-low range pressure and flow transmitter
is designed to receive signals of space or duct pressurization and
reference pressures from static pressure sensors, or signals of total
and static pressure from an airflow station or traverse probe(s), and
convert the sensed differential pressure into a 4-20mADC current
output signal proportional and linear to the static or velocity pressure.
The VELTRON DPT is packaged in a NEMA Type 4X enclosure with
industry-standard process connections, and is 2-wire loop powered.
An optional integral LCD digital display provides local indication of
the measured process in appropriate engineering units (i.e IN w.c.;
CFM; lb/hr; %, etc.). A pair of test terminals exists on the output
terminal board that can be used for calibration and test purposes.
FEATURES
• Available in multiple natural spans covering the range of 0.10 IN
w.c. to 10.0 IN w.c. with an accuracy of ±0.5% of Natural Span.•
Maintains linear output signals on applications requiring 5 to 1
velocity or pressure turndown.
• Primary Signal Noise Filter eliminates background noise and
pulsations from the flow signal.
• Factory Mutual approved for Explosion Proof: Class 1, Division 1,
Groups B, C, D; Dust Ignition Proof: Class II, III, Division 1, Groups
E, F, G; Suitable for indoor and outdoor NEMA Type 4X hazardous
locations.
G

Microprocessor Based “Smart” Transmitter

VELTRON II
DESCRIPTION
The VELTRON II is an ultra-low differential pressure
"smart" transmitter designed to convert the low magnitude
pressure signals generated by airflow stations and
probes, or static pressure sensors into dual transmitter
output signals (4- 20mA, 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC) linear
to pressure or flow. Each VELTRON II is equipped with
numerous standard features: A multi-line LCD used
during configuration/calibration and for display of process;
AUTO-zero for elimination of transmitter zero error; user
selectable primary signal noise filter, input power isolation;
capability of 10:1 flow or 100:1 pressure turndown; NEMA
1 enclosure, and a long list of construction options.
FEATURES
• Integral multi-line digital display for use during the
configuration and calibration process, and to display one
transmitter output during normal operating mode.
• Available in multiple natural spans covering the range of
0.05 IN w.c. to 10.0 IN w.c. with an accuracy of 0.1% of
natural span.
• Furnished with a transducer automatic zeroing circuit and be capable of maintaining linear output signals on
applications requiring 10 to 1 velocity (100 to 1 pressure) turndown.
• Operating span electronically selected without having to perform recalibration involving an external pressure
G source.
• Options include external tempurature input, denistiy correction for absolute pressure and tempreature, intengral
P,I,1/D three-mode controller, second transmitter to perform flow calculations and more.


MASS-tron II
DESCRIPTION
Via the addition of both process temperature and pressure
compensation, the ultra high accuracy VELTRON II
becomes the MASS-tron II multi-variable mass flow
transmitter. The process temperature input is an analog
signal from a remote 4-wire or loop powered temperature
transmitter; with the MASS-tron II having the capability
of performing the linearization. The process pressure
is measured by means of an internal absolute pressure
transducer connected to the transmitter’s static pressure
signal input.
FEATURES
• Via the addition of both process temperature and
pressure compensation, the ultra high accuracy
VELTRON II becomes the MASS-tron II multi-variable
mass flow transmitter.
• Integral multi-line digital display for use during the
configuration and calibration process, and to display one
transmitter output during normal operating mode.
• Available in multiple natural spans covering the range of 0.05 IN w.c. to 10.0 IN w.c. with an accuracy of 0.1% of
natural span.
• Furnished with a transducer automatic zeroing circuit and be capable of maintaining linear output signals on
applications requiring 10 to 1 velocity (100 to 1 pressure) turndown.
• Operating span electronically selected without having to perform recalibration involving an external pressure
source. G
• Analog Output: 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20mA for process differential pressure, temperature, and absolute
pressure.
• Analog Input: 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20mA for process temperature.
• Temperature Compensation Selection. Pushbutton selection of linearized or non-linearized input, thermocouple or
100 ohm platinum RTD temperature sensor type (E, T, J, K, RTD).
• Pressure Compensation: Absolute pressure (atmospheric or duct static), up to 60 IN Hg.


VEL-trol II
DESCRIPTION
The VEL-trol II is an ultra-low differential pressure
"smart" transmitter-controller designed to convert the
low magnitude pressure signals generated by airflow
stations and probes, or static pressure sensors into dual
transmitter output signals (4-20mA, 0-5VDC or 0-10VDC)
linear to pressure or flow, and compares this process
signal against user selectable setpoint to generate
a P,I,1/D analog controller output. Each VEL-trol II is
equipped with numerous standard features: A multi-line
LCD used during configuration/calibration and for display
of process; AUTO-zero for elimination of transmitter
zero error; user selectable primary signal noise filter,
input power isolation; capability of 10:1 flow or 100:1
pressure turndown; NEMA 1 enclosure, and a long list of
construction options.
FEATURES
• Analog Output: 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20mA for
controller output.
• Analog Input: 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC or 4-20mA for controller
external setpoint.
• Digital Input: Dry contact for soft start command.

Flow • Sight Flow Indicators
ANSI 150# Sight Flow Indicators

Penberthy
SF Series
DESCRIPTION
Penberthy’s Sight Flow Indicators provide a window into piping. The process flow stream
can be monitored by observation through the sight window. A wide variety of indicators
enhance flow characteristics. These ANSI 150# rated units are used in Power Piping,
Refrigeration, Petroleum, Petro Chemical and general processing industries. Available in
NPT threaded end and flanged designs and made from a single piece, cast construction
bodies.
FEATURES
• 150# class available with threaded or flanged connections
• Five indication styles available
• Single piece cast body
• Lined units available to satisfy most corrosive environments
• Visible indications allows flow characteristic to be observed
• Instruments taps allow insertion of addition monitoring equipment
• Other materials of construction, sizes, special applications and connections available upon request
Indicator Types
Plain Used in a liquid application where there is a visual contrast between liquid presence and absence. Contrast in the form of color, tint, hue, clarity, or
turbulence indicates variation in flow. Any orientation of flow can be observed.
Flapper Used in liquid application where there is a great enough mass impact to lift the weight of the flapper. A hinged flapper indicates variation in flow by its
position. Transparent or slightly opaque fluids can be monitored. Horizontal and vertical upward flow can be observed.
Rotator Used in a fluid application where there is great enough liquid mass impact to spin the Teflon rotator paddle wheels. A spinning motion indicates
variation in flow, ideal for darker color solutions where contrast color is better, translucent liquids and clear solutions. Any orientation of flow can be
observed.
Drip Tube Used in a fluid application where there is a formation of liquid droplets. Condensation collecting on the tub indicates variation in flow. Distillation and
similar processes with intermittent flow can be monitored. Horizontal or vertical downward flow can be observed. G
Gaseous Used in detecting low velocity fluid streams, gas leaks, chemical reaction pressures exceeded that of atmosphere, low velocity flow streams from
natural gas wells and presence of superheated steam not exceeding 500°F. Can be used in a fluid application where there is an air equivalent
mass impact at a velocity of 2 feet per second or greater. When fluid meets fringed indicator sheet, the material flutters indicating flow. Flapper has
excellent wear resistance, heat resistance and anti-friction characteristics and works in temperature ranges from -400°F to 500°F. Transparent or
slightly opaque fluids can be monitored. Fluid medium can be either dry or wet gas. Most effective in horizontal applications but can be used in vertical
upward applications.
Standard Materials of Indicator Type & Model

Description Connection Sizes Temperature
Construction Plain Flapper (F) Rotator (R) Drip Tube (D) Gaseous (G)
ANSI 150# NPTF ¼" - 3" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, SF SFF SFR SFD SFG
316 Stainless Steel
ANSI 150# Flanged ½" - 3" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, SF-F SFF-F SFR-F SFD-F SFG-F
316 Stainless Steel
*Standard materials of construction for indicator components such as gaskets, connections and covers may differ from those listed above.

High Pressure Sight Flow Indicators

SM, SH Series
DESCRIPTION
The SM and SH Series come with flange connections and meet tough
ANSI 300# and 600# standards. They are made from a single piece, cast
construction bodies and are to be used in industries with high pressure
pipelines including power piping, refrigeration, petroleum, petro chemical
and general processing industries. Applications for these sight flow indicators
include naturally occurring high pressure wells, long distance pumping,
observing processes that require chemicals to be in their liquid state, which
is only achieved by keeping the chemical under pressure at all times and
transporting them via high pressure pumps.
FEATURES
• ANSI 300# and 600# for high pressure indication
• Flanged connections
Indicator Types
Plain Used in a liquid application where there is a visual contrast between liquid presence and absence. Contrast in the form of color, tint, hue, clarity, or
G Flapper Used in liquid application where there is a great enough mass impact to lift the weight of the flapper. A hinged flapper indicates variation in flow by its
Rotator Used in a fluid application where there is great enough liquid mass impact to spin the Teflon rotator paddle wheels. A spinning motion indicates
variation in flow, ideal for darker color solutions where contrast color is better, translucent liquids and clear solutions. Any orientation of flow can be
observed.
similar processes with intermittent flow can be monitored. Horizontal or vertical downward flow can be observed.
Gaseous Used in detecting low velocity fluid streams, gas leaks, chemical reaction pressures exceeded that of atmosphere, low velocity flow streams from
natural gas wells and presence of superheated steam not exceeding 500°F. Can be used in a fluid application where there is an air equivalent
mass impact at a velocity of 2 feet per second or greater. When fluid meets fringed indicator sheet, the material flutters indicating flow. Flapper has
excellent wear resistance, heat resistance and anti-friction characteristics and works in temperature ranges from -400°F to 500°F. Transparent or
slightly opaque fluids can be monitored. Fluid medium can be either dry or wet gas. Most effective in horizontal applications but can be used in vertical
upward applications.

ANSI 300# Flanged ½" - 8" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, SM-F SMF-F SMR-F SMD-F SMG-F
316 Stainless Steel
ANSI 600# Flanged ½" - 8" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, SH-F SHF-F SHR-F SHD-F SHG-F
316 Stainless Steel

Dual Sight Flow Indicators

DW Series
DESCRIPTION
Dual Sight Flow Indicators have an extra glass on each side of the
sight flow. In the event there is a failure of one piece of glass the other
glass or window can withstand the pressure until repairs are made.
These models are comprised of two glass discs held in position by
a metallic housing, shims and gaskets. Dual-Window Sight Flow
Indicators and Factory Mutual System Approved Dual-Window Sight
Flow indicators are available in 150# NPT models and 150# and 300#
flanged models. These ANSI rated units are used in power piping,
refrigeration, petroleum, petro chemical and general processing
industries. The double tempered glass window design provides
protection in applications where there is external mechanical impact,
abnormal compressive forces, thermal shock and corrosion/erosion.
FEATURES
• 150# Class available with threaded and flanged connections
Indicator Types
Plain Used in a liquid application where there is a visual contrast between liquid presence and absence. Contrast in the form of color, tint, hue, clarity, or turbu-
lence indicates variation in flow. Any orientation of flow can be observed. G
Flapper Used in liquid application where there is a great enough mass impact to lift the weight of the flapper. A hinged flapper indicates variation in flow by its posi-
tion. Transparent or slightly opaque fluids can be monitored. Horizontal and vertical upward flow can be observed.
Rotator Used in a fluid application where there is great enough liquid mass impact to spin the Teflon rotator paddle wheels. A spinning motion indicates variation in
flow, ideal for darker color solutions where contrast color is better, translucent liquids and clear solutions. Any orientation of flow can be observed.
Drip Tube Used in a fluid application where there is a formation of liquid droplets. Condensation collecting on the tub indicates variation in flow. Distillation and similar
processes with intermittent flow can be monitored. Horizontal or vertical downward flow can be observed.
Gaseous Used in detecting low velocity fluid streams, gas leaks, chemical reaction pressures exceeded that of atmosphere, low velocity flow streams from natural
gas wells and presence of superheated steam not exceeding 500°F. Can be used in a fluid application where there is an air equivalent mass impact at a
velocity of 2 feet per second or greater. When fluid meets fringed indicator sheet, the material flutters indicating flow. Flapper has excellent wear resistance,
heat resistance and anti-friction characteristics and works in temperature ranges from -400°F to 500°F. Transparent or slightly opaque fluids can be moni-
tored. Fluid medium can be either dry or wet gas. Most effective in horizontal applications but can be used in vertical upward applications.

Dual Window 150#, NPTF 1/4" - 3" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 DWF DWFF DWFR DWFD DWFG
Threaded Stainless Steel. For FM Approved
Models: Carbon Steel, Stainless
Steel, Alloy 20
Dual Window 150#, Flanged 1/2" - 8" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 DWF-F DWFF-F DWFR-F DWFD-F DWFG-F
Flanged Stainless Steel. For FM Approved
Steel, Alloy 20
Dual Window 300# Flanged 1/2" -8" Up to 500° F Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 DWM-F DWMF-F DWMR-F DWMD-F DWMG-F
Stainless Steel. For FM Approved
Steel, Alloy 20

Threaded Sight Flow Indicator

ST Series
DESCRIPTION
Penberthy Threaded Sight Flow Indicators are available in NPT threaded
design and have windows which are screwed into the single-piece cast sight
flow body. All 5 indicators styles are available with for the ST Series. The
threaded window design is an alternative style that is interchangeable with
most applications using ANSI 150# sight flow indicators with bolt-on covers.
Instead of unbolting the outer glass cover, these threaded windows are
removed for cleaning or replacement with a spanner wrench. The spanner
wrenches have a ½” drive socket to be used with a torque wrench and are
available from Penberthy.
FEATURES
• 150# Class with threaded end design and threaded covers
• No bolting required
Indicator Types
lence indicates variation in flow. Any orientation of flow can be observed.
Flapper Used in liquid application where there is a great enough mass impact to lift the weight of the flapper. A hinged flapper indicates variation in flow by its
Rotator Used in a fluid application where there is great enough liquid mass impact to spin the Teflon rotator paddle wheels. A spinning motion indicates variation
in flow, ideal for darker color solutions where contrast color is better, translucent liquids and clear solutions. Any orientation of flow can be observed.
G Drip Tube Used in a fluid application where there is a formation of liquid droplets. Condensation collecting on the tub indicates variation in flow. Distillation and
Gaseous Used in detecting low velocity fluid streams, gas leaks, chemical reaction pressures exceeded that of atmosphere, low velocity flow streams from natural
gas wells and presence of superheated steam not exceeding 500°F. Can be used in a fluid application where there is an air equivalent mass impact at
a velocity of 2 feet per second or greater. When fluid meets fringed indicator sheet, the material flutters indicating flow. Flapper has excellent wear resis-
tance, heat resistance and anti-friction characteristics and works in temperature ranges from -400°F to 500°F. Transparent or slightly opaque fluids can
be monitored. Fluid medium can be either dry or wet gas. Most effective in horizontal applications but can be used in vertical upward applications.
Indicator Type & Model

Standard Materials of
Description Connection Size Temperature
Threaded Window NPTF ¼" - 2" Up to 500° F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon STW STWF STWR STWD STWG
Steel, 316 Stainless Steel

Full-View Sight Flow Indicators

SN Series
DESCRIPTION
The SN Series provides 360° viewing area expanding the number of positions and
locations in which the unit can be mounted for full visibility. These units are designed
to provide maximum viewing of process fluid in transit in low pressure applications.
Customized lengths up to 48” in 1/8” increments are available. Designing the
indicator to match the pipe diameter streamlines the liquid flow through the sight flow
and helps to avoid solids settling.
Best suited for vertical applications, but horizontal mounting is acceptable if there is no mechanical strain imposed
on the glass cylinder. Flanged mounting studs are provided with the flanged models (SNV-F and SNVD-F) for
convenient flange to flange connections thereby reducing the possibility of damaging the glass or flange by selecting an
inappropriate bolt size or torqueing the indicator beyond its proper limit.
FEATURES
• Can be mounted either vertical or horizontal
• Allows 360° observation of liquid in transit
• Matches pipe diameter and helps avoid settling of solids
• Made of ductile iron but other materials of construction, sizes, special applications and connections available upon
request
• Industries using this type of unit are distillation, consumer products – soaps and detergents, fuels and beverage,
chemicals and dyes, agricultural, polymers and pharmaceuticals.
Indicator Types
lence indicates variation in flow. Any orientation of flow can be observed.
G
Description Connection Size Temperature Standard Materials of Construction Drip Tube
Plain
(D)
Full-View, Threaded NPT ⅛" - 2" Up to 600°F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 Stainless Steel SNV
Full-View, Flanged Flanged ½" - 6" Up to 600°F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 Stainless Steel SNV-F SNVD-F
Full-View, Large Cylinder, NPT ¼" - 2" Up to 600°F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 Stainless Steel SNL
Threaded
Full-View, Threaded NPT ½” - 2" Up to 600°F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 Stainless Steel SNVD

Armored Full View Sight Flow Indicators

SA Series
DESCRIPTION
Armored Full View Indicators (Model SA) provide a viewing area of
200°. These units are designed to provide maximum viewing of process
fluid in low pressure applications. Units can be mounded in vertical or
horizontal orientations. The glass sheath is designed to protect the glass
from external mechanical hits. The body is not considered a wetted
component, and the medium passing through the indicators comes in
contact with only the glass and the connection ends.
Designing the indicator to match the pipe diameter streamlines the liquid flow through the sight flow and helps to avoid
solids settling. Flange mounting studs are provided with the SAV-F models for convenient flange-to-flange connections
thereby reducing the possibility of damaging the glass or flange by selecting an inappropriate bolt size or torqueing the
indicator beyond its proper limit.
FEATURES
• Available in NPT and flanged models
• Provide additional strength
• Maximum viewing area, over 200°, allows observation of liquid in transit dynamically
• Can be mounted either vertical or horizontal
• Armored sheath provide glass protection
• Matches pipe diameter and helps avoid settling of solids
• Industries using this type of unit are distillation, consumer products – soaps and detergents, fuels and beverage,
chemicals and dyes, agricultural, polymers and pharmaceuticals.
Indicator Types
G Plain Used in a liquid application where there is a visual contrast between liquid presence and absence. Contrast in the form of color, tint, hue, clarity, or

Description Connection Size Temperature Standard Materials of Construction
Plain
Armored Full View, Threaded NPT ¼" - 2" Up to 600°F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 Stainless Steel SAV
Armored Full View, Flanged Flanged ½ - 3" Up to 600°F Hex Brass, Carbon Steel and 316 Stainless Steel Barstock SAV-F
Armored Full View, Screw In Screw In ¼" - 1-½" Up to 600°F Ductile Iron, Bronze, Carbon Steel, 316 Stainless Steel SAV-S

Sight Windows
DESCRIPTION
Penberthy Sight Windows offer a variety of simple sight windows, which
can be directly mounted to the vessel either by threaded connection
or by welding to the vessel wall. These windows are used when direct
readings are required for the liquid process within a tank or pressure
vessel.
Threaded
Available with brass or stainless steel retaining rings, these windows
can be used anywhere that a ¼” to 3” piping “T” or female NPT exists.
Available rated at either ANSI 150# or 300# using tempered borosilicate
glass. The outer retaining ring compresses the glass between the
gasket and cushion.
Conventional
Conventional sight windows conform to ASTM specifications and are
available with vision diameters ranging from 1-1/16” to 9” depending on
the model and size selected.
Oblong
Oblong sight windows increase the viewing length beyond that of
conventional sight windows. The angle of vision into a tank or vessel
is enhanced so that more of the process liquid can be observed from
a single viewing location. Designed for 150 psig operating pressure
and 500°F, these sight windows can be specified with a flat or radius
welding pad. The oblong sight window is mounted directly to the vessel
wall.
FEATURES
• Wide range of sizes and materials
• Direct visualization of process fluids G
• Inexpensive method of monitoring process liquids
• Over eight different mounting options to fit any tank
configuration
• Trouble free operation
Description Model Sizes Standard Materials of Construction
Threaded Sight Windows, ANSI 150# WTSL ¼" - 3" Hex Brass, Carbon Steel & Stainless Steel barstock
Threaded Sight Windows, ANSI 300# WTSM ¼" - 3" Hex Brass, Carbon Steel & Stainless Steel barstock
Flat Pad Sight Window WP 1" - 8" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Radius Pad Sight Window WPR 1" - 8" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Socketweld Sight Window WS 1" - 3" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Weldneck Sight Window WW 1" - 8" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Threaded (NPT Male) Sight Window WTM 1" - 3" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Threaded (NPT Female) Sight Window WTF 1" - 3" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Flanged Sight Window WF 1" - 8" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Weldneck Flanged Sight Window WFW 1" - 8" Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Oblong Sight Window - Flat Pad WPO 1x6, 2x12, 3x12, 3x18, 4x24 Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel
Oblong Sight Window - Radius Pad WPOR 1x6, 2x12, 3x12, 3x18, 4x24 Carbon Steel, 316L Stainless Steel

Section Cover page
Your One Stop Solution Since 1954
Rawson has over 60 years of experience in assisting our customers reduce their
inventory and streamline their technical (and non-technical) purchases, with the
net result of reducing overhead. We manage over 120 consignment inventory
locations on the Gulf Coast. Rawson personnel typically manage the inventory
counts and replenish the inventory, thereby allowing your warehouse personnel to
perform other tasks. Rawson personnel are trained to be observant and recognize
product overlaps, too many items in stock relative to the demand, and reduce the
amount of old technology items that have newer, less costly replacements.
Main Index
Filters and Regulators

Regulators
Cashco............................................................................................................................. 714
Parker Veriflo.................................................................................................................... 722
Marsh Bellofram................................................................................................................ 730
Filter/Regulators
Numatics........................................................................................................................... 732
713
Filters and Regulators • Regulators
Cashco
Process Pressure Reducing Regulator

Model 1000HP
DESCRIPTION
The Model 1000HP is a high capacity, high pressure regulator used to control downstream pressure between 10 and
300 psig (0.69 and 20.7 Barg). Available in sizes from ½" thru 2" (DN15 thru DN50).
The unique internals design allows use in a multitude of applications, including process fluids, that normal pressure
reducing regulators can not match. The most versatile selfcontained, pressure reducing regulator available to users.
APPLICATIONS
Used primarily in utilities services – saturated steam, superheated steam, industrial gases, fuel oils, compressed air, or
water condensate. Also used in sour gas, chemical and other process services.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ½", ¾", 1", 1-¼", 1-½", 2"
Materials
Body DI, BRZ, CS, 316 SST
Spring chamber DI, BRZ, CS, 316 SST
Trim BR, 416 SST, 316 SST
Seat Metal – SST, Composition – Buna-N, EPR, TFE, F.C. Elastomer
Diaphragm Phos. BRZ, 302 SST, Neoprene, F.C. Elastomer, EPDM
End connections NPT, BSP, flanged, extended pipe ends
Temperature range -325° F to +600° F (special construction to -425° F)
Pressures
Inlet up to 740 psig standard
Outlet 10 to 300 psig
Options Differential construction (single and double diaphragm),
pharmaceutical/food industry and cryogenic construction, NACE
service, numerous industry-specific options

General Service Pressure Reducing Regulator

Model D/DL
DESCRIPTION
The Model D/DL are Cashco’s primary general service, self-contained pressure reducing regulators. The D and DL
versions handle inlet pressures up to 400 psig and 300 psig respectively and outlet pressures ranging from 250 psig
and 150 psig respectively.
APPLICATIONS
These models are utilized for the majority of industrial pressure reducing applications and in all types of fluids including
cryogenic liquids and gases, sour gas, industrial gases, chemicals, as well as the common industrial fluids – water, oil,
steam and compressed air.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model D body size ⅜", ½", ¾", 1"
Model DL body size 1-½", 2"
Materials
Body CI, BRZ, CS, 316 SST
Spring chamber CI, BRZ, CS, 316 SST
Trim BRZ, 416 SST, 316 SST
Seat Metal – BR, SST, Composition – Buna-N, TFE, EPDM
End connections NPT, BSP, flanged, extended nipples
Temperature range -325° F to +400° F
Pressures
Model D Inlet up to 400 psig
Model DL Inlet up to 300 psig
Model D Outlet up to 250 psig
Model DL Outlet up to 150 psig
Options Handwheel and locking lever

Low Pressure Reducing Regulators

Model 1000LP
DESCRIPTION
The Model 1000LP is a high capacity, low pressure regulator used to control downstream pressure between 1 and 30
psig (.07 and 2.1 Barg). Sizes are from ½" through 1" (DN15 through DN25). The unique internals design allows use in
a multitude of applications, including process fluids, that normal pressure reducing regulators can not match.
APPLICATIONS
Used primarily saturated steam, industrial gases, fuel gases, compressed air, water, chemical and other process services.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ½", ¾", 1"
Materials
Spring chamber CI, CS, 316 SST
Trim BR, 416 SST, 316 SST
Seat Metal – SST, Composition – Buna-N, EPR, TFE, F.C. Elastomer
End connections NPT, BSP, flanged, extended pipe ends
Pressures
Inlet up to 450 psig standard
Outlet 1 to 30 psig
Options Similar to options for 1000 HP

High Pressure Reducing Regulator

Model HP
DESCRIPTION
The Model "HP" is a heavy duty, high pressure reducing regulator with balanced trim and a composition seat for
controlling downstream pressure between 10–750 psig with inlet pressures up to 3000 psig.
APPLICATIONS
Designed primarily for controlling clean gases up to 3000 psig inlet pressure with a maximum pressure drop of up to
2990 psid. Used in liquid service for non-cavitating fluids up to 600 psid pressure drop.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ½", ¾", 1", 1 ½"
Materials
Body CS, SST
Spring chamber CS, SST
Trim 316 SST
Seat Metal - 316 SST, Composition TFE or Nylon
Diaphragm TFE coated SST, SST or Neoprene
End connections NPT, flanged
Temperature range -20° F to 600° F
Pressures
Inlet up to 3000 psig
Outlet 10 to 750 psig
Options NACE Construction, Oxygen cleaned, Differential Construction

Dome Loaded Pressure Reducing Regulator

Model DA4
DESCRIPTION
Model DA4 is high performance, pressure loaded diaphragmtype, flow-to-open pressure reducing regulator. Design
includes an internal pressure balancing piston-cylinder that provides high flow capacity and high pressure drop
capability. Performance meets or exceeds that of competitive pressure loaded or pilot-operated designs.
APPLICATIONS
Suitable for all types of clean fluids. Designed primarily as a gaseous service valve but can be applied in liquid service
applications where excessive cavitation or flashing is absent.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ½", ¾", 1", 1-¼", 1-½", 2", 2-½", 3", 4"
Materials
Body BRZ, DI, CS, 316 SST
Spring chamber BRZ, DI, CS, 316 SST
Trim 17-PH SST, 316L SST, Monel
Seat PolyAll, V-TFE, GF-TFE, C+TFE
Diaphragm Composition – BC, EPR, FKM, FK, NBR, FKM + TFE, Elast.
TFE, Metal – Be-Cu
End connections NPT, 125#-250#, 150#-600# Integral Flanged, PN16, PN25,
PN40 DIN Flanged, Extended Pipe Nipples or Tube End
Construction
Temperature range -425° to +400° F
Inlet Pressure 10 - 3705 psig
Outlet Pressure 2.0" w.c. - 1500 psig
Options NACE, Cleaned for O2 Service, Cleaned for Chlorine Service

Back Pressure/Relief Regulator

Model 123
DESCRIPTION
The Model 123 is a back pressure/relief regulator suitable for controlling inlet pressure between 2 and 350 psig. The
body has an angle configuration with a side inlet and a bottom outlet. It is the most adaptable back pressure/relief
regulator Cashco manufactures.
APPLICATIONS
Designed for controlling a wide range of fluids including air, inert gases, cryogenic gas or liquids, sour gas, chemicals,
water, fuel oil and steam.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ½", ¾", 1", 1-½", 2"
Materials
Spring chamber CI, BRZ, CS, 316 SST
Trim BRZ, 316 SST, 416 SST
Seat Metal – BR, 416 SST, 316 SST, Stellite Composition – Buna-N,
TFE, EPR, F.C. Elastomer
Diaphragm Phos. BRZ, 302 SST, Neoprene, F.C. Elastomer, EPDM, Buna N.
End connections NPT, flanged, extended nipples
Set pressures Springs for 2-350 psig
Options Closing cap, cryogenic construction, differential construction,
NACE service


Model 1164
DESCRIPTION
The Model 1164 is suitable as a back pressure/relief regulator for controlling inlet pressure between 5 and 150 psig.
APPLICATIONS
Designed for controlling upstream pressure on wide range of fluids including air, inert gases, chemicals, water, fuel oil
and steam.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ¾", 1", 1-½", 2"
Materials
Body DI, BRZ, CS
Spring chamber CI, BRZ, CS
Trim 416 SST, 316 SST
Seat Metal – 316 SST, Composition – TFE
Diaphragm Phos. BRZ, TFE-coated 302 SST
End connections NPT
Set pressures Springs for 5-150 psig


Models CA-1 & CA-2
DESCRIPTION
Model CA-1 and CA-2 is a compact, forged bronze body back pressure regulator used to control inlet pressure level
between atmospheric and 475 psig (32.8 Barg) by relieving excess pressure.
APPLICATIONS
Widely used in liquid recirculation around a pump. Used as a bypass flow regulator in fuel oil systems. For general air,
oil, water, and gas services. Not recommended for steam service.
SPECIFICATIONS
Body sizes ⅛", ¼", ⅜" and ½"
Flow designs Globe, Angle, Flow-thru
Materials
Body Forged Bronze
Spring chamber Bronze
Trim 316 S/S
Seat Metal
Diaphragm 302 S/S, Buna-N
End connections NPT
Set pressures CA1 – springs for 2-360 psig, CA2 – springs for
3-400 psig
Options Closing Caps, Cryogenic, Handwheel and Panel
Mounting
MODEL CA-1 MODEL CA-2

Parker Veriflo
Single Stage, General Purpose Regulator

IR4000 Series
DESCRIPTION
The IR4000 Series regulator offers high pressure capability with an
inlet pressure up to 4,000 psig. The large convoluted Hastelloy C-22®
diaphragm provides stable pressure control over the operational
range of the regulator.
Close tolerances and tight alignment of moving components

minimize hysteresis and improve cycle life. Convoluted, Hastelloy
C-22® diaphragm provides high corrosion resistance and increases
cycle life.
FEATURES
• Unique compression member loads the seal to the body without
requiring a threaded nozzle or additional seals
• Internally threadless design reduces particle generation. Low
internal volume reduces purge times.
• Cleaned for O2 service is standard
• Positive upward and downward stops increase cycle life by
preventing over stroking of the diaphragm
• Selection of seat materials for media compatibility and temperature
applications
Materials of Construction Functional Performance
Wetted Design
316L Stainless Steel (std), Hastelloy C-22® Burst Pressure 12,000 psig (828 barg)
Body Options or Monel® (Hastelloy® Trim is std with Proof Pressure 6,000 psig (414 barg)
Hastelloy® and Monel® bodies)
Flow Capacity
Compression Member Inconel 625®
Cv Options Cv 0.06 (std), Cv 0.02, Cv 0.15
Diaphragm Hastelloy C-22®
Leak Rate
H Poppet Hastelloy C-276®
Internal Bubble Tight
Poppet Spring Inconel X750®
External Bubble Tight
Seat Options PCTFE (std), Vespel® or PEEK™
Supply Pressure Effect Based upon Cv Option
316L Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy
Carrier Options 0.02 Cv 0.23 psig/100 psig (0.016 barg/7 barg)
C-22®
0.06 Cv 0.6 psig/100 psig (0.04 barg/7 barg)
316 Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy
Washer Back-up Options
C-276® 0.15 Cv 1.5 psig/100 psig (0.1 barg/7 barg)
O-ring Back-up Options FKM (std) or PTFE Internal Volume 4.0 cc without fittings
316 Stainless Steel (std) (60µm mesh Approx. Weight 1.5 lbs. (0.7 kg)
Inlet Screen / Filter screen, 10µm Filter), Hastelloy® (on
Hastelloy®, Monel® bodies) Operating Conditions
Self Relieving Seat PEEK™ Maximum Inlet Refer to Range Table for specific
information
Non-wetted
Outlet Options 0-10 psig (.7 barg), 1-30 psig (2 barg), 2-60
Cap Options Nickel Plated Brass (std) or Stainless Steel psig (4 barg), 3-100 psig (7 barg), 5-150
psig (10 barg), 10-250 psig (17 barg), 20-
Nut Stainless Steel
500 psig (35 barg)
Knob Options ABS (std) (ambient temp) or Aluminum
Metal Knob required for temperatures
Temperature
above 150°F
For additional information on materials of construction, functional performance and PCTFE -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 66°C)
operating conditions, see Regulator Technical Bulletin.
PEEK™ -40°F to 275°F (-40°C to 135°C)
Vespel® -40°F to 500°F (-40°C to 260°C)
Self Relieving Option -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 66°C)

HOW TO ORDER
XX X X X XXX XX XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Basic Series Table 8 Port Style

Range Outlet Gauge 2 ⅛” NPT Female
00 0 - 10 psig 0 - 30 psig 4 ¼” NPT Female
01 1 - 30 psig 0 - 60 psig 6 ⅜” NPT Female
02 2 - 60 psig 0 - 100 psig 4T ¼” A-LOK®
03 3 - 100 psig 0 - 200 psig 6T ⅜” A-LOK®
15 5 - 150 psig 0 - 200 psig All Gauge ports are 1/4” NPT Female
04 10 - 250 psig 0 - 400 psig Table 9 Port Mounting
05 20 - 500 psig 0 - 600 psig A 0.69 (17.5mm) port height w/0.88 (22.2mm) mounting
Table 2 Body Material (1) B 0.75 (19.1mm) port height w/0.75 (19.1mm) mounting Standard
S 316L Stainless Steel Table 10 Optional Features - This section can have multiple options
H Hastelloy C-22® SST gauges B True Ported Body, No plugs
®
M Monel SST gauges C Corrosion Resistant, External Stainless Steel Cap
A 316L Annealed, =22HRC D Dome Loaded, Not available with G or M options
Table 3 Flow Capacity G Tamper Proof, Not available with D or M options
0.06 Cv Standard M Metal Knob (Black), Not available with D or G options. Required
for temperatures above 150° F
1 0.02 Cv
L PTFE Backup O-Ring, PCTFE and PEEK™ Seats Only
2 0.15 Cv
R Relief Valve, 4PB and 5P Only
Table 4 Seat Material
S Self Relieving, Temperature rating -40°F to 150ºF (-40°C to
K PCTFE 66°C)
P PEEK™ V Outlet Valve, NV17SS44MF
V Vespel® T Hastelloy Trim, Includes carrier and back-up washer. Option is
Table 5 Porting for Stainless Steel body - Hastelloy® trim is std with Hastelloy®
and Monel® bodies
2P 2 Ports, No X required for gauges, inlet & outlet ports only
HP 4000 psig Max Inlet Pressure For .15 Cv IR4003 and IR4015
3P 3 Ports, One X for gauge port with PCTFE seats only
4P 4 Ports, Two X’s for gauge ports Table 11 CGA#
4PB 4 Ports, One X for gauge port 320, 330, 350, 510, 580, 590 or 660 H
5P 5 Ports, Two X’s for gauge ports Do not exceed the rated pressure of the CGA connection.
See Regulator Porting Guide for additional options and port layouts
Table 6 Outlet Gauge
Ports may be plugged for NPT threaded product.
Range Basic Series (1) Option recommended for H2S-containing fluids.
Body option “H” (Hastelloy C-22®) and “A” (316L annealed, ≤22HRC) utilize mate-
03 0 - 30 psig IR4000 rials for critical wetted parts that are compliant with NACE® standard MR0175/ISO
OL 0 - 60 psig IR4001 15156-3:2003/Cor.2:2005(E), Petroleum and natural gas industries – Materials for
use in H2S-containing environments in oil and gas production, Part 3: Cracking-re-
01 0 - 100 psig IR4002 sistant CRAs (corrosion-resistant alloys) and other alloys. These wetted materials
2 0 - 200 psig IR4003 are resistant to cracking in H2S - containing fluids, but are not necessarily immune
to cracking under all service conditions. The user should consult MR0175/ISO
4 0 - 400 psig IR4004 15156 for further guidance.
Options and accessories not recommended for H2S-containing fluids - Pressure
6 0 - 600 psig IR4005
Gauges, S-Self Relieving, R-Relief Valve, V-Outlet Valve NOVAS44MF, CGA
X No Gauge Connections
Panel Mount Option: Order Panel Nut Ring p/n: 41900363 as a separate line item.
Additional ranges available upon request Vent Muffler Option: Order Vent Muffler p/n: 46600581 as a separate line item.
Table 7 Inlet Gauge Vent Muffler is standard for the Self-Relieving(S), Corrosion Resistant(C) option
combination.
X No Gauge
30 3000 psig Standard
4 400 psig with the 10 psig range
20 2000 psig with the 0.15 Cv option
40 4000 psig
Additional ranges available upon request

Two Stage, General Purpose Regulator

IR6000 Series
DESCRIPTION
The IR6000 Series regulator offers high pressure capability
with an inlet pressure up to 4,000 psig. The large convoluted
Hastelloy C-22® diaphragm provides stable pressure control
over the operational range of the regulator.
Close tolerances and tight alignment of moving components

minimize hysteresis and improve cycle life. Convoluted,
Hastelloy C-22® diaphragm provides high corrosion
resistance and increases cycle life.
FEATURES
• Unique compression member loads the seal to the body without requiring a threaded nozzle or additional seals
• Internally threadless design reduces particle generation. Low internal volume reduces purge times
• Positive upward and downward stops increase cycle life by preventing over stroking of the diaphragm
• Selection of seat materials for media compatibility and temperature applications
Wetted Design
316L Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy C-22 or® Burst Pressure 12,000 psig (828 barg)
Body Options Monel® (Hastelloy® Trim is std with Hastelloy® Proof Pressure 6,000 psig (414 barg)
and Monel® bodies)
Flow Capacity
Compression Member Inconel 625®
Cv Options Cv 0.06 (std), Cv 0.02, Cv 0.15
Leak Rate
Poppet Hastelloy C-276®
Poppet Spring Inconel X750®
Seat Options PCTFE (std), Vespel® or PEEK™
Supply Pressure Effect Based upon Cv Option
Carrier Options 316L Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy C-22®
H Washer Back-up Options 316 Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy C-276®
O-ring Back-up Options FKM (std) or PTFE
316 Stainless Steel (std) (60µm mesh screen,
Inlet Screen / Filter 10µm Filter), Hastelloy® (on Hastelloy®, Monel® Internal Volume 8.1 cc without fittings
bodies)
Approx. Weight 3.5 lbs. (1.6 kg)
Self Relieving Seat PEEK™
Non-wetted
Maximum Inlet Refer to Range Table for specific information
Cap Options Nickel Plated Brass (std) or Stainless Steel
0-10 psig (0.7 barg), 1-30 psig (2 barg), 2-60
Nut Stainless Steel Outlet Options psig (4 barg), 3-100 psig (7 barg), 5-150 psig
(10 barg), 10-250 psig (17 barg)
Knob Options ABS (std) (ambient temp) or Aluminum
Metal Knob required for temperatures above
Temperature
150°F
For additional information on materials of construction, functional performance PCTFE -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 66°C)
and operating conditions, see Regulator Technical Bulletin.
™
PEEK -40°F to 275°F (-40°C to 135°C)
Vespel® -40°F to 500°F (-40°C to 260°C)
Self Relieving Option -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to 66°C)

Two Stage, General Purpose Regulator - Continued

HOW TO ORDER
XX X X X XXX XX XX XX X XX XXX
Table 1 Basic Series Table 8 Port Style

Range Outlet Gauge 2 ⅛” NPT Female
00 0 - 10 psig 0 - 30 psig 4 ¼” NPT Female
01 1 - 30 psig 0 - 60 psig 6 ⅜” NPT Female
02 2 - 60 psig 0 - 100 psig 4T ¼” A-LOK®
03 3 - 100 psig 0 - 200 psig 6T ⅜” A-LOK®
15 5 - 150 psig 0 - 200 psig All Gauge ports are 1/4” NPT Female
04 10 - 250 psig 0 - 400 psig Table 9 Port Mounting
Table 2 Body Material B Standard - No other options
S 316L Stainless Steel Table 10 Optional Features - This section can have multiple options
H Hastelloy C-22® SST gauges B True Ported Body, No plugs
M Monel® SST gauges C Corrosion Resistant External, Stainless Steel Cap
Table 3 Flow Capacity G Tamper Proof, Not available with M option
0.06 Cv Standard M Metal Knob (Black), Not available with G option. Required for
temperatures above 150°F
1 0.02 Cv
L PTFE Backup O-Ring, PCTFE and PEEK™ Seats Only
2 0.15 Cv
R2 Relief Valve, 2nd Stage (LP), 4PB, 5P and 6P Only
Table 4 Seat Material
S Self Relieving, Temperature rating -40°F to 150°F (-40°C to
K PCTFE 66°C)
P PEEK™ V Outlet Valve, NV17SS44MFT
V Vespel® T Hastelloy Trim, Includes carrier and back-up washer. Option is
Table 5 Porting for Stainless Steel body - Hastelloy® trim is std with Hastelloy®
and Monel® bodies
2P 2 Ports, No X required for gauges, inlet & outlet ports only
Table 11 CGA#
3P 3 Ports, One X for gauge port
320, 330, 350, 510, 580, 590 or 660
4P 4 Ports, Two X’s for gauge ports
4PB 4 Ports, One X for gauge port
Do not exceed the rated pressure of the CGA connection H
Ports may be plugged for NPT threaded product.
5P 5 Ports, Two X’s for gauge ports
Panel Mount Option: Order Panel Nut Ring p/n: 41900363 as a separate line item.
6P 6 Ports, Two X’s for gauge ports Vent Muffler Option: Order Vent Muffler p/n: 46600581 as a separate line item.
Vent Muffler is standard for the Self-Relieving(S), Corrosion Resistant(C) option
See Regulator Porting Guide for additional options and port layouts combination.
Range Basic Series
03 0 - 30 psig IR6000
OL 0 - 60 psig IR6001
01 0 - 100 psig IR6002
2 0 - 200 psig IR6003
4 0 - 400 psig IR6004
X No Gauge
Table 7 Inlet Gauge
X No Gauge
30 3000 psig Standard
20 2000 psig with the 0.15 Cv option
40 4000 psig

Steam Heated, Vaporizing Pressure Regulator

AVR3 Series
DESCRIPTION
The AVR3 Series regulator is designed to heat and/or vaporize a gas or liquid sample
before entering an analyzer system.
The unique design allows the user to dissassemble the regulator and heat transfer
components for complete cleaning and repair of the unit, thus reducing expensive
replacement costs and down time.
FEATURES
• Convoluted Hastelloy C-22® diaphragm for superior strength and corrosion resistance
provides outlet pressure stability with changes in flow
• Integral diaphragm stop provides additional measure of safety
• Field serviceable heat transfer element
SPECIFICATIONS
Wetted
Body Options 316L Stainless Steel (std), Monel® or Hastelloy C-22®
Compression Member Inconel® 625
Poppet Spring Inconel® X750
Seat Options PCTFE (std), PEEK™ or Vespel®
Carrier Options 316L Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy C-22®
Heater Seal PEEK™
O-ring Back-up FKM
Non-wetted
H Cap 303 Stainless Steel
Nut 316L Stainless Steel
Maximum Inlet 3,500 psig (241 barg) or 250 psig (17.2 barg) for 10 psig range
0-10 psig (0.7 barg), 1-30 psig (2 barg), 2-60 psig (4 barg), 3-100 psig
Outlet Options
(7 barg), 10-250 psig (17 barg), 20-500 psig (35 barg)
Temperature based upon seat option
PCTFE 150°F (66°C)
PEEK™ 275°F (135°C)
Vespel® 500°F (260°C)
Maximum Steam Supply 600 psig, 500°F (41 barg, 260°C)

Steam Heated, Vaporizing Pressure

Regulator - Continued
HOW TO ORDER
X X X XX XXXX XX
Table 1 Body Material Table 5 Porting Configuration

S 316L Stainless Steel blank 2 Port
H Hastelloy C-22® 3PG 3 Port Relief Valve or Gauge Port
M Monel® 4PV 4 Port Relief Valve and Gauge Port
Table 2 Seat Material 2PL 2 Port Reverse Entry
K PCTFE 3PLG 3 Port Reverse Entry Relief Valve or Gauge Port
P PEEK™ 4PL 4 Port Reverse Entry Relief Valve and Gauge Port
V Vespel® Table 6 Optional Features
Table 3 Pressure Range RV Relief Valve
0 0 - 10 psig (max inlet 250 psig)
Additional configurations available upon request
1 1 - 30 psig
2 2 - 60 psig
3 3 - 100 psig
4 10 - 250 psig
5 20 - 500 psig
03 0 - 30 psig
OL 0 - 60 psig
01 0 - 100 psig
4 0 - 400 psig
6 0 - 600 psig
X No Gauge

Electrically Heated, Vaporizing Pressure Regulator

AVR4 Series
DESCRIPTION
The AVR4 Series regulator is designed to heat and/or vaporize a gas or liquid
sample before entering an analyzer system.
This unique design allows the user to disassemble the regulator and heat transfer
components for complete cleaning and repair of the unit, thus reducing expensive
replacement costs and down time.
FEATURES
• CSA, CE-ATEX certified
• Convoluted Hastelloy C-22® diaphragm for superior strength and corrosion
resistance provides outlet pressure stability with changes in flow
• Field serviceable heat transfer element
• TCO (Thermal cut-out) is standard for all heat ranges
• Integral diaphragm stop provides additional measure of safety
Wetted Design
®
316L Stainless Steel (std), Monel or Burst Pressure 10,500 psig (724 barg)
Body Options
Hastelloy C-22®
Proof Pressure 5,250 psig (362 barg)
Compression Member Inconel® 625
Flow Capacity Cv 0.06 Nominal
Leak Rate
Poppet Spring Inconel® X750
Seat Options PCTFE (std), PEEK™ or Vespel®
Internal Volume
316L Stainless Steel (std) or Hastelloy
Carrier Options High Pressure Inlet 0.57 cc
C-22®
H Heater Seal PEEK ™ Overall 4.6 cc
Approx. Weight 8 lbs. (2.0 kg)
O-ring Back-up FKM
Electrical Specifications
Non-wetted
Power Requirements 120V or 240V, 50/60 Hz
Cap 303 Stainless Steel
Heater Wattage 40, 100, 150 or 200 watt
Nut 303 Stainless Steel
75°F to 220°F or 215°F to 380°F (24°C
Condulet Cast Iron Alloy and Aluminum
Temperature Controller (Proportional) to 105°C or 102°C to 194°C) Ranges
Operating Conditions are approximate
3,500 psig (241 barg) or 250 psig (17.2 Crouse Hinds, UL and CSA listed
Maximum Inlet
barg) for 10 psig range Condulet Class 1, Groups A, B, C, D;
Class 2, Groups E, F, G
0-10 psig (0.7 barg), 1-30 psig (2
barg),2-60 psig (4 barg), 3-100 psig (7
Outlet Options
barg),10-250 psig (17 barg), 20-500
psig (35 barg)
Temperature based upon seat option
PCTFE 150°F (66°C)
PEEK™ 275°F (135°C)
Vespel® 500°F (260°C)
Ambient Temperature -4°F to +104°F (-20°C to +40°C)

Electrically Heated, Vaporizing Pressure

Regulator - Continued
HOW TO ORDER
X X X XXX X X XX XXXX XXX
Table 1 Body Material Table 6 Temperature Controller

S 316L Stainless Steel L 75°F to 220°F 24°C - 104°C
®
H Hastelloy C-22 H 220°F to 380°F 104°C - 193°C
M Monel® Table 7 Outlet Gauge
Table 2 Seat Material 03 0 - 30 psig
K PCTFE OL 0 - 60 psig
™
P PEEK 01 0 - 100 psig
V Vespel® 4 0 - 400 psig
Table 3 Pressure Range 6 0 - 600 psig
0 0 - 10 psig (max inlet 250 psig) X No Gauge
1 1 - 30 psig Table 8 Porting Configuration
2 2 - 60 psig blank 2 Port
3 3 - 100 psig 2PL 2 Port Reverse Entry
4 10 - 250 psig 3PG 3 Port Relief Valve or Gauge Port
5 20 - 500 psig 3PLG 3 Port Reverse Entry Relief Valve or Gauge Port
Table 4 Voltage 4PV 4 Port Relief Valve and Gauge Port
120 120V 4PL 4 Port Reverse Entry Relief Valve and Gauge Port
240 240V High Pressure port standard is ⅛” NPT Female. ¼” NPT Female on auxillary
outlet ports.
Table 5 Heater Wattage
Table 9 Optional Features
A 40
RV Relief Valve
C 100
SL1 SilcoNert™ 1000 Coating on wetted metallic components only.
D 150 Does not include gauges or relief valves.
E 200
Additional configurations available upon request H


Marsh Bellofram
Pressure Regulators
Type 40
DESCRIPTION
Marsh Bellofram’s General Purpose Type 40 Pressure
Regulator is a reliable precision unit designed for
instrumentation and general purpose use. The Type
40 regulator is superior in regulated pressure vs. flow,
forward-to-reverse flow offset, supply pressure sensitivity,
repeatability and stability. Every regulator is pressure
and leak tested prior to shipment from the factory. A
rubberized, soft-seat valve stem provides positive shut-
off and “forgives” dirt or other foreign matter. An aspirator
maintains downstream pressure and compensates
for droop when high flow occurs. The gauge port is
convenient for gauge installation and can also be used as
an additional full flow outlet.
The design of these regulators is especially well suited

to pilot-operated controllers and instruments, as well
as applications such as air chucks, air spray guns, air
cylinders and actuators, and a wide range of industrial
pneumatic systems and equipment.
FEATURES
• Superior regulation characteristics SPECIFICATIONS
• Rugged, corrosion resistant construction
Sensitivity 1” Water Column (2.5 cm)
• Low cost
• Excellent stability and repeatability Flow Capacity @ 100 psig
(6.9 BAR) Supply and 20
20 SCFM (566 LPM)
• Self-relieving psig (1.4 BAR) outlet

• Low droop at high flow Effect of Supply Pressure Less than 0.2 psig (0.01 BAR)
• Several mounting options
H
Variation (25 psig/1.7
BAR) on Outlet Pressure
Exhaust Capacity 5 psig 0.1–0.45 SCFM Typical 2.8 - 12.7 LPM
(0.35 BAR) above 20
PSIG set point
Max Supply Pressure 250 PSIG (17.2 BAR)
Effect of Changes in Flow 2 PSIG over flow of 10 SCFM / 283 LPM (0-30
on Regulated Pressure PSIG / 0-2.1 BAR range ¼ NPT, 20 PSIG / 1.4 BAR
(100 psig / 6.9 BAR set point)
Supply)
Output Pressure Ranges 0-10 PSIG (0-0.7 BAR)
0-35 PSIG (0-2.4 BAR)
0-60 PSIG (0-4.1 BAR)
0-120 PSIG (0-8.3 BAR)
Temperature Range 0-160°F (-18 to 71°C)
Total Air Consumption @ 6 SCFH (2.8 LPM)
Maximum Output
Port Size ¼ NPT, BSPT
Materials of Construction Body: Die cast aluminum with vinyl paint
Adjusting Screw: Plated steel
Trim: Plated steel, brass, acetal resin
Diaphragm: Buna-N elastomer and polyester fabric
Knob: Phenolic Plastic (option)
Spring: Music wire
Tamper Resistant Cover Optional
Mounting Options Pipe, Panel or Bracket

Pressure Regulators
Type 41
DESCRIPTION
The Type 41 regulators are designed for applications
requiring high flow capacity, low droop, high accuracy, and
fine adjustment sensitivity. The use of Bellofram’s rolling
diaphragm provides greater sensitivity and improved
accuracy. In addition, Type 41 regulators offer reduced
over-all size and several mounting options, providing
direct interchangeability with more expensive competitors’
units.
They are pressure tested, and are chromate treated for

internal corrosion resistance. A rubberized, soft-seat valve
stem provides stability and “forgives” dirt and other foreign
matter. An aspirator maintains downstream pressure and
compensates for droop when high flow occurs. The gauge
port is convenient for gauge installation and can also be
used as an additional full flow outlet.
Versions
The Type 41 comes in two versions, Type 41-1 and Type
41-2. These two regulators offer the same performance in
two slightly different packages.
SPECIFICATIONS
The Type 41-1 unit comes standard with ¼ NPT ports and Sensitivity 1” Water Column (2.5 cm)
a knob, and can be panel mounted using either the center Flow Capacity @ 100 25 SCFM (700 LPM)
nut or the threaded shoulder holes, spaced 1.5 in. (38.1 psig (6.9 BAR) Supply
and 20 psig (1.4 BAR)
mm) center-to-center. outlet
Effect of Supply Pressure ±0.35 PSIG (24 mBAR)
The Type 41-2 unit comes standard with ¼ NPT ports, a Variation (25 psig/1.7
BAR) on Outlet Pressure
H
knob and a bonnet vent port which can be tapped for a ¼
NPT fitting if desired. It can be panel mounted using either Exhaust Capacity 5 psig 0.1–0.45 SCFM Typical 2.8 - 12.7 LPM
(0.35 BAR) above 20 psig
the center nut or the threaded shoulder holes, spaced 1.25 set point
in. (32.7 mm) center-to-center. Max Supply Pressure 250 PSIG (17.2 BAR)
Effect of Changes in Flow 1 psig (0.07 BAR) over flow of 10 SCFM (0-30 psig
FEATURES on Regulated Pressure / 0-2.1 BAR range, ¼ NPT, 20 psig / 1.4 BAR set
• Superior regulation characteristics (100 psig / 6.9 BAR point)
• Rugged, corrosion-resistant construction Supply)
• Excellent stability and repeatability Output Pressure Ranges 0-2 PSIG (0-0.14 BAR)
0-10 PSIG (0-0.69 BAR)
• Self-relieving of excess down stream pressure 0-30 PSIG (0-2.1 BAR)
• Low droop at high flow 0-60 PSIG (0-4.1 BAR)
0-100 PSIG (0-6.9 BAR)
• Mounting options available
Temperature Range 0-160°F (-18 to 71°C)
Total Air Consumption @ 6 SCFH (2.8 LPM)
Maximum Output
Port Size ¼ NPT, BSPT
Materials of Construction Body: Die cast aluminum with vinyl paint
Adjusting Screw: Plated steel
Trim: Plated steel, brass, acetal resin
Diaphragm: Buna-N polyester fabric
Knob: Phenolic Plastic
Spring: Music wire
Mounting Options Pipe, Panel or Bracket

Filters and Regulators • Filter/Regulators

Numatics
Coalescing Filter/Regulator
C12 Series
DESCRIPTION
The Numatics C Series Coalescer/Regulator is a two station point of use air
preparation system designed to provide superior filtration and regulation in one
compact housing. The C Series combines a multiple support cartridge style
borosilicate glass element with a pilot balanced regulator to assure the maximum
performance of downstream components. Available with four different element
grade choices, the C Series Coalescer/Regulator can be outfitted to attack and
remove the exact type of contamination that is critical to a specific application.
FEATURES
• Cartridge element design
• Inner/outer support cores prevent element from crushing in either flow direction
• Can be installed as individual or modular unit
• Four element grades available
• Non-rising knob
SPECIFICATIONS
Bowl Polycarbonate Bowl Metal (Zinc) Bowl
Temperature R ange (ºF) 40-120 40-120
Temperature R ange (ºC) 4-50 4-50
Max. Pressure (PSIG) 150 200
Max. Pressure (BAR ) 10 14
12 Series (Weight, lbs.) 0.35 0.16
12 Series (Weight, kg) 0.37 0.17
HOW TO ORDER
X XX X X X XX
Table 1 Model Table 5 Options

H C Coalescer/Regulator B Flexible Drain
Table 2 Series D 3 Micron, Internal Pleated Prefilter
12 1.5 oz. Bowl G Gauge
Table 3 Element I 0-25 PSIG Output
C 0.7 Micron Coarse Coalescer J External Pulse Drain
D 0.3 Micron Fine Coalescer L 0-60 PSIG Output
E 0.1 Micron Ultra Fine Coalescer M Metal Bowl
F Vapor Adsorber N Non-Relieveing
Table 4 Threads P Panel Mount Nut
- NPTF Q Metal Manual Drain
G G Tap (BSPP) R Manual Lever Drain
R PT (BSPT) T Tamper Resistant
1.All BSPP (G tap) and BSPT (R tap) models use BSPT gauge threads. Table 6 Port Size
2. Recommended Uses:See 12 Series Miniature Coalescing Filter for element 01 1/8
grade options and uses.
3. Prefilter Option-Suffix 'D' Models using the C, D, or E grade elements can 02 1/4
be equipped with an optional 3 micron internal prefilter. The prefilter provides
additional protection for the fine borosilicate fibers. For most applications, a
separate 5 micron particulate filter is not required.
4.To order a piston style filter/regulator, add “P” to the model number.
(example: C12DP-01DG)

Coalescing Filter/Regulator
FlexiBlok C14, C22, C32, C42 Series
FEATURES
• Four convenient sizes
• Cartridge element design
• Inner/outer support cores prevent element from crushing in either flow direction
• Four element grades available
SPECIFICATIONS
Bowl 14 Series 22 series 32 Series 42 Series
Temperature Range ºF (ºC) 40-120 (4-50) 40-120 (4-50) 40-120 (4-50) 40-120 (4-50)
Max. Pressure PSIG (BAR) - Poly C 150 (10) 150 (10) 150 (10) 150 (10)
Max. Pressure PSIG (BAR) - Metal 200 (14) 200 (14) 200 (14) 200 (14)
Weight lbs. (kg) - Poly C 0.80 (0.35) 0.92 (0.42) 1.82 (0.83) 5.05 (2.29)
Weight lbs. (kg) - Metal 0.85 (0.38) 1.60 (0.73) 2.95 (1.34) 6.15 (2.76)
Nominal Flow SCFM (L/M)* 20 (560) 35 (991) 50 (1416) 100 (2832)
Body Material Zinc Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum
*Nominal flow using a 0.3 micron element, at 100 psig (6.9 bar) inlet pressure and 80 psig (5.5 bar) set pressure
HOW TO ORDER
X XX X X XX X

C Coalescer/Regulator A* Auto Drain (22, 32, and 42 series)
Table 2 Series B Flexible Drain
14 1.5 oz Bowl C CircleVision™ Sight Bowl
22 3.8 oz Bowl D 3 Micron, Internal Pleated Filter
32 8.5 oz Bowl G Gauge
42 8.5 oz Bowl H* 0-200 PSIG Output
H
Table 3 Element I 0-25 PSIG Output
C 0.7 Micron Coarse Coalescer J External Pulse Drain
D 0.3 Micron Fine Coalescer L 0-60 PSIG Output
E 0.01 Micron Ultra Fine Coalescer M Metal Bowl (Sight Glass Available 22, 32 and 42 Series)
F Vapor Adsorber N Non-Relieving
Table 4 Threads P Panel Mount Nut
- NPTF R Manual Lever Drain
G* G Tap (BSPP) S Steel T Handle (42 Series)
R PT (BSPT) Q Metal Manual Drain
Table 5 Port Size T Tamper Resistant
01 1/8 (14 series) V Shut Off Valve
02 1/4 (14 or 22 series) *Conforms to ISO Standards 1179-1 and 228-1

*‘A” and “H” options cannot be used together.
03 3/8 (22 series)
Note: To order a piston style coalescing/regulator add “P” to the model number.
04 1/2 (22 or 32 series) (ie: C32CP-06AGQ)
06 3/4 (32 or 42 series)
08 1 (42 series)

Stainless Steel Coalescing Filter/Regulator

C72 Series
DESCRIPTION
The Numatics C Series Coalescer/Regulator is a two station point of
use air preparation system designed to provide superior filtration and
regulation in one compact housing. The C Series combines a multiple
support cartridge style borosilicate glass element with a regulator
to assure the maximum performance of downstream components.
Available with four different element grade choices, the C Series
Coalescer/Regulator can be outfitted to attack and remove the exact
type of contamination that is critical to a specific application.
FEATURES
• 316 stainless steel body construction
• All seals made of Fluorocarbon (FKM)
• 0-125 PSI standard
• Meets NACE specifications
• Bonnet and Knob Acetal
• Internal plastic parts
• Acetal and ABS
• Element: Vacuum formed borosilicate glass fibers
• Internal Metal Parts
• Valve Stainless Steel
• Springs - Stainless Steel
• Max. Pressure: 300 PSIG (20 bar)
• Temperature Range: 40º to 180º F (4º to 82º C)
HOW TO ORDER
X XX X X XX X
H C Coalescer/Regulator D 3 Micron Internal Pleated Prefilter

Table 2 Series G Gauge
72 1.5 oz. Bowl N Non-relieving
Table 3 Element P panel mount nut
C 0.7 Micron Coarse coalescer Table 5 Port Size
D 0.3 Micron Fine coalescer 02 1/4
E 0.01 Micron Ultra Fine coalescer Table 6 Threads
F D = Vapor adsorber – NPTF
G G Tap (BSPP)
Note: All BSPP (G tap) models use BSPT gauge threads.

Stainless Steel Particulate Filter/Regulator

P72 Series
DESCRIPTION
The integral filter/regulator (‘piggyback’) is a two station component
designed to filter and regulate compressed air when cost and space
are of primary concern. As wet, dirty air enters, it immediately flows
through the air deflector, causing the air to move in a swirling motion.
After condensed water is centrifugally removed, air passes through
the filter and into the regulator. The high pressure of the air is
systematically reduced via the adjustment spring and valve and exits
the housing as clean and dry air that is ready to work at the specified
pressure.
FEATURES
• 316 stainless steel body construction
• All seals made of Fluorocarbon (FKM)
• 0-125 PSI standard
• Meets NACE specifications
• Bonnet and Knob Acetal
• Internal plastic parts
• Acetal and ABS
• Element Polyethylene
• Internal Metal Parts
• Valve Stainless Steel
• Springs - Stainless Steel
• Max. Pressure: 300 PSIG (20 bar)
• Temperature Range: 40º to 180º F (4º to 82º C)
HOW TO ORDER
X XX X X XX X
H
Table 1 Model Table 5 Port Size
P Filter/regulator 02 1/4
Table 2 Series Table 6 Threads
72 1.5 oz. Bowl – NPTF
Table 3 Element G G Tap (BSPP)
A 40 Micron Note: All BSPP (G Tap) models use BSPT gauge threads.
B 5 Micron
Table 4 Options
G Gauge
N Non-relieving
P Panel Nut (Plastic)

Section Cover page
Measurement Solutions
Rawson, Inc. can help you solve the many problems associated with selecting,
applying, and maintaining your plant measurement needs. We will provide
assistance with the specification of your sensors for flow, pressure, temperature,
level, and analytical applications. We provide a wide variety of Foundation
Fieldbus, Profibus, and HART enabled products. We offer our customers the
option to choose the best fieldbus protocol for most applications along with special
solutions for Intrinsic Safety and increased availability - simply Freedom of Choice.
Level
Main Index
Visual Indicators & Gagecocks

Penberthy��738
Controls & Field Interface Devices
Omnitrol��750
Robertshaw��759
L&J Engineering��771
Digital Level Gauges
Probes & Sensors
Robertshaw��766
PMT��775
737
Level • Visual Indicators & Gagecocks
Penberthy
Vapor Bypass Magnetic Level Indicator

MULTIVIEW™ MGVB
DESCRIPTION
The MULTIVIEW™ Vapor Bypass Magnetic Liquid Level Gauge
is designed for processes where flashing may occur. Standard
magnetic liquid level Gauges fail in these types of processes.
When flashing occurs, the vapor build-up beneath the float cannot
escape quickly enough due to the limited clearance between the
float and the chamber wall, causing the float to rocket to the top of
the chamber, where it is crushed or damaged. The Vapor Bypass
model features a large chamber in combination with a unique cage
system which confines the float to one side of the chamber, allowing
for maximum area for vapor to bypass the float and ensuring proper
magnetic coupling to the indicator.
FEATURES
• Larger chamber and unique internal float cage
• Magnetically interlocked flag type indication
• Custom weighted magnetic float
• Designed in accordance with ASME B31.3
• Easy installation
• Virtually maintenance-free
• Optional transmitter or switches
• Constructed of 4" NPS Schedule 40 pipe
• Size Range: Vessel Centers are 4.25" – 236"
• Minimum specific gravity of 0.47 (based on Titanium float)
• Up to 300# ANSI rating
• Temperature range from -325°F – 750°F

Magnetic Level Indicator with Guided Radar

Transmitter
MULTIVIEW™ MGGR
DESCRIPTION
The MULTIVIEW™ magnetic liquid level gauge with guided radar
transmitter combines the rugged versatility of the Penberthy MULTIVIEW™
with the flexibility, accuracy and reliability of a guided radar transmitter. The
two independent level measurement technologies provide true redundancy.
Guided radar level measurement technology is independent of specific
gravity, conductivity and dielectric constant and typically will cover the
complete range of the MULTIVIEW™ magnetic liquid level gages. The
guided wave transmitter is provided in a dual chamber. A single chamber
design is also available and is typically used where space is very limited.
FEATURES
• True redundancy in a single package
• Independent radar level transmitting
• Custom weighted magnetic float
• Chamber designed in accordance with ASME B31.3 and B31.1
• Easy installation
• Virtually maintenance-free
• Optional magnetically coupled clamp on transmitters and switches
available for the magnetic liquid level gauge
SPECIFICATIONS
Construction Standard 2½ NPS pipe with 1½ NPS secondary
chamber pipe for the dual chamber version and 4 NPS
pipe for the single chamber design
Size Range Vessel Centers: 4¼ to to 236" [108 mm to 5994 mm]
Min Specific Gravity 0.47 (based upon Titanium float)
Pressure Clase Up to ANSI pressure class 900
Temperature Range -325°F to 750°F [-198°C to 400°C]
Approvals FM, CSA, and ATEX hazardous area approvals available
for the transmitter
Dielectric Constants Down to 1.4
Transmitter Output 4 - 20 mA/HART® PROFIBUS-PA®,FOUNDATION™
Fieldbus
I
Options LCD display with envelope curve

Follower Type Magnetic Level Indicator

MULTIVIEW™ MG, Follower Type
DESCRIPTION
In MG Follower type models, the unit consists of a hermetically-sealed tube in protective
view housing. Within this tube is a gold anodized aluminum follower which will mirror
level changes in the process tank. This entire assembly is attached to the standpipe
where the follower is magnetically coupled with the float. Because the follower and float
are magnetically linked, liquid level changes in the process tank will cause both float and
follower to rise and fall in unison. The result is a precise indication of the liquid level within
the vessel. Follower type monitoring is suitable for most applications, except where violent
changes in level can cause the follower to de-couple from the float. In these types of
applications, flag type indication is recommended.
FEATURES
• Concentric magnet ring float design provides strong internal support to prevent collapse
when operating in higher pressure applications and allows for more consistent magnetic
strength than the conventional corrugated magnetic ring design.
• Metallic standpipe rated to ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes and ANSI/
ASME B31.1/B31.3
• Metallic standpipes constructed of 2-½" Schedule 10 or 40 pipe. Available in a wide array
of materials and/or linings
• Anodized gold follower can withstand extreme heat up to 800°F without adverse wear and
discoloration
• Weldneck flanges, weldolets, threadolets, sockolets, 3000lb threaded process couplings,
another plumbing options are offered to meet specific vessel connection requirements
• Extruded tee allows for full penetration welding on all side connections for Schedule 10
pipe
• Variety of switches and transmitters available for remote control and indication
• Polymer versions constructed of 2" Schedule 40 pipe for low-pressure applications, where
cost control and corrosion resistance are necessary

Flag Type Magnetic Level Indicator

MULTIVIEW™ MG, Flag Type
DESCRIPTION
MG Flag type monitors provide a more secure link between indicator and float. The view
housing is sealed and consists of a single column assembly of aluminum flags within an
extruded aluminum channel. Flags are anodized with black on one side and gold on the
other. Each flag houses a small magnet and is assembled on a single, individual axle. As
the float in the standpipe rises and falls, the magnetic interactions between float and flag
magnets cause the flags to rotate 180°. These changes are shown through contrasting
colors – black above and gold below the liquid level. To insure trouble-free operation,
flags are magnetically interlocked and utilize mechanical stops preventing over-rotation.
Penberthy’s redundant axle system prevents binding, with each flag allowed to rotate on
the axle and each axle free to rotate in the channel.
FEATURES
• Indication is accurate, regardless of the speed of process level change or vibration
• Concentric magnet ring float design provides strong internal support to prevent collapse
when operating in higher pressure applications
• Concentric design allows for more consistent magnetic strength than the conventional
corrugated magnetic ring design
• Metallic standpipe rated to ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes and ANSI/
ASME B31.1/B31.3
• Weldneck flanges, weldolets, threadolets, sockolets, 3000lb threaded process couplings,
another plumbing options are offered to meet specific vessel connection requirements
• Extruded tee allows for full penetration welding on all side connections for Schedule 10
pipe
• Switch and transmitters available for remote control and indication
Flag-Type
with Transmitter
& Switch

Top-Mount Magnetic Level Indicator

MULTIVIEW™ TMMG
DESCRIPTION
When side-mounted level monitoring is not feasible or impractical, Penberthy
offers the MULTIVIEW™ Top Mount Magnetic Gauge (TMMG). A stilling well
is recommended for protecting against both float and tube damage which is
the primary cause of top mount failure. In vessels where large particulates can
become trapped between float and stilling well, Penberthy’s unique guide system
limits the contact area, virtually eliminating the chance that particulates will clog
and hinder float movement.
FEATURES
• Float is located in the containment vessel, while the magnet assembly is at the
opposite end of a tube in the standpipe. As the float level changes so does the
magnetic position.
• Level change is visually conveyed to the operator via the indicator mounted to
the standpipe.
• Both point-level and continuous electronic level indication can be added using
approved switches and transmitters.
• Optional stilling well can be installed for additional protection of both the float
and tube.
• Unique guiding system can be added to minimize the risk of particulate matte/
crystallization affecting float operation.
• Variety of construction materials for both standpipe and float.
Mini Magnetic Level Indicator

MULTIVIEW™ MMG
DESCRIPTION
In applications where monitoring will operate at or near ambient temperature,
the Mini Magnetic Gauge (MMG) is recommended. This system reduces initial
customer cost without sacrificing performance and is perfect for applications such
as air conditioning and refrigeration, filter manufacturers, waste water treatment,
I oil/chemical storage, skid system and tank manufacturers, and boiler feedwater
tanks. Only flag-type level indication is offered.
FEATURES
• Nominal 1” Schedule 10 standpipe with flag indication
• Features conventional six magnet configuration with a magnetic field similar to
other Multiview models
• 150# ANSI rating
• Standard construction materials for standpipe are 316/316L Stainless Steel,
although 304/304L may be specified
• Float construction material is 316/316L Stainless Steel
• 1-amp point-level switch available for level control
• Transmitters can also be added for continuous level monitoring
• Minimum specific gravity for standard length is 0.70. For extended length
specific gravity is 0.65.

High Pressure Sight Level Indicator

Model RH, TH
DESCRIPTION
High pressure sight level indicators (glass level gages) are designed to allow maximum
pressure ratings regardless of glass size. These gages resist torsional stresses exceptionally
well to provide a process gage for the most demanding applications. Units are used in direct
reading liquid level measurement for high pressure tanks applications in the petroleum,
chemical, natural gas and general process industries. They are not recommended for steam/
water applications.
There are 2 high pressure indicator models: the Model RH-Reflex High Pressure and Model
TH-Transparent High Pressure.
Reflex gages (RH) have a single vision slot in which light can enter the chamber. Above
the liquid level, light is reflected and usually appears silvery. Area where liquid level is filled
becomes transparent or dark/opaque depending on the medium being observed. Transparent
gages (TH) have a vision slot on both sides of the chamber. Light enters on the opposite side
of the observer so both the level of a liquid and characteristics can be seen. For observation
in dark environments, illuminators are available for use with transparent gages.
FEATURES
• Non-intrusive
• Not dependent on liquid characteristics
• Provide accurate direct liquid level measurement in remote locations
• Suitable for vacuum applications
• Unlimited lengths
• One pressure rating regardless of glass size
• Suitable for sour gas service (NACE)
• FM Approved
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Connection Type Threaded End Connection: ½” NPTF
Optional Connection Types
End Connection Threaded: ¾" NPTF
Socketweld: ½" and ¾" Female Flanged
Side Connection Threaded: ½" NPTF and ¾" NPTF
Back Connection* Threaded: ½" NPTF and ¾" NPTF
I
Size 4 to 9 gage glass
Visible lengths 6-¾" to 139-¾"
Pressure Ranges Reflex (RH): 4,000 psi Transparent (TH): 3,000 psi
Temperature Ranges -325°F to 1,000°F
Standard Materials
Cover Sizes 4-6: ASTM A216 CS Gr. WCB
Sizes 5-9: ASTM A105 forged steel
Chamber ASTM A105 forged steel
Gaskets GRAFOIL®
Glass Borosilicate Glass to 600°F
Aluminosilicate Glass to 800°F (Transparent only)
Quartz to 1,000°F (Transparent only)
Options Recessed Gasket Chamber, wide range of special materials available
*Typically reflex only.

Medium Pressure Sight Level Indicator

Model RM, TM
DESCRIPTION
Medium pressure sight level indicators (glass level gages) are designed to be used for most
common process applications. Indicators provide optimum versatility and can be used for most
offshore applications and in other corrosive environments. Units are used in direct reading liquid
level measurement for medium pressure tanks applications in the petroleum, chemical, natural
gas and general process industries.
There are 2 medium pressure indicator models: the Model RM-Reflex Medium Pressure and
Model TM-Transparent Medium Pressure. Reflex gages (RM) have a single vision slot in which
light can enter the chamber. Above the liquid level, light is reflected and usually appears silvery.
Area where liquid level is filled becomes transparent or dark/opaque depending on the medium
being observed. Transparent gages (TM) have a vision slot on both sides of the chamber. Light
enters on the opposite side of the observer so both the level of a liquid and characteristics can
be seen. For observation in dark environments, illuminators are available for use with transparent
gages.
FEATURES
• No power requirements
• Non-intrusive
• Idea cost effective solution for corrosive environments along with offshore paint application 2600.1
• Can be used for low pressure steam/water applications
• FM Approved
SPECIFICATIONS
Socketweld: ½” and ¾” Female Flanged
Side Connection Threaded: ½” NPTF and ¾" NPTF
I Back Connection* Threaded: ½” NPTF and ¾" NPTF

Visible lengths 3-¾” to 139-¾”
Pressure Ranges Reflex (RM): 2,150 psi min to 3,000 psi max
Transparent (TM): 1,000 psi min to 2,500 psi max
Temperature Ranges -325°F to 1,000°F
Standard Materials
Cover ASTM A105 forged steel
Gaskets GRAFOIL®
Quartz to 1,000°F (Transparent only)
Options Recessed Gasket Chamber, Wide range of special materials available

Weld Pad Sight Level Indicator

Model RMW,TMW
DESCRIPTION
Weld pad sight level indicators (glass level gages), are for applications involving high
vibration, highly viscous liquids or liquids with considerable solids. These indicators are
welded directly to the process vessel and because there is no standard nipple connection the
possibility of clogging is eliminated. They provide optimum versatility and are used in direct
reading liquid level measurement for medium pressure tanks applications in the petroleum,
chemical, natural gas and general process industries.
There are 2 weld pad flat glass indicator models: the Model RMW-Reflex Medium Weld Pad
and Model TMW-Transparent Medium Weld Pad. Reflex indicators (RMW) have a single
vision slot in which light can enter the chamber. Above the liquid level, light is reflected and
usually appears silvery. Area where liquid level is filled becomes transparent or dark/opaque
depending on the medium being observed. Transparent indicators (TMW) have a vision
slot on both sides of the chamber. Light enters on the opposite side of the observer so both
the level of a liquid and characteristics can be seen. For observation in dark environments,
illuminators are available for use with transparent indicators.
FEATURES
• No clogging
• Non-intrusive
• FM Approved
• All materials in weld pad gages conform to ASTM specifications
• Can achieve pressures to 2000 psig at 100°F when manufactured with size 1 glass
• Integral gagecocks can be added to these indicators allowing the indicator to be isolated for maintenance without
lower the liquid level below the indicator.
SPECIFICATIONS
Visible lengths 3-¾” to 139-¾"
Radius Pad (Optional Feature) 2” min to 12” max
Pressure Ranges 800 psi min to 2,000 psi max
Temperature Ranges -325°F to 600°F
I
Standard Materials
Cover ASTM A105 forged steel
Gaskets GRAFOIL®
Options Wide range of special materials available

Large Chamber Sight Level Indicators

Model RLC, TLC
DESCRIPTION
Used for turbulent surfaces or transparent liquids these sight level indicators (glass level
gages) can improve accuracy in determining liquid levels. In addition to simulating the function
of a stilling well and providing a column four times larger than a standard indicators, large
chamber indicators can provide end connections up to 2” NPTF allowing the use of other
instrumentation. Units are used in direct reading liquid level measurement for high pressure
tanks applications in the petroleum, chemical, natural gas and general process industries.
These gages are not recommended for steam/water applications.
There are 2 large chamber indicator models: the Model RLC- Reflex Large Chamber and
Model TLC-Transparent Large Chamber. Reflex gages (RLC) have a single vision slot in which
light can enter the chamber. Above the liquid level, light is reflected and usually appears silvery.
Area where liquid level is filled becomes transparent or dark/opaque depending on the medium
being observed. Transparent gages (TLC) have a vision slot on both sides of the chamber.
Light enters on the opposite side of the observer so both the level of a liquid and characteristics
can be seen. For observation in dark environments, illuminators are available for use with
transparent gages.
FEATURES
• Non-intrusive
• Suitable for turbulent and viscose liquids
• Can install with other instrumentation
• FM Approved
SPECIFICATIONS
I Socketweld: ½” and ¾” Female Flanged
Back Connection* Threaded: ½” NPTF and ¾" NPTF
Visible lengths 6-3/4” to 139 - ¾"
Pressure Ranges Reflex (RLC) 2,600 psi
Transparent (TLC) 1,580 psi
Standard Materials
Cover Sizes 4-6: ASTM A216 CS Gr. WCB
Sizes 5-9: ASTM A105 forged steel
Chamber ASTM A 106 Carbon Steel
Gaskets GRAFOIL®
Options Recessed Gasket Chamber, Wide range of special materials available

Low Pressure Sight Level Indicator

Model RL, TL
DESCRIPTION
Low pressure sight level indicators (glass level gages) are designed to maximize the
mechanical and economic advantages of ductile iron covers and are used in less demanding
process applications. These units are used in direct reading liquid level measurement for low
pressure tanks applications in the petroleum, chemical and general process industries.
There are 2 low pressure indicator models: the Model RL-Reflex Low Pressure and Model
TL-Transparent Low Pressure. Reflex gages (RL) have a single vision slot in which light
can enter the chamber. Above the liquid level, light is reflected and usually appears silvery.
Area where liquid level is filled becomes transparent or dark/opaque depending on the
medium being observed. Transparent gages (TL) have a vision slot on both sides of the
chamber. Light enters on the opposite side of the observer so both the level of a liquid and
characteristics can be seen. For observation in dark environments, illuminators are available
for use with transparent gages.
FEATURES
• No power requirements
• Non-intrusive
• FM Approved
• Reflex or transparent glass
SPECIFICATIONS
Back Connection* Threaded: ½” NPTF and ¾" NPTF
Visible lengths 3-¾” to 139-¾”
I
Pressure Ranges Reflex (RL): 1800 psi min to 2400 psi max
Transparent (TL): 500 psi min to 2,000 psi max
Standard Materials
Cover Ductile Iron
Gaskets GRAFOIL®
Options Wide range of special materials available

Sight Level Gagecocks, Straight Pattern

Series 100, 200
DESCRIPTION
Series 100 and 200 feature the straight pattern design and provide 90°
connection to the process vessel and isolate the gage chamber from the
liquid content of the vessel. Gagecock leakage is Class 1 per ISA RP39.6.
These gagecocks have internal screw threads that are wetted by the process
liquid. They are used in conjunction with direct reading flat glass gages in the
petroleum, chemical and general process industries.
FEATURES
• 1500 lb. ANSI Rating
• Pressures to 4000 psi at 100°F
• Temperature ranges from 300°F to 750°F
• Provide a 90° connection to the pressure vessel
• Ball checks prevent loss of process fluid in the event of an accidental breakage of the gage glass.
• Gagecocks can be supplied to meet ASME requirements
• 100 series (Models 120/130) have an integral seat and bonnet
• 200 series (Models 220/230) have a threaded renewable seat and union bonnet
• Wide variety of gage and vessel connections available
• Standards features for all models include offset pattern, ball check shut off, handwheel, ASTM A105 forged steel body
and ASTM A582 416 SS trim For gagecock sets that are acceptable for ASME Boiler Code, ball check shutoffs are
omitted.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Standard Fea- Gage Connection Vessel Connection Drain/Vent Connection Max Pressure Temperature
tures (at 100°F ) Range
120 Integral Bonnet, Union - ½" NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Integral Seat Socketweld, Flanged, Union- Socketweld, Flanged, Spherical NPTF
NPTM, Spherical Union, Solid Shank
Union
220 Union Bonnet, Union - ½" NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Threaded Seat Socketweld, Flanged, Union Socketweld, Flanged, Spherical NPTF
– NPTM, Spherical Union Union, Solid Shank
130 Integral Bonnet, Rigid - ½" NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Integral Seat Socketweld, Flanged Socketweld, Flanged, Spherical NPTF
Union, Solid Shank
230 Union Bonnet, Rigid – ½” NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Threaded Seat Socketweld, Flanged Socketweld, Flanged, Spherical NPTF
I Union, Solid Shank
*Optional materials can be specified for gagecock body and trim (stem, stem packing retainer, ball check and seat (200 Series only). Standard and optional materials
conform to ASTM specifications. Other connection sizes and styles (male/female) also available.

Sight Level Gagecocks, Offset Pattern

Series 300, 400
DESCRIPTION
Series 300 and 400 feature the offset pattern design and provide 90° connection
to the process vessel and isolate the gage chamber from the liquid content of the
vessel. Gagecock leakage is Class 1 per ISA RP39.6. These gagecocks have
internal screw threads that are wetted by the process liquid. They are used in
conjunction with direct reading flat glass gages in the petroleum, chemical and
general process industries. Offset gagecocks permit the inside of the gage glass to
be cleaned with minimum disassembly by removing vent and drain plugs (or other
connection) and inserting brush through the vent or drain.
FEATURES
• Provide a 90° connection to the pressure vessel
• Offset gagecock can be easily cleaned with minimal disassembly
• Ball checks prevent loss of process fluid in the event of an accidental breakage of the gage glass.
• Gagecocks can be supplied to meet ASME requirements
• 300 Series (Models 320/330) have an integral seat and bonnet
• 400 Series (Models 420/430) have a threaded renewable seat and union bonnet
• Wide variety of gage and vessel connections available
• Standard features for all models include offset pattern, ball check shut off, handwheel, ASTM A105 forged steel body
and ASTM A582 416 SS trim for gagecock sets that are acceptable for ASME Boiler Code, ball check shutoffs are
omitted.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model Bonnet/Seat Gage Connection Vessel Connection Drain/Vent Connection Max Pressure Temperature
Configuration (at 100°F ) Range
320 Integral Bonnet, Union – ½” NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” NPTF 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Integral Seat Socketweld, Flanged, Union – Socketweld, Flanged,
NPTM, Spherical Union Spherical Union, Solid
Shank
420 Union Bonnet, Union – ½” NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” NPTF 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Threaded Seat Socketweld, Flanged, Union – Socketweld, Flanged,
NPTM, Spherical Union Spherical Union, Solid
Shank
330 Integral Bonnet, Rigid – ½” NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” NPTF 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Integral Seat Socketweld, Flanged Socketweld, Flanged,
Spherical Union, Solid
Shank
430 Union Bonnet, Rigid – ½” NPTF, Optional: Union – ¾” NPTM, Optional: ½” NPTF, Optional: ¾” NPTF 4000 psi -300°F to 750°F
Threaded Seat Socketweld, Flanged Socketweld, Flanged, I
Spherical Union, Solid
Shank
*Optional materials can be specified for gagecock body and trim (stem, stem packing retainer, ball check and seat (400 Series only). Standard and optional materials
conform to ASTM specifications. Other connection sizes and styles (male/female) also available.

Level • Controls & Field Interface Devices
Omnitrol
Pneumatic Air Switch

Model 609
DESCRIPTION
The Model 609 is a magnetically actuated precision-made on/off
pneumatic instrument, which incorporates the use of a magnetically
controlled switch actuator in conjunction with specific displacer
configurations to provide liquid level indication and control. It is
designed to operate under the corrosive and vibrating conditions
associated with petrochemical industrial applications such as scrubber
level control on level gas compressors for maintaining specific liquid
levels and/or for high or low safety alarm indication. The air switch can
be supplied with any single stage (600 series) Omnitrol unit, with the
exception of the Series 250. With the use of an adaptor kit it may be
field retrofitted to any standard housing electric switch unit Model 310
FEATURES
• 316 Stainless Steel construction (switch element)
• For use in corrosive and vibrating conditions
• Standard ¼” NPT supply and output connections
• Constantly engaged magnetic field
• Trouble-free service - Assured by unique magnetic coupling, reliable performance and low cost
• Direct or reverse acting operation
• Fluorisilicon O-Ring Seals - for tight shut-off and long life
• Fast action and large, easy to clean ports provide fast response to liquid level changes
• Three port, non-bleed design conserves instrument air or gas
SPECIFICATIONS
Body and Internal Components 316 SS
O-Ring Seals Fluorosilicone
Connections ¼" NPT for supply and output connections-adaptable to standard chamber mount or top mount units
Ratings
Pressure Ranges Instrument Air Supply 0-10 lbs. or 0-75 lbs. maximum pressure 100 PSIG
Maximum Ambient -30°F to 150°F
Temperature
I Control Switch
Direct Acting Air Switch:
Low Liquid Level Supply port closed; Exhaust port open
High Liquid Level Supply port open; Exhaust port closed
Reverse Acting Air Switch:
Low Level Liquid Supply port open; Exhaust port closed
High Level Liquid Supply port closed; Exhaust port open
*For a given set of conditions or specific gravity, pressure and temperature, the switching differential will be approximately 5% greater when the air
switch is used in lieu of the standard electric switch.

Side Mounted Level Switch

2800 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 2800 series is a high quality side mounted liquid
level control switch designed for ease of installation, a
long maintenance-free life and economy. It utilizes a flex
tube principle of operation allowing for high pressure side
mounted applications. The internal switch components are
housed in an explosion proof cast aluminum enclosure
and are isolated from the process liquid by two precision
welds at the flex tube junction.
FEATURES
• Horizontal displacers for close switching differentials
• High process pressures up to 2000 PSIG
• Explosion Proof design, UL and CSA approved Class I, Division 1 Group D
• All wetted parts 304 Stainless Steel
• Displacers available in multiple materials
• Displacers are mounted horizontally and are available in stainless steel, PVC (Polyvinylchloride), PET (Polyethylene)
or Teflon materials
• Standard with a 1” NPT
APPLICATIONS
• High and low level alarms in process vessels, storage tanks, compressors, scrubbers and a variety of equipment.
• Control functions such as on-off pump control.
• Due to extreme sensitivity, they are not recommended for transportable or turbulent service, or on equipment that
vibrates.

Side Mounted Level Switch - Continued
SPECIFICATIONS
Housing Cast Aluminum
Tube and Connector Assembly 304 Stainless Steel
Internals 304 Stainless Steel, plated steel, Stainless Steel, phenolic insulator
Displacer PVC, PET, Teflon or 304 SS (user selected based on application)
Mounting Connections
2800 304 SS
2801 cast iron, forged steel or SS
2802 cast iron, forged steel or SS
Connections
Mechanical 1" NPT malecon nector adaptable to 2-1/2” NPT or 3” RF ANSI flange, larger sizes/types available
Electrical ¾" NPT conduit
Ratings
Max Safe Working Pressure 2000 PSI*
Max Safe Working Temperature 150°F
Switch Ratings
Voltage 125, 250 or 480V ac
Current 15 amps max
Power 1/8 HP, 125V ac; 1/4 HP, 250V ac; 1/2 amp, 125V dc; 1/4 amp, 250V dc
Approvals UL and CSA Class I Division 1 Group D
*Limited to maximum pressure rating of mounting connection
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X X
Table 1 Model Table 4 Minimum Specific Gravity

I 2800 1” NPT male Connection 1 1.4
2801 2-½” NPT male Connection* 2 .9
2802 3” or larger flange connection* 3 .6
Table 2 Housing Material 4 .5
A Aluminum 5 .4
B Cast Iron
Table 3 Displacer Material / Specific Gravity Range
J PET (.4 - 1.3)
K PVC (.5 - 1.4)
L Teflon (.6 - 2.1)
M 304 SS (.4 - 2.1)

Top Mounted Level Switches with Graphite

Displacers
Models 610/710
DESCRIPTION
The Model 610 single stage control and the 710 two stage control
are top mounted level switches of the adjustable differential type and
utilize graphite as standard displacer material. Because they are of
the solid displacer type they are unaffected by pressures, leakage,
collapsing, or surface agitation, making them well suited for difficult
applications such as surging or agitated liquids.
With a simple field adjustment, the displacer can be positioned to

any desired elevation below the mounting connection to open and/
or close an electric or pneumatic switch. The distance between the
on/off or open/close is adjustable from a minimum of 2-1/2” (in a
specific gravity of 1.0) to the maximum length of the cable, which is
10 feet (standard). Controls may be supplied with cables up to 75
feet for 600 series controls and 40 feet for 700 series.
FEATURES Model 610 Model 710

• Solid Graphite displacers
• May be used for pressures up to 1500 psig with standard constructions
• Simple adjustment of displacers for various switching differentials
• Specific gravities as low as 0.35 (600 Series only) with standard displacer options
• Ideal for highly corrosive applications
• CSA and UL Approved
APPLICATIONS
• High Temperature Water or Oils
• Petro-Chemical Processes
• Pump Control (Adjustable differentials)
• Alarm Annunciation
SPECIFICATIONS
Specific Gravity 1.2 1.1 1.0 .95 .90 .85 .80 .75 .70 .65 .60 .55 .50 .45 .40 I
Differential Inches 2.1 2.2 2.4 2.5 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.8 4.2 4.5 5.0 5.6
Differential mm. 53 56 61 64 69 71 74 79 84 89 97 107 114
Minimum switching differential for desired specific gravity (2-½” displacer)

Basic Temperature Rating is -20° F to +400° F (-29° C to +204° C)

Top Mounted Level Switches with Porcelain

Displacers
Models 613/713
DESCRIPTION
The Model 613 single stage control and the Model 713 two stage,
(Dual Actuator), control are top mounted level switches of the
adjustable differential type and utilize porcelain as standard displacer
material. These controls have solid displacers which are unaffected
by pressure, leakage, and collapsing. With a simple field adjustment
the displacer can be positioned to any desired elevation below the
mounting connection to open and/or close an electric or pneumatic
switch. The distance between the on/off or open/close is adjustable
from the minimum to the maximum length of the cable, which is 10 feet
standard.
FEATURES
• Low cost porcelain displacer material prevents adherence of oils and
other contaminants common to applied processes
• Simple adjustment of displacers for various switching differentials
• Cone top displacers shed debris floating in liquid (such as sewage)
• Controls may be supplied with cables up to 60 feet for 600 series and
40 feet for 700 series.
Model 613
• UL & CSA approved
• Model 613 or 713 may be used for pressures up to 1500 PSIG with Model 713
standard construction and for specific gravities as low as 0.50, for the
613, and 0.60 for the 713.
APPLICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Switching Differentials vs. Specific Gravity for the 613, 2-½” Displacer
I Specific Gravity 1.7 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.1 1.0 .95 .90 .85 .80 .75 .70 .65 .60
Differential Inches 1.72 1.81 1.91 2.02 2.15 2.30 2.49 2.70 2.84 2.98 3.10 3.31 3.51 3.74 4.00 4.32
Differential mm. 44 46 48 51 55 58 63 69 72 76 79 84 89 95 102 110
Minimum Switching Differentials vs. Specific Gravity for the 713, 2-½” Displacer
Specific Gravity 1.2 1.1 1.0 .95 .90 .85 .80 .75 .70 .65 .60
Differential Inches 2.30 2.49 2.70 2.84 2.98 3.10 3.31 3.51 3.74 4.00 4.32
Differential mm. 58 63 69 72 76 79 84 89 95 102 110

Top Mounted Level Switches with Stainless Steel

Displacers
Models 616/716
DESCRIPTION
Thel Model 616 single actuator and the Model 716 double actuator are top
mounted level switches. These controls have a standard 2-1/2” NPT connection
and are also available with various sized flanges. The displacer is made from
stainless steel tube. With a simple field adjustment, the displacer can be positioned
to any desired elevation below the mounting connection to open and/or close an
electric or pneumatic switch. The distance between the on/off or open/close is
adjustable from a minimum of 2-1/2” (in a specific gravity of 1.0) to the maximum
length of the cable, which is 10 feet (standard). Controls may be supplied with
cables up to 75 feet for 600 series controls and 40 feet for 700 series.
FEATURES
• Simple adjustments of displacers for various switching differentials
• Designed for applications requiring SS
• Not affected by turbulent liquids
• Constantly engaged magnetic field gives a positive "make" or "break" action of
the switch
• Magnetic field enables the use of an SPST,SPDT, DPST or DPDT switch
economically on each actuator
• Micro switches can be used on each side of thh actuator to provide double pole
switching
• High temperature applications
• Magnetic field enables the use of an SPST, SPDT, DPST, or DPDT switch
economically on each actuator.
• Acidic and Alkaline Liquids
• UL & CSA approved Applications
APPLICATIONS
I
SPECIFICATIONS
Specific Gravity Range
Maximum 2.0
Minimum .70
Allowable Specific Gravity Variation +/-.2 Except note minimum
Process Temp Rating
Stainless Steel 500°F

Top Mounted Level Switches with Lead Displacers

Models 621/721
DESCRIPTION
The Omnitrol Model 621 single stage controls and the Model
721 two stage controls are “special purpose” top mounted level
switches of the fixed differential type. The feature which sets
these level devices apart from other top mounted controls is the
lead displacers that are suspended on a stainless steel beaded
chain for the purpose of determining floating roof tank top alarm
positions. As the level in a floating roof tank or internal floating
pan rises and falls so does the roof. As the roof rises to the
Hi level position and picks up the weight, the control senses
the release of the weight and opens or closes an electric or
pneumatic contact switch.
FEATURES
• Lead displacers to protect against nuisance switching
associated with wind
• Short fixed differential- Ideal for alarm applications
• Beaded suspension chain to prevent coiling and kinking
• Positive tank protections and spill prevention
• Variety of mounting options
• CSA & UL Approved Model 621 Model 721
• 721 offers two stage operation for High and High-High level
alarm applications
SPECIFICATIONS
APPLICATIONS Temperature -20°F to 400°F
• Floating Roof Tanks
Calibration Each control is factory calibratred prior to
• Petro-Chemical Processes shipment to the field. Additional lengths
• Pump Control (Adjustable differentials) of stainless steel beaded chain may be
specified.
Switch Housing Standard, Weather Resistant, Explosion
Proof/Vapor Proof, Explosion Proof/Rain
Tight
Mounting Connections Screwed (Cast Iron or Forged Steel) or
Flange Mounting
I

Ground Level Checker Option

Model 947
DESCRIPTION
The Ground Level Checker Option is a factory installed option which
when assembled to a typical top mounted Omnitrol unit provides
ground level or tank top checking. Through the application of this
design, a positive check can be made by operating a balanced lever
arm mechanically linked to the switch mechanism of the control
without interrupting normal operation or exposing the operator and/
or system to hazardous conditions.
These devices are intended to be a primary source of high (single

stage) or high-high (dual stage) level alarm control and are often
used in conjunction with the tank gauging equipment.
FEATURES
• Checks operation of tank safety switches
• For use with 610/710, 621/721, 613/713, 616/716
• Ground level or tank top operation
• Applicable to cone roof or fl oating roof tanks, and 700 Series with Ground Level
internal floating pans
Checker Option
• Designed for maximum pressure of 25 PSI
• Checker is supplied with 10 feet of stainless steel
beaded chain. Maximum 60 feet optional. SPECIFICATIONS
Linkage Box and Cover Aluminum
APPLICATIONS Internal Components Stainless Steel
Protection of storage tanks in:
O-Ring Viton (Std.)
• Marketing terminals
Gaskets Buna-N
• Tanks adjacent to inland waterways
Linkage Arm
• Pipe line storage tanks Steel
Counter Weight
• Tanks in Petro/Chemical plants Steel
Operating Chain Stainless Steel
Mounting Connections Cast Iron (250 lbs. Class fitting), 2-½" NPT
Maximum Safe Working 25 PSI at 100°F
Pressure and Temperature
I

Pneumatic Modulating Liquid Level Controls

300 Series
DESCRIPTION
The 300 Series liquid level controls are displacer type units based on a balanced
pneumatic modulating system and a constantly engaged magnetic field. This proven
magnetic principle transmits force to a balance beam without the use of bellows,
packing, or mechanical connection to the displacer assembly. Direct mechanical
actuation of the relay by the force balance beam eliminates nozzles, flappers,
orifices and output boosters common to units of other manufacturers, and produces
a linear output with absolute repeatability.The proportion band is fixed by the size
and configuration of the displacer selected. By simply moving the level setting
screw from one side of the pivot to the other, the instrument can be made direct or
reverse acting.Controls are available in top mount and chamber mount designs for
applications utilizing storage tanks, pressure vessels, boilers and pumps.
FEATURES Model 310

• Variable level setting
• Direct or reverse acting
• Controlled stability
• The true force balance principle produces a linear output
Body Materials Cast Iron
Magnets Ceramic
Pivot Bearings Stainless Steel
Model 325
Spring Stainless Steel
Displacer Graphite
Displacer Spring Inconel-X
Connections
Top Mount (310) 2-½" screwed, or 3" or larger flanged connections
Chamber Mount 1" NPT or flanged if specified
(325)
HOW TO ORDER

I XXXX X X X
Table 1 Design Table 3 Process Connections

310 Top Mounted 1 SB 1” NPT
325 Chamber Mounted 2 SSB 1” NPT
Table 2 Proportional Band, Displacer Material and Size 3 SB 1 ½ ” Flange
Band Material Size 4 SSB 1 ½ ” Flange
1 2¼” Graphite 3” x 6” 5 SB 2” Flange
2 2¼” Stainless Steel 3” x 6” 6 SSB 2” Flange
3 3½” Graphite 2 ½ ” x 9” Table 4 Body and Flange Rating
4 3½” Stainless Steel 2 ½ ” x 9” 1 150 lb.
5 5” Graphite 2” x 14” 2 300 lb.
6 5” Stainless Steel 2” x 14” 3 600 lb.
7 8” Stainless Steel 1 ½ ” x 24”

8 12” Stainless Steel 1 ¼ ” x 36 ”

Robertshaw
Conductivity Switch
Model 352
DESCRIPTION
The Model 352 is a conductivity sensing ON-OFF control unit that is
completely self-contained and enclosed in weathertight and explosion
proof housing. Designed to be mounted directly on the sensing probe or
electrode, it may be used to detect conductive liquid levels or interface
between non-conductive and conductive liquids. The sensing electrode, or
probe, must be of the bare, non-insulated style.
FEATURES
• Low AC voltage on electrode means no safety hazard to personnel
• Field changeable fail-safe mode for operation on low level or high level
application
• Completely self-contained. Mounts directly on sensing probe, no
additional equipment required. Probe ordered separately.
• Wide adjustment range allows operation on even partially conductive
materials
• Plug-in Control Relay
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply voltage 120 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz 240 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply power 5 watts, 15 VA maximum
Control Relay:
Form DPDT, electromechanical
Rating 5 a @ 120/240 VAC, electromechanical
Enclosure Weather tight NEMA 4 and Explosion Proof Class 1, Division 1,
Group C & D
Operating temperature limits -40°F to +160°F
Vibration limits ±2 g's, 20-200 Hz
Humidity 0-95 RH@ 100°F
Shock 75 g's for 11 ms without permanent damage
Weight 4 lbs
Resistance operating range 200 ohms to 2.0 megohms
Deadband 5% maximum
Temperature coefficient 0.05%/l00°F I
Supply coefficient 2%/10% supply change

Conductivity Switch
Model 5318B
DESCRIPTION
The Robertshaw Model 5318B Level-Tek is a RF capacitance point (On/
Off) level switch, which employs all solid state electronics for detecting
predetermined product level changes in tanks, sumps, silos and other
vessels or containers. The Model 5318B is capable of detecting a wide
variety of products, including liquids, powders, granular, lump and flake
materials. The product can be either conductive or non-conductive.
FEATURES
• Enclosure meets explosion-proof and weather-tight requirements. Choice
of supply voltages. Adjustable time delays are standard.
• Use of digital solid-state circuits insures long-term stability, reliability, and
reduced maintenance.
• Self-contained unit may be oriented in any position.
• Mounts directly on installed Robertshaw Probe Assembly, connected to
probe element by rugged, and convenient, disconnect pin.
• High Level Fail-Safe, HLFS, or Low Level Fail-Safe, LLFS, is user field
selectable.
• Built-in LCD display aids in calibration (no external meter required).
• Plug-in chassis assembly provides easy access to wiring and terminal
board. Heavy-duty relay.
• Remote Mount Capability up to 15 feet from the probe
• cETLus Approvals
• RoHS Compliant
• Probe ordered separately
SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Temperature Limits -55° F to +225° F (-48° C to +107° C)
Operating Temperature Limits -40° F to +160° F (-40° C to +70° C)
Vibration Limits 2 g's to 100 Hz
Operating Humidity Limits 0 to 95% RH
Temperature Coefficient Control point, 0.01 pF/ºC
Time Delay:
I On ALARM Adjustable, 0 to 60 seconds
On RETURN Adjustable, 0 to 60 seconds
Standard Supply Voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Supply Power 5 watts, 5 VA maximum
Control Ranges 250, 500 & 1,000 pF max
Differential (dead-band):
ON/OFF (Adjustable) 0.2Pf to 100% of Control Range
ALARM++ (Fixed) 1.0 pF
ALARM+ (Fixed) 0.2 pF
ALARM- (Fixed) 0.2 pF
ALARM- - (Fixed) 1.0 pF
CONTROL (Fixed) 0.2 pF
Control Relay:
Form DPDT
Contact Rating 5 A @ 28 VDC; 5 A @ 120/240 VAC, non-inductive:

Single Point RF Level Control Instrument

Model 310
DESCRIPTION
The Robertshaw Model 310 LEVEL-TEK is an all new RF capacitance
sensing, on-off control and display instrument. Used primarily for detecting
and controlling product level changes in vessels or containers, it provides
contact closure for external control action by means of a DPDT plug-
in type, dust tight relay. The weather-tight unit has alarm lights. This
instrument is available with a choice of three supply voltage variations, has
adjustable differential (deadband) and adjustable time delay (response
time). All adjustments are multi-turn by means of sealed potentiometers.
FEATURES
• Remote mount (up to 150 ft.) solid state RF point level control
• No electronics at the sensing probe
• Red and green alarm indicating lights
• Adjustable differential and time delay
• DPDT 5 amp alarm relay
• Field selectable high or low level failsafe
• Optional NEMA 4 or expliosion-proof enclosure
• CSA certified models
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Limits -40°F to +160°F
Storage Temperature -55°F to +225°F
Vibration Limits 2 g's to 100 Hz Probe, Cable and Conduit Outlet Box shown for illustration
Enclosure Classification Weathertight NEMA 4 locations & CSA enclosure 5, or Explosion- only. Not included.
proof, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D, and Class II, Div. 1, Groups E,
F, & G.
Operating Humidity Range 0% to 95% RH
Supply 26.5 VDC ± 10%, 120 VAC ± 10% 50/60 Hz, or 240 VAC ± 10%
50/60 Hz
Supply Power 10 watts max with lights 5 watts max without lights Output Relay
(Electromechanical Type):
Form DPDT, Plug-in
Contact 5A, 28 VDC, 120 VAC, Non-inductive
Intrinsic Safety Probe circuit for Models 310-(B,C) (2,4) for Class I, Div. 1, Group
C,D; Class II, Div. 1, Group E, F, G hazardous locations.
I
Zero Adjustment (Control Point) 20 to 225 pf
Range
Differential (Deadband) 0.2 pf to 200 pf
Response Time (Time Delay) 0.5 to 20.0 seconds
Connecting Cable Length Any length up to 150 ft. max.
Sensitivity 0.1 pf
Repeatability within 0.1 pf
NOTE: Connecting triax cable should be protected with flexible or rigid conduit.

Multi Point Level Control Instrument

Model 5400A
DESCRIPTION
The 5400A Level-Lance is a microprocessor-based on/off level control
system that provides economical 1 to 4 point control using only one
sensing element.
FEATURES
• Push button calibration
• Plug-in DPDT 10 amp relays
• Independent time delay and adjustable different for each relay
• Self-diagnostics with LED failure indication
• Intrinsically safe transmitter/probe input without use of safety barriers
• Non-volatile memory
• Optional indicator lights
• Optional NEMA 4, NEMA 4X or explosion-proof enclosure
• c-UL and UL certified
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Supply Voltage 120/240 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply Power for Exp-proof 48 Watts Max
w/lights
Supply Power for all other 20 Watts max
models
Control Range 0 to 3000 pF
Adjustable Differential 0.2 pF to 100% of Control Range
Fixed Differential 0.1 pF
Adjustable Time Delay 0 to 99 seconds
Ambient Temperature Effect ± 0.005 pF/deg F or ± 0.01%/deg F, whichever is greater
Supply Variation Effect None
Linearity ± 0.5%
Resolution 0.1 pF
Repeatability ± 0.1 pF
Relay Output Electro-Mechanical, DPDT 10 A @ 30 VDC,120 VAC, 240 VAC RES;
5 A @ 120 VAC IND; 3 A @ 240 VAC IND; 1/3 HP @ 120 VAC, 240
VAC
I Maximum Distance Between Fifteen (15) feet
Probe and Transmitter
Type of Interconnecting Cable Coaxial, RG-62/U, rated 80° C minimum
Maximum Distance Between One (1) mile
Transmitter and Controller
Type of Interconnecting Cable Two (2) wires, twisted pair in grounded metal conduit or twisted,
shielded pair in non-metallic conduit. 14 AWG Maximum rated 80° C
minimum
Ambient Temperature -30° to +140° F (-34° to +60° C)
Storage Temperature -40° to +158° F (-40° to +70° C)
Relative Humidity 0 to 95% (non-condensing)
Vibration ± 2 G, 10 to 200 Hz
Shock 75 G for 11 msec without permanent damage

Multi Point RF Level Control Instrument

Model 314B
DESCRIPTION
The Robertshaw Model 314B Level-Tek is an all solid state RF control
instrument providing ON/OFF control with two independently adjustable
setpoints each with its own output control relay. For use with a vertically
mounted probe assembly, the independent and non-interacting control
points may be adjusted throughout the length of the probe up to the limits
of the capacitance range.
FEATURES
• Direct mount, solid state RF point level control
• Two independent set points and control relays
• Adjustable differential for each set point (50%)
• Field selectable high or low level failsafe
• Two SPDT 5 amp alarm relays
• NEMA 4 and explosion-proof enclosure
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temperature Limits -40ºF to +160ºF
Storage Temperature Limits -55ºF to +225ºF
Vibration Limits 2 g's to 100 Hz
Enclosure Classification Class 1, Division 1, Groups C and D and Watertight NEMA 4
Operating Humidity Range 0% to 90% RH
Temperature Coefficient 0.0065 pF/ºF
Supply Voltage 26.5 VDC ± 10%, 120 VAC ± 10% or 240 VAC ± 10%
Supply Power 5 VA Maximum
Output Relay:
Form SPDT (Electro-Mech Relays)
Rating 5A, 120 VAC or 28 VDC
Set-Point Adjustment Range 15-500 pF
Differential (Deadband) 0.2 pF to approximately 50% of set-point Minimum Difference
Between the Two Relay
Minimum Difference Between 1 pF
the Two Relay Set-Points
Response Time 50 milliseconds I
Repeatability Within 0.2 pF

Single Point Level Control Instrument

Level Lance Model 5100
DESCRIPTION
The Robertshaw Model 5100 Level-Lance is a microprocessor based,
advanced technology On-Off level detection instrument. By utilizing
the microprocessor, the device can be calibrated without screwdriver
adjustments or knobs to turn. The simplicity of the "Auto Set" calibration
is the ultimate in level control ease of adjustment.
The Model 5100 has eight (8) separate and individual programs
preprogrammed into its memory. These programs let the user select the
"type" of On-Off control action best suited for the application. The eight
programs are field selectable by means of a 10 position rotary switch.
FEATURES
• Microprocessor Based.
• Auto-Set Calibration
• Calibration Data Retained on Loss of Power (no battery required)
• Digitally Set time delays.
• Selectable Fail-Safe Modes.
• Eight Pre-programmed Control Modes (user selectable).
• Built in self diagnostics.
• Optional Status Indicating Lights (Rain tight version only) and explosion-proof enclosure.
• No Special Cables (Transmitter can be located up to 1 mile from the receiver using standard twisted pair instrument
wire).
• Utilizes Robertshaw's Patented PFM Transmitter Technology.
• Supports Robertshaw's Short-Stop Probe for tough applications where product buildup or coating occurs.
• Intrinsically Safe PFM Transmitter, UL/c-UL Listed (Non Short Stop version only).
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage: 120 VAC, ± 10%, 50/60 Hz Standard.
Supply Power: 10 VA (max.)
Control Range: 0.1 to 3000 pF
Adjustable Differential: 0.2 pF to 100% of Control Range
Adjustable Time Delay: 0 to 99 Seconds
Ambient Temperature Effect: ± 0.005 pF/°F or ± 0.01 %/°F whichever is greater
I Supply Variation Effect: None

Linearity: ± 0.5 %
Resolution: 0.1 pF
Repeatability: ± 0.1 pF
Relay Output: Electro-Mechanical, DPDT 10 amp @ 120/240 VAC, 10 amp @ 30
VDC, Non-Inductive
Maximum Difference One (1) mile
BetweenTransmitter and
Receiver:
Type Of Interconnection Two (2) wires (Twisted Pair) for Standard PFM Transmitter
Cable: (BELDEN #8205 or #8762, Shielded) or Three (3) Wires (BELDEN
#9492 or #9364, Shielded) For Short-Stop™ PFM Transmitter.
Temperature (Operating or -40 to +140°F
Storage):
-40 to + 60°C
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% Non-Condensing
Vibration: ± 2G, 10 to 200 Hz
Shock: 75 G's for 11 ms without permanent Damage

Continuous Level Controller

Excalibur 7000
DESCRIPTION
The Excalibur 7000 offers both a smart RF capacitance microprocessor-
based level transmitter and PID controller, providing the flexibility to meet
all level appplication requirements.
FEATURES
• Menu driven setup and calibration with keypad entry
• Set point and process variable displays
• Patented PFM Transmitter Technology-no coax/triax cable required
• Optional two or four alarm relays with differential and time delay
adjustments
• Intrinsically safe transmitter /probe input(barrier required)
• Field selectable input linearization for open channel flow/horizontal tanks
• Communication isolated 4-20 ma output
• Continuous Self-diagnostics
• Calibration by local keypad calibrator or PC
• High Sensitivity, low range capability
• NEMA 4/4X or explosion-proof enclosure
• c-UL and UL certified transmitter (standard version only)
SPECIFICATIONS
Supply Voltage 120/240 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz switch selectable.
Supply Power 20VA. Max.
Measurement Range:
With Standard PFM 10 to 6000 pF
Transmitter (1 range):
With Low Span PFM 2 to 335 pF
Transmitter (1 range):
Resolution ± 0.002% of Span
Accuracy ± 0.5% Typical
Repeatability ± 0.1pF
Ambient Temperature Effect ± 0.005pF/Deg. F ± 0.01pF/Deg.C
Alarm Set point 0 to 100.00%, 0.01% Resolution
Alarm Differential 0 to 100.00%, 0.01% Resolution
Alarm Time Delays 0 to 60 seconds 0.001 second resolution
I
Relay Output Optional Type-Electromechanical contacts SPDT, 8A @ 30 VDC, 10A
@ 250 VAC GP, 5A @ 120 VAC IND, 1/3 HP @ 120 VAC
Analog Output Optional 4-20 mADC into a 650 ohm load max.
Maximum Distance Between One (1) mile
Transmitter and Controller
Interconnecting Cable Two (2) wire, twisted pair recommended. Similar to Belden #8205
Between Transmitter and (unshielded), or #8762 (shielded)
Controller
Temperature (Operating or -40 to +140°F (-40 to +60°C)
Storage):
Relative Humidity 0 to 95%, Non-Condensing
Vibration ±2 G, 10 to 200Hz
Shock 75G's for 11msec. without permanent damage
Enclosure:
PFM Transmitter Raintight, NEMA 4 optional – Rain tight, NEMA 4X, epoxy painted
Controller Non-metallic – UL Listed Type 4X and CSA Certified Type 4X

Level • Probes & Sensors
Robertshaw
Direct Mount Level Transmitter

Model 167
DESCRIPTION
The 167 Level-Tel is a self-contained sensing transmitter. Anti-coating
circuitry prevents build-up on the sensing probe, thus minimizing error.
FEATURES
• Continuous level, solid RF transmitter
• Isolated 4-20 mADC output
• Intrinscally safe models (barrier required)
• 17 to 35 VDC, 2-wire, 120 VAC, 240 VAC power options
• Optional explosion-proof indicator
• NEMA 4 and explosion-proof enclosure
• Probe ordered separately
SPECIFICATIONS
Storage Temperature Limits -65°F to +200°F (-54°C to +93°C)
Operating Temperature Limits -40°F to +160°F (-40°C to +71 °C)
Vibration ±2g's 10 to 200Hz
Shock 75 g's for 11 Milliseconds
Humidity 95% RH @ 100°F (38°C)
Maximum Total Capacitance 2000 pF
(terminal, zero suppression &
maximum span)
Terminal Capacitance Range 30 to 1000 pF
Span Capacitance Range 10 to 1700 pF
Repeatability ±0.1%
Linearity ± 0.25%, 10 to 500 pF span ± 0.5%, 500 to 1700 pF span
Temperature Effect: Span & 0.01 % °F (0.018 %/°C) or 0.01 pF/°F (0.018 pF/°C) whichever
Zero is greater
Maximum recommended 5:1
Terminal/Span ratio
Supply Variation Effect 0.1 %/10% supply change max.
Output Signal Ripple 0.25 % peak to peak
0.01 % Minimum
I
Sensitivity

Remote Mount Level Transmitter

Model 158A
DESCRIPTION
The 158A Level-Tel capacitance-to-current RF transmitter is designed
to be remotely mounted from the sensing probe, and is used for
continuous level measurement and control.
FEATURES
• Remote mount (up to 150 ft.), solid state RF transmitter
• No electronics at the sensing probe
• 4-20 mADC output
• Optional analog display
• Optional 1 to 5, 10 to 50, 0 to 10 mADC outputs
• Optional weather-tight or explosion-proof enclosures
• Intrinsically safe models
• Utilizes triaxial connection cable
• Cable and probe ordered separately
SPECIFICATIONS
Storage -55° F to 225° F (-48° C to 107° C)
Operating Temperature Limits -40° F to 160° F (-40° C to 70° C)
Operating Vibration Limits 2 g's, 10 to 200 Hz
Operating Humidity Limits 95% RH @ 100° F
Mechanical Shock 75 g's for 11 ms duration without permanent damage
Supply Variation Effect 0.5%/10% supply change
Temperature Coefficient 1.0%/100° F ambient (including connecting cable) change, or 1
pF/100° F whichever is greater
Load Resistance Effect 0.25% from no load to full load
Output Signal Ripple 0.2% PP maximum @ supply voltage frequency
Terminal Non-linearity 0.5% maximum for spans less than 1000 pF, 1.0% maximum for
spans greater than 1000 pF
Standard Supply Voltage¹: 120 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz
Supply Power:
AC 5 watts, 7 VA maximum
DC 85 mA maximum
I
Standard Output Signal 4-20 mA into 0 to 650 ohms
Input Signal (Capacitance):
Terminal Adjustment 0 to 1000 pF
Span Adjustment 10 pF plus 1 pF per each 10 feet of connecting cable minimum,
2000 pF maximum
Maximum Zero Suppression 10 times span
Connecting Cable Length 150 feet maximum
¹Other supply voltage and output signals available.

Level • Digital Level Gauges
Smart Flash Infrared Radar Gauge

L&J Engineering
MCG 1600SFI
• Frequency Modulated Continuous Waveform
• Crystal Controlled Phase Lock Loop Technology
• Ultra Highspeed Floating Point Digital Signal
• Processor for Continuous Calibration
• Density Measurement/Hybrid Gauge
• Antennas Tailored for Specific Applications
Conar Antenna for Smart Flash

Infrared Radar Gauge
MCG 1600CA
• Designed to be used with Smart Flash Infared Radar Gauge, MCG
1600SFI• +/- 0.5 mm Accuracy
• Frequency Modulated Continuous Waveform Technology
• Designed for Stilling Well Applications
• Gauge Sampling Hatch Version Available
Stilling Well Adapter

evo 2600SW
• Non Contact Level Gauging
• Fits into existing 1.5" NPT Nozzles
• Tank Specific Adapter Lengths
Process Radar Gauge

MCG 1800
• Microwave Pulse Radar Technology
• 6.3 GHz Low Frequency Loop Powered Radar
• FM and ATEX Approved
• Ultra Low Power
• Local Display With IR Programmability
• Analog 4-20mA and Digital HART Outputs
• Calibration Via MCG 2150 Remote Calibrator or HART Handheld
• Antennas Tailored for Specific Applications

Process Propane Package

MCG 1812
• 6.3 GHz Low Frequency Radar Loop Powered
• 2-Wire, Lightweight Design
• Ultra Low Power
• Non-Contact and Low Maintenance
• Microwave Pulse Radar Technology
• Local Display With IR Programmability
• Analog 4-20 mA and Digital HART Outputs
Radar Gauge
evo 2600
• +/- 3mm Accuracy Standard
• 4-20ma Loop Powered
• 26 GHz Frequency
• FMCW Technology
• e.WAVE Display
• e.CAL Intuitive Setup Wizard
• Lightweight

Smart Flash Infrared Servo Gauge

MCG 1500SFI
Brushless Design Eliminates Moving Parts
With only three moving parts (drum assembly, gear assembly, and stepper
motor) and only two PC boards (the CPU and the strain gauge amplifier),
L&J has minimized parts to ensure reliability. Brushless design eliminates
the inherent problem of friction and wear on the contacts. The MCG 1500SFI
is the most compact and lightest servo available today.
Calibration Made Simple

The versatile MCG 1500SFI incorporates various self-calibration procedures
to ensure absolute integrity as well as accuracy. Routines which are built into
the processor have been designed to compensate for any possible product
build-up on the displacer or any "give" or "play" in the cable.
Engineered For High Performance

± 0.4mm accuracy coupled with the 0.4mm repeatability provides the highest accuracy available in servo technology.
The servo housing is divided into two sections, the drum chamber and the electronics chamber. The drum chamber is
isolated from the electronics chamber by a magnetic coupling. The electronic chamber is a gas tight, explosion proof
housing which isolates the electrical components from both the product environment and the atmosphere. The MCG
1500SFI typically communicates using the standard L&J Tankway 4-wire data highway, yet simple plug-in modules can
be utilized to provide for emulation of most existing, as well as custom field protocols or analog outputs.
Ground Level Display

The optional Ground Level Display (MCG 1350) is a remote LCD display which is identical in form and function to
the display on the main unit. It enables complete programming and calibration functions via the MCG 2150 Remote
Calibrator.
Inventory Management
The MCG 1500SFI servos, which transmit level and temperature data, can be remotely accessed by a computer/
receiver such as the MCG 3900 via the L&J Tankway. Product temperature is obtained by using a 3-wire R.T.D. (copper
or platinum), or a MCG 350/351 averaging temperature probe with a MCG 2350 which is connected to an on-board
analog-to-digital converter. It is no longer necessary to climb to the top of the tank to access the desired information or
perform any of the programming functions. Simple plug-in interface modules emulate any existing, as well as custom
field protocols or analog outputs. New or updated programs can be downloaded to any MCG 1500SFI into its on-board
flash memory "on the fly" to incorporate communication protocol changes and additional functionality.
I
FEATURES
• ± 0.4mm Accuracy
• Measures product and interface with custody transfer accuracy
• Infrared Calibration
• Advanced flash memory technology
• Ground level display eliminates tank climbing
• Minimal moving parts (3) ensure reliability

L&J Engineering
Field Interface Card Enclosure

MCG 3200
DESCRIPTION
L&J engineering's Field Interface Devices offer powerful and flexible
data solutions for the growing demands of the industrial world.
Our user-friendly devices are designed to efficiently supply plant
managers' accurate data.
• Flexible Data Interface
• Reliable Field Signal Conversions
• Greater Data Security
Magnetostrictive Receiver
MCG 1010M
• High Accuracy, Continuous Online Measurement
• Supports Spot or Average Temperature
• Supports Dual 4-20mA Inputs & Outputs
• Local Graphical LCD Display
• Handheld Infrared Calibration
• Economical
Protocol Converter
MCG 3221
• Flexible Host System Interface
• Reliable Data Transfer
• Bi-Directional Communication
Mini Field Interface Unit

MCG 3281
• Flexible Data Interface I
• Reliable Field Signal Conversions
• Greater Data Security
Tank Level Monitor

MCG 8100
• Meets states EPA requirements for underground storage tanks
• Tank level and leak detection monitoring
• Interstitial leak detection for both wet/dry wells, double wall tanks
• Extremely accurate microprocessor based system
• Approved for leak detection in tanks up to 150,000 gallons
• Reliable remote communication through RS232 port

L&J Engineering
Wireless Magnetostrictive Level Probe

MCG 8140
• Wireless Technology
• Battery Operation
• High resolution of +/- .001"
• Two Separate Levels Simultaneously Measured
• Average Temperature with Internal Sensors
Rigid Magnetostrictive Level Probe

MCG 8150B
• Meets States EPA Requirements For Underground Storage Tanks
• High Resolution of +/- .001"
Flexible Magnetostrictive Level Probe

MCG 8151
• Two separate levels simultaneously measured
• Average temperature with internal sensors
Flexible Magnetostrictive Level Gauge

MCG 8153
• Two separate levels simultaneously measured
• Average temperature with internal sensors

Rigid Magnetostrictive Level Probe with

Pressure Sensor
MCG 8190A
• Meets States EPA Requirements For Underground Storage Tanks
• High resolution of +/- 0.001"
• Density Measurement with Integral Pressure Transducer
Analog Output Level Probe

MCG 1030
• Magnetostrictive technology
• Accuracy of +/- 1/8" with a High Resolution (+/- 1/32") Option
Available
• Up to 25' Measuring Range
• 4-20 mA or 1-5 Volt Output
• Combines with MCG 1010M for Local Indication and Digital Level
Transmission
• High Pressure Applications
Level Transmitters
MCG 2000MAX
As an industry leader in level gauging solutions for over 35 years,
L&J engineering's level transmitter product offering continually
evolves to meet changing bulk storage needs. L&J engineering I
offers highly accurate, versatile transmitters that provide economical
solutions to a variety of practical applications.
L&J engineering transmitters are ideal for bulk liquid storage vessels
for the petroleum, petrochemical, chemical, pharmaceutical, as well
as food and beverage and water treatment industries.
• Highly Accurate
• Magnetic Absolute Xmitter
• Ultra Low Power
• Absolute Magnetic Encoding for Level Detection
• Level Temperature and Optional Discrete/Analog I/O

Level Transmitters
MCG 2420
• Use on Gauge Boards
• Ultra Low Power
• Absolute Magnetic Encoding for Level Detection
• Advanced Flash Memory Technology
• No Batteries or EPROMS
• 2-Wire Loop Powered
Analog/Digital Level Transmitter

MCG 1200M
• Analog to digital conversion
• Monitor Field / Internal Parameters
• Reliable interface between analog devices and digital protocols
• Advanced Flash Memory Technology
• Wireless Infrared Programming
• Local Graphical LCD Display

PMT
Slim-Line Submersible Level Transmitter

Model SST
DESCRIPTION
The Model SST is easy to install. Simply lower the transmitter into a vessel
or well. It’s that easy. All the electronics are mounted in a submersible 316
stainless steel housing. The transmitter is available calibrated for any span
needed: from 0 to 6 psig or 0 to 0.4 Bar (0 to 14 ft. of water) to 0 to 150 psig or
10 bar (0 to 345 ft. of water)
FEATURES
• 0.69 inch diameter to fit in small bore systems
• Solid state semiconductor sensor for accuracy and reliability
• Rugged 316 stainless steel diaphragm and housing with excellent
environmental protection
• Easy to install and use
• Removable, nonclogging snubnose end protects sensing elements
• 2 wire 4 to 20 mA output
• Vented to the atmosphere through the surface end of the cable
• Reverse polarity, surge, and lightning protection
• Anti-snag feature for easy probe removal
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X XXXX X X X X X
Table 1 Model Table 5 Electrical connection**

SST Slim-line submersible level transmitter N Nut (standard)
Table 2 Sensing port Table 6 Diaphragm material
S ⁹⁄₁₆-18 thread with Delrin snubnose L 316L stainless steel (standard)
Table 3 Input/Output Table 7 Fill fl uid
B 11 to 30 VDC/4 to 20 mA S Silicon oil (standard)
Table 4 Pressure ranges* Table 8 Grommet material
XXXX Pressure range in psig V Viton® (standard)
BXXX Pressure range in barg Table 9 Cable length (K515072)
0006 0 to 6 psi/0 to 0.4 bar (0 to 14 ft./0 to 4.2 m water)
0015 0 to 15 psi/0 to 1 bar (0 to 34 ft./0 to 10.5 m water)
* Please contact rawson for other ranges.
** Please contact rawson for electrical connection options.
I

Submersible Level Transmitter

Model 675
DESCRIPTION
The Model 675 Shark Cage is specifi cally designed for slurry and highly
viscous applications where clogging of the sensor area is common. The
Model 675 uses a 3.5” Diaphragm protected by a 4.75” cage to prevent
unwanted clogging of the sensing area. This submersible level device is
made of 316L SS which offers outstanding environmental protection and
is available in depths up to 110 feet.
FEATURES
• Oversized 3.5” flush diaphragm to prevent clogging sensing area
• 0.25% Full Scale Accuracy
• Intrinsically Safe for Class 1 Division 1
• Custom Pressure Ranges & Cable Lengths
• Extremely rugged 316L SS construction
• Two-wire, 4-20 mA standard output
• Reverse polarity and surge protection
APPLICATIONS
• Lift Stations
• Sewage Levels
• Slurries
• Storm Runoffs
• Pump Control
HOW TO ORDER
XXX X X XXXX X X X XXX
Table 1 Model Table 5 Electrical Connection**

675 Model 675 Submersible Level Transmitter M Polyurethane Vented Cable with Cable Support (K515072)
Table 2 Sensing Port Table 6 Diaphragm Material
P Shark Cage 3.5” Diameter Diaphragm L 316L Stainless Steel
Table 3 Input/Output (Approved Power Supply Required) Table 7 Fill Fluid
B 12 to 28 VDC/4 to 20 mA (Standard) S Silicone Oil
Table 4 Pressure Range* Table 8 Cable Length
I 0006 0 to 6 psig /0 to 0.4 bar (0 to 14 ft./0 to 4.2 m water) XXX (Specify length in feet)
0015 0 to 15 psig /0 to 1 bar (0 to 34.6 ft./0 to 10.5 m water)
* Decimal Points for Non-Unit Ranges May Be Used
0030 0 to 30 psig /0 to 2 bar(0 to 69 ft./0 to 21.1 m water) Decimal Point Requires One Model Code Position, Ie 1.08 = 4 Positions
0060 0 to 60 psig /0 to 4 bar(0 to 138 ft./0 to 42.2 m water)
xxxx Custom ranges available upon request

Moisture Absorbing Desiccant Canister

Model K234436
DESCRIPTION
All Model 675 transmitters are equipped with a sealed
cable termination area and moisture absorbing desiccant
canister. The purpose is to restrict moisture from entering
the transmitter through the cable vent tube. The canister
elements change from blue to pink when it is time to be
replaced.

Section Cover page
Personalized Training Classes
Our technically competent and highly trained sales force will add value to your inventory
through free product training sessions, presented on-site, that will aid in the use and
proper application of the products you purchase from Rawson, once again providing
assistance meant to stretch your inventory dollars to the maximum.
Safety Environmental
Main Index
and
Flame & Fixed Gas Detection
Detcon.................................................................................................................................780
Wireless Gas Detection & Safety System
Detcon.................................................................................................................................787
Portable Gas Detection
Detcon.................................................................................................................................795
Liquid Leak Detection & Surveillance

IntelliView............................................................................................................................798
Vents
Shand & Jurs......................................................................................................................801
779
Safety and Environmental • Flame & Fixed Gas Detection
Detcon
Gas Detection Sensor for Harsh Environments

Model 700
DESCRIPTION
Detcon Model Series 700 industrial gas detection sensors
are a new generation of intelligent sensor modules
that incorporate and integrate several leading edge
improvements. The sensors are specifically designed
for harsh and extreme locations. This new and superior
level of environmental durability in sensor design includes
an electropolished 316 stainless steel housing, multi-
layered transient spike protection circuitry and 100%
encapsulated electronics. The sensor electronics are
completely protected and immune to water ingress and
corrosion. The gas detector sensor elements are all plug- Electrical Classification (FP, TP, IR Series)
in components and can easily be replaced in the field. Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group
Operator interface is non-intrusive via a small handheld IIB+H2 (ATEX)
magnet. Configuration and routine calibration is intuitive
and menu driven with fully scripted instructions. Sensor Electrical Classification (DM, O2, PI Series)
status is displayed on a built-in alphanumeric LED display. Class I, Div 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class I, Zone 1, Group
Model Series 700 intelligent sensor modules feature dual IIC (ATEX)
redundant outputs, a linear 4-20 milliamp analog signal
and a Modbus RS-485 serial output. Safety Approvals
CSA/NRTL (US OSHA Certified)
FEATURES
ATEX
• Water-Proof
SIL2
• Corrosion-Proof
• Vibration-Proof
• Multi-Layer Surge Protection
• Pre-emptive Fault Diagnostics

Oxygen & Toxic Gas Detection Sensors

Model 100
DESCRIPTION
Detcon Model 100 Series sensors feature intelligent
electronics, non-intrusive operator interface and
comprehensive fault diagnostics. The sensor is packaged
in an electro-polished 316 stainless steel housing fitted
with a ¾ inch NPT thread. The plug-in, field replaceable
sensor features large surface area gold-plated pins
that reduce the effects of corrosion in harsh industrial
environments. Signal conditioning electronics are
completely encapsulated in the sensor housing adding
a high level of durability to the design. The packaging is
Explosion Proof (Class I, Div. 1 Groups B, C, D). Model
100 is equipped with a standard analog 4-20 mA current
signal equivalent to the sensor range of detection. Upper
enclosure options are aluminum and stainless steel
(includes a transient protection terminal board). Additional
accessories include wireless communications, a loop
powered digital display, Remote Alarm Module (RAM),
HART, and a current to RS-485 converter. The standard
serial converter is Modbus RTU. Each sensor is shipped
with a splash guard with integral calibration port.
Model DM-100 provides a wide range of toxic gas sensors
and oxygen that uses electrochemical technology.
FEATURES Electrical Classification
• 2-Wire Loop Powered NEMA 4X Class 1, Div. 1, Groups B, C, & D
• Wide Range of Toxic Sensors + Oxygen
• XP-Intrinsically Safe design Safety Approvals
• Non-Intrusive Interface cCSAus/NRTL (US OSHA Certified)
• 4-20 Milliamp Output ATEX
• Class I, Division 1, Groups B,C,D CE Marking
• Integral Sensor Fault Diagnostics
• Fully encapsulated electronics

Gas Detection Sensors/Transmitters

Microsafe™ Models 500 & 600
DESCRIPTION
Detcon MicroSafe™ Series intelligent gas detection
sensors feature Detcon's MicroSafe™ intuitive software.
Operator interface is non-intrusive using a hand-held
magnet and program switches accessed through a glass
lens cover. Calibration instructions appear in simple
interactive and sequential script on a 16-character backlit
alphanumeric display. The transmitter design incorporates
extensive fault diagnostics with each condition
conveniently identified on the transmitter display. The gas
detector sensor elements and transmitters are plug-in
components and can easily be replaced in the field.
Model Series 500 comes standard with a linear 4-20 mA Electrical Classification - Explosion proof
output, one-man remote calibration, self-adjusting zero Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, D
and span, and LED indicators for fault and calibration
status. Safety Approvals
Model Series 600 includes the same features as the 500 cCSAus/NRTL (US OSHA Certified)
with the addition of 3 alarm relays and an RS-485 serial ATEX (TP Series Solid State H2S only)
communications port.
FEATURES
• Intuitive Non-intrusive Operator Interface
• Modular Plug & Play Sensors & Transmitters
• Simple Menu-driven Calibration & Programming
• Integral Sensor Fault Diagnostics

Multi-spectrum Flame Detectors

Multiflame DF-TV7-T/DF-TV7-V
DESCRIPTION
The MultiFlame DF-TV7-T is a multi-spectrum infrared flame detector
using three wavelengths to respond to hydrocarbon fires and is the
right choice for operation in dirty environments or for detection of smoky
fires.The MultiFlame DF-TV7-V is a combined ultraviolet/infrared flame
detector offering excellent long range detection. Both maintain outstanding
false alarm immunity and are configurable using a hazardous area
approved wireless hand held terminal (TLU). Model DF-TV7-T is suitable
for use in SIL3 applications while Model DF-TV7-V is suitable for use in
SIL2 applications.
Two Models to Choose From
• DF-TV7-T: Multi-spectrum IR Flame Detector (3 wavelengths)
• DF-TV7-V: Multi-spectrum UV/2IR Flame Detector (UV + dual IR)
FEATURES
• Continuous auto-check of optical lens
• Selectable sensitivity and time delays
• Wireless detector configuration and testing using TLU
• HART® output option available
Electrical Classification Safety Approvals

II 2 G Ex d II C T6 Gb (-40°C to +65°C) SIL 3 (DF-TV7-T)
SIL 2 (DF TV7-V)
ATEX
CE Marking (pending)
Open Path Infrared Hydrocarbon Detector

GD10L
DESCRIPTION
The GD10L provides an effective response to the
detection of gas hazards in a wide range of industrial
environments from boiler plant rooms to offshore
petrochemical installations. J
FEATURES
• Enhanced coverage requires fewer devices
• Ultra stable & long life solid state IR sources
• Heated retro reflector minimises icing and condensation
• Path lengths from 6.5 to 100 feet
Electrical Classification
ATEX 2 II G EExde IIC T6 (-40°C to +65°C)
Safety Approvals
ATEX

Laser Open Path Hydrogen Sulfide Detector

Model GD1
DESCRIPTION
The GD1 sets a new standard for toxic gas detection. Using a tuneable
laser diode the GD1 delivers enhanced coverage and fail safe detection.
The performance improvement marks a genuine step change for safety
systems and life cycle cost savings. At the heart of the detector is a
tuneable laser diode that eliminates environmental effects from sun,
rain and fog. The laser scans single absorption lines where there is no
interference from other gases. Unlike traditional methods for detecting H2S
(MOS or EC cell) the GD1 needs no recalibration and can replace multiple
standard detectors to cover the same risk.
FEATURES
• No sensor recalibration or replacement
• Superior detector stability and specificity
• Suitable for use in SIL 2 systems

Ex II 2 G Ex e IIC T4/T5/T6 ATEX
SIL
Infrared Point Gas Detectors

GD10 Series
DESCRIPTION
The GD10 Series uses state of the art IR gas measurement to
give a fast, reliable response. The GD10P has set the standard for
gas detection in the areas of safety, stability and low maintence.
The GD10 differs from all other point infrared gas detectors,
because it utilises silicon based solid-state sources. The complete
optomechanical design and constructions is so stable that an ultra
fast speed of response can be achieved whilst providing unparalleled
service life and detector stability, thus saving on maintenance and
service costs. The GD10 offers the longest combined detector and
IR source warranty on the market. And is supplied with worldwide
hazardous area approvals. Suitable for use in SIL 2 systems. An
industry standard HART interface is used for configuration of special
J fault levels as well as access to extended maintenance data.
FEATURES
• Fast Reliable Response
• No Field Recalibration
• Solid State IR-Source

EExd IIC T6 ATEX
CSA
INMETRO
ABS
SIL

Explosion-Proof, Microprocessor Driven Gas

Detector
iTrans 2
DESCRIPTION
Remote Diagnostics, Set-up or Calibration The iTrans
2 fixed gas detector employs an intelligent electronics
platform to provide one or two points of detection from a
single head for maximum flexibility, superior performance
and lower installation costs. With the optional HART
Communication Protocol, the iTrans 2 offers remote
diagnostics, set-up or calibration by superimposing a high-
frequency current across the industry standard 4-20mA
analog line.
Able to detect any combination of gases for a specific

environment, iTrans 2 utilizes our industry-proven “smart”
infrared gas sensor technology and safety features
including automatic sensor recognition, access code
security, and zero and cal fault protection – all enclosed
within an explosion-proof aluminum or stainless steel
housing. The microprocessor-controlled transmitters are
capable of independent operation or multi-point system
configuration. The infrared sensor provides explosive gas Stand-Alone Operation
detection (methane, butane, propane, ethylene, hexane, With optional on-board relays, this fixed gas detector
etc.) in more severe environmental conditions, where the has the added ability of stand-alone operation, activating
presence of poisons could harm the use of a catalytic cell. alarms, horns, or fans and can also shut down a system
In addition to the LEL sensor range, the iTrans 2 detector without the need to wire back to a central control panel.
can also be configured with a 0-100% volume methane
infrared sensor for bio-gas applications and CO2 infrared Safety Approvals
sensors ranging from 0.5% volume to 100% volume. CSA NRTLc
FEATURES ATEX (pending)
• Non-Intrusive Calibration IEC (pending)
• Smart Infrared Gas Sensors
• HART Communication Protocol
• MODBUS Communication
• Programmable Relays
• Dual Gas Sensing

Microprocessor Driven, Gas Detector for Harsh

Environments
DG Series
DESCRIPTION
The DG Series gas detectors are constructed from
a common housing and consist of the MultiTox
Electrochemical for toxic gases, the MultiXplo Catalytic
for flammable gases and the MultiTox Solid State MOS
for hydrogen sulfide.The intelligent, microprocessor
driven unit is fully configurable using a wireless handheld
terminal (TLU) or optionally via HART giving true flexibility
to the installer. Parameters such as relay operation and
alarm levels are all set via the TLU, hazardous area
approved handheld unit. Electrical Classification
II 2 G Ex d IIC T6 Gb (-40°C to +65°C)
FEATURES
• Flexible Configuration Safety Approvals
• Reduced Maintenance ATEX
• Local Display SIL

Safety and Environmental • Wireless Gas Detection & Safety System
Detcon
SmartWireless® Alarm & Control System

Site Sentinel CX Controller
DESCRIPTION
Detcon SmartWireless® Site Sentinel CX Controller is is
an accessory to the SmartWireless® CXT and is easily
and economically deployable in both permanent and
temporary installations. The CX wirelessly transmits the
data from up to 4 wired gas detectors back to the CXT and
includes a battery that powers the radio, alarm devices,
and the attached sensors. The Sentinel CX is compatible
with Detcon’s Model RXT transceivers. Flexible and
expandable, a Site Sentinel network can include up to 32
devices and consist of any combination of wireless and/or
wired sensors, one or more Site Sentinel control panels,
and alarm warning devices.
FEATURES
• Compatible with Detcon RXT transceivers
• Up to 4 wired gas detectors
• Optional strobe & horn
Safety Approvals
CE Marking (Pending)
SmartWireless® Alarm & Control System

Site Sentinel CXT Controller
DESCRIPTION
Detcon Site Sentinel CXT Controller is a SmartWireless®
gas detection and control system that provides operator
interface to the network and real time status display of
all network devices. The Sentinel CXT is compatible with
Detcon’s Model RXT and CXT Transceivers. Flexible and
expandable, a Site Sentinel network can include up to 32
devices and consist of any combination of wireless and/or
wired sensors, one or more Site Sentinel control panels,
and alarm warning devices.
Options include audio alarm, visual alarm, external alarm
port, alarm reset switch and up to 4 external wired sensor
inputs. Standard features include a power-in port and J
power switch.
The control panel is rated for Class 1, Division 2; Groups FEATURES
A, B, C, D hazardous areas. Operator interface is non- • Compatible with Detcon RXT & CST Tranceivers
intrusive via magnetic contact switches located behind • 32 channel capacity panels
the glass lens cover. This advanced design takes • Real time 4 line 40 character LCD
advantage of a low power LCD with back light and ultra • Field device status and location tag
low power components. Power is provided by an internal • Alarm condition LEDs and optional strobe & horn
rechargeable battery and/or 11.5 to 30VDC. Operating • Non-intrusive operator interface
time is 1-2 months before recharge is required. An optional
solar charging panel can be used to extend operating time
Safety Approvals
CE Marking (Pending)
for virtually any application.

Gas Detection Sensor Assembly

SmartWireless® Series CXT
DESCRIPTION
Detcon Model CXT are SmartWireless® gas detection
sensors designed for use in mobile applications in heavy
industrial environments. These low power sensors
assemblies utilize one of two technologies and cover a
wide range of industrial applications; electrochemical
for a long list of toxic gases, infrared for combustible
hydrocarbons. All component parts are rated for Class 1;
Division 1, Group C, D hazardous areas. These advanced
field devices consist of a Detcon Model Series CXT low
power gas detection sensor, and wireless transceiver
packaged in a single enclosure.
FEATURES
• Detcon Model self healing mesh network topology
• Universally accepted 2.4 GHz non-licensed frequency
• Low power gas detection sensors with built-in
transceivers
• Built-in display for gas sensor/field device HMI
• Disposable battery packs
Gas Detection Sensor Assembly

Series CX
DESCRIPTION
Detcon Model CX-DM gas detection sensors are
easily and economically deployable in both permanent
and temporary installations. These low power sensor
assemblies utilize electrochemical technology for a
long list of toxic gases. Model CX-DM sensors are
equipped with standard analog 4-20mA, and Modbus™
RTU RS-485 outputs and can be used with Detcon’s
SmartWireless® Site Sentinel CX/CXT Controllers as well
as other Detcon control systems.
FEATURES
J • Low Power Gas Detection Sensors
• Built-in Display
• Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, & D
• Non-intrusive Magnetic Interface
• Built-in Diagnostics
• Fully Encapsulated Electronics
• Electropolished 316SS Construction
• Quick Thread Release (for sensor replacement)
Safety Approvals
cCSAus
ATEX (pending)
CE Marking

SmartWireless® Transceivers
SmartWireless RXT-300/320
DESCRIPTION
Detcon Model Series RXT-300 and 320 SmartWireless®
transceivers are ideal for transmitting signal data in a
wide range of industrial detection and alarm system
applications. Both transceivers operate at a universally
accepted frequency of 2.4 GHZ and are able to transmit
signal data from 4-20 mA DC or serial MODBUS inputs.
Wireless installations eliminate the cost of point-to-point
wiring and can be as simple as a single field device
communicating with a controller, or as complex as 32
field device nodes forming a seamless network with a
controller, remote display, and audio/visual alarm stations.
Sixteen nodes can be installed in close proximity to one
another creating a plant wide network of up to 512 field
devices. Wireless network integrity, security, and reliability
are accomplished using direct sequence spread spectrum
wireless mesh technology. Every device in the network
is capable of functioning as a router and repeater for all
other devices in the network. This means that subscribers
can “hop” through neighboring devices to communicate FEATURES
with each other, thus widening network access points. • Universally Acceptable Frequency 2.4 GHz
This innovative technology creates a robust network • Network Wide Control Processing Capability
that automatically routes around congestion and RF • Low Power Requirement
line-of-sight obstacles. Throughput improves as device • 1-2KM Line-of-Sight Range (with external directional
density increases. While the Model RXT-320 transceiver antenna)
encompasses all these advanced mesh-networking • Robust Mesh Network Topology
capabilities, the Model RXT-300 is designed with an • Network Capacity up to 32 Devices
additional and unique innovation in self-healing mesh • Flexible I/O options
networking.
Unlike conventional mesh networks, the Model RXT-300’s
processing power is shared among all network devices.
The RXT-300 is able to automatically select another
transceiver in the network to take over as the master
device, should the designated master transceiver fail. As a
result, the RXT-300 does not depend on a single controller
to maintain network operation. This feature significantly
enhances the redundancy and overall safety level of the
wireless system. J

SmartWireless® Master Control Panel

Model SW-X40-32
DESCRIPTION
Detcon's SmartWireless® gas detection systems include
an optional 32 channel Master Control Panel that provides
operator interface to the network and real time status
display of all network devices. The Master Control Panel
is compatible with Detcon’s Model RXT-320 Transceivers.
Command functions include setting of alarm levels,
number of active channels, gas type, range, alarm
reset, alarm acknowledge, alarm test and radio silence.
In normal operation the Master Control Panel provides
real time display of gas concentrations or the status of
other field devices; Smart Battery charge levels, network
RF signal quality and any number of fault diagnostic
conditions affecting either an individual field device or the
entire network. These fault conditions are displayed on the FEATURES
control panel screen. The wireless control panel is rated • Compatible with Model RXT-320 Tranceivers
for Class 1; Division 1, Groups C, D and Class 1, Division • 32 channel capacity panels
2; Groups A, B, C, D hazardous areas. Operator interface • Real time 4 line 40 character LCD
is non-intrusive via magnetic contact switches located • Field device status and location tag
behind the glass lens cover. This advanced design takes • Alarm condition LEDs
advantage of a low power LCD with back light and ultra • Non-intrusive operator interface
low power components that extend operating time for 1-2
months before recharge is required. Like all other Detcon
SmartWireless® system components, power is provided by
Detcon’s Smart Battery Pack. An optional solar charging
panel can be used to extend operating time for virtually
any application.

SmartWireless® Audio Visual Alarm Station

DESCRIPTION
Detcon SmartWireless® audio-visual alarm stations are
easily and economically deployable in both permanent and
temporary installations. These devices feature a battery
powered audio visual alarm station designed as a wireless
cordless system component. They are rated for Class 1;
Division 1, Groups C, D hazardous areas and Class I;
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D.
Power is provided by a Detcon designed smart battery
pack eliminating the requirement for power or signal
cables (line power option available). The standard
rechargeable battery packs are capable of delivering
enough energy for 4-6 hours of continuous operation in FEATURES
a full alarm condition or 5-6 months (no alarm condition). • Up to 6 hours continuous operation in full alarm
The standard rechargeable battery pack continuously • Up to 6 months continuous operation - no alarm
reports its charge level and estimated operating time • Smart rechargeable battery packs with integral safety
before recharge or replacement is required. An optional circuitry
solar charging panel can be used to extend operating time • Optional solar charging panel
and maintain full battery charge levels for virtually any
application. An optional disposable “D” cell battery pack is
capable of delivers even longer operating times.
Alarm relay options include adjustable set points and
latching/non-latching relays. The audible alarm can be
configured for acknowledge/silence via operator interface
at the SmartWireless CXT Controller.

SmartWireless® Remote Monitor

Sentinel SiteWatch
DESCRIPTION
Sentinel SiteWatch is an advanced networking device
that provides remote access to any Detcon gas detection
system via Ethernet or cellular communication. The
Sentinel SiteWatch Ethernet version provides an IP
addressed webpage that can be accessed via any web
browser and both the Ethernet and Cellular versions
provide automated emails for all alarm and fault conditions
instantaneously. The Sentinel SiteWatch connects to the
Detcon X40, MCX-32 and Site Sentinel SmartWireless
controllers through the RS-485 Modbus interface.
The Sentinel SiteWatch allows web browser access
to real time data from the gas detection system that
includes: detector type, serial number, location/name,
gas concentration, gas type and alarm status. In addition,
when used with Detcon SmartWireless systems, the data
includes battery life and link quality of all devices in the
network.
Sentinel SiteWatch allows convenient and efficient access
to remote system data by computer (desktop, portable,
tablet) and cellular devices (iPhone, Droid, etc.) — virtually
any device that has ethernet, wifi or cellular access.
FEATURES
• Automated emails on alarm and fault conditions
• Automated emails for gas detection alarm and fault
conditions on both smart and cellular phones
• Email message includes data file of last ten minutes of
detector’s output prior to going into alarm/fault condition
and coming out of alarm/fault condition
• Web page provides sensor gas readings, identifies alarm
and fault conditions, and provides remaining battery life
and communication link quality for wireless systems •
Strong SSL/TLS-based encryption ensures security

SmartWireless® Network Configuration Tool

DESCRIPTION
The RXT Wireless Configuration Tool is a custom device
designed to configure Detcon’s RXT-300 and RXT-320
SmartWireless™ transceivers. It is used to set the RF
Channel, Network ID and to configure RXT-300 wireless
networks.
FEATURES
• 10.1” Touch Panel LCD
• Interfaces with USB Wireless Radio
• Battery Operates up to 8 Hours
• 2 Hour Charge Time
SmartWireless® Solar Power Supplies

Series SPS
DESCRIPTION
Detcon's SPS Series are self contained, pre-assembled
12 VDC solar power supply designed specifically for
heavy industrial applications. Each model consists of a
rechargeable battery, solar energy panel and a battery
controller-charge circuit designed to supply continuous
DC power sufficient enough to operate a wide range of
industrial automation products. Gas detection sensors,
process measurement devices, remote data acquisition
systems and audio visual alarm stations are just a few
examples. These pre-assembled solar power supplies
(SPS) are available in 4 different power levels with one
rated for use in Division 1 electrically classified areas, one
for Division 2 locations and 2 for general purpose non-
hazardous locations.
J
FEATURES
• Model SPS-01W-DV1 - lithium ion,10AH, 1.5 Watts
• Model SPS-10W-GP - lead acid, 18AH, 10 Watts
• Model SPS-20W-GP - lead acid, 18AH, 20 Watts
• Model SPS-40W-DV2 - lead acid, 36AH, 40 Watts

SmartWireless® Battery Options

DESCRIPTION
High energy battery packs are a necessary component
in the application of any SmartWireless® gas detection
system. Detcon provides several options when selecting
the optimal battery back for your application. These
options include rechargeable packs as well as packs with
disposable/replaceable batteries. Both use lithium ion
technology and are available in low and high capacity
versions. While others may specify battery run times
of weeks or even days, Detcon battery packs typically
provide continuous run times for months at a time. Paired
with a solar charging option Detcon SmartWireless®
system components can provide indefinite run times. The
battery packs are packaged as a plug in module that uses
a mechanical guide and large surface area gold plated FEATURES
mating connectors. A smaller compact version is packaged • High Energy Lithium Ion Technology
with a twist-lock design. Both are housed and secured • Rechargeable & Replaceable/Disposable Options
inside a Division 1 enclosure. Optional solar charging • Industry Leading Run Times
panels are available in Class I, Div 1 and Class I, Div 2
packages. Integrated safety circuitry continuously monitors
each battery pack. If the discharge current exceeds the
battery rating the output will be turned off until reset. If the
voltage drops below operating levels the output will be
turned off until the battery is recharged (rechargeables)
or replaced (replaceables). Rechargeable packs are also
protected from over voltage during charging.

Safety and Environmental • Portable Gas Detection
Detcon
4-Gas Personal Safety Monitor

PS200
DESCRIPTION
The PS200 is a rugged, easy to use portable multi-gas
detector ideal for use in confined spaces and hotworks.
Both lightweight and durable the instrument monitors
and displays up to four hazardous gas conditions
simultaneously using catalytic bead sensor technology for
a wide range of combustible gases, and electrochemical
sensors for carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, and
oxygen deficiency. Operator interface and calibration are
intuitive and easy by toggling between simple one-button
functions. During hazardous conditions users are alerted
via three alarm functions: vibration, red flashing LEDs, and
audible buzzer. To ensure the highest level of personal FEATURES
safety, the PS200 is also fitted with an optional man down/ • LEL, O2, CO, H2S
motion sensor that activates alarms if the instrument is • Internal Pump
not moved at a pre-set time. The instrument is also fitted • Data Logging Standard
with an optional built in remote sampling pump making it • Auto Bump & Cal Station
ideal for use in confined spaces. The PS200 features a
screen backlight that can be manually switched on in poor
lighting conditions. Additional features include: customized
user identification code setup, calibration due date display,
and standard data logging that can be downloaded to a
docking station via USB connection to a computer. Also
available is a auto bump and cal station, 5-way charger
and PC data logging software.
Single Gas Monitor

PS1
DESCRIPTION
The PS1 monitors a single gas, for a variety of
applications. Widely used in the oil and gas industry, this
rugged, extremely lightweight and accurate monitor clips
easily onto a collar or vest. This puts the instrument near
the breathing zone for maximum user protection and
safety. Audible, visual, and vibrating alarms alert the user, J
should gas be present and alarms can be latching until
the user acknowledges that an alarm is present. The PS1
Bump Test and Calibration Station is designed to give
a fast visual indication that instruments are calibrated
correctly. Just place the instrument into the cradle, close
the door and testing is complete in 90 seconds. Results
can be easily extracted for Calibration Certificate printing FEATURES
at your convenience. Manual bump testing and calibration • H2S, O2, CO, SO2
is also possible and only requires a cylinder of test gas • Data Logging Standard
and regulator. A manual calibration can be performed in • Auto Bump & Cal Station
less than two minutes with results stored on the PS1. • Rugged stainless steel alligator clip

Portable Multi-Gas Analyzer

V!SA
DESCRIPTION
“Designed by our customers,” this robust, accurate portable gas
detector provides unrivaled protection in confined space applications
for a variety of industries. Designed and trusted in hundreds of
applications, the V!SA meets all world standards of compliance
and is fast becoming the preferred portable multi-gas analyzer. The
versatility in having multiple pre-calibrated plug-and-play sensors
to choose from, and having full password protected programming
available in the field makes the V!SA perfect for rental applications,
plant turnarounds, fire and hazmat, and any confined space
application where a monitor is needed. Complete with on board
data logging, field accessible program menus, long duration NiMH
rechargeable battery pack or optional alkaline pack, the instrument
will run for a minimum of 12 hours with the pump running, or up
to 18 hours or more in diffusion mode. This low cost, high quality
instrument is the best choice in ensuring worker protection, while
providing an extremely low cost of ownership. Each instrument
is shipped with unit, charger, 10 ft of tubing with connector, user
manual and laminated user card.
FEATURES
• Displays up to 5 gases simultaneously
• Wide variety of plug-and-play smart sensors
• Built-in pump or user selectable diffusion mode
• Fully programmable 95 dB audible & high-visibility light bar
• On-board data logging
• Over 20,000 in use worldwide
CERTIFICATION
ATEX II 2 G EEx iad IIC T3 / T4
IEC Ex iad IIC T3
UL 913 Class I, Div 1 Groups ABCD (excludes use of VOC sensors)
EC Type Examination Certificate MED (0038/YY) - Module B&E

Portable Gas Detector

GT40
DESCRIPTION
Designed for the gas industry,the GT Series are multi-application instruments,
satisfying all the needs of service technicians within a single unit. With 7
modes of operation, the GT Series is the most versatile instrument available for
working with gas.
The GT 40 series offers technicians and workers a single instrument that
can be used throughout the gas distribution and transmission pipelines for all
measurements needed for leak testing, and confined space entry. Bright LED
alarm lights illuminate as gas levels increase, and audible alarms are activated
at preset levels should they be programmed. Completely programmable, the
GT is an industry standard throughout the Americas and Europe and allows
companies to utilize only one instrument for all their monitoring needs. The GT
series is available with an optional docking station for full calibration and testing
capabilities, and printed cal certificates if needed.
FEATURES CERTIFICATION
• Measures up to 4 gases IECEx Ex iad IIB T3
• 7 modes of operation UL 913 Class I, Div 1 Groups C, D
• Gas leak detection
• Confined space monitoring
• Surveying and purging
Transportable Multigas Area Monitor

BM25
DESCRIPTION
The BM 25 packs the benefits of a fixed system area monitor into a rugged,
user-friendly and transportable instrument. It was designed to detect one to
five gases for mobile or temporary work applications, team protection, area
surveillance or places where fixed detection systems are not suitable. Powered
by a NiMH battery pack, the BM 25 multi gas monitor offers up to 170 hours of
continuous run time. Other standard features include STEL and TWA values,
as well as a datalogging capacity of more than four months. Multiple units
can be grouped using optional alarm transfer kits. This protects larger areas
by transferring alarms from one BM 25 to the next. An intrinsically safe trickle
charger is also available for long-term area monitoring in classified zones. J
The BM 25 is durable and versatile. It is suitable for a wide range of industries
including refineries and pharmaceutical production. Applications include
turnaround work sites, rig overhauls and fence-line surveillance.
FEATURES Safety Approvals

• Longer lifetime with the XP IR sensor ATEX, CSA, IECEx
• Intrinsically safe gas detector
• Powerful audible alarm (103 dB @ 1m)
• Ultra-bright flashing signal (viewable at 360°)
• Run time of up to 170 hours
• More than 4-month datalogging capacity
• Easily transportable - less than 7 kilos

Safety and Environmental • Liquid Leak Detection & Surveillance
Liquid Leak Detection System

IntelliView
SmrtSolutions
DESCRIPTION
IntelliView has developed new methods of detecting fluid
spills or leaks. Some leaks start out so small that they
cannot be detected by traditional monitoring systems.
However, early leak detection can save millions of dollars
in product loss and cleanup costs, as well as prevent
environmental disasters and fines.
SmrtSurveillance
The core of IntelliView’s industrial surveillance solution is
the SmrtDVR, a comprehensive digital video processing
system. Using video input, the SmrtDVR analyzes images
of the site using patented analytic algorithms to decide if
an alarm condition exists and if real-time event notification
is required. Alerts and pictures of the alarm condition are transmitted via satellite, radio, cellular or network to site
control rooms, third-party monitoring stations, email or your smartphone device.
IntelliView analytics operate within a camera’s view in userdefined areas of interest. A single camera view can execute
multiple analytics and/or multiple instances of the same analytic, providing maximum flexibility and lowering overall
costs.
IntelliView’s systems use a wide variety of video sensors (including industry leaders such as FLIR) and digital recording
technology to monitor, analyze, alarm, and store images on site in our patented SmrtDVR. Its unique architecture is
ideally suited for remote applications.
IntelliView’s patented software includes an environmental filter that significantly reduces false alarms caused by
shadows, glare, ice, or other extreme weather conditions by 95%. The unique system configuration allows the solution
to be located at the edge of facility or property perimeters. There, it records the video and is able to detect when an
event has occurred and immediately sends a notification to the client. The software allows up to 10 different rules to be
applied per camera.
Included with all IntelliView DVRs is a standard suite of analytics focused on security applications. These include
capabilities to set up virtual perimeters for example to alarm on movement across a fence, movement across an open
area, access control to a gate, loitering in an area and many more.
FEATURES
• Real-time remote monitoring 24/7 with automatic threat detection
• Instant notification of threats through web access, e-mail, smart phone, and monitoring station
J • Ruggedized hardware products stay operational in extreme conditions
• Integrates with your existing equipment increasing effectiveness, safety, and overall value of your system
• Accurately detect pipeline leaks day or night using thermal and color cameras
• Eliminate false alarms by confirming leak and spill incidents visually
• Decrease shutdowns and subsequently increase production output and revenue

Intelligent Digital Video Recorder

SmrtDVR
DESCRIPTION
IntelliView introduces state-of-the-art patented technology
that compensates for outdoor environmental conditions such
as rain, snow, shadows, and glare reducing false alarms
significantly. IntelliView is proud to combine the cutting
edge H.264 digital video recording (DVR) technology with
sophisticated video analytics, automated alarm management
and targeted event notification. In addition to its ease of use, the
SmrtDVR boasts plug-and-play functionality that significantly
minimizes installation time and costs. It can be used with
existing or new video camera equipment and connects directly
to analog/CCTV or IP cameras. 4 Channel SmrtDVR
The SmrtDVR is a complete end-to-end intelligent video

security and surveillance system that can operate:
• As a stand-alone system with one-touch video playback for

inspection, and full control on playback speed and direction
over one or all of the channels simultaneously.
• With the ability to select videos or images for exporting to
external USB, DVD or CD in H.264, AVI or JPEG format.
• Remotely by incorporating it as a network of many units for
large multi-site installations.
16 Channel Rackmount SmrtDVR
FEATURES
The SmrtDVR includes SmrtSURVEILLANCE and the most
extensive range of Video Analytics capabilities such as:
• Virtual Fence Detection

• Count and Profiling Detection
• Automatic License Plate Recognition (ALPR)
• Abandonment Detection
• Object Alteration Detection
• Loitering Detection
• Tailgating Detection
• Special Attribute Detection
• Object Classification
• Audio and Sound Classification
• Slip and Fall Detection J

Intelligent Digital Video Recorder - Continued

Safety and Environmental • Vents
Shand & Jurs
Free Vents Pressure Vents

94240 Free Vent 94126 Pressure Vent
Designed for use on Designed to relieve pressure
bulk liquid storage tanks on low pressure storage
containing non-volatile tanks.
liquids.
94550 Combination Flame Arrester 94130 Pressure Relief Vent (Open or

and Free Vent Closed Vent Option)
Provides both positive flame Designed to provide pressure
stop and maximum venting in relief with high efficiency,
a compact fitting. maximum flow capacity and
minimum leakage.
94241 Free Vent (Hooded) 94140 Spring Loaded Pressure Relief

Vent (Spring Closed)
Designed for use on
bulk liquid storage tanks Reduces excessive venting of
containing non-volatile liquids product in liquid storage tanks.
and is also used on vent riser
pipes.
J
94160 Pressure Relief Vent
Provides pressure relief
for storage tanks and low
pressure vessels.

Vacuum Vents
94100 Vacuum Vent 94103 Static Pressure
(High Pressure) Vacuum Vent
High pressure vacuum conditions in Specifically designed to operate at
liquid product storage tanks. static pressures up to 150psi and at
temperature ranges from minus 50°
to plus 200° Fahrenheit.
94110 Vacuum Vent
Vacuum conditions in liquid product
storage tanks.
Pressure and Vacuum Vents

94020 Conservation Vent 94115 Vacuum Vent
(Pressure/Vacuum) (Side Mounted)
Designed to provide high efficiency, Vacuum conditions in liquid product
maximum flow capacity, and storage tanks, and also withstand
minimum leakage. the pressure of the stored product
when not operating under a
vacuum.
94040 Spring Loaded Conservation
Vent (Pressure/Vacuum) 94116 Snap Action
Vacuum Breaker
Meets the need of higher pressure
vacuum settings required on High capacity atmospheric air
storage tanks. flow at low differential pressures
to be drawn into the liquid storage
tank or pressure vessel when the
internal vacuum pressure exceeds
94050 Polyvinyl Chloride Conservation the vent setting.
Vent (Pressure/Vacuum) 94530 Snap Action Vacuum Vent

Designed for highly corrosive
Permits air flow into liquid storage
service where toxic liquids are
tanks when the internal vacuum
J stored.
exceeds the vent setting.
94060 FRP Conservation Vent

(Pressure/Vacuum)
Pressure and vacuum protection
of tanks and vessels typically
containing caustics.

Detonation Flame Arresters

DESCRIPTION
The Shand & Jurs Detonation Flame Arresters provide protection against
flame propagation through piping runs and vapor recovery systems,
while allowing maximum flow efficiencies. This design quenches a flame
front approaching from either direction, even if it has transitioned to a
detonation. The Arresters contain a detonation while retaining the integrity
of both the arresting element and the housing. This is ensured by the
design of the passages in the tube bank and the detonation resistant
construction.
Standard construction of the housing is available in Carbon Steel or 316

Stainless Steel. The tube bank is Stainless Steel throughout. Special
construction materials to withstand the corrosive actions of some vapors
and atmospheric conditions are available upon request.
Because of the severe service conditions that the Detonation Flame

Arrester encounters, all construction welding is performed in accordance
with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section Vlll and IX. Class
150lb. hydrostatically tested at 425 psig. Class 300lb. hydrostatically
tested at 750 psig.
These models are available in a range of sizes from 2" through 24".
Additional sizes available upon request. Standard connections are ANSI
150lb. or 300lb. Class raised face flanges
FEATURES
• Withstands instantaneous pressure at the flame front in excess of 500 psig
• Tube bank design ensures consistent functioning
• Carbon steel or 316SS housing construction, 316SS tube bank
• Optional fittings for pressure taps or temperature probes
• Designed & tested in accordance with appendix A, 33 U.S. Code of Federal Regulations part 154
• Standard drain plug

Detonation Flame Arresters

94306 Vertical Flame Arrester 94407 Horizontal Inline Deflagration
Flame Arrester
Stop flame propagation end of the
line on low pressure tanks or piping Stop flame propagation in-line
systems containing flammable on low pressure tanks or piping
liquids or solvents having a low systems containing flammable
flash point. liquids or solvents having a low
flash point.
94307 Horizontal Flame Arrester 94550 Combination Flame Arrester

and Free Vent
Stop flame propagation in-line
on low pressure tanks or piping Provides both positive flame stop
systems containing flammable and maximum venting in a compact
liquids or solvents having a low flash fitting.
point.
94308 Miniature Flame Arrester 94560 Combination Conservation Vent

and Flame Arrester
Small storage tanks and drums
where low flash point solvents must Maximum flow capacity, minimum
be protected against flame from leakage and a positive flame stop
exterior sources of ignition. on low pressure tanks containing
flammable liquids or solvents
having low flash points.
94309 Flame Arrester (Plate Element) 94570 Combination Conservation Vent

and Flame Arrester
Quenches the flame front by cooling
the flame to below its ignition Pressure and vacuum relief, as
temperature. well as positive flame stop on
low pressure tanks containing
flammable liquids or solvents
having a low flash point.
J
94406 Vertical Inline Deflagration 94580 Combination Emergency Vent
Flame Arrester and Flame Arrester
Stop flame propagation end of the Emergency pressure venting as
line on low pressure tanks or piping well as positive flame stop on
systems containing flammable low pressure tanks containing
liquids or solvents having a low flash flammable liquids or solvents
point. having a low flashpoint.

Section Cover page
Inventory Management
Rawson, Inc. has over 60 years of experience in assisting our customers reduce
their inventory and streamline their technical (and non-technical) purchases, with
the net result of reducing overhead. We manage over 120 consignment inventory
locations on the Gulf Coast. Rawson personnel typically manage the inventory
counts and replenish the inventory, thereby allowing your warehouse personnel to
perform other tasks. Rawson personnel are trained to be observant and recognize
product overlaps, too many items in stock relative to the demand, and reduce the
amount of old technology items that have newer, less costly replacements.
Controllers And Recorders
Main Index
Controllers & Indicators

PMT........................................................................................................................................808
ABB........................................................................................................................................814
Mallard...................................................................................................................................823
MicroMod...............................................................................................................................824
Paperless Recorders
ABB........................................................................................................................................829
Telemetry & SCADA Systems
RTUs
Schneider Electric..................................................................................................................832
Radios
Schneider Electric..................................................................................................................836
807
Controllers and Recorders • Controllers & Indicators
PMT
Digital Meter/Controller
Model DDMC
DESCRIPTION
The AMETEK Model DDMC Digital Meter/Controller
powered by 85 to 265 VAC will display data from
transmitters, transducers, scales, and other process
instruments. It provides 24 volt excitation, alarm relays,
and optional analog output for process control functions.
FEATURES
• 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-5 V, 1-5 V, and ±10 V Inputs
• NEMA 4X, IP65 Front
• Universal 85-265 VAC or ¹²/24 VDC Input Power
• Large Dual-Line 6-Digit Display, 0.60” & 0.46”
• Dual-Scale for Level Applications – Single Input
• Sunlight Readable Display Models
• Isolated 24 VDC @ 200 mA Transmitter Power Supply
• Math Functions for Flow & Round Horizontal Tanks
• Programmable Displays & Function Keys
• 32-Point, Square Root, or Exponential Linearization
• Multi-Pump Alternation Control
• 2 or 4 Relays + Isolated 4-20 mA Output Options
• External 4-Relay Expansion Module
• USB Serial Communication Options
HOW TO ORDER
XXXX X X X X
Table 1 DDMC Digital Meter / Controller Table 5 AC Surge Protection

DDMC Digital Meter / Controller 0 No AC surge protection
Table 2 Meter Output 1 115 VAC surge protection for input line to the meter (LM918)
A Two Relays 2 230 VAC surge protection for input line to the meter (LM919)
B Two Relays, Analog Output 4-20mA
Table 3 Housing
0 Panel-mount
1 NEMA 4X Weather-tight Housing
Table 4 DC Surge Protection
0 No DC surge protection
1 Surge protection for signal line between meter and transmitter
(LM912)
2 Surge protection for signal line between meter and customer
equipment (LM912)
3 Surge protection for signal lines between meter & transmitter
and meter and customer equipment (LM912 X 2)
K

Pneumatic Indicating Controller

Model 40 Controller
DESCRIPTION
The Model 40 Pneumatic Controller automatically positions a valve or other final control element to maintain process
pressure at the desired set point. As receiving controllers, they can control any process variable transmitted as a
pneumatic signal.
Standard models have proportional band adjustments for controlling processes where load changes are infrequent and
can be corrected by the manual reset feature, standard in every controller. By a simple screwdriver adjustment, the
standard proportional controller can be changed to two-position control action with adjustable differential gap.
Model 40 Controllers are available with control modes of 100% proportional, 200% proportional plus reset and 300%
proportional plus reset plus rate (PID) (for processes with frequent load changes). They not only satisfy ordinary control
requirements, but are equally proficient in controlling processes with unfavorable characteristics.
FEATURES
• Quality, flexibility, accuracy and dependability
• Indication of measured variable
• A non-bleed, high capacity relay with excellent stability and fast
response
• Easy field calibration
• Broad selection of control modes
• Wide selection of process measuring elements for pressure,
differential pressure, flow and level
• Large, easy-to-read black on white dial for maximum resolution
• Case and door with epoxy powdered fi nish for environmental
protection

Pneumatic Indicating Controller - Continued

SPECIFICATIONS
Indication Accuracy: 1% middle half of scale. 1-½% remainder. Most ranges may be calibrated to ½% accuracy at nominal extra charge.
Sensitivity: Less than 0.1% of full scale at 100% Proportional band.
Frequency Response: Flat to 400 CPM with 200 ft. of ¼” tubing and 1.2 cubic inch capacity. Flat to 120 CPM with 18’ 3/8” tubing and 200 cubic in.
capacity.
Construction: Moving parts are designed as light as possible to keep friction and inertia forces low. This design also results in higher
resistance to vibration and shock.
Mounting: Surface, flush panel, pipe-supported or valve-mounted.
Air Supply: 20 psi for 3-15 psi range; 35 psi for 3-27 & 6-30 psi range; 65 psi for 12-60 psi range. A filter and dripwell are recommended
ahead of each controller to ensure clean, dry air supply. May be operated on natural gas or bottled CO2.
Connections: Standard back connections are ¼” female NPT.
Measuring Elements: A wide range of precalibration measuring elements for pressure.
Modular Construction: Each of the following components may be removed without disturbing the other components: control chassis complete,
precalibrated elements, feedback assemblies, complete relay units, or supply gauge only, or nozzle feed orifice and cleaner
assembly only, or relay diaphragm housing and valve stem only output gauge and tubing.
HOW TO ORDER
XXXXXXX X X X X X X XX
Table 1 Model 40 Pressure Instruments Table 4 Instrument Type

Model 40 Pressure Instruments B Contr. W/2 Pos. By-Pass (not with PID)
Table 2 Control Mode K Controller
1 200% Prop. & Reset Table 5 Element Type*
2 100% Prop. B Bourdon Tube
3 200% Prop. C Barton #199 (Consult Rawson)
7 300% PID (³/15 psi only) D Metal Diaphragm (Press.)
Table 3 Output E Metal Diaphragm (0-30 in. Hg Vac, Ni Span C only)
1 3/15 psi F Slack Diaph. (D/P or Center 0)
2 3/27 psi I Barton #224 (Consult Rawson)
3 6/30 psi J Metal Diaph. (Suppressed Zero)
5 12/60 psi (Prop. only) R Indicating Level
S Slack Diaph. (Pressure)

Pneumatic Indicating Controller - Continued

Table 6 Element Material* Table 9 Eng. Units or Dial No.
0 No Element Table 10 Options
1 Bronze AB External Set Point Knob
3 St. Stl. (316) AC Overrange Stop (Element Type B, D, J only)
5 Ni Span C AD Air Filter, Regulator & Drip Well
7 Buna N AG Shatterproof Glass
S Special AH Blowout Grommet
8 Buna N (Center 0) AI External Reset Connection
9 C or I Element Type AM Metal Tags
Table 7 Element Range* AP Vented Case (½” NPT)
XX Enter first 2 digits of desired span so that it gives the desired AR Special Calibration
span when multiplied by the multiplier and the unit of measure.
AW Fast Reset Valve
Examples: 0 to 100 psi span is 101 (10 x 10 psi); 3 to 15 psi
span is 120 (12 x 1 psi) BH Pipe Mounting Bracket
Table 8 Multiplier & Units BI Valve & Wall Mounting Bracket
0 x 1 psi BK Wall Mounting Bracket
1 x 10 psi BL Supply Gauge
2 x 100 psi BR Blank Shroud
3 x 1000 psi OX Cleaned for Oxygen Service
5 x 1 in. Water — Custom Scale
6 x 10 in. Water DQ Anodized Case, Door, Relay
* Element type, material and range are interdependent. Please refer to spec sheet
for more information.

Pneumatic Transmitter
Model 40 Transmitter
DESCRIPTION
The Model 40 Pneumatic Transmitter is designed to sense pressure and transmit an air signal which is precisely
proportional to the measured variable. This output signal from the transmitter may be fed to any remotely located
monitoring, recording or control instrument.These transmitters ensure increased safety by eliminating the need for
piping high-pressure, toxic, corrosive, inflammable or other dangerous fluids or gases through the plant.
They provide an added convenience, in that operation of a single transmitter with its high capacity relay can be used
to actuate a number of receivers for indication, recording or control at a number of points throughout a plant. Also,
transmitters measuring many different variables provide standard 3-15 psi output signals, thereby reducing all variables
to common readout devices and simplifying centralized panelboards and control stations.
FEATURES
• Reliability—highly essential, since a transmitter must operate for extended periods in inaccessible places without
attention.
• Sensitivity and freedom from deadband—an absolute requirement, since the transmitter constitutes the first instrument
in the control loop.
• High accuracy and repeatability—mandatory for consistency and control stability.
• Measuring elements—ranges and materials are same as those for indicating controllers, however, the element
assemblies are not interchangeable between controllers and transmitters.
• Stabilized pneumatic circuit—output signal is stabilized with all combinations of output capacity or load and
transmission line resistance. Changes in air supply pressure to the transmitter have a negligible effect on the output.
• Accuracy—measurement to output—within 1% of full scale on indicating transmitters; 0.5% on most ranges of
indicating transmitters available at extra charge.
• Feedback assembly—a diaphragm capsule of Ni-Span C provides precise follow-up to maintain exact transmitter
calibration.
• Air supply and output pressure—20 psi supply pressure and an output pressure range of 3-15 psi are standard. Other
special ranges are available. A filter and drip-well are recommended ahead of each transmitter, to ensure a clean, dry
air supply.

Pneumatic Transmitter - Continued

HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXXX X X X X X XX
Table 1 Model 40 Pressure Instruments Table 7 Multiplier & Units

Model 40 Pressure Instruments 0 x 1 psi
Table 2 Control Mode 1 x 10 psi
2 100% Prop. 2 x 100 psi
Table 3 Output 3 x 1000 psi
1 ³/15 psi 5 x 1 in. Water
2 ³/27 psi 6 x 10 in. Water
T Transmitter Table 8 Eng. Units or Dial No.
Table 4 Element Type Table 9 Options
B Bourdon Tube AB External Set Point Knob
C Barton #199 (Consult Rawson) AC Overrange Stop (Element Type B, D, J only)
D Metal Diaphragm (Press.) AD Air Filter, Regulator & Drip Well
E Metal Diaphragm (0-30 in. Hg Vac, Ni Span C only) AG Shatterproof Glass
F Slack Diaph. (D/P or Center 0) AH Blowout Grommet
I Barton #224 (Consult Rawson) AI External Reset Connection
J Metal Diaph. (Suppressed Zero) AM Metal Tags
R Indicating Level AP Vented Case (½” NPT)
S Slack Diaph. (Pressure) AR Special Calibration
Table 5 Element Material AW Fast Reset Valve
0 No Element BH Pipe Mounting Bracket
1 Bronze BI Valve & Wall Mounting Bracket
3 St. Stl. (316) BK Wall Mounting Bracket
5 Ni Span C BL Supply Gauge
7 Buna N BR Blank Shroud
S Special OX Cleaned for Oxygen Service
8 Buna N (Center 0) — Custom Scale
9 C or I Element Type DQ Anodized Case, Door, Relay
Table 6 Element Range * Element type, material and range are interdependent. Please refer to spec sheet
for more information.
Enter first 2 digits of desired span so that it gives the desired
span when multiplied by the multiplier and the unit of measure.
Examples: 0 to 100 psi span is 101 (10 x 10 psi); 3 to 15 psi
span is 120 (12 x 1 psi)

Controllers and Recorders • Controllers and Indicators
ABB
Universal Process Controller, 1/8 DIN

ControlMaster CM10
DESCRIPTION
The ControlMaster CM10 is a flexible, universal ⅛ DIN PID
process controller. Flexible control functionality including on /
off, time proportioning, analog PID, dual output control and math
& logic make the CM10 suitable for a wide range of process
applications.
Fully configurable via the easy-to-navigate front panel menus
or PC configuration software, the CM10 can be commissioned
rapidly and then tuned via the advanced autotune functionality.
MODBUS and Ethernet communication options ensure easy
integration into a control system.
FEATURES
• Comprehensive display of process status
• Crystal-clear, full-color TFT display
• User-customizable
• Intuitive user interface and clear text prompts make installation, commissioning and operation quick and simple
• Comprehensive hardware and software options
• On/Off, time proportioning, analog PID and motorized valve control strategies
• Flexible functionality including math, logic and totalization providing power to solve complex application requirements
• IP 66 and NEMA 4X environmental protection
• Ethernet and MODBUS® communications
SPECIFICATIONS
Level Function Keys Template Functionality
Base 0 Single loop Process alarms
Single loop with remote setpoint Basic setpoint switching
Basic control: Analog PID, On / Off or time proportioning, Auto tune, Split
output control
Standard 1 Auto / Manual station low signal selection Standard setpoint switching
Auto / Manual station digital signal selection * Standard control: Gain scheduling, Motorized valve control †
Analog backup station low signal selection Output tracking
Analog backup station digital signal selection * Logic
Single indicator / manual loader Math
Dual indicator / manual loader Custom linearizers
Delay timers
Real time alarms
Template customization
Recommended I/O build: * Basic + option board 1, † Basic + option board 1a

Universal Process Controller, 1/8 DIN - Continued

HOW TO ORDER

XXXXX X X X X X X X XXX
Table 1 Model
CM10/ Controlmaster CM10 universal process controller, ⅛ DIN
Table 2 I/O Build
0 2 analog inputs, 1 analog O/P and 1 relay (Basic)
1 2 analog inputs, 1 analog output and 2 relays (Basic + option
board 1a)
2 2 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 2 digital I/O and 4 relays
(Basic + option board 1)
Table 3 Template/Functionality Level*
0 Base
S Standard
Table 4 Communications
0 None
E Ethernet
M RS 485 MODBUS
Table 5 Approval
S Standard CE
U cULus approval
0 100 … 240 V AC
1 10 … 36 V DC
Table 7 Language
E English
G German
F French
I Italian
S Spanish
Table 8 Special Features
0 None
B Unbranded front panel **
STD Standard
CUS Custom configuration (customer to complete and supply CM10
custom configuration sheet – INF11/090–EN)
ENG Engineered configuration (customer to supply configuration
details required)
*See Specification table for template/functionality information

**Not available in conjunction with cULus approval
K

Universal Process Indicator, 1/8 DIN

ControlMaster CM15
DESCRIPTION
The ControlMaster CM15 is a feature-packed ⅛ DIN universal
process indicator. A crystal-clear, full-color, TFT display
shows operators exactly the information they need to know
and provides operation and configuration menus in full text
making the CM15 intuitive to use and very quick to install and
commission. Available as a basic indication-only model, or
enhanced through plug and play function keys and I/O modules,
the CM15 offers totalization, level, math, logic, counter and
alarm functions making it extremely flexible and able to solve
many tricky application requirements. Modbus and Ethernet
communication options ensure easy integration and connectivity
to supervisory or control systems.
FEATURES
• Comprehensive display of process status on user customizable, full
color TFT display
• Intuitive user interface and clear text prompts make installation,
commissioning and operation quick and simple
• Direct, high accuracy connection to electromagnetic flowmeters
• Comprehensive I/O: 2 universal inputs, 1 analog output and 1 relay output, as standard
• Comprehensive hardware and software option
• Calculation and display of flow total values
• Pulse counting capability
• Ethernet and Modbus® communications
SPECIFICATIONS
Base 0 Single PV indication Process alarms
Single PV with totalizer Totalization
Single totalizer Volume computation: Specific gravity compensation
Single level with volume Minimum, maximum and average calculation
Standard 1 Logic
Math
Custom linearizers
Delay timers
Real time alarms
Dual 2 Dual PV indication Display customization
Dual PV with totalizer
Dual totalizer
Dual level with volume

Universal Process Indicator, 1/8 DIN - Continued

HOW TO ORDER

Table 1 Model
CM15/ ControlMaster CM15 universal process indicator, ⅛ DIN
Table 2 I/O Build
0 Basic (2 analog inputs, 1 analog O/P and 1 relay)
1 Basic + option board 1a (2 analog inputs, 1 analog output and
2 relays)
2 Basic + option board 1 (2 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 2
digital I/O and 4 relays)
Table 3 Template / Functionality Level*
0 Base
S Standard
D Dual point indication
0 None
E Ethernet
M RS 485 MODBUS
Table 5 Approval
S Standard CE
U cULus approval (pending)
0 100 … 240 V AC
1 10 … 36 V DC
Table 7 Language
E English
G German
F French
I Italian
S Spanish
0 None
B Unbranded front panel
STD Standard
CUS Custom programming
* See Specifications table for template/fuctionality information


ControlMaster CM30
DESCRIPTION
The ControlMaster CM30 is a highly versatile, universal ¼ DIN PID process
controller. Detailed process information is presented clearly on the CM30's full-
color TFT display and an intuitive operator interface simplifies configuration and
operation. Powerful control functions such as adaptive control, math, logic and
totalization provide problem-solving flexibility and make the CM30 suitable for a
wide range of process applications.
Fully configurable via the easy-to-navigate front panel menus or PC configuration
software, the CM30 can be commissioned rapidly and then tuned via the
advanced autotune capability. MODBUS, and Ethernet communication options
ensure easy integration into a control system.
FEATURES
• Historical trending
• Scalable to match application requirements
• Comprehensive hardware and software options
• Cascade, feed-forward, ratio, predictive and adaptive control strategies
• Dual-loop capability
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic control: Analog PID, On / Off or time proportioning, Auto tune, Split output
control
Standard 1 Auto / Manual station low signal selection Standard setpoint switching *
Auto / Manual station digital signal selection * Standard control: Gain scheduling, Motorized valve control †
Analog backup station digital signal selection * Logic
Delay timers
Real time alarms
Extended 2 Single loop with feedforward Totalization
Single loop with feedforward and remote setpoint ‡ Advanced control: Feed forward, Predictive control, Adaptive control
Cascade Historical trending
Cascade with remote setpoint ‡ Display customization
Cascade with feedforward ‡
Ratio controller (internal ratio)
Ratio controller (external ratio) ‡
Ratio station (internal ratio)
K Ratio station (external ratio) ‡
Dual Loop 3 Dual loop – local / local ‡
Dual loop – remote / local ‡
Dual loop – remote / remote ‡
Recommended I/O Build: * Basic + option board 1, † Basic + option board 1a, ‡ Basic + option boards 1 and 2


HOW TO ORDER

Table 1 Model
CM30/ ControlMaster CM30 universal process controller, ¼ DIN
Table 2 I/O Build
0 2 analog inputs, 1 analog O/P and 1 relay (Basic)
1 2 analog inputs, 1 analog output and 2 relays (Basic + option
board 1a)
(Basic + option boards 1 and 2)
Table 3 Template / Functionality Level*
0 Base
S Standard
E Extended
D Dual loop
0 None
E Ethernet
M RS 485 MODBUS
Table 5 Approval
S Standard CE
U cULus approval
0 100 … 240 V AC
1 10 … 36 V DC
Table 7 Language
E English
G German
F French
I Italian
S Spanish
0 None
STD Standard
K
details required)
**Not available in conjunction with cULus approval.


ControlMaster CM50
DESCRIPTION
The ControlMaster CM50 is a highly versatile, universal ½ DIN PID
process controller. Powerful control functions such as adaptive control,
math, logic and totalization provide problem-solving flexibility and
make the CM50 suitable for a wide range of process applications.
Fully configurable via the easy-to-navigate front panel menus or PC
configuration software, the CM50 can be commissioned rapidly and then
tuned via the advanced autotune capability. MODBUS, and Ethernet
communication options ensure easy integration into a control system.
FEATURES
• Historical trending
• Scalable to match application requirements
• Comprehensive hardware and software option
• Cascade, feed-forward, ratio, predictive and adaptive control strategies
• Dual-loop capability
SPECIFICATIONS
Basic control: Analog PID, On / Off or time proportioning, Auto tune, Split output control
Standard 1 Auto / Manual station low signal selection Standard setpoint switching
Auto / Manual station digital signal selection Standard control: Gain scheduling, Motorized valve control
Analog backup station digital signal selection Logic
Delay timers
Real time alarms
Extended 2 Single loop with feedforward Totalization
Single loop with feedforward and remote Advanced control: Feed forward, Predictive control, Adaptive control
setpoint * Historical trending
Cascade Display customization
Cascade with remote setpoint *
Cascade with feedforward *
Ratio controller (internal ratio)
Ratio controller (external ratio) *
Ratio station (internal ratio)
Ratio station (external ratio) *
Dual loop 3 Dual loop – local / local
K Dual loop – remote / local *
Dual loop – remote / remote *
* Option board 1 recommended to suit I/O requirement of template


HOW TO ORDER

Table 1 Model
CM50/ ControlMaster CM50 universal process controller, ½ DIN
Table 2 I/O Build
0 2 analog inputs, 1 analog output, 2 digital I/O and 2 relays
(Basic)
Table 3 Template / Functionality level*
0 Base
S Standard
E Extended
D Dual loop
0 None
E Ethernet
M RS 485 MODBUS
Table 5 Approval
S Standard CE
U cULus approval
0 100 … 240 V AC
1 10 … 36 V DC
Table 7 Language
E English
G German
F French
I Italian
S Spanish
0 None
STD Standard
details required)
**Not available in conjunction with cULus approval.
K

Wall/Pipe Mounted Process Controller

Commander 310
DESCRIPTION
The C310 is a Wall/Pipe Mount single-loop controller with full PID
functionality and dual output heat/cool.The C310 is suitable for a wide
range of applications including consumer food (hosedown areas),
pharmaceutical, chemical and oil & gas (compressor control).
FEATURES
• Suitable for wall- or pipe-mounting
• PID controller with heat/cool
• 2 universal process inputs + 4 digital inputs
• 2 x 4 to 20mA Outputs + 4 relay outputs
• Ramp/Soak capability
• NEMA 4X (IP66) Case, FM Class1,Div.2 electrical rating,
• Optional RS485/Modbus serial communications for SCADA, PLC and
open systems integration
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX XX X X X XXX
Table 1 Model
C310 /X C310 wall- / pipe-mount universal process controller
Table 2 Option Board
00 None
01 RS485 Modbus communications
1 115V AC (NPT fitted with blanking plugs)
2 230V AC (M20 fitted with cable glands)
4 115V AC (M20 fitted with cable glands)
5 230V AC (NPT fitted with blanking plugs)
Table 4 Build
0 Standard
3 CSA/FM Class 1 Division 2
Table 5 Programming / Special Features
STD Configured to factory standard
CUS Configured to customer requirements (customer to complete
and supply C310 custom configuration sheet – INF12/111–EN)
SXX Agreed special features
details required)
Accessories
K Pipe mount kit 4600/0138

Mallard Control
Mallard
Pressure Controllers
Series 3300/3350/3360
DESCRIPTION
The Model 3300 pressure controller used in conjunction with a control valve make up a complete control loop, which
reacts automatically to changes occurring in a process and provides precise control within a set range. The Model 3350
/ 3360 design is preferred by production operators and technicians worldwide for pressure control requirements, due to
its simple construction, versatility and reliable performance in the most demanding applications. The controller is offered
in proportional (Model 3350) and proportional-plus-reset (Model 3360) configurations
General Model 3350/3360
Max. Working Pressure Same as bourdon tube rating Proportional Controller Model 3350
Input, Supply & Output Connections ¼” FNPT Proportional-Plus-Reset Model 3360
Controller Output Signal 3-15 psig, 6-30 psig Input signal 0-30 psig, 0- 60 psig, 0-100 psig,
(Bourdon Tube Ranges) 0-200 psig, 0-300 psig, 0-600 psig,
Mounting Actuator yoke, actuator housing,
0-600 psig, 0-1000 psig, 0-1500 psig,
Panel & 2” pipestand
0-3000 psig
Normal Operating Supply Pressure 3-15 psig output: 20 psig
Steady-state Air
6-30 psig output: 35 psig
(Gas) Consumption¹ (Gas)
Max. Allowable Supply Pressure 3-15 psig output: 40 psig Consumption¹
6-30 psig output: 40 psig
Minimum² Minimum² 3-15 psig output: 4.2 scfh
Supply Pressure Requirements Clean dry air or non-corrosive gas 6-30 psig output: 7 scfh
Compliance Options NACE MR0175 for H2S service Maximum³ Maximum³ 3-15 psig output: 27 scfh
6-30 psig output: 42 scfh
Model 3300
Repeatability 0.5% of bourdon tube range
Input signal 0-50 psig, 0-100 psig, 0-250 psig,
(Bourdon Tube Ranges) 0-500 psig, 0-1000 psig, 0-1500 psig, Deadband 0.1% of output span
0-2500 psig, 0-5000 psig
Controller Tuning Adjustment Ranges
Setpoint adjustment Internal manual adjusting knob
Proportional 3-15 psig output: 3-100% of input range
Controller mode Proportional
(Full Output Pressure Change) 6-30 psig output: 6-100% of input range
Steady-state Air 20 psig Supply: 35 scfh
Reset Adjustable from 0.01-74 min. per repeat
(Gas) Consumption 35 psig Supply: 50 scfh
(100- 0.01 repeats per minute)
¹ If the supply gas is flammable or noxious, the controller must be located in a

well-ventilated, non-hazardous area.
K
² Proportional band setting of 0 or 10
³ Proportional band setting of 5

MicroMod
Process Control Station Configuration Software

Micro-Tools 53MC6000A
FEATURES
• Connfiguration Software for 53MC5000 Process Control
Station
• Windows Operating Environment
• Graphic-based, Function Block configuration
• Simultaneous configuration and documentation
• Library of pre-configured, standard strategies
• High-level language for advanced programming and
sequence control
• On-line and Off-line configuration
• Includes Micro-DCI Communications Services with OPC
capability
• Supports legacy 53MC5, 53IT, 53ML and 53SL
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX X X X X X
Table 1 Part no Table 5 Security Key Type

53MT60 Micro-Tools Configuration software for 53MC5000 Controller X None (if adding to system with existing MicroMod security key)
Table 2 Version Type 0 Parallel Port
2 Standalone 1 USB Port
3 Add-on to LoopMaster or Micro-DCI Communication Services Table 6 Media Type
4 Add-on to Micro-PWC 1 CD-ROM
Table 3 53MC5000 Communication Interface
0 None
1 9-pin “D” connector to controller front port (7 feet)
3 RS-232/485 converter (ITB and cable)
Table 4 Design Level
A

Single Loop Controller

53SL6000 Micro-Mite
FEATURES
• High-Power, Extra-Compact Controller
• 8 Standard Control Templates
• Flexible Control Logic
• Easy setup - front panel or industry’s easiest configuration software
• Easy-Tune™ PID self-tuning algorithm
• Expandable I/O Options
• RS-232 & RS-485 Communication Options
• Easy to Install
• Rugged, NEMA 4 Packaging
• 2-Year Warranty
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXX X X X X X X X
Table 1 Part no Table 5 Design Level

53SL6 Micro-Mite™ Controller A
Table 6 Communication Options
0 120/240 Vac 50/60 Hz with Transmitter Supply
0 None
Table 3 Additional Analog Inputs
1 RS-485
0 None (base unit includes 2 current inputs, 1 current output)
2 RS-232
1 Universal Analog Input
Table 7 Enclosure
2 Dual Universal Analog Input
0 Standard Panel Mount
Table 4 Additional Digital I/O
0 None (base unit includes 2 digital inputs, 2 digital outputs)
3 Two Digital In + Two Digital Out

Process Control Station

Series 53MC5000
DESCRIPTION
The 53MC5000 is MicroMod Automation’s state-of-the art Process
Control Station designed to perform any process application, from
simple PID to the most complex control strategy. its sophisticated design
includes an embedded microprocessor Application Specific Integrated
Circuit (ASIC) and Surface Mount Technology, The 53MC5000 is the
comerstoned of the MICRO-DCI™ generation of modular control
systems.
FEATURES
• High Visibility CRT-type dot matrix operator display
• Family of configurable process graphic displays and standard
Controller Templates
• One, Two or Four loops of control
• Easy implementation using library of preconfigurable Flexible Control
Strategies (FCS)
• Configurable Control Interconnection Modules (F-CIM) for more
complex applications
• Easy-Tune™ PID self-tuning algorithm standard in all product version
• Standard MICRO-DCI™ Datalink communication port (RS-422/485)
• Standard RS-232C configuration port

Visual Application Designer/Configuration

Software
ViZapp
FEATURES
• Configuration Software for MOD 30ML and MODCELL
• For Creating, Editing, Downloading and Documenting
Mutliloop Processor Databases
• Graphic-Based, Efficient Engineering Tool with Logically
Structured, Integrated Sequence, Logic and Continuous
Control
• On-Line Debug and Loop Tuning
• Dynamic Displays with Process Symbols and Trend
Window for Easier Debug and Commissioning
• Automatic Population of OPC Server Tag Database
• On-Screen Documentation of Blocks, Connections and
User Notes
• Complete Database Documentation in Tabular and Graphic
Format
• OPC Servers Provides Modbus or ICN Communications to
Any OPC Client Software
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
Table 1 Part no Table 4 Software Key Type

VIZAPP Base Configuration Software 000 None (for adding to existing MicroMod key, e.g. Micro-PWC)
Table 2 Communications Interface PAR Parallel Port
DLX Deluxe - ICN and XModbus OPC Servers¹ USB USB (Universal Serial Bus)
ICN ICN OPC Server¹ Table 5 Extended Support Services (ESS)
XMB Extended Modbus OPC Server1¹ 000 None
NET Network (No OPC Server included)² ESS One Year Technical Support & Version Updates
Table 3 Functionality ¹ Includes custom downloading cable for MOD 30ML. MODCELL uses standard
DEV Development 4-wire cable.
² For remote PC connected to another PC which has a Modbus or ICN OPER
Server installed.

Process Multi Loop Controller

MOD 30ML™
FEATURES
• Multiple PID loops, math, logic and sequence control
• Highly visible, configurable operator display
• Flexible built-in and expansion I/O
• Dual independent communications networks: Modbus
serial, peer-to-peer, or Ethernet
• Redundant, removable NOVRAM backs up configuration
and current process parameters
• Multiple processors for maximum power & protection
• FM & CSA Class 1, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D
• Graphic-driven, function block configuration
HOW TO ORDER

XXXXXX XX X X X X
Table 1 Base Controller Table 4 Enclosure

1800RZ Standard bezel 0 Standard terminations
1801RZ Narrow bezel (Foxboro replacement version) 3 Standard terminations, NEMA 4 display
Table 2 Approvals 4 Standard terminations, NEMA 4 display, conformal coating
10 General Purpose 6 Ethernet termination
12 CE (European Community destinations only) 7 Ethernet termination, NEMA 4 display
21 FM/CSA Class 1 Division 2 A,B,C,D 8 Ethernet termination, NEMA 4 display, conformal coating
Table 3 Power Supply Table 5 Not Used
0 24V dc 0
1 85 to 250V ac
Table 6 Design Model
C

Controllers and Recorders • Paperless Recorders
ABB
Field Mountable Videographic Recorder

SM500F
DESCRIPTION
The SM500F is a field-mountable videographic recorder.
Its unique enclosure design enables wall-, pipe- or
panelmounting of the unit. Process data is displayed
clearly to the local operator through a variety of display
formats, including chart, bargraph and digital indicator
displays. Additionally, process data is logged securely to the
removable memory card. Ethernet communications provide
convenient remote monitoring of the process and access to
logged data.
FEATURES
• Up to 7 analog inputs
• Unique universal mounting capability
• Secure data recording
• 12 software recording channels
• Remote access and data retrieval
SPECIFICATIONS
• Install into the harshest of process environments
General features
• Choice of displays - TFT or monochrome
120mm (4.7 in) TFT Mono STN or 140mm
• Quick and easy setup Display
(5.7 in) TFT
Operator interface Tactile keys
Internal memory 64MB Flash
Memory card SD
Number of software 12
recording channels
Process groups 2
Process inputs
Universal analog / Digital 1 to 7
inputs
2 wire transmitter power 2 loops optional
supply
Additional I/O
Relays 1 standard, 2 optional
MODBUS RS485 Optional
Ethernet Optional
Advanced processing
Alarms 48 (4 per channel)
Totalisers 24 optional (2 per channel)
Advanced math / Logic Optional
21 CFR Part 11 compliant Standard
security
Batch recording Optional K
Physical attributes
IP Rating NEMA 4X & IP66
Panel cut out 138mm x 138mm (5.43 in x 5.43 in)
Power supply 85-265V ac or 10-36V dc
Overall size 144mm x 144mm x 79mm (5.67 in x 5.67 in
x 3.1 in)
Mounting options Panel, Wall or Pipe

Multipoint Videographic Recorder

SM3000
DESCRIPTION
The SM3000 Multipoint Videographic Recorder features
state-of-the-art data storage and security technologies. Up
to 36 universal analog inputs, communicated inputs or math
results can be recorded and displayed in a variety of operator
views. 8Mb of onboard flash memory, capable of storing 2.8
million samples of data, and the option of Compact Flash
removable memory cards provide extensive data storage
capabilities.
FEATURES
• Large clear display 31cm (12.1 in.)
• Unsurpassed environmental protection
• Multiple point recording
• Robust and convenient archive storage
• Intuitive user interface SPECIFICATIONS
• 10BaseT Ethernet communications as standard General features
• 21 CFR Part 11 compliant data security Display 310mm (12.1 in) TFT
Operator interface Tactile keys
Internal memory 8MB Flash
Memory card Compact Flash
Number of software 36
recording channels
Process groups 6
Process inputs
Universal analog / Digital Up to 36
inputs
2 wire transmitter power 2 loops standard 8 optional
supply
Additional I/O
Relays 24 optional
Digital inputs 24 optional
Digital outputs 24 optional
Analog outputs 8 optional
Ethernet Standard
Advanced processing
Totalisers 72 (2 per channel)
security
K Batch recording Optional

Physical attributes
Power supply 85-265V ac or 24V dc
Overall size 288mm x 288mm x 245mm (11.34 in x 11.34
in x 10 in)
Mounting options Panel

Paperless Recorder
ScreenMaster RVG200
DESCRIPTION
The ScreenMaster RVG200 is a secure, easy-to-use
paperless recorder. Up to 24 process signals can be
connected directly to the RVG200's analog inputs or
transferred to it via digital communications. All process
data, including alarm conditions, math calculation results
and totalizer values, are displayed clearly to the operator
and archived securely in an encrypted format for review
using the accompanying DataManager Pro PC application.
A touch screen featuring swipe gesture control provides fast
and intuitive operation. USB connections further simplify
operation by enabling peripherals (for example, a keyboard,
mouse or barcode scanner) to be attached.
FEATURES
• Encrypted data storage compliant to 21 CFR Part 11 SPECIFICATIONS
• Up to 2 GB of internal memory General features
• Touchscreen operation and configuration Display 140mm (5.7 in) TFT
• USB connections for keyboard and barcode scanner Operator interface Touchscreen
256MB Standard 2GB Optional
• Standard Ethernet communications provide remote data Internal memory
Memory card SD
access, process supervision and easy integration to
Number of software
control systems RS485 Modbus RTU master and slave recording channels
24
• Automatic data collection via Ethernet combined with Process groups 6

powerful data analysis using DataManager Pro USB Standard
• IP66 and NEMA 4X environmental protection Process inputs
• High accuracy and stability compliant to AMS2750 Universal analog / Digital 6, 12, 18 or 24
• Recording of up to 24 channels inputs
• Optional relays, mA outputs and Tx PSU 2 wire transmitter power 12 optional
• Math and logic,batch recording and flow totalization supply
Additional I/O
Relays 1 standard, 24 optional
Digital inputs 10 optional
Digital outputs 12 optional
Analog outputs 12 optional
MODBUS RS485 Optional
Ethernet Standard
Advanced processing
Totalisers 96 optional (2 per channel)
security
Batch recording Optional
Physical attributes K
Power supply Combined 100-to 240V ac and 24V dc
Overall size 144mm x144mm x 175mm 5.67 in x (5.67 in
x 6.9 in)
Mounting options Panel

Controllers and Recorders • Telemetry & SCADA Systems
Schneider Electric
RTUs
Water Pump Station Controller

FlowStation 110
DESCRIPTION
The FlowStation is an out-of-the-box Pump Controller
designed for waste and storm water lift stations and common
pump-up applications. With its built-in web server and user-
friendly configuration interface, the FlowStation can be set up
locally by field technicians or remotely by system engineers,
and as such is ideal for stand-alone installations or as part of
a greater SCADA network.
The product features comprehensive event and alarm

logging, remote notification of alarms via email or SMS
messaging, a hand-held (BlackBerryTM) interface, wireless
communication, and touch-screen options. Extended
flexibility is offered through optional TelePACE ladder
logic and C++ programming for any installation-specific
requirements that are not already accounted for with the
product’s built-in functionality.
FEATURES
• Controls 1, 2 or 3 pumps in lift station (pump-down) and
reservoir pumping (pump-up) applications
• Automatic pump alternation
• Peak and off-peak power pumping schemes
• Alarms via SMS or email for notification and
acknowledgement
• Web server or BlackBerry interface for remote
configuration, monitoring & control

Smart RTUs for Modbus Protocol

SCADAPack 100
DESCRIPTION
As the most compact model in the product line, the SCADAPack100
offers high performance with both analog inputs and digital I/O. The
product offers Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII and DNP3 as native
protocols and is remotely programmable, as a master or slave, through
a choice of flexible programming languages. As with all SCADAPack
products the SCADAPack100 is based on a multiprocessor architecture
with a co-processor used for handling the on-board input/output
channels.
FEATURES
• 4 analog inputs and 6 digital I/O
• One RS-232 and one configurable RS-232/485
• Optional integrated spread spectrum radio
• cCSAus and cULus Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Area Rating
• UL508 listed
• ATEX ll 3G and IECEx: Ex nA llC T4 per EN 60079-15, protection type
n (Zone 2), (Wireless versions pending)
• Single run custody transfer flow computer
Smart RTUs for Modbus Protocol

SCADAPack 32
DESCRIPTION
As the most powerful model in the line, the SCADAPack 32 offers high
performance, built-in Ethernet, 8 Mb of SDRAM and a wide range of
analog and digital I/O options. The product offers Modbus RTU, Modbus
ASCII and DNP3 as native protocols and is remotely programmable, as
a master or slave, through a choice of flexible programming languages.
As with all SCADAPack products the SCADAPack 32 is based on a
multiprocessor architecture with a co-processor used for handling on-
board input/output channels.
FEATURES
• 32 bit RISC processor. 8 Mb SDRAM. 4 Mb FLASH
• I/O capacity expandable to 512 digital-out, 512 digital-in, 128 analog-
in, 32 counters and 32 analog outputs using the I/O & Communication
modules.
• 3 RS-232, 1 RS-232/485, 1 Ethernet ports K
• cCSAus and cULus Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Area Rating
• UL508 listed
• ATEX ll 3G and IECEx: Ex nA llC T4 per EN 60079-15,protection type n
(Zone 2), (SCADAPack32P & 5606 IO board-based 24 V Dl/Solid State
Relay version only)
• 2, 4 or 10 run custody transfer flow computer

Smart RTUs for Modbus Protocol - Continued

SCADAPack 314
DESCRIPTION
The SCADAPack 314 is a purpose-built Smart RTU for
remote installation requiring advanced processing, low power
consumption, and serial communication. It features the same
powerful 32-bit processor, system architecture and power
management capabilities as the SCADAPack 334 and offers
two serial communication ports and a USB peripheral port for
connectivity; optional wireless and IO modules are available.
SCADAPack 314 offers Modbus and DNP3 protocols for
interoperability with a wide-range of SCADA hardware.
Programming is accomplished with Telepace Studio,
ISaGRAF (IEC 61131-3) and up to 32 independently-
executing C++ applications. Like all SCADAPack cSmart
RTUs, when integrated with host software, ClearSCADA,
remote configuration, application downloads and time
stamped data mapping directly into the historian are
available.
FEATURES
• Configurable power-saving modes (15 mW in sleep mode)
• 8 AIN, 2AOU (optional), 16DI, 10DO, 3 CTRIN (2 turbine)
• 2 or 4 run custody flow computer using Realflo
• Class 1, Division 2 Hazardous Area Rating
• CSA certified to UL508 standards
• UL508 listed
• ATEX ll 3G and IECEx: Ex nA llC T4 per EN 60079-15,
protection type n (Zone 2), (24 V Dl/Solid State Relay
version only, Wireless versions pending)

Smart RTUs for DNP3 & IEC60870-5 Protocols

SCADAPack 314E
DESCRIPTION
The SCADAPack 314E features 32-bit processing, serial
and USB communications, integrated power supply,
advanced power-management, and a wide range of digital
and analog I/O. This RTU communicates with remote
SCADA using open protocols: DNP3, IEC60870-5 and
Modbus. It may also be used as a data-concentrator, for
slave devices fitted with DNP3 or Modbus communication.
DNP3 (level 4-compliant) protocol comes standard with
optional Secure Authentication and/or AGA-12 Encryption
to improve message security for critical operations. FEATURES
IEC60870-5 protocol is KEMA-certified for both IEC60870- • 10/100BaseT Ethernet Port on select models
5-101 and IEC60870-5-104. • USB port for local configuration and maintenance
• Two serial ports (1x RS-232 and 1x RS-232/RS-485)
Logic can be programmed locally or remotely using the • Class 1, Division 2 Hazardous Area Rating
IEC61131-3 programming languages and is optionally • ATEX II 3G and IECEx certification
configurable directly from ClearSCADA host software. • UL508 listed
• 314E Flexible I/O: 3 Pulse counter inputs, 8 Analog
This Smart RTU has the same I/O offering as the Inputs 15 bit resolution, 16 Digital Inputs, 10 Relay or
SCADAPack 334E but without an Ethernet port and one Solid State Outputs, 2 Analog Outputs (optional)
less serial port. • I/O can be expanded using external modules
Smart RTUs for DNP3 & IEC60870-5 Protocols

SCADAPack 330E/334E
DESCRIPTION
The SCADAPack 330E and 334E feature 32-
bit processing, highspeed LAN, serial and USB
communications, integrated power supply, advanced
power-management, and a wide range of digital and
analog I/O in a cost-effective, compact Smart RTU. RTUs
communicates with remote SCADA using open protocols:
DNP3, IEC60870-5 and Modbus. It may also be used as
a data-concentrator, for slave devices fitted with DNP3
or Modbus communication. DNP3 (level 4-compliant)
protocol comes standard with optional Secure FEATURES
Authentication and/or AGA-12 Encryption to improve • 10/100BaseT Ethernet Port on select models
message security for critical operations. IEC60870-5 • USB port for local configuration and maintenance
protocol is KEMA-certified for both IEC60870-5-101 and • Three serial ports (1x RS-232 and 2x RS-232/RS-485)
IEC60870-5-104. Logic can be programmed locally or • Class 1, Division 2 Hazardous Area Rating K
remotely using the IEC61131-3 programming languages • ATEX II 3G and IECEx certification
and is optionally configurable directly from ClearSCADA • UL508 listed
host software. • 330E Flexible I/O: 3 Pulse counter inputs
• 334E Flexible I/O: 3 Pulse counter inputs, 8 Analog
Inputs 15 bit resolution, 16 Digital Inputs, 10 Relay or
Solid State Outputs, 2 Analog Outputs (optional)
• I/O can be expanded using external modules*

Schneider Electric
Radios
License-Free Remote Data Radios

Trio J-Series, Ethernet & Serial
DESCRIPTION
The Trio J-Series frequency-hopping Ethernet radio sets
the standard for industrial Ethernet communications
in the license-free 900 MHz and 2.4 GHz ISM bands.
With maximum range and virtually unlimited system
coverage due to its unique LinkXtend™ network bridging
and KwikStream™ high speed repeater capabilities, the
industrial strength JSeries is ideally suited for the most
demanding point-to-multipoint and point-to-point wireless
SCADA and Telemetry applications. The highly versatile
J-Series also offers dual Ethernet ports and remote
diagnostics compatibility, as well as SmartPath™, a
feature that identifies then rectifies a problem within the
network with minimal interruption to the SCADA data flow.
FEATURES
• Configurable operational profiles: access point, remote,
bridge, repeater
• KwikStream™ high-speed single radio repeater mode
• Dual antenna LinkXtend™ technology increases usable
range
• Repeater and Bridge units support locally connected
user devices
• ChannelShare™ collision avoidance for unsolicited
remote transmissions allowing simultaneous polling and
spontaneous reporting
• SmartPath™ Technology for enhanced redundancy in
network configuration
SPECIFICATIONS
• 900 MHz: 512 kbps high speed over-air data rate or 256
kpbs for longer range.
• 2.4 GHz: 256 kbps for longer range.
• Dual Independent Ethernet ports (Auto MDI/MIDX)
• SNMP Access to Radio Diagnostics
• Telnet and Serial console based Management Interface
• 10-30 V DC power supply (13.8 V DC nominal)
• Dual industry-standard TNC antenna connectors
• Class 1, Div 2, Groups A, B, C & D Hazardous Approval
• 2.4 GHz : ATEX II 3G Ex nA IIC T4
K

License-Free Remote Data Radios

Trio K-Series, Serial
DESCRIPTION
Trio K-Series frequency-hopping, spread-spectrum data
radios set the standard for reliable and secure serial
data communication in the license-free 900 MHz and 2.4
GHz ISM bands. With unique features like LinkXtend™
for single radio store-and-forward, and ChannelShare™
collision-avoidance for support of spontaneous SCADA
messages, KSeries radios provide the flexibility to allow
implementation of even the most complex wireless
solutions with virtually unlimited expansion capability.
FEATURES
• Configurable operational profiles: access point, remote,
bridge, repeater
• KwikStream™ high-speed single radio repeater mode
• Dual antenna LinkXtend™ technology increases usable
range
• Repeater and Bridge units support locally connected
user devices
• ChannelShare™ collision avoidance for unsolicited
remote transmissions allowing simultaneous polling and
spontaneous reporting
• SmartPath™ Technology for enhanced redundancy in
network configuration
SPECIFICATIONS
• 256 kbps high speed over-air data rate (can be reduced
to 128 k, 64 k or 32 k for longer range)
• Advanced error free data delivery with CRC plus select-
able FEC and ARQ.
• Suitable for most industry standard data protocols. e.g.
Modbus, DNP3, IEC870-5-101, etc.
• MultiStream™ simultaneous data stream delivery allows
for multiple vendor devices/protocols to be transported
on the one radio network - compatible with Trio E-Series
and M-Series
• Flexible data stream routing providing optimum radio
channel efficiency
• Operating temperature range of -40 to 70ºC (-40 to +185
ºF)
• 900 MHz: Class 1, Div 2, Groups A, B, C & D Hazardous K
Approval
• 2.4 GHz : ATEX II 3G Ex nA IIC T4

Licensed Remote Data Radios

Trio ER45e, Ethernet & Serial
DESCRIPTION
Trio ER45e advanced digital data radios provide both
Ethernet and serial communications for the most complex
and demanding applications in Point-to-Point and Point-to-
Multipoint (Multiple Address Radio) Telemetry and remote
SCADA systems.
Available in Ethernet+serial (ER45e) versions, the highly

successful data radio is equally suitable for use with the
latest SCADA technology as it is for providing a smooth
transition from serial-based infrastructure to IP/Ethernet.
FEATURES
• Compatible with most industry-standard data protocols,
e.g. Modbus, DNP3, IEC870, SEL mirrored bits, etc.
• Multistream™ simultaneous data streams allow for
multiple vendor devices/protocols to be transported on
the one radio network
• Internal repeater operation – single radio store and
forward
• Channelshare™ unique integrated C/DSMA collision
avoidance technology permits simultaneous polling and
spontaneous alarm reporting operation in the same
system
SPECIFICATIONS
• Licensed 370-520 MHz band operation
• Ethernet/Serial models
• Up to 19,200 bps over-air data rates
• Superior receiver sensitivity
• 128-bit AES encryption
• Half and Full Duplex remote variants
• Base and hot-swappable standby base station variants
• Selectable 300 – 57.6k bps asynchronous RS-232 inter-
faces
• Operating Temperature Range: -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to
+140°F)
• Power Supply: 13.8 V DC nominal (11-16 V DC)


Trio ER450, Serial
DESCRIPTION
Trio ER450 advanced digital data radios provide serial
communications for the most complex and demanding
applications in Point-to-Point and Point-to- Multipoint
(Multiple Address Radio) Telemetry and remote SCADA
systems.
FEATURES
forward
system
SPECIFICATIONS
• Licensed 370-520 MHz band operation
• Serial only models
• Up to 19,200 bps over-air data rates
• Superior receiver sensitivity
• 128-bit AES encryption
• Half and Full Duplex remote variants
• Base and hot-swappable standby base station variants
• Selectable 300 – 57.6k bps asynchronous RS-232 inter-
faces
• Independent serial ports
• Operating Temperature Range: -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to
+140°F)
• Power Supply: 13.8 V DC nominal (11-16 V DC)


Trio MR450, Serial
DESCRIPTION
Trio MR450 professional, compact digital data
radios provide cost effective and dependable serial
communications in Point-to-Point and Point-to-Multipoint
(Multiple Address Radio) Telemetry and remote SCADA
systems, particularly in demanding water and electricity
utility applications.
FEATURES
forward
system
SPECIFICATIONS
• 395-470 MHz (M-Band) or 450-520 MHz (H-Band)
• Software selectable Tx and Rx frequencies
• Flexible data stream routing providing optimum radio
channel efficiency
• Operating temperature range of -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to
+140°F)

Wireless Base Radio

Accutech BR10
DESCRIPTION
At the heart of any Accutech wireless instrument network is the BR10
wireless base radio. This device automatically communicates with all
deployed instrumentation field units attached to it in a local area star
network and makes the field data available to an existing control system
through a local serial Modbus interface. A third-party Modbus TCP/IP
converter can also be employed to add Ethernet connectivity. One base
radio can communicate with up to a maximum 100 field units, (40 units
on 869MHz version). Multiple base radios can be used to accommodate
additional field units. With the capability to scale up to as many as 256
wireless instrumentation LANs, Accutech easily accommodates even the
most aggressive expansion plans.
FEATURES
• Accutech Manager, WindowsTM-based GUI software, providing
network-wide fault and performance-management features and field
unit configuration capabilities
• 902MHz - 928MHz band (FCC/IC)
• Up to 3000ft (~1000m) typical range with obstructions
• The RF module in each radio is individually tested and calibrated over
the full temperature range to ensure reliable wireless operation
• Transmit Power: +13dBm
• Receive Sensitivity: -113dBm
• Adjacent Channel Rejection: 48dBc
• Alternate Channel Rejection: 62dBc
• RS-485 digital communications with conversion to RS-232 or USB for
interface with PC or server and Accutech Manager
• Serial Modbus RTU over RS-485
• Modbus TCP over Ethernet (with optional third-party converter)
• Contains extensive self-checking software and hardware that
continuously monitors operation
• Any sensor or device parameter that is out of spec is identified and
reported
SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Ambient Environment Rated for industrial use: -40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C)
Materials of Construction Baked enamel explosion-proof, weather-proof and corrosion-proof housing
Operating Shock and Vibration Certified per IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration) and 2-27 (shock)
Electromagnetic Compatibility Operates within specification in fields from 80 to 1,000MHz with field strengths to 30V/m

Wireless Base Radio

Accutech BR20
DESCRIPTION
The Accutech BR20 base radio bridges the price and performance
gap by providing both wireless data links to Accutech field units in its
standard configuration and longhaul links to centralised data collection
sites with an optional Trio K-Series data radio; all within a robust, DIN-
rail mounted metal enclosure. Secure, license-free, spread-spectrum
technology is used throughout with a full suite of hardware options and
configuration and diagnostics tools available to minimise maintenance
costs and optimise operation. Accutech networks are highly scalable
with the possibility of 100 field units per base radio and 256 base radios
per installation.
FEATURES
• Accutech Manager, WindowsTM-based GUI software, providing
network-wide fault and performance-management features and field
unit configuration capabilities
• 902MHz - 928MHz band (FCC/IC)
• Up to 3000ft (~1000m) typical range with obstructions
• The RF module in each radio is individually tested and calibrated over
the full temperature range to ensure reliable wireless operation
• RS-485 digital communications with conversion to RS-232 or USB for
interface with PC or server and Accutech Manager
• Serial Modbus RTU over RS-485
• Modbus RTU in TCP or UDP (with optional third-party converter)
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage 11 to 30VDC, 30VDC maximum
13.8VDC, 24VDC nominal
Input Current 30mA maximum (at 13.8VDC nominal)
Input Power 0.5W maximum (11 to 30VDC)
Serial Data Rate 4,800, 19,200 or 76,800bps
Packaging Corrosion-resistant zinc plated steel with black enamel paint
Terminations 5-pole removable terminal block, 12-22AWG, 15A contacts
8-pole RJ-45 style jacks
Environment 5% RH to 95% RH, non-condensing
-40ºC to 70ºC (-40ºF to 158ºF) operation
-40ºC to 85ºC (-40ºF to 185ºF) storag

Section Cover page
Growing Your Business Since 1954
Rawson has offered instrumentation and control valves for every industry
imaginable since 1954. Our 60 years of experience has allowed us to assemble
products that cover a wide range of applications from Refining, Petro-Chemical,
Power, Pulp and Paper, and Oil & Gas. With eighteen stocking branch locations
and highly trained technical staff throughout the southeastern states, we continue
to grow thanks to our loyal customers.
Main Index
Analytical Instrumentation
Analyzers
ABB
Single and Dual Input Analyzer for Conductivity, pH, ORP and Dissolved Oxygen............846
Dissolved Oxygen Sensor Systems....................................................................................848
Silica Analyzer.....................................................................................................................850
845
Analytical Instrumentation • Analyzers
ABB
Single and Dual Input Analyzer for Conductivity,

pH, ORP and Dissolved Oxygen
AX400 Series
DESCRIPTION
The AX400 Series consists of single input and dual
input analyzers designed for continuous monitoring
and control of low and high level conductivity, pH, ORP
and dissolved oxygen. All versions are supplied with
two, fully-isolated current outputs as standard that
can be assigned to the measured parameter, sample
temperature or any appropriate calculated variables.
Three programmable relay set points are available which
can also be assigned as required. Innovative features
such as a power saving display and a diagnostic current
output option all contribute to a low cost of ownership.
Backlit display shows both the measured parameter(s)
and, on a separate 16-character display line, diagnostic
and computed information. On dual-input analyzers both
measured parameters are displayed simultaneously. All
models are available in wall-/pipe-mount or panel-mount
versions and can be used with either one or two sensors,
each with a temperature input channel. When used with
two sensors, readings can be compared to produce a CONFIGURATIONS
range of extrapolated values. • Combination Models: The AX416, AX436 and AX456
FEATURES measure conductivity and pH with the same analyzer.
• Three alarms and two fully isolated current outputs The option board provides the capability to retransmit
• Add-on option board provides a total of five alarm relays pH, conductivity and both sample temperatures. The
and four current outputs AX468 measures pH with dissolved oxygen and is meant
• ABB Plug-and-Produce software automatically to operate with the ABB 9408 dissolved oxygen system.
reconfigures the analyzer if an option board is added The AX418 and AX438 measure conductivity and
later dissolved oxygen with the same analyzer.
• Innovative power saving display and a diagnostic current • AX450 and AX455: Designed to meet United States
output option contribute to low cost of ownership Pharmacopoeia (USP 645) requirements for continuous
• Backlit display shows measured parameters and monitoring and control of low level conductivity.
diagnostic and computed information • AX410, AX430, AX460, AX450 and AX480: Single input
• Operation and programming are performed using five analyzers which incorporate three-term PID Control,
keys on the front panel offering three modes of sophisticated control-analog,
• Programmed functions are protected from unauthorized pulse length (time proportional) and pulse frequency.
alteration with security code Analyzer can be operated in direct- or reverse-acting
• Real time clock and service log-book for historical data mode, depending upon the application.
• 85 to 265V AC operation standard, 24V AC or 12 to 30V • AX480 and AX488: Enable continuous measurements of
DC supply available one or two dissolved oxygen points with simultaneous
local display and retransmission. AX48x is used with
9408 Series immersion, submersion and self-cleaning
floating-ball sensors providing measurements with
exceptional accuracy and performance. The AX480
and AX488 are meant to operate with the ABB 9408
L dissolved oxygen system.
• AX460, AX466, AX416, AX480 and AX488 feature an
integral water/chemical sensor cleaner control.

Single and Dual Input Analyzer for Conductivity,

pH, ORP and Dissolved Oxygen - Continued
HOW TO ORDER

XXX X X X X X X X
Table 1 Series Table 5 Advanced Functions & Communications

AX4 Single and Dual Input Analyzers 0 Basic (2 current outputs + 3 relays)
Table 2 First Process Variable (PV1) 1 Advanced (4 current outputs + 5 relays + logbook)
1 Conductivity 0 to 10,000µS cm-¹ for 2-electrode sensors 2 Profibus DP, basic (2 current outputs + 3 relays)**
3 Conductivity 0 to 1,999mS cm ¹ for 4 electrode sensors
-
3 Profibus DP, advanced (4 current outputs + 5 relays + logbook)**
5 Conductivity USP<645> for 2-electrode sensors Table 6 Power Supply
6 pH/Redox (ORP) 0 100 to 240 V AC 50 to 60 Hz
8 Dissolved Oxygen 1 12 to 30 V DC
Table 3 Second Process Variable (PV2)* Table 7 Reserved
0 No second process variable – select for PID control of PV1 0 Reserved
1 Conductivity 0 to 10,000µS cm⁻¹ for 2-electrode sensors Table 8 Manual
3 Conductivity 0 to 1,999mS cm⁻¹ for 4-electrode sensors** 1 English
5 Conductivity USP<645> for 2-electrode sensors 2 French
6 pH/Redox (ORP) 3 Italian
8 Dissolved Oxygen 4 German
Table 4 Enclosure Types 5 Spanish
Wall-mount IP65, General * When ordering units with a second process variable (PV2) the code digit for PV2
in the order code number must be equal to, or greater than, the code digit for PV1,
1 Wall-mount – cable glands fitted
e.g.AX416 permissible, AX461 not permissible.
2 Pipe-mount ** Profibus DP not available in panel-mount housing when 0 to 1,999mS/cm is
selected as Second process Variable (PV2).
Wall-mount IP65, North American
*** AX415,AX435 and AX458 do not exist.
6 Wall-mount
7 Pipe-mount
Panel-mount, Universal
5 Panel-mount**

Dissolved Oxygen Sensor Systems

9408 Series
DESCRIPTION
AX480, AX488 and AX468 dissolved oxygen analyzers are
designed specifically to operate with the industry-proven,
anti-fouling 9408 Series sensors. Reliable monitoring of
dissolved oxygen levels in waste treatment tanks can
be hampered by sensor fouling with rags or other large
solids. 9408 sensors can be supplied with anti-fouling,
floating ball systems making rags and solids difficult to
lodge. In addition, all 9408 systems can be equipped
with a powerful jet-wash facility for removal of tough
deposits. Each sensor system includes an 8012-170
sensor capsule. This is mounted in a support tube with
an integral temperature sensor for automatic temperature
9408 Dip Immersion Probe
compensation and measurement. Maintenance simply
involves a quick plug-in of a replacement capsule. Lifetime
is typically 9 to 12 months and in many cases longer.
FEATURES
• Reduced sensor fouling: Large diameter, floating ball
repels rags and coating Optional jet-wash system for
stubborn deposits. 9408 Submersion Sensor
• Low maintenance, long-life sensor: No changing of
electrolyte or membrane and Simple replacement, plug-
in cartridge.
• Zero calibration is not essential and simple, single-point
air calibration.
• Comprehensive mounting methods: Floating ball,
immersion, submersion and flow-through systems
available.
9408 Floating Ball System 9408 Flow-through

Cartridge System

Dissolved Oxygen Sensor Systems - Continued

FLOATING BALL, IMMERSION OR SUBMERSIBLE FLOW-THROUGH CARTRIDGE
SENSOR SYSTEM SENSOR SYSTEM

XXXX XX XX XXXX XX XX XX X
Table 1 Series Table 1 Series

9408 9408 Sensor Systems 9408 9408 Sensor Systems
Table 2 System Type Table 2
70 Floating ball system – complete 8 Flow-through Cartridge
75 Floating ball kit (metric) support arm supplied by user Table 3 Process Connection
76 Floating ball kit (imperial) support arm supplied by user 0 1 in BSP
71 Immersion system length 1 m (3.3 ft) 1 1/2 in BSP
72 Immersion system length 2 m (6.6 ft) 2 1 in NPT
73 Immersion system length 3 m (10 ft) 3 1/2 in NPT
60 Submersible System Supplied with 8 m (26 ft) of fixed cable Table 4 Cable Length
Table 3 Jet Wash 0 1 m (3.3 ft)
0 Without cleaning 1 3 m (10 ft)
2 Jet wash 2 5 m (15 ft)
3 10 m (32 ft)
4 20 m (64 ft)
Table 5 Jet Wash
0 Without cleaning
2 Jet wash

Silica Analyzer
Navigator 600 Silica
DESCRIPTION
The Navigator 600 Silica is an on-line analyzer, designed to
provide continuous monitoring of silica concentration utilizing
a standard colorimetric analysis principle. Utilizing powerful
electronics, advanced features such as automatic calibration,
continuous sample analysis and programmable multi-stream
switching ensure accurate and simple measurement of silica.
Process data, as well as the content of alarm and audit
logs, can be saved to a removable SD card in binary and
comma-delimited formats for record keeping and analysis
using ABB’s DataManager data analysis software package.
A very low cost of ownership has been achieved by reducing
the reagent consumption and simplifying the maintenance
requirements. The size of the instrument has been reduced
to a compact, ergonomically-designed, wall-mounted case
thus providing a very small footprint.
FEATURES
• True auto-zero compensates for sample color, turbidity and
background silica in reagents
• Up to 90 % lower reagent consumption than competitors'
analyzers
• Temperature-controlled reaction and measurement section
for optimum response
• 4 dedicated relays, 6 user-programmable relays and 6
current outputs as standard
• Profibus DP V1.0 is available as an option
• Data file access via FTP and transferring of memory/
memory card files to remote desktop or drive
• Automatically back up data files to PC or network drive for
long term storage
• Web pages display detailed information on stream values,
reagent and solution levels, measurement status, audit and
alarm logs
• Log operator messages, modify analyzer configurations
and set analyzer’s clock or sync the clocks of multiple
analyzers via the web server
• Via built in SMTP client, email notifications triggered by
alarms or critical events can be sent to multiple recipients
• Program emails with current measurement status or other
parameters
• Labor-saving: 5 minute annual maintenance and up to 3
months unattended operation
• Automatic cleaning, calibration and zero deliver high
accuracy measurements
• Predictive alarms and sensors notify user when
L replacement is necessary
• Designed to be easily upgradeable in the field to two, four
or six streams

Silica Analyzer - Continued

HOW TO ORDER

X X X X X X X X X
Table 1 Silica Analyzer Table 6 Power Supply

4 AW6 0 110 ... 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
1 AW6 1 18 ... 36 V DC
Table 2 Range Table 7 Reserved
5 0 ... 5000 ppb 9 Build
Table 3 Number of Streams Table 8 Manual
1 1 – Measuring 1 stream 1 English
2 2 – Measuring 2 streams 2 French
4 4 – Measuring 3 or 4 streams 3 Italian
6 6 – Measuring 5 or 6 streams 4 German
Table 4 Communications 5 Spanish
0 None Table 9 Certification
1 Profibus DP. V.1 0 None
Table 5 Enclosure 1 Certificate of calibration
0 Standard 2 cULus – pending
1 Standard + reagent shelves Supplied with analyzer: * Reagent and calibration containers

Terms and Conditions
Terms: Rawson, Inc, Industrial Controls Distributors Delivery: All Equipment is sold F.O.B. manufacturing
LLC, or their subsidiaries (“Seller”) sells its offerings - or shipping location unless otherwise specified. Seller
equipment, software, material and services (collectively, the assumes no liability for losses arising from inaccurate
“Equipment”) to business customers as well as individuals. estimates, and is permitted to make partial shipments
By placing an order, customers accept and agree to against this Contract. In the event Customer suspends
Rawson, Inc.’s terms and conditions, the full text of which delivery of an order, Seller reserves the right to charge a
can be found on www.rawsonlp.com. monthly storage fee equal to 2% of the value of suspended
items.
Taxes: Customers are responsible for payment of all
applicable taxes, or in lieu of payment, may issue tax Title and Risk of Loss: Title and risk of loss or damage
exemption certificates in accordance with the appropriate to or destruction of the Equipment shall pass to Customer
taxing authority. from the earlier of the time that Seller delivers such
Equipment to the carrier or to Customer or Customer’s
Payment Terms: Subject to the approval of Seller’s Credit agent. Any claims for loss or damage after risk of loss
Department, and unless otherwise agreed to in writing, has passed to Customer shall be filed with the carrier.
terms of payment are net cash thirty (30) days following Customer shall give written notice to Seller of any claim for
the date of invoice, or by letter of credit paid upon submittal shortage or error in Equipment shipped within five (5) days
of shipping documents. Monthly Service Charges will be of shipment date of Equipment.
applied on invoices not paid on or before the due date.
Customer shall give written notice to Seller for any claim Force Majeure: Seller will not be liable or held responsible
of error in charges within ten (10) days of shipment date of for any delays or losses resulting directly or indirectly from
Equipment. Acts of God, severe weather conditions, labor disputes,
governmental actions, inability to obtain permits, licenses,
Returns: Product returns, if allowed, must be made within raw materials or shipments of product, war, riots, shortages
sixty (60) days from the ship date of an item. Customer and any other circumstances or causes beyond Seller’s
may request to return Equipment by contacting its account reasonable control. If such a delay occurs, delivery or
salesperson to request a return authorization. Unauthorized performance shall be extended for a period equal to the
returns are subject to refusal at Seller’s facility or may be time lost by reason of delay.
returned freight collect to the shipping point. Any return
shipment must be made freight prepaid unless Seller has Territorial Restrictions: Not all products available in all
expressly authorized Customer in writing to ship such areas. Due to our agreements with our manufacturers,
Equipment to Seller at Seller’s expense. All authorized certain products have territorial restrictions.
returns of Equipment are subject to Seller’s standard
restocking charges. Non-stock items are subject to higher Published Product Information: Seller will use
restocking charges. All material returned for credit must be reasonable efforts to include accurate, complete and up-
in new and resalable condition, in original packaging, and is to-date information within this catalog, but Seller makes
subject to inspection prior to the issuance of any credit. no warranties or representations as to its accuracy,
completeness or frequency that it is updated. All users
Export Compliance: The products, items, technology or agree that access to this catalog is at their own risk, and
software covered by a quotation/order may be subject to that neither Seller nor any party involved in creating or
various laws including U.S. and foreign export controls. delivering this catalog shall be liable for damages of any
Seller is committed to complying with all relevant export kind, including without limitation, any special, direct or
laws. Customer is responsible for applying for export indirect, incidental, or consequential or punitive damages
licenses, if required, based on end user or country of (even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such
ultimate destination. damages) arising out of access to, or use of the information
contained on within this catalog, or any errors or omissions,
Security Interest: Seller shall retain a security interest in misprints, out-of-date information, technical inaccuracies,
all Equipment sold to Customer until Seller receives full typographical or other errors appearing in this catalog. This
payment of all amounts due and owing. Seller shall have limitation includes damages to, or for any viruses that may
the right to file any and all documents and take any action it infect your computer equipment.
deems necessary to fully establish protection of its security
interest in the Equipment; however, the failure of Seller to Product Compliance, Suitability and Modifications:
file any such document shall not in any way act as a waiver Seller does not guarantee compliance or suitability of
of Seller’s right to such security interest. the products it sells with any laws, codes or regulations,
nor does seller accept responsibility for construction, defect or failure of the Equipment or any act, omission,
installation, and/or use of product. Customer is solely error or delay in the performance, or nonperformance
responsible for reliance on or use of any product of Seller’s obligations and duties under these Terms. To
information, and for use or application of any product. the extent, if any, that Seller, its employees, agents or
Seller reserves the right to modify the design of any “controlling persons” shall have any liability under these
Equipment without obligations, and Seller is not obligated Terms, Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be set forth
to so modify Equipment previously or subsequently sold. in the warranty documents. CUSTOMER WAIVES ALL
CLAIMS FOR SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY
Assignment: Customer shall not (by operation of law or OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES AND ALL CLAIMS REGARDING
otherwise) assign its rights or delineate its performance LOSS OF REVENUE, INCOME, PROFIT AND USE OR
hereunder without the prior written consent of Seller, and DAMAGES, WHETHER SAME BE DIRECT, INDIRECT,
any attempted assignment or delineation by Customer INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL.
without such consent shall be voided.
A full statement of Rawson, Inc.’s terms and conditions
Services: Services rendered by Seller, whether with or is available on www.rawsonlp.com and is incorporated
without charge, are only technical or advisory in nature and by reference.
are merely incidental to the sale of the Equipment. When
any such services are rendered, Customer will retain full
responsibility for and full control, custody and supervision
of the Equipment and the installation, selection of material
thereof, and a representative of Customer shall be present
with full authority to direct operations.
LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER

Except for the warranties applicable to a specific category
of Equipment, which are set forth separately, SELLER
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES AND MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, WHETHER WRITTEN OR
ORAL, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND/OR ANY
OTHER MATTER WITH RESPECT TO ANY OF THE
EQUIPMENT. The warranties made are in lieu of any other
warranty, express or implied, and can be amended only by
a written instrument signed by officer of Seller. Seller shall
bear no liability or responsibility for Customer’s incorrect
assembly, installation or improper use of the Equipment or
Customer’s failure to maintain or inspect the Equipment.
Seller shall not be liable for, and Customer assumes all
liability for, all injury and property damage connected
with the handling, transportation, or further manufacture,
fabrication, modification, assembly, or processing of the
Equipment.
WAIVERS AND RELEASES

Except as provided in the warranty document and for
the willful misconduct or gross negligence of Seller, its
employees or agents, Customer hereby releases Seller,
its employees, agents and “controlling persons” (within
the meaning of section 20 (a) of the Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, as amended) from all liabilities, claims, costs,
expenses, losses and damages of any and every kind
arising out of or resulting, directly or indirectly, from any
An Company
Technical Expertise For sales and technical support, call

Rawson’s products are used in all aspects of industrial
applications. Our technical knowledge will get you the Amarillo, TX Houston, TX
right product for your specific requirements. (806) 352-1492 (713) 684-1400
Atlanta, GA Lafayette, LA
Outstanding Inventory (678) 684-0290 (337) 233-2255
With over $12,000,000 in product inventory, Rawson
strives to have the products you need available when Austin, TX Lake Charles, LA
you want them. Vendor managed inventory and (512) 929-9600 (337) 882-8095
consignment programs are also available for any
customer with those requirements. Baton Rouge, LA Longview, TX
(225) 755-0826 (903) 757-0300
Product Customization Beaumont, TX Mexico
Rawson is capable of combining many of our standard (409) 842-1088 (+52) 555-260-4057
products into assemblies that enhance the overall
capabilities of the individual components. Based upon Corpus Christi, TX Odessa, TX
your specific needs, Rawson can build customized (361) 887-0001 (432) 337-6668
solutions that meet your expectations.
Daphne, AL Plano, TX
(251) 626-1929 (972) 423-5255
Expert Training
Rawson can provide technical training on all the Deer Park, TX Port Lavaca, TX
products we represent. From simple items like (713) 613-4600 (361) 552-7525
instrumentation tube bending to sophisticated control
valve sizing and selection, Rawson has hundreds of Freeport, TX Tulsa, OK
years of experience to bring to our customer training (979) 233-6381 (918) 665-6044
sessions.
Toll Free (800) 688-8126

Catalogo 2015

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Catalogo 2015

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Catalog

ProduCt Catalog Specialty Equipment

Filters and Regulators

For sales and technical support, call Analytical

Dear Valued Customer,

Your One Stop Supplier

1892 1941 1998 2010

1954 2009 2012

Added Value Industries Rawson Serves

Training, Customer Education &

Oil & Gas Power Generation

Semiconductor Pharmaceutical Pulp & Paper

17 Stocking & Distribution Locations

Technical Assistance & Guidance

Premier Products Energy Optimization 569

Outstanding Service Capabilities

Valves, Actuators And Accessories

Continued on next page

Valves, Actuators And Accessories

Section Table of Contents

Brass Ball 3000# Oilfield Bolted Body Force BU

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 7

Section Table of Contents

8 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

Ball Valves - Continued A

Table 1 Valve Type Table 5 Trim Material

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 9

Section Table of Contents

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

10 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

Flanged, Full Port Ball Valves A

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 11

Section Table of Contents

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

12 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

Flanged, Reduced Port Ball Valves A

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 13

Section Table of Contents

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

14 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

2 Piece Full Port NPT Ball Valves A

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 15

Section Table of Contents

16 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

3 Piece Full Port Ball Valves A

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 17

Section Table of Contents

*Materials for Fire Safe Models

18 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

3 Piece Full Port Ball Valves A

RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126 19

Section Table of Contents

20 RAWSON - An ERIKS Company • www.rawsonlp.com • 800-688-8126

Section Table of Contents

3 Piece Full Port Ball Valves A